food processing operations modeling design and analysis, second edition (food science and...
TRANSCRIPT
FOODPROCESSINGOPERATIONSMODELING
S E C O N D E D I T I O N
Design and Analysis
55534_C000.indd i55534_C000.indd i 10/22/08 8:11:28 AM10/22/08 8:11:28 AM
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
CRC Press is an imprint of theTaylor & Francis Group, an informa business
Boca Raton London New York
FOODPROCESSINGOPERATIONSMODELING
S E C O N D E D I T I O N
Design and Analysis
ED ITED BY
Soojin JunJoseph M. Irudayaraj
55534_C000.indd iii55534_C000.indd iii 10/22/08 8:11:30 AM10/22/08 8:11:30 AM
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
CRC PressTaylor & Francis Group6000 Broken Sound Parkway NW, Suite 300Boca Raton, FL 33487-2742
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC CRC Press is an imprint of Taylor & Francis Group, an Informa business
No claim to original U.S. Government worksPrinted in the United States of America on acid-free paper10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
International Standard Book Number-13: 978-1-4200-5553-5 (Hardcover)
This book contains information obtained from authentic and highly regarded sources. Reasonable efforts have been made to publish reliable data and information, but the author and publisher can-not assume responsibility for the validity of all materials or the consequences of their use. The authors and publishers have attempted to trace the copyright holders of all material reproduced in this publication and apologize to copyright holders if permission to publish in this form has not been obtained. If any copyright material has not been acknowledged please write and let us know so we may rectify in any future reprint.
Except as permitted under U.S. Copyright Law, no part of this book may be reprinted, reproduced, transmitted, or utilized in any form by any electronic, mechanical, or other means, now known or
storage or retrieval system, without written permission from the publishers.
For permission to photocopy or use material electronically from this work, please access www.copy-right.com (http://www.copyright.com/) or contact the Copyright Clearance Center, Inc. (CCC), 222
vides licenses and registration for a variety of users. For organizations that have been granted a photocopy license by the CCC, a separate system of payment has been arranged.
Trademark Notice: Product or corporate names may be trademarks or registered trademarks, and
Visit the Taylor & Francis Web site athttp://www.taylorandfrancis.com
and the CRC Press Web site athttp://www.crcpress.com
55534_C000.indd iv55534_C000.indd iv 10/22/08 8:11:31 AM10/22/08 8:11:31 AM
hereafter invented, including photocopying, microfilming, and recording, or in any information
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, 978-750-8400. CCC is a not-for-profit organization that pro-
are used only for identification and explanation without intent to infringe.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
v
Table of ContentsPreface .....................................................................................................................vii
Editors ......................................................................................................................ix
Contributors ............................................................................................................xi
Chapter 1 Introduction to Modeling and Numerical Simulation ..........................1
K.P. Sandeep, Joseph Irudayaraj, and Soojin Jun
Chapter 2 Aseptic Processing of Liquid and Particulate Foods .......................... 13
K.P. Sandeep and Virendra M. Puri
Chapter 3 Modeling Moisture Diffusion in Food Grains during Adsorption ..... 53
Kasiviswanathan Muthukumarappan and S. Gunasekaran
Chapter 4 Computer Simulation of Radio Frequency Heating ........................... 81
Yifen Wang and Jian Wang
Chapter 5 Infrared Radiation for Food Processing ........................................... 113
Kathiravan Krishnamurthy, Harpreet Kaur Khurana, Soojin Jun, Joseph Irudayaraj, and Ali Demirci
Chapter 6 Modeling of Ohmic Heating of Foods .............................................. 143
Soojin Jun and Sudhir Sastry
Chapter 7 Hydrostatic Pressure Processing of Foods ....................................... 173
J. Antonio Torres and Gonzalo Velazquez
Chapter 8 Pulsed Electric Field (PEF) Processing and Modeling .................... 213
Si-Quan Li
Chapter 9 Fouling Models for Heat Exchangers ............................................... 235
Sundar Balsubramanian, Virendra M. Puri, and Soojin Jun
55534_C000toc.indd v55534_C000toc.indd v 10/22/08 8:13:00 AM10/22/08 8:13:00 AM
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
vi Table of Contents
Chapter 10 Ozone Treatment of Food Materials ............................................... 263
Kasiviswanathan Muthukumarappan, Colm P. O’Donnell, and Patrick J. Cullen
Chapter 11 UV Pasteurization of Food Materials ............................................. 281
Kathiravan Krishnamurthy, Joseph Irudayaraj, Ali Demirci, and Wade Yang
Chapter 12 Stochastic Finite Element Analysis of
Thermal Food Processes.................................................................303
Bart M. Nicolaï, Nico Scheerlinck, Pieter Verboven, and Josse De Baerdemaeker
55534_C000toc.indd vi55534_C000toc.indd vi 10/22/08 8:13:01 AM10/22/08 8:13:01 AM
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
vii
PrefaceThe second edition of Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis has its unique value far beyond an extension of the previous edition. The key focus of
the second edition is to address novel food processing technologies that are of immense
and infusion of new processes and instrumentation, tomorrow’s consumers will have
access to safe, nutritious, high-quality products via novel food processing technologies.
and pulsed ultraviolet treatments are representative novel techniques to alternate the
traditional food processing methods. The fundamental principles and associated
numerical approaches are some of the key elements addressed in this edition.
Chapter 7 on HPP includes modeling studies to describe microbial kinetics and
Chapter 8, PEF processing is a non-thermal method of food preservation that uses
short bursts of electricity for microbial inactivation with little detrimental effect to
food quality. Along with the fundamentals of the PEF system and operation, novel
food applications and supportive numerical models have been described. Accurate
prediction and analysis of fouling dynamics based on an understanding of chemis-
to respond is discussed in Chapter 9. An introduction to fouling models for heat
coupled with the reaction scheme of milk protein under fouling, is also detailed. The
bactericidal effects of ozone have been documented for a wide variety of organisms,
including Gram positive and Gram negative bacteria as well as spores and vegetative
cells. In Chapter 10, chemical and physical properties of ozone, its generation, and
the antimicrobial power of ozone have been explained as well as many advantages of
ozone use in the food industry.
UV-light used as a bactericidal agent is a portion of electromagnetic spectrum rang-
ing from 100 to 400 nm wavelengths and has the potential to denature the microbial
DNA by forming thymine dimmers, leading to microbial inactivation. Chapter 11 will
inactivation.
In addition, new modeling approaches for infrared heating that include the tem-
perature dependence of spectral distribution and ohmic heating coupled with CFD
tools have been addressed. Modeling of multi-phase food products with various elec-
trical conductivities has been introduced in the chapter on ohmic heating. Distortion
lar domain shapes is one of key interests to food engineers whose effort it is to predict
the accurate thermal performance of ohmic heaters.
We have seen very few books available on modeling the complexities involved
in different food processing operations at this level. This book is unique in the sense
55534_C000b.indd vii55534_C000b.indd vii 10/22/08 8:13:47 AM10/22/08 8:13:47 AM
interest in relation to food safety and quality. With rapid adaptation, modification,
High pressure processing (HPP), pulsed electric field (PEF), ohmic heating, ozone
heat and physical properties of foods can be efficiently interpreted. As described in
of electric field due to several factors such as heterogeneous food materials and irregu-
computational fluid dynamics (CFD) in which the pressure dependence of latent
try and fluid mechanics useful in predicting how real process equipment is likely
exchangers accounting for the hydrodynamics and thermodynamics of fluid flow,
elaborate on various models available and the influence of different factors on microbial
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
viii Preface
of applying the theories to solve practical problems relevant to food process engi-
neering at a higher level. This book is not intended to be a complete book on model-
ing the numerous food processing operations. In providing the theoretical basis for
selected operations along with case studies, the reader can gain a clear and intuitive
understanding of the concepts and factors involved in modeling food systems. Using
this opportunity, the chapter contributors also wish to engage readers with further
in-depth discussions about challenging subjects.
We would like to thank all the authors for their sincere contribution of time and
effort in making this possible. It has been our pleasure to put together all of their
efforts in one single stage. Many thanks again.
Soojin Jun, PhDJoseph M. Irudayaraj, PhD
55534_C000b.indd viii55534_C000b.indd viii 10/22/08 8:13:48 AM10/22/08 8:13:48 AM
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
ix
EditorsSoojin Jun was born in 1970 in Seoul, Korea, and received BS (1996) and MS degrees
(1998) in food science and technology from Seoul National University, Korea and a
PhD degree (2002) in agricultural and biological engineering from The Pennsylvania
State University, University Park, Pennsylvania. Currently, he is an assistant profes-
sor in the Human Nutrition, Food and Animal Sciences Department, University of
Hawaii, Honolulu. He is the author or coauthor of over 30 referred journal articles
and papers and his research interests are in novel food processing technologies, nan-
otech and applications, biosensors, food packaging, and food safety engineering.
Dr. Jun is also a member of the Institute of Food Technologists and American Soci-
ety of Agricultural and Biological Engineers.
Joseph M. Irudayaraj received his PhD from Purdue University in food and bio-
process engineering, MS degrees in biosystems engineering and computer sciences
from University of Hawaii, and BS from Tamil Nadu Agricultural University
(India). Presently, he is an associate professor in the Department of Agricultural
and Biological Engineering and co-director of the Physiological Sensing facility
at Purdue University, West Lafayette, Indiana. He has authored more than 125 ref-
ereed journal publications in the areas of food systems simulation, modeling and
design, sensors for quality assessment, and biosensors. His present research thrust
is in the exploration of diffusion and kinetic studies for disease diagnosis using
single molecule imaging and nanotechnology.
55534_C000a.indd ix55534_C000a.indd ix 10/22/08 8:14:19 AM10/22/08 8:14:19 AM
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
xi
Contributors
Josse De BaerdemaekerDepartment of Biosystems
Katholieke Universiteit Leuven
Leuven, Belgium
Sundar BalsubramanianDepartment of Biological and
Agricultural Engineering
Louisiana State University
Agricultural Center
Baton Rouge, Louisiana
Patrick J. CullenSchool of Food Science and
Environmental Health
Dublin Institute of Technology
Dublin, Ireland
Ali DemirciDepartment of Agricultural and
Biological Engineering
The Pennsylvania State University
University Park, Pennsylvania
S. GunasekaranDepartment of Biological Systems
Engineering
University of Wisconsin
Madison, Wisconsin
Joseph IrudayarajDepartment of Agricultural &
Biological Engineering
Purdue University
West Lafayette, Indiana
Soojin JunDepartment of Human Nutrition,
Food and Animal Sciences
University of Hawaii
Honolulu, Hawaii
Harpreet Kaur KhuranaDepartment of Human Nutrition
Food and Animal Science
University of Hawaii
Honolulu, Hawaii
Kathiravan KrishnamurthyDepartment of Food and Animal
Sciences
Alabama A&M University
Normal, Alabama
Si-Quan LiDepartment of Research and
Development
Galloway Company
Neenah, Wisconsin
Kasiviswanathan Muthukumarappan Department of Agricultural and
Biosystems Engineering
South Dakota State University
Brookings, South Dakota
Bart M. NicolaïDepartment of Biosystems
Katholieke Universiteit Leuven
Leuven, Belgium
Colm P. O’DonnellUCD School of Agriculture,
Food Science and Veterinary
Medicine
University College Dublin
Dublin, Ireland
Virendra M. PuriDepartment of Agricultural and
Biological Engineering
The Pennsylvania State University
University Park, Pennsylvania
55534_C000c.indd xi55534_C000c.indd xi 10/22/08 8:15:14 AM10/22/08 8:15:14 AM
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
xii Contributors
K.P. SandeepDepartment of Food Science
North Carolina State University
Raleigh, North Carolina
Sudhir SastryDepartment of Food, Agricultural and
Biological Engineering
The Ohio State University
Columbus, Ohio
Nico ScheerlinckDepartment of Biosystems
Katholieke Universiteit Leuven
Leuven, Belgium
J. Antonio TorresDepartment of Food Science &
Technology
Oregon State University
Corvallis, Oregon
Gonzalo VelazquezDepartment of Food Science &
Technology, UAM Reynosa-Aztlán
Universidad Autónoma de Tamaulipas
Tamaulipas, México
Pieter VerbovenDepartment of Biosystems
Katholieke Universiteit Leuven
Leuven, Belgium
Jian WangDepartment of Biological Systems
Engineering
Washington State University
Pullman, Washington
Yifen WangDepartment of Biosystems
Engineering
Auburn University
Auburn, Alabama
Wade YangDepartment of Food and Animal
Sciences
Alabama A&M University
Normal, Alabama
55534_C000c.indd xii55534_C000c.indd xii 10/22/08 8:15:15 AM10/22/08 8:15:15 AM
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
1
1 Introduction to Modeling and Numerical Simulation
K.P. Sandeep, Joseph Irudayaraj, and Soojin Jun
CONTENTS
1.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................1
1.3 Numerical Formulation .....................................................................................3
1.5 Boundary and Initial Conditions .......................................................................5
1.6 Errors, Consistency, Stability, Compatibility, and Convergence ......................6
1.7 Solution of the Finite Difference Equations .....................................................6
1.7.1 Direct Methods ......................................................................................6
1.7.2 Iterative Methods ...................................................................................7
1.8 Linearization .....................................................................................................8
1.9 Introduction to the FEM ...................................................................................8
1.9.1 How it Works .........................................................................................8
1.9.2 Discretization .......................................................................................9
1.9.3 Interpolating Functions .........................................................................9
1.9.4 Element Matrix Formation to Obtain Global Matrix ............................9
1.9.5 Boundary Conditions .............................................................................9
1.9.6 Solution of the System of Equations.................................................... 10
1.9.7 Summary of the Steps Involved in a Typical Finite Element .............. 10
1.9.8 Future Applications ............................................................................. 10
1.10 CFD Modeling ................................................................................................ 10
1.11 Commercial Codes and Resources Available ................................................. 11
References ................................................................................................................ 11
1.1 INTRODUCTION
Mathematical modeling is a very useful tool to (relatively) quickly and inexpensively
ascertain the effect of different system and process parameters on the outcome of
a process. It minimizes the number of experiments that need to be conducted to
55534_C001.indd 155534_C001.indd 1 10/22/08 8:19:34 AM10/22/08 8:19:34 AM
1.2 Classification of Partial Differential Equations ................................................3
1.4 Classification and Generation of Grids .............................................................4
determine the influence of various parameters on the safety and quality of a process.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
2 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
Parametric analyses can be conducted to understand the relative effects of different
parameters.
The use of approximate methods to solve problems described by partial differ-
ential equations has been employed for various reasons including, but not limited to,
the lack of availability of analytical solutions or empirical correlations, simplicity of
solution technique, ability to quickly perform parametric analyses, and also because
it serves as a means for quickly honing in on the range of parameters to be used in
experimental studies or for design purposes.
There are three main categories into which mathematical modeling falls—
method falls under the differential method category. Under the integral method
weighted residuals. The method of weighted residuals can be further divided into
four categories—collocation method, subdomain method, Galerkin’s method, and
categorized into two groups—cell-centered schemes and nodal point schemes. The
ment method in that it uses a similar approach but for the surface or boundary under
Monte Carlo method falls under the stochastic method. This is a computationally
intensive and probabilistic method used primarily when the number of independent
variables is large.
niques used to solve problems associated with food processing. Relatively simple
problems can be tackled with ease by commercially available software. Complicated
scratch.
The FDM has been very popular owing to its simplicity in formulation and ease in
in the sections that follow). However, it should be noted that stability, compatibility,
and convergence tests (described later on in this chapter) should be conducted when
developing new methods to ensure that the technique yields a feasible solution.
In addition, the FVM is now the most commonly used technique in development
of its applications [1]. This involves the disretization of the equations over the entire
strategy would give the best results and require the least computing time. However,
in a criterion suggested for the solution of heat and mass transfer problems for food
materials, it was recommended that if the solution region represents a simple rectan-
element methods could be adopted. To capture the behavior of the physics and the
55534_C001.indd 255534_C001.indd 2 10/22/08 8:19:35 AM10/22/08 8:19:35 AM
differential method, integral method, and stochastic method. The finite difference
we have the variational method, finite volume method (FVM), and method of
least squares method while the finite volume (or control volume) method can be
variational method and the method of weighted residuals form the basis of the finite
element method (FEM). The boundary element method is a sub-set of the finite ele-
consideration. It can be used in conjunction with the finite element or FVM. The
The FEM and the finite difference methods (FDM) are the most popular tech-
problems require either modification of commercial codes or writing the code from
modification (especially while introducing different relaxation factors as can be seen
finite volume.
For modeling of food processing, it is often difficult to decide which solution
gular domain then the traditional finite difference methods should be the preferred
discretization strategy [2]. When the boundary conditions are irregular then the finite
conservation laws more rigorously, the finite volume techniques are preferred [3].
of computational fluid dynamics (CFD) codes and has been extensively used in many
solution domain and rigorous conservation of mass and heat flux on each face of the
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Introduction to Modeling and Numerical Simulation 3
1.2 CLASSIFICATION OF PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS
on whether or not there is a product of two terms containing either the dependent
variable or its derivatives. If a PDE is linear in its highest order derivative, but in one
or more of the lower order derivatives, it is called a quasi-linear PDE. The order of a
PDE is the highest power of the derivative in the equation.
Consider the following second order PDE:
A B C D E2 2 2
2
∂ Φ∂
∂ Φ∂ ∂
∂ Φ∂
∂Φ∂2x x y y x
+ + + +∂∂Φ∂
Φy
0+ + =F G
ents A, B, C, D, E, F, and G can be functions of x, y, or Φ.
The above PDE is said to be elliptic if B2 − 4AC < 0, parabolic if B2 − 4AC = 0,
and hyperbolic if B2 − 4AC > 0 at all points in the domain.
Auxiliary variables are usually introduced to convert the second order PDEs to
then be used for solving the system of equations too.
A PDE is said to be in conservative form (or conservation form or conservation-
equation are either constant or if variable, their derivatives do not appear anywhere in
the equation. The schemes that maintain the discretized version of the conservation
statement exactly (except for round-off errors) for any grid size over any region in the
domain for any number of grid points is said to have the conservative property.
The non-conservative form of the continuity equation is as follows:
ρ ∂∂
ρ ∂∂
∂ρ∂
∂ρ∂
ux
vy
ux
vy
0+ + + =
The conservative form of the same equation is as follows:
∂∂
ρ ∂∂
ρ Δ ρx
uy
v( )+ ( ) 0 (= ⋅ =or V) 0�
Equilibrium problems (or jury problems) are problems for which the solution of the
PDE is required in a closed domain for a given set of boundary conditions. Equilibrium
problems are boundary value problems and are governed by elliptic PDEs.
Marching (or propagation) problems are transient or appear to be transient problems
and the solution of the PDE is required in an open domain for a given set of initial and
boundary conditions. Problems in this category are either initial value or initial boundary
value problems. Marching problems are governed by hyperbolic or parabolic PDEs.
1.3 NUMERICAL FORMULATION
When dealing with the unsteady state heat equation or the scalar (linear or non-linear)
55534_C001.indd 355534_C001.indd 3 10/22/08 8:19:36 AM10/22/08 8:19:36 AM
Partial differential equations (PDEs) are classified as linear or non-linear depending
The coeffici
the first order PDEs at least for the purpose of classification. This formulation may
law form or divergence form) if the coefficients of all the derivative terms in the
Numerical formulations are based on the classification of the governing equation.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
4 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
Burger’s equation, formulations applicable to parabolic equations are used. When deal-
ing with the wave equation, formulations for hyperbolic equations are used, and when
dealing with Laplace’s equation, formulations for elliptic equations are used. Formu-
lations for all types of equations can be explicit or implicit. Explicit formulations are
simple, but the number of computations and the stability of the formulation (addressed
in the next section) are some of its drawbacks.
The Navier–Stokes equations are hyperbolic in the inviscid region and parabolic
in the viscous region. For steady state conditions, they are hyperbolic in the inviscid
region and elliptic in the viscous region. The scalar equations which are similar to
the Navier–Stokes equations are the Burgers equations (linear and non-linear). Thus,
the starting point for solving the Navier–Stokes equations involves understanding the
methods employed to solve the Burgers equations.
Some of the commonly used explicit formulations for parabolic equations are the
forward time central space (FTCS) method, Richardson’s method, and the DuFort–
Frankel method; while some of the commonly used implicit methods are the Laasonen
nine-point methods are the commonly used methods to address elliptic problems.
ing, LAX method, midpoint leapfrog method, Lax–Wendroff method, Rusanov or
Burstein–Mirin method, and Warming–Kutler–Lomax (WKL) method are some of
the commonly used explicit methods for hyperbolic equations. Euler’s backward time
central space (BTCS) and the Crank–Nicolson methods are two of the commonly
used implicit methods for hyperbolic equations.
Multi-step (or splitting) methods are usually used for non-linear problems and
prediction) of the variable at an intermediate time step and the second step involves
correcting it and hence multi-step methods are also called predictor-corrector meth-
ods too. The Richtmyer formulation, Lax–Wendroff multi-step method, MacCormack
method, and the Warming and Beam (upwind) method are some of the commonly
used multi-step methods with hyperbolic equations.
1.4 CLASSIFICATION AND GENERATION OF GRIDS
In order to solve the partial differential equations that represent the physical problem,
the domain of interest has to be divided into grid lines and the points of intersection
of these gridlines are called nodes. The accuracy of the solution depends on many
solution process can proceed in an ordered sequential manner from one node to the
next. The advantages of using the complicated unstructured grid system are that they
2-D geometries, the most common method of unstructured grid generation involves
boundaries). Advancing front method and the Delaunay method are two of the com-
monly used techniques for triangulation of the domain.
55534_C001.indd 455534_C001.indd 4 10/22/08 8:19:37 AM10/22/08 8:19:37 AM
method, Crank–Nicolson method, and the Beta formulation. The five-point and
Euler’s forward time forward space (FTFS), Euler’s FTCS, first upwind differenc-
sometimes with linear problems too. In this method, the finite difference equations
are written out at two or more time steps. The first step involves determination (or
factors including grid spacing. Grids are classified as structured or unstructured
depending on whether or not there is a set pattern of identification of nodes and if the
can be used to fit irregular, singly-connected and multiply connected domains. For
discretizing the domain into triangles (the most flexible shape to fit various kinds of
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Introduction to Modeling and Numerical Simulation 5
The grid system used could be orthogonal—Cartesian, cylindrical, spherical
angular. Due to the complex geometries of the domain of interest and the possibility
or necessity of having more grids close to boundaries, the physical domain is trans-
formed into a computational domain (by twisting or stretching), where the grids are
rectangular.
Grid generation can be divided into three main categories—algebraic (simple
and fast, using one of many algebraic equations or interpolation techniques), partial
differential equation (elliptic, hyperbolic or parabolic), and conformal mapping using
and is generated before solving the problem) or adaptive (grids move toward regions
of steep gradients as the solution process proceeds).
Some of the desirable features of a grid system are: (1) A mapping that ensures
one-to-one correspondence with grid lines of the same family not intersecting; (2)
grid point distribution is smooth; (3) grid lines are orthogonal or close to orthogonal;
and (4) option for grid point clustering exists.
Grid point clustering (or grid embedment) is a technique used to increase the
formed by appropriate choice of functions used in the transformation of coordinates.
Two of the common ways of handling grid embedment is by the meshing of the grid
and the separate regions method (in which there are two types of grids—interface
grid is performed to obtain values of the variable).
One of the easiest ways of obtaining staggered grids is by shifting the grid verti-
cally or horizontally by half a grid space. This technique is used to improve the stabil-
ity criterion by coupling of variables when the governing system of equations can be
solved sequentially. Thus, there is a primary and secondary set of grids with different
of the incompressible Navier–Stokes equations and consider a grid point in the system
and DuFort–Frankel methods are two of the commonly used methods with staggered
grids. Another technique used for coupling of equations is the multilevel (multigrid)
method and has been used for the diffusion, Poisson, and Navier–Stokes equations.
1.5 BOUNDARY AND INITIAL CONDITIONS
A boundary condition (BC) is said to be of the Dirichlet kind if the value of the
dependent variable is given along the boundary. If the derivative of the dependent
variable is given along the boundary, it is said to be a Neumann BC. If the BC at the
boundary is given as a linear combination of Dirichlet and Neumann BCs, it is said
to be a Robin BC. If the BC along a part of the boundary is of the Dirichlet type, and
another part is of the Neumann type, the overall BC is said to be a Mixed BC.
55534_C001.indd 555534_C001.indd 5 10/22/08 8:19:37 AM10/22/08 8:19:37 AM
(depending on the boundary configuration of system) or non-orthogonal such as tri-
complex variables. Grid systems are also classified as fixed (independent of solution
number of grid points around a specific grid point or around a grid line. It is per-
of each point near the interface of the coarse and fine grid on the solution variable)
and non-interface; at the fine grid boundary, interpolation of the values at the coarse
variables being specified on the primary and secondary grids. Consider the example
where the pressure is specified. Immediately to the right and left of this point, the
x-component of the velocities is specified and immediately to the top and bottom of
this point, the y-component of the velocities is specified. The Marker and cell method
method (where weighting factors are introduced to determine the relative influence
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
6 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
1.6 ERRORS, CONSISTENCY, STABILITY, COMPATIBILITY, AND CONVERGENCE
errors (tend to decrease the amplitude of the wave) and that of second order accurate
methods are known as dispersion errors (tend to cause oscillation of the solution).
formulation.
Discretization error. It is the error in the solution of a PDE due to transformation
of the continuous problem to a discrete problem, and it is the difference between the
difference formulation (without round-off error). It is thus the error in the solution
due to truncation and any errors due to the BCs.
Round-off error. It is the error associated with rounding off numbers in math-
ematical operations.
approximates the PDE. A formulation is said to be consistent if the truncation error
tends to zero as the mesh size tends to zero. Methods which are of the order Δt or Δx
are consistent as error tends to zero as the mesh size tends to zero. However, schemes
that are of the order Δt/Δx may potentially be inconsistent unless it is ensured that
Δt/Δx tends to zero.
Stability. A scheme is said to be stable if errors (round-off, truncation etc.) do not
grow as the scheme proceeds (or marches) from one step to another and is hence strictly
types of errors exist—discretization or round-off (computational). It is important to
control the growth of these errors so that the solution is stable. Two standard methods
exist for stability analysis—discrete perturbation stability analysis, and von Neumann
(Fourier) stability analysis. The latter method is simpler and more commonly used.
Convergence. Usually, a consistent and stable scheme is convergent. Convergence
for convergence”. Although this theorem has not been proven for non-linear PDEs,
it is also used for them.
1.7 SOLUTION OF THE FINITE DIFFERENCE EQUATIONS
met, the set of equations have to be solved. Several direct and iterative methods exist
for solving them, and they are discussed in the following sections.
1.7.1 DIRECT METHODS
Cramer’s rule. Simple, but extremely time consuming. Number of operations = (N + 1)!, for N unknowns.
55534_C001.indd 655534_C001.indd 6 10/22/08 8:19:38 AM10/22/08 8:19:38 AM
The errors associated with first-order accurate methods are known as dissipation
Truncation error. It is the error introduced by truncating terms in the finite dif-
ference formulation. It is the difference between the PDE and the finite difference
exact solution of the PDE (without round-off error) and the exact solution of the finite
Consistency. It relates to the extent to which the finite difference formulation
applicable to marching problems only. In the solution of finite difference equations two
relates to the solution of the finite difference formulation approaching the solution to
the PDE as the mesh size is refined. According to Lax’s equivalence theorem, “Given
a properly posed initial value problem and a finite difference approximation to it that
satisfies the consistency condition, stability is the necessary and sufficient condition
Once the finite difference equations have been formulated and the stability criteria
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Introduction to Modeling and Numerical Simulation 7
especially tridiagonal system of equations. Approximately N3 multiplications are
required for solving N equations. To improve accuracy, equations are rearranged such
Some of the other direct methods include the LU decomposition method, error
vector propagation (EVP) for the Poisson equation [4], odd–even reduction method
[5], and the fast Fourier transform method [6,7].
Direct methods require an exorbitant number of arithmetic operations and they
are usually restricted by one or more of the following: Type of coordinate system
type of BCs.
1.7.2 ITERATIVE METHODS
Usually an initial solution is guessed, new values computed, and the process contin-
ued until convergence is obtained. If a formulation results in only one unknown, it is
called a point iterative method and if the formulation involves more than unknown
a line iterative method. Some of the commonly employed iterative techniques are
listed below.
Alternating direction implicit (ADI) method for parabolic equations. The ADI
method is a sub-set of the approximate factorization method (replacement of original
two- or three-dimensional cases.
Fractional step method for parabolic equations. This technique involves split-
ting of a multidimensional problem into a series of 1-D problems and solving them
sequentially.
Alternating direction explicit (ADE) methods for parabolic equations. They do
not require tridiagonal matrices to be inverted and can be used for 1-D equations
also.
Jacobi method. Initial values of the variable are either prescribed or guessed (at
iteration step are used) to solve for the variable at the grid point (i, j) at the new itera-
tion step.
Point Gauss–Siedel method. This is an improvement of the Jacobi method. In
this method, the values of the variable computed at the new iteration step are imme-
diately used in the computation of the variable at all grid points at the new time step
(as soon as they become available). It has a much higher convergence rate than the
Jacobi method.
Line Gauss–Siedel method. This method is applied when there are three
as the point Gauss–Siedel method results in a system of linear equations with a tridi-
Gauss–Siedel method.
Successive over-relaxation (SOR). This is a technique used to accelerate any
iterative procedure based on guessing the trend of a solution and modifying the
solution appropriately. A parameter, ω (0 < ω < 2), is used to multiply a set of terms
55534_C001.indd 755534_C001.indd 7 10/22/08 8:19:38 AM10/22/08 8:19:38 AM
Gaussian elimination. It is an efficient means of solving algebraic equations,
that the largest coefficients occupy the diagonal (this process is called pivoting).
(e.g. Cartesian); type of domain (e.g. rectangular); size of coefficient matrix, and
(usually three unknowns that result in a tridiagonal coefficient matrix), it is called
finite difference formulation by tridiagonal formulation). This method applies to
the first iteration step) and the value of the variable at all grid points (at the previous
unknowns. The finite difference equation, when processed under the same guidelines
agonal coefficient matrix. This method has a faster convergence rate than the point
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
8 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
in the equation used for a method such as the Gauss–Siedel method. If 0 < ω < 1, it
is called under relaxation, and if 1 <ω < 2, it is called over-relaxation. Over relax-
ation is similar to linear extrapolation (and is used usually for Laplace’s equation
with Dirichlet BCs), while under-relaxation is used when the solution is oscillating
(usually used for non-linear elliptic equations). Determining the optimum relax-
ation factor (ωopt) for various types of equations and BCs can greatly accelerate the
convergence.
1.8 LINEARIZATION
Consider a non-linear term such as u(∂u/∂x). All the values at time j are known for a
given location i and the values at i + 1 are to be determined. Three of the commonly
used linearization techniques are listed below:
u(∂u/∂x) becomes:
uu u
i ji j i j
,, ,+ −1
Δx
There is only one unknown (ui + 1,j
lation is linear.
Iterative. This method involves updating the lagged value till convergence is
reached. The formulation for this method is:
uu u
i jk i j
k ki j
,
, ,++ −1
1
Δx
i + 1,j is the value at the previous location, ui,j. Once ui + 1,j is ki + 1,j is updated and a new solution is obtained
and this process is continued until the convergence criterion has been met.
Newton’s iterative linearization. This method uses the technique of evaluating
the change in a variable between two iterations and dropping second order terms to
arrive at the following expression for the non-linear term:
2 ( )1, 1,1 2
1,1
1, ,u u u u ui j
ki jk k
i jk
i j i j+ ++
++− −
+
k
ΔΔx
1.9 INTRODUCTION TO THE FEM
1.9.1 HOW IT WORKS
The elements are connected to each other at points called nodes. The nodes typically
lie on the element boundary where adjacent elements are connected. In addition to
55534_C001.indd 855534_C001.indd 8 10/22/08 8:19:39 AM10/22/08 8:19:39 AM
Lagging. The coefficient is used at the known value, i. Thus the formulation for
) in this expression and the finite difference formu-
For the first iteration, udetermined at k + 1, the coefficient u
The finite element discretization procedure reduces the given region into a finite
number of elements. A collection of the elements is called the finite element mesh.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Introduction to Modeling and Numerical Simulation 9
boundary nodes, an element may also consist of a few interior nodes. The nodal
able within the elements. The nature of the solution and the degree of approximation
depend not only on the size of the elements but also on the interpolating functions
which should satisfy compatibility and continuity conditions.
tional or weighted residual method. The variational approach has its foundations in
variational calculus and requires the use of a functional while the weighted residual
following steps.
1.9.2 DISCRETIZATION
This involves dividing the problem domain into subdomains. Generally for a one-
dimensional problem this is very simple. However the degree of complexity increases
with the number of dimensions and the non-uniformity of the object in question. Dis-
cretization or division of the domain into smaller components can be accomplished
by choosing a variety of different element shapes and nodes. The choice of the type
of element and the number of nodes in an element are left to the discretion of the
engineer/scientist and are based on experience.
1.9.3 INTERPOLATING FUNCTIONS
variable over the element. Interpolating functions generally are polynomials that can
be easily integrated and differentiated subject to certain continuity requirements
imposed at the element boundaries.
1.9.4 ELEMENT MATRIX FORMATION TO OBTAIN GLOBAL MATRIX
Depending upon the choice of the procedure (variational or weighted residual method)
element matrices are calculated by transforming the elements from the global to
a local coordinate system where integration and differentiation are performed and
then back transformed into the global matrix. Depending upon the element connec-
tivity or the nodes in the element the elements matrix is incorporated into the global
matrix. Similar calculations are performed for each element and the global matrix is
assembled using the element matrix.
1.9.5 BOUNDARY CONDITIONS
Before solving for the unknown variables. boundary conditions are imposed to the glo-
bal matrix. The two types of boundary conditions are natural and essential boundary
conditions. Natural boundary conditions are convective boundary conditions while
55534_C001.indd 955534_C001.indd 9 10/22/08 8:19:40 AM10/22/08 8:19:40 AM
points depict the field variable or the unknown, defined in terms of approximating
or interpolating functions within each element. The nodal values of the field variable
and the interpolating functions for the elements define the behavior of the field vari-
Solution using the finite element technique is obtained predominantly by varia-
approach used the governing equations. The finite element procedure consists of the
Once the elements are defined the next step is to assign nodes to each element to
choose the appropriate interpolating function to represent the variation of the field
essential boundary conditions are constant or specified boundary conditions [7].
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
10 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
1.9.6 SOLUTION OF THE SYSTEM OF EQUATIONS
The assembled equations consist of a set of simultaneous equations that can be
solved using the matrix solvers. For time-dependant problems the unknown nodal
scheme is generally chosen.
1.9.7 SUMMARY OF THE STEPS INVOLVED IN A TYPICAL FINITE ELEMENT
(b) Derive element matrices for the system.
(c) Evaluate element equations and assemble element matrix to form the global
matrix.
(d) Impose boundary conditions.
(e) Solve the system of equations using an appropriate solver.
(f) Postprocessing—graphics, calculation of gradients etc.
1.9.8 FUTURE APPLICATIONS
Most of the future growth expected will be in the application and validation of
for solving problems with nonlinear and random material properties and boundary
conditions will increase. Interest in the application of the Finite element method
in biological systems and more direct integration of the technique with the actual
design will also be given priority. Another crucial area that will demand attention is
in solving micro-structural problems in engineering and biological sciences. Other
parallel processing.
1.10 CFD MODELING
solutions requires a large amount of insight into the problem that has to be solved,
and the appropriate implementation of both physical models and numerical schemes,
mainly using FDM, FEM, and FVM. However, it is well known that the FVM approach
can form the governing equations to better account for changes in mass, momentum,
domain. Though the overall solution will be conservative in nature, the FVM method
can be sensitive to skewed elements which can prevent convergence if such elements
turbulence model, multiphase, and meshing features such as unstructured or sliding
meshes have been addressed and successfully resolved by using the commercialized
CFD codes.
55534_C001.indd 1055534_C001.indd 10 10/22/08 8:19:41 AM10/22/08 8:19:41 AM
values are a function of time and hence an appropriate finite difference time-s tepping
(a) Discretize the problem domain and construct the finite element mesh.
the finite element results by experimental data. Further refinement of the existing
finite element procedures will also increase [8]. Appropriate solution procedures
areas that will demand attention are adaptive finite elements and the application of
either at the user interface or through user-defined codes within the software [9]. The
The CFD codes provide understanding of the physics of a flow system through non-
intrusive flow, thermal, and concentration field predictions. Obtaining accurate CFD
CFD codes required to discretize modeled fluid continuum are numerically obtained
and energy because fluid crosses the boundaries of discrete spatial volumes within the
are in critical flow regions. The outstanding issues associated with convection scheme,
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Introduction to Modeling and Numerical Simulation 11
1.11 COMMERCIAL CODES AND RESOURCES AVAILABLE
Commercial codes available these days are often also packaged with pre- and post-
processing modules. Pre-processing involves transformation of the physical problem
into computational domain and generating a grid mesh in the computational domain.
Post-processing involves presenting the data obtained by the code in graphical form.
There are many commercial codes available to solve most standard problems
involving standard governing equations, boundary conditions, and relatively simple
geometries. They are available on different platforms—PC, Unix, SGI etc. There are
many universities and research groups that offer codes, services or perhaps would be
interested in collaborative efforts. Some of the resources for pre-processing, process-
ing, and post-processing are listed below.
Adina R&D (http://www.adina.com)
Phoenics (http://www.cham.co.uk)
NEKTON, IcePak and MixSim software
Innovative Research, Inc. (http://www.inres.com)
CFD Research Corporation (http://www.cfdrc.com)
Amtec (http://www.amtec.com)
CFX ANSYS (http://www.ansys.com/)
Femlab Comsol (http://www.femlab.com)
I-deas NX Siemens Product Lifecycle Management (PLM) Software
(http://www.plm.automation.siemens.com)
REFERENCES
1. Talukdar, P., Steven, M., Issendorff, F.V., and Trimis, D. 2005. Finite volume method
in 3-D curvilinear coordinates with multiblocking procedure for radiative transport
problems. International Journal of Heat and Mass Transfer 48: 4657–66.
of techniques used for modeling and numerically simulating the drying process. In
Mathematical Modeling and Numerical Techniques in Drying Technology 1–82. NY:
Marcel Dekker.
3. Ranjan, R., Irudayaraj, J., and Jun, S. 2001. A three-dimensional control volume
approach to modeling heat and mass transfer in foods materials. Transactions of the ASAE 44(6): 1975–82
5. Buneman, O. 1969. A compact non-iterative Poisson solver. Institute for Plasma
Research SUIPR Report 294. CA: Stanford University.
6. Hockney, R.W. 1965. A fast direct solution of Poisson’s equation using Fourier analysis.
Journal of the Association for Computing Machinery 12: 95–113.
7. Hockney, R.W. 1970. The potential calculation and some applications. Methods in Computational Physics 9: 135–211.
9. Norton, T., and Sun, D. 2007. An overview of CFD applications in the food industry. In
Computational Fluid and Dynamics in Food Processing 1–41. NY: CRC Press.
55534_C001.indd 1155534_C001.indd 11 10/22/08 8:19:41 AM10/22/08 8:19:41 AM
2. Turner, I.W., and Perre, P. 1996. A synopsis of the strategies and efficient resolution
8. Reddy, J.N. 1993. An introduction to the finite element method. NY: McGraw-Hill.
Fluent (http://www.fluent.com), Gambit, FLUENT, FIDAP, POLYFLOW,
4. Roache, P.J. 1972. Computational fluid dynamics. NM: Hermosa.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
13
2 Aseptic Processing of Liquid and Particulate Foods
K.P. Sandeep and Virendra M. Puri
CONTENTS
2.1 Introduction ..................................................................................................... 14
2.2 Type of Processing .......................................................................................... 16
2.2.1 Critical Factors and Problems Associated with Processing ................ 16
2.2.2 Relevant Historical Background .......................................................... 17
2.3 Fluid Mechanics Aspects of Processing ......................................................... 17
2.3.1 Types of Fluids .................................................................................... 17
2.3.2 Dimensionless Numbers Governing Flow ........................................... 18
2.3.3 Friction Factor .....................................................................................20
2.3.4 Pumps and Pumping Requirements .................................................... 21
2.3.5 Residence Time Distribution of Fluid Elements and Particles ............22
2.3.6 Forces Acting on Fluid Elements and Particles During Flow .............24
2.3.6.1 Equations of Motion of the Fluid ..........................................24
2.3.6.2 Linear Dynamic Equations for Particles ...............................25
2.3.6.2.1 Magnus Lift Force ...............................................25
2.3.6.2.2 Saffman Lift Force ..............................................25
2.3.6.2.3 Drag Force ...........................................................27
2.3.6.2.4 Buoyancy Force (acting in the
y-direction only) ..................................................27
2.3.6.3 Angular Dynamic Equations for Particles ............................28
2.3.7 Techniques to Determine Fluid and Particle Velocity ........................29
2.4 Heat Transfer Aspects of Processing ..............................................................29
2.4.1
2.4.2 Steam Quality ......................................................................................30
2.4.3 Dimensionless Numbers Governing Heat Transfer .............................30
2.4.4
2.4.5 Transient Heat Transfer within Particles ............................................. 32
2.4.6 Hydrodynamic and Thermal Entrance Lengths .................................. 33
2.4.7
2.4.8
2.4.9 Heating Media and Equipment ............................................................ 37
55534_C002.indd 1355534_C002.indd 13 10/22/08 8:24:36 AM10/22/08 8:24:36 AM
Convective Heat Transfer Coefficient ..................................................29
Heat Transfer Coefficient in Straight Tubes ........................................ 33
Natural (free) and Forced Convection ................................................. 32
Heat Transfer Coefficient in Helical Tubes .........................................36
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
14 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
2.4.10 Co- and Counter-current Heat Exchangers ......................................... 37
2.4.11 Governing Heat Transfer Equations and Energy Balance................... 38
2.4.11.1 Energy Balance in the Heat Exchanger ................................ 39
2.4.11.2 Energy Balance in the Holding Tube .................................... 39
2.4.11.3 Energy Balance in the Cooling Section ................................40
2.4.12 Fouling and Enhancement of Heat Transfer ........................................40
2.4.13 Techniques to Estimate the Temperature History of a Product ..........40
2.5 Microbiological and Quality Considerations .................................................. 41
2.5.1 Federal Regulations and HACCP ........................................................ 41
2.5.2 Kinetics of Microbial Destruction, Enzyme Inactivation,
and Nutrient Retention ........................................................................ 41
2.5.2.1 Process Lethality and Cook Values ...................................... 43
2.5.2.2 Commercial Sterility of the Product .....................................44
2.6 From an Idea to Commercialization ...............................................................44
2.7 Concluding Remarks ....................................................................................... 47
Nomenclature ........................................................................................................... 47
References ................................................................................................................50
2.1 INTRODUCTION
Aseptic processing involves sterilization of a food product (in a direct or indirect
high temperature for a short period of time (in comparison with conventional can-
ning) in aseptic processing yields a high quality product. The demand for high qual-
ity shelf-stable products has been the driving force for commercialization of aseptic
processing. Deaeration (prior to sterilization) is usually an integral part of aseptic
processing as removal of air enhances product quality and increases the shelf-life
of a product. It also stabilizes the product prior to processing. Care should be taken
not based on the initial raw product. Another important part of an aseptic processing
ing of the product at processing temperatures which can be as high as 125–130°C. An
aseptic surge tank provides the means for product to be continuously processed even
if the packaging system is not operational due to any malfunction. It can also be used
to package the sterilized product while the processing section is being resterilized.
prior to processing is of utmost importance. This is what is referred to as presteriliza-
tion. The recommended heating effect for presterilization (using hot water) of the pro-
cessing equipment for low-acid foods is the equivalent of 121.1°C for 30 minutes. The
used for sterilization. Presterilization of an aseptic surge tank is usually done by satu-
rated steam and not hot water due to the large volume associated with the surge tank.
eliminating the need for refrigeration, easy adaptability to automation, use of any
55534_C002.indd 1455534_C002.indd 14 10/22/08 8:24:37 AM10/22/08 8:24:37 AM
contact heat exchanger), followed by holding it for a specified period of time (in a
to ensure that all process calculations are performed after the deaeration stage and
holding tube), cooling it, and finally packaging it in a sterile container. The use of
system is the back pressure valve which provides sufficient pressure to prevent boil-
corresponding combination for acid or acidified products is 104.4°C for 30 minutes.
This often involves acidification of the water (to below a pH of 3.5 for acid products)
Better product quality (nutrients, flavor, color, texture), less energy consumption,
Sterilization of the processing system, packaging system, and the air flow system
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Aseptic Processing of Liquid and Particulate Foods 15
advantages of aseptic processing over the conventional canning process. Some of
the reasons for the relatively low number of aseptically processed products include
quality control of raw products, better trained personnel, and better control of process
variables and equipments. Some of the disadvantages of aseptic processing include
increased shear rates, degradation of some vitamins (some vitamins are stable at pas-
teurization temperatures but not at sterilization temperatures), separation of solids
Thus it can be seen that not all products can be aseptically processed to yield a high
quality product.
Due to some of the stringent regulatory requirements of aseptic processing, many
processors adopt an aseptic process, but package it in non-aseptic containers. This
results in products that are called ‘extend shelf-life products’. Such processes are
easier to adopt, require less monitoring (since the resulting product–package com-
One such process involves ultra-pasteurization of milk wherein extended shelf-life
can be obtained.
Notwithstanding the problems associated in producing aseptically processed
foods, several companies have adopted this technology. Some of the products that are
aseptically processed include fruit juices, milk, condensed milk, coffee creamers, pud-
dings, soups, butter, gravies, and jelly. Some of the companies that deal with aseptic
processing and packaging equipment are International Paper, Tetra Pak, Combibloc,
Elopak, Cherry Burrell, Alfa Laval, ASTEC, VRC, APV, FranRica, Benco, Scholle,
Bosch, and Metal Box.
The pH of a food product is a critical factor in determining the type of process-
ing to be adopted and the class of viable microorganisms of concern. Foods are
usually divided into three pH groups while designing a thermal process: high-acid
foods which have pH values less than 3.7, foods with pH values between 3.7 and
4.6 and the low-acid foods with pH values greater than 4.6. For low-acid foods, the
anaerobic conditions that prevail in aseptic processing are ideal for growth of some
toxin-producing microorganisms such as Clostridium botulinum. To obtain a com-
mercially sterile product, all pathogenic microorganisms must be destroyed during
aseptic processing.
Bacteria are the primary organisms of concern in food processing. They multiply
teria is generally divided into seven stages—lag phase (no growth or even a decrease
in numbers), accelerated growth phase (rate of growth is increasing), logarithmic
phase (most rapid and constant increase in numbers), deceleration phase (rate of
growth is decreasing), stationary phase (numbers remain constant), accelerated
a constant rate). In order to extend the shelf-life of products, one of the techniques is
bacteria. Once bacteria reach the third stage (logarithmic phase), spoilage will occur
55534_C002.indd 1555534_C002.indd 15 10/22/08 8:24:38 AM10/22/08 8:24:38 AM
slower filler speeds and higher overall cost. Aseptic processing also requires better
bination does not need to be sterile), and are easier to file with regulatory agencies.
by the process called fission wherein one cell splits into two cells. The growth of bac-
death phase (rate of death is increasing), and final death phase (numbers decrease at
to prolong the first two phases (lag and accelerated growth phase) of the growth of
and fats, precipitation of salts, and change in flavor or texture of the product relative
to what consumers are accustomed to. Minimization of the off-flavors produced can
be accomplished by steam injection (short heating time) followed by flash-cooling.
size package, use of flexible packages, and cheaper packaging costs are some of the
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
16 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
freezing, drying, reduction in available oxygen, and reduction in initial number of
bacteria. These techniques must be accompanied by other practices such as the use
of appropriate packaging and storage conditions.
2.2 TYPE OF PROCESSING
Techniques to process and preserve foods range from retorting (canning) to frozen
refrigeration, and drying of foods. Not all products can be processed or preserved using
the same technique. Feasibility of processing and the quality of the end-product deter-
mine the type of processing and preservation technique employed for various foods.
The quality of canned foods is not very high since products are subjected to heat
treatment for an extended period of time. On the other hand, the short processing
times involved during aseptic processing leads to the production of a high quality
product. Recovery of heat from the heat exchangers used in aseptic processing also
do not require further control like refrigeration of frozen foods. Refrigerated foods
(after pasteurization) require careful monitoring of the storage and distribution tem-
perature. They also have a shorter shelf-life than aseptically processed products and
hence their range of distribution is limited. The quality of frozen foods is generally
high, but they need to be thawed and then cooked. The thawing process can result in
uneven heating zones especially if a microwave oven is used. In addition, depending
on the storage period, the energy requirements for freezing can be a major portion
of the total cost involved.
2.2.1 CRITICAL FACTORS AND PROBLEMS ASSOCIATED WITH PROCESSING
Some of the factors that affect the choice of the type of process include the viscos-
ity of the product and presence of large particles and/or low thermal conductivity
particles. The simplest type of food product is a homogeneous low viscosity liquid
product. Direct heating by steam injection or steam infusion is a commonly employed
method for heating such products. For higher viscosity products, plate and tubular
heat exchangers are employed. For extremely viscous products, a scraped surface
heat exchanger is usually used. When relatively high viscosity products containing
large particles and/or low thermal conductivity particulates are involved, dielectric
(microwave) and ohmic heating are two commonly employed methods. The density
of the particles is also an important issue to be considered and will be addressed in
layer surrounding the particle, which in turn is a function of the thermo-physical
presents a problem of some particles being subjected to less thermal treatment than
others. If the heating time is based on mean velocity, the faster moving particles
will be under-sterilized while the slower moving particles will be over-sterilized.
55534_C002.indd 1655534_C002.indd 16 10/22/08 8:24:39 AM10/22/08 8:24:39 AM
rapidly. Some of the techniques to prolong the first two phases are refrigeration,
storage. Some of the other techniques of processing and preservation include hot-fill,
makes it more energy efficient. In addition, the products are shelf-stable and hence
and rheological properties of the fluid and the relative velocity between the particle
and the fluid. This boundary layer governs the convective heat transfer coefficient at
the section that deals with residence time distribution.
the particle-fluid interface. In addition, the existence of a residence time distribution
Heat transfer from the carrier fluid to the particle is a function of the boundary
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Aseptic Processing of Liquid and Particulate Foods 17
essential in determining the thermal treatment that any product has received.
2.2.2 RELEVANT HISTORICAL BACKGROUND
The work of Olin Ball and the American Can Research Department laid the founda-
process was developed [1]. This was followed by the Avoset process in 1942 (steam
injection of the product coupled with retort or hot air sterilization of packages such as
in a tubular heat exchanger, metal container sterilization using superheated steam
at temperatures as high as 450°F since dry heat requires higher temperature than
package—tetrahedron package. The late 1960s saw the advent of the Tetra Brick
aseptic processing machine and the late 1970s saw the advent of the Combibloc
were established. One of the major landmarks in the history of aseptic processing is
the approval of use of hydrogen peroxide for the sterilization of packaging surfaces
by the FDA in 1981. In recent years, a major break-through for the aseptic processing
industry was in 1997 when Tetra Pak received a no-objection letter from the FDA for
aseptic processing of low-acid foods containing large particulates.
2.3 FLUID MECHANICS ASPECTS OF PROCESSING
mechanics aspects that are important in designing an aseptic process. These param-
and more importantly that of the particles are the factors that eventually are used in
designing holding tubes.
2.3.1 TYPES OF FLUIDS
dependent or time-independent depending on whether the shear stress experienced
law of viscosity—shear stress (σ) and shear rate (γ.) are linearly related, while non-
The Herschel–Bulkley model, given below, is the most commonly used model to
σ σ γ= +0 K n(.
)
55534_C002.indd 1755534_C002.indd 17 10/22/08 8:24:39 AM10/22/08 8:24:39 AM
tion of aseptic processing in the US as early as 1927 when the HCF (heat, cool, fill)
wet heat, followed by aseptic filling and sealing of cooled product in a superheated
cans and bottles) and the Dole-Martin aseptic process in 1948 (product sterilization
steam environment). The early 1960s was marked with the advent of a form-fill-seal
eters and the system configuration, in turn are important factors that determine the
Knowledge regarding the spread of residence times for the fluid and particles is
choice of the pump to be used. The residence time distribution of the fluid elements,
that affect the viscosity of a fluid or suspension. Fluids are characterized as time-
by a fluid under a constant shear rate varies as a function of time. If the shear stress
Time, shear rate, temperature, and particle concentration are some of the factors
increases with time, it is called a rheopectic fluid, and if the shear stress decreases
with time, it is called a thixotropic fluid. Time-independent fluids are divided into
Newtonian fluids do not have a linear relationship of shear stress versus shear rate.
describe the flow behavior of most liquid food products:
(blank carton) aseptic system. Soon, aseptic filling in drums and bag-in-box fillers
two categories, Newtonian and non-Newtonian. Newtonian fluids obey Newton’s
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
The type of fluid, flow characteristics, and fluid properties are some of the fluid
18 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
0
0
0 0
the ratio of shear stress to shear rate is not a constant. Apparent viscosity is the
ratio of the shear stress to shear rate and is always expressed along with the shear
e
into picture. One of the equations used to determine the effective viscosity of a
suspension is:
μ μ Φ Φe 1 2.5 14.1= + +( )2
Temperature is a major factor that affects the viscosity of Newtonian and non-
equation is the most commonly used equation to determine the effect of temperature
μ = Be E R Ta g− /
Thus, to determine the Arrhenius parameters B and Ea, a graph of ln(μ) versus 1/T is
a g
2.3.2 DIMENSIONLESS NUMBERS GOVERNING FLOW
Nu d
n n
n n
n nGRe
2
33 1=
+
−
−
ρ⟨ ⟩K[( )/ ] 2
NRe =ρ
μud
if the Reynolds number is greater than 10,000. In the intermediate Reynolds number
55534_C002.indd 1855534_C002.indd 18 10/22/08 8:24:40 AM10/22/08 8:24:40 AM
In the above equation, σ is the yield stress, K is the consistency coefficient, and n is the
flow behavior index. For a Newtonian fluid, σ = 0, K = μ, n = 1. A pseudoplastic fluid
v iscosity increases with an increase in shear rate. When small particles of low con-
For a non-Newtonian fluid, the concept of apparent viscosity is introduced since
rate since it varies with shear rate. For a pseudoplastic fluid, the apparent viscosity
is one for which σ = 0, n < 1 while a dilatant fluid is one for which σ = 0, n > 1.
decreases with an increase in shear rate, while for a dilatant fluid, the apparent
centration (Φ) are suspended in a f luid, the concept of effective viscosity (μ ) comes
Newtonian fluids. For a Newtonian fluid, the Arrhenius model, given by the following
on the viscosity of a fluid:
made, the slope of which is –E /R and the intercept is ln(B). Thus, the flow behavior
of the fluid as a function of temperature can be modeled.
steady streamline f low and the flow is referred to as laminar flow. At higher flow
rates, the flow becomes erratic and is referred to as turbulent flow. Reynolds number
is the non-dimensional number that is used to characterize the type of flow and the
When a fluid flows through a tube at low velocities, the flow is characterized by
generalized Reynolds number (valid for power-law fluids, in addition to Newtonian
fluids) is defined as:
The above expression reduces to the following form for a Newtonian fluid:
For flow in a straight tube of circular cross-section, laminar flow conditions are said
to exist if the Reynolds number is less than 2,100 and the flow is said to be turbulent
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Aseptic Processing of Liquid and Particulate Foods 19
secondary (radial) direction. This is due to the radial pressure gradient that develops
rotating vortices in the cross-section of the tube. The strength of these vortices
tube is the Dean number (NDe
N ND
De Re=d
The use of helical holding tubes as a means of narrowing the RTD of particles has
been suggested by several researchers in the past. The narrowing of the RTD was
vature (λc >> 1) and low Dean numbers (NDe = NRe/√λc << 17). Dean [3] solved the
Navier–Stokes equation and obtained an approximate expression for the velocity of
tion of the Navier–Stokes equations which are valid over a wide range of curvature
and Reynolds numbers.
providing transition Reynolds number as high as 6,000 to 8,000 in a curved tube as
compared to 2,100 in a straight tube. Koutsky and Adler [6] pointed out that the pres-
sure drop in a tube formed into a helix can be up to four times as great as that in an
in helices at Reynolds numbers up to 8,000 or more. Both these facts imply the
the momentum, mass, and heat transfer and an increase in Reynolds number is also
known to decrease the axial dispersion.
The results of some of the studies that have been conducted to determine the
mentioned here. White [7] conducted experiments with oil and water for different
curvatures of helical tubes. For NRe > 100 and d/D = 1/50, the curved pipe had a
greater resistance than a straight pipe of same diameter and length. The resistance
Re = 6,000 (∼ NRe
Re ∼ 9,000 and
when d/D = 1/2050, turbulence was seen at NRe ∼ 2,250 to 3,200. Many equations
have been developed for predicting the critical Reynolds number that separates
55534_C002.indd 1955534_C002.indd 19 10/22/08 8:24:41 AM10/22/08 8:24:41 AM
coefficient without going into the turbulent regime is by using coiled tubes. Flow in
), which is defined as follows:
obtained analytical expressions for the velocity profile valid for large radii of cur-
region, the flow is said to be in transition. Reynolds number is thus a convenient
non-dimensional quantitative measure of the type of flow in different flow systems
(different pipe diameters, f low rates etc.).
Laminar flow conditions offer the advantage of simplicity in computations
involving flow and heat transfer equations. However, the major drawback of laminar
flow is the relatively low heat transfer coefficient. One way to enhance heat transfer
coiled tubes is characterized by flow in the primary (axial) direction and also in the
due to the centrifugal force. The secondary flow is characterized by two counter-
and pitch of the coil. The non-dimensional number that characterizes flow in a coiled
attributed to the development of secondary flow. Dean [2] was the first to analyze
depends on many factors such as the tube to coil diameter ratio, flow rate, viscosity,
mathematically the phenomenon of secondary flow in helically-coiled tubes. Dean
the fluid as a function of position. Truesdell and Adler [4] obtained a numerical solu-
Taylor and Yarrow [5] found that secondary flow could stabilize laminar flow,
identical straight tube. They also found that stable laminar flow can be maintained
existence of strong secondary flow in helices. Secondary flow is known to increase
critical value of Reynolds number that separates laminar and turbulent flow are
to flow became 2.9 times that in a straight pipe at N when flow
becomes turbulent). When d/D = 1/15, turbulent flow was seen at N
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
20 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
[8] is:
NdD
Re
1/2
c2100 1 12= +
⎛⎝⎜⎜⎜
⎞⎠⎟⎟⎟
⎡
⎣⎢⎢
⎤
⎦⎥⎥
It is important to note that most equations similar to the one developed above have a
r
to coil diameter ratio, pitch, or other factors.
lower than that in a straight tube. Several correlations have been developed to predict
form below [9]:
V
R u
Nc
2
De2
2
1 0.0306288
0.012
i
π=
⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟
+−NNDe
24
288
⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟
where u– is the average velocity in a straight pipe of the same radius under the same
axial pressure gradient.
Thus, it is important to make comparisons of Dean numbers while dealing with
tubes. It can also be seen that decreasing the coils diameter enhances the extent of
since decreasing the coil diameter results not only in enhanced mixing and heat
transfer, but also in an increase in the pressure drop.
2.3.3 FRICTION FACTOR
drop between the inlet and outlet of the tube. The pressure drop depends on the type
f f
tion and they are determined as follows:
EP
fu Ld
ff
2
= =Δρ
2
In the above equation, f is t
pipe is given by fs = 16/NRe
Moody [10] diagram. An alternative way to determine friction factor is to use the
following equation by Colebrook [11] and perform an iterative analysis:
1 1
3 7
1 255
f d N f= − +
⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟
4Re
ln.
.ε
55534_C002.indd 2055534_C002.indd 20 10/22/08 8:24:42 AM10/22/08 8:24:42 AM
laminar flow from turbulent flow. One such equation developed by Srinivasan et al.
It is known that for a given pressure gradient, the flow rate in a coiled tube is
ange of applicability. The limitations may be to the range of Reynolds number, tube
the flow rate in a helical tube. One such correlation is presented in a non-dimensional
flow in helical tubes, just like comparisons of Reynolds numbers are made in straight
secondary flow. Optimization is performed to choose the appropriate coil diameter
As a fluid flows through a pipe, friction impedes axial flow and creates a pressure
of flow (laminar, transition or turbulent), type of fluid, and the type of pipe. As the
fluid flows through a tube, there is loss in energy (E ) and pressure (ΔP ) due to fric-
he friction factor and it varies with the type of pipe, flow
conditions and system geometry. The friction factor for laminar flow in a straight
and for turbulent flow it is usually determined from the
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Aseptic Processing of Liquid and Particulate Foods 21
These are standard methods for determining friction factors in straight pipes. How-
ever, for curved pipes, there are many additional factors such as coil diameter, pitch,
and Dean number that come into play, and hence there is no standard formula or
procedure available. Manlapaz and Churchill [12] have presented a list of studies
conducted for determination of friction factors in curved pipes.
Choice of the pump for any food processing operation, including aseptic processing
depends on many factors including whether the product has particulates in it, the extent
any food processing operation involves the use of the Bernoulli’s equation:
EP
Ep fPE KE= + + +Δ Δ Δρ
where ΔPE and ΔKE are the changes in potential and kinetic energies, respectively.
Ep is the energy supplied by pump and Ef is total loss in energy due to friction.
The above equation can also be written as:
gZU P
E gZU P
112
1p 2
22
2f
2+ + + = + + +
2Ψ ρ Ψ ρE
In the above equation, Ψ
hence have the units J/kg which is also the same as m2/s2. The subscripts 1 and 2 in
the above equation refer to the intake port and delivery port, respectively. Once Ep is
determined, the power rating of the pump is determined by the following equation:
Power p= m Ei
Once the power of the pump is determined, the next step is to determine the type of
positive displacement. In a centrifugal pump, product enters the center of an impeller
and due to centrifugal force, moves to the periphery. At this point, the liquid experi-
ences maximum pressure and is forced out into the pipeline. For a centrifugal pump,
varies as the square of the pump speed; and the power required varies as the cube of
tors involved in pump selection are as follows:
2. Net positive suction head required (NPSHR)—depends on impeller design.
It is required to maintain stable operation of pump including avoiding
cavitation.
55534_C002.indd 2155534_C002.indd 21 10/22/08 8:24:43 AM10/22/08 8:24:43 AM
pump to be used. Pumps are broadly classified into two categories, centrifugal and
pumps), direct force is applied to a confined liquid to make it move. Some of the fac-
of slippage (if applicable), piping arrangement, fittings present, and the flow behavior
2.3.4 PUMPS AND PUMPING REQUIREMENTS
of the fluid. The first step in determining the type and rating of a pump required for
is a constant and is equal to 0.5 for laminar flow and 1.0
for turbulent flow. All the terms in Bernoulli’s equation are energy per unit mass and
the volumetric flow rate is directly proportional to the pump speed; the total head
the pump speed. In a positive displacement pump (rotary, reciprocating, axial flow
1. Flow rate of fluid.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
22 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
3. Net positive suction head available (NPSHA)—depends on absolute pres-
sure, vapor pressure of liquid, static head of liquid above center line of
pump, friction loss in the suction system.
2.3.5 RESIDENCE TIME DISTRIBUTION OF FLUID ELEMENTS AND PARTICLES
The FDA only credits heat treatment experienced in the holding tube, which makes
its design critical. An important factor to be taken into account in designing the hold-
ing tube is the fact that the residence time in the holding tube should be based on the
tube of circular cross-section, the maximum velocity occurs at the center of the hold-
imum velocity occurs at the axis of the tube which means that the minimum residence
time corresponds to the residence time of particles located along the center-line of the
tube. Consequently, these particles receive the least amount of heat treatment. Thus,
the holding tube length required to achieve the required F0 value (time-temperature
this will result in an over-processed product. This is where the residence time distribu-
tion (RTD) of the particles comes into picture. To understand RTD, we begin with the
under laminar conditions in a pipe of circular cross-section:
u urR
= −⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟
⎡
⎣⎢⎢
⎤
⎦⎥⎥2 1
2
2
the tube, they spend different times in the tube, and the distribution of these times
is the RTD of the particles. The RTD of the particles depends a great deal on the
and also the size, density, and concentration of particles. Analysis of particle RTD is
relatively simple when there is only one type of particle in a system. However, when
55534_C002.indd 2255534_C002.indd 22 10/22/08 8:24:43 AM10/22/08 8:24:43 AM
5. Characteristic pump curves (graph of head, power consumption, and effi-
ment of the pump (since the pump is operating at a different temperature and specific
effect) can be calculated based on the knowledge of this minimum residence time, but
4. Properties of fluid (such as density, viscosity).
ciency versus volumetric flow rate).
is affected by the degree of its deviation from the behavior of a Newtonian fluid. The
degree of deviation is characterized by the flow behavior index, n, for Ostwall-de-
Waale fluids. For a Newtonian fluid flowing under laminar conditions in a straight
specific volume of the product at the hold tube temperature and not on the displace-
ing tube and its magnitude is twice the average velocity of the fluid. For pseudoplastic
fluids (n < 1), differences between the maximum and average velocity becomes smaller
volume varies with temperature). The velocity profile of the fluid in the holding tube
as n decreases. In other words, the velocity profile becomes flatter. For the extreme
case (n = 0), the plug flow profile is attained. However, for most cases (n > 0), the max-
following equation which describes the velocity profile for flow of a Newtonian fluid
Thus, it can be seen that different fluid elements (at different radial locations) spend
bution of times spent by various fluid elements within the tube is referred to as the
different amounts of time in the tube. For instance, a fluid element traveling at the
RTD of the fluid elements. Similarly, when different particles are flowing through
RTD of the fluid. It also depends on flow rate and viscosity of the carrier medium,
center of the tube will travel twice as fast as the average fluid element. The distri-
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Aseptic Processing of Liquid and Particulate Foods 23
different types of particles (especially particles of different densities) are present in
present as the only particle type in suspension. For instance, in a mixture of two
types of particles, denser particles (which traveled slowly at the bottom of the tube
when present alone) could be sped up by rarer particles due to collisions, and in turn,
the rarer particles could get slowed down. Thus, an analysis has to be performed for
each combination of particle types present in a system and direct inferences cannot
be made from RTD of each particle type separately.
The existence of an RTD for the particles results in some particles receiving more
heat treatment than others in the holding tube. From a safety standpoint, the fastest
cle residence time. Thus, it can be seen that if the particle RTD is narrow, the quality
of the product would be high since the difference between the fastest and slowest
particle residence time is not very high. The wider the RTD of the particles in the
holding tube section, the more non-uniform the process. One of the techniques that
unn
urR
n n
=++
−⎛⎝⎜⎜⎜
⎞⎠⎟⎟⎟
⎡
⎣⎢⎢
⎤
⎦⎥⎥
⎧⎨⎪⎪
+3 1
11
1( )/
⎩⎩⎪⎪
⎫⎬⎪⎪
⎭⎪⎪
unn
umax =++
3 1
1
i
have been conducted by several researchers in the past. Some of these studies include
those of Dutta and Sastry [13], Palmieri et al. [14], Sancho and Rao [15], Sandeep and
Zuritz [16], and Baptista et al. [17]. Several studies have been conducted to determine
the RTD of particles in helical holding tubes too because the RTD in helical holding
those of Chen and Jan [18], Tucker and Withers [19], Ahmad et al. [20], and Sandeep
ticle size, or particle concentration results in a decrease in the RTD of particles while
an increase in viscosity results in an increase in RTD. However, it should be noted
that in determining the fastest particle (to compute process lethality based on this
particle), RTD studies should be conducted for that particular combination of particle
sizes and concentrations involved since experiments have shown that the fastest par-
ticle in a single particle situation is the neutrally buoyant particle that travels through
the center of the tube, while in mixed particle type situations, it is usually a particle
55534_C002.indd 2355534_C002.indd 23 10/22/08 8:24:44 AM10/22/08 8:24:44 AM
a product, the flow behavior is quite different from the situation when they are each
can be used to narrow the RTD of the fluid and particles is the use of helical tubes.
particle is what is of concern and the holding tube length is based on the fastest parti-
When a non-Newtonian (power-law) fluid flows through a straight tube under
Thus, for a pseudoplastic fluid (n < 1), the maximum velocity is given by:
less than twice the average fluid velocity. Thus, the RTD of the fluid is narrower for
a pseudoplastic fluid in comparison with that for a Newtonian fluid. Hence, the RTD
tubes is narrower than that in conventional holding tubes. Some of the studies include
of particles is also narrower when the carrier medium is a pseudoplastic fluid.
Hence it can be seen that the maximum velocity in the case of a pseudoplastic flu d is
Studies on RTD of fluid elements and particles in conventional holding tubes
et al. [21]. The general trend from these studies is that an increase in flow rate, par-
laminar flow conditions, the velocity profile is given by the following equation:
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
24 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
and hence lethality). Slower moving particles of lower thermal diffusivities could
very likely receive less heat treatment than faster moving particles of higher thermal
2.3.6 FORCES ACTING ON FLUID ELEMENTS AND PARTICLES DURING FLOW
system. The density, size, and shape of the particle are important particle characteris-
2.3.6.1 Equations of Motion of the Fluid
equations. The continuity equation is as follows:
∂ρ∂
∇ ρfft
+ ⋅ =( )u 0
This reduces to:
∇ ⋅ =u 0
as follows:
ρ ρ ∇ τf f
DuDt
g= + :
u
τ Δ Δ Δ= −⎡
⎣⎢⎢
⎤
⎦⎥⎥
−
mn
1
2( : )
( )/1 2
where, the second invariant of the strain rate tensor, 1/2(Δ : Δ) is given by:
1
2( : )Δ Δ
∂∂
∂∂
=⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟
+⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟
2f
2
fu
x
v
y⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟
+⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟
⎡
⎣
⎢⎢⎢
⎤
⎦
⎥⎥⎥+ +
2
f
2
f∂∂
∂∂
w
z
v
x
∂∂∂
∂∂
∂∂
u
y
w
y
v
z
f
2
f f
⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟
+ +⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟
+ +⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟
2
f f
2
∂∂
∂∂
w
x
u
z
55534_C002.indd 2455534_C002.indd 24 10/22/08 8:24:45 AM10/22/08 8:24:45 AM
ticle is not always the critical particle (the particle that receives least heat treatment
In order to solve for the trajectory and velocity of various particles during flow in a
conductivities. This factor further complicates determination of process lethality.
tube, we need to know the fluid flow characteristics. The equations that govern the
of slightly higher or slightly lower density. It should also be noted that the fastest par-
a tube along with a carrier fluid, they experience various forces. These forces are
responsible for the translation and rotation of the particles as they flow through the
tics that affect the motion of the particles while the viscosity, flow rate, and density of
the fluid are the important fluid characteristics that affect the motion of the particles.
The motion of the fluid is described by the continuity equation and three momentum
for an incompressible fluid.
The three momentum equations for the fluid phase are given in vector notation
ids, the Ostwald-de Waele model is used [22]:For non-Newtonian fl
flow of a fluid are the continuity and momentum equations. As particles flow through
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Aseptic Processing of Liquid and Particulate Foods 25
This takes into account the spatial variation of viscosity. Thus, the apparent viscosity
determined for the corresponding temperature. The effect of temperature and concen-
tration of particles on the effective viscosity of suspensions have been modeled by sev-
2.3.6.2 Linear Dynamic Equations for Particles
The three linear dynamics equations for the particles (in vector notation) are as follows:
mtppkd
d
VF
⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟
=∑ k
where mp is the mass of a single particle, Vpk and Fk (k = x, y, z) are the velocities of the
particles and forces acting on the particle in the x, y, and z directions, respectively.
2.3.6.2.1 Magnus Lift ForceThe Magnus lift force acts in a direction perpendicular to the direction of motion
of the particle and it is this force that causes the curving of a spinning sphere. The
expression to compute the Magnus lift force (Frk) is given by:
Frk f3
p f= × −πρ a ΩΩ ( )V V
where Ω is the angular velocity of the particle. In the above expression, the differ-
ence in velocities Vp − Vf is called the slip velocity or relative velocity (Vr). The vector
product Ω × Vr is determined as follows:
ΩΩ ΩΩ× = = − + − +Vr ijk j rk y r z r z r x rε V i j k( ) ( ) (Ω Ω Ω Ωw w w w ΩΩ Ωx r y rw w− )
Substituting the above equation in the equation for computing the force results in
the following three expressions for the Magnus lift force in the x, y, and z directions,
respectively:
F a w w v vx3
f y p f p f= − − −π ρ Ω Ω[ ( ) ( )]
F a u u w wy3
f z p f p f= − − −π ρ [ ( ) ( )]Ω Ω
F a v v u uz3
f x p f p f= − − −π ρ Ω Ω[ ( ) ( )]
The experimental works of researchers [27,28] indicated that particles migrated radi-
ally even in the absence of rotation. Thus, there is some other force that contributes
toward the lift forces experienced by particles.
2.3.6.2.2 Saffman Lift ForceSaffman [29] developed an expression for the lift force acting on a particle during
55534_C002.indd 2555534_C002.indd 25 10/22/08 8:24:46 AM10/22/08 8:24:46 AM
eral researchers [23,24,25]. Thus, the above equations can be used to describe the flow
of the fluid at any particular shear rate (at any particular location in the tube) can be
behavior of a power-law fluid containing particles under non-isothermal conditions.
Particles suspended in a viscous fluid are subjected to the following forces [26]:
an unbounded shear flow. The shear lift force is independent of the particle rotation
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
26 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
unless the rotation speed is much greater than the rate of shear. For a freely rotating
particle, Ω = ½ |K|, where Ω is the angular velocity of the particle and |K| is the mag-
nitude of the vorticity vector. Oliver [27] and Theodore [28] found that if the particle
away from the axis of the tube, thereby moving the particle away from the axis. In
vector notation, the Saffman lift force on a particle is given by:
Fs f2
1/2
p f=⎛
⎝
⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠
⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟× −6 46. ( )ρ a
v
KK V V
p f
The expression for K in the above equation can be obtained as follows:
K = × =
⎡
⎣
⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢
⎤
⎦
⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥
∇ ε ∂∂
∂∂
∂∂
V ijk
i j k
x y z
u v w
= −⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟+ −
⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟i j
∂∂
∂∂
∂∂
∂∂
wy
vz
uz
wx
⎟⎟⎟⎟+ −⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟k
∂∂
∂∂
vx
uy
r
Vp − Vf = Vr = iur + jvr + kwr
Evaluating the above expressions results in the scalar forms of the Saffman lift force
F av u
zwx
xs f2
1/2
=⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟
−⎛⎝⎜⎜6 46. ρ ∂
∂∂∂K ⎜⎜
⎞⎠⎟⎟⎟ − − −
⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟ −( ) ( )w w
vx
uy
v vp f p f
∂∂
∂∂
⎡⎡
⎣⎢⎢
⎤
⎦⎥⎥
F av v
xuy
ys f2
1/2
=⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟
−⎛
⎝⎜⎜6 46. ρ ∂
∂∂∂K ⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟ − − −
⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟ −( ) (u u
wy
vz
w wp f p
∂∂
∂∂ ff )
⎡
⎣⎢⎢
⎤
⎦⎥⎥
F av w
yvz
sz f2
1/2
=⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟
−⎛
⎝⎜⎜6 46. ρ ∂
∂∂∂K ⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟ − − −
⎛⎝⎜⎜⎜
⎞⎠⎟⎟⎟ −( ) ( )v v
uz
wx
u up f p f
∂∂
∂∂
⎡⎡
⎣⎢⎢
⎤
⎦⎥⎥
The above expressions are valid if the tube Reynolds number is much greater than
unity and the particle is not very close to the axis of the tube. However, it should be
55534_C002.indd 2655534_C002.indd 26 10/22/08 8:24:47 AM10/22/08 8:24:47 AM
in the x, y, and z direction, respectively as follows:
ne the relative or slip velocity, V , as follows:We now defi
velocity was smaller than the fluid velocity, the lift force acted toward the axis of the
tube and if the particle velocity was greater than the fluid velocity, the lift force acted
where K is the curl of the fluid velocity, v is the kinematic viscosity, and a is the
radius of the particle. V and V are the velocities of particle and fluid, respectively.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Aseptic Processing of Liquid and Particulate Foods 27
noted that the above requirements may not be met in many situations and hence the
expression for Saffman force must be used with caution.
2.3.6.2.3 Drag Force
F C ad d f f p f p= − −1
2
2ρ π V V ( )V V
d
Cd
p
p= +24
1 0 15 0 687
Re( . Re ). for 1 < Rep < 1000
Re( )( )
p
f p=−ρ
μ2a V V
2.3.6.2.4 Buoyancy Force (acting in the y-direction only)The expression to compute the buoyancy force exerted on the particle (acting only in
the y-direction) is given by:
F gb f p= −( / ) ( )4 3 3π ρ ρa
Substituting the above four equations into the linear dynamic equation for the par-
ticle results in:
mt
av
pp
f p
d
d
VK V V=
⎛
⎝
⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠
⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟× −6 46 2
1 2
. (
/
ρK
ff f p f
d f f p f p
) ( )
( )
+ × −
+ − − +
π ρ
ρ π
a
C a
3
21
2
4
3
ΩΩ V V
V VV V ππ ρ ρa3( )f f− g
The above equation can be rewritten in the following manner to obtain the expres-
sions for the linear dynamic equations for the particles in the x, y, and z directions,
respectively (with the gravity force acting in the y-direction):
x-direction:
mV
ta
v uz
wx
pp
f
d
d=
⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟
−6 46 2
1 2
.
/
ρ ∂∂
∂∂K
⎛⎛⎝⎜⎜⎜
⎞⎠⎟⎟⎟ − − −
⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟( ) (w w
vx
uy
vp f p
∂∂
∂∂
−−⎡
⎣⎢⎢
⎤
⎦⎥⎥vf )
+ − − −πρf y p f z p fa w w v v3[ ( ) ( )]Ω Ω
+ − −1
2
2C a u ud f f p f pρ π V V ( )
55534_C002.indd 2755534_C002.indd 27 10/22/08 8:24:48 AM10/22/08 8:24:48 AM
where the drag coefficient, C is obtained from the following equation [30]:
and the particle Reynolds number is defined by:
The expression for the drag on a particle in a viscous fluid is given by:
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
28 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
y-direction:
mV
ta
v vx
uy
pp
f
d
d=
⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟
−6 46 2
1 2
.
/
ρ ∂∂
∂∂K
⎛⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟ − − −
⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟( ) (u u
wy
uz
p f
∂∂
∂∂
uu up f−⎡
⎣⎢⎢
⎤
⎦⎥⎥)
+ − − −πρ Ωf z p f x p fa u u w w3[ ( ) ( )]Ω
+ − − + −1
2
4
3
2 3C a v v a gd f f p f p f fρ π π ρ ρV V ( ) ( )
z-direction:
mV
ta
v wy
vz
pp
f
d
d=
⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟
−6 46 2
1 2
.
/
ρ ∂∂
∂∂K
⎛⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟ − − −
⎛⎝⎜⎜⎜
⎞⎠⎟⎟⎟( ) (v v
uz
wx
vp f p
∂∂
∂∂
−−⎡
⎣⎢⎢
⎤
⎦⎥⎥vf )
+ − − −πρf x p f y p fa v v u u3[ ( ) ( )]Ω Ω
+ − −1
2
2C a w wd f f p f pρ π V V ( )
This accounts for the description of the translation of the spheres. However, the par-
ticles undergo rotation too, and to account for the rotational motion of the sphere, the
angular momentum equations of the particle phase must be solved.
2.3.6.3 Angular Dynamic Equations for Particles
The three angular dynamics equations for the particles are as follows:
It
kk
d
d
ΩΩ⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟=∑T
where I is the moment of inertia (I = 2/5 mp a2 for sphere) and Tk (k = x, y, z) is the
Substitution of the expression for the torque into the angular momentum equation
results in the following sets of equations for the x, y and z directions, respectively:
d
d
x
p
x
Ω Ωt a
vz
wy
= +⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟−
⎡
⎣⎢⎢
15
82
μρ
π ∂∂
∂∂
⎤⎤
⎦⎥⎥
d
d
y
p
y
Ω Ωt a
uz
wx
= +⎛⎝⎜⎜⎜
⎞⎠⎟⎟⎟−
⎡
⎣⎢⎢
⎤
⎦
15
82
μρ
π ∂∂
∂∂
⎥⎥⎥
d
d p
z
Ω Ωz
t auy
vx
= +⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟−
⎡
⎣⎢⎢
15
82
μρ
π ∂∂
∂∂
⎤⎤
⎦⎥⎥
55534_C002.indd 2855534_C002.indd 28 10/22/08 8:24:49 AM10/22/08 8:24:49 AM
local torque exerted by the viscous fluid on the surface of the particles.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Aseptic Processing of Liquid and Particulate Foods 29
The linear and angular dynamics equations for the particles have to be solved simul-
2.3.7 TECHNIQUES TO DETERMINE FLUID AND PARTICLE VELOCITY
important, are usually not the target, since the species of concern are the slow-heating
particles. Particle residence times, residence time distributions, and velocities can be
determined by using a stop-watch, digital image analysis, LASER-Doppler velocim-
etry, and also with the aid of magnetically tagged particles.
2.4 HEAT TRANSFER ASPECTS OF PROCESSING
Some of the heat transfer aspects that are of importance in designing an aseptic pro-
and thermal properties of the product, mode of heat transfer (conduction or con-
vection), design of the heat exchanger, and the heat resistance of microorganisms,
enzymes, and nutrients.
During heating or sterilization of a solid–liquid mixture by heat treatment using
fers heat to the surface of the particles by convection. Further heating of the interior
temperature and the center temperature of particles can be due to the low convective
to enhance the thermal diffusivity of particles (other than by reformulation), efforts
have been geared towards measuring and enhancing the convective heat transfer
2.4.1 CONVECTIVE HEAT TRANSFER COEFFICIENT
Q = hfp Ap (Tps − Tf)
fp) include the shape of the particle, surface roughness, the posi-
in a coiled tube is fully three-dimensional and the rate of heat transfer can be much
55534_C002.indd 2955534_C002.indd 29 10/22/08 8:24:50 AM10/22/08 8:24:50 AM
dye tracers, and fine particles are used. Magnetic resonance imaging can also be used
cess are the convective heat transfer coefficient, effect of temperature on the physical
conventional means, the liquid part of the mixture gets heated first and then it trans-
Convective heat transfer coefficient has been described [31] as the thermal lag
Some of the factors that affect the convective heat transfer coefficient between a
taneously along with the four equations of motion for the fluid phase in order to
completely describe the flow dynamics of the suspension.
The average fluid velocity can be calculated once the volumetric flow rate of the prod-
uct is known. To determine the distribution of fluid residence times, salt injections,
under certain circumstances to obtain a fluid flow profile. Fluid flow profiles, though
of the particles take place by conduction. The difference between the bulk fluid
heat transfer coefficient between the fluid and the surface of the particle or due to
coefficient between the fluid phase and particles.
between the particle surface temperature and the fluid temperature for a particle
the low thermal diffusivity of the particles. Since there is not much that can be done
being heated in a fluid. This is mathematically written as follows:
fluid and particle (h
properties of the fluid.
Heat transfer for laminar flow in a straight tube (heat exchanger or holding tube)
tion of the particle in the tube, particle concentration, type of flow, and the thermo-
is usually low since there is very little mixing in the radial direction. However, flow
higher than that in a straight tube. This is due to the development of secondary flow
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
30 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
imposed as a result of the centrifugal forces present in the curved section. The sec-
2.4.2 STEAM QUALITY
Steam quality refers to the amount of steam that is in vapor phase in saturated steam,
with superheated steam having a quality of 1. The amount of energy given out by
steam is given by the following equation:
Q m H H= −st s c
i( )
with
Hs = (X) Hv + (1 − X) Hc
In the above equations, Hs, Hv, and Hc are the enthalpies of steam, pure vapor, and
pure condensate respectively and ‘X’ is the steam quality. Thus, when steam quality
is 1 (or 100%), all the steam is in vapor state and the enthalpy of steam is the same as
the enthalpy of pure vapor and when steam quality is 0, all the steam is in condensate
form and the enthalpy of steam is the same as the enthalpy of pure condensate.
The enthalpy of pure vapor and pure condensate can be determined from saturated
steam tables at the corresponding saturation temperature and pressure. The enthalpy
of saturated steam can then be determined as a weighted mean of these enthalpies,
once the steam quality is known. Thus, it can be seen that higher the quality of
steam, higher the amount of energy transferred from steam to the product.
2.4.3 DIMENSIONLESS NUMBERS GOVERNING HEAT TRANSFER
dimensionless quantity called Nusselt number. Nusselt number is a dimensionless
temperature gradient at the surface and is given by:
NhDk
T yT T D
Nuc
f
surface
surface c
d d
/
Te
= = −−
=
( / )
( )
mmperature gradient at surface
Average temperrature gradient throughout the system
Nusselt number also represents the ratio of the diameter of the tube to the equivalent
thickness of the laminar boundary layer. Empirical correlations have been developed
to determine Nusselt number as a function of various other dimensionless quantities
ing forced and free convection.
55534_C002.indd 3055534_C002.indd 30 10/22/08 8:24:50 AM10/22/08 8:24:50 AM
called Reynolds number, convective heat transfer coefficient is represented by a
ondary flow serves as a means of redistributing fluid elements in the radial direction,
(in the directions normal to the main direction of flow) due to the pressure gradient
and thereby transferring heat more efficiently between the bulk of the fluid and the
fluid elements near the tube wall.
Just like fluid flow characterization is done by the use of a dimensionless quantity
including Reynolds number under different flow and heat transfer conditions includ-
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Aseptic Processing of Liquid and Particulate Foods 31
Ng T T D v Dn
Grf f surface vertical ver=
− −β ρ ∞2 3 14( ) ( ttical
2
n
n nK n n
−
−+
1 2
13 1 2
)
{ [( ) / ] ( )}
The quantity β is t
following expression:
β⟨ ⟩
∂⟨ ⟩∂
=⎛⎝⎜⎜⎜
⎞⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟
1
V
V
TP
For the case of free convection, Nusselt number is a function of Grashof number.
number reduces to the following form:
Ng T T D
Grf f surface vertical=
−β ρμ
∞2 3
2
( )
Prandtl number, which is the ratio of momentum diffusivity (μ/ρ) and thermal dif-
fusivity (k/ρcp), comes into picture in the determination of Nusselt number for both
forced and free convection. The generalized Prandtl number (valid for power-law
Nc K n n
v d k
n n
n nGpf
f
/Pr
[( ) ] ( )=
+ −
− −
3 1 2
4
1
1 1
Nc
kPr = pf f
f
μ
The Biot number is the ratio of the internal (conductive) and external (convective)
resistance offered to heat transfer in an object. It comes into picture for calculations
NhDk
D kh
Bic
s
c s/
/
Internal resistance
Exter= = =
1 nnal resistance
Unsteady state heat transfer is characterized by another dimensionless quantity,
Nt
Dk D D
c D tFo
c
c c
p c
/
/
Rate of heat c= = =
αρ2
2
3
1( ) oonduction
Rate of heat storage
55534_C002.indd 3155534_C002.indd 31 10/22/08 8:24:51 AM10/22/08 8:24:51 AM
in free convection only (where buoyancy effects are significant). The expression for
he coefficient of volumetric thermal expansion and is given by the
involving unsteady state heat transfer and is defined as follows:
which is the Fourier number and is defined as follows:
the generalized Grashof number (valid for power-law fluids, in addition to Newtonian
Grashof number is the ratio of buoyancy to viscous forces and is of importance
fluids) is given by:
When dealing with Newtonian fluids, the expression for the generalized Grashof
fluids, in addition to Newtonian fluids) is given by:
For Newtonian fluids, the above expression reduces to the following form:
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
32 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
2.4.4 NATURAL (FREE) AND FORCED CONVECTION
Convective heat transfer can take place by natural or forced means. In natural con-
contact with a hot (or cold) surface, thereby resulting in buoyancy forces. The Nus-
selt number in this case is a function of the Grashof number (NGr) and the Prandtl
number and it takes the following form:
NhLk
c N NNuc
Grc2= = 1( )Pr
c
teristic length is given by:
Lc
Cross-sectional area
Wetted perimeter=
⎛
⎝⎜4⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟
In some situations, a combination of natural and forced convection takes place.
Thus, the relative importance of the two has to determined. If (NGr) (NPr) < 8 ×105,
the effect of natural convection can be neglected and forced convection governs
the heat transfer. Another method of determining the relative importance of nat-
ural and forced convection is by determining the ratio of the Grashof number
(measure of the buoyancy force) and the square of the Reynolds number (measure
of the inertial force). If the ratio is close to unity, the effects of forced and free
convection have to be taken into account. The magnitude of the Froude num-
ber also can be used to determine the relative importance of natural and forced
convection.
2.4.5 TRANSIENT HEAT TRANSFER WITHIN PARTICLES
Two basic approaches exist to solve the problem of heat transfer involving par-
entire particle is at the same temperature and the second method takes into account
the temperature gradient within particles. The lumped capacitance method is valid
only if the Biot number (NBi) is less than 0.1. If the lumped capacitance method is
applicable, the following equation can be used to determine the temperature (T)
within an object at any given time (t):
T TT T
hAc V
ti
−−
= −⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟
∞
∞ ρexp
p
It should be noted that when the lumped parameter method is valid, the resistance to
heat transfer due to conduction is negligible in comparison to that due to convection.
However, if the Biot number is greater than 0.1, the Heisler chart is used to determine
the temperature at the center of an object. When the Biot number is greater than 40,
the resistance to heat transfer due to convection is negligible in comparison with that
due to conduction.
55534_C002.indd 3255534_C002.indd 32 10/22/08 8:24:52 AM10/22/08 8:24:52 AM
ticles—the first method, called the lumped capacitance method, assumes that the
vection flow occurs due to the differences in the density of the fluid as it comes into
In the above equation, L is the characteristic length. For internal flows, the charac-
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Aseptic Processing of Liquid and Particulate Foods 33
2.4.6 HYDRODYNAMIC AND THERMAL ENTRANCE LENGTHS
the cooling section and hence care has to be taken in designing these components of
the aseptic processing system depending on the product.
and fully developed region. The entrance region is the region where the velocity and
to become fully developed (hydraulic length or hydrodynamic entry length, lh) is
given by the following equation [32]:
l N dh = 0 05. ( )( )Re
The above equation is also referred to as the Langhaar equation. In the transient
(thermal length, lt) is given by the following equation:
l N dt Pe= 0 036. ( )( )
where the Peclet number (NPe) is given by:
Nu d
Pef
f
=α
The Peclet number, given by the above equation (for Newtonian and non-Newtonian
2.4.7 HEAT TRANSFER COEFFICIENT IN STRAIGHT TUBES
While considering transfer of heat between a heating medium (such as water or steam)
commonly are listed below.
between steam and the wall of the heat exchanger [33]:
hk g
T T do hx
st st
st w hx o hx
( )
. .
( ) (
.( )
=−
0 7253 0 2 0ρ λ
))
/
μ
⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟
1 4
55534_C002.indd 3355534_C002.indd 33 10/22/08 8:24:53 AM10/22/08 8:24:53 AM
region, the velocity profile is fully developed, while the temperature profile is still
developing. The length required for the temperature profile to become fully developed
medium and the outer wall of the inner tube (outside heat transfer coefficient) and
the convective heat transfer coefficient between the product and the inner wall of the
inner tube (inside heat transfer coefficient). Different techniques exist to determine
ficients come into picture—convective heat transfer coefficient between the heating
the heat transfer coefficient based on the state of the heating medium (liquid or gas)
The following equation is used to compute the (outside) heat transfer coefficient
The flow behavior of fluids in a pipe depends a great deal on the temperature. As most
products get heated, they become less viscous and flow much easier than when it is
at room temperature. Thus, it is possible to have turbulent flow in the heat exchanger
and holding tube (where the viscosity of the product is very low) and laminar flow in
As a fluid flows through a straight pipe and convective heat transfer is taking
place, the flow can be divided into three regions—entrance region, transient region
temperature profiles are still developing. The length required for the flow (laminar)
fluids) is a product of the Reynolds number and the Prandtl number.
and a product for flow in a tubular heat exchanger, two convective heat transfer coef-
and whether the flow is in a tube or in an annulus. Some of the correlations used
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
34 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
product is computed using the following equation [33]:
Nn
n
mc
k LNu
p f
f hx
=+⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜
⎞⎠⎟⎟⎟
⎛
⎝
⎜⎜⎜2 03 1
4
1 3
.
/( )
i
⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠
⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟
⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟
1 30 14
/.
mmw
fi lm), given by the
following expression:
T T Tfilm wall fluid= +1
2( )
In the holding tube, the following equation is used to determine the (inside) heat
tr
Nn n nn n n
Nu =+ + ++ + +
⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞8 0
15 23 9 1
31 43 13 1
3 2
3 2.
⎠⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟
In the cooling section, the following equations are used to determine the inside and
t
Nn mc
kLNu
p=+⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜
⎞⎠⎟⎟⎟
⎛
⎝
⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠
⎟⎟2 03 1
4
1 3
.
/ i
⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟
1/3
N N NNu G G= 0 023 0 8 1 3. Re.
Pr/
Reynolds number is less than 2,100).
puted using the following correlation [35]:
N N Nd
dNu G Gp= +
⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟
2 0 28 37 0 233 0 143. . Re.
Pr. ⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟
1 787.
sented [36] as a function of Peclet number and the local Graetz number, where the
Graetz number (NGz) is given by:
55534_C002.indd 3455534_C002.indd 34 10/22/08 8:24:54 AM10/22/08 8:24:54 AM
The (inside) heat transfer coefficient between the wall of the heat exchanger and the
ansfer coefficient between the product and the wall of the holding tube [34]:
ou side heat transfer coefficients [33]:
determining the outside heat transfer coefficient, the outside diameter of the tube
The properties of the fluid are determined at the film temperature (T
Laminar flow:
Turbulent flow:
tube and the properties of the fluid undergoing processing have to be used. While
tion (both internal and external flow) is considered to be laminar if the generalized
While determining the inside heat transfer coefficient, the inside diameter of the
and the properties of the cooling water have to be used. The flow in the cooling sec-
The surface heat transfer coefficient between the fluid and the particle is com-
Nusselt number expressions for heat transfer from a power-law fluid under laminar
flow conditions under an uniform wall heat flux boundary condition have been pre-
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Aseptic Processing of Liquid and Particulate Foods 35
Nmc
kxN N
x dGz
p= =i
Re Pr
/
The most commonly used equations for determining the Nusselt number for laminar
for NReNPr (d/L) < 100
NN N d L
N NNu = +
+3 66
0 085
1 0 0 045.
. [ ( / )]
. . [
Re Pr
Re Pr (( / )] .
.
d L 0 66
0 14
μμ
b
w
⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟
for NReNPr (d/L) > 100
N N NdL
Nub
w
= ×⎛⎝⎜⎜⎜
⎞⎠⎟⎟⎟
⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠1 86
0 33
. Re Pr
. μμ
⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟
0 14.
by the following equation [37]:
Nn
nNNu Gz
1/3 b
w
=+⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜
⎞⎠⎟⎟⎟
⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟2 0
3 1
4.
μμ ⎟⎟⎟
0 14.
H
ber is provided by Perry and Chilton [38] to determine the convective heat transfer
friction is given by the following equation:
j f NH = = −1
20 023 0 2. Re
.
number:
N N NLd
Nu G Gc= +
⎛⎝⎜⎜⎜
⎞⎠
2 0 8 4703 0 553 0 2716. . Re.
Pr. ⎟⎟⎟⎟
−⎛⎝⎜⎜⎜
⎞⎠⎟⎟⎟
−0 6272 0 1142. .R rR
When dealing with a scraped surface heat exchanger, the convective heat transfer
N N N NNu Re Pr b=1 2 0 5 0 33 0 26. . . .
55534_C002.indd 3555534_C002.indd 35 10/22/08 8:24:55 AM10/22/08 8:24:55 AM
Thus, it can be seen from the above equation that the heat transfer coefficient will be
Researchers [39] determined the convective heat transfer coefficients between a
They found that the convective heat transfer coefficient increased with decreasing
heat transfer coefficient was higher for a particle near the wall.
coefficient is determined using an equation such as the one presented below [40]:
flow in horizontal pipes are given as follows:
Another commonly used correlation for laminar flow heat transfer in pipes is given
higher for pseudoplastic fluids (n <1) as compared to that for Newtonian fluids.
For transition flow, a graph of the Colburn j-factor ( j ) versus the Reynolds num-
coefficient. The statement of the Colburn analogy between heat transfer and fluid
fluid and a particle and developed the following correlation to determine the Nusselt
particle size or viscosity and increasing flow rate. It was also found that convective
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
36 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
A more general equation has been developed [41] which takes into account the speed
N cu D D
ND
uC
Nu
s=−( )⎛
⎝
⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠
⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟
( )1
22ρ
μπ
Pr
/Ω⎛⎛
⎝
⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠
⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟
⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟
0 62 0 55. .
( )DD
Nsb
00 53.
For viscous liquids, c1 = 0.014, c2 = 0.96.
For non-viscous liquids, c1 = 0.039, c2 = 0.70.
Thus, depending on the situation presented, the appropriate equation to determine
each of the equations have a range of applicability and also assumptions involved.
2.4.8 HEAT TRANSFER COEFFICIENT IN HELICAL TUBES
tubes, there is no simple correlation that can be applied to a wide range of process
conditions. Nevertheless, different correlations are available for different situations
and some of them have been presented below.
heat transfer in curved tubes:
N N N NNu De Pr Defor and 0= ≤ ≤3 31 20 12000 115 0 0108. . . ..005 ≤ ≤NPr .0 05
N N N NNu De Pr Defor and 0.7= ≤ ≤0 913 80 12000 476 0 2. . . ≤≤ ≤NPr 5
For constant wall temperature heat transfer in curved tubes, the following
correlation was developed [43]:
N N N N NNu De Pr Defor and 0.7= ≤ ≤ ≤0 836 80 12000 5 0 1. . .PPr ≤ 5
Other researchers [44] developed the following Nusselt number correlations for dif-
ferent ranges of Dean numbers:
N N N N N NNu De De Defor and (= ≤1 7 202 1 6 2 0 5. ( ) )Pr/
Pr. >>100
N N N NNu Defor= < <0 9 20 1002 1 6. ( )Re Pr/
N N NdD
Nu pr for=⎛⎝⎜⎜⎜
⎞⎠⎟⎟⎟ <0 7 1000 43 1 6
0 07
. Re. /
.
NNDe <8300
They concluded that the effect of d/D can be neglected for Dean numbers less than
100 in the fully developed thermal region. They also found that for all cases with
(N 2
De NPr) > 100, the Nusselt number in the fully developed thermal region was
55534_C002.indd 3655534_C002.indd 36 10/22/08 8:24:55 AM10/22/08 8:24:55 AM
the convective heat transfer coefficient should be used. It should also be noted that
of rotation and the type of fluid:
Researchers have conducted several studies on flow and heat transfer in helical tubes.
These studies have included various flow and fluid types, tube diameters, and coil
radii. Due to the complexities that are involved in flow and heat transfer in helical
The following correlations have been developed [42] for constant wall heat flux
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Aseptic Processing of Liquid and Particulate Foods 37
proportional to NPr1 6/ and that for the thermal entry region, the Nusselt number was
proportional to NPr1 3/ .
2.4.9 HEATING MEDIA AND EQUIPMENT
Heating the product can be accomplished by direct contact of the hot medium and the
product or by indirect contact. Direct contact heating is accomplished by steam injec-
tion (injecting steam into a product) or steam infusion (passing a product in a thin
layer through a chamber of steam). Both of these methods are rapid means of steril-
izing the product. The product is then cooled by evaporation in a vacuum chamber.
There are several types of indirect contact heat exchangers. Some of them are
the plate, tubular, shell and tube, scraped surface, microwave, and ohmic. Some of
the non-thermal techniques include the use of high pressure, irradiation, and pulsed
liquid foods with small particles. Tubular and shell and tube heat exchangers can
be used with relatively low viscosity products with the limiting factor being the
size of the particulates. Tubular heat exchangers can be double tube, triple tube
exchanger (SSHE) provide mixing and also prevent burning of products onto the
wall of the heat exchanger. A SSHE is also suitable for products with large par-
ticulates. Microwave (dielectric heating) and ohmic (electrical resistance heating)
heating results in rapid and simultaneous heating of the liquid and particulate
phases of the product. However, they can also result in non-uniform and runaway
heating. Some of the other techniques such as the use of radio frequency, pulsed
under investigation for commercialization on a large scale. On a smaller scale, the
use of pulsed light, ultrasound, and ultraviolet radiation have been attempted with
limited success.
Some of the methods that handle liquids and particulates separately are the
Jupiter system (particles are sterilized by steam in a double cone pressure vessel),
rotaholder (a tubular sterilizer in which particles are held back for extra time using
ized bed by steam and cooled by sterile Nitrogen) and have been described in more
detail elsewhere [45]. The disadvantages of these methods are the added costs for
separating and recombining the liquid and particulate phases and the complexities
introduced in the overall process.
2.4.10 CO- AND COUNTER-CURRENT HEAT EXCHANGERS
Co- and counter-current heat exchangers are used abundantly in the food processing
industry. Thus, it is important to be able to determine the overall heat transfer coef-
can easily be determined by the following equation:
Q mc T=•
p( )Δ
55534_C002.indd 3755534_C002.indd 37 10/22/08 8:24:56 AM10/22/08 8:24:56 AM
electric field. Plate heat exchangers have a large surface area and hence rapid heat
electric fields, irradiation, membrane separation, and high pressure are currently
ficient in these types of heat exchangers. The total energy transferred to the product
transfer can take place (due to the turbulent flow conditions) to liquid foods and
or corrugated tube heat exchangers with flow in the co-current, counter-c urrent
or cross-flow mode. With viscous products, the blades of the scraped surface heat
forks), and the fluidized bed system (particles are separately sterilized in a fluid-
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
38 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
where ΔT is the rise in temperature of the product. This information is then used to
following equation:
Q UA T= lm lmΔ
where the logarithmic mean temperature difference (ΔTlm) is given by:
Δ Δ ΔΔ Δ
TT T
T Tlm =
−1 2
1 2ln( / )
with ΔT1 and ΔT2 being the difference between the temperatures of the hot and cold
lm is the
logarithmic mean area and is given by:
AA A
A Almo i
o i/=
−ln( )
with Ao and Ai being the outside and inside surface areas, respectively.
It is thus possible to compute the effectiveness of various heat exchangers based
the same inlet conditions, it can be shown that the amount of energy transferred from
2.4.11 GOVERNING HEAT TRANSFER EQUATIONS AND ENERGY BALANCE
The energy equation in spherical coordinates is as follows:
ρ ∂∂
∂∂
∂∂ θ
∂∂
cTt r r
krTr r
p =⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟+
1 12
2
2 sin θθθ ∂
∂θ θ∂
∂ϕ∂∂ϕ
kT
rk
Tsin
sin
⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟+
⎛
⎝⎜1
2 2⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟+ S
By symmetry,
∂∂θ
∂∂ϕ
T T= = 0
Also, S = 0 for the case where there is no heat source term.
Thus, the energy balance equation reduces to:
ρ ∂∂
∂∂
∂∂
cTt r r
krTr
p =⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟
12
2
For constant properties, the above equation reduces to the following form:
α ∂
∂∂∂
∂∂r r
rTr
Tt2
2 0⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟− =
55534_C002.indd 3855534_C002.indd 38 10/22/08 8:24:57 AM10/22/08 8:24:57 AM
calculate the overall heat transfer coefficient in the heat exchanger making use of the
on the above outlined procedure to compute the overall heat transfer coefficient. For
fluids at the inlet and exit of the heat exchanger, respectively. The quantity A
the hot to the cold fluid is higher in the case of a counter-current heat exchanger.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Aseptic Processing of Liquid and Particulate Foods 39
This is the equation that has to be then solved to determine the temperature distribu-
tion within spherical particles.
2.4.11.1 Energy Balance in the Heat Exchanger
U A T T m c T T N h A T TEhx hx st f f pf f f p f f pp( ) ( ) (− = − + −
i ′ss )
In the above equation, T f and T ps
temperatures, respectively and are given by:
T T T T T Tf f f ps ps psand= + = +1
2
1
2( ) ( )′ ′
The terms Tf’ and Tps
’
step (or the new spatial location). Also, the surface area of the heat exchange surface,
Ahx, is computed as follows:
A dhx hx= π Δx
the heat exchanger (Uhx):
1 1 1
U A h A h Ax
hx lm hx o hx o hx i hx i hx
hx
( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )
= + +kk Ahx lm(hx)
where the logarithmic mean area (Alm) is given by:
AL R R
R Rlm
o i
o i
=−2π ( )
ln( / )
The terms 1/hoAo, Δr/kAlm, 1/hiAi represent the resistances to heat transfer from the
steam to the outside wall of the heat exchanger, from the outside wall of the heat
exchanger to the inside wall of the heat exchanger, and from the inside wall of the
heat exchanger to the product, respectively.
Thus, the two unknowns, namely, Tf′ and Tps
′ can be solved for.
2.4.11.2 Energy Balance in the Holding Tube
The overall energy balance equation in the holding tube is as follows:
m c T T U A T T N h A T Ti
f pf f f ht ht f air p f p fp( ) ( ) (′ − = − + − pps)
55534_C002.indd 3955534_C002.indd 39 10/22/08 8:24:58 AM10/22/08 8:24:58 AM
The following equation is used to determine the overall heat transfer coefficient in
In the heat exchanger, the steam loses heat to the fluid and the particles suspended in
the fluid. The overall energy balance equation in the heat exchanger is as follows:
are the mean fluid and mean particle-surface
are the fluid and particle-surface temperatures at the new time
In the holding tube, the fluid loses heat to the particles and also to the surroundings.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
40 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
the holding tube (Uht):
1 1 1
U A h A h Ax
ht lm(ht) o hx o hx i hx i hx
ht= + +( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) kk A
xk Aht lm ht
ins
ins lm ht( ) ( )
+
peratures in the heat exchanger was then used to determine the temperatures of the
2.4.11.3 Energy Balance in the Cooling Section
overall energy balance equation in the cooling section is as follows:
m c T Ti
f pf f f cs cs f cw p f p f pp( )− =′
ss
cs
the heat exchanger with all parameters for the heat exchanger being replaced by the
corresponding parameters for the cooling section.
exchanger. This is referred to as fouling and can greatly impede the rate of transfer
of heat. After a certain time, when the heat transfer rate becomes unacceptably low,
decreased productivity and increased costs. This is more of a problem with viscous,
eliminate it totally. The use of scraped surface and helical heat exchanger also mini-
mizes fouling. Another detrimental factor associated with fouling is the fact that
or holding tube). This in turn could result in a decrease in the actual accumulated
lethality which could potentially result in an unsafe product.
2.4.13 TECHNIQUES TO ESTIMATE THE TEMPERATURE HISTORY OF A PRODUCT
TM). Another tech-
data to a computer. Infrared imaging is a technique that can be used to obtain surface
temperature information. In order to use infrared imaging for particles, the particles
55534_C002.indd 4055534_C002.indd 40 10/22/08 8:24:59 AM10/22/08 8:24:59 AM
The following equation is used to determine the overall heat transfer coefficient in
The overall heat transfer coefficient in the cooling section (U ) is computed using
U A (T −T )+ N h A (T −T )
the same equation that was used to determine the overall heat transfer coefficient in
with the aid of clamps or compression fittings (such as Swagelok
A similar approach to that used in the determination of the fluid and particle tem-
fluid and particles in the holding tube.
In the cooling section, the fluid and particles lose heat to the cooling water. The
As a product flows through a system, it tends to stick to the hot surface of the heat
proteinaceous, and starchy foods and is predominant under laminar flow conditions.
2.4.12 FOULING AND ENHANCEMENT OF HEAT TRANSFER
The use of appropriate flow rate and temperature can minimize fouling, but not
with increased fouling, the cross-sectional area available for flow decreases, thereby
the system has to be shut down and cleaned using a CIP solution. This translates to
increasing flow velocity and decreasing the residence time (in the heat exchanger
the use of thermocouples or RTDs in the flow regime which may be installed in-line
nique to determine temperature within a fluid is the introduction of tracer capsules
The most commonly used method to determine the temperature within a product is
(or data tracers) in the flow, retrieving it at the exit, and downloading the temperature
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Aseptic Processing of Liquid and Particulate Foods 41
are retrieved at the exit, sliced, and imaged to determine variation of temperature at
any cross-section of the particle. Thermochromic dyes that change color with time
also within particles. Thermoluminescent markers (that emit a certain wavelength of
light depending on the temperature) can be used to determine the temperature within
2.5 MICROBIOLOGICAL AND QUALITY CONSIDERATIONS
During processing, there are several factors that the processor takes into account. First
and foremost comes the safety of the process and compliance with regulatory require-
ments. Other factors that come into picture are the extent of enzymatic inactivation
and nutrient retention. Thus, the process is designed such that it is safe and results in
maximum nutrient retention and the appropriate level of enzymatic inactivation.
2.5.1 FEDERAL REGULATIONS AND HACCP
Unlike in European countries, where regulations are based on spoilage tests, the
latitude for variability in process conditions. In the U.S., different regulatory agencies
and rules apply to different products. For example, UHT milk processing is covered
under title 21 (parts 108, 113, 114) of the code of federal regulations (CFR). The
process should also adhere to the pasteurized milk ordinance (PMO). When meat is
involved, the regulations are imposed by the USDA. In addition to these regulations,
certain states have state regulations imposed on certain processes. During the past
few years, HACCP has gained tremendous importance and its implementation has
been extended by the FDA to various products after its initial application to certain
2.5.2 KINETICS OF MICROBIAL DESTRUCTION, ENZYME INACTIVATION, AND NUTRIENT RETENTION
There are several techniques to estimate the extent of heat treatment received by vari-
ous components in a food. The most direct technique to do this is by measuring the
situation. Thus, indirect mechanisms, such as the change in color of a dye or the extent
of sucrose inversion are used. As far as microorganisms go, one of the techniques
to ascertain the extent of microbial destruction is by using an alginate particle with
spores of Bacillus stearothermophillus embedded in it. The gel ensures that the micro-
organisms do not leak out and result in inaccurate degree of microbial destruction.
When vegetative cells of bacteria are subjected to harsh conditions (high heat or
lack of nutrients), they form a hard proteinaceous coating outside the cell that can with-
stand the harsh conditions, and go into a passive stage and the organisms in this state
are called spores. Inactivating vegetative cells of bacteria can be achieved relatively
easily (few minutes at ∼ 80°C) while inactivating the spores requires relatively high
heat treatment (few minutes at ∼ 120°C). The heat resistance of bacteria (vegetative cells
55534_C002.indd 4155534_C002.indd 41 10/22/08 8:25:00 AM10/22/08 8:25:00 AM
and melting point indicators (that melt at a specific temperature) are some of the
FDA requires microbiological tests to prove the safety of a process with sufficient
acidified and low-acid canned foods.
other techniques that can be used to determine the temperature within fluids and
clear fluids on-line.
temperature at the desired locations. However, this is not easy in a continuous flow
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
42 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
and spores) is affected by previous events such as incubation temperature (resistance
increases as incubation temperature is raised closer and closer to the optimum growth
temperature), age (least resistant in logarithmic growth phase and most resistant in the
last part of the lag phase and also in the stationary phase), growth medium (more nutri-
tious the growth medium, more resistant the spore), and drying (some spores become
more heat resistant after drying). Other factors affecting heat resistance are presence of
ionic species, oxygen content, water activity (moist heat is generally more effective than
dry heat), pH (acid medium is usually more effective than alkaline medium which is
usually more effective than neutral medium), salts and sugars (high concentrations are
effective in reducing their resistance), and proteins and fats (the presence of these mate-
rials increases the heat resistance). Thus, it is important to determine the heat resistance
of the organisms of concern in the substrate of interest and under the appropriate pro-
cessing condition. It should also be noted that bacteria which tend to clump together are
generally more resistant to heat and care has to be exercised when dealing with them.
Most chemical and microbiological reactions encountered in thermal processing
lncc
k t0
⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟= − T
where c0 is the initial concentration of the species under consideration, c is the con-
centration after time t, and kT is the rate of the reaction. For microbial destruction,
the concentration in the above equation is replaced by the number of viable micro-
organisms, and the rate of reaction is replaced by the decimal reduction time (DT) to
yield the following equation (expressed in base 10):
logNN
tD0
⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟= −
T
with the decimal reduction time (in minutes) being related to the rate of the reaction
(in seconds) by the following expression:
Dk
T
T
=2 303
60
.
When a semi-logarithmic plot is made between the number of viable microorgan-
isms (on the y-axis on a logarithmic scale) and time in minutes (on the x-axis), a
straight line is obtained. The slope of this line is equal to the negative reciprocal of
the decimal reduction time. This graph is also referred to as the survivor curve, ther-
mal death curve, inactivation curve or the thermal death time (TDT) curve.
The dependence of the rate of the reaction, kT, on temperature, is given by the
following equation by Arrhenius:
k Be E R Ta gT = _ /
with B being a constant which is referred to as the collision number or frequency
factor and Ea being the activation energy. In the above equation, both B and Ea are
55534_C002.indd 4255534_C002.indd 42 10/22/08 8:25:01 AM10/22/08 8:25:01 AM
are first order equations and are given by the following equation:
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Aseptic Processing of Liquid and Particulate Foods 43
assumed to be independent of temperature. However, there are other models that do
not make this assumption. For Clostridium botulinum, researchers [46] determined
the appropriate value of B to be 2 × 1060 s−1 and Ea to be 310.11 kJ/mol−K.
Another commonly used technique to express the dependence of the rate of reac-
tor as the ratio of the reaction rates at two temperatures. When these temperatures
are 10°C apart, the quotient indicator is then referred to as Q10 and is given by:
Qk
k
D
DT
T
T
T10
10
10
10= = =+
+
10/z
The Q10 value for Clostridium botulinum is 10.
2.5.2.1 Process Lethality and Cook Values
The decimal reduction time of bacteria depend strongly on temperature and is given
by the following expression:
logD
DT T
zref
ref⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟= −
−
where Dref is the decimal reduction time at a reference temperature of Tref and z is the
temperature change required for an order of magnitude change in the decimal reduc-
tion time. The z value for Clostridium botulinum is 18°F (or 10°C).
Lethal rate (LR), which is a measure of the rate of inactivation of the microor-
ganisms at any given temperature, is given by:
LR ref ref
T
= =−10( )/T T z DD
For a constant temperature process, the above approach can be used. However, when
the process temperature changes, F value is used to calculate the total lethal rate as
follows:
F dt dt
t
T T z
t
ref= =∫ ∫ −( )
( )/LR
0 0
10
The F value at a reference temperature of 250°F (or 121.1°C) and a z value of 18°F
(10°C) is referred to commonly as the F0 value and is thus evaluated as shown
below:
F dtT
t
0250 18
0
10= −∫ ( )/
Another term that is commonly encountered in aseptic processing is lethality. Lethal-
ity is the ratio of the F0 value of the process to the F0 value required for commercial
sterility. Thus, process lethality must be at least unity for commercial sterility.
55534_C002.indd 4355534_C002.indd 43 10/22/08 8:25:02 AM10/22/08 8:25:02 AM
tion on temperature is the quotient indicator method which defines a quotient indica-
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
44 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
An F0 value of 5 minutes indicates that the process is equivalent to a heat treat-
ment of 5 minutes at 250°F. It can be thus seen that many combinations of time
and temperature can yield an F0 value of 5 minutes. The appropriate combination
of time and temperature that is used for processing is based on other factors such
as nutrient retention and enzyme destruction. This is where the cook value (C) of a
process comes into picture. The cook value is a measure of the extent of destruction
of enzymes or nutrients and is given by:
C dtT T z
t
ref c= −∫ 10
0
( )/
with zc being analogous to z for microorganisms. Similar to F0, C0 is the reference
cook value based commonly on a reference temperature of 100°C and the zc value
is much higher than that for microorganisms (e.g. 33°C for thiamine destruction).
Graphical methods or optimization models are then used to determine the optimum
time-temperature combination that renders the product safe and also retains the
maximum possible amount of nutrients.
2.5.2.2 Commercial Sterility of the Product
vative method is generally employed. The conservative approach involves the assump-
tion that particles neither receive lethality nor any heat treatment in the heat exchanger.
This approach is referred to as the ‘hold only’ approach. The other two commonly
used approaches are the ‘F0 hold’ and the ‘total system’ approach. In the ‘F0 hold’
approach, it is assumed that particles gain heat treatment in the heat exchanger, but
not lethality. In the ‘total system’ approach, it is assumed that particles gain heat treat-
ment and also accumulate lethality in the heat exchanger. The reason for not including
lethality accumulated in the cooling section is that it is possible for particulates to
break in the cooling section and thereby get cooled rapidly and hence not receive the
assumed heat treatment and hence lethality.
2.6 FROM AN IDEA TO COMMERCIALIZATION
In order to commercially produce aseptically processed low-acid foods (pH > 4.6)
containing large particulates (diameter > 4.6 mm), there are several hurdles to over-
come. It all begins with an idea for the product. Let us for example consider a product
such as 1/2" carrot cubes (10% w/w) suspended in a 1% CMC solution. This is the
product that we would like to aseptically process, package, and market as a high
quality shelf-stable product.
cubes (mildly blanched) and a supplier who can provide easy to dissolve, shear-stable
CMC powder of satisfactory initial microbiological count. The next step is to deter-
mine the tentative process layout. This includes the choice of pump, heat exchanger,
holding tube, cooling unit, and packaging equipment.
Let us begin by determining the appropriate pump to be used. Since we are
dealing with large particulates, a piston pump such as the 20 hp Marlen twin-piston
55534_C002.indd 4455534_C002.indd 44 10/22/08 8:25:03 AM10/22/08 8:25:03 AM
When insufficient data are available regarding cold spots in the product, a very conser-
The first step is to identify a supplier who can provide high quality 1/2" carrot
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Aseptic Processing of Liquid and Particulate Foods 45
pump (Model 629A, Marlen Research Corp., KS) will be an appropriate choice. This
damage to the particles. The product is batched in a 200 gallon tank using an Admix
Rotosilver submersible High-shear Mixing unit (Admix Inc., Londonderry, NH).
The next step is to identify the appropriate heating system. In situations where
there are large particles, a scraped surface heat exchanger or a volumetric heating
system is usually employed. Here, we select a scraped surface heat exchanger
(SSHE) equipped with steam seals for aseptic processing applications (Model 6×9,
Alfa Laval, Newburyport, MA) as the pre-heater (the speed of rotation of the rotor is
set at 175 rpm and measured using an optical tachometer) and a 30 kW, 40.68 MHz
to room temperature and a certain elevated temperature and the RF heater is the
penetration of the electromagnetic waves.
The holding tube is one of the most important parts of the aseptic processing
system as this is where the product receives its heat treatment from a commercial
sterility standpoint. A stainless steel helical holding tube assembly (coil diameter 1")
uniform heat treatment of the product.
The product is then cooled in a hydrocoil cooling unit (ASTEC, IA). A hydrocoil
cooling unit will result not only in rapid cooling of the product, but will also be gentle
enough to the product so as to not cause disintegration of the particulates. The cool-
continuously circulating through the system).
The packaging unit used in this case is a single lane, two-head Metal Box cup
Filler (model SL1-15, Metal Box, Reading, UK) with a peroxidase spray system and
Louisville, KY). The package used was a 12-oz cup with an aluminum foil used to
heat-seal the top.
The data acquisition system consisted of a datalogger (Model CR10, Campbell
at the entrance and exit of the pump, SSHE, RF heater, holding tube, and cooling
section using type T thermocouples (Omega Engineering, Stamford, CT) installed
Back pressure is provided to the system by means of a lobe pump (Model 45U2,
Waukesha-Cherry Burrell, Delavan, WI) along with a T-junction with a manual con-
trol back pressure valve in the vertical section and a wire mesh screen that ensured
passed through to the lobe pump.
The next step is to use mathematical modeling to design the length of the holding
tube based on the properties of the product, process parameters, and other system
55534_C002.indd 4555534_C002.indd 45 10/22/08 8:25:04 AM10/22/08 8:25:04 AM
MA) as the final heater. The SSHE serves to bring up the temperature of the product
finisher which has the effect of minimizing the difference in temperature between
an agitated raque tank (100 gallon PF-2-5-1A agitated filler, Food Systems Inc.,
Scientific, Logan, UT) and multiplexer capable of handling 32 channels which were
with sanitary fittings.
type of pump will not only result in uniform product flow rate, but also minimal
continuous flow radio frequency heater (Model 464, Radio Frequency Co., Millis,
the fluid and particle since a low frequency (40.68 MHz) translates to a high depth of
is used. A helical holding tube results in the development of secondary flow and
ing medium is chilled water flowing through the system at a high flow rate (20 gpm
hence causes mixing of the solid–liquid mixture and hence translates to a relatively
of chilled water constantly flowing in and out of the system and 200 gpm of water
run using the software PC208W 3.0. The temperatures of the fluid are monitored
that only the fluid portion passed through the back pressure valve and the particles
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
46 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
parameters. For the heat exchanger and the holding tube sections, the theory of the
mathematical modeling has been presented in previous sections of this chapter.
However, for modeling heat transfer in the RF heater, another model has to be used.
Based on the modeling studies, the length of the holding tube is appropriately chosen
(conservative estimate). During the modeling, care should be taken to account for
studies should be conducted to determine the rheological behavior of CMC as a func-
tion of shear rate, time, and the high temperatures encountered during processing.
This can be done using a controlled stress rheometer (Stresstech, ATS Rheo Systems,
Bordentown, NJ). During the modeling, conservative estimates of convective heat
calorimeter.
ent magnetic strengths) into several cube-shaped tracer particles in order to deter-
mine the residence times of the particles in various sections of the aseptic processing
system (especially the holding tube section). Care is taken to compensate for the
higher density of the magnets than the tracer particle since particle density is a major
factor affecting the fastest particle residence time. Magnetic coils situated outside
the tubes of the processing line picked up the signals produced by the motion of
the magnets throughout the system, and this enables us to determine the residence
times and hence the residence time distribution and also the fastest particle residence
created by the RF system. Based on statistics, it has been shown that the residence
of collecting the fastest 1% of the particles.
The next step is to perform biological validation tests. These tests are performed
at various stages of the process—just after start-up, during the middle of the run,
and just before shut-down. These tests account for variations during the process
and also for factors such as fouling. The validation tests are conducted at different
temperatures to document a positive/negative result at the end of the process. This
will aid in determining the minimum allowable process temperature that will result
in a safe process. Microbiological validation tests are done using PA 3679 inoculated
within alginate particles. Care should be taken to ensure that the spores do not leach
5
decimal reduction time of the organisms used is determined by means of thermal
the predicted temperatures and lethalities in order to ensure that the model results in
a conservative prediction of process lethality.
down and care should be taken to ensure that these parameters remain within an
acceptable range. Some of the parameters include hydration time, mixing/batching
55534_C002.indd 4655534_C002.indd 46 10/22/08 8:25:04 AM10/22/08 8:25:04 AM
transfer coefficients and thermal diffusivities are used. Thermal conductivity is mea-
change in viscosity of the suspension as a function of time. To aid this, benchtop
sured using the line heat source probe and specific heat is measured using a mixing
The first phase in experimental studies is to incorporate tiny magnets (of differ-
time. The magnets are of low enough strength to not affect the electromagnetic field
times of at least 299 particles must be determined in order to have a 95% confidence
10 spores per particle is used, a final count of <1 would indicate a safe process. The
death time studies. Based on all of these tests, a process is designed and finally
verification of the established process has to be conducted. During this process of
verification, comparisons are made between actual temperatures and lethalities to
Once verification is successful, all the process and system parameters are noted
out into the fluid. If the target for the process was a 5D process, and an initial load of
time, temperatures at various locations, product flow rate, back pressure, and product
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Aseptic Processing of Liquid and Particulate Foods 47
with the FDA using form 2541C. A comprehensive overview of the procedures and
has been given in a report elsewhere [47]. This is based on the workshops organized
by the Center for Advanced Processing and Packaging Studies (CAPPS) and the
National Center for Food Safety and Technology (NCFST).
2.7 CONCLUDING REMARKS
Aseptic processing has undergone a variety of changes since its inception as far as
equipment, operating procedures, and critical points of concern. With the advent
of new technologies to inactivate microorganisms, some of the existing problems,
such as slow heating of particles, can be overcome. Nevertheless, new technologies,
since the target microorganism, extent of enzymatic inactivation and other factors
might change. Despite the hurdles posed by aseptic processing, the high quality of
the end-product will make this technology more prevalent in the US market as con-
sumers are becoming more conscious about the nutritive value of foods and leading
a healthy lifestyle.
NOMENCLATURE
a Radius of particle, m
A Surface area, m2
B Arrhenius parameter, Pa−s
c Final concentration of species
co Initial concentration of species
p−K
c1, c2 Constants
C Cook value, min
d
d Diameter of tube, m
D Diameter of helical coil, m
Dc Characteristic dimension, m
Ds Diameter of shaft of SSHE, m
DT Decimal reduction time at temperature T, min
Dvertical Vertical dimension, m
Ea Activation energy, J/kg−mol
Ef Loss in energy due to friction, J/kg
Ep Energy to be supplied by pump, J/kg
f Friction factor
F Force, N
F0 F-value when reference temperature is 250°F and z-value is 18°F, min
Fb Buoyancy force, N
Fd Drag force, N
Frk Magnus lift force, N
55534_C002.indd 4755534_C002.indd 47 10/22/08 8:25:05 AM10/22/08 8:25:05 AM
properties. The final step in commercialization of the product involves process filing
processes involved in process filing for a product such as the one discussed above
such as the use of high pressure or pulsed electric field, have to be carefully studied,
c Specific heat, J/kg
C Drag coefficient
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
48 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
Fs Saffman lift force, N
g Acceleration due to gravity, m/s2
h 2−K
Hc Enthalpy of condensate, J/kg
Hs Enthalpy of steam, J/kg
Hv Enthalpy of vapor, J/kg
I Moment of inertia, kg-m2
jH Colburn j-factor
k Thermal conductivity, W/m−K
kT Reaction rate constant at temperature T, s−1
n
K Curl of velocity
lh Hydrodynamic entry length, m
lt Thermal entry length, m
L Length of tube, m
Lc Characteristic length, m.
mp Mass of particle, kg
n Flow behavior index
N Final bacterial count
Nb Number of blades
NBi Biot number
NDe Dean number
NFo Fourier number
NGGr Generalized Grashof number
NGPr Generalized Prandtl number
NGRe Generalized Reynolds number
NGr Grashof number
NGz Graetz number
NNu Nusselt number
No Initial bacterial count
NP Number of particles
NPe Peclet number
NPr Prandtl number
NRe Reynolds number
NRec Critical Reynolds number
P Pressure, Pa
Q Energy transferred, W
Q10 Quotient indicator
r Radial location, m
R Radius of tube, m
Rep Particle Reynolds number
Rg Universal gas constant, J/kg-mol-K
S Source term, W/m3
t Time, s
T Temperature, K
55534_C002.indd 4855534_C002.indd 48 10/22/08 8:25:06 AM10/22/08 8:25:06 AM
Convective heat transfer coefficient, W/m
K Consistency coefficient, Pa-s
m Mass flow rate, kg/s
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Aseptic Processing of Liquid and Particulate Foods 49
Ti Initial temperature, K
Tk
T∞ Free stream temperature, K
u Velocity, m/s–u Average velocity, m/s
u, v, w x, y, and z components of velocity respectively, m/s
U 2
.3
V Velocity, m/s
<V> Volume, m3
X Quality of steam
z Temperature change required for an order of magnitude change in decimal
reduction time, °C
Z Height, m
GREEK LETTERS
α Thermal diffusivity, m2/s2
−1
ρ Density, kg/m3
ε Roughness of pipe, m
ϕ, θ Spherical coordinates
σ Shear stress, Pa
σ0 Yield stress, Pa
γ. Shear rate, s−1
λ Latent heat of vaporization, J/kg
λc Curvature
μ Viscosity, Pa−s
μe Effective viscosity, Pa−s
ΔPf Pressure loss due to friction, Pa
Δr, Δx Thickness, m
ΔT Temperature difference, K
ψ Constant
Ω Angular velocity, rad/s
Φ Particle concentration
SUBSCRIPTS
c Coiled tube
cs Cooling section
f Fluid
fp Fluid–particle interface
ht Holding tube
hx Heat exchanger
i Inside
ins Insulation
55534_C002.indd 4955534_C002.indd 49 10/22/08 8:25:06 AM10/22/08 8:25:06 AM
Overall heat transfer coefficient, W/m -K
β Coefficient of volumetric thermal expansion, K
Local torque exerted by fluid, N-m
V Volumetric flow rate, m /s
b Bulk fluid
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
50 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
lm Logarithmic mean
max Maximum
o Outside
p Particle
ps Particle surface
ref Reference temperature
s Straight tube
st Steam
w Wall
REFERENCES
1. David, J.R.D., Graves, R.H., and Carlson, V.R. 1996. Aseptic processing and packaging of food: A food industry perspective. Boca Raton, FL: CRC Press, 21–29.
4(20): 208–23.
azine Series 7 5: 673–95.
4. Truesdell, L.C., and Adler, R.J. 1970. Numerical treatment of fully developed laminar
5. Taylor, G.I., and Yarrow, F.R.S. 1929. The criterion for turbulence in curved pipes.
Proceedings of the Royal Society of London A124: 243–49.
6. Koutsky, J.A., and Adler, R.J. 1964. Minimization of axial dispersion by use of sec-
239–46.
Society A123: 645–63.
8. Srinivasan, P.S., Nandapurkar, S.S., and Holland F.A. 1968. Pressure drop heat transfer
in coils. The Chemical Engineer May 46: 113–19.
9. Berger, S.A., Talbot, L., and Yao, L.S. 1983. Flow in curved pipes. Annual Review of Fluid Mechanics 15: 461–512.
11: 133–156.
13. Dutta, B., and Sastry, S.K. 1990. Velocity distributions of food particle suspensions in
Journal of Food Science 55(5): 1448–53.
14. Palmieri, L., Cacace, D., Dipollina, G., and Dall’Aglio, G. 1992. Residence time distri-
Journal of Food Engineering 17: 225–39.
15. Sancho, M.F., and Rao, M.A. 1992. Residence time distribution in a holding tube. Journal of Food Engineering 15: 1–19.
16. Sandeep, K.P., and Zuritz, C.A. 1995. Residence times of multiple particles in non-
sionless correlations. Journal of Food Engineering 25: 31–44.
17. Baptista, P.N., Oliveira, F.A.R., Caldas, S.M., and Oliveira, J.C. 1996. Effect of product
tubes. Journal of Food Processing and Preservation 20: 467–86.
55534_C002.indd 5055534_C002.indd 50 10/22/08 8:25:07 AM10/22/08 8:25:07 AM
coiled tube of finite pitch. Chemical Engineering Communications 7: 57–78.
2. Dean, W.R. 1927. Motion of fluid in a curved pipe. Philosophical Magazine Series 7
3. Dean, W.R. 1928. The stream-line motion of fluid in a curved pipe. Philosophical Mag-
flow in helically coiled tubes. AIChE Journal 16: 1010–14.
ondary flow in helical tubes. The Canadian Journal of Chemical Engineering 42:
7. White, C.M. 1929. Streamline flow through curved pipes. Proceedings of the Royal
10. Moody, L.F. 1944. Friction factors for pipe flow. ASME Transactions 66: 671–84.
11. Colebrook, C.F. 1939. Friction factors for pipe flow. Institute of Civil Engineering
12. Manlapaz, R.L., and Churchill, S.W. 1980. Fully developed laminar flow in a helically
holding tube flow: Experimental and modeling studies on average particle velocities.
bution of food suspensions containing large particles when flowing in tubular systems.
Newtonian holding tube flow: Effect of process parameters and development of dimen-
and process variables in the flow of spherical particles in a carrier fluid through straight
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Aseptic Processing of Liquid and Particulate Foods 51
square ducts. Journal of Fluids Engineering 115: 292–301.
19. Tucker, G.S., and Withers, P.M. 1994. Determination of residence time distribution of
of Food Process Engineering 17: 401–22.
20. Ahmad, M., Singh, S.N., and Seshadri, V. 1993. Distribution of solid particles in mul-
Handling 13(2): 379–85.
21. Sandeep, K.P., Zuritz, C.A., and Puri, V.M. 1997. Residence time distribution of par-
holding tubes. Journal of Food Science 62(4): 647–52.
22. Bird, R.B., Stewart, W.E., and Lightfoot, E.N. 1960. Transport phenomena. New York,
NY: John Wiley and Sons. 91–103.
23. Fichtali, J., van de Voort, F.R., and Doyon, G.J. 1993. A rheological model for sodium
Blackcurrant juices. Journal of Food Engineering 15: 63–73.
25. Xuewu, Z., Xin, L., Dexiang, G., Wei, Z., Tong, X., and Yonghong, M. 1996. Rheologi-
cal models for Xanthum gum. Journal of Food Engineering 27: 203–9.
ASAE Paper No. 876537.
Engineering Science, Doctoral Thesis. New York University.
Mechanics 22(2): 385–400.
30. Clift, R., and Gauvin, W.H. 1971. Motion of entrained particles in gas streams. The Canadian Journal of Chemical Engineering 49: 439–48.
31. Maesmans, G., Hendrickx, N., DeCordt, S., Francis, A., and Tobback, P. 1992. Fluid-
Journal of Food Processing and Preservation. 16: 29–69.
33. McCabe, W.L., Smith, J.C., and Harriott, P. 1985. Unit operations in chemical engi-
neering. 4th edn. Singapore: McGraw-Hill. 294–354.
34. Beek, N.J., and Eggink, R. 1962. In Developments of Heat Transfer. Cambridge, MA:
The M.I.T. Press. Edited by W. M. Rohsenow. p. 334.
Food Engineering 11: 159–74.
port Phenomena. Elsevier Applied Sciences Publishers. London, England: Edited by
Maguer, M.L., Jelen, pp. 259–72.
38. Perry, R.H., and Chilton, C.H. 1973. Chemical engineer’s handbook. Singapore:
McGraw-Hill Book Company.
39. Zitoun, K.B., and Sastry, S.K. 1994. Determination of convective heat transfer coef-
experimental techniques. Journal of Food Process Engineering 17: 209–28.
40. Weisser, H. 1972. Untersuchungen zum Warmeubergang im Kratzkuhler. PhD thesis.
Germany: Karlsruhe Universitat.
55534_C002.indd 5155534_C002.indd 51 10/22/08 8:25:08 AM10/22/08 8:25:08 AM
24. Ibarz, A., Pagan, J., and Miguelsanz, R. 1992. Rheology of clarified fruit juices. II:
to-particle heat transfer coefficient determination of heterogeneous foods: A review.
35. Zuritz, C.A., McCoy, S.C., and Sastry, S.K. 1990. Convective heat transfer coefficients
18. Chen, W., and Jan, R. 1993. The torsion effect on fully developed laminar flow in helical
nonsettling food particles in viscous food carrier fluids using hall effect sensors. Journal
tisized particulate slurry flow through a 90° pipe bend in horizontal plane. Bulk Solids
ticles during two-phase non-Newtonian flow in conventional as compared with helical
26. Sastry, S.K., and Zuritz, C.A. 1987. A model for particle suspension flow in a tube.
27. Oliver, D.R. 1962. Influence of particle rotation on radial migration in the Poiseuille
caseinate. Journal of Food Engineering 19(2): 203–11.
flow of suspension. Nature 194: 1269–1291.
28. Theodore, L. 1964. Sidewise force exerted on a spherical particle in a Poiseuille flow.
29. Saffman, P.G. 1965. The lift on a small sphere in a slow shear flow. Journal of Fluid
32. Christiansen, E.B., and Craig, Jr., S.E. 1962. Heat transfer to pseudoplastic fluids in
laminar flow. AIChE Journal 8(2): 154–60.
for irregular particles immersed in non-Newtonian fluid during tube flow. Journal of
36. Filkova, I., Koziskova, B., Filka, P. 1986. Heat transfer to a power law fluid in tube
flow: An experimental study. In Food Engineering and Process Applications. 1: Trans-
37. Wilkinson, W.L. 1960. Non-Newtonian fluids. London: Pergamon. p. 104.
ficient between fluid and cubic particles in continuous tube flow using noninvasive
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
52 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
41. Skelland, A.H.P., Oliver, D.R., and Tooke, S. 1962. Heat transfer in a water-cooled
scraped-surface heat exchanger. British Chemical Engineering 7(5): 346–353.
in curved circular tubes. International Journal of Heat and Mass Transfer 15: 801–17.
circular tubes with uniform wall temperature. AICHE Journal 20(2): 340–46.
44. Janssen, L.A.M., and Hoogendoorn, C.J. 1978. Laminar convective heat transfer in
helical coiled tubes. International Journal of Heat and Mass Transfer 21: 1197–206.
45. Willhoft, E.M.A. 1993. Aseptic processing and packaging of particulate foods. London: Blackie Academic and Professional: 6–7.
46. Simpson, S.G., and Williams, M.C. 1974. An analysis of high temperature short time
47. CAPPS&NCFST. 1996. Case study for condensed cream of potato soup. Aseptic Pro-cessing of Multiphase Foods Workshop. Nov. 14–15, 1995; Mar. 12–13, 1996.
55534_C002.indd 5255534_C002.indd 52 10/22/08 8:25:08 AM10/22/08 8:25:08 AM
42. Kalb, C.E., and Seader, J.D. 1972. Heat and mass transfer phenomena for viscous flow
43. Kalb, C.E., and Seader, J.D. 1974. Fully developed viscous-flow heat transfer in curved
sterilization during laminar flow. Journal of Food Science 39: 1047–54.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
53
3 Modeling Moisture Diffusion in Food Grains during Adsorption
Kasiviswanathan Muthukumarappan and S. Gunasekaran
CONTENTS
3.1 Introduction .....................................................................................................54
3.2 Moisture Diffusion in Food Grains ................................................................ 55
3.2.1 Various Moisture Transport Mechanisms ........................................... 55
3.2.1.1 Knudsen Diffusion ................................................................ 55
3.2.1.2 Stefan Diffusion .................................................................... 55
3.2.1.3 Mutual Diffusion ................................................................... 55
3.2.1.4 Poiseuille Flow ...................................................................... 55
3.2.1.5 Condensation–Evaporation Theory ...................................... 57
3.2.1.6 Capillary Flow ...................................................................... 57
3.2.1.7 Liquid Diffusion .................................................................... 57
3.2.1.8 Surface Diffusion .................................................................. 57
3.2.2 Coupled Heat and Moisture Transport ................................................ 57
3.2.3 Characterization of Shape for Modeling Moisture
Diffusion in Grains .............................................................................. 58
3.3 Modeling Moisture Diffusion in Food Grains ................................................ 59
3.3.1 Theoretical Considerations .................................................................. 59
3.3.1.1 Boundary Condition .............................................................. 59
3.3.2 Numerical Formulation ....................................................................... 61
3.4 Moisture Diffusion in a Corn Kernel During Adsorption .............................. 61
3.4.1 Corn Structure ..................................................................................... 61
3.4.2 Moisture Diffusivity Determination ................................................... 62
3.4.2.1 Germ ..................................................................................... 62
3.4.2.2 Pericarp .................................................................................66
3.4.2.3 Soft and Hard Endosperms ................................................... 70
3.4.3 Finite Element Simulation of Corn Moisture Adsorption ................... 74
3.5 Recommendations ........................................................................................... 76
Nomenclature ...........................................................................................................77
References ................................................................................................................ 78
55534_C003.indd 5355534_C003.indd 53 10/22/08 8:27:50 AM10/22/08 8:27:50 AM
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
54 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
3.1 INTRODUCTION
Food grains are hygroscopic and hence adsorbs or desorbs moisture depending upon
the environment. Moisture diffusivity is a physical property of measurement, which
aids in studying the moisture diffusion mechanism. Moisture gradients prevalent
within a food grain due to the moisture adsorption/desorption phenomenon may lead
to the development of internal stresses [1,2]. The internal as well as external stresses
because they are quite susceptible to breakage during handling and cause problems
in storage, shipping, and processing [3]. If the stresses developed within the kernels
development. However, such an estimation requires accurate determination of mois-
ture diffusivity of the grain components and a description of moisture adsorption
and/or desorption mechanisms.
Adsorption and desorption are different mechanisms and there exists a hyster-
esis between them. That is, the equilibrium moisture content attained by grains via
desorption is higher than that via adsorption for a particular temperature and relative
humidity condition. There have been many theories to explain this hysteresis. Chung
and Pfost [4] postulated that more sorption sites or polar sites are available to water
vapor for the desorption process than for the adsorption process. That is, the mois-
ture transport mechanisms of desorption and adsorption are different. Desorption
and adsorption processes are subjected to the same physical laws and thus can be
treated analogously. Variations in the rate of desorption and adsorption (diffusion)
occur due to the boundary conditions at the medium interface and may cause the
apparent hysteresis in the sorption isotherms. It should be emphasized that during
low temperature deep bed drying, while some parts of a large mass lose moisture
(desorption), others are simultaneously gain moisture (adsorption). Thus, models
that cover both desorption and adsorption processes are needed.
Extensive research work has been done on drying of different grains with a pri-
mary focus on modeling diffusion of moisture [5,6] and determining moisture dif-
fusivities of major grain components. However, only limited information is available
on diffusion of moisture in grains during adsorption [7,8]. In general, the moisture
diffusivity of grains during adsorption is lesser (at least one order of magnitude) than
during desorption. For example, rice kernels had a moisture diffusivity of 1.3 ×10−7
during desorption and 1.2 ×10−8 m2/h during adsorption. Experimental methods of
diffusivity determination, collecting moisture content data at various points inside
the corn kernel over a time period, require sophisticated sensors and are cumber-
some. Mathematical models, based on physical principles, can potentially predict
with reasonable accuracy the moisture distribution inside the kernel during adsorp-
tion. However, for improved accuracy the mathematical models require the moisture
diffusivities of kernel components during adsorption. Moisture diffusivity of grain
components during adsorption is also needed to better understand the moisture trans-
port in grain conditioning, storage, deep-bed drying and aeration processes.
uct quality are needed. In this chapter, different mathematical models to determine
the moisture diffusivity of individual components of any heterogeneous food grain
55534_C003.indd 5455534_C003.indd 54 10/22/08 8:27:51 AM10/22/08 8:27:51 AM
cause grain kernels to fissure. Fissured or stress-cracked kernels are objectionable
can be calculated accurately, better processes can be designed to reduce fissure
For efficient processing operations quantitative and predictive models relating to
the physical properties of food to transient time-moisture profiles that determine prod-
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Modeling Moisture Diffusion in Food Grains during Adsorption 55
are described. As an example, the developed models were validated using the mois-
ture adsorption data in a corn kernel. Moisture diffusivity of individual components
of a corn kernel namely pericarp, germ, soft and hard endosperms were determined
inside the corn kernel.
3.2 MOISTURE DIFFUSION IN FOOD GRAINS
3.2.1 VARIOUS MOISTURE TRANSPORT MECHANISMS
The mechanisms of moisture movement within a product can be primarily summa-
rized as water–vapor transport mechanisms and liquid–water transport mechanisms
(Figure 3.1). The water–vapor transport mechanism consists of Knudsen diffusion,
liquid diffusion, and surface diffusion [9]. Among these, diffusion is the dominant
mechanism.
3.2.1.1 Knudsen Diffusion
One of the water–vapor transport mechanisms within a product may be explained
in terms of the Knudsen diffusion mechanism as outlined in Figure 3.1. This type
the mean free-path of molecules is more than the pore size and the molecules col-
density and the Knudsen vapor diffusivity within the product. The size and amount
as represented in the equation column.
3.2.1.2 Stefan Diffusion
pressure, and the Stefan vapor diffusivity within the product. A constant diffusivity
is assumed.
3.2.1.3 Mutual Diffusion
Mutual diffusion is predominant in solids with large pores, whose size is much more
than the free-path of the diffusing vapor molecules. The roles Knudsen and mutual
diffusions perform are commensurable within a certain range of pore sizes and gas
pressures.
3.2.1.4 Poiseuille Flow
55534_C003.indd 5555534_C003.indd 55 10/22/08 8:27:51 AM10/22/08 8:27:51 AM
using the finite difference, analytical, and finite element methods, respectively. The
developed finite element model was also used to predict the moisture distribution
of diffusion occurs in gas-filled solids with small pores, or under low pressure when
Stefan diffusion, Mutual diffusion, poiseuille flow, and condensation–evaporation.
On the other hand the liquid–water transport mechanisms consists of capillary flow,
lide with the walls more often than between themselves. Molecule reflection from
the walls is normally diffuse. In this case, the water flux is a function of the vapor
of pores, tortuosity, and the geometry of the solid matrix affect the water vapor flux
In the case of Stefan diffusion, the water flux is a function of the vapor pressure, total
Poiseuille flow is pressure-induced flow in a long duct. It is also called channel flow.
In this case, it is assumed that there is laminar flow of an incompressible Newtonian
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
56 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
Type Picture Equations
2 2Π3
Knudsendiffusion
Stefandiffusion
Mutual
diffusion
Poiseuille
Condensation–
evaporation
Capillary
flow
Liquid
diffusion
Surface
diffusion
d
h
d
nd
w
nP
RTkP – P
w
Mwd
w
1w
= –ετβDkw
∇ρ
nd
w1w
= –ετDwg
∇ρ
–ετDwg
∇Pw
∇P
Dkw
Dwg
d ( )RTk
Mw
=
=
= 2.5 × 10–5 (m2/s)
1/2
nd2ρ32µ
dw
n nw (∇T
k,·····)
–ρ1 χ ∇θ
–ρ1 Dwg ∇ω
w
–ρ1 Dsu ∇ω
w
dw
n 1w
–ετ
=
=
n1
w =
n1
w =
=
FIGURE 3.1 Various mechanisms of moisture transport in porous materials. (From S
Bruin, KChAM Luyben. 1980. Drying of food materials: A review of recent developments.
Advances in Drying. Vol. 1, 155–215. New York: Hemisphere Publishing Corporation.)
55534_C003.indd 5655534_C003.indd 56 10/22/08 8:27:52 AM10/22/08 8:27:52 AM
flow
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Modeling Moisture Diffusion in Food Grains during Adsorption 57
drop ΔP in a pipe of length L and diameter d << L.
3.2.1.5 Condensation–Evaporation Theory
Water vapor within the solid is condensed near the surface. This assumes that the
rate of condensation is equal to the rate of evaporation at the surface of the solid, and
allows no accumulation of water in the pores near the surface. This theory takes into
account the simultaneous diffusion of heat and mass, which assumes that the pores
are a continuous network of spaces in the solid.
3.2.1.6 Capillary Flow
Moisture which is held in the interstices of solids, as liquid on the surface, or as free
moisture in cell cavities, moves by gravity and capillarity, provided that passageways
point, as in textiles, paper, and leather, and to all moisture above the equilibrium
such as soil, sand, and clays.
3.2.1.7 Liquid Diffusion
The movement of liquids by diffusion in solids is restricted to the equilibrium
moisture content below the point of atmospheric saturation and to systems in which
moisture and solid are mutually soluble. This applies to the drying of clays, wood,
soaps, and pastes.
3.2.1.8 Surface Diffusion
Surface diffusion is observed during adsorption of a diffusing substance by a solid.
Since the equilibrium surface gas concentration increases with an increase in partial
pressure of the adsorbed species, a surface concentration gradient of a diffusing
substance appears in the surface layer of a pore. Under certain conditions like high
The mechanisms described above refer only to a single-component diffusion.
Multicomponent diffusion in porous solids is very complex. Because of its complex
nature, it has been inadequately investigated.
3.2.2 COUPLED HEAT AND MOISTURE TRANSPORT
The behavior of any food material during drying and rewetting depends on the heat
and mass transfer characteristics of the product being dried or wetted. Knowledge
of the temperature and moisture distribution in these products is vital for equipment
and process design, quality control and choice of appropriate storage practices.
Wang and Hall [10] stated that if temperature distribution within the medium is
uniform, the assumption of moisture concentration as the driving force is adequate.
55534_C003.indd 5755534_C003.indd 57 10/22/08 8:27:53 AM10/22/08 8:27:53 AM
applies to liquids not held in solution and to all moisture above the fiber-saturation
moisture content at atmospheric saturation, as in fine powders and granular solids,
fluid of viscosity μ induced by a constant positive pressure difference or pressure
for continuous flow are present. In drying, liquid flow resulting from capillarity
temperature, this may enhance the total flow of a diffusing component.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
58 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
This assumption is reasonable since grains respond to temperature differences more
rapidly than to moisture differences [11]. Further, Sharaf-Eldeen et al. [12] reported
that the body temperature of grains approached the drying air temperature in a small
fraction of the total drying time and thus temperature could be omitted in the model.
Young [13] described a mathematical model for drying of a porous sphere using the
diffusion equation for both moisture and heat transfer, assuming that moisture diffu-
number is greater than 60 (negligible temperature gradient).
About a decade ago, coupled heat and mass transfer equations have been solved
for an isotropic sphere with constant material properties [14]. In 1992, Irudayaraj et al.
[15] developed a comprehensive model that describes the heat and mass transfer in
a wide range of food grains (soybean, barley, and corn kernels) with varying mate-
rial properties. Their simulated results from the heat and mass transfer models agreed
well with the experimental results. Recently, Irudayaraj and Wu [16] developed models
incorporating heat, mass, and pressure transfer equations to describe the moisture dif-
fusion process in a barley kernel during soaking. The results obtained from the heat,
mass, and pressure transfer show a marked difference from the results obtained from
the heat and mass transfer model. This indicated that a pressure gradient exists during
Coupling the effect of moisture and temperature may be important for accurately mod-
eling the drying process. But for adsorption, the coupling effect may not be important
because the adsorption process takes much longer (48–50 h) than the desorption pro-
cess (6–10 h).
3.2.3 CHARACTERIZATION OF SHAPE FOR MODELING MOISTURE DIFFUSION IN GRAINS
Thin-layer models can be divided into three groups: (1) empirical models, (2) semi-
empirical models, and (3) theoretical models. Among these, theoretical models provide
the most information about the moisture transport inside grains.
Young and Whitaker [17] and Whitaker and Young [18] evaluated different
an empirical model during drying of peanuts. They found that the diffusion equa-
tion better represented the drying than did the empirical model. Moreover, they
and Okos [19] qualitatively explored the diffusion path of gaseous sulfur dioxide
(SO2) into yellow dent corn. They showed that SO2 enters at the tip cap, moves
up through the area between the pericarp and seed coat, and then diffuses into
the endosperm. Their observations clearly indicate that the pericarp of corn acts
as a diffusion barrier even to gaseous SO2. Modeling diffusion in cereal grains
using the spherical diffusion model is thus inappropriate because the model does
Recently, Eckhoff and Okos [20] modeled the gaseous SO2 sorption by corn as an
insulated cylinder with one end open for diffusion. Walton et al. [21] cautioned that
55534_C003.indd 5855534_C003.indd 58 10/22/08 8:27:53 AM10/22/08 8:27:53 AM
sivity is a linear function of moisture content. He defined a modified Lewis number
and suggested that the moisture diffusion equation alone is sufficient if the Lewis
the soaking process, causing additional moisture movement due to filtration effect.
diffusion equations for a plane sheet, finite and infinite cylinders, and a sphere and
concluded that the finite-cylinder model best fit the experimental data. Eckhoff
the diffusion coefficient that is determined with one geometric shape couldn’t be
not adequately reflect the true nature of the diffusional processes via the tip cap.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Modeling Moisture Diffusion in Food Grains during Adsorption 59
used with another geometric shape. Muthukumarappan and Gunasekaran [22–25]
evaluated the effect of different shapes in determining the moisture diffusivity of
tion data.
3.3 MODELING MOISTURE DIFFUSION IN FOOD GRAINS
3.3.1 THEORETICAL CONSIDERATIONS
of Fick’s law of diffusion developed by Crank [26] were used. The differential equa-
tion with initial and boundary conditions to describe the system are:
∂∂
∂∂
∂∂
M
t xD
M
xm nm=
⎡
⎣⎢⎢
⎤
⎦⎥⎥ =1, (3.1)
∂∂M
Xx= = ≥0 0 0; ; t
(3.2)
M M x l l t= = − >e 2 2; , ; 0 (3.3)
M M l x l t= − < < =0 2 2; ; 0 (3.4)
The following assumptions were made in solving Equation 3.1:
1. Initial moisture content is uniform throughout the kernel.
2. Grain is isothermal during adsorption; i.e. the heat transfer equations may
be neglected.
3. Moisture diffusivity is constant throughout the adsorption process.
4. Grain components are homogeneous and isotropic.
5. Expansion of the kernel during adsorption is negligible.
3.3.1.1 Boundary Condition
The boundary condition given in Equation 3.3 implies that the moisture content at
the kernel surface reaches equilibrium with the environment instantaneously. New-
man [27] disputed this assumption during drying. Shivhare et al. [28] assumed that
the surface moisture reaches equilibrium exponentially during microwave drying
of corn. Muthukumarappan [8] found, during adsorption, that the numerical model
adsorption curve better than the model with assumption of instantaneous equilib-
rium surface moisture. Walton et al. [21] assumed a boundary condition, which is
55534_C003.indd 5955534_C003.indd 59 10/22/08 8:27:54 AM10/22/08 8:27:54 AM
corn samples and found that the infinite slab model fitted the experimental adsorp-
A typical kernel is irregular in shape. Therefore, three geometries, namely, an infinite
slab, an infinite cylinder, and a sphere were considered. The corresponding solutions
with assumption of exponentially varying surface moisture fitted the experimental
a function of the convective mass transfer coefficient in developing a drying model
for corn. However, the experimental convective mass transfer coefficient values at
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
60 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
different temperature and relative humidity (RH) conditions during adsorption are
a function of adsorption time. Following these investigations, the surface moisture
content was assumed to vary exponentially with adsorption time. The boundary con-
dition describing the moisture content at the kernel surface (Ms, %) and the surface
moisture ratio (MRs) can be written as:
M kt M M Ms e 0 0= − − × − +[ exp( )]1 [ ] (3.5)
MRss 0
e 0
=−−
= − −M MM M
kt[ exp( )]1 (3.6)
Moisture ratio (MR) of a multicomponent system can be modeled as:
MR MRi ( ) ( )t X ti,j
ij j=∑ (3.7)
where i = grain type (1 = soft and 2 = hard) and j = grain components
Instead of geometrically modeling the whole kernel, individual components
(namely pericarp, soft and hard endosperms and germ) can be modeled independently
using Equation 3.7. The number of components are those components that have
differing properties namely pericarp, soft and hard endosperms and germ for a corn
kernel. Similarly other grains namely rice, wheat and soybean can be modeled using
the above approach.
The Cartesian coordinates were used to represent the grain as a two-dimensional
body. The general diffusion equation, which describes the moisture transport, has
the form:
∂∂
Δ ΔM
tD M= ( ) (3.8)
In two-dimensions it becomes,
∂∂
∂∂
∂∂
∂∂
∂∂
M
t xD
M
x yD
M
y=
⎡
⎣⎢⎢
⎤
⎦⎥⎥ +
⎡
⎣⎢⎢
⎤
⎦⎥⎥ (3.9)
The initial and boundary conditions are:
M M t= =0 , 0 (3.10)
and
M Kt M M M , ts e 0 0 0 on= × >[ exp( )]1− − − +[ ] Ω (3.11)
where, Ω constitutes the complete boundary surface for the body.
55534_C003.indd 6055534_C003.indd 60 10/22/08 8:27:55 AM10/22/08 8:27:55 AM
not currently available. This makes it difficult to predict surface moisture content as
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Modeling Moisture Diffusion in Food Grains during Adsorption 61
3.3.2 NUMERICAL FORMULATION
The element equations were developed by transforming the governing differential
equations using the Galerkin’s weighted residual approach. After the formulation,
� �M C M Kj ij
j
n
j
j
n
ij[ ] [ ]
= =∑ ∑+ =
1 1
0 (3.12)
where the element moisture capacitance matrix,
[ ]C N N x yij i j
A
= ∫ d d (3.13)
and the element moisture conductance matrix,
[ ]KN
x
N
x
N
y
N
yD x yij
i j i j
A
= +⎡
⎣⎢⎢
⎤
⎦⎥⎥∫ ∂
∂∂∂
∂∂
∂∂
d d (3.14)
Assembling the element matrices in Equation 3.12 using Equation 3.13 and Equation
3.14, the global matrix equation can be written as:
[ ]{ } [ ]{ }C M K M� + = 0 (3.15)
where [C] and [K] are the global moisture capacitance and conductance matrices.
The solution of Equation 3.15 will result in moisture values at every time step in the
domain of interest.
For the transient case under consideration, an implicit technique (backward dif-
tions incorporating the known boundary conditions, had the following form:
([ ] [ ]) [ ]C t K M C M tFt t t t t+ = ++ +Δ ΔΔ Δ (3.16)
3.4 MOISTURE DIFFUSION IN A CORN KERNEL DURING ADSORPTION
3.4.1 CORN STRUCTURE
broad at the apex of its attachment to the cob. The kernel is composed of germ,
kernel and is strongly adherent to the seed coat. The hard endosperm is found on the
55534_C003.indd 6155534_C003.indd 61 10/22/08 8:27:56 AM10/22/08 8:27:56 AM
the element equations can be written in a simplified form as:
ference scheme), which is unconditionally stable, was used. The final system of equa-
Corn is a complex cereal grain. The kernel is flattened, wedge-shaped, and relatively
soft (floury) and hard (horny) endosperm, and pericarp. The pericarp surrounds the
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
62 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
sides and back of the kernel and bulges in toward the center at the sides. The soft
the germ. The pericarp, the outermost part of the kernel and a major part of what
the millers know as hull, is composed of several layers. Most important is the outer
layer, the epidermis, which is more or less cutinized on its outer surface. Cutin is
relatively impervious to moisture, so the cutinized surface of the epidermis acts as a
barrier to moisture movement during adsorption. Typically a soft corn kernel is com-
posed of 5% pericarp, 10% germ, 48% soft endosperm and 37% hard endosperm.
And a hard kernel is composed of 4% pericarp, 9% germ, 21% soft endosperm and
66% hard endosperm [8].
3.4.2 MOISTURE DIFFUSIVITY DETERMINATION
Chittenden and Hustrulid [29] reported that mean diffusivity of shelled corn varied
linearly with the initial moisture content; they concluded that actual diffusivity should
depend also on moisture content at any point within the kernel. Steffe and Singh
moisture content. But Hsu et al. [30] demonstrated that during soaking of soybeans,
the moisture diffusivity is strongly dependent upon moisture content of the seeds
and that the diffusion equation with constant diffusivity is inadequate in describing
the water absorption curve. More recently Lu and Siebenmorgen [31] modeled the
moisture diffusion in rough, brown, and milled rice during adsorption with constant
diffusivity. Their predictions agreed well with the experimental adsorption data.
temperature. This has been demonstrated during drying of rough rice [32,33,34];
brown and milled rice [35]; peanut [18]; corn [21]; and wheat [36]. Chu and Hustrulid
medium and moisture content of corn during drying. Recently, Lu and Siebenmorgen
[31] described the dependency of diffusivity of rough, brown and milled rice on
temperature by an Arrhenius-type function during adsorption. Further they agreed
diffusivity may depend on moisture content of a material and follow an exponential
relative humidity of the environment is not clearly understood.
3.4.2.1 Germ
Three types of samples, namely, corn germ, soft corn (FR27 × MO17), and hard
corn (P3576) were tested. Corn germ obtained from Archer Daniels Midland (ADM)
Company was used. ADM used steam tube dryers to remove moisture from the corn
germ. The germ had oil content of 44–48% and initial moisture content of 3–4%
[38]. Two types of corn, namely soft and hard, of different densities 1229 and 1327
kg/m3 respectively, were used in this study. The soft corn was grown on the Agri-
cultural Research Station Farm at the Purdue University, West Lafayette, IN and
combine-harvested at about 27% moisture content during Fall 1990. The hard corn
was obtained from Frito-Lay Inc., Sidney, IL at about 15% moisture content during
55534_C003.indd 6255534_C003.indd 62 10/22/08 8:27:56 AM10/22/08 8:27:56 AM
endosperm fills the crown (upper part) of the kernel, extends downward to surround
[5] verified that liquid diffusivity of rice components did not vary with the initial
The fluid parameters affecting moisture diffusion are temperature and RH.
Diffusion of moisture is generally enhanced by the temperature of the fluid medium
(air) and has an exponential relationship (Arrhenius-type) with the inverse of the fluid
[37] reported the diffusion coefficient as a function of temperature of the fluid
that the relative humidity had some influence on moisture diffusivity. Therefore, the
relationship with fluid temperature. But the dependence of diffusivity of grains on
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Modeling Moisture Diffusion in Food Grains during Adsorption 63
Spring 1991. The corn samples were dried using natural air at a temperature of 23°C
and RH of 55%.
The dried corn samples were hand-cleaned to remove the broken kernels. The
moisture content of the samples was determined, by the oven method [38], to be
about 9–10%. The samples were stored in a refrigerator maintained at 5°C and
58% RH until the experiments. The adsorption tests were conducted in a controlled
environment chamber (2.21 × 0.74 ×1.95 m) available in the Biotron at the Univer-
sity of Wisconsin-Madison. The environment for this experiment consisted of four
air temperatures of 25, 30, 35, and 40°C with each at two RH values of 75 and 90%.
Temperature and RH of the air in the chamber were maintained within 0.1°C and
1.0%, respectively. Air was circulated constantly at 0.5 m/s during the tests.
Two 50g samples of each variety of corn and 25g samples of germ were placed
in individual perforated wire-meshed containers. The individual sample depth was 10
mm. This depth was chosen in order to acquire thin-layer adsorption data. The con-
tainers were individually supported with a load cell (Omega Model No. LCL-227G;
rated capacity of 227 g). The output signals from the load cells were transmitted to a
high-speed analog I/O board (DAS16G1, National Instruments) and a personal com-
digital data from the output signal were acquired through a DAS16G1 interface card.
The data were saved on the computer using the software EASYEST LX. The volt-
age values from the load cell were converted to the corresponding mass values after
calibrating each load cell with a set of known masses. The weight measurements were
taken at 15-min interval. The tests were conducted for 48–72 h during which the sam-
ple moisture content reached near-equilibrium with the chamber.
Fick’s law of diffusion model considers the geometry of corn germ and corn kernel
multivariate secant method [39]. The moisture diffusivity was estimated by minimiz-
ing the sum of square deviations (SSD) between the experimental and theoretical corn
adsorption data. The characteristic dimensions of the germ and corn kernel were deter-
mined at the initial moisture content. Further details of the dimension measurement
can be found in Muthukumarappan and Gunasekaran [22]. As a preliminary analysis,
the diffusivities of corn germ and corn kernels exposed to air at 25°C and 90% RH
tion behavior of corn germ and corn kernels. Therefore, the moisture diffusivity of
corn germ and corn kernels at other humid conditions was determined using only the
0.99, 2.08 and 2.40 mm for corn germ, kernels of FR27 × MO17 and P3576 variety
corn, respectively. A multifactor analysis of variance [40] was performed to study the
effects of air temperature, relative humidity, and type of corn on moisture diffusivity.
moisture at the kernel surface is approaching equilibrium with the environment.
In selecting the K values, it was assumed that the moisture content at the surface
reaches equilibrium halfway through the adsorption process, i.e. MR = 0.5. This
assumption is reasonable because the diffusivity is traditionally determined by cal-
culating the time taken to reach MR = 0.5 [26]. Moreover, the effect of varying MR
55534_C003.indd 6355534_C003.indd 63 10/22/08 8:27:57 AM10/22/08 8:27:57 AM
puter (Diversified Systems 486) through an Expansion Multiplexer (EXP-16). The
as an infinite slab, an infinite cylinder, and a sphere used for diffusivity determination.
The first ten terms of each model were considered using the non-linear, least square
were determined using infinite slab, infinite cylinder, and sphere models. Based on the
SSD values it was found that the infinite slab model best predicts the moisture adsorp-
infinite slab model. The characteristic dimensions used in the infinite slab model were
The surface adsorption coefficient (K) in Equation 3.6 indicates how fast the
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
64 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
Therefore, the time taken to reach the moisture ratio of 0.5 was determined from
the experimental data. This time value was substituted in Equation 3.6 to obtain
the K value. At this time the surface moisture ratio should be, theoretically, unity.
However, a value of MRs = 0.998 was assumed since MRs = 1 only at t = ∞. Values
of MRs ranging from 0.99 to 0.999 were evaluated and it was found that MRs = 0.998
conditions are presented in Table 3.1. Using the K values in Table 3.1, the surface
moisture values were calculated as a function of time. These surface moisture val-
diffusivity of corn samples with varying surface moisture content was estimated
moisture ratio) and the theoretical data using the non-linear, least square multivari-
ate secant method [39].
The moisture ratio for corn germ and corn samples (FR27 × MO17) exposed to
air at 35°C and 75% RH are presented in Figure 3.2. Due to the smaller size of corn
germ compared to the whole kernel, the germ approached the equilibrium moisture
the germ than for the corn samples. Compared to the experimental values for both
corn germ and corn kernels the model initially overpredicted and then underpre-
dicted the moisture ratio.
The moisture diffusivity values obtained for corn germ and composite corn kernel
at different humid air conditions are presented in Table 3.2. In general, the moisture
diffusivity increased with increasing temperature. In classical theory [41], increased
temperature is interpreted to mean an increase in the average energy for each mode
of motion of vapor (translational, rotational and vibrational motions). Therefore, an
increase of temperature must mean an increase in the probability that the energy
of the mode of motion required for interaction will attain a high value more fre-
quently. The moisture diffusivity of germ decreased with increasing RH. During the
adsorption tests, the concentration gradient is higher at higher RH. This higher con-
centration gradient should lead to higher moisture diffusivity values. But the opposite
trend was observed. At this time there is no conclusive explanation for this trend. The
effective moisture diffusivity of the composite corn kernels. This could be due to
TABLE 3.1−1) Values Used in Equation 3.6
Corn without Pericarp Corn with Pericarp
Temperature (oC) Germ FR27×MO17 P3576 FR27×MO17 P3576
25 0.776 0.672 0.388 0.487 0.371
30 1.381 1.036 0.829 0.606 0.592
35 1.776 1.130 0.888 0.710 0.777
40 2.072 1.243 1.036 1.036 0.921
55534_C003.indd 6455534_C003.indd 64 10/22/08 8:27:58 AM10/22/08 8:27:58 AM
(MR = 0.6, 0.7, 0.8 and 0.9) on the goodness of fit was also investigated. From the
preliminary investigation it was found that MR = 0.5 assumption best fitted the data.
gave the best fit to the adsorption data. The values of K for all the environmental
ues were then used to calculate the modified moisture ratio with time. The moisture
by minimizing the sum of square deviations between the experimental (modified
moisture diffusivity values of corn germ were about two to five times lower than the
Surface Adsorption Coefficient (K, h
content more rapidly than the corn. This is reflected by the higher moisture ratio for
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Modeling Moisture Diffusion in Food Grains during Adsorption 65
presence of oil in the germ. The difference was higher at low temperatures (25 and
30°C) and lower at high temperatures (35 and 40°C). From the multifactor analysis of
variance tests, it was found that the differences in moisture diffusivity values obtained
0.05 level. The mean moisture diffusivity value of corn germ varied from 0.15 ×10−7
to 1.18 ×10−7 m2/h for different air temperature and RH conditions.
1.0
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0.00 10 20 30 40
Time, h
Corn germ
Corn
Model predicted
Modif
ied m
ois
ture
rat
io
FIGURE 3.2
moisture content assumption.
TABLE 3.2Moisture Diffusivities (m2/h) of Pericarp, Germ, Soft and Hard Endosperms of a Corn
Adsorption Condition Moisture Diffusivity
Pericarp (×10−8)
Germ (×10−7)
Soft Endosperm
(×10−7)
Hard Endosperm
(×10−7)Composite
(×10−7)Temperature (oC) RH (%)
25 75 0.41 0.27 0.825 0.450 0.97
80 0.34 0.17 0.733 0.320 0.68
90 0.30 0.15 0.546 0.420 0.60
30 75 0.45 0.54 1.014 0.652 1.01
80 0.42 0.20 0.997 0.566 0.90
90 0.42 0.18 0.923 0.549 0.78
35 75 0.52 0.66 1.245 0.733 1.24
80 0.49 0.33 1.142 0.680 1.20
90 0.47 0.24 1.056 0.639 0.88
40 75 0.57 1.18 1.460 0.919 1.40
80 0.53 0.40 1.221 0.687 1.32
55534_C003.indd 6555534_C003.indd 65 10/22/08 8:27:58 AM10/22/08 8:27:58 AM
Modified moisture ratio for corn germ and corn kernels exposed to air at 35°C
and 75% RH. The Fick’s analytical model was used for an infinite slab with varying surface
at different air temperatures, RH, and type of corn were statistically significant at the
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
66 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
The moisture diffusivity values of corn germ obtained during the adsorption
study are lower than the published values during drying (desorption). For example,
within the 10–24% moisture content range, reported diffusivity values of germ
ranged from 5.974 ×10−7 to 34.731×10−7 m2/h [6]. In general, the Fick’s diffusion
model better predicted the adsorption of corn germ than that of the composite corn
kernel. One of the possible reasons is that the germ is more homogeneous than the
composite corn kernel.
Temperature dependency of the moisture diffusivity of corn germ was modeled
as an Arrhenius-type function used by Lu and Siebenmorgen [31]:
D ABT
= exp −⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟
a
(3.17)
2
tion) values are summarized in Table 3.3. This model was satisfactory as evidenced
by high R2 values.
3.4.2.2 Pericarp
Two types of corn were used namely soft (FR27 × MO17) and hard (P3576) with den-
sities of 1229 and 1327 kg/m3, respectively. To remove the corn pericarp, preliminary
TABLE 3.3
a
for Temperature Dependency of Moisture Diffusivity of Corn Germ, Pericarp, Soft and Hard Endosperms
Component RH (%) A B R2
75 1.122 × 105 8645.3 0.964
Germ 80 3.568 5727.4 0.956
90 0.028 4313.9 0.981
75 4.917 × 10−7 2116.1 0.991
Pericarp 80 3.961 × 10−6 2783.3 0.967
90 3.293 × 10−4 4137.1 0.928
75 9.338 × 10−3 3463.7 0.996
Soft endosperm 80 2.795 × 10−3 3127.4 0.911
90 0.418 × 102 6081.5 0.901
75 3.282 × 10−5 1884.8 0.991
Hard endosperm 80 0.2243 4657.7 0.903
90 1.803×10−2 3862.3 0.978
* D = moisture diffusivity (m2/h); Ta = absolute temperature (K).
55534_C003.indd 6655534_C003.indd 66 10/22/08 8:27:59 AM10/22/08 8:27:59 AM
The model coefficients A and B and the corresponding R (coefficient of determina-
Coefficients of Arrhenius-type Model (D =A exp(−B/T )*)
Coefficients
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Modeling Moisture Diffusion in Food Grains during Adsorption 67
experiments were conducted by soaking corn kernels in 25°C water for 15, 30, 60, and
120 s. The pericarp was carefully removed using a razor blade. Corn kernels soaked
for 30 s absorbed less than 1% moisture and facilitated easy removal of the pericarp.
The adsorption tests were conducted as explained in Section 3.4.2.1.
The corn kernel was modeled as a slab core (corn without pericarp composed of
soft and hard endosperms and germ) surrounded by a slab shell (pericarp) as shown
in Figure 3.3. First, adsorption of corn without pericarp (the slab core) was pre-
dicted numerically by solving the diffusion equation (in Cartesian coordinates) and
the diffusivity of corn without pericarp was determined. Next, adsorption of corn
with pericarp (the slab core and shell) was predicted numerically. The diffusivity of
corn pericarp was determined using the diffusivity of corn without pericarp and the
experimental adsorption data for corn with pericarp.
The following assumptions were made in developing the adsorption models:
1. Mechanism of moisture transport is diffusion.
2. Corn is isothermal during adsorption; i.e. the heat transfer equations may
be neglected.
Material 1
Corn without pericarp
Material 2
pericarp
D1
l1
l1
Δ Δ l2
D2
j + 1jj – 1
l2
FIGURE 3.3 Schematic of a corn kernel modeled as a slab core (corn without pericarp) and
slab shell (pericarp).
55534_C003.indd 6755534_C003.indd 67 10/22/08 8:28:00 AM10/22/08 8:28:00 AM
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
68 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
dimensional and end effects may be neglected.
4. Moisture diffusivity is constant throughout the adsorption process.
5. Germ, soft and hard endosperms, and pericarp are homogeneous and
isotropic.
6. Expansion of the corn kernel during adsorption is negligible.
The differential equation with initial and boundary conditions as shown in Equa-
equations proposed by Crank and Nicolson [42] and summarized by Strikwerda [43]
were used to solve the differential equations. Due to symmetry, only one-half of the
whole system was considered for the analysis (Figure 3.3). Equation 3.1 should satisfy
Muthukumarappan [8] the nodal moisture contents were predicted.
The average moisture content of the corn can be obtained by volume averag-
ing the nodal moisture content values. Therefore, the moisture ratio of corn during
adsorption can be stated as a function of time (t):
vM(x)dv M
M Mf (t)
∫ −−
0
e 0
= (3.18)
the Thomas algorithm [43]. One program was used to determine the diffusivity of
corn without pericarp and the other program was used to determine the diffusivity of
corn pericarp. The listing of these programs can be found in Muthukumarappan [8].
Space intervals of 0.01 mm and 0.001 mm were used for corn without pericarp and
corn pericarp, respectively. An interval of 0.25 h was used for the time marching.
The thicknesses of corn with and without pericarp were determined for 50 kernels
each using a micrometer. They were 4.16 and 4.04 mm for the soft corn with and
without pericarp and 4.80 and 4.66 mm for the hard corn with and without peri-
carp, respectively. Moisture ratio was calculated from the average moisture content.
The moisture diffusivity was estimated by minimizing the sum of squares deviation
between the experimental and predicted moisture ratio data. A multifactor analysis
of variance [40] was performed to study the effects of air temperature, RH, and peri-
carp on moisture diffusivity.
which the kernels surface moisture approaches the equilibrium moisture as described
in Section 3.4.2.1. The values of K for all the environmental conditions (Table 3.1)
were used to calculate the surface moisture contents as a function of time. These
surface moisture values were then used in the numerical model as the time-varying
boundary condition.
The variation of moisture ratio with time for corn samples (FR27 × MO17)
exposed to air at 35°C and 75% RH, is presented in Figure 3.4. The corn samples
without pericarp attained higher moisture ratios than the samples with pericarp.
Compared with the experimental data for corn samples without pericarp the model
55534_C003.indd 6855534_C003.indd 68 10/22/08 8:28:01 AM10/22/08 8:28:01 AM
3. Geometrically, the corn kernel is an infinite slab, i.e. the diffusion is one-
tions 3.1 through 3.4 were used with n = 2. The Crank–Nicolson finite difference
every point inside the system. Using the finite difference formulations explained in
Two FORTRAN programs were written to solve the finite difference equations using
The surface adsorption coefficient (K) was determined to represent the rate at
overpredicted during the first 10 h of adsorption and then underpredicted. But the
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Modeling Moisture Diffusion in Food Grains during Adsorption 69
opposite trend was obtained for the samples with pericarp. This might be related to
the resistance of the pericarp to moisture movement interacting with the boundary
condition.
The moisture diffusivity values of pericarp at different humid air conditions are
presented in Table 3.2. In general, the moisture diffusivity decreased with increasing
RH and increased with increasing temperature. Similar trends were observed for corn
germ and composite corn kernels during adsorption tests and possible explanations
for these trends can be found in Section 3.4.2.1. The moisture diffusivities of compos-
ite corn samples were much higher (about two orders of magnitude) than the pericarp.
This shows that the pericarp offers substantial resistance to moisture migration into
corn kernels.
From the multifactor analysis of variance test, it was found that the differences
in moisture diffusivity values between air temperatures, RH, and corn without
ture diffusivity of pericarp varied from 0.30 ×10−9 to 0.57 ×10−9 m2/h for different
air temperature and RH conditions. Diffusivity values of the pericarp obtained in
this adsorption study are lower than the published values during drying (desorp-
tion). For example, within 10–24% moisture content, reported diffusivity values of
pericarp varied from 0.568 ×10−7 to 3.299 ×10−7 m2/h [6]. The moisture diffusivi-
ties of pericarp were much lower (about two orders of magnitude) than the germ
(Table 3.2). The mean moisture diffusivity of corn germ varied from 0.15 ×10−7 to
1.18 ×10−7 m2/h for different air temperature and RH conditions. This shows that
the pericarp offers higher resistance to moisture movement into corn kernels than
the germ.
2
tions are summarized in Table 3.3. In view of the high R2 values, the Arrhenius-type
model satisfactorily described the temperature dependency of diffusivity.
Without pericarp
ExperimentalPredicted
With pericarp
1.0
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
Mois
ture
rat
io
0.00 10 20 30 40
Time, h
Experimental
Predicted
FIGURE 3.4 Experimental moisture ratio for corn samples (FR27 × MO17) exposed at 35°C
55534_C003.indd 6955534_C003.indd 69 10/22/08 8:28:01 AM10/22/08 8:28:01 AM
and 75% RH and predicted moisture ratio of corn samples using finite difference method.
pericarp and pericarp were statistically significant at 0.05 level. The mean mois-
Temperature dependency of the diffusivity of corn pericarp was fitted to the
Arrhenius-type model shown in Equation 3.17. The model coefficients and the corre-
sponding R (coefficient of determination) values for corn pericarp at all RH condi-
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
70 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
3.4.2.3 Soft and Hard Endosperms
The diffusivities of the soft and hard endosperm were determined using Equation
3.10 along with the adsorption data for soft (FR27 × MO17) and hard (P3576) corn.
The details of sample preparation and adsorption tests are presented in Section
3.4.2.1. The mass of individual components was determined by carefully breaking
of moisture in the individual components was estimated from the total amount of
moisture in each corn type (Si) and the component mass fraction (Xij). The soft corn
was composed of 5% pericarp, 10% germ, 48% soft endosperm, and 37% hard endo-
sperm. The hard corn was composed of 4% pericarp, 9% germ, 21% soft endosperm,
and 66% hard endosperm [8]. It was assumed that the differences in moisture diffu-
sion between the two types of corn were due to different amounts of soft and hard
endosperms in both types of corn. The amount of moisture in each component (Mj)
was determined by normalizing the total mass of both types of corn to the compo-
nent’s total mass as:
M S X
Xji ij
ji
=∑∑
(3.19)
The diffusivities of the soft and hard endosperm were determined using Equation
3.19 along with the adsorption data for soft (FR27 × MO17) and hard (P3576) corn.
The mass of individual components was determined by carefully breaking and
of moisture in the individual components was estimated based on the component
mass fraction (X11, X12, X13 and X21, X22, X23 for germ, soft and hard endosperms of
each type of corn). Then, the amount of moisture in each component was determined
by normalizing the total mass of both types of corn to the component’s total mass
as explained below:
If C1 = total amount of moisture in corn type 1;
C2 = total amount of moisture in corn type 2;
X11 = mass fraction of germ in corn type 1;
X12 = mass fraction of soft endosperm in corn type 1;
X13 = mass fraction of hard endosperm in corn type 1;
X21 = mass fraction of germ in corn type 2;
X22 = mass fraction of soft endosperm in corn type 2;
X23 = mass fraction of hard endosperm in corn type 2;
then the
amount of moisture in germ =++
C X C X
X X1 11 2 21
11 21
(3.20)
amount of moisture in soft endosperm =++
C X C X
X X1 12 2 22
12 22
(3.21)
55534_C003.indd 7055534_C003.indd 70 10/22/08 8:28:02 AM10/22/08 8:28:02 AM
and weighing the component fragments from five kernels for each corn type. Amount
weighing the component fragments from five kernels from each corn type. Amount
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Modeling Moisture Diffusion in Food Grains during Adsorption 71
amount of moisture in hard endosperm =++
C X C X
X X1 13 2 23
13 23
(3.22)
This procedure can be used for other grains and food materials. Recently, Kang and
Delwiche [44] used this approach for modeling the moisture diffusion in wheat ker-
nels during soaking. In determining the soft and hard endosperms diffusivity values,
element solutions developed by Muthukumarappan [8] the nodal moisture content of
a corn kernel during adsorption was predicted. The average kernel moisture content
(as distinguished from the nodal moisture values) is estimated to be the mass aver-
age value. Assuming constant density, the mass average moisture of a body (M) is
MM x y dm
dmtV
V
= ∫∫
( , )for every Δ (3.23)
mine the diffusivity of individual components, and (2) simulate the moisture adsorption
of grains. The listing of the program is presented in Muthukumarappan [8].
element predicted moisture content data of the individual components. A corn kernel
without pericarp was considered for the analysis. The cross-section of the corn ker-
nel with four distinct regions of germ, pericarp, soft and hard endosperm is shown
in Figure 3.5. The cross-section presented is through the narrowest dimension of the
kernel. The two-dimensional cross section was selected based on average dimension
of two hard corn kernels. Two hard corn kernels were cut through the narrowest
dimension of the kernel. Then the cut kernels were mounted on 10 ×10-mm alu-
minum cylindrical stubs using double-sided sticky tape. Further, silver paint was
applied around the sides of the kernel. The mounted samples were sputtered with
gold to a thickness of about 270°A using a Bio-Rad Polaron Division Gold Coater
(Model E5000M SEM Coater). The samples were examined in a scanning electron
microscope (Model Hitachi S-570) at an accelerating potential of 10 kV and corre-
is shown in Figure 3.6. The two-dimensional model in Cartesian co-ordinates con-
sists of 53 elements.
The diffusivity values of the germ determined previously (Section 3.4.2.1)
using the analytical model was used in the three component FEM. Since we
have two variables to optimize (the diffusivity of soft and hard endosperm), two
sperm model’, an initial diffusivity value of the soft endosperm was assumed
and the hard endosperm diffusivity value was predicted. And for the second
model, called ‘soft endosperm model’, the previously estimated hard endosperm
55534_C003.indd 7155534_C003.indd 71 10/22/08 8:28:03 AM10/22/08 8:28:03 AM
the finite element model described in the previous Section 3.3.2 was used. Four-noded
quadratic finite elements were used for discretization of the domain. Using the finite
defined by Haghighi and Segerlind [14] as
A computer program for two-dimensional steady-state field problems written by
Segerlind [45] was modified to solve the time-dependent diffusion problem. The modi-
fied computer program was written in Fortran77. This program can be used to (1) deter-
The diffusivity values were estimated by optimizing the experimental and finite-
sponding dimensions were determined. A finite-element discretization of the kernel
models were considered simultaneously. For the first model, called ‘hard endo-
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
72 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
diffusivity was used and the new soft endosperm diffusivity was predicted. This
procedure was repeated until the sum of square deviations (SSD) between the
experimental and predicted moisture data was minimized. A subroutine based
on the Gold Section search method [46] was used to optimize the diffusivity
evaluation process.
The experimental and FEM predicted moisture ratios of soft and hard endo-
sperms, exposed to air at 35°C and 90% RH, are presented in Figure 3.7. The moisture
ratio of soft endosperm was higher than that of hard endosperm at intermediate
times. The difference in moisture diffusion rates between the soft and hard endo-
sperms might be due to the packing of starch granules in both types of endosperm.
The starch granules within the hard endosperm cells are small and tightly packed
compared to large and loosely organized granules in the soft endosperm cells. The
soft endosperm might have more sorptive sites for water vapor compared to the hard
endosperm. The moisture diffusivity values of soft and hard endosperm for all the
humid air conditions are presented in Table 3.2.
The moisture diffusivity of hard endosperm was lower than the soft endosperm.
The average diffusivity of soft and hard endosperms increased with increasing air
temperature and decreased with increasing air relative humidity. These trends are
similar to those for corn germ and corn pericarp (Section 3.4.2.1 and Section 3.4.2.2)
Soft endosperm
Hard
endosperm
Germ
0 20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Len
gth
, m
m
Thickness, mm
4
Hard
endosperm
FIGURE 3.5 Cross-section of a corn kernel through its narrowest dimension.
55534_C003.indd 7255534_C003.indd 72 10/22/08 8:28:04 AM10/22/08 8:28:04 AM
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Modeling Moisture Diffusion in Food Grains during Adsorption 73
Soft endosperm
Hard endosperm
Predicted
0 100.0
0.1
0.2
Mois
ture
rat
io
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
20 30 40
Time, h
FIGURE 3.7 Moisture ratio of soft and hard endosperms exposed to air at 35°C and 75%
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
00 2 4
Thickness, mm
Len
gth
, m
m
FIGURE 3.6 Finite element discretization of the corn kernel.
55534_C003.indd 7355534_C003.indd 73 10/22/08 8:28:04 AM10/22/08 8:28:04 AM
RH using finite element method.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
74 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
and have been further explained in Section 3.4.2.1. From the multifactor analysis of
variance [40], it was found that the differences in moisture diffusivity between soft
and hard endosperms for different air temperatures and relative humidity were sta-
The mean moisture diffusivity of the soft endosperm exposed to air at 35°C and
80% RH (1.14 ×10−7 m2/h) is the largest, followed by hard endosperm (0.68 ×10−7
m2/h), germ (0.33 ×10−7 m2/h) and pericarp (0.49 ×10−9 m2/h). From these results,
it is evident that the pericarp offers the most resistance to moisture diffusion fol-
lowed by germ, hard endosperm, and soft endosperm. Based on these values, the
diffusivity of composite corn is expected to be less than 1.14 ×10−7 m2/h. However,
the mean moisture diffusivity of composite corn kernels exposed to air at 35°C and
80% RH is 1.20 ×10−7. This value is higher than expected because it was obtained via
and Gunasekaran [22] compared the diffusivities of corn kernels for three differ-
ent geometry representations. They found that the diffusivity values of corn kernels
allow for a better comparison.
the Arrhenius-type model shown in Equation 3.17 for corn germ and pericarp. The 2
corn endosperm at all RH conditions are summarized in Table 3.3. In view of the
high R2 values, the Arrhenius-type model satisfactorily described the temperature
dependency of diffusivity.
3.4.3 FINITE ELEMENT SIMULATION OF CORN MOISTURE ADSORPTION
A corn variety of FR27 × MO17 was used. The FEM described in the previous
Section 3.4.2.3 was used to simulate the moisture diffusion into a corn kernel. A
sional model in Cartesian co-ordinates consists of 85 elements. The diffusivity
values obtained from the experimental data (Section 3.4.2) were used along with
The corn moisture adsorption was simulated using the FEM and analytical
model. The composite moisture diffusivity values reported in Table 3.2 were used
in the analytical model to simulate the corn moisture adsorption. The experimen-
tal, analytical and FEM simulated moisture ratio of FR27 × MO17 corn samples
exposed to air at 35°C and 75% RH are presented in Figure 3.8. In general, FEM
simulated the experimental moisture ratio very well. The analytical model poorly
tion (MSSD) was used as an indicator to determine the prediction accuracy of the
models studied. Based on the MSSD values, the FEM predictions were clearly
better than the corresponding analytical solutions. This may be because individual
55534_C003.indd 7455534_C003.indd 74 10/22/08 8:28:05 AM10/22/08 8:28:05 AM
tistically significant at the 0.05 level.
one-dimensional analytical models rather than the finite element analysis. Moreover,
the analytical model assumed a regular infinite slab geometry for a corn kernel and
the finite element analysis assumed an actual irregular shape. Muthukumarappan
using the infinite slab geometry were about 1 to 2.5 times the diffusivity values using
the infinite cylinder geometry. Thus the use of more nearly identical models would
Temperature dependency of the diffusivity of corn endosperms were fitted to
model coefficients and the corresponding R (coefficient of determination) values for
finite-element discretization of the kernel is shown in Figure 3.6. The two dimen-
the necessary initial and boundary conditions for the finite element simulation.
over-predicted the finite element model in the early stage of adsorption and under-
predicted the model in the final stage of adsorption. Mean sum of squares devia-
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Modeling Moisture Diffusion in Food Grains during Adsorption 75
component moisture diffusivities of corn were considered for the FEM while com-
posite moisture diffusivity was considered for the analytical model. Ruan et al.
process using a magnetic resonance imaging technique. From the images they
between the germ and endosperm, and through the cross and tube cells of the
pericarp layers. Then it quickly diffused into the germ, and slowly diffused into
the endosperm. From these observations it is clear that the moisture diffusion in a
corn kernel is a complex phenomena and more work is needed to better understand
this behavior.
The FEM predicted nodal moisture contents were transformed to contour plots
sure to air at 35°C and 90% RH is presented in Figure 3.9. The moisture gradient
between the center and surface of corn kernels during simulated moisture adsorption
at 25, 30, and 35°C each at 90% RH is presented in Figure 3.10. In general, the mois-
ture gradient inside a corn kernel during adsorption at 25°C was lower than at 35°C.
of adsorption (up to 5 h). This is because the different moisture diffusivity values
and varying boundary condition were used in the simulation model. The moisture
gradient between the center and boundary of a corn kernel exposed to air at 25, 30,
and 35°C each at 90% RH was about 4% after 1 h, reaching a maximum of about 9%
after 7.5 h, and declined during subsequent adsorption. These times compare well
with Sarwar and Kunze’s [1] experimental observations; the corn samples took about
8 h of adsorption. This shows that the difference in moisture gradient may cause the
was maximum.
1.0
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
0.00 10 20 30 40
Time, h
Experimental
Finite element
Analytical
Mois
ture
ratio
FIGURE 3.8 Moisture ratio of corn kernels exposed to air at 35°C and 75% RH.
55534_C003.indd 7555534_C003.indd 75 10/22/08 8:28:06 AM10/22/08 8:28:06 AM
[47] presented 3-D transient moisture profiles of corn kernels during a steeping
reported that the steepwater moved first into the corn kernel through the space
using Surfer software [48]. The moisture profiles for corn samples after 1 h of expo-
The temperature effect on moisture gradient was significant during the early stage
1 h of exposure for fissures to start developing when exposed to 92% RH at 21°C.
Further they reported that all the kernels exposed to 92% RH at 21°C fissured within
kernels to fissure. In addition, all the kernels may fissure when the moisture gradient
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
76 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
3.5 RECOMMENDATIONS
Future research could be conducted in developing a model to predict possible fail-
A simultaneous heat and mass transfer model could also be developed to predict
9.00
8.00
7.00
6.00
5.00
4.00
3.00
Kern
el le
ngth
, m
m
2.00
1.00
0.000.00 1.00 2.00 3.00 4.00
Kernel thickness, mm
10.2
9.2
9.2
9.2
11.2
FIGURE 3.9 35°C and 90% RH during adsorption.
55534_C003.indd 7655534_C003.indd 76 10/22/08 8:28:06 AM10/22/08 8:28:06 AM
Moisture profile (% wb) within a corn kernel after 1 h of exposure to air at
ures in grains during adsorption and needs to be verified with experimental results.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Modeling Moisture Diffusion in Food Grains during Adsorption 77
temperature and humidity conditions. A storage model may be developed using the
thin-layer moisture adsorption models presented in this chapter.
NOMENCLATURE
[C] Global moisture capacitance matrix
[Cij] Element moisture capacitance matrix
Dm Mass of an element
D Diffusivity, m2/h−1
[K] Global moisture conductance matrix
[Kij] Element moisture conductance matrix
M Mass average moisture content of a body
Mt Moisture content at time t (h), % wb
M0 Average initial moisture content of the kernel, % wb
Me Equilibrium moisture content of the kernel, % wb
Ms Surface moisture content of the kernel, % wb
t Adsorption time, h
x,y Cartesian co-ordinates
Δt Time step, h
Ω Boundary surface of the body
D1 Diffusivity of corn without pericarp, m2/h
10
8
6
4
2
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
Time, h
25°C
30°C
35°C
Mois
ture
gra
die
nt, %
wb
FIGURE 3.10 Moisture gradient (% wb) within a corn kernel with time when exposed to 25,
30, and 35°C each at 90% RH air condition.
55534_C003.indd 7755534_C003.indd 77 10/22/08 8:28:07 AM10/22/08 8:28:07 AM
the temperature and moisture profiles inside a grain during adsorption at different
K Surface adsorption coefficient, h
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
78 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
D2 Diffusivity of pericarp, m2/h
Dm Diffusivity of material m, m2/h
j−1,j,j + 1
l1 Half-thickness of corn without pericarp, m
l2 Half-thickness of corn, m
m Number of components included in the adsorption model
RH Relative humidity, %
Δl1,Δl2 Space interval of corn without pericarp and pericarp, mm
F Varying boundary condition
{M} Nodal moisture values at time t, %{M} Nodal moisture values at time t + Δt, %Mj Amount of moisture in each component jMR(t) Moisture ratio as a function of time, (M−M0)/(Me−M0)
MRi(t) Moisture ratio of corn type iMRj(t) Moisture ratio of the jth component
Si Total amount of moisture in each corn type iTa Absolute temperature, K
Xij Ratio of the mass of the jth component to total mass for each corn type i, fraction
REFERENCES
1. G Sarwar, and OR Kunze. 1989. Relative humidity increases that cause stress cracks in
corn. Transactions of the ASAE 32(5): 1737–43.
enced by drying and rehydration processes. Transactions of the ASAE 25(3): 768–72.
3. S Gunasekaran, and MR Paulsen. 1985. Breakage resistance of corn as a function of
drying rates. Transactions of the ASAE 28(6): 2071–76.
4. DS Chung, and HB Pfost. 1967. Adsorption and desorption of water vapor by cereal
grains and their products. Part I, III. Transactions of the ASAE 10(4): 549–51, 555–57.
5. JF Steffe, and RP Singh. 1980. Liquid diffusivity of rough rice components. Transactions of the ASAE 23(3): 767–74, 782.
yellow-dent corn components. Transactions of the ASAE 30(2): 522–28.
7. MK Misra. 1978. Thin-layer drying and rewetting equations for shelled yellow corn.
PhD thesis, University of Missouri-Columbia, MO.
8. K Muthukumarappan. 1993. Analysis of Moisture diffusion in corn kernels during
adsorption. PhD thesis, University of Wisconsin-Madison, WI.
9. S Bruin, KChAM Luyben. 1980. Drying of food materials: A review of recent devel-
opments. Advances in Drying. Vol. 1, 155–215. New York: Hemisphere Publishing
Corporation.
10. JK Wang, and CW Hall. 1961. Moisture movement in hygroscopic materials: A math-
ematical analysis. Transactions of the ASAE 4(1): 33–36.
11. TB Whitaker, HJ Barre, and MY Hamdy. 1969. Theoretical and experimental studies
the ASAE 12(5): 668–72.
ear corn-I: Mathematical description of the moisture history of fully-exposed ears of
corn. ASAE Paper No. 78–6005. St. Joseph, MI: ASAE.
55534_C003.indd 7855534_C003.indd 78 10/22/08 8:28:08 AM10/22/08 8:28:08 AM
Spatial nodes defined in Figure 3.1
6. MA Syarief, RJ Gustafson, and RV Morey. 1987. Moisture diffusion coefficients for
of diffusion in spherical bodies with a variable diffusion coefficient. Transactions of
2. GM White, IJ Ross, and CG Poneleit. 1982. Stress crack development in popcorn as influ-
12. YI Sharaf-Eldeen, JL Blaisdell, and MY Hamdy. 1978. Factors influencing drying of
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Modeling Moisture Diffusion in Food Grains during Adsorption 79
13. JH Young. 1969. Simultaneous heat and mass transfer in a porous, hygroscopic solid.
Transactions of the ASAE 12(5): 720–25.
14. K Haghighi, and LJ Segerlind. 1988. Modeling simultaneous heat and mass transfer
629–37.
15. J Irudayaraj, K Haghighi, and RL Stroshine. 1992. Finite element analysis of drying
with application to cereal grains. Journal of Agriculture Engineering Research 53:
209–29.
16. J Irudayaraj, and Y Wu. 1995. Effect of pressure on moisture transfer during moisture
adsorption. Drying Technology 13: 1603–17.
17. JH Young, and TB Whitaker. 1971. Evaluation of the diffusion equation for describing
thin-layer drying of peanuts in the hull. Transactions of the ASAE 14(2): 309–12.
18. TB Whitaker, and JH Young. 1972. Simulation of moisture movement in peanut ker-
nels: Evaluation of the diffusion equation. Transactions of the ASAE 15(1): 163–66.
19. SR Eckhoff, and MR Okos. 1989. Diffusion of gaseous sulfur dioxide into corn kernels.
Cereal Chemistry 66(1): 30–33.
20. SR Eckhoff, and MR Okos. 1990. Sorption kinetics of sulfur dioxide on yellow dent
corn. Transactions of the ASAE 33(3): 855–61.
21. LR Walton, GM White, and IJ Ross. 1988. A cellular diffusion-based drying model for
corn. Transactions of the ASAE 31(1): 279–83.
22. K Muthukumarappan, and S Gunasekaran. 1990. Vapor diffusivity and hygro-
scopic expansion of corn kernels during adsorption. Transactions of the ASAE 33(5):
1637–41.
23. K Muthukumarappan, and S Gunasekaran. 1994. Moisture diffusivity of corn kernel
components during adsorption Part I: Germ. Transactions of the ASAE 37(4): 1263–68.
24. K Muthukumarappan, and S Gunasekaran. 1994. Moisture diffusivity of corn kernel com-
ponents during adsorption Part II: Pericarp. Transactions of the ASAE 37(4): 1269–74.
25. K Muthukumarappan, and S Gunasekaran. 1994. Moisture diffusivity of corn kernel
components during adsorption Part III: Soft and Hard Endosperms. Transactions of the ASAE 37(4): 1275–80.
26. J Crank. 1975. The mathematics of diffusion. 2nd ed. London: Oxford University
Press.
27. AB Newman. 1931. The drying of porous solids: Diffusion and surface emission equa-
tions. Transactions of the AICHE 27: 203–20.
28. US Shivhare, GSV Raghavan, and RG Bosisio. 1991. Modeling of microwave-drying of
corn through diffusion phenomena. ASAE Paper No. 91–3520. St. Joseph, MI.
29. DH Chittenden, and A Hustrulid. 1966. Determining drying constants for shelled corn.
Transactions of the ASAE 9(1): 52–55.
30. KH Hsu, CJ Kim, and LA Wilson. 1983. Factors affecting water uptake of soybeans
during soaking. Cereal Chemistry 60(3): 208–11.
31. R Lu, and TJ Siebenmorgen. 1992. Moisture diffusivity of long-grain rice components.
Transactions of the ASAE 35(6): 1955–61.
32. CY Wang, and RP Singh. 1978. A single layer drying equation for rough rice. ASAE
Paper No. 78–3001. St. Joseph, MI.
33. WJ Chancellor. 1968. Characteristics of conducted-heat drying and their comparison
with those of other drying methods. Transactions of the ASAE 11(6): 863–67.
Journal of Agriculture Engineering Research 27(6): 489–93.
35. JF Steffe, and RP Singh. 1980. Diffusivity of starchy endosperm and bran of fresh and
rewetted rice. Journal of Food Science 45(2): 356–61.
36. HA Becker. 1960. On the absorption of liquid water by the wheat kernel. Cereal Chemistry 37(3): 309–23.
55534_C003.indd 7955534_C003.indd 79 10/22/08 8:28:09 AM10/22/08 8:28:09 AM
in an isotropic sphere – A finite element approach. Transactions of the ASAE 31(2):
34. JF Steffe, and RP Singh. 1982. Diffusion coefficients for predicting rice drying behavior.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
80 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
37. ST Chu, and A Hustrulid. 1968. Numerical solution of diffusion equations. Transactions of the ASAE 11(5): 705–8.
38. ASAE Standards. 1990. ASAE S352.2 moisture measurement – unground grain and seeds. 35th ed. 353. St. Joseph, MI: ASAE.
39. SAS Institute Inc. 1987. SAS/STAT guide for personal computers Ver. 6 ed. Cary, NC:
SAS Institute Inc.
40. STSC. 1991. STATGRAPHICS user’s guide. Ver.5 ed. Rockville, MD: STSC, Inc.
41. WM Clark. 1952. The laws of mass-section: Rates and reaction. In Topics in physical chemistry. Baltimore, MD: The Willies & Wilkins Company.
42. J Crank, and P Nicolson. 1947. A practical method for numerical evaluation of solutions
of partial differential equations of the heat conduction type. Proceedings of Cambridge Philosophical Society 43: 50–67.
43. JC Strikwerda. 1989. Finite difference schemes and partial differential equations. 1st
ed. CA: Wadsworth, Inc.
44. S Kang, and SR Delwiche. 1999. Moisture diffusion modeling of wheat kernels during
soaking. Transactions of the ASAE 42(5): 1359–1365.
Sons, Inc.
46. SLS Jacoby, JS Kowalik, and T. Pizzo. 1972. Iterative methods for nonlinear optimiza-tion problems. NJ: Prentice-Hall, Inc.
ing steeping using microscopic NMR imaging. Presented at the 1991 International
Summer Meeting, Paper No. 913055. 2950 Niles Road, St. Joseph, MI.
48. Surfer. 1990. Surfer reference manual. Ver.4. Golden, Colorado: Golden Software, Inc.
55534_C003.indd 8055534_C003.indd 80 10/22/08 8:28:10 AM10/22/08 8:28:10 AM
45. LJ Segerlind. 1984. Applied finite element analysis. 2nd ed. New York: John Wiley and
47. R Ruan, JB Litchfield, and SR. Eckhoff. 1991. Simultaneous and nondestructive
measurement of transient moisture profiles and structural changes in corn kernels dur-
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
81
4 Computer Simulation of Radio Frequency Heating
Yifen Wang and Jian Wang
CONTENTS
4.1 Introduction ..................................................................................................... 82
4.2 Radio Frequency Heating Systems ................................................................. 82
4.2.1 Radio Frequency Power Generators .................................................... 82
4.2.2 Radio Frequency Applicators ..............................................................84
4.3 Dielectric Properties ......................................................................................85
4.3.2 Transmission Properties ......................................................................87
4.3.3 Measurement of Dielectric Properties ................................................. 89
4.3.3.1 Open-ended Coaxial Probe Methods .................................... 89
4.3.3.2 Transmission Line Method ...................................................90
4.3.3.3 Resonance Cavity Method ....................................................90
4.4 Computer Simulation ...................................................................................... 91
4.4.1 Techniques for Solving Electromagnetic Problem .............................. 91
4.4.2 Finite-Difference Time Domain Method ............................................92
4.4.3 Finite Element Method ........................................................................95
4.4.4 Coupling Problem ................................................................................95
4.4.5 Previous Simulation Works .................................................................96
4.4.6 Commercial Electromagnetic Software ..............................................96
4.4.7 Examples of Computer Simulation ......................................................96
4.4.7.1 Simulation on Homogeneous Food .......................................96
4.4.7.1.1 Assumptions ..........................................................99
4.4.7.1.2 Governing Equations........................................... 100
4.4.7.1.3 Model .................................................................. 100
4.4.7.1.4 Simulation Results .............................................. 101
4.4.7.2 Simulation on Heterogeneous Food .................................... 101
4.5 Conclusions ................................................................................................... 102
Nomenclature ......................................................................................................... 108
References .............................................................................................................. 109
55534_C004.indd 8155534_C004.indd 81 10/22/08 8:30:36 AM10/22/08 8:30:36 AM
4.3.1 Definition of Dielectric Properties ......................................................85
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
82 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
4.1 INTRODUCTION
Heating is one of the most essential methods for food preservation. Conventional
heating methods use external heat sources including hot water and steam. Heat is
transferred by conduction, convection, and radiation. The poor thermal conducting
Dielectric heating, which includes radio frequency (RF) and microwave heating,
offers the possibility of fast heating in solid and semi-solid foods. Over the past 60
years, numerous studies have been reported on microwave (300–30,000 MHz) and
RF (10–300 MHz) heating. An advantage of dielectric heating over the conventional
thermal processing is the rapid heating by direct interaction between electromagnetic
ization of individual molecules or causes migration of ions within the material as it
alternates at high frequency [6]. The main difference between RF and microwaves
is wavelength. The wavelength at designated RF heating frequencies (6.78, 13.65,
27.12, and 40.68 MHz) is 22–360 times as great as that of the two commonly used
microwave frequencies (915 and 2450 MHz). This allows RF energy to penetrate
dielectric materials more deeply than microwaves. Therefore, RF heating may be
particularly useful when applied to large size packaged food products including the
6 lb army ration because of its deep penetration. RF heating offers the possibility of
fast heating in solid and semi-solid foods that can overcome the limits of uneven and
slow heating inherent in conventional retorting. To gain a better understanding of the
heating process, to predict heating patterns within the heated region, and to develop
new formulas and appropriate processes for treating them are real challenges due
to the complicity of the physical properties of foods and the interaction mechanism
With the rapid development of computer technology and software over recent years,
computer simulations based on mathematical electromagnetic models may help to face
these challenges. However, the large variety of food compositions, geometric shapes,
and processing requirements make the simulation of RF heating complicated.
4.2 RADIO FREQUENCY HEATING SYSTEMS
Before introducing simulation of RF dielectric heating in food processing, RF heat-
4.2.1 RADIO FREQUENCY POWER GENERATORS
There are two fundamental approaches of equipment design according to different
generators. They are the free running oscillator system (conventional RF heating
equipment) and the Crystal Oscillator Source Matched Impedance Generator system
(COSMIG) [11].
The conventional power oscillator RF heating system consists of a main power, a
high voltage transformer, a self-excited oscillator with one or more triodes, a high volt-
The RF applicator and foods are part of the power generator circuit; a change in the
55534_C004.indd 8255534_C004.indd 82 10/22/08 8:30:37 AM10/22/08 8:30:37 AM
ability of food, especially solid food, results in non-uniform and inefficient heating.
fields, and foods that are hermetically sealed in microwavable packages [1–5]. Heat is
generated within certain materials when the electromagnetic field reverses the polar-
between the electromagnetic field and foods [7–10].
age rectifier, a tank circuit, and a work circuit, as shown schematically in Figure 4.1.
ing systems (including generators and applicators) are briefly introduced.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Co
mp
uter Sim
ulatio
n o
f Rad
io Freq
uen
cy Heatin
g 83
Main power
+
–
Rectifier Oscillator High-voltage
transformer
Tank
circuit
Work circuit
Variable
inductance
tuning
Load
Variable
capacitance
applicator
FIGURE 4.1 Schematic diagram of a conventional RF heating equipment. (From Wig, T.D. 2001. Computer simulation of dielectric heating. Ch. 7 in
Sterilization and Pasteurization of Foods using Radio Frequency Heating. PhD thesis, Pullman, WA: Washington State University. Based on Orfeuil, M.
1987. Electric Process Heating. Columbus, OH: Battelle Memorial Institute.)
55534_C004.indd 8355534_C004.indd 83
10/22/08 8:30:37 AM
10/22/08 8:30:37 AM
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
84 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
capacitance or inductance of the work circuit affects the power coupled from the tank
circuit to the load [12]. The RF power is typically coupled from tank circuit to work
circuit by changing the space interval between the electrodes and/or by adjusting the
length of variable inductor in the work circuit. The power oscillator design is able to
tional design is also simple to construct and the system is relatively inexpensive.
However, during a heating process, variations in applicator separation, food prod-
uct dielectric properties, and other factors may change the capacitance and quality
factor of the applicator in the circuit, in turn shifting the intrinsic frequency of the
applicator. It is intolerable in regions where strict operating frequency limitations
are enforced. The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) assigned 6.78, 13.56,
50 Ω RF heating equipment, and uses a different approach for the generation of RF
power. The system, demonstrated in Figure 4.2, consists of an oscillator, a power
output of the power is transferred to a load through the transmission line and imped-
ing frequency that meets the requirement of international electromagnetic compat-
generator. However, the much higher cost and limitation of power output obstructs
4.2.2 RADIO FREQUENCY APPLICATORS
ing systems are used, the RF applicator should be designed to meet production
Applicator
Load
50
Line
OscillatorPower Impedance
matching
Generator: 50 Source
FIGURE 4.2 Schematic diagram of a conventional RF heating equipment. (From Wig, T.D.
2001. Computer simulation of dielectric heating. Ch. 7 in Sterilization and Pasteurization of Foods using Radio Frequency Heating. PhD thesis, Pullman, WA: Washington State Univer-
sity. Based on Orfeuil, M. 1987. Electric Process Heating. Columbus, OH: Battelle Memorial
Institute.)
55534_C004.indd 8455534_C004.indd 84 10/22/08 8:30:38 AM10/22/08 8:30:38 AM
reach high overall efficiency because the load is part of the circuit [13]. The conven-
27.12 and 40.68 at radio frequencies for industrial, scientific, and medical (ISM) usage
[14]. Therefore, power amplifier generators were introduced to solve the problem.
The output of the amplifier in COSMIG (power amplifier) system is designed at
a fixed output impedance, normally 50 Ω. So the COSMIG system is also known as
amplifier, a 50 Ω transmission line, an impedance matching circuit, and a work
circuit [10,15]. In this type of system, a stable, fixed frequency oscillator supplies a
radio frequency signal to a power amplifier, which supplies power to the load. The
ance matching circuit, which is used to match the impedance of the amplifier and the
The power amplifier system has the advantage of a stringently controlled operat-
ibility. It also physically separates the matching circuit from the generator. Finally
it improves the working circuit, the process control system, and the efficiency of the
the wide use of the power amplifier system.
Whether free running oscillator systems or power amplifier dielectric heat-
amplifier
load to avoid the power reflection [12].
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Computer Simulation of Radio Frequency Heating 85
requirements such as the nature and shape of the material being heated. The size
and shape of the applicator may vary tremendously, but they are sorted into three
main commercially available types [6,13,15]:
is the most common and has the simplest design. The object to be heated
is placed between two electrodes which form a parallel plate capacity
(Figure 4.3a). It is mostly used for a block of material or a relatively thick
material.
electrodes lie on the same level and are parallel to the plane of the product
to be heated. The polarity of each pair of electrodes is opposite (Figure
4.3b). It is often used in drying applications and for relatively thin layers
(approximately 10 mm) of products.
gered on either side (Figure 4.3c). It is often used for products of intermedi-
ate thickness.
4.3 DIELECTRIC PROPERTIES
In order to properly simulate dielectric heating on biomaterials including foods, it is
desirable to determine the factors that affect the rate of heating throughout the prod-
uct. The dielectric properties of foods are the principal parameters that determine
the coupling and distribution of electromagnetic energy during dielectric heating
[17]. The dielectric properties of foods are often temperature dependent [18], and
therefore must be known over the full range of temperatures experienced by the
product to allow simulation of heating behavior.
(ISM) applications according to international agreement [18]. The Federal Communi-
cations Commission (FCC), the responsible regulatory agency in the US, has adopted
this frequency allocation scheme [14] with a few additional requirements. Dielectric
heating applications typically operate within the ISM frequency bands. Those heaters
that operate at the frequencies 6.78, 13.56, 27.12, and 40.68 MHz are considered to
microwave apparatus.
Most biological materials behave as lossy insulators, tending to both store and dis-
electric properties, which are normally described in terms of the complex relative
permittivity, εr:
ε ε εr r r= −’ ’’j (4.1)
55534_C004.indd 8555534_C004.indd 85 10/22/08 8:30:38 AM10/22/08 8:30:38 AM
2. Fringe-field applicator (Strayfield electrodes). In this case, several pairs of
3. Staggered through-field (Garland electrodes) applicator. Conceptually, this
configuration is a modified through-field applicator with electrodes stag-
Several frequency bands are reserved for use in industrial, scientific, and medical
be RF heaters, and those that operate at 915 and 2450 MHz are usually identified as
4.3.1 DEFINITION OF DIELECTRIC PROPERTIES
sipate electrical energy in response to an imposed electromagnetic field, in the
same fashion as capacitors and resistors [19]. These abilities are defined by di-
1. Through-field applicator (flat electrodes). A through-field RF applicator
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
86 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
where j = −1 . The real part of the relative complex permittivity, ε’r, known as
the relative dielectric constant, describes the ability of a material to store energy
permittivity, ε’’r , known as the relative loss factor, describes the ability of a material
in heat generation [16,20–21].
(a)
(b)
(c)
VRF
Product
VRF
Product
ProductElectrodes VRF
FIGURE 4.3
Dielectric drying. Drying Technology 14(5): 1063–98.)
55534_C004.indd 8655534_C004.indd 86 10/22/08 8:30:39 AM10/22/08 8:30:39 AM
RF heating applicator. (a) Simple through-field RF applicator. (b) Fringe-field
applicator. (c) Staggered through-field applicator. (From Jones, P.L., and Rowley A.T. 1996.
in response to an applied electric field. The imaginary part of the relative complex
to dissipate energy in response to an applied electric field, which typically results
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Computer Simulation of Radio Frequency Heating 87
The corresponding properties of materials that describe their interaction with
expressed in terms of the complex relative permeability μr:
μ μ μr r r= −’ ’’j (4.2)
Together, εr and μr describe the behavior of a material in an electromagnetic
and permeability are given by: εo = 8.854 × 10−12 Farads/meter and μo = 4π × 10−7
Henrys/meter, respectively. Most natural biological materials do not interact with
[7,22]. Therefore, a relative permeability of μr = 1 − j0 is often assumed, and it
is common that no attempt is made to characterize the magnetic properties of
foods.
Heat generation during dielectric heating can take place by several mechanisms,
including ionic conduction and dipolar relaxation. At lower frequencies (below 200
MHz, depending on the material) gross electron conductivity plays a major role
relaxation often dominates, whereby molecules (typically water molecules) absorb
energy due to the repeated reorientation of their polarization in response to the elec-
in dielectric heating. The precise contribution of each mechanism by which energy
is dissipated is not always easily determined, and is often irrelevant. When relaxa-
tion effects are discounted, the loss factor of a material is related to its direct current
(DC) conductivity σ by the following Equation:
σ ωε ε= =0 r 0 rε π ε’’ ’’2 f (4.3)
where f is the temporal frequency and ω is the radian frequency, which are related
by ω = 2πf. It is often convenient to express the sum of the conductive and dielec-
tric loss in terms of an equivalent loss factor. This is adequate for use in dielectric
heating studies. The loss factor and frequency data can be used in Equation 4.3 to
compute an equivalent conductivity.
4.3.2 TRANSMISSION PROPERTIES
by von Hippel [19]:
γ = α + jβ (4.4)
The real part of the complex propagation factor, known as attenuation factor,
describes the diminution of the electric portion of an imposed electromagnetic
55534_C004.indd 8755534_C004.indd 87 10/22/08 8:30:39 AM10/22/08 8:30:39 AM
an applied magnetic field, functioning in the same manner as an inductor, can be
field. They are relative values, since they describe a material’s interaction with
electromagnetic field with respect to free space (vacuum), whose permittivity
the magnetic portion of the electromagnetic field to generate heat. Instead, virtually
all of the energy absorption in a material is due to interaction of the electric field
in dissipating electromagnetic fields. At microwave frequencies, however, dipolar
tric field. At even higher frequencies, relaxation of individual atoms can play a role
eling electromagnetic field, is described in terms of a complex propagation factor (γ)
The transmission properties, which determine energy flow in a material within trav-
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
88 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
ing to:
α ε εε
= +⎛⎝⎜⎜⎜
⎞⎠⎟⎟⎟ −
⎛
⎝
⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠
⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟
21 1
π2f
c’
’’’
⎡⎡
⎣
⎢⎢⎢
⎤
⎦
⎥⎥⎥
1
2
(4.5)
where c is the speed of light in vacuum, 2.998 × 108 m/s. The imaginary part of the
complex propagation factor β, known as phase constant, describes the phase shift of
a plane wave propagating through a dielectric material.
p
depth or attenuation distance, is a parameter that describes the distance an incident
electromagnetic wave can penetrate beneath the surface of a material before its elec-
amplitude at the surface [23]. According to Lambert’s law:
E E ez 0z= −α (4.6)
0 z
traveling within a dielectric material, and α is the attenuation constant. When
E d E e( ) /p = 0 , with Equation 4.5 and Equation 4.6, a relation can be derived for dp:
dc
f
p
rr
r
=
+⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟ −
⎡
⎣
⎢⎢⎢
⎤
⎦
⎥⎥⎥
2 1 1
2
π ε εε
’’’’
⎧⎧⎨⎪⎪⎪
⎩⎪⎪⎪
⎫⎬⎪⎪⎪
⎭⎪⎪⎪
1
2
(4.7)
normally used in electrical engineering and is not commonly applied in food engi-
neering [24].
The average power dissipation per unit volume in a dielectric subjected to an
P f Eav 02π= 2 ε ε’’ Watts/meter3 (4.8)
or, using the equivalent conductivity:
Pav = σE2 Watts/meter3 (4.9)
where f is the frequency in Hertz, σ is the equivalent conductivity in Siemens/meter,
distance an incident electromagnetic wave can penetrate beneath the surface of a
55534_C004.indd 8855534_C004.indd 88 10/22/08 8:30:40 AM10/22/08 8:30:40 AM
field as it penetrates a material. The attenuation factor α can be calculated accord-
The electric field penetration depth (d ) of a material, also known as the skin
tric field intensity is diminished by a factor of 1/e (e, Naprian base, 2.71828) of its
where, E is incident electric field intensity at the surface of a material, E is electric
field intensity at distance z from the surface in the direction of the electric wave
This fundamental Equation 4.7, which yields an electric field penetration depth, is
electromagnetic field can be obtained using the expression:
and E is the electric field intensity in Volts/meter. The most important penetration
concept in food engineering, known as power penetration depth [24], defines the
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Computer Simulation of Radio Frequency Heating 89
material as the power decreases to 1/e of its power at the surface. Since the power is
P P ez 02 z= − α
(4.10)
where P0 z
within a dielectric material, and α is the attenuation constant. When P d P e( ) /p = 0 ,
with Equation 4.7 and Equation 4.10, the power penetration depth is given by:
dc
f
p
rr
r
2
=
+⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟ −
⎡
⎣
⎢⎢⎢
⎤
⎦
⎥⎥2 2 1 1π ε ε
ε’
’’’ ⎥⎥
⎧⎨⎪⎪⎪
⎩⎪⎪⎪
⎫⎬⎪⎪⎪
⎭⎪⎪⎪
1
2
(4.11)
which is precisely half of the amplitude penetration depth. Penetration depth in this
proportional to frequency. Therefore, it would be expected that deeper penetration
would be obtained to lower frequencies, and that higher frequencies would result
in greater surface heating. Increased penetration can reduce the overall variation in
properties themselves vary with frequency, penetration depth does not vary exactly
etrate deeply into most moist food products [25], where dielectric constants and loss
factors are relatively low. Electromagnetic waves in the radio frequency range are
generally regarded as having deep penetration into most foods.
4.3.3 MEASUREMENT OF DIELECTRIC PROPERTIES
Both the determination of heating rate and penetration depth depend on the value
of dielectric properties of food. Dielectric constant and loss factor are the most
important factors for dielectric heating. However, the lack of knowledge about the
dielectric properties of various foods as functions of food composition, food tem-
perature, and frequency of processing electromagnetic wave restricted our ability
to design optimum dielectric heating systems and properly simulate heating [26].
Measurement of dielectric properties is necessary for the successful simulation and
application of dielectric heating.
Several methods can be used to measure the dielectric properties, including
open-end coaxial probe methods, transmission line methods, and resonance cavity
methods [27].
4.3.3.1 Open-ended Coaxial Probe Methods
The open-ended coaxial probe method uses a coaxial probe with the open end in con-
tact with the material-under-test. During the measurement, a signal is sent by a vec-
55534_C004.indd 8955534_C004.indd 89 10/22/08 8:30:41 AM10/22/08 8:30:41 AM
proportional to square of the electric field intensity:
is the incident electric field power density at the surface of a material, P
is electric field power density at distance z in the direction of electric wave traveling
study is defined as power penetration depth and will be calculated using Equation 4.11.
Given fixed dielectric properties, the penetration depth of a material is inversely
electric field, which can, in turn, improve heating uniformity. Since the dielectric
as 1/f. In general, an electromagnetic field having a short wavelength does not pen-
tor network analyzer or an impedance analyzer, and reflected back by the material.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
90 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
dielectric properties of the tested material [28–30].
The open-ended coaxial probe method has the advantage of ease to use and is
suitable for all kinds of material, especially for liquid and semi-solid food material.
It has a large frequency range for measurement (10–20 GHz). It also needs little
sample preparation. However, it has some restrictions. The method has limited accu-
racy in dielectric constant and low loss factor resolution. Three major error sources
for measurement are the cable stability, air gaps, and sample thickness.
network analyzer or impedance analyzer in both amplitude and phase, inaccuracy
measurement. The sample surface, which contacts the coaxial probe, should be made
racy of measurement. Therefore, the thickness of the sample should be greater than
the recommended minimum sample thickness, tmin [31], which is expressed as:
tmin =20
ε r
(mm).
Normally, the sample thickness should typically be greater than 1cm. The solid
Although the open-ended coaxial probe method has some limitations, it is an
ideal method for measuring the dielectric properties of liquids or semisolids, and it is
one of the most widely and commonly used methods in the food research community
[32–33]. Most of the time, the accuracy of measured dielectric properties is adequate
for dielectric heating research [34].
4.3.3.2 Transmission Line Method
ple. The transmission line may be either rectangular or coaxial [27]. During the mea-
surement, a vector network analyzer is used to detect the change of the impedance
the measuring result, the dielectric properties of the tasted material are calculated
by software.
Both the accuracy and sensitivity of transmission line method are higher than those
of open-ended coaxial probe method. However, the measuring range is narrower than
the open-ended coaxial probe method and the samples need to be carefully prepared to
4.3.3.3 Resonance Cavity Method
For resonance cavity method, a sample will be put in a cavity with high quality
resonance. Due to the insertion of the sample, both the center resonance frequency
55534_C004.indd 9055534_C004.indd 90 10/22/08 8:30:42 AM10/22/08 8:30:42 AM
This method will need the cross-section of a transmission line to be filled by a sam-
fit for the cross-section of the transmission line. The way of measurement makes it dif-
ficult for the transmission line method to test liquid and semisolid sample material.
The magnitude and phase change of the reflected wave are used to calculate the
As the instability and flexing of cable may distort the detective signal sent by
during measurement is introduced. It is better to minimize the cable flexing because
the existence of air gaps can distort the detective signal and influence accuracy of
as flat and smooth as possible. If the sample is too thin, the detective signal can pen-
etrate the sample and introduce insufficient reflection, thereby influencing the accu-
samples must have a flat surface.
and propagation characteristics due to the fllling of dielectric material. According to
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Computer Simulation of Radio Frequency Heating 91
fc and quality factor Q change [35]. Two changes of the parameter are measured by
the vector network analyzer, and use special software to determine the dielectric
properties of the sample material. Resonance cavity method can be very accurate.
It is sensitive to very low values of loss factor. However, the method provides the
4.4 COMPUTER SIMULATION
Historically, the prediction of the electromagnetic wave distribution within dielectric
heating equipment mainly relied on an experimental approach. Time consuming and
high cost are always problems for researchers. Computer modeling recently shows a
great potential to predict the wave distribution due to the rapid evolution of computer
calculating ability.
4.4.1 TECHNIQUES FOR SOLVING ELECTROMAGNETIC PROBLEM
Several techniques can be used to provide insight into electromagnetic heating
numerical. Experimental techniques are expensive, time consuming, and usually
techniques are used for problems associated with complicated constructions. The
among the most commonly used in electromagnetics [36].
Analytical and numerical methods solve the dominant equations, Maxwell
equations, for all the electromagnetic problems. Maxwell equations that describe
∇ ∂∂
× = +H JDt
(4.12)
∇ ∂∂
× = −EBt
(4.13)
∇ ρ⋅ =D e (4.14)
∇ ⋅ =B 0 (4.15)
where E (Vm−1 −1 −2
density, B (Wb m−2 −2) is electric current density,
and ρe is electric charge density.
spatial position and time. However, in many practical systems, the time variations
55534_C004.indd 9155534_C004.indd 91 10/22/08 8:30:43 AM10/22/08 8:30:43 AM
dielectric properties of only one frequency for a specific resonance cavity and the
cavities are difficult to design and use.
phenomena. Those techniques can be classified as experimental, analytical, and
provide exact electromagnetic field distribution. However, the technique can only
solve the problem with very limited and extremely simple configurations. Numerical
finite difference time domain method (FDTD) and finite element method (FEM) are
electromagnetic fields are [37]:
) is electric field, H (A m ) is magnetic field, D (C m
) is magnetic field density, J (A m
E, H, D, B, and J represent the instantaneous field vectors as the function of
do not allow adequate flexibility for parameter variation. Analytical techniques can
) is electric flux
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
92 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
are of cosinusoidal form and are referred to as time-harmonic. Under time-harmonic
∇ ω ωε× = + = +H J D J Ej j (4.16)
∇ ω ωμ× = − = −E B Hj j (4.17)
∇ ∇ ε ρ⋅ = ⋅ =D E e (4.18)
∇ ∇ μ⋅ = ⋅ =B H 0 (4.19)
where E, H, D, B, and J represent the corresponding complex spatial forms which
are only a function of position.
used to solve the electromagnetic equations [39]. The two most common sub-methods
ment frequency domain (FEFD). Dibben and Metaxas [40] reported that time domain
simulations of microwave heating are much faster than frequency domain simulations
since time domain overcomes the problems of ill conditioning. Another advantage of
the time domain method is when solutions for several frequencies are needed, it can
release several results from a single solution.
is now used in place of FETD to some degree. The FDTD method increases the num-
ber of cells, consequently, increases the computational demands at a small matrix. But
4.4.2 FINITE-DIFFERENCE TIME DOMAIN METHOD
time-dependent curl equations.
Several key attributes combine to make the FDTD method a useful and powerful
discretized in space and time in a straightforward manner. Second, since the method
radiation, scattering, and coupling problems [36].
equations is the numerical approximation of the derivative of a function f(x). The
central-difference formula is [36]:
′ =+ − −
+f xf x x f x x
xO x( )
( / ) ( / )( )0
0 0 22 2Δ ΔΔ
Δ (4.20)
55534_C004.indd 9255534_C004.indd 92 10/22/08 8:30:43 AM10/22/08 8:30:43 AM
conditions, the Maxwell’s equation can be modified to [38]:
Among a lot of numerical methods the finite element method (FEM) is mainly
of the finite element method are finite element time domain (FETD) and finite ele-
Recently finite difference time domain (FDTD) method has gained acceptance and
FEM has superiority over FDTD in handling complicated product configuration.
The finite-difference time-domain (FDTD) method is a convenient, easy-to-use, and
efficient method for solving electromagnetic scattering problems. It was first intro-
tool. First is the method’s simplicity; Maxwell’s equations in differential form are
tracks the time-varying fields throughout a volume of space, FDTD results lend
themselves well to scientific visualization methods. These in turn provide the user
with excellent physical insights into the behavior of electromagnetic fields. Finally,
The fundamental scheme for finding the finite difference solution of Maxwell’s
where Δx is a sufficiently small interval.
duced in 1966 by Yee [41] and was developed by Taflove [42–44] to solve Maxwell’s
the geometric flexibility of the method permits the solution of a wide variety of
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Computer Simulation of Radio Frequency Heating 93
( , , ) ( , , )i j k i x j y k z≡ Δ Δ Δ (4.21)
and any function of space and time in the solution region can be presented as:
F i j k F i j k n t( , , ) ( , , , )= δ δ δ Δ (4.22)
where δ = Δx = Δy = Δz is the space increment, Δt is the time increment, and i, j, k, n
are integers.
In applying Equation 4.20 and using notation in Equation 4.21 and Equation
4.22, Equation 4.12 and Equation 4.13 can be approximated to [36]:
Hz
Ey
Ex Ez
Hy
Y
X
Z
Ez
Ey
Ey
Ex
Ex
Ez
Hx
(i, j ,k)
FIGURE 4.4 Luedecke, L., and Feng, H. 1998. Dielectric properties of cottage cheese and surface treat-
ment using microwaves. Journal of Food Engineering 37(4): 389–410.)
55534_C004.indd 9355534_C004.indd 93 10/22/08 8:30:44 AM10/22/08 8:30:44 AM
A grid point in a solution region as shown in Figure 4.4 can be defined as [36]:
Positions of field components in a unit cell. (From Herve, A.G., Tang, J.,
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
94 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
H i j k H i j kxn
xn+ −+ + = + +1 2 1 21 2 1 2 1 2 1/ /( , / , / ) ( , / , /22
1 2 1 2
1 2 1
)( , / , / )
( , / , )
++ +
+ + −
δμ δ
ti j k
E i j k Eyn
y
×nn
zn
zn
i j k
E i j k E i j k
( , / , )
( , , / ) ( , , /
+
+ + − + +
1 2
1 2 1 1 22)
⎡
⎣
⎢⎢⎢
⎤
⎦
⎥⎥⎥
(4.23a)
H i j k H i j kyn
yn+ −+ + = + +1 2 1 21 2 1 2 1 2 1/ /( / , , / ) ( / , , /22
1 2 1 2
1 1 2
)( / , , / )
( , , / )
++ +
+ + −
δμ δ
ti j k
E i j k Ezn
z
×nn
xn
xn
i j k
E i j k E i j k
( , , / )
( / , , ) ( / , ,
+
+ + − + +
1 2
1 2 1 2 11)
⎡
⎣
⎢⎢⎢
⎤
⎦
⎥⎥⎥
(4.23b)
H i j k H i jzn
zn+ −+ + = + +1 2 1 21 2 1 2 1 2 1 2/ /( / , / , ) ( / , / ,kk
ti j k
E i j k Exn
x
)( / , / , )
( / , , )
++ +
+ + −
δμ δ1 2 1 2
1 2 1×
nn
yn
yn
i j k
E i j k E i j
( / , , )
( , / , ) ( , / ,
+
+ + − + +
1 2
1 2 1 1 2 kk)
⎡
⎣
⎢⎢⎢
⎤
⎦
⎥⎥⎥
(4.23c)
E i j ki j k t
i jxn+ + = −
++
1 1 2 11 2
1 2( / , , )
( / , , )
( / , ,
σ δε kk
E i j kt
i jxn
)( / , , )
( / , ,
⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟
+ ++
1 21 2
δε kk
H i j k H i jzn
zn
)
( / , / , ) ( / ,/ /
δ
×+ ++ + − +1 2 1 21 2 1 2 1 2 −−
+ + − − ++ +
1 2
1 2 1 2 11 2 1 2
/ , )
( / , , / ) (/ /
k
H i j k H iyn
yn // , , / )2 1 2j k +
⎡
⎣
⎢⎢⎢
⎤
⎦
⎥⎥⎥ (4.23d)
E i j ki j k t
i jyn+ + = −
++
1 1 2 11 2
1 2( , / , )
( , / , )
( , / ,
σ δε kk
E i j kt
i jyn
)( , / , )
( , / ,
⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟
+ ++
1 21 2
δε kk
H i j k H i jxn
xn
)
( , / , / ) ( , // /
δ
×+ ++ + − +1 2 1 21 2 1 2 1 2,, / )
( / , / , ) (/ /
k
H i j k H izn
zn
−
+ − + − ++ +
1 2
1 2 1 2 11 2 1 2 // , / , )2 1 2j k+
⎡
⎣
⎢⎢⎢
⎤
⎦
⎥⎥⎥ (4.23e)
E i j ki j k t
i j kzn+ + = −
++
1 1 2 11 2
1( , , / )
( , , / )
( , , /
σ δε 22
1 21)
( , , / )( , , /
⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟
+ ++
E i j kt
i j kzn δ
ε 22
1 2 1 2 1 21 2 1 2
)
( / , , / ) ( / ,/ /
δ
×H i j k H i jy
nyn+ ++ + − − ,, / )
( , / , / ) ( ,/ /
k
H i j k H i jxn
xn
+
+ − + −+ +
1 2
1 2 1 21 2 1 2 ++ +
⎡
⎣
⎢⎢⎢
⎤
⎦
⎥⎥⎥1 2 1 2/ , / )k (4.23f)
55534_C004.indd 9455534_C004.indd 94 10/22/08 8:30:45 AM10/22/08 8:30:45 AM
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Computer Simulation of Radio Frequency Heating 95
To ensure the accuracy of the computed results, the spatial increment must be small
compared to the wavelength (usually ≤ λ/10) or minimum dimension of the scatterer.
Δt must satisfy the following stability condition [36,45]:
u tx y z
maxΔΔ Δ Δ
≤ + +⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟
−1 1 1
2 2 2
1
2
(4.24)
where umax is the maximum wave phase velocity within the model.
dynamic electromagnetic solutions when the size of the structure is comparable
with the wavelength, so the method is normally applied to the structures of a size
between 0.1 and 20 times of wavelengths [46]. For the structures whose physical size
4.4.3 FINITE ELEMENT METHOD
structural analysis [47]. In 1968, the method was applied to electromagnetic prob-
lems. Although the concept and programming of FEM is not as simple and easy as
numerical technique for handling problems involving complex geometries and inho-
mogeneous media [36].
Basically a four-step scheme is applied to solve problems by FEM [48]:
elements.
2. Deriving governing equations for a typical element.
3. Assembling of all elements in the solution region.
4. Solving the system of equations obtained.
4.4.4 COUPLING PROBLEM
The traditional electromagnetic simulation software concentrates on the applications
such as microwave circuits and communication equipment design, where thermal
effects are normally neglected. However, to simulate a RF heating process, thermal
of the simulation process. During the RF heating two physical factors, temperature
dielectric properties change with temperature. The changes in dielectric properties
phenomena is one of the most critical factors for the successful simulation of RF heat-
ing processes. Therefore, electromagnetic modeling and thermal modeling must be
55534_C004.indd 9555534_C004.indd 95 10/22/08 8:30:46 AM10/22/08 8:30:46 AM
To ensure the stability of the finite difference scheme of equations, the time increment
The principle of the FDTD method makes it more effective in finding the
is smaller than 0.1 of wavelength, the field distribution is close to quasi-static and in
general the methods of quasi-static field solutions are advised to be used.
Originally finite element method (FEM) was developed and applied in the field of
finite difference method and method of moment, it is a more powerful and versatile
1. Discretizing the solution region into a finite number of sub-regions or
effect analysis, besides electromagnetic field investigation, becomes an essential part
and electromagnetic field intensity, will interrelate with each other because the dis-
sipated energy produced by electromagnetic field heats the materials while their
integrated to provide real-time modification of the dielectric properties of the product
in order to modulate the electromagnetic and thermal field through a feedback loop.
in turn influence the electromagnetic field distribution. The coupling of two physical
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
96 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
4.4.5 PREVIOUS SIMULATION WORKS
Several previous works have been conducted to numerically simulate the RF drying
and heating processes. Neophytou and Metaxas [39,49] demonstrated the capabil-
distribution. Baginski, Broughton and Christman [51] and Marshall and Metaxas
[52] showed the potential of computer simulation to model RF drying processes,
and to couple the electromagnetic and thermodynamic phenomenon during the
simulation.
4.4.6 COMMERCIAL ELECTROMAGNETIC SOFTWARE
Computer simulation can be used to model complicated geometries, simulate many
electromagnetic conditions, and analyze a lot of problems.
A lot of electromagnetic simulation softwares are is commercially available
which can be operated on Windows, UNIX, and LINUX platforms [53]. Yakovlev
[54] and Kopyt and Gwarek [55] reported more than 17 different software packages
in their reviews of EM modeling software, and compared the license price, computer
operating system, and status in microwave power engineering (Table 4.1). Among
all the software packages, Ansoft HFSSTM (Ansoft, Corp, Pittsburgh, PA), ANSYS
Multiphysics (ANSYS, Inc, Canonsburg, PA), COMSOL Multiphysics® (COMSOL,
Inc., Los Angeles, CA), MAFIA and CST Microwave Studio® (CST GmbH, Welles-
ley Hills, MA), MARC® (MSC.Software Corporation, Palo Alto, CA), XFdtd®
(Remcom, Inc, State College, PA), and QuickWave-3D (QWED, Warsaw, POLAND)
are the most commonly used.
Several software packages, such as Ansoft HFSS®, EMAS, and COMSOL
Multiphysics®, have the ability to couple the electromagnetic and thermal aspects,
allowing users to simulate both thermal conditions and electromagnetic problems.
Datta [56] used EMAS coupled with NASTRAN (heat transfer modeling) in trying to
solve the electromagnetic problems coupled with thermal changes in dielectric heating
processes. They transferred data from one modeling to another and updated physical
properties and heat generation in each round. There are other software packages, like
QuickWave-3D, allowing users to customize and connect software interface with their
own programming code, in order to enhance the ability of original software to couple
electromagnetic aspect with thermal aspect.
4.4.7 EXAMPLES OF COMPUTER SIMULATION
Two examples of computer simulation on homogenous and heterogeneous foods,
respectively will follow. Details on computer simulation procedures, governing
equations, assumptions, models and results are illustrated.
4.4.7.1 Simulation on Homogeneous Food
Figure 4.5 illustrates computer simulation procedures. An appropriate simulation
module was chosen based on governing equations that revealed the physical basis of
55534_C004.indd 9655534_C004.indd 96 10/22/08 8:30:46 AM10/22/08 8:30:46 AM
ity of finite element method (FEM) to model the RF heating system. Chan, Tang,
and Younce [50] studied RF heating patterns in foods due to electromagnetic field
simulated physical phenomena. The constants and variables were then predefined.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Computer Simulation of Radio Frequency Heating 97
TABLE 4.1Summary of Some Commercially Available Software in 2004
Company Code PurposeOperating System and
requirements
ADINA, Inc.
http://www.adina.com
Adina-T Heat transfer analysis
problems
Windows, UNIX
Adina-F Analysis of
compressible and
Adaptive Research Corp.
http://www.adaptive
research.com
CFD2000
transfer in electronic
systems. Radiative and
conjugate heat transfer
models
Windows
ALGOR, Inc.
http://www.algor.com
Professional
Multiphysics
Multiphsics Windows 98/2000/NT/
Me/XP
Professional CFD Heat transfer analysis Windows 98/2000/NT/
Me/XP
Ansoft, Corp.
http://www.ansoft.com
HFSS
simulation
Windows, Linux Solaris
ANSYS, Inc.
http://www.ansys.com
CFX
dynamics (CFD)
package
UNIX Compaq/HP/
SUN/SGI/IBM
Windows NT/2000/XP
Linux
Multiphysics Multiphysics Windows 2000/XP Linux
Compaq/HP/SUN/
SGI/IBM
Design Space Static structural and
thermal, dynamic,
weight optimization,
vibration mode, and
safety factor
simulations
Windows 2000/XP/
NT 4.0 Linux Compaq/
HP/SUN/SGI/IBM
Professional Structural/thermal
analysis
Windows 2000/XP/NT
4.0 Linux Compaq/
HP/SUN/SGI/IBM
CD adapco Group
http://www.cd-adapco.com
Star-CD Heat transfer, reacting
physics and others
Windows; UNIX
HP/SGI/IBM; Linux
COMSOL
http://www.comsol.com
COMSOL
Multiphysics
Multiphysics Windows 2000 or
later, Linux 2.4.x kernel,
glibc-2.2.5 or later,
Solaris 8, 9, 10
Flomerics Group PLC FLO/EMC
analysis
Windows, Sun Solaris
(continued)
55534_C004.indd 9755534_C004.indd 97 10/22/08 8:30:47 AM10/22/08 8:30:47 AM
of solids and field
Electromagnetic field
Electromagnetic field
incompressible flow
Air flow and heat
and fluid flow analysis
Computational fluid
flows, multiphase
http://www.flomerics.com
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
98 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
After the geometry of the model was built, the sub-domain properties and boundary
conditions were assigned. A convergence study was conducted to investigate con-
vergence of the simulation and to determine the optimized meshing that comprises
the calculation time and accuracy of simulation. Finally, the computing solution was
calculated and the simulation results were analyzed.
TABLE 4.1 (Continued)
Company Code PurposeOperating System and
Requirements
Flow Science, Inc. FLOW-3D Fluid modeling,
thermal modeling,
dielectric phenomena
and others
Windows NT/XP/
2000; Linux
UNIX DEC/HP/
IBM/Sun/SGI
Fluent, Inc. FLUENT Multiphysics Windows NT/2000/
XP; UNIX
SGI/HP/IBM/SUN
FIDAP Multiphysics Windows NT/2000/XP;
UNIX SGI/HP/IBM/SUN
Infolytica, Corp.
http://www.infolytica.com
ThermNet Standalone or coupled
thermal simulation
Windows
FullWave High frequency
electromagnetic
simulation
MSC Software Corp
http://www.msc
software.com
Marc Coupled thermal-
structural interactions
and others
Windows NT/2000;
Linux
UNIX Sun/HP/IBM/
SGI/Compaq
MSC Nastran Heat transfer and others Windows NT/2000;
Linux; UNIX
Sun/HP/IBM/SGI/
Compaq/Cray/
Fujitsu/Nec
QWED
http://www.qwed.com.pl
QuickWave-3D
analysis
Windows
Remcom, Inc.
http://www.remcom.com
XFdtd Wave electromagnetic
solver, temperature
rise calculation and
others
Windows 2000/XP, Red
Hat, Silicon Graphics,
Sun Solaris, Mac OSX,
HPUX
Vector Fields Ltd.
com
Opera 3D
and thermal analysis
Windows 98/Me/
NT/2000/XP; UNIX
SUN/HP/SGI;
Zeland Software, Inc
http://www.zeland.com
FIDELITY
analysis
Windows
Source: Yakovlev, V.V. 2002. Review of commercial EM modeling software suitable for modeling of
microwave heating-update. Presented at the 4th IMMG workshop ‘Computer modeling and microwave power industry’, January 7, 2002, Seattle, WA.
55534_C004.indd 9855534_C004.indd 98 10/22/08 8:30:47 AM10/22/08 8:30:47 AM
Electromagnetic field
Electromagnetic field
http://www.vectorfields.
Electromagnetic field
http://www.flow3d.com
http://www.fluent.com
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Computer Simulation of Radio Frequency Heating 99
4.4.7.1.1 AssumptionsThe accuracy of the computer simulation directly relies on the exactness of the
numerical model, which affect the demand for the CPU and memory capacities. To
achieve a compromise between the simulation accuracy and computer capability,
assumptions have to be made to simplify the heating system.
Firstly, quasi-static condition was assumed, since the wavelength of the electro-
magnetic wave in RF heating is much larger than the dimension of equipment. The
RF heating is mainly caused by dipolar and interfacial polarization [58], which is only
netic, which is mainly affected by the structure of heating equipment, was overlooked.
sel and the heat convection between circulating water and food were neglected. The
assumption was fair since we concentrated on the heating distribution at the center
be ignored.
Problem analysis
Governing equation selection
Geometry modeling
Sub-domain and boundary condition setting
Mesh generation
Obtain convergentresult?
NO
Computing solution
Results analysis
YES
Convergencestudy
FIGURE 4.5 Flow chart of the computer simulation procedure. (From Wang, J. 2007.
of Philosophy Dissertation. Department of Biological System Engineering. WA, USA:
Washington State University, Pullman.)
55534_C004.indd 9955534_C004.indd 99 10/22/08 8:30:48 AM10/22/08 8:30:48 AM
Constant and variable definition
Study of electromagnetic field uniformity in radio frequency heating applicator. Doctor
of dielectric properties of material on electric field, the propagation of electromag-
Without considering the magnetic field, the quasi-static analysis in the current study
caused by the electric field. As our research mainly concentrated on the influence
was acceptable. Secondly, the flow of circulating water inside the pressure-proof ves-
layer of the sample trays; the influence from circulating water was small and could
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
100 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
4.4.7.1.2 Governing EquationsThe general governing equations for solving typical RF heating problems can be
described by Maxwell’s equations [38] as shown in Equations 4.16 through 4.19.
According to the assumptions in section 4.7.1.1 the governing equations for this case
can be deduced as [59]:
∇2 0V = (4.25)
were obtained. The time-averaged power density, P, was generated by transferring
the electric energy to heat the food material as shown by [58]:
P = ω ε εE20 ’’r (4.26)
where P is the dissipated power density.
The power density in Equation 4.26 was then treated as the heat source in the
the governing equation for heating transfer by conduction is expressed as:
ρ ∂∂
∇ ∇CTt
k T Pp − ⋅ =( ) (4.27)
where ρ is the density, Cp is heat capacity, k is the thermal conductivity, and T is the
temperature.
4.4.7.1.3 ModelBecause of its advantage in solving multiphysical problems, the COMSOL
Multiphysics was used to simulate the models. COMSOL Multiphysics is a modeling
package for the simulation of the physical process that can be described with partial
modeling of the RF heating system is shown in Figure 4.6 and Figure 4.7.
The dielectric properties of food were measured and the linear regression
analysis was used to investigate the relation between temperature and dielectric
properties. The dielectric properties of circulating water were measured during
the experiment. In the heat transfer analysis, heat effects were only considered
in the food sample domain to simplify the model. The thermal conductivity and
were assigned to the numerical model. Dell Precision 870 workstation with 2
Dual-Core 2.80GHz Intel® Xeon™ Processors, and 12 GB memory was utilized
thousands, which was adequate for obtaining convergent solution, in the model it
took about 1 hour for one simulation run. The procedures for computing the solu-
55534_C004.indd 10055534_C004.indd 100 10/22/08 8:30:48 AM10/22/08 8:30:48 AM
By solving Equation 4.25, the electric potential (V) and electric field intensity (E)
heat transfer phenomena to couple the electromagnetic field with thermal field, and
differential equations. The software uses the finite element method to model systems
of coupled physical phenomena through predefined templates [60]. The geometry
specific heat of foods were measured. All of the measured physical properties
to perform the simulation. The predefined finer mesh sizes were used to auto-
matically mesh the model, and the total number of finite elements was 100 to 120
tion are shown in the flow chart in Figure 4.8.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Computer Simulation of Radio Frequency Heating 101
4.4.7.1.4 Simulation ResultsThe hot spot and cold spot were the most critical positions to evaluate the unifor-
mity of the heating process. Therefore, temperatures at cold and hot spots at the
horizontal central layer of the sample tray were compared between experiment and
simulation result to verify the simulation results. The thermal image provided the
of the sample tray. As shown in Figure 4.9, the hot spots were located at the places
near the corner of the sample, and the cold spots were at the center of the sample.
The temperature values at the same positions, as shown in Figure 4.10, were drawn
from the numerical solution.
4.4.7.2 Simulation on Heterogeneous Food
Differences in loss factors among the ingredients of heterogeneous food may result
in non-uniform heating in an RF heating system. Macaroni and cheese is one of few
heterogeneous foods in the literature on RF sterilization [61] even though heteroge-
neous foods are more common in the food market. Computer simulation can help
to obtain more insight and understanding of RF heating patterns on heterogeneous
food.
Cavity0.7
0.6
0.4
0.2
0
–0.2
–0.4
–0.6
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.10.079
0
0.5
0.4
0.2
0
–0.2
–0.4
–0.5
yz
x
Upper
electrodeInductor
FIGURE 4.6 Model of RF heating system. (From Wang, J. 2007. Study of electromagnetic
Department of Biological System Engineering. WA, USA: Washington State University,
Pullman.)
55534_C004.indd 10155534_C004.indd 101 10/22/08 8:30:49 AM10/22/08 8:30:49 AM
field uniformity in radio frequency heating applicator. Doctor of Philosophy Dissertation.
final heating pattern and temperatures at hot spot and cold spots at the central layer
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
102 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
Assumptions governing equations are similar to those in homogeneous food. The
geometry modeling for heterogeneous food is also similar to that of homogeneous
except for the packaged food as shown in Figure 4.11
to obtain convergent results. The same computer system was used for heterogeneous
foods as for homogeneous foods. Due to the complexity of numerical model to simu-
late heterogeneous food, it took 4–5 hours for one simulation run.
The relatively uniform heating results from both the experiment and computer
simulation suggest potential for attaining safety along with high quality when heat-
ing heterogeneous food with RF as long as the different components are in close
2 (Figure 4.13) indicated a concentration at the tray corners and inside the noodles.
Accordingly, the power density at these locations was higher than the rest of the
food. However, there was no apparently severe overheating at the noodle and corner
intensity concentration.
4.5 CONCLUSIONS
but affected the simulation accuracy. Therefore, a comprise has to be achieved to
Circulatingwater0.2
0.1
0
–0.1
–0.2
0.1
0.079
0.2
0.1
0
–0.1
–0.2yz
x
Aluminum
Food
Aluminum bottom cover of
pressure-proof vessel
FIGURE 4.7 in radio frequency heating applicator. Doctor of Philosophy Dissertation. Department of
Biological System Engineering. WA, USA: Washington State University, Pullman.)
55534_C004.indd 10255534_C004.indd 102 10/22/08 8:30:51 AM10/22/08 8:30:51 AM
film
Model of vessel. (From Wang, J. 2007. Study of electromagnetic field uniformity
The predefined finer mesh sizes were used to automatically mesh the model, and
the total number of finite elements was 100 to 120 thousands, which were sufficient
proximity to each other and have sufficient heat transfer. The simulation results were
checked at two planes (Figure 4.12). The electric field distribution in planes 1 and
of tray (Figure 4.14). Sufficient heat transfer among the sauce, noodles, cheese and
beef mitigated the power density concentration that was caused by the electric field
Assumptions simplified the governing equation and saved computer resources,
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Computer Simulation of Radio Frequency Heating 103
and heating rate with limited computer resources.
The results also indicated that computer simulation has the potential to further
systems. Computer simulation can also be a useful tool to further improve the RF
heating systems.
Assign initial condition
Start time step
FEM EM simulationto obtain electric potential V
and time averaged power density P
FEM heat transfer simulationto obtain temperature T
step?
NO
Solution output
YES
Update dielectric properties based on T
FIGURE 4.8 Flow chart of the procedure in solution calculation. (From Wang, J.
Doctor of Philosophy Dissertation. Department of Biological System Engineering. WA, USA:
Washington State University, Pullman.)
55534_C004.indd 10355534_C004.indd 103 10/22/08 8:30:52 AM10/22/08 8:30:52 AM
Calculate electric field E
Reach final time
2007. Study of electromagnetic field uniformity in radio frequency heating applicator.
provide a reasonable indication of electromagnetic field distribution, heating pattern
improve similar simulations and aid the construction and modification of RF heating
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
104 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
Position of
cold spot
Position ofhot spot
80.0°C
40.0°C
80
70
60
50
40
FIGURE 4.9 Typical thermal image of the central layer of RF processed food sample.
applicator. Doctor of Philosophy Dissertation. Department of Biological System Engineering.
WA, USA: Washington State University, Pullman.)
FIGURE 4.10 Typical numerical solution of the central layer of processed food sample.
applicator. Doctor of Philosophy Dissertation. Department of Biological System Engineering.
WA, USA: Washington State University, Pullman.)
Position of
cold spot
Y
X
Position of
hot spot
8080
75
70
65
60
55
50
45
4040
55534_C004.indd 10455534_C004.indd 104 10/22/08 8:30:52 AM10/22/08 8:30:52 AM
(From Wang, J. 2007. Study of electromagnetic field uniformity in radio frequency heating
(From Wang, J. 2007. Study of electromagnetic field uniformity in radio frequency heating
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Computer Simulation of Radio Frequency Heating 105
Circulatingwater
0.2
0.1
0.217
0
0.079
0.2
0.1
0
yz
x
Aluminumfilm
Cavity
Meat ballsSauce and
Cheese
FIGURE 4.11 Model of quarter of packaged heterogeneous food and circulating water.
applicator. Doctor of Philosophy Dissertation. Department of Biological System Engineering.
WA, USA: Washington State University, Pullman.)
Plane 1
0.2
0.1
0
0.217
0.079
0
0.1yx
z
Plane 2
FIGURE 4.12 Two planes for checking the numerical solutions. (From Wang, J. 2007. Study
Dissertation. Department of Biological System Engineering. WA, USA: Washington State
University, Pullman.)
55534_C004.indd 10555534_C004.indd 105 10/22/08 8:30:54 AM10/22/08 8:30:54 AM
(From Wang, J. 2007. Study of electromagnetic field uniformity in radio frequency heating
of electromagnetic field uniformity in radio frequency heating applicator. Doctor of Philosophy
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
106 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
Noodles
Meat balls
220
200
280
(V/m)
270
260
250
240
230
210
(a)
Meat balls
Noodles
380
(V/m)
150
300
250
200
350
130
(b)
xyz
xyz
FIGURE 4.13
of Philosophy Dissertation. Department of Biological System Engineering. WA, USA:
Washington State University, Pullman.)
55534_C004.indd 10655534_C004.indd 106 10/22/08 8:30:57 AM10/22/08 8:30:57 AM
Electric field distribution at (a) plane 1 and (b) plane 2. (From Wang, J. 2007.
Study of electromagnetic field uniformity in radio frequency heating applicator. Doctor
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Computer Simulation of Radio Frequency Heating 107
Noodles
Meat balls
119
123
(°C)
121
120
122
118
(a)
118
122.5
(°C)
120
119.5
119
118.5
122
121
120.5
Meat balls
Noodles
121.5
(b)
xz
y
xz
y
FIGURE 4.14 Temperature distribution at (a) plane 1 and (b) plane 2. (From Wang, J. 2007.
of Philosophy Dissertation. Department of Biological System Engineering. WA, USA:
Washington State University, Pullman.)
55534_C004.indd 10755534_C004.indd 107 10/22/08 8:30:59 AM10/22/08 8:30:59 AM
Study of electromagnetic field uniformity in radio frequency heating applicator. Doctor
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
108 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
RF heating systems with the conventional power oscillator design are mostly
adopted in the US market. For the conventional power oscillator design, the RF
applicators and foods are part of the power generator circuit. The variations in appli-
cator separation, food product dielectric properties, and other factors may change
the capacitance and quality factor of the applicator in the circuit. Therefore, further
studies are thus preferred to include the whole circuit of the RF heating system when
modeling to obtain more accurate simulation results.
NOMENCLATURE
c Speed of light in vacuum (m s−1)
p
dp Power penetration depth (m)
E0 −1)
−1)
f Frequency (Hz)
k Thermal conductivity (W m−1 K−1)
P Dissipated power density (W)
P0
Pav Average power dissipation per unit volume (W m−3)
tmin minimum sample thickness (m)
V Scalar electric potential (V)
A Magnetic vector potential−2)
−2)−1)
−1)
J Electric current density (A m−2)
Δt Time increment (s)
α Attenuation factor (Np m−1)
β Phase constant (Rad m−1)
γ Complex propagation factor
δ, Δx, Δy, Δz Space increment (m)
εc Complex permittivity
εr Relative complex permittivity
εo Permittivity of free space (F m−1)
εr
‚ Relative dielectric constant
εr
‚‚ Relative loss factor
μr Relative complex permeability
μo Permeability of free space (H m−1)μr
‚ Real part of relative complex permeability
μr
‚‚ Imaginary part of relative complex permeability
ρe Electric charge density (C m−3)
σ Electric conductivity (S m−1)
ω Angular frequency (Rad s−1)
55534_C004.indd 10855534_C004.indd 108 10/22/08 8:31:01 AM10/22/08 8:31:01 AM
d Electric field penetration depth (m)
Incident electric field intensity (V m
E Electric field intensity (V m
Incident electric field power density (W)
B Magnetic field density (Wb m
E Electric field intensity (Vm
H Magnetic field intensity (A m
D Electric flux density (C m
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Computer Simulation of Radio Frequency Heating 109
REFERENCES
meals. Journal of Food Engineering 8: 145–56.
3. Giese, J. 1992. Advances in microwave food processing. Food Technology 46: 118–23.
4. Ohlsson, T. 1987. Sterilization of foods by microwaves. Paper presentation at Interna-tional Seminar on New Trends in Aseptic Processing and Packaging of Food stuffs. Munich, October 22–23.
5. Ohlsson, T. 1991. Microwave heating uniformity. Paper presented at the AICHE Con-ference on Food Engineering. Chicago, March 11–12.
6. Barker, H. (Ed.). 1983. Dielectric Heating. Ch. 8 in Electroheat, 226–76. London:
Granada Publishing Limited.
7. Metaxas, A.C., and Meredith, R.J. 1983. Industrial Microwave Heating. London, UK:
Peter Peregrinus Ltd.
Willey & Sons.
9. Decareau, R.V. 1985. Microwaves in the Food Processing Industry. New York:
Academic Press.
10. Roussy, G., and Pearce, J.A. 1995. Foundations and Industrial Applications of Micro-waves and Radio Frequency Fields. Physical and Chemical Process. New York: John
Wiley & Sons.
11. Microwave Engineering Designs Ltd. 1994. Update on RF heating. Food Manufacture
1: 33–38.
12. Wig, T.D. 2001. Computer simulation of dielectric heating. Ch. 7 in Sterilization and Pasteurization of Foods using Radio Frequency Heating. PhD thesis, Pullman, WA:
Washington State University.
13. Orfeuil, M. 1987. Electric Process Heating. Columbus, OH: Battelle Memorial
Institute.
14. FCC. 1988. Title 47 CFR 18.301.
15. Jones, P.L., and Rowley A.T. 1996. Dielectric drying. Drying Technology 14(5):
1063–98.
16. Pearce, J.A. 1996. Comparison of matched 50 Ω and resonant load radio frequency
design: Realizing economies of scale. Proceedings 31st Microwave Power Symposium.
Boston, MA, July 28–31.
17. Mudgett, R.E. 1986. Electrical properties of foods. Ch. 11 in Engineering Properties of Foods, M.A. Rao and S.S.H. Rizvi (Eds), 329–90. New York, NY: Marcel Dekker,
Inc.
18. Nelson, S.O. 1991. Dielectric properties of agricultural products. IEEE Transaction on Electrical Insulation 26(5): 845–69.
19. von Hippel, A.R. (Ed.).1 954. Macroscopic approach: Complex permittivity and perme-
ability. In Dielectrics and Waves. New York: John Wiley.
20. Lorrain, P., Corson, D.R., and Lorrain, F. (Eds). 1988. Ch 10 in Electromagnetic Fields and Waves, 3rd ed. 192–210. New York, NY: W.H. Freeman and Company.
21. Nyfors, E., and Vainikainen, P. (Eds). 1989. Ch. 2 in Industrial Microwave Sensors. Norwood: Artech House.
22. Ryynänen, S. 1995. The electromagnetic properties of food materials: A review of the
basic principles. Journal of Food Engineering 26: 409–29.
23. Ramo, S., Whinnery, J.R., and T. Van Duzer (Eds). 1984. Fields and Waves in Com-munication Electronics. New York, NY: John Wiley & Sons.
Cooking and Processing, 47–68. New York: Van Nostrand Reinhold.
55534_C004.indd 10955534_C004.indd 109 10/22/08 8:31:02 AM10/22/08 8:31:02 AM
1. Burfoot, D., Griffin, W.J., and James, S.J. 1988. Microwave pasteurization of prepared
2. Harlfinger, L. 1992. Microwave sterilization. Food Technology 46(12): 57–60.
8. Metaxas, A.C. 1996. Foundation of Electroheat: A Unified Approach. New York: John
24. Buffler, C.R. (Ed.). 1993. Microwave cooking and processing. Ch. 5. in Microwave
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
110 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
25. Metaxas, A.C., and Meredith, R.J. (Eds). 1993. Industrial microwave heating. IEE
Power Engineering Series 4, London: Peter Peregrinus Ltd.
26. Zhao, Y., Flugstad, B., Kolbe, E., Park, J.W., and Wells, J.H. 2000. Using capacitive
(radio frequency) dielectric heating in food processing and preservation—a review.
Journal of Food Processing Engineering 23: 25–55.
ucts at microwave frequencies. Microwave World 12(2): 6–15.
28. Athey, T.W., Stuchly, M.A., and Stuchly, S.S. 1982. Measurement of radio frequency
permittivity of biological tissues with an open ended coaxial line: Part I. IEEE Trans-actions on Microwave Theory and Techniques 30(1): 82–6.
26. Stuchly, M.A., Athey, T.W., Samaras, G.M., and Taylor, G.E. 1982. Measurement of
radio frequency permittivity of biological tissues with an open ended coaxial line: Part
II-experimental results. IEEE Transactions on Microwave Theory and Techniques
30(1): 87–92.
30. Nyshadham, A., Sibbald, C.L., and Stuchly, S.S. 1992. Permittivity measurements
using open-ended sensors and reference liquid calibration – an uncertainty analysis.
IEEE Transactions on Microwave Theory and Techniques 30(1): 305–14.
31. Hewlett-Packard Company. 1993. HP 85070M Dielectric probe measurement sys-
tem, HP 85070B high-temperature dielectric probe kit. Hewlett-Packard Company:
5091–6247E.
32. Seaman, R., and Seals, J. 1991. Fruit pulp and skin dielectric properties for 150 MHz to
6400 MHz. Journal of Microwave Power Electromagnetic Engineering 26: 72–81.
33. Herve, A.G., Tang, J., Luedecke, L., and Feng, H. 1998. Dielectric properties of cottage
cheese and surface treatment using microwaves. Journal of Food Engineering 37(4):
389–410.
34. Tang, J., Hao, F., and Lau, M. 2002. Microwave heating in food processing. In Advances
35. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 1971. Standard test methods for
complex permittivity. Designation D 2520–86. Method B.
36. Sadiku, M.N.O. 2001a. Numerical Techniques in Electromagnetics, 2nd ed. Boca
Raton, FL: CRC Press LLC.
37. Sadiku, M.N.O. 2001b. Elements of Electromagnetic, 3rd ed. New York: Oxford Uni-
versity Press Inc.
38. Balanis, C.A. 1989. Advanced Engineering Electromagnetics. New York: John Wiley
& Sons.
39. Neophytou, R.I., and Metaxas, A.C. 1998. Combined 3D FE and circuit modeling of
radio frequency heating systems. Journal of Microwave Power and Electromagnetic Energy 33(4): 243–62.
MAG-32(2): 1468–71.
41. Yee, K.S. 1966. Numerical solution of initial boundary-value problems involving Max-
well’s equations in isotropic media. IEEE Transaction on Antennas and Propagation
14: 302–7.
netic scattering problems using the time-dependent Maxwell’s equations. IEEE Micro-wave Theory Technology 23(8): 623–30.
steady-state electromagnetic-penetration problems. IEEE Transaction on Electromag-netic Compatibility 22(3): 191–202.
55534_C004.indd 11055534_C004.indd 110 10/22/08 8:31:03 AM10/22/08 8:31:03 AM
in Bioprocessing Engineering. New York: World Scientific. 1–44.
40. Dibben, D., and Metaxas, A.C. 1997. Frequency domain versus time domain finite ele-
ment methods for calculation of fields in multimode cavatities. IEEE Trans. Magnetics
27. Engelder, D.S., and Buffler, C.R. 1991. Measuring dielectric properties of food prod-
42. Taflove, A., and Brodwin, M.E. 1975. Numerical solution of steady-state electromag-
43. Taflove, A.1980. Application of the finite-difference time-domain method to sinusoidal
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Computer Simulation of Radio Frequency Heating 111
scattering of complex objects. IEEE Transaction on Electromagnetic Compatibility
24(4): 397–405.
45. Sheen, D.M., Ali, S.M., Abouzahra, M.D., and Kong, J.A. 1990. Application of the
microstrip circuits. IEEE Transaction on Microwave Theory and Techniques 38(7):
849–57.
46. QWED. 2005. Quick Wave User Guide, version 5.0 QWED Company. Warsaw, Poland.
47. Cook, R.D., Malkus, D.S., Plesha, M.E., and Witt, R.J. 2001. Concepts and applica-
netic problems. IEEE Transaction on Education 32(2): 85–93.
49. Neophytou, R.I., and Metaxas, A.C. 1999. Combined Tank and Applicator Design of
Radio Frequency Heating Systems. IEE Proceeding – Microwaves, antennas, and propagation 146(5): 311–18.
50. Chan, T.V.C.T., Tang, J.M., and Younce, F. 2004. Three-dimensional numerical mod-
Microwave Power and Electromagnetic Energy 39(2): 87–106.
51. Baginski, B., Broughton, R., Hall, D., and Christman, L. 1990. Experimental and
numerical characterization of the radio-frequency drying of textile materials (II). Jour-nal of Microwave Power and Electromagnetic Energy 25(2): 104–13.
strength developed during the RF assisted heat pump drying of particulates. Journal of Microwave Power and Electromagnetic Energy 33(3): 167–77.
53. Palombizio, A., and Yakovlev. V.V. 1999. Parallel worlds of microwave modeling and
industry: A time to cross? Microwave World 20(2): 14–19.
54. Yakovlev, V.V. 2002. Review of commercial EM modeling software suitable for mod-
eling of microwave heating-update. Presented at 4th IMMG workshop ‘Computer mod-eling and microwave power industry’, January 7, 2002, Seattle, WA.
55. Kopyt, P., and Gwarek, W. 2004. A Comparison of Commercial CFD Software Capable
of Coupling to External Electromagnetic Software for Modeling of Microwave Heating
Process. The Industrial Microwave Modeling Group 6th Seminar ‘Computer Modeling and Microwave Power Engineering’, January 12, 2004, Austin, TX.
56. Datta, A.K. 2000. Mathematical modeling of microwave processing of foods: An over-
view. In Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis, J. Irudayaraj
(Ed.). New York: Marcel Dekker.
applicator. Doctor of Philosophy dissertation. Department of Biological System
Engineering. WA, USA: Washington State University, Pullman.
58. Barber, H. 1983. Electroheat. Dobbs Ferry, NY, USA: Sheridan House, Inc.
59. COMSOL. 2005. COMSOL Multiphysics User’s Guide. Burlington, MA, USA: COMSOL
Multiphysics.
60. COMSOL. 2005. Electromagnetics Module User’s Guide. Burlington, MA, USA:
COMSOL Multiphysics.
61. Wang, Y., Wig, T.D., Tang, J., and Hallberg, L.M. 2003. Dielectric properties of foods
relevant to RF and microwave pasteurization and sterilization. Journal of Food Engi-neering 57: 257–68.
55534_C004.indd 11155534_C004.indd 111 10/22/08 8:31:03 AM10/22/08 8:31:03 AM
three-dimensional finite-difference time-domain method to the analysis of planar
tions of finite element analysis. 4th ed. New York: John Wiley & Sons Inc.
48. Sadiku, M.N.O. 1989. A simple introduction to finite element analysis of electromag-
eling of an industrial radio frequency heating system using finite elements. Journal of
52. Marshall, M.G., and Metaxas, A.C. 1998. Modeling of the radio frequency electric field
57. Wang, J. 2007. Study of electromagnetic field uniformity in radio frequency heating
44. Umashankar, K., and Taflove, A. 1982. A novel method to analyze electromagnetic
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
113
5 Infrared Radiation for Food Processing
Kathiravan Krishnamurthy, Harpreet Kaur Khurana, Soojin Jun, Joseph Irudayaraj, and Ali Demirci
CONTENTS
5.1 Introduction ................................................................................................... 113
5.2 Basic Laws of Infrared Radiation ................................................................. 115
5.3 Interaction of IR Radiation with Food Components ..................................... 116
5.4 Applications of IR Heating in Food Processing Operations ......................... 118
5.4.1 Drying and Dehydration ................................................................... 118
5.4.2 Integrated Drying Technologies: IR and Convective Drying ............ 119
5.4.3 Pathogen Inactivation ........................................................................ 120
5.4.3.1 Effect of Power and Sample Temperature ........................... 120
5.4.3.2 Effect of Peak Wavelength and Bandwidth ......................... 120
5.4.3.3 Effect of Sample Depth ....................................................... 121
5.4.3.4 Types of Microorganisms.................................................... 121
5.4.3.5 Inactivation Mechanism ...................................................... 122
5.4.3.6 Types of Food Materials ..................................................... 123
5.4.4 IR Heating in Other Miscellaneous Food Processing Operations .... 123
5.5 Sources of IR Heating ................................................................................... 123
5.6 Quality and Sensory Changes by IR Heating ............................................... 126
5.7 IR Heat Transfer Modeling ........................................................................... 128
5.8 Selective Heating by Infrared Radiation ....................................................... 131
5.9 Thermal Death Kinetics Model .................................................................... 135
5.10 Conclusion and Future Research Potential ................................................... 137
References .............................................................................................................. 138
5.1 INTRODUCTION
cess of any unit operation. Heat transfer occurs through one of three methods,
conduction, convection, and radiation. Foods and biological materials are heated
primarily to extend their shelf life or to enhance taste. In conventional heat-
ing, which is achieved by combustion of fuels or by an electric resistive heater,
heat is generated outside of the object to be heated and is conveyed to the mate-
rial by convection of hot air or by thermal conduction. By exposing an object to
55534_C005.indd 11355534_C005.indd 113 10/22/08 12:05:58 PM10/22/08 12:05:58 PM
Energy conservation is one of the key factors determining profitability and suc-
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
114 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
infrared (IR) radiation (wavelength of 0.78–1000 μm), the heat energy generated
can be directly absorbed by food materials. Along with microwave, radiofrequency
(RF), and induction, IR radiation transfers thermal energy in the form of elec-
tromagnetic (EM) waves and encompasses that portion of the EM spectrum that
borders on visible light and microwaves (Figure 5.1). Certain characteristics of
make it more effective for some applications than others. IR heating is also gaining
time in comparison to conventional heating. Recently, IR radiation has been widely
applied to various thermal processing operations in the food industry such as dehy-
dration, frying, and pasteurization [1].
Food systems are complex mixtures of different biochemical molecules, biological
polymers, inorganic salts, and water. The infrared spectra of such mixtures originate
with the mechanical vibrations of molecules or particular molecular aggregates
within a very complex phenomenon of reciprocal overlapping [2]. Amino acids,
polypeptides, and proteins reveal two strong absorption bands localized at 3–4 μm
and 6–9 μm. On the other hand, lipids show strong absorption phenomena over the
entire infrared radiation spectrum with three stronger absorption bands situated at
3–4 μm, 6 μm, and 9–10 μm, whereas carbohydrates yield two strong absorption
bands centered at 3 μm and 7–10 μm [3,4].
mid-infrared (MIR), and far-infrared (FIR), corresponding to the spectral ranges of
0.75–1.4 μm, 1.4–3 μm, and 3–1000 μm, respectively [1]. In general, FIR radiation
is advantageous for food processing because most food components absorb radiative
energy in the FIR region [3].
Over the past several years, IR heating has been predominantly applied in the
made in the area of IR heating of foods. This chapter is in line with the current
developments in the area of IR heating and serves as a base for its widespread
upcoming practical applications in food processing. Therefore, the aim of this
chapter is to evaluate the existing knowledge in the area of IR heating, provide
insight for the relation between product properties, engineering processes, and
present an up-to-date view on further research. Along with the sound theoretical
FIGURE 5.1 Electromagnetic wave spectrum.
1019
10–5 10–4 10–3 10–2 10–1 101 102 103 1041
1018 1017 1016 1015 1014 1013 1012 1011
Microwave
Wavelength, µm
Frequency, Hz
Infrared
Visible
UltravioletX rays
Gamma rays
55534_C005.indd 11455534_C005.indd 114 10/22/08 12:05:59 PM10/22/08 12:05:59 PM
popularity because of its higher thermal efficiency and fast heating rate/response
IR radiation can be classified into three regions, namely, near-infrared (NIR),
electronics and allied fields with little practical application in the food process-
ing industry. However, in the last few years significant research efforts have been
IR heating such as efficiency, wavelength, and reflectivity set it apart from and
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Infrared Radiation for Food Processing 115
background on IR heating, the chapter also encompasses application of IR heat-
ing in food processing operations such as drying, dehydration, blanching, thaw-
ing, pasteurization, sterilization, and other miscellaneous food applications
such as roasting, frying, broiling, and cooking, as well as in-depth assessment
of pathogen inactivation. The effect of IR heating on sensory, physicochemical,
nutritional, and microstructural quality of foods and its comparison with other
existing common methods of heating such as convection and microwave heating
are discussed as well.
5.2 BASIC LAWS OF INFRARED RADIATION
The amount of the IR radiation that is incident on any surface has a spectral
dependence because energy coming out of an emitter is composed of different
wavelengths and the fraction of the radiation in each band, dependent upon the
temperature and emissivity of the emitter. The wavelength at which the maximum
radiation occurs is determined by the temperature of the IR heating elements.
This relationship is described by the basic laws for blackbody radiation such as
Planck’s law, Wien’s displacement law, and Stefan-Boltzman’s law, as summa-
rized in Table 5.1 [1,5].
TABLE 5.1Basic Laws Pertaining to Infrared Radiation
Basic Laws Aspects Addressed/Explanation
Planck’s law
E Thc
n ehc n kTbλ λλ πλ
( , )[ ]/
=−
2
1
02
2 5 0
Gives spectral blackbody emissive power distribution E Tbλ λ( , ).
Wien’s displacement law
λmax =2898
T
Gives the peak wavelength (λmax), where spectral distribution of
radiation emitted by a blackbody reaches maximum emissive power.
Stefan-Boltzmann’s law
E T n Tb ( ) = 2 4σb
an infrared source.
H H uλ λ λσ= −0 exp( )*
Gives the transmitted spectral irradiance (Hλ W/m2 · μm) in non-
homogeneous systems.
ρ τ+ + =α 1
total incoming radiation, absorptivity (α): ratio of absorbed part of
incoming radiation to the total incoming radiation, and
transmissivity (τ): ratio of transmitted part of incoming radiation to
the total incoming radiation (Figure 5.2)
k: Boltzmann’s constant (1.3806 × 10 − 23 J/K); n: refractive index of the medium (n for vacuum is 1 and,
for most gases, n is very close to unity); λ: the wavelength (μm); T: source temperature (K); c0: speed of
light (km/s); h: Planck’s constant (6.626 × 10 − 34 J·s); σ: Stefan-Boltzmann constant (5.670 × 10−8
W/m2K4); λmax: peak wavelength; Hλ0: incident spectral irradiance (W/m2 ⋅ μm); u: mass of absorbing 2
λ* 2
Source: From Krishnamurthy, Khurana, Jun, Irudayaraj, and Demirci. Infrared heating in food process-
ing: an overview. Comp Reviews in Food Science and Food Safety. Blackwell, Jan 2008, v.7. With
permission.
55534_C005.indd 11555534_C005.indd 115 10/22/08 12:06:00 PM10/22/08 12:06:00 PM
Gives the total power radiated (E (T)) at a specific temperature from
Modified Beer’s law
medium per unit area (kg/m ); σ spectral extinction coefficient (m /kg).
Reflectivity (ρ): ratio of reflected part of incoming radiation to the
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
116 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
5.3 INTERACTION OF IR RADIATION WITH FOOD COMPONENTS
The effect of IR radiation on optical and physical properties of food materials is
crucial for the design of an infrared heating system and optimization of a thermal
process of food components. The infrared spectra of such mixtures originate with
the mechanical vibrations of molecules or particular molecular aggregates within a
When radiant electromagnetic energy impinges upon a food surface, it may
induce changes in the electronic, vibrational, and rotational states of atoms and mol-
ties at different wavelengths by food components differ. The type of mechanisms
for energy absorption determined by the wavelength range of the incident radiative
energy can be categorized as: (1) Changes in the electronic state corresponding to the
wavelength range 0.2–0.7 μm (ultraviolet and visible rays); (2) changes in the vibra-
tional state corresponding to wavelength range 2.5–1000 μm (FIR); and (3) changes
in the rotational state corresponding to wavelengths above 1000 μm (microwaves)
mechanism of changes in the molecular vibrational state, which can lead to radiative
heating. Water and organic compounds such as proteins and starches, which are the
main components of food, absorb FIR energy at wavelengths greater than 2.5 μm [1].
Sandu [3] reported that most foods have high transmissivities (low absorptivities) at
wavelengths smaller than 2.5 μm.
Due to a lack of information, data on absorption of infrared radiation by the
principal food constituents can be regarded as approximate values. The key absorp-
tion ranges of food components are as visualized in Figure 5.3 [3]. It depicts the
principal absorption bands of the major food components compared to the absorp-
tion spectrum of water, indicating that the absorption spectra of food components
overlap with one another in the spectral regions considered. The effect of water on
absorption of incident radiation is predominant over all the wavelengths, suggesting
that selective heating based on distinct absorptivities for a target food material can
be more effective when predominant energy absorption of water is eliminated. The
Irradiation
Absorbed radiation
Transmitted radiation
FIGURE 5.2
55534_C005.indd 11655534_C005.indd 116 10/22/08 12:06:01 PM10/22/08 12:06:01 PM
[6]. In general, the food substances absorb FIR energy most efficiently through the
ecules. As food is exposed to infrared radiation, it is absorbed, reflected, or scattered
very complex overlapping phenomenon [2].
(a blackbody does not reflect or scatter), as shown in Figure 5.2. Absorption intensi-
Reflected radiation
Extinction of radiation (absorption, transmission and reflection).
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Infrared Radiation for Food Processing 117
summarized in Table 5.2 [4].
some absorption; and the remaining light leaves the material close to where it enters.
tion obtained visually. For materials with a rough surface, both regular and body
TABLE 5.2The Infrared Absorption Bands for Chemical Groups and Relevant Food Components
Chemical Group Absorption Wavelength (μm) Relevant Food Component
Hydroxyl group (O-H) 2.7–3.3 Water, sugars
Aliphatic carbon-hydrogen bond 3.25–3.7 Lipids, sugars, proteins
Carbonyl group (C=O) (ester) 5.71–5.76 Lipids
Carbonyl group (C=O) (amide) 5.92 Proteins
Nitrogen-hydrogen group (-NH-) 2.83–3.33 Proteins
Carbon-carbon double bond (C=C) 4.44–4.76 Unsaturated lipids
Source: Rosenthal I. 1992. Electromagnetic radiations in food science. Berlin, Heidelberg: Springer-Verlag.
(From Krishnamurthy, Khurana, Jun, Irudayaraj, and Demirci. Infrared heating in food processing:
an overview. Comp Reviews in Food Science and Food Safety. Blackwell, Jan 2008, v.7. With
permission.)
1.0
0.5
02 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Wavelength (µm)
Tra
nsm
issiv
ity
W
P L
S
LP L
S
P = Proteins
L = Lipids
S = Sugars
W = Water
FIGURE 5.3 Principal absorption bands of the main food components compared with water.
55534_C005.indd 11755534_C005.indd 117 10/22/08 12:06:02 PM10/22/08 12:06:02 PM
infrared absorption bands for chemical groups and relevant food components are
[7]. Regular reflection takes place at the surface of a material. For body reflection,
Regular reflection produces only the gloss or shine of polished surfaces, whereas
Interactions of light with food material and the crucial optical principles such
as regular reflection, body reflection, and light scattering were discussed by Birth
body reflection produces the colors and patterns that constitute most of the informa-
reflection can be observed. For instance, at NIR wavelength region (λ < 1.25 μm),
approximately 50% of the radiation is reflected back, while less than 10% radiation
the light enters the material, becomes diffuse due to light scattering, and undergoes
is reflected back at the FIR wavelength region [8]. Most organic materials reflect
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
118 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
different colors and patterns [5].
The infrared optical characteristics of different media are also theoretically
discussed by demonstrating the necessity of the scattered radiation during measure-
ments [9]. It was experimentally observed that as the thickness of the layer increases,
no theoretical explanation of this phenomenon was presented.
5.4 APPLICATIONS OF IR HEATING IN FOOD PROCESSING OPERATIONS
The application of infrared radiation to food processing has gained momentum due
to its inherent advantages over the conventional heating systems. Infrared heating
has been applied in drying, baking, roasting, blanching, pasteurization, and steriliza-
tion of food products.
5.4.1 DRYING AND DEHYDRATION
Infrared heating has an imperative place in drying technology and extensive research
work has been conducted in this area. Most dried vegetable products are prepared
conventionally using a hot-air dryer. However, this method is inappropriate when
dried vegetables are used as ingredients of instant foods because of the low rehy-
dration rate of the vegetables. Freeze-drying technique is a competitive alternative;
however it is comparatively expensive.
new process for the production of high-quality dried foods at low cost [1]. The
use of IR radiation technology for dehydrating foods has numerous advantages
ess control parameters, and space saving along with clean working environment
[1,10,11,12].
Therefore, FIR drying operations have been successfully applied in recent years
for drying of fruit and vegetable products such as potatoes [13,14], sweet potatoes
[15], onions [12,16], kiwifruit [17], and apples [18,19]. Drying of seaweed, vegeta-
also found its application in food analysis to measure water content in food products
[20,21].
Generally, solid materials absorb infrared radiation in a thin surface layer. How-
ever, moist porous materials are penetrated by radiation to some depth and their
transmissivity depends on the moisture content [22]. Energy and mass balance devel-
oped by Ratti and Mujumdar [23] accounts for the shrinkage of the heated particle
and absorption of infrared energy. Theoretical calculations showed that intermittent
infrared drying with energy input of 10 W/m2 becomes equivalent to convective dry-2
55534_C005.indd 11855534_C005.indd 118 10/22/08 12:06:03 PM10/22/08 12:06:03 PM
including reduction in drying time, alternate energy source, increased energy effi-
Application of FIR drying in the food industry is expected to represent a
ciency, uniform temperature in the product while drying, better-quality finished
ing in which the heat transfer coefficient would be as high as 200 W/m K.
4% of the total reflection producing a shine of polished surfaces. The rest of the
reflection occurs where radiation enters the food material and scatters, producing
a simultaneous decrease in transmittance and increase in reflection occurs. However,
products, a reduced necessity for air flow across the product, high degree of proc-
bles, fish flakes, and pasta is also done in tunnel infrared dryers. Infrared drying has
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Infrared Radiation for Food Processing 119
Factors affecting IR drying kinetics have been studied by several researchers.
surface temperature of the radiator. Optimization of the FIR heating process for
shrimp dehydration suggested that the effect of plate distance on the drying rate was
in the plate and air temperature [24]. Nowak and Levicki [18] reported that infrared
drying of apple slices was an effective and much faster method of water removal
than convective drying under equivalent parameters. Exploring the IR convective
drying of onion slices, Sharma et al. [16] observed that the drying time increased
with the increase in air velocity at all infrared powers applied; however, it reduced
with an increase in infrared power and the drying took place in the falling drying
rate period.
5.4.2 INTEGRATED DRYING TECHNOLOGIES: IR AND CONVECTIVE DRYING
Even though IR drying is a promising novel method, it is not a panacea for all drying
processes. It appeals, because it is fast and produces heating inside the material being
dried, but its penetrating powers are limited [25,26]. Prolonged exposure of a bio-
logical material to IR heat results in swelling and ultimately fracturing of the mate-
rial [27]. Fasina et al. [28] showed that IR heating changes the physical, mechanical,
chemical, and functional properties of barley grains. IR heating of legume seeds to
140°C caused cracking on the surface [29]. However, a combination of intermittent
infrared heating and continuous convection drying of thick porous material resulted
sidered as surface treatment similar to other radiation technologies.
Application of combined electromagnetic radiation and conventional convective
as it gives a synergistic effect. Afzal et al. [30] reported that during the combined
convective and IR heating process of barley, the total energy required was reduced
by about 156, 238, and 245% as compared with convection drying alone at 40, 55 or
70°C, respectively. Datta and Ni [31] discussed the application of combined infrared,
microwave, and hot air heating food materials. Mongpreneet et al. [12] evaluated
the dehydrating synergy generated when using ceramic-coated radiators and a high-
vacuum environment to study drying of welsh onion.
Development of a continuous drying apparatus equipped with FIR heaters, NIR
heaters, and hot air blast can reduce the economic costs, drying time, and operating
temperature. However, vegetable size should be restricted to no more than 5 mm in
ous combined infrared and convective dryer for vegetables. The synergistic effect of
infrared and hot air led to rapid heating of the materials, resulting in a higher rate
of mass transfer. The evaporation of water took 48% less time and 63% less energy
consumption in combined mode drying as compared to convective drying.
Recently, the concept of FIR heating immediately after convective drying
(approximately 40°C) for drying of paddy has been utilized in the paddy industry in
Japan [33,34]. Gabel et al. [35] compared the drying and quality characteristics of
sliced high-solids onions dried with catalytic infrared (CIR) heating and forced air
55534_C005.indd 11955534_C005.indd 119 10/22/08 12:06:04 PM10/22/08 12:06:04 PM
Masamura et al. [14] confirmed increased drying rates of potatoes with increasing
not significant, whereas the drying rate increased monotonically with an increase
in better product quality and energy efficiency [10]. Thus, IR radiation can be con-
heating is considered to be more efficient over radiation or convective heating alone,
thickness to improve drying efficiency [1]. Hebbar et al. [32] developed a continu-
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
120 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
convection (FAC) heating. CIR both with and without air recirculation had higher
maximum drying rates, shorter drying times, and greater drying constants than FAC
at moisture contents greater than 50% (d.b.).
A combination of IR heating with freeze-drying in sweet potatoes could reduce
the processing time by less than a half [36]. The effect of NIR on reduction of freeze-
drying time of beef was investigated by Burgheimer et al. [37]. The authors con-
cluded that shorter wavelength resulted in rapid drying and thus reduced drying
time. Drying time with infrared heating was reduced to 7 h, as opposed to 11 h with
convectional drying.
5.4.3 PATHOGEN INACTIVATION
IR heating can be used to inactivate bacteria, spores, yeast, and mold in both liq-
on the following parameters: Infrared power level, temperature of food sample,
peak wavelength, and bandwidth of infrared heating source, sample depth, types
of microorganisms, physiological phase of microorganisms (exponential or station-
ary phase) and types of food materials. Therefore, several researchers have investi-
gated the effects of these parameters on inactivation of pathogenic microorganisms
as follows.
5.4.3.1 Effect of Power and Sample Temperature
Increase in the power of infrared heating source produces more energy and thus total
energy absorbed by microorganisms (M/Os) increased, leading to increased levels of
microbial inactivation. Sterilization of wheat surface was investigated by Hamanaka
et al. [38]. Surface temperature increased rapidly as infrared rays directly heated the
surface without any need for conductors. Therefore, irradiating powers of 0.5, 1.0,
1.5, and 2.0 kW resulted in 60, 80, 125, and 195°C inside the experimental device,
and 45, 65, 95, and 120°C on the surface of wheat stack, resulting in reductions of
0.83, 1.14, 1.18, and 1.90 log10 CFU/g total bacteria after a 60 s treatment, respec-
tively. Dry heat inactivation of B. subtilis spores by infrared radiation was investi-
gated by Molin and Ostlund [39]. D values of B. subtilis at 120, 140, 160, and 180°C
were 26 min, 66 s, 9.3 s, and 3.2 s, respectively. Shorter treatment time was enough
to inactivate pathogens at higher temperatures and the estimated Z value was 23°C.
E. coli population was reduced by 0.76, 0.90, and 0.98 log10 after 2 min exposure to
IR radiation when the temperature of the bacterial suspension was maintained at 56,
58, and 61°C, correspondingly [40].
5.4.3.2 Effect of Peak Wavelength and Bandwidth
As indicated earlier, food and microbial components absorb certain wavelengths of
key components in order to ensure pathogen inactivation and minimize changes in
food quality. It would be feasible to selectively heat the M/Os present in food prod-
ucts without adversely increasing the temperature of sensitive food components. Jun
and Irudayaraj [41] utilized selective infrared heating in the wavelength range of
55534_C005.indd 12055534_C005.indd 120 10/22/08 12:06:04 PM10/22/08 12:06:04 PM
uid and solid foods. Efficacy of microbial inactivation by infrared heating depends
infrared radiation. Therefore, it is beneficial to investigate the absorption pattern of
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Infrared Radiation for Food Processing 121
Fusarium proliferatum in corn meal. The selected wavelength denatures the pro-
tein in microorganisms, leading to a 40% increase in inactivation of A. niger and
F. proliferatum, compared to normal IR heating. For instance, a 5-min treatment
with nonselective and selective heating resulted in approximately 1.8 and 2.3 log10
CFU/g reduction of A. niger. Similarly, reductions of 1.4 and 1.95 log10 CFU/g of
F. proliferatum were obtained with 5 min of nonselective and selective heating,
respectively. Although the sample temperatures after selective or non-selective
infrared heating were identical, absorption of energy by fungal spores was higher in
selective heating, leading to a higher lethal rate [41].
Total energy decreases as the peak wavelength increases. Therefore, NIR radia-
tion with short wavelength has relatively higher energy level than FIR radiation with
subtilis treated with three infrared heaters (A, B, and C) having different peak wave-
lengths (950, 1100, and 1150 nm) and radiant energies (4.2, 3.7, and 3.2 μW/cm2/nm),
respectively. Air-dried Bacillus subtilis solution placed on a stainless steel Petri dish
was treated with infrared heating after adjusting the water activity using a desiccator.
Surface temperature of Petri dish was 100°C after a 2 min exposure for all the heat-
ers. Pathogen inactivation was higher with heater A than those with heaters B and C,
although temperature was the same for all the heaters. For example, at water activity
of 0.7, decimal reduction times of heaters A, B, and C were approximately 4, 12, and
with the radiation spectrum [42].
5.4.3.3 Effect of Sample Depth
The penetration depth of IR radiation is very low. An increase in the sample depth
slows down the bulk temperature increase of foods [43]. A 90% reduction in IR
power was observed within a thin layer of 40 μm in bacterial suspension [44]. There-
fore, the effect of IR radiation on the microbial inactivation diminishes as the sample
thickness increases. Decreasing the sample depth also accelerates the inactivation
of spores [45] and E. coli and S. aureus [46]. The ratio of number of injured cells to
the number of survivors increased as the depth decreased. For example, S. aureus population was reduced by approximately 2 and 5 log10 CFU/mL at 321°K, when the
sample depths were 2.9 and 0.9 mm, respectively. Similarly, E. coli population in the
samples with 1.3 and 2.2 mm in depth resulted in approximately 1.33 and 1.66 log10
CFU/mL reductions, respectively at 321°K.
5.4.3.4 Types of Microorganisms
Resistances of bacteria, yeasts, and molds to infrared heating might be differ-
ent due to their structural and compositional differences. In general, spores are
more resistant than vegetative cells. When Bacillus subtilis spores in physiologi-
cal saline were exposed to infrared heating, a spore population increased up to
ing in shoulder and tailing effects. Upon infrared heat treatment, vegetative cells
were inactivated followed by activation of spores. An initial increase in B. subtilis
55534_C005.indd 12155534_C005.indd 121 10/22/08 12:06:05 PM10/22/08 12:06:05 PM
5.88–6.66 μm using optical bandpass filters for inactivation of Aspergillus niger and
longer wavelength. Hamanaka et al. [42] studied the inactivation efficacy of Bacillus
22 min, respectively. Therefore, it is obvious that inactivation efficiency is associated
five times in the first 2 min, followed by subsequent exponential reduction, result-
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
122 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
population was caused by heat shock germination of spores. A 10-min treatment
with infrared heating resulted in more than 90% reduction in B. subtilis population
[47]. Hamanaka et al. [42] also reported a shoulder effect where B. subtilis spores
were germinated.
Cereal surface is often contaminated with spore formers like Bacillus, Aspergillus, and Penicillium. Wheat was treated with infrared heating at 2.0 kW
for 30 s, followed by cooling for 4 h, and again treated for 30 s with infrared heat-
ing to obtain a 1.56 log10 CFU/g reduction. The irradiation helped in activation
of spores into vegetative cells and the second irradiation effectively inactivated
spore formers. Furthermore, intermittent treatment can minimize the quality
changes, as continuous treatment longer than 50 s resulted in discoloration of
wheat surface [38].
Naturally occurring yeasts in honey were completely inactivated with an 8-min
infrared heat treatment [48]. The temperature of the honey was raised to 110°C after
the treatment, resulting in microbial reduction of 3.85 log10 CFU/mL.
5.4.3.5 Inactivation Mechanism
Inactivation of M/Os by IR heating may include inactivation mechanism similar
to that of ultraviolet light (DNA damage) and microwave heating (induction heat-
ing) in addition to thermal effect, as infrared is located between ultraviolet and
microwave in the electromagnetic spectrum [38]. Thermal inactivation can damage
DNA, RNA, ribosome, cell envelope, and proteins in microbial cell. Sawai et al. [43]
investigated the inactivation mechanism of E. coli treated with infrared radiation in
phosphate buffer saline. They proposed that sub-lethally injured cells will become
more sensitive to an inhibitory agent which has an inhibitory action on the damaged
portion of the cell. Four inhibitory agents, namely, penicillin (PCG; inhibits cell
wall synthesis), chloramphenicol (CP; inhibits protein synthesis), rifampicin (RFP;
inhibits RNA synthesis), and nalidixic acid (NA; inhibits DNA synthesis) were used
for the enumeration of pathogens. An 8-min infrared radiation at a wattage of 3.22
kW/m2 resulted in approximately 1.8, 1.9, 2.7, and 3.2 log10 reduction of E. coli, when
NA, PCG, RFP, and CP enriched agars were used for enumeration, respectively.
When no inhibitory agents were present, a 1.8 log reduction was obtained. This
observation implies that approximately 0.1, 0.9, and 1.4 log reductions were caused
by inhibitory actions of PCG, RFP, and CP, respectively. With conductive heat-
ing, similar damages were observed; however, RNA, protein, and cell wall showed
more vulnerability to IR heating than conductive heating. The order of magnitude
of infrared damages was as follows: Protein>RNA>cell wall>DNA. RFP inhibits
RNA polymerase in E. coli and CP binds ribosomal subunits and inhibits peptidyl-
transferase reactions [43].
Sawai et al. [45] reported that for both stationary and exponential phase cells,
sensitivity to NA increased as the sample temperature increased. However, there
was only a small increase, indicating that minimal damage occurred in the DNA. In
particular, exponential phase cells had more cell wall and membrane damage than
stationary phase cells. However, more serious injuries to RNA polymerase occurred
for stationary phase cells, compared to exponential phase cells [45]. Transmission
electron microscopic observation and infrared spectroscopy of IR-treated S. aureus
55534_C005.indd 12255534_C005.indd 122 10/22/08 12:06:06 PM10/22/08 12:06:06 PM
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Infrared Radiation for Food Processing 123
content leakage, and mesosome disintegration [49].
5.4.3.6 Types of Food Materials
As described earlier, IR radiation has a poor penetration capacity. However, the sur-
face temperature of food materials increases rapidly and heat is transferred inside
by thermal conduction. Typical thermal conductivities of solid foods are much lower
than liquid foods. Convective heat transfer occuring inside the liquid foods under IR
heating can contribute to an increase in the lethality of microbes. A summary of the
study pertinent to pathogen inactivation in different types of food materials such as
solid, liquid, and nonfood materials is given in Table 5.3.
5.4.4 IR HEATING IN OTHER MISCELLANEOUS FOOD PROCESSING OPERATIONS
The usefulness of IR heating has also been demonstrated in various other food
processing applications such as roasting, frying, broiling, heating, and cooking meat
and meat products, soy beans, cereal grains, cocoa beans, and nuts.
orized IR broiling is a unique and innovative method. Khan and Vandermey [50] pre-
pared ground beef patties by IR broiling in a conveyorized broiler. Results showed
that due to high temperatures and short cooking times, the infrared broiler could
produce more servings per hour, compared to conventional gas heating. In addition,
it was found that ground beef patties broiled by tube broiler did not have any adverse
effects on the cooking quality (number of samples cooked/min, percentage shrink-
and overall acceptability), as compared to conventional gas broiling method. Sakai
and Hanzawa [1] reported on the performance of infrared-based systems with con-
tive study indicated energy savings of 45–70% with infrared heating. Abdul-Kadir
et al. [51] conducted imbibition studies and cooking tests to evaluate the effect of IR
heating on pinto beans (Phaseolus vulgaris) heated to 99 and 107°C. IR-heating was
found to improve rehydration rate and degree of swelling of pinto beans; however,
Studies on color development during IR roasting of hazelnuts were reported
by Ozdemir and Devres [52]. Olsson et al. [53] found that infrared radiation and jet
impingement, as compared with heating in a conventional household oven, increased
the rate of color development of the crust, and shortened the heating time of parbaked
baguettes during post-baking. Furthermore, the fastest color development was obtained
by combining infrared and impingement heating. The rate of water loss increased due
to a higher heat transfer rate, but the total water loss was reduced because of a shorter
heating time. In general, the formed crust was thinner for IR-treated baguettes.
5.5 SOURCES OF IR HEATING
Two conventional types of infrared radiators used for process heating are electric or
55534_C005.indd 12355534_C005.indd 123 10/22/08 12:06:06 PM10/22/08 12:06:06 PM
cells clearly verified cell wall damage, cytoplasmic membrane shrinkage, cellular
ventional ovens for baking rice crackers and for roasting fish pastes. The compara-
cooking time of pinto beans was significantly increased.
gas-fired heaters. These two types of IR heaters generally fit into three temperature
With the growing interest in flame-broiling and rapid cooking methods, convey-
age, number of servings/h) or sensory quality (appearance, flavor, texture, juiciness
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
124 Fo
od
Processin
g Op
eration
s Mo
delin
g: Design
and
An
alysis
TABLE 5.3Inactivation of Pathogenic Microorganisms by Infrared Heating
Pathogen Food/non-food Material Temperature/energy Time Log Reduction* Reference
Solid FoodsMonilia fructigena Strawberry ∼50°C++ 10 s 2.5–5.2 log (estimated) [60]
Total bacterial count Wheat or soybean surface 1.5 kW 10 s ∼3.0 [47]
Total aerobic plate count Onion 80°C (average 2226 W/m2) ∼24 min 1.72 ± 0.45 log10 CFU/10g [35]
Coliform counts Onion 80°C (average 2226 W/m2) ∼24 min 4.04 ± 0.47 log10 CFU/10g
Yeast and mold Onion 80°C (average 2226 W/m2) ∼24 min 1.26 ± 0.14 log10 CFU/10g
Wheat surface 2.0 kW 60 s ∼1.9 log10 CFU/g [38]
Listeria monocytogenes Turkey frankfurters 70°C++ 82.1 s 3.5 ± 0.4 log10 CFU/cm2 [65]
75°C++ 92.1 s 4.3 ± 0.4 log10 CFU/cm2
80°C++ 103.2 s 4.5 ± 0.2 log10 CFU/cm2
Aspergillus niger spores Corn meal 72°C+++ 6 min 1.8 [41]
Aspergillus niger spores Corn meal 68°C+++ 6 min 2.3
Fusarium proliferatum spores Corn meal 72°C+++ 6 min 1.4
Fusarium proliferatum spores Corn meal 68°C+++ 6 min 1.95
Listeria monocytogenes Oil-browned deli turkey 399°C around product surface 75 s 3.7 log10 CFU/mL [69]
Liquid FoodsYeast Honey 0.2 W/cm2 8 min ∼3.85 log10 CFU/mL+ [48]
55534_C005.indd 12455534_C005.indd 124
10/22/08 12:06:07 PM10/22/08 12:06:07 PM
(with an optical filter: 5.45–12.23 μm)
(with an optical filter: 5.45–12.23 μm)
Natural bacterial microflora
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Infrared
Rad
iation
for Fo
od
Processin
g 125
Nonfood MaterialsBacillus subtilis Stainless steel plate at water
activity of 0.7
4.2 μW/cm2/nm (peak wavelength: 950 nm)
3.7 μW/cm2/nm (peak wavelength: 1100 nm)
3.2 μW/cm2/nm (peak wavelength: 1150 nm)
4 min**
22 min**
12 min**
[42]
E. coli Nutrient agar (depth = 0) 4.36 × 103 6 min ∼2.30–2.48 log10 CFU/plate+ [87]
(depth = 1 mm from surface) 4.36 × 103 6 min ∼ 0.70 log10 CFU/plate
(depth = 2 mm from surface) 4.36 × 103 6 min ∼ 0.66 log10 CFU/plate
Bacillus subtilis spores Steel plate 180°C 3.2 s** [39]
E. coli Phosphate buffer saline 3.22 kW/m2 8 min 1.8 log10 CFU/mL [43]
E. coli Phosphate buffer 61°C 2 min 0.98 log10 CFU/mL [40]
Aspergillus niger spores Physiological suspension 1.0 kW 40 s 4.0 to 5.0 [47]
Bacillus subtilis spores Physiological suspension 1.0 kW 10 s ∼1.0
* In (log10
** D value.+ No growth observed after treatment.++ Surface temperature.+++ Temperature of corn meal.
Source: From Krishnamurthy, Khurana, Jun, Irudayaraj, and Demirci. Infrared heating in food processing: an overview. Comp Reviews in Food Science and Food Safety.
Blackwell, Jan 2008, v.7. With permission.
55534_C005.indd 12555534_C005.indd 125
10/22/08 12:06:08 PM10/22/08 12:06:08 PM
CFU/mL), unless specified.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
126 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
ranges [54]: 343–1100°C for gas and electric IR, and 1100–2200°C for electric IR
only. IR temperatures are typically used in the range of 650–1200°C to prevent char-
ring of products. The capital cost of gas heaters is higher, while the operating cost is
cheaper than that of electric infrared systems. Electrical infrared heaters are popular
because of installation controllability, ability to produce prompt heating rate, and
ing the desired wavelength for a particular application. In general, the operating
heaters ranges from 30 to 50% [54]. The spectral region suitable for industrial proc-
ess heating ranges from 1.17 to 5.4 μm, which corresponds to 260–2200°C [55].
Infrared radiation is transmitted through water at short wavelength, whereas at
longer wavelengths it is absorbed at the surface [1]. Hence, drying of thin layers
give better results at the NIR region. Studies to investigate the superiority of FIR to
NIR radiation have also been found in the literature. Sakai and Hanzawa [1] have
discussed the effects of the radiant characteristics of heaters on the crust formation
Radiant heating with an NIR heater led to a greater heat sink into food samples,
resulting in formation of relatively wet crust layers, compared to dry layers formed
by FIR heaters. However, the rate of color development by FIR heaters was greater
with NIR heaters, primarily due to a more rapid heating rate on the surface.
using infrared sources at λmax of 2.7 μm (MIR) and at λmax of 4.0 μm (FIR). With
a higher energy source (MIR), change in core temperature followed closely the
change in surface temperature with a shorter cooking time. Fat content of the food
was found to be independent of core temperature. However, with the lower energy
source (FIR), the increasing rate of core temperature was dependent on the fat con-
tent, showing that targeted core temperature was achieved more quickly as the fat
content increased.
FIR energy penetration into the food has gained ceaseless concern. Hashimoto et
al. [56,57] studied the penetration of FIR energy into sweet potato and found that FIR
radiation absorbed by the vegetable model was damped to 1% of the initial values at
a depth of 0.26–0.36 mm below the surface, whereas NIR showed a similar reduction
at a depth of 0.38–2.54 mm. Sakai and Hanzawa [1] reported the penetration depth
of the FIR energy did not affect the temperature distribution inside the food. Fur-
ther, they indicated that FIR energy penetrates very little, almost all the energy being
converted to heat at the surface of the food, which was consistent with the study of
Hashimoto et al. [25], evaluating FIR heating technique as a surface heating method.
Table 5.4 shows the penetration depth of NIR energy into various food products [58].
5.6 QUALITY AND SENSORY CHANGES BY IR HEATING
during IR heat treatment for ensuring commercial success. Several researchers have
studied the quality and sensory changes of food materials during IR heating.
Application of infrared radiation in a step wise manner by slowly increasing the
power, with short cooling between power levels, resulted in less color degradation
55534_C005.indd 12655534_C005.indd 126 10/22/08 12:06:08 PM10/22/08 12:06:08 PM
efficiency of an electric IR heater ranges from 40 to 70%, while that of gas-fired IR
seems to be more efficient at the FIR region, while drying of thicker bodies should
Sheridan and Shilton [55] evaluated the efficacy of cooking hamburger patties
It is crucial and beneficial to investigate the quality and sensory changes occurring
cleaner form of heat. Electric infrared emitters also provide flexibility in produc-
and color development at the surfaces of foods, such as white bread and wheat flour.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Infrared Radiation for Food Processing 127
than with intermittent infrared heating [59]. Reductions in overall color change of
37.6 and 18.1% were obtained for potato and carrot, respectively. The quality of beef
produced by infrared dehydration was similar to that of conventional heating as indi-
cated by the surface appearance and taste tests [37]. Longer infrared heat treatments
may darken the color of onion due to browning [35].
Hebbar et al. [48] suggested that a 3–4-min infrared heat treatment was adequate
for producing commercially acceptable products, with reduction in yeast cells and
acceptable changes in hydroxymethylfurfural and diastase activity. Infrared heating
raised the internal temperature of the strawberries not above 50°C, while the surface
temperature was high enough to effectively inactivate microorganisms. Therefore,
infrared heating can be used for surface pasteurization of pathogens without deterio-
rating the food quality [60].
in rancidity development [61]. Compared to regular freeze-drying, IR-assisted
freeze-drying of yam brought about lower color differences as well as faster dehy-
dration. Furthermore, infrared heating leading to a higher dehydration ratio implies
that infrared heating reduces serious product shrinkage [62].
IR heat-treated lentils were found to be darker than raw lentil, though there was
infrared heat treatment, in addition to having a more open microstructure; thus,
enhancing the rehydration characteristics [63].
Sensory evaluation of ground beef patties treated by infrared heating and gas
TABLE 5.4Penetration Depth of NIR (0.75–1.4 μm) into Food Products
Product Spectral Peak (μm) Depth of Penetration (mm)
Dough, wheat 1.0 4–6
Bread, wheat 1.0 11–12
Bread, biscuit, dried 1.0 4
0.88 12
Grain, wheat 1.0 2
Carrots 1.0 1.5
Tomato paste,
70–85% water 1.0 1
Raw potatoes 1.0 6
Dry potatoes 0.88 15–18
Raw apples 1.16 4.1
1.65 5.9
2.36 7.4
Source: From Krishnamurthy, Khurana, Jun, Irudayaraj, and Demirci. Infrared heating in food process-
ing: an overview. Comp Reviews in Food Science and Food Safety. Blackwell, Jan 2008, v.7. With
permission.
55534_C005.indd 12755534_C005.indd 127 10/22/08 12:06:09 PM10/22/08 12:06:09 PM
significant difference between two treatments [50]. However, the appearance of
The evaluation of full-fat flour made from IR-heat treated soybeans maintained
no visible indication [63]. Cell walls of lentils were less susceptible to fracture after
freshness similar to fresh flour for 1 year. However, untreated samples resulted
broiling in terms of flavor, texture, juiciness, and overall acceptability showed no
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
128 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
gas-broiled patties were rated higher than infrared heating, as seen by the scores of
10.94 and 9.62 for gas broiling and IR heating, respectively. Pungency of onions fol-
lowing infrared radiation decreased with reduction in moisture [35]. Infrared heating
of carrots provided less damage to the tissue than blanching, as observed by lower
relative electrolyte leakage values and microscopic observations [64]. Furthermore,
infrared-treated carrots had higher tissue strength while effectively inactivating the
enzymes on the carrot surface.
Although infrared heat-treated turkey samples were slightly darker than the
difference in color values as measured by L*, a*, and b* values [65]. When menu
servings of peas were held at 50–60°C for 2 h by IR lamps, the quality of peas dete-
riorated and resulted in unacceptable products [66]. Bitterness and protein solubility
of peas were reduced after IR heat treatment [67]. Furthermore, canola seeds had
higher dehulling capacity after infrared heating [67]. Head rice yield was improved
by infrared heating while the whiteness of the rice was maintained [68].
Chlorophyll content of dehydrated onions treated by infrared increased with an
increase in irradiation power [12]. Infrared heating provided a more appealing brown
color and roasted appearance to deli turkey, in addition to effectively pasteurizing
the surface [69]. Infrared heating and jet impingement of bread resulted in rapid
drying and enhanced color development, compared to conventional heat treatment
[53]. Though the thickness of bread crust increased faster, a short IR treatment time
enabled the formation of thinner crust.
various food products. As the literature review substantiates, IR heating does not
antioxidant activities.
5.7 IR HEAT TRANSFER MODELING
Modeling of infrared heat transfer inside food has been a research-intensive area
because of the complexity of optical characteristics, radiative energy extinction, and
combined conductive and/or convective heat transfer phenomena.
Diffusion characteristics in relation to radiation intensity and thickness of slab were
inside food systems under FIR radiation. The radiation energy driving internal mois-
ture movement during FIR drying of a potato produced the activation energy for diffu-
sion inversely proportional to the slab thickness [13]. Sakai and Hanzawa [1] assumed
that most FIR radiation energy would be absorbed at the surface of a food system due
to the predominant energy absorption of water. Energy would thereafter be transported
by heat conduction in the food. Based on this assumption, a governing equation and
boundary conditions to explain heat transfer derived from energy balance in a food
distribution in samples was in good agreement with model predictions, permitting con-
trol of the surface temperature to retain food properties without overtreatment.
Abe and Afzal [76] investigated four mathematical drying models, namely, an
exponential model, a Page model, a diffusion model based on spherical grain shape,
55534_C005.indd 12855534_C005.indd 128 10/22/08 12:06:10 PM10/22/08 12:06:10 PM
controls after treatments, refrigerated storage for an hour resulted in no significant
change the quality attributes of foods significantly, such as vitamins, protein, and
explored using the finite element method to explain the phenomenon of heat transfer
system were solved using Galerkin’s finite element method. The measured temperature
Table 5.5 briefly summarizes the effect of IR treatment on nutritional quality of
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Infrared Radiation for Food Processing 129
and an approximation of the diffusion model to address the thin-layer infrared dry-
ing characteristics of rough rice. They found the Page model as most satisfactory for
describing thin-layer infrared radiation drying of rough rice. Similarly, Das et al.
while studying the drying characteristics of high-moisture paddy.
TABLE 5.5 Effect of Infrared Treatment on Nutritional Quality of Food Products
Food ProductParameters Effecting Nutritional Quality Effect of Treatment Reference
Barley Germination
rate at 55ºC
25% increase by combination of IR
heating and convectional heating
[30]
Wheat Germination rates
(heat treatment
for 63 s each)
Convectional heating: 90–97%
Intermittent IR heating: 80–86%
Continuous IR heating: 78–85%
[70]
Lentils Phytic acid content Untreated: 2.34%
High density IR heating (170ºC): 1.06%
[63]
Full fat
soybeans
Protein solubility Infrared heating: 84%
Spouted bed drying: 82%
Extrusion: 73%
[71]
Lentils Protein solubility Untreated: 74.7%
High density IR heating (170ºC): 50.9%
[63]
Soymilk Protein digestibility Untreated: 83.2%
IR heat treated (110–115ºC): 86.5%
[72]
Crude canola
oil
Phosphorus contents Untreated canola seeds: 46 ppm
IR heat treated (123ºC): 273 ppm
[67]
Sulfur contents Untreated canola seeds: 1.4 ppm
IR heat treated (123ºC): 4.4 ppm
[67]
Soymilk Available lysine content Untreated: 4.64 g/16g N
IR heat treated (110–115ºC): 6.14 g/16g N
[72]
Fried chicken Thiamine retention Reheated by IR heating: 81–84%
Convection heating: 86–96%
[73]
Orange juice D-values for vitamin C
degradation at 75°C
Convectional heating: 27.02 min
Ohmic heating: 23.72 min
Infrared heating: 23.76 min
[74]
Full fat
soybeans
Reduction in urease
activity at 140°C and
28% moisture (d.b.)
Infrared heating: 53%
Spouted bed drying: 30%
[71]
Peanut hulls Antioxidant activities
(total phenolic
compounds in water
extract, after 60 min)
FIR irradiation: 141.6 μM
FIR heating: 90.3 μM
[75]
Radical scavenging
activities
FIR irradiation: 48.83%
FIR heating: 23.69%
Source: From Krishnamurthy, Khurana, Jun, Irudayaraj, and Demirci. Infrared heating in food process-
ing: an overview. Comp Reviews in Food Science and Food Safety. Blackwell, Jan 2008, v.7. With
permission.
55534_C005.indd 12955534_C005.indd 129 10/22/08 12:06:10 PM10/22/08 12:06:10 PM
[77] also reported that Page model adequately fitted the experimental drying data
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
130 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
which would require the least computing time [78]. However, in a proposal sug-
gested for the solution of heat transfer problems for food materials, it was recom-
mended that if the solution region represents a simple rectangular domain, then
strategy [79].
Tsai and Nixon [80] investigated the transient temperature distribution in a
multilayer composite, semi-transparent or transparent, absorbing and emitting
the initial and boundary conditions in consideration of the effects of both thermal
radiation and conduction within each layer and convection on both exterior sur-
faces were solved by a hybrid numerical algorithm, using a fourth-order explicit
space variable.
IR frying was successfully predicted by the model developed based on combined
infrared radiation and convection heating [81]. Heat conduction equation was solved
was determined by the step size of these differences.
A control volume formulation for the solution of a set of three-way coupled heat,
moisture transfer, and pressure equations with an IR source term was presented in
three dimensions. The solution procedure uses a fully implicit time-stepping scheme
to simulate the drying of potato during infrared heating in three-dimensional Car-
tesian coordinates. Simulation indicated that the three-way coupled model predicted
the temperature and moisture contents better than the two-way coupled heat and
mass transfer model. The overall predictions agreed well with the available experi-
mental data and demonstrated a good potential for application in grain and food
drying [82].
Togrul [19] investigated infrared drying of apple to create new suitable models
including combined effects of drying time and temperature. In order to explain the
Page, Wang and Singh, Henderson and Pabis, logarithmic, diffusion approach,
Midilli equation) were developed and validated. The variation of moisture ratio
with time could be well described by the model developed by Midilli et al. [83].
of infrared drying of apple were derived wherein the model derived from modi-
Moreover, a single equation was derived to predict the moisture ratio change dur-
ing infrared drying (0–240 min) of apple in the temperature range of 50–80°C.
The developed model is expected to predict drying behaviors of other vegetables
and fruit.
55534_C005.indd 13055534_C005.indd 130 10/22/08 12:06:11 PM10/22/08 12:06:11 PM
In general, numerical methods applied to solve the set of equations are finite
elements, finite difference, and finite volume or the control volume method. It is
often difficult to decide which solution strategy would give the best results and
the traditional finite difference methods should be the preferred discretization
Runge-Kutta method for the time variable and a finite difference method for the
numerically using the finite difference method. The infinitesimal differentials were
The experimentally measured temperature distribution of slices of beef during
replaced by differences of finite size and the degree of accuracy of the representation
drying behavior of apple, ten different drying models (Newton, Page, modified
fied Page II had lowest root mean squared error (RMSE), mean bias error (MBE),
and chi-square along with highest modeling efficiency and regression coefficient.
medium exposed to a thermal radiative heat flux. The governing conditions with
Sixty-six different model equations relating the temperature and time dependence
simplified Ficks diffusion (SFFD) equation, modified Page Equation-II, and
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Infrared Radiation for Food Processing 131
5.8 SELECTIVE HEATING BY INFRARED RADIATION
Very few attempts have been made to study selective heating in the food industry as
well as in nonfood research areas. Certain studies have been found in the literature
applied to electronics [84,85]. These studies on electronics showed the accessibility
and the spectral distribution of the radiative source. However, the studies did not
elaborate on the details or its implementation.
and control of the accurate wavelength should be considered for optimization of the
process. In practice, the IR source emits radiation covering a very wide range. Hence, it
In the context of food processing, wavelengths above 4.2 μm are most desirable
for an optimal IR process of food system due to predominant energy absorption of
water in the wavelengths below 4.2 μm [86]. Lentz et al. [87] discussed the impor-
tance of IR-emitting wavelength for thermal processing of dough. Excessive heating
of the dough surface and poor heating of the interior was observed when the IR
spectral emission was not consistent with the wavelengths best absorbed for dough.
Excessive surface heating, in the absence of corresponding heat removal to the inte-
rior, gave rise to crust formation thus inhibiting heat transfer.
From the earliest, Shuman and Staley [88] discussed that orange juice has a
minimum absorption at the range between 3 and 4 μm, whereas dried orange sol-
ids have a maximum absorption at the same region. When using an IR source with
the maximum peak at wavelength of 4 μm, the radiation energy was not properly
absorbed by orange juice; however, dried orange solids could absorb IR energy pre-
dominantly. Hence, the IR source was controlled to emit the spectral ranges between
5 and 7 μm to obtain desirable absorption of orange juice. Their work clearly shows
the importance of spectral control of the IR source to manipulate the delivery of heat
A study by Bolshakov et al. [89] suggested that a maximum transmission of IR
radiation should cover the spectral wavelength of 1.2 μm obtained by analysis of
the transmittance spectrograms of lean pork for deep heating of pork. A two-stage
max of 3.5–3.8 μm (FIR) and the second stage for greater penetra-
max of 1.04 μm (NIR). Higher moisture
content and sensory quality of the products were obtained using combined FIR and
NIR heaters, compared to the conventional method. A similar study explored by
Dagerskog [81] used two alternative types of infrared radiators for frying equipment,
ature was 2340°C at 220 V rating, corresponding to λmax of 1.24 μm as NIR region,
and tubular metallic electric heaters (Backer 500W, type 9N5.5) at a temperature of
680°C at 220 V, corresponding to λmax of 3.0 μm as FIR region. It was observed from
of the radiation decreased, indicating that although the short-wave radiation (NIR)
had a higher penetrating capability than the long-wave radiation (FIR), the heating
55534_C005.indd 13155534_C005.indd 131 10/22/08 12:06:11 PM10/22/08 12:06:11 PM
Most infrared heaters consist of lamps emitting the spectrum with one specific peak
wavelength corresponding to a fixed surface temperature. The type of infrared emitter
of selective heating based on the relation between the optical properties of objects
is a challenge to cut off the entire spectral distribution to obtain a specific bandwidth.
amounts to specific food materials.
frying process designed consisted of the first stage to aim surface heat transfer by
which were quartz tube heaters (Philips 1 kW, type 13195X) whose filament temper-
radiant flux with λtion of heat transfer by radiant flux with a λ
the study that both penetration capacity and reflection increased as the wavelength
effects were almost the same due to body reflection.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
132 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
There seems to be a lack of consistent methods to explore the intrinsic selective
heating process in the area of food engineering. Note that Dagerskog and Österström
in their frying experiment of pork to transmit only the wavelength above 1.507 μm,
which turned out be a good example for design of selective IR heating systems to
emit the spectral regions of interest.
Recently, Jun [90] developed a novel selective FIR heating system, demonstrating
the importance of optical properties besides thermal properties when electromag-
netic radiation is used for processing. The system had the capability to selectively
ters that can emit radiation in the spectral ranges as needed. Simulation of the heat
transfer phenomena in the food domain was done in one dimension (Figure 5.4)
because only the top surface of food sample was exposed to the incident IR radiation.
The governing differential equation can be described by:
ρ ∂∂
∂∂
∂∂
CTt
kT
z
qzpr= −
2
2 (5.1)
r2 3
p
t is the time, and z is the distance (m).
If the initial temperature (T0) is assumed to be uniform, the initial boundary
condition is given by
T z t T z D t( , ) = ≤ ≤ =0 for 0 0; (5.2)
where T0 is the initial sample temperature (°C) and D is the sample thickness (m)
Soy protein Glucose
Glass plate
n = N (Boundary 2)
n = 1 (Boundary 1)
n = 2
n = 3
25.4 mm
Infrared radiation
qconv
qrad,out
qabs
qcond
denotes a thermocouple
0dz
dq
7 mm
2 mm
Cylindrical vessel
Rotated at 3 rpm by an AC motor (3.8 W)
FIGURE 5.4 Schematic of the discretized food domain with food holder. (From Jun, S.
2002. Selective far infrared heating of food systems. Ph.D. Dissertation, The Pennsylvenia
State University, USA.)
55534_C005.indd 13255534_C005.indd 132 10/22/08 12:06:12 PM10/22/08 12:06:12 PM
[5] first used a bandpass filter (Optical Coating Laboratory, Inc., type no. L-01436-7)
heat higher absorbing components to a greater extent using optical band pass fil-
where, q is the heat flux (W/m ), T is the temperature (°C), ρ is the density (kg/m ),
C is the specific heat of food sample (J/kg⋅°C), k is thermal conductivity (W/m⋅°C),
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Infrared Radiation for Food Processing 133
Considering convection (qconv) and radiation losses (qrad,out) at boundary 1 and
conduction loss (qcond) at boundary 2, the boundary conditions can be given by
kTz
h T T q E T Ez
∂∂
ε λ=
= − − + −0
1 11conv r b b( ) ( ) ( ) ( ( ) (∞ TT t∞⎡⎣ ⎤⎦ >) ,at the top 0
and
kTz
q Nk
dT T
z D
N∂∂ ∞
=
= − −rglass
glass
at the bott( ) ( ) oom, t > 0 (5.3)
Here, Eb(T) is the total emissive power at a given source temperature obtained using
Planck’s integral, as presented by
E T E
hc
n eb b
0
5( , )
[ –1]0( ) = =λ
∞
∫ T d hc n kTλ λ πλ λ
2 02
2
00
∞
∫ dλ (5.4)
The IR radiation is not only absorbed by the surface but also penetrates into the food
q n q S z nr absexp(– ( – 1))( ) = ⋅ ⋅Δ (5.5)
where, qabs−1), and Δz is the grid size (m) [81].
boundary 1 denotes an assembly of FIR source lamps, boundary 2 denotes a cone-
shaped waveguide to keep IR radiation from dispersing out into the air, boundary
3 denotes an opening outlet, and boundary 4 denotes a sample surface. Under the
IR source (boundary 1)
Waveguide (boundary 2)
Sample (boundary 4)
Opening (boundary 3)
T2, ε
2, q
2 =
0 (insulation)
T4, ε
4, q
4
T3, ε
3, q
3
T1, ε
1, q
1
FIGURE 5.5 2002. Selective far infrared heating of food systems. Ph.D. Dissertation, The Pennsylvenia
State University, USA.)
55534_C005.indd 13355534_C005.indd 133 10/22/08 12:06:13 PM10/22/08 12:06:13 PM
is the extinction coefficient (m
Figure 5.5 shows a simplified schematic of the FIR heating system where
Simplified gray and diffuse enclosure of the heating chamber. (From Jun, S.
system, causing a local radiative heat flux of
is the initial radiant heat flux absorbed by food sample on the surface, S
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
134 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
condition that the IR lamps (boundary 1) and the waveguide (boundary 2) are gray
using the energy balance equation for each surface [91], given as
qF q E T Fi
i jj
i j j i iε ε− −
⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟ = ( )−
=
−∑ 11
1
3
b ii j j i
j
E T i
q A q q
−
=∑
+ = =
b
1
1, 2, 3
A fo
( ),
( ,
1
3
1 3 3 20 0
=
rr insulation)
(5.6)
2
F is the view factor, and ε is the emissivity of each boundary. Equation 5.6 for each
boundary can be solved simultaneously.
abs, is dependent upon the
tion and the view factor as obtained from the opening (boundary 3) to the food
surface (boundary 4). This relationship can be expressed as
q F qabs = ⋅ ⋅ ⋅−3 4 3α(λ) τ(λ) (5.7)
3
integral form of q3 with respect to the wavelength. F3–4 can be calculated using the
equation set formulated for disk to a parallel coaxial disk with the same radius [91],
as given by
F X x Xa r
r3 4
22 2
2
1
24 1− = − −{ } = +
+, (5.8)
where r is the radius (m) of boundary 3 and boundary 4, and a is the distance (m)
between boundary 3 and boundary 4.
Equation 5.1 through Equation 5.3 because this technique is relatively simple and
very accurate for highly transient problems. It is seen from Figure 5.2 that the food
of accuracy of the representation is determined by the step size of these differences.
Finite difference formulas obtained from Taylor series expansions such as forward
difference and centered difference are used to approximate time and space deriva-
change with respect to time at different locations in the food domain are derived in
a discretized form (for n = 2 to N − 1) as,
T Tk t
C zT T T
tnt
nt
nt
n nt+
+ −= + − + −1
2 1 122
ΔΔ
Δρ p( )
( )t
ρρC zq n q n
p
r rΔ( ( ) ( ))+ − −1 1 (5.9)
55534_C005.indd 13455534_C005.indd 134 10/22/08 12:06:14 PM10/22/08 12:06:14 PM
spectral absorptivity (α) of food, the spectral distribution of filtered infrared radia-
where, τ is the filter transmissivity which is a function of the wavelength (λ). The
hence, food absorptivity (α) and filter transmissivity (τ) can be combined into an
An explicit (forward in time) finite difference method is applied to solve
domain is subdivided as indicated by the grid points for each layer. The infinitesimal
differentials are replaced by differences of finite size (time and space) and the degree
tives in the partial differential equation [80]. The first derivatives of temperature
and diffuse reflectors, the total heat flux absorbed by food sample can be calculated
where, q is the heat flux (W/m ) absorbed or emitted by each boundary (Figure 5.3),
The amount of heat flux absorbed by food surface, q
incoming IR heat fl ux transmitting the boundary 3, q is spectral dependent and
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Infrared Radiation for Food Processing 135
Hence for n = 1
T Tk t
C zT
k tC z
ht t t1
11 2 2 2
2 2 2+ = + − +ΔΔ
ΔΔρ ρp p
co
( ) ( )
nnv
p
p
r
ΔΔ
ΔΔ
tC z
T
tC z
q h
t
ρ
ρ
⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟
− − −
1
21( ( ) TT E T E T
tC z
q q∞ ∞ε(λ)( )ρ
+ − − −b b
p
r r( ) ( ) ) ( ( ) (1 2 1Δ
Δ)))
(5.10)
and n = N
T Tk t
C zT
k tC z
kNt
Nt
Nt+−= + − +1
2 1 2
2 2 2ΔΔ
ΔΔρ ρp p( ) ( )
gglass
glass p
ΔΔt
d C zTN
t
ρ
⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟
+22Δ
ΔΔt
C zq N
k
dT
ρ p
rglass
glass
( )+⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟−∞
ttC z
q N q Nρ p
r rΔ( ( ) ( ))− −1
(5.11)
The temperature at time, t + 1 is explicitly expressed as a function of neighboring
be restricted by the stability criterion, which otherwise may be diverging and
for the explicit solution of Equations 5.9 through Equations 5.11 to be stable is
given by
ΔΔ
Δt
z C
k h z≤
+( )
( )
2
2
ρ p (5.12)
Based on Equation 5.9 through Equation 5.11, N simultaneous equations for N
nodal points can be formed and the unknown temperatures determined using
Matlab (v. 5.2, Natick, MA). Simulated temperature distributions at the upper
and mid section of the food domain were obtained and compared with the experi-
mental results. Applicability of this technique was demonstrated by selective
heating of soy protein and glucose. Soy protein was heated about 6°C higher than
glucose after 5 min of heating, exhibiting a reverse phenomenon when heating
with experimental data, thus supporting the mechanism of selective IR heating
(Figure 5.6) [92].
5.9 THERMAL DEATH KINETICS MODEL
Hashimoto et al. [93] developed a simple integrated model to predict the survivors
of E. coli under predicted temperature distribution during FIR pasteurization. Ana-
lytical and numerical models of bacterial spores have been developed to predict
55534_C005.indd 13555534_C005.indd 135 10/22/08 12:06:15 PM10/22/08 12:06:15 PM
temperatures at an earlier time t. The explicit finite difference solution should
never reach the final solution [20]. The common stability criterion to be satisfied
without the filter. Simulation results from the developed models were consistent
microbial spore growth during sterilization. Stumbo [94] first validated a model with
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
136 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
Time (sec)
200 50 100 150 200 250 300
30
40
50
60
70
80
Time (sec)
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140
Tem
pera
ture
(oC
)T
em
pera
ture
(oC
)
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
Exp. Sim.
Soy protein
Glucose
Exp. Sim.
Soy protein
Glucose
(a)
(b)
FIGURE 5.6 Comparison between the simulated temperatures (denoted by ‘Sim.’) of soy
protein and glucose, and the measured data (denoted by ‘Exp.’) at the top surface during IR
infrared heating system–design and evaluation (Part I). J Drying Technol 21(1): 51–67.)
55534_C005.indd 13655534_C005.indd 136 10/22/08 12:06:16 PM10/22/08 12:06:16 PM
heating (a) without filter and (b) with filter. (From Jun S, and Irudayaraj J. 2003, Selective far
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Infrared Radiation for Food Processing 137
To overcome limitations of traditional models to predict spore populations during
treatment, especially under ultra-high temperatures, new models including spore
activation have been proposed [95]. The populations in a suspension of bacterial
spores subjected to lethal heat treatment were simulated using a composite model
involving simultaneous, independent activation and inactivation of dormant but via-
ble spores, and inactivation of activated spores.
Jun [90] developed an integrated model that combined the thermal death kinet-
ics with the IR heat transfer model and could predict the survivors of fungal spores
based on temperature prediction. Selective IR heating was found to differentially
deliver a higher degree of lethality to individual fungal spores. The denaturation of
the protein band as a target spectral region of selective heating might also partially
contribute to an increase in the lethality of fungal spores.
Recently, Tanaka et al. [60] combined Monte Carlo FIR radiation simulations
suitability of the method for surface decontamination in strawberries. The model
include radiation, convection, and conduction in a fast and comprehensive way.
Computations were validated against measurements with a thermographic camera.
FIR heating showed more uniform surface heating than air convection heating, with
a maximum temperature well below the critical limit of about 50°C. To improve the
system functionality in terms of heating rate and temperature uniformity, several
factors can be considered, i.e. system rotation, optimized heating cycles, and dif-
ferent heater geometries. The projected modeling approach can be used to achieve
such goals in a comprehensive manner and the model should be extended to consider
mass transfer and volumetric dissipation of the radiation power.
5.10 CONCLUSION AND FUTURE RESEARCH POTENTIAL
IR heating is a unique process; however, presently, the application and understanding
of IR heating in food processing are still in its infancy unlike the electronics and
allied sector where IR heating is a mature industrial technology. It is further evident
from this chapter that IR heating offers many advantages over convection heating
time-saving as well as increased production line speed. IR heating is attractive pri-
marily for surface heating applications. In order to achieve energy optimum and
nation of IR heating with microwave and other common conductive and convective
modes of heating holds great potential. It is quite likely that the utilization of IR
heating in the food processing sector will augment in the near future, especially in
the area of drying and minimal processing.
Over the last three decades several studies have been conducted to address vari-
ous technological aspects of IR heating for food processing. However, research needs
for the upcoming years may include the following:
55534_C005.indd 13755534_C005.indd 137 10/22/08 12:06:17 PM10/22/08 12:06:17 PM
first-order inactivation of uniformly activated spores during a sterilization process.
was a powerful tool to evaluate and address complex heating configurations that
efficient practical applicability of IR heating in the food processing industry, combi-
with convection-diffusion air flow and heat transfer simulations to investigate the
including greater energy efficiency, heat transfer rate, and heat flux that results in
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
138 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
maximum optical response of the target object when the emission band of
infrared and the peak absorbance band of the target object are identical.
Such manipulations of IR radiation for selective heating of foods could be
very useful.
2. Detailed insight into the theoretical explanation of IR effects especially
with regards to its interaction with food components, changes in taste and
3. Application of catalytic infrared (CIR) heating: CIR heating uses natural
gas or propane, which is passed over a mesh catalyst pad to produce ther-
mal radiant energy through a catalytic reaction. This reaction occurs below
magnetic radiant energy from CIR has peak wavelengths in the range of
medium- to far-infrared. The peak wavelengths match reasonably well with
the three absorption peaks of liquid water, which could result in rapid mois-
ture removal. Since CIR directly converts natural gas to radiant energy, it is
4. 3D modeling of food products: Studies on IR heating have generally been
applied to foods with a simple 1D or 2D geometry. There is a paucity of
information in the area of advanced 3D radiation modeling. Most cru-
cially, integrating microbial death kinetics with chemical kinetics due to
IR heating will provide a holistic approach to understand the of complex
microbial and chemical process kinetics and interactions as well as the
system design.
REFERENCES
1. Sakai N, and Hanzawa T. 1994. Applications and advances in far-infrared heating in
Japan. Trends Food Sci Technol 5: 57–362.
New York Acad Sci 69: 63–69.
3. Sandu C. 1986. Infrared radiative drying in food engineering: A process analysis. Biotechnol Prog 2(3): 109–19.
4. Rosenthal I. 1992. Electromagnetic radiations in food science. Berlin, Heidelberg:
Springer-Verlag.
5. Dagerskog M, and Österström L. 1979. Infra-red radiation for food processing I. A
study of the fundamental properties of infra-red radiation. Lebens Wissen Technol 12(4): 237–42.
6. Decareau RV. 1985. Microwaves in the food processing industry. Orlando: Academic
Press.
7. Birth GS. 1978. The light scattering properties of foods. J Food Sci 43: 916–25.
8. Skjoldebrand C. 2001. Infrared heating. In: Richardson P, editor. Thermal technologies in food processing. New York: CRC Press.
9. Krust PW, McGlauchlin LD, and Mcquistan RB. 1962. Elements of infra-red technol-ogy. New York: John Wiley & Sons.
55534_C005.indd 13855534_C005.indd 138 10/22/08 12:06:18 PM10/22/08 12:06:18 PM
IR radiation in foods. IR heating can be controlled or filtered to allow
radiation within a specific spectral range to pass through using suitable
1. Selective heating: There is not much literature on selective heating using
optical band pass filters. Such a controlled radiation can stimulate the
more energy-efficient than typical infrared emitters using electricity.
flavor compounds and living organisms.
the ignition temperature of gas so that no flame is produced. The electro-
2. Halford RS. 1957. The influence of molecular environment on infrared spectra. Ann
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Infrared Radiation for Food Processing 139
10. Dostie M, Seguin JN, Maure D, Tonthat QA, and Chatingy R. 1989. Preliminary meas-
urements on the drying of thick porous materials by combinations of intermittent infra-
red and continuous convection heating. In: Mujumdar AS, Roques MA, editors. Drying ’89. New York: Hemisphere Press.
11. Navari P, Andrieu J, and Gevaudan A. 1992. Studies on infrared and convective drying
of nonhygroscopic solids. In: Mujumdar AS, editor. Drying 92. Amsterdam: Elsevier
Science, 685–94.
12. Mongpreneet S, Abe T, and Tsurusaki T. 2002. Accelerated drying of welsh onion by
far infrared radiation under vacuum conditions. J Food Eng 55: 147–56.
13. Afzal TM, and Abe T. 1998. Diffusion in potato during far infrared radiation drying.
J Food Eng 37(4): 353–65.
14. Masamura A, Sado H, Nabetani H, and Nakajima M. 1988. Drying of potato by far-
infrared radiation. Nippon Shokuhin Kogyo Gakkaishi 35(5): 309–14.
15. Sawai J, Nakai T, Hashimoto A, and Shimizu M. 2004. A comparison of the hydroly-
sis of sweet potato starch with b-amylase and infrared radiation allows prediction of
reducing sugar production. Int J Food Sci Technol 39: 967–74.
16. Sharma GP, Verma RC, and Pathare PB. 2005. Thin-layer infrared radiation drying of
onion slices. J Food Eng 67: 361–66.
17. Fenton GA, and Kennedy MJ. 1998. Rapid dry weight determination of kiwifruit pom-
ace and apple pomace using an infrared drying technique. New Zealand J Crop Horti Sci 26: 35–38.
18. Nowak D, and Levicki PP. 2004. Infrared drying of apple slices. Innovative Food Sci Emerging Technol 5: 353–60.
19. Togrul H. 2005. Simple modeling of infrared drying of fresh apple slices. J Food Eng
71: 311–23.
20. Anonymous. 1995. Determination of moisture content in Finnish honey using an infra-
red dryer. Food Market Technol 9(1): 40–41.
21. Hagen W, and Drawert F. 1986. Determination of water content by infrared. Monatss-chrift Brauwissenschaft 40(6): 240–46.
22. Lampinen MJ, Ojala KT, and Koski E. 1991. Modeling and measurements of dryers for
coated paper. Drying Technol 9(4): 973–1017.
23. Ratti C, and Mujumdar AS. 1995. Infrared drying. In: Mujumdar AS, editor. Handbook of industrial drying. New York: Marcel Dekker, 567–88.
24. Fu WR, and Lien WR. 1998. Optimization of far-infrared heat dehydration of shrimp
using RSM. J Food Sci 63(1): 80–83.
25. Hashimoto A, Sawai J, Igarashi H, and Shimizu M. 1993. Irradiation power effect on
pasteurization below lethal temperature of bacteria. J Chem Eng Japan 26(3): 331–33.
26. Sakai N, Fujii A, and Hanzawa T. 1993. Heat transfer analysis in a food heated by far
infrared radiation. Nippon Shokuhin Kogyo Gakkaishi 40(7): 469–77.
27. Jones W. 1992. A place in the line for micronizer. Special Report, Micronizing Com-
pany, UK. 1–3.
28. Fasina OO, Tyler RT, and Pickard M. 1996. Effect of infrared heat treatment on the
chemical composition and functionality of cereal grains and comparison of hulless
and pearled barley. Progress Report, Dept. of Applied Microbiology and Food Science,
University of Saskatchewan, Saskatoon.
29. Fasina OO, Tyler B, and Pickard M. 1997. Infrared heating of legume seeds effect on
physical and mechanical properties. ASAE Paper No: 976013.
30. Afzal TM, Abe T, and Hikida Y. 1999. Energy and quality aspects of combined FIR-
convection drying of barley. J Food Eng 42: 177–82.
31. Datta AK, and Ni H. 2002. Infrared and hot-air-assisted microwave heating of foods for
control of surface moisture. J Food Eng 51: 355–64.
32. Hebbar HU, Vishwanathan KH, and Ramesh MN. 2004. Development of combined
infrared and hot air dryer for vegetables. J Food Eng 65: 557–63.
55534_C005.indd 13955534_C005.indd 139 10/22/08 12:06:18 PM10/22/08 12:06:18 PM
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
140 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
33. Bekki E. 1991. Rough rice drying with a far-infrared panel heater. J Jap Soc Agri Machinery 53(1): 55–63.
34. Institute of Agricultural Machinery, Japan. 2003. Recirculating batch grain dryer using
far-infrared radiation. http://www.brain.go.jp/Organ/sei0301e.htm. Accessed July 25,
2004.
35. Gabel MM, Pan Z, Amaratunga KSP, Harris LJ, and Thompson JF. 2006. Catalytic
infrared dehydration of onions. J Food Sci 71(9): E351–57.
36. Lin YP, Tsen JH, and King An-Erl V. 2005. Effects of far-infrared radiation on the
freeze-drying of sweet potato. J Food Eng 68: 249–55.
37. Burgheimer F, Steinberg MP, and Nelson AI. 1971. Effect of near infrared energy on
rate of freeze-drying of beef spectral distribution. J Food Sci 36(l): 273–76.
38. Hamanaka D, Dokan S, Yasunaga E, Kuroki S, Uchino T, and Akimoto K. 2000. The
sterilization effects on infrared ray of the agricultural products spoilage microorganisms
(part 1). An ASAE Meeting Presentation, Milwaukee, WI, July 9–12, No. 00 6090.
39. Molin G, and Ostlund K. 1975. Dry heat inactivation of Bacillus subtilis spores by
means of IR heating. Antonie van Leeuwenhoek 41(3): 329–35.
40. Sawai J, Sagara K, Hashimoto A, Igarashi H, and Shimizu M. 2003. Inactivation char-
acteristics shown by enzymes and bacteria treated with far-infrared radiative heating.
Int J Food Sci Technol 38: 661–67.
41. Jun S, and Irudayaraj J. 2003. A dynamic fungal inactivation approach using selective
infrared heating. Trans ASAE 46(5): 1407–12.
42. Hamanaka D, Uchino T, Furuse N, Han W, and Tanaka S. 2006. Effect of the wave-
length of infrared heaters on the inactivation of bacterial spores at various water activi-
ties. Int J Food Microbiol 108: 281–85.
43. Sawai J, Sagara K, Igarashi H, Hashimoto A, Kokugan T, and Shimizu M. 1995. Injury
of Escherichia coli in physiological phosphate buffered saline induced by far-infrared
irradiation. J Chem Eng Jap 28(3): 294–99.
44. Hashimoto A, Sawai J, Igarashi H, and Shimizu M. 1991. Effect of far-infrared radia-
tion on pasteurization of bacteria suspended in phosphate-buffered saline. Kagaku Kogaku Ronbunshu 17: 627–33.
45. Sawai J, Kojima H, Igarashi H, Hashimoto A, Fujisawa M, Kokugan T, and Shimizu M.
1997. Pasteurization of bacterial spores in liquid medium by far-infrared irradiation.
J Chem Eng Japan 30: 170–72.
46. Hashimoto A, Sawai J, Igarashi H, and Shimizu M. 1992a. Effect of far-infrared irra-
diation on pasteurization of bacteria suspended in liquid medium below lethal tempera-
ture. J Chem Eng Japan 25(3): 275–81.
47. Daisuke H, Toshitaka U, Wenzhong H, and Yaunaga E. 2001. The short-time infrared
ray sterilization of the cereal surface. Proceedings of IFAC control applications in post-
harvest and processing technology, Tokyo, Japan. 195–201.
48. Hebbar HU, Nandini KE, Lakshmi MC, and Subramanian R. 2003. Microwave and
infrared heat processing of honey and its quality. Food Sci Technol Res 9: 49–53.
49. Krishnamurthy K. 2006. Decontamination of milk and water by pulsed UV light and
infrared heating. Ph.D. Dissertation. Department of Agricultural and Biological Engi-
neering, The Pennsylvania State University, USA.
50. Khan MA, and Vandermey PA. 1985. Quality assessment of ground beef patties after
infrared heat processing in a conveyorized tube broiler for foodservice use. J Food Sci 50: 707–9.
51. Abdul-Kadir, Bargman T, and Rupnow J. 1990. Effect of infrared heat processing on rehy-
dration rate and cooking of Phaseolus vulgaris (var. Pinto). J Food Sci 55(5): 1472–73.
52. Ozdemir M, and Devres O. 2000. Analysis of color development during roasting of
hazelnuts using response surface methodology. J Food Eng 45: 17–24.
53. Olsson EEM, Trägårdh AC, and Ahrné LM. 2005. Effect of near-infrared radiation and
jet impingement heat transfer on crust formation of bread. J Food Sci 70(8): E484–91.
55534_C005.indd 14055534_C005.indd 140 10/22/08 12:06:19 PM10/22/08 12:06:19 PM
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Infrared Radiation for Food Processing 141
54. Hung JY, Wimberger RJ, and Mujumdar AS. 1995. Drying of coated webs. In: Mujumdar
AS, editor. Handbook of industrial drying. 2nd ed. New York: Marcel Dekker.
1007–38.
55. Sheridan P, and Shilton N. 1999. Application of far-infrared radiation to cooking of
meat products. J Food Eng 41: 203–8.
56. Hashimoto A, Takahashi M, Honda T, Shimizu M, and Watanabe A. 1990. Penetra-
tion of infrared radiation energy into sweet potato. Nippon Shokuhin Kogyo Gakkaishi 37(11): 876–93.
57. Hashimoto A, Yamazaki Y, Shimizu M, and Oshita S. 1994. Drying characteristics of
gelatinous materials irradiated by infrared radiation. Drying Technol 12: 1029–1052.
58. Ginzburg AS. 1969. Application of infrared radiation in food processing, chemical and process engineering series. London: Leonard Hill.
59. Chua KJ, and Chou SK. 2005. A comparative study between intermittent microwave
and infrared drying of bioproducts. Int J Food Sci Technol 40: 23–39.
60. Tanaka F, Verboven P, Scheerlinck N, Morita K, Iwasaki K, and Nicolaı B. 2007. Inves-
tigation of far infrared radiation heating as an alternative technique for surface decon-
tamination of strawberry. J Food Eng 79: 445–52.
for low-temperature infrared radiation of soybeans.II. Inactivation of lipoxygenase and
62. Lin YP, Lee TY, Tsen, JH, and King An-Erl V. 2007. Dehydration of yam slices using
FIR-assisted freeze-drying. J Food Eng 79: 1295–301.
Savoie V. 2001. Reduction in lentil cooking time using micronization: Comparison of 2
micronization temperatures. J Food Sci 66(3): 500–5.
64. Galindo FG, Toledo RT, and Sjoholm I. 2005. Tissue damage in heated carrot slices.
65. Huang L. 2004. Infrared surface pasteurization of turkey frankfurters. Innovative Food Sci Emerging Technol 5: 345–51.
66. Maxcy R. 1976. Fate of post-cooking microbial contaminants of some major menu
items. J Food Sci 41: 375–78.
67. McCurdy SM. 1992. Infrared processing of dry peas, canola, and canola screenings.
J Food Sci 57(4): 941–44.
drying. J Food Eng 65(2): 293–301.
69. Muriana P, Gande N, Robertson W, Jordan B, and Mitra, S. 2004. Effect of prepackage
and postpackage pasteurization on postprocess elimination of Listeria monocytogenes
on deli turkey products. J Food Prot 67(11): 2472–79.
70. Uchino T, Hamanaka D, and Hu W. 2000. Inactivation of microorganisms on wheat
grain by using infrared irradiation. Proceedings of International Workshop Agricul-
tural Engineering and Agro-Products Processing toward Mechanization and Moderni-
zation in Agriculture and Rural areas.
71. Wiriyaumpaiwong S, Soponronnarit S, and Prachayawarakorn S. 2004. Comparative
study of heating processes for full-fat soybeans. J Food Eng 65: 371–82.
72. Metussin R, Alli I, and Kermasha S. 1992. Micronization effects on composition and
properties of tofu. J Food Sci 57(2): 418–22.
retention in frozen beef-soy patties and frozen fried chicken heated by methods used in
food service operations. J Food Sci 43: 1024–27.
74. Vikram VB, Ramesh MN, and Prapulla SG. 2005. Thermal degradation kinetics of
nutrients in orange juice heated by electromagnetic and conventional methods. J Food Eng 69: 31–40.
55534_C005.indd 14155534_C005.indd 141 10/22/08 12:06:20 PM10/22/08 12:06:20 PM
61. Kouzeh KM, van Zuilichem DJ, Roozen JP, and Pilnik W. 1982. A modified procedure
63. Arntfield SD, Scanlon MG, Malcolmson LJ, Watts BM, Cenkowski S, Ryland D, and
keeping quality of full fat flour. Lebensm Wiss Technol 15(3): 139–42.
68. Meeso N, Nathakaranakule A, Madhiyanon T, and Soponronnarit S. 2004. Influence
Comparing mild hot water blanching and infrared heating. J Food Eng 67: 381–85.
of FIR irradiation on paddy moisture reduction and milling quality after fluidized bed
73. Ang CYW, Basillo LA, Cato BA, and Livingston GE. 1978. Riboflavin and thiamine
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
142 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
75. Lee SC, Jeong SM, Kim SY, Park HR, Nam KC, and Ahn DU. 2006. Effect of far-
infrared radiation and heat treatment on the antioxidant activity of water extracts from
peanut hulls. Food Chem 94: 489–93.
76. Abe T, and Afzal TM. 1997. Thin-layer infrared radiation drying of rough rice. J Agri Eng Res 67: 289–97.
77. Das I, Das SK, and Bal S. 2004. Drying performance of a batch type vibration-aided
infrared dryer. J Food Eng 4: 129–33.
78. Ranjan R, Irudayaraj J, and Jun S. 2001. A three-dimensional control volume approach
to modeling heat and mass transfer in food materials. Trans ASAE 44(6): 1975–82.
of techniques used for modeling and numerically simulating the drying process. In:
Mathematical modeling and numerical techniques in drying technology. New York:
Marcel Dekker. 1–82.
80. Tsai C, and Nixon G. 1986. Transient temperature distribution of a multiplayer compos-
ite wall with effects of internal thermal radiation and conduction. Num Heat Transfer
10: 95–101.
81. Dagerskog M. 1979. Infra-red radiation for food processing II. Calculation of heat
penetration during infra-red frying of meat products. Lebensmittel Wissenschaft und Technologie 12(5): 252–57.
82. Ranjan R, Irudayaraj J, and Jun S. 2002. Simulation of three-dimensional infrared dry-
ing using a set of three-coupled equations by the control volume method. Trans ASAE
45(5): 1661–68.
83. Midilli A, Kucuk H, and Yapar Z. 2002. A new model for single-layer drying. Drying Technol 20(7): 1503–13.
84. Bischorf H. 1990. The answer is electrical infrared. J Microwave Power Electromagnetic Energy 25(1): 47–52.
using selective infrared radiation. In: Proceedings of the IEEE/CPMT International
Electronic Manufacturing Technology (IEMT) Symposium. 393–96.
86. Alden LB, inventor. 1992. Method for cooking food in an infra-red conveyor oven. U.S.
patent 5,223,290.
87. Lentz RR, Pesheck PS, Anderson GR, DeMars J, and Peck TR. 1995. Method of
processing food utilizing infra-red radiation. US Patent 5382441.
88. Shuman AC, and Staley CH. 1950. Drying by infra-red radiation. Food Technol 4:
481–84.
89. Bolshakov AS, Boreskov VG, Kasulin GN, Rogov FA, Skryabin UP, and Zhukov NN.
1976. 22nd European meeting of meat research workers. Paper 15. (Cited by Dager-
skog, 1979)
90. Jun S. 2002. Selective far infrared heating of food systems. Ph.D. Dissertation, The
Pennsylvania State University, USA.
91. Modest MF. 1993. Radiative Heat Transfer. New York: McGraw-Hill International
Editions. 1–174.
92. Jun S, and Irudayaraj J. 2003, Selective far infrared heating system–design and evalu-
ation (Part I). J Drying Technol 21(1): 51–67.
93. Hashimoto A, Sawai J, Igarashi H, and Shimizu M. 1992b. Far-infrared irradiation
effect on pasteurization of bacteria on or within wet-solid medium. J Chem Eng Japan
25(6): 666–71.
94. Stumbo CR. 1965. Thermobacteriology in food processing. New York: Academic
Press.
95. Rodriguez AC, Smerage GH, Teixeira AA, and Busta FF. 1988. Kinetic effects of
lethal temperatures on population dynamics of bacterial spores. Trans ASAE 31(5):
1594–1601.
55534_C005.indd 14255534_C005.indd 142 10/22/08 12:06:21 PM10/22/08 12:06:21 PM
79. Turner IW, and Perre P. 1996. A synopsis of the strategies and efficient resolution
85. Sakuyama S, Uchida H, Watanabe I, Natori K, and Sato T. 1995. Reflow soldering
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
143
6 Modeling of Ohmic Heating of Foods
Soojin Jun and Sudhir Sastry
CONTENTS
6.1 Introduction ................................................................................................... 143
6.2 Basic Principles ............................................................................................. 145
6.3 Case Study I: 2D Modeling ........................................................................... 146
6.3.1 Background ........................................................................................ 146
6.3.2 Packaging .......................................................................................... 147
6.3.3 Model Development........................................................................... 148
6.3.4 Model Validation ............................................................................... 152
6.3.5 Deliverables ....................................................................................... 158
6.4 Case Study II: 3D Modeling ......................................................................... 159
6.5 Case Study III: Multi-Phase Ohmic Heating ................................................ 164
6.6 Conclusion ..................................................................................................... 169
Nomenclature ......................................................................................................... 169
References .............................................................................................................. 169
6.1 INTRODUCTION
Ohmic heating technology has been investigated for heating various materials for a
long time. The basic principle of ohmic heating is that electrical energy is converted
to thermal energy within a conductor. Typically, an alternating current is applied
across the material (Figure 6.1). Because heating occurs by internal energy gen-
eration within the conductor, the method results in a remarkably even distribution
of temperatures within the material. Since the energy is almost entirely dissipated
within the heated material, there is no need for heat intervening heat exchange walls,
while in ohmic heating, ionic motion results in heat generation [2]. Ohmic heating
requires electrodes that make good contact with the food; however, microwave heat-
ing needs no physical contact [3].
A large number of potential applications exist for ohmic heating, including
blanching, evaporation, dehydration, fermentation, and extraction. In the use of
the application as a heat treatment for microbial control, ohmic heating provides
55534_C006.indd 14355534_C006.indd 143 10/22/08 10:04:24 AM10/22/08 10:04:24 AM
6.4.1 Model Verification ............................................................................. 159
thus the process has close to 100% energy transfer efficiency [1]. Various techniques
are available which use electric fields. In microwave or radio-frequency (RF) heat-
ing, a high frequency electric field excites the water molecules within the materials
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
144 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
rapid and uniform heating, resulting in less thermal damage to the product. A high
quality product with minimal structural, nutritional, or organoleptic changes can be
manufactured in a short operating time [4]. Ohmic heating is currently being used
for the processing of whole fruits, syruped fruit-salad and fruit juices in Japan and
the United Kingdom. Ohmic heating has shown to enhance drying rates [5–7] and
extraction yields [5,8] in certain fruits and vegetables.
critical factors that distinguish ohmic heating from conventional heating processes.
The rate of heat generation in ohmic heating depends strongly on the electrical con-
ductivity of the food. However, heterogeneous foods (e.g. liquid and particulate food
ent heat generation rates at distinct localized regions. The consequent heat transfer
within a phase or between phases of liquid–particulate mixtures further complicates
the determination of temperature distribution in ohmically heated systems. Addi-
tional factors contributing to the complexity of the ohmic heating process include
possible heat channeling causing hot spots and cold spots, complex coupling between
ohmic heating process for sterilizing food products is essential for process valida-
tion—an actual demonstration of the accurate reliability—and safety of the process
[11]. Mathematical modeling provides insight into the heating behavior of the ohmic
processes. The temporal and spatial temperature distribution obtained from a reli-
able mathematical model can provide information for the calculation of sterility and
cook value that will save time and money for validation experiments, and process
and product design.
The performance of a mathematical model for ohmic heating relies in part on
accurate inputs of material properties and parameter values. In most of the existing
models, the electrical conductivity values of both solid and liquid phases were con-
sidered as constants or as linear functions of temperature; however, often times these
values are inconsistent under varying ohmic heating conditions. There is always a
need to investigate these properties under a consistent condition as the ohmic heating
processes [12].
I
V R
Electrical analogOhmic heating
Alternating
current power
supply
Electrodes
Food
FIGURE 6.1 The concept of ohmic heating.
55534_C006.indd 14455534_C006.indd 144 10/22/08 10:04:25 AM10/22/08 10:04:25 AM
Modeling ohmic heating is a difficult task due to the unique characteristics and
materials may have significantly different electrical conductivity) may exhibit differ-
the temperature and electrical fields, and process parameters such as particle size,
shape and orientation to the electrical field [9,10]. Understanding the behavior of the
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Modeling of Ohmic Heating of Foods 145
6.2 BASIC PRINCIPLES
equation [8]:
∇[σ(T) ∇V] = 0 (6.1)
where V is the voltage and σ is the electrical conductivity which varies as a
function of temperature (T). The most important parameter in the applicability
of ohmic heating is the electrical conductivity of the material. Most foodstuffs,
which contain water in excess of 30% and dissolved ionic salts have been found to
such as fats, oils, sugar and syrups are not suitable as their conductivities are too
low [13].
The temperature distribution is determined according to the following
Equation:
ρ ∂∂
∇ ∇CTt
k T Sp ( )= + (6.2)
p
conductivity. The symbol S is the internal energy source term which is generated by
S = σ(T) |∇V|2 (6.3)
For most aqueous based materials, the electrical conductivity increases linearly with
temperature [14].
σ(T) = σref (1 + mT) (6.4)
where σref is the electrical conductivity at a reference temperature and m is a
ity of liquid fruit products like juices and purees [14–16]. Mitchell and de Alwis
[17] measured electrical conductivity of pear and apple at 25°C. Castro et al. [18]
reported electrical conductivity of fresh strawberry over 25–100°C temperature
range.
Electrical properties of meat have also been investigated in recent years [19].
Conductivities of chicken [14,17], beef [14,20] and pork [21] have been measured,
of chicken breast over the sterilization temperature range. Shirsat et al. [23] reported
conductivities of different pork cuts and observed that lean is highly conductive
compared to fat, however, conductivity measurements were performed only at 20°C.
Recently, Sarang [24] summarized electrical conductivities and temperature model
parameters for various foodstuffs as shown in Table 6.1.
55534_C006.indd 14555534_C006.indd 145 10/22/08 10:04:26 AM10/22/08 10:04:26 AM
Electric field distribution within an ohmic heater is calculated by solving Laplace’s
conduct sufficiently well for ohmic heating to be applied. Non-ionized materials
where ρ is the density, C is the specific heat, t is the time, and k is the thermal
electric field.
temperature coefficient. Much research has been done on the electrical conductiv-
but the type of meat cut was not specified. Tulsiyan et al. [22] measured conductivity
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
146 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
6.3 CASE STUDY I: 2D MODELING
6.3.1 BACKGROUND
The primary goal of food systems in long-duration space missions is to provide the
crew with a palatable, nutritious, and safe food system and minimize volume, mass,
and waste [25]. The relevant food processing technologies must satisfy mission
constraints, including maximizing safety and acceptability of the food and minimiz-
ing crew time, storage volume, power, water usage, and the maintenance schedule. At
present, the galleys of the US space shuttle and International Space Station (ISS) have
been equipped with a rehydration station and convection oven, permitting addition
of hot or cold water and providing the ability to heat food to serving temperatures.
Even refrigerators and freezers have not yet been installed. However, long duration
methods to increase the shelf life. Food sterilization accomplished by heat would be
one of the most likely process requirements. Regardless of mission types, the need
would still exist for reheating meals to serving temperature and heating water for
personal use.
This work has involved the development of a package with a pair of electrodes,
to permit ohmic heating. The package is generally considered to pose a disposal
TABLE 6.1Electrical Conductivity–Temperature Model Parameters
σref (S/m) m (oC)–1
Fruits Apple-golden 0.089 0.049
Apple-red 0.079 0.057
Peach 0.179 0.056
Pear 0.124 0.041
Pineapple 0.076 0.060
Strawberry 0.234 0.041
Chicken Breast 0.663 0.020
Tender 0.567 0.021
Thigh 0.329 0.026
Drumstick 0.428 0.024
Separable fat 0.035 0.049
Pork Top loin 0.564 0.018
Shoulder 0.527 0.020
Tenderloin 0.551 0.021
Beef Bottom round 0.504 0.019
Chuck shoulder 0.456 0.023
Flank loin 0.318 0.038
Top round 0.472 0.024
Source: Sarang, S. 2008. Ohmic heating for thermal processing of low-acid foods
containing solid particulates. Ph.D. Thesis, The Ohio State University.
55534_C006.indd 14655534_C006.indd 146 10/22/08 10:04:27 AM10/22/08 10:04:27 AM
manned space flights beyond low earth orbit requires advanced food preservation
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Modeling of Ohmic Heating of Foods 147
problem after use. Solid waste treatment in space for Advanced Life Support (ALS)
environment [26]. The overall intention of the proposed project is to investigate if
food in packaging could be sterilized by ohmic heating to yield a superior quality
product with long shelf life; to enable ohmic reheat in transit, thereby minimizing
the ESM; and potentially reusing the container post-food consumption, to contain
and sterilize waste.
ohmic heating with the package being reusable. The only related work found in the
similarity in packaging structure [27]. However, no detailed investigation of this
subject or its implementation is available.
In ohmic heating, electrochemical processes at the electrode/solution interfaces
must be avoided or minimized. Clearly, safety would be the primary consideration
throughout the duration of the mission. High frequency alternating currents allowing
electrochemical reaction [28,29]. Samaranayake [30] observed that pulsed ohmic
compared to conventional 60 Hz sinusoidal ohmic heating. It is, therefore, expected
that pulsed ohmic heating with high frequency and long delay time between pulses
would effectively avoid the worst scenario such as electrolytic gas production.
6.3.2 PACKAGING
trodes to permit ohmic heating of food materials (Figure 6.2a). Flexible packaging,
such as multilayered laminates, provides an alternative to the rigid container.
and nylon) on one side for external scratch resistance and a heat sealable polymer
is made. The electrode assembly made of aluminum foil with 2 mm in thickness is
placed between a folded laminate, with the electrodes extending out and heat sealed
on the edges.
The pouch inside the ohmic cell (Figure 6.2b) was powered with high
frequency pulsed alternating current generated by an Integrated-Gate-Bipolar-
Transistor (IGBT)-based power supply [31]. The power supply was developed to
generate the square waveforms with frequency of 10 kHz and duty cycle (pulse
widths/period) of 0.2, which were the parameters optimized to minimize electro-
chemical reactions on the electrodes [32]. Voltage and current data were collected
in a data acquisition unit (DAQ). During the sterilization process, the external air
assist line and pressure regulator were used to counterbalance internal pressures
and to suppress boiling. In addition, cold water circulation was installed and used
for post-process cooling.
55534_C006.indd 14755534_C006.indd 147 10/22/08 10:04:27 AM10/22/08 10:04:27 AM
None of the past work has dealt with heating of foods in a flexible package using
literature involved flexible batteries using food packaging materials, in terms of the
A package developed using flexible pouch materials incorporates a pair of foil elec-
applications requires that the material be safely processed and stored in a confined
only minimal charging of electrical double layers were found to significantly inhibit
heating could significantly reduce electrochemical reaction on electrode surfaces,
This study was aimed to optimize electrode configurations in a pouch, to yield
the most uniform, yet rapid heating thermal profiles in static systems.
Multilayered laminates (Smurfit-Stone Container, Co., Milwaukee, WI) consist of a
thin metal film (7 mm aluminum) that has a protective polymer film (4 mm polyester
(4 mm polyethylene) film on the other side, which becomes the interior after the pouch
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
148 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
To investigate the uniformity of heating of food materials within the package, three
cm in width) on the bottom right of the package, while Pouch B has V-shaped elec-
trodes (3 cm in width) at each end. Pouch C has one electrode (2 cm in width) on the
top middle and the other two electrodes (1 cm in width) at each end on the bottom.
6.3.3 MODEL DEVELOPMENT
Understanding that a reliable mathematical model can provide information for the
calculation of sterility and cook value which will save time and money for process
DAQ Data acquisition unit
PC Personal computer
REG Pressure regulator
V Voltage measurement
A Current measurement
Foil electrodes
Flexible package
Ohmic cell
Power supplyV
A
DAQ
PC
REG
REG
Air assist
Cooling water
Water drain
(a)
(b)
FIGURE 6.2 heating system (b). (From Jun, S. and Sastry, S. Modeling and optimizing of pulsed ohmic
36, 2005. With permission.)
55534_C006.indd 14855534_C006.indd 148 10/22/08 10:04:28 AM10/22/08 10:04:28 AM
A schematic of flexible package with foil electrodes (a) and pulsed ohmic
heating of foods inside the flexible package. Journal of Food Process Engineering, 28, 417–
different electrode configurations (pouches A, B, and C) were designed, as shown in
Figure 6.3. Pouch A has one electrode (2 cm in width) on the top left and the other (2
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Modeling of Ohmic Heating of Foods 149
and product design, an ohmic heating model was developed to optimize the electrode
To develop the 2D transient model for foods under ohmic heating process, the
following assumptions are made for simplicity:
permitting the use of a 2D model. This assumption is useful since our main
intention is not process evaluation but rather design optimization.
2. Chicken noodle soup and black beans are considered to be in a single phase
wherein the electrical conductivity values of both solid and liquid materials
are considered as an identity with linear functions of temperature.
of temperature and pressure.
4. Heat losses to the environment are negligible.
This approach assumes no convection is implemented in Equation 6.2. This is a
reasonable assumption since our primary application involves a microgravity
environment, where no natural convection can occur. When there is little convective
heating, the temperature differences between different regions of a food system will
be more pronounced.
Electrode
(a)
(b)
(c)
FIGURE 6.3 C. (From Jun, S. and Sastry, S. Modeling and optimizing of pulsed ohmic heating of foods
permission.)
55534_C006.indd 14955534_C006.indd 149 10/22/08 10:04:29 AM10/22/08 10:04:29 AM
inside the flexible package. Journal of Food Process Engineering, 28, 417–36, 2005. With
3. The thermophysical properties of the fluids are considered to be independent
Different electrode configurations: (a) Pouch A, (b) Pouch B, and (c) Pouch
configuration for temperature uniformity.
1. The temperature profiles are uniform along with the package length,
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
150 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
The corresponding initial conditions and boundary conditions are given as
follows.
T(x, y, t) = T0, ∀x, ∀y, t = 0, (6.5)
Electrical boundary conditions:
V (x, y, t)|wall = 0 V (ground) or U0, ∀t, x and y ∈ [electrodes], (6.6)
∇V x y t n( , , ) ⋅ =→
wall
0 , ∀t, x and y ∈ [pouch surfaces except electrodes], (6.7)
Thermal boundary condition:
k T x y t n∇ ( , , ) ⋅ =→
wall
0 , ∀t, x and y ∈ [pouch surfaces], (6.8)
where T0 is the initial temperature of food, U0 is the electric potential, and n→
is the
normal vector.
The governing Equations 6.1 through 6.4 are solved using the commercially
available CFD software Fluent (v. 6.1). The software is customized using user
the original platform. Basic C++ codes used for UDFs are provided as follows.
DEFINE_SOURCE (cell_source, cell, thread, dS, eqn) /* energy source term */
{
long double source; /* source term */
mag=NV_MAG(C_UDSI_G(cell,thread,0));
source = (A*C_T(cell,thread)+B)*mag*mag; /* Equations 6.3 and 6.4 */
dS[eqn] = A*mag*mag;
return source;
}
DEFINE_DIFFUSIVITY (cell_elect_conduct, cell, thread, i) /* electrical conductivity */
{
double theta;
return (theta = A* C_T(cell, thread)+B); /* Equation 6.4 */
}
/* This UDF is used to store the values of voltage gradient in a UDS (UDS-1) for
postprocessing. Note that UDS-0 is used to calculate voltage values for each cell and
this UDS (UDS-1) is used to store values of voltage gradients in each cell. To activate
hook up this UDS by choosing v_grad from the list in the UDF function hook up.
55534_C006.indd 15055534_C006.indd 150 10/22/08 10:04:30 AM10/22/08 10:04:30 AM
defined functions (UDFs) to solve the electric field model, which is not employed in
long double mag; /* electric field */
this UDS, first increase the number of UDS to 2, compile this group of UDF, then
Define -->User-defined -->Function --> Function hook. At Adjust function, choose
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Modeling of Ohmic Heating of Foods 151
v_grad. Since UDS-1 is used only to store the values of the voltage gradient, don't
enum
{
V,
MAG_GRAD_V,
N_REQUIRED_UDS
};
DEFINE_ADJUST (v_grad, domain)
{
Thread *t;
int nt;
cell_t c;
face_t f;
int ns;
/* Fill the UDS with magnitude of voltage gradient. */
domain = Get_Domain(1);
thread_loop_c(t,domain)
{
if(NULL ! = THREAD_STORAGE(t,SV_UDS_I(V)) &&
NULL ! = T_STORAGE_R_NV(t,SV_UDSI_G(V)))
{
begin_c_loop(c,t)
{
C_UDSI(c,t,MAG_GRAD_V) = NV_MAG(C_UDSI_G(c,t,0));
}
end_c_loop_all(c,t)
}
}
thread_loop_f(t,domain)
{
if(NULL ! = THREAD_STORAGE(t,SV_UDS_I(V)) &&
NULL ! = T_STORAGE_R_NV(t->t0,SV_UDSI_G(V)))
{
begin_f_loop(f,t)
{
F_UDSI(f,t,MAG_GRAD_V) = C_UDSI(F_C0(f,t),t->t0,MAG_GRAD_V);
}
end_f_loop(f,t)
}
}
}
Paved triangular meshes of the geometry for packages with the three different
55534_C006.indd 15155534_C006.indd 151 10/22/08 10:04:31 AM10/22/08 10:04:31 AM
solve this UDS. Solve only the flow, energy, and uds-0 Equations. */
electrode configurations were constructed using the GAMBIT 2.0 pre-processor.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
152 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
A, B, and C were 468, 1048, and 924, respectively (Figure 6.3).
6.3.4 MODEL VALIDATION
the package with one unsealed end. Temperature values of thermocouple probes (T-
type, Omega, TMQSS-062U-6) installed at seven different locations (Figure 6.4)
The sensor locations are coordinated using X1 to X5 in the x direction (horizontal
plane), and Y1 to Y3 in the y direction (vertical plane). The ends of thermocouple
probes were placed to be located at an 8.5-cm depth of a package. The sensors were
electrodes. A critical issue was to install and maintain the thermocouple probes
ungrounded thermocouple probes used in this study offer basic electrical isolation
since the thermocouple junction is detached from the probe wall. However, they
have slower response time than grounded or exposed thermocouples, permitting
only either 1D or 2D measurement by nature.
1 2 3 4 5
3
2
1
X
Y
1/2 L
FIGURE 6.4 Temperature sensor locations inside the package (L = package length). (From
Jun, S. and Sastry, S. Modeling and optimizing of pulsed ohmic heating of foods inside the
55534_C006.indd 15255534_C006.indd 152 10/22/08 10:04:31 AM10/22/08 10:04:31 AM
flexible package. Journal of Food Process Engineering, 28, 417–36, 2005. With permission.)
Through mesh refinement study, the optimum numbers of mesh elements for Pouches
For model verification, temperature values were measured at different locations inside
were isolated to eliminate the signal interference with the electric field before being
transmitted to the data acquisition unit (Campbell Scientific, 21X Micrologger).
allocated to determine the likely cold and hot zones for different configurations of
at fixed locations during heating since the packaging material is flexible. The
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Modeling of Ohmic Heating of Foods 153
Among thermostabilized ISS menu items supplied from NASA’s Johnson
Space Center, the select chicken noodle soup and black beans were used for the
reheating experiment. The formulation and thermal properties of chicken noodle
soup and black beans are listed in Table 6.2. Thermal properties of each sample
were calculated from the values reported for the material using their mass or volume
fractions [33,34].
obtained for chicken noodle soup and black beans (Figure 6.5). For both samples,
the electrical conductivity increases with temperature with a linear correlation, as
V/m, Pouch B between 1 and 2457 V/m, and Pouch C between 24 and 4985 V/m.
TABLE 6.2Formulations and Thermal Properties for Chicken Noodle Soup and Black Beans
Chicken Noodle Soup Black Beans
Ingredient Percentage (%) Ingredient Percentage (%)
Fettuccine 7.68 Black beans 74.66
1.77 Crushed tomatoes 11.35
0.58 Cumin 0.25
0.35 Oregano 0.15
Salt 0.25 Black pepper 0.1
Black pepper 0.06 Salt 0.09
Parsley 0.03 Green chillies 3.55
Poultry seasoning 0.03 Onions 9
Water (slurry) 10.25 Garlic 0.85
Water 13.62
Chicken broth 22.13
Half and half 3.41
Chicken 22.13
Carrots 8.85
Celery 4.43
Onions 4.43
Total 100 100
Thermal PropertiesDensity (kg/m3) 1033 1157
3388
0.486
170
3977
Thermal conductivity
(W/m°C)
0.553
Net weight (g)
55534_C006.indd 15355534_C006.indd 153 10/22/08 10:04:32 AM10/22/08 10:04:32 AM
Medium toasted flour
Filling aid starch
Modified food starch
Specific heat (J/kg°C)
Changes in electrical conductivity values with field strength and temperature were
expected. The coefficients corresponding to Equation 6.4 are presented in Table 6.3.
The trends of electrical conductivity values with respect to field strength are not
obvious from this figure, which rather seem to be identical.
Figure 6.6 shows the simulated electric field distributions for different electrode
configurations. For even comparison, the potential difference between two electrodes
was set to be 100 V. Pouch A has electric field strength ranging between 243 and 2421
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
154 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
Ele
ctri
cal
conduct
ivit
y (
S/c
m)
0.009
0.012
0.015
0.018
0.021
0.024
0.027
9.18 V/cm
15.8 V/cm
28.4 V/cm
Temperature (oC)
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 900.010
0.015
0.020
0.025
0.030
8.4 V/cm
14.2 V/cm
(a) Chicken noodle soup
(b) Black beans
FIGURE 6.5 ture for (a) chicken noodle soup and (b) black beans. (From Jun, S. and Sastry, S. Modeling
Food Process Engineering, 28, 417–36, 2005. With permission.)
TABLE 6.3
Soup and Black Beans
Field Strength (V/cm) σ0 m
Chicken noodle soup 9.18 0.0054 0.044
15.8 0.0067 0.030
28.4 0.0092 0.015
Black beans 8.4 0.0068 0.041
14.2 0.0058 0.049
Source: From Jun, S. and Sastry, S. Modeling and optimizing of pulsed ohmic heat-
417–36, 2005. With permission.
55534_C006.indd 15455534_C006.indd 154 10/22/08 10:04:32 AM10/22/08 10:04:32 AM
and optimizing of pulsed ohmic heating of foods inside the flexible package. Journal of
ing of foods inside the flexible package. Journal of Food Process Engineering, 28,
Changes of electrical conductivity values with field strength and tempera-
Coefficients of Electrical Conductivities for Chicken Noodle
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Modeling of Ohmic Heating of Foods 155
is more desirable than the others. However, it should be noted that the electric
Understanding the pouch geometry, the area adjacent to the electrode edge, which is
key factor dominating the thermal performance inside the package.
under ohmic heating, Figure 6.7 compares the 2D model-predicted temperature
values with the experimental data of chicken noodle soup in Pouches A and B, and C
after 300 s of heating. The RMS voltage supplied for Pouch A and B was 48.6 V, and
Pouch C had 27 V, leading the reheating temperature to increase to 80°C during the
same heating period. Pouch C was powered by a lower voltage since the geometrical
distance between the bipolar electrodes is shorter than the others. The standard
deviation for experimental results (n = 3) was 3.3°C.
The temperature values measured at coordinates (X2, Y3) and (X4, Y1) in
Figure 6.7a, and (X2, Y1), (X2, Y3), (X4, Y1), and (X4, Y3) in Figure 6.7b were
higher than those at other coordinates by a minimum of 15°C. It clearly shows
FIGURE 6.6
Electrode
(a)
(b)
(c)
V/m 5.00e+ 03
4.75e+ 03
4.50e+ 03
4.25e+ 03
4.00e+ 03
3.75e+ 03
3.50e+ 03
3.25e+ 03
3.00e+ 03
2.75e+ 03
2.50e+ 03
2.25e+ 03
2.00e+ 03
1.75e+ 03
1.50e+ 03
1.25e+ 03
1.00e+ 03
7.50e+ 02
5.00e+ 02
2.50e+ 02
0.00e+ 00
55534_C006.indd 15555534_C006.indd 155 10/22/08 10:04:33 AM10/22/08 10:04:33 AM
Simulated field strength in (a) Pouch A, (b) Pouch B, and (c) Pouch C.
Apparently, Pouch A has a relatively uniform distribution in field strength, which
field strength near the edges of electrodes goes close to the maxima. Obviously,
the distance between the two electrodes is crucial to determine the field strength.
closer to the opposite electrode, would have higher values of field strength, eventually
causing the field overshoot at the insulative boundary. It would rarely occur between
electrodes in parallel [35]. The existence and strength of field overshoot might be a
As verification of the thermal behavior of chicken noodle soup in a package
the existence of the overshoot of electric field strength near the electrode edges,
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
156 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
Tem
per
ature
(oC
)T
emper
ature
(oC
)T
emper
ature
(oC
)
(a)
(b)
(c)
X
80
60
40
20
0
80
60
40
20
0
80
60
40
20
0
12
34
5 1
2
3
12
34
5 1
2
3
12
34
5 1
2
3Y
X
Y
X
Y
: Experimental data
: Simulation data
FIGURE 6.7 and measurement data in (a) Pouch A, (b) Pouch B, and (c) Pouch C after 300 s of heating.
(From Jun, S. and Sastry, S. Modeling and optimizing of pulsed ohmic heating of foods
permission.)
55534_C006.indd 15655534_C006.indd 156 10/22/08 10:04:34 AM10/22/08 10:04:34 AM
inside the flexible package. Journal of Food Process Engineering, 28, 417–36, 2005. With
Comparison of temperature profiles of chicken noodle soup between simulation
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Modeling of Ohmic Heating of Foods 157
permitting correspondingly more heating. The overall model-predicted data are
close to the actual measurements with minimum R2 of 0.88 (maximum error of
5°C); however, the prediction errors at both corners of packages, i.e. (X1, Y2) and
observed under-prediction error may be attributed to local non-homogeneities of
Figure 6.7c shows the closeness between the prediction and measurement data
with R2 of 0.83 and maximum prediction error of 10.6°C. The cold zone dominating
Pouch C occurs at the middle coordinating at (X3, Y2), rather than each corner of the
package, (X1, Y2) and (X5, Y2).
chicken noodle soup and black beans, perhaps due to similar electrical conductivities.
Black beans in different types of packages show thermal behavior analogous to
chicken noodle soups (Figure 6.8 on the left). After 300 s of heating, Pouch A had a
temperature distribution between 23 and 80°C and Pouch B between 37 and 80°C.
On the other hand, Pouch C had a greater temperature variation between 12 and
80°C. The 2D dynamic model for black beans predicts thermal results that are in
good agreement with the experimental data with a minimum R2 of 0.80, except those
at the coordinates, (X1, Y2) and (X5, Y2). The average percentage deviation between
simulated and measured temperature values was 10.7%.
12 and 40°C in the case of the reheating scheme, the corresponding areas were clipped
and compared for quantative analysis (Figure 6.8 on the right). Calculations show that
Pouches A, B, and C have the ratios of cold zone area to the entire package area as 0.67,
(a)
(b)
(c)
80 12
oC
40
FIGURE 6.8 Simulated temperature distribution (left side) and cold zone (right side) of
black beans in (a) Pouch A, (b) Pouch B, and (c) Pouch C after 300 s of heating.
55534_C006.indd 15755534_C006.indd 157 10/22/08 10:04:35 AM10/22/08 10:04:35 AM
(X5, Y2), increased significantly with the maximum prediction error of 14°C. The
chicken noodle soup, filled with solid chunky particulates.
There was little discrepancy of simulated electric field distributions between
Defining the cold zone as the area covering the temperature distribution between
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
158 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
0.02, and 0.42, respectively. Pouch B with V-shaped electrodes is, therefore, expected
to be more likely to perform uniform heating of black beans within the package.
overshoots near each electrode edge in symmetry might have compensating effects to
help increase the temperature at the adjacent areas such as (X1, Y2) and (X5, Y2).
The ratios of cold zone, average temperature, power consumption, temperature
variation (ΔT) of black beans in the Pouch B under ohmic heating are enumerated
and presented in Figure 6.9. The power consumption was calculated by integration
heat, and temperature increment. The calculated values were validated by comparing
with a set of measurements which had a RMS voltage of 48.6 V, and RMS current of
3.1 A, producing 150.7 W as power consumption. A package with narrow electrodes,
i.e. 0.063 in dimensionless width, would have low power consumption of 81 W,
whereas developing predominant cold zones of 91.1%, low average temperature
of 27.4°C, and huge temperature variation of 59.3°C. The widest electrode might
require higher electric power of 245 W with an increased temperature deviation
food heating in the package.
6.3.5 DELIVERABLES
temperature during reheating process. Unlike electrodes in parallel, the pouch
Dimensionless electrode width
0.05 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25 0.30
Cold
zone a
rea r
atio
0.0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
Avera
ge te
mpera
ture
(oC
)
25
30
35
40
45
50
55P
ow
er
(W)
50
100
150
200
250
300
Tem
pera
ture
variation (
oC
)
35
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
Cold zone area ratioAverage temperature (oC)Power (W)Temperature variation (oC)
FIGURE 6.9 Optimization of electrode width with respect to cold zone ratio, power con-
sumption, average temperature, and temperature variation.
55534_C006.indd 15855534_C006.indd 158 10/22/08 10:04:36 AM10/22/08 10:04:36 AM
Obviously, the field strength at the corners of Pouch B, coordinating at (X1, Y2) and
(X5, Y2), is weaker than that of Pouch A, as aforementioned; however, the two field
of internal heat contents with respect to the area, being determined by mass, specific
between the coldest and hottest, 68.1°C. Consequently, the electrode configuration
with dimensionless width of 0.147 would be close to the best fit for uniformity in
The electrode configuration could be optimized to ensure uniformity in food
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Modeling of Ohmic Heating of Foods 159
electrodes were found to induce the overshoot of voltage gradient on the edges. The
conductivities are needed for further study to improve the accuracy of the model
prediction for a multiphase food system.
6.4 CASE STUDY II: 3D MODELING
A 2D ohmic model that accounts for electro-thermal performance within a packaging
system was capable of predicting the heating patterns of ISS menu items under ohmic
reheating process [31]. The 2D dynamic model could identify hot and cold spots,
However, the 2D simulation would be unable to provide a complete thermal picture of
foods over the entire pouch, since end effects would not be considered. Such effects
are critical in sterilization calculations. For example, the current density at the seal-
ended corner of the pouch may be lower than expected, resulting in localized under-
treatment of food materials. We have noted the presence of a so-called ‘shadow area’
Computational Fluid Dynamics (CFD) software Fluent (v. 6.1) was used to solve
the governing equations in the 3D environment. UDFs for electric potential and
TGrid meshing schemes in the GAMBIT pre-processor (v. 2.0) were applied to a
volume in which tetrahedral mesh elements were dominant but where there may
be elements that possess other shapes such as hexahedral, pyramidal, and wedge.
automatically added or deleted where needed for better resolution. In doing so, the
overshoot of voltage gradient at the interface between the two adjacent boundaries
could be resolved without completely regenerating the mesh.
6.4.1 MODEL VERIFICATION
Temperatures were measured within a tomato soup sample (details below) using T-
type thermocouple wires (Omega Engineering, Inc., Stamford, CT) at seven different
locations inside the package during ohmic heating (Figure 6.10a). Thermocouple
signals were transmitted to the data acquisition unit (Agilent 39704A, Agilent Tech-
nologies, Inc., Palo Alto, CA) via a signal conditioning module, to eliminate signal
locations covered half the area of the pouch. The locations are as named in Figure
6.2a, with two locations [middle (M) and bottom (B)] in the horizontal plane (z
direction), and four locations [left (L), center (C), right (R), and electrode (E)] in
the vertical plane (x direction). The selection of location E was intended to identify
the potential cold spot inside the V-shaped electrodes. Thermocouple wires were
and aligned perpendicular to the pouch surface so as to be centrally located (y = 0;
Figure 6.10b). Temperature measurements were triplicated. Comparisons between
simulated and measured temperature values at different locations were conducted by
using ANOVA in MINITAB® (v.13, Minitab Inc., State College, PA).
55534_C006.indd 15955534_C006.indd 159 10/22/08 10:04:37 AM10/22/08 10:04:37 AM
field overshoots and non-homogeneities of food characterized by various electrical
permitting optimization of the electrode configuration to minimize cold zones.
of electric field in the cross-sectional domain of 2D model [36].
potential gradient were coded and coupled to solve the electric field model. The
By using solution-adaptive refinement of meshes in Fluent, grid points could be
interference with the electric field. Due to geometric symmetry of the pouch, sensor
installed through a Swagelok® fitting which was located at the center of one of pouch
surfaces and then firmly taped onto the inner pouch layer. The sensor tips were bent
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
160 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
Condensed tomato soup (11 oz, Campbell Soup Company, Camden, NJ) was
purchased from a grocery store, and was mixed with distilled water in a volumetric
ratio of 1:1. Thermal properties of the sample were calculated based on food com-
position data [33,34], and were: density of 1020 kg/m3, viscosity of 3000 × 10–6 Pa·s,
trical conductivity was characterized as a function of temperature, increasing with a
linear correlation, σ (S/m) = 0.032*T (°C) + 0.98.
M
B
L C R E
Symmetry
x
z
(a)
(b)
y
x
Thermocouple wiresTaping
Sensor tip
y = 0RCL
FIGURE 6.10 Temperature sensor locations at the xz-plane (a) and the xy-plane (b) inside the
package (M, middle; B, bottom; L, left; C, center; R, right; and E, edge). (From Jun, S. and Sastry,
55534_C006.indd 16055534_C006.indd 160 10/22/08 10:04:38 AM10/22/08 10:04:38 AM
S. Reusable pouch development for long term space mission: 3D ohmic model for verification of
sterility efficacy. Journal of Food Engineering, 80(4), 1199–1205, 2007. With permission.)
specific heat of 4020 J/kg°C, and thermal conductivity of 0.6 W/m°C. Sample elec-
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Modeling of Ohmic Heating of Foods 161
Figure 6.11 shows the computational domain and coordinate system of the pouch
which has electrodes on opposite sides. The dimensions of the pouch used in mod-
eling were: width 0.1 m, height 0.02 m and length 0.08 m. Because of symmetry,
only half of the pouch geometry needs to be modeled. A regular, structured grid of
tetrahedral mesh elements was created to discretize the domain using 79,041 ele-
ments. As shown in circled areas A, special attention needs to be paid to the seal
ended portion of the pouch since the gap between V-shaped electrodes narrows in
this region. Also there is no electrode within 1.4 cm from the bottom end of the
pouch due to the presence of reseal lines. This could result in low current density,
and may be a potential cold zone.
0.0002 and 2050 V/m. The potential patterns appeared to be perpendicular to the x
getting close to the maximum value, as observed in our previous work [25]. On the
overwhelmingly occur at these locations.
The simulated temperature patterns of tomato soup for selected heating times
(100, 400, and 800 s) are presented in Figure 6.13. It may be noted that one set
A
A
B
M
L
C
R
E
X
Y
Z
FIGURE 6.11 Pouch geometry and grid mesh with coordinated thermocouple locations (M,
middle; B, bottom; L, left; C, center; R, right; and E, edge). (From Jun, S. and Sastry, S. Reus-
55534_C006.indd 16155534_C006.indd 161 10/22/08 10:04:38 AM10/22/08 10:04:38 AM
Figure 6.12 shows the simulated electric potential and field distributions inside a
package when the supplied RMS voltage was 42 V. The field strength ranged between
direction; however, the electric field strength near the edges of electrodes overshoot
other hand, the food-filled space bounded by the V-shaped electrodes experienced
relatively weak field strength below 440 V/m. Since the electro-heat generation is
proportional to the square of field strength (Equation 6.3), cold spots are expected to
efficacy. Journal of Food Engineering, 80(4), 1199–1205, 2007. With permission.)
able pouch development for long term space mission: 3D ohmic model for verification of sterility
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
162 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
(a)4.20e+014.03e+013.91e+013.78e+013.65e+013.53e+013.40e+013.28e+013.15e+013.02e+012.90e+012.77e+012.65e+012.52e+012.39e+012.27e+012.14e+012.02e+011.89e+011.76e+011.64e+011.51e+011.39e+011.26e+011.13e+011.01e+018.82e+007.56e+006.30e+005.04e+003.78e+002.52e+00
YX Z
Y
ZX
1.26e+000.00e+00
2.05e+031.97e+031.91e+031.85e+031.78e+031.72e+031.66e+031.60e+031.54e+031.48e+031.41e+031.35e+031.29e+031.23e+031.17e+031.11e+031.05e+039.84e+029.23e+028.61e+028.00e+027.38e+026.77e+026.15e+025.54e+024.92e+024.31e+023.69e+023.08e+022.46e+021.85e+021.23e+026.15e+012.55e–04
(b)
FIGURE 6.12 (From Jun, S. and Sastry, S. Reusable pouch development for long term space mission: 3D ohmic
With permission.)
55534_C006.indd 16255534_C006.indd 162 10/22/08 10:04:40 AM10/22/08 10:04:40 AM
Simulated 3D (a) electric potential and (b) field distributions inside the pouch.
model for verification of sterility efficacy. Journal of Food Engineering, 80(4), 1199–1205, 2007.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Modeling of Ohmic Heating of Foods 163
of cold zones were always located inside the V-shaped electrodes, which showed a
temperature of 95°C when the maximum pouch temperature was 139°C. The ther-
mal distribution in the middle of the pouch appeared to be a valley with elongated
noted previously. Secondly, even colder zones were noted at the corners of the pouch
(a)
(b)
(c)
150
150
150
A
A –0.05
0
0.050.1
0.05
0
Length
Width
100
50
100
50
–0.05
Width0
0.050.1
0.05
0
Length
–0.05
0
0.050.1
0.05
0
Width
Length
100
50 Tem
per
ature
(°C
)
Tem
per
ature
(°C
)
Tem
per
ature
(°C
)
FIGURE 6.13 Simulated 3D temperature distribution in the pouch at selected heating times;
(a) 100 s, (b) 400 s, and (c) 800 s. (From Jun, S. and Sastry, S. Reusable pouch development for
Engineering, 80(4), 1199–1205, 2007. With permission.)
55534_C006.indd 16355534_C006.indd 163 10/22/08 10:04:42 AM10/22/08 10:04:42 AM
long term space mission: 3D ohmic model for verification of sterility efficacy. Journal of Food
depression of surfaces between hills. This thermal profile reflected the extra heating
at the interface between electrodes and insulating materials due to the field overshoot
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
164 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
(Circle A in Figure 6.13c). Note that during simulation, the lowest temperature values
of 53.3°C after 800 s of heating were found in these zones, even when the maximum
temperature in the pouch was at 139°C. Location A is a region to which electrodes
do not extend, thus resulting in relatively limited heating at this zone. Elimination of
such hot and cold zones represents a major goal in design optimization. For example,
electrodes are arranged parallel to one another, and electrodes and insulating layers
cross at right angles. However, redesigning also involves numerous other considera-
tions including practicality, mechanical strength and economics.
Figure 6.14 compares model-predicted temperature values with experimen-
tal data. The standard deviation for experimental results (n = 3) was 4.5°C. The
3D ohmic model produces thermal results that are in good agreement with the
experimental data (P > 0.53). The average percentage deviation between simulated
and measured temperature values was 6.2%. As expected in Figure 6.6, the tempera-
ture values measured at ML, MR, BL, and BR were higher than those at MC and BC
with a minimum of 3°C at 800 s of heating. Also location ME shows the existence of
undertreated spots which could be below 95°C, as discussed previously. While this
temperature was higher than the edge location represented Circle A of Figure 6.13c,
however, it still poses a challenge for producing high-quality sterilized products. The
location BC showed lower temperatures than MC, which might be due to conductive
heat loss to the cold bottom edge where the ohmic current density is low.
Sample temperatures measured at location ME (edge) were lower than model
predictions at the earlier stages of simulations, but were higher at the later time peri-
ods of the simulation. The greatest error (around 6°C) was associated with this loca-
tion, and represented an underprediction. This error implies that the expected value
of the pouch at this point does not lend itself to easy determination of convective
heat transfer. It is possible to improve predictions by improved assumptions regard-
ing conditions at this location. A second implication is that the model represents an
underprediction; thus its predictions are conservative, and may result in over- rather
than under-processing. Under a microgravity environment, convective heat transfer
would be minimal, resulting in lower heat losses than expected and higher tempera-
tures within the pouch. There is a need for further research on minimizing cold spots
in a pouch via modeling and redesign.
A three-dimensional model for heat transfer within an ohmic heating pouch
equipped with electrodes shows generally good agreement with experimental data,
with the exception being at the edges at the later stages of simulation, when under-
cold zones, suggesting the need to further optimize pouch design for more uniform
heating. In particular, the zones within the V formed by metal foil electrodes, and
concern, and will need further design optimization.
6.5 CASE STUDY III: MULTI-PHASE OHMIC HEATING
Modeling of multi-phase food products which have various electrical conduc-
55534_C006.indd 16455534_C006.indd 164 10/22/08 10:04:43 AM10/22/08 10:04:43 AM
the field overshoot is unlikely to occur in a rectangular shaped domain in which two
of heat transfer coefficient was not valid at the edge locations; indeed, the V-shape
prediction was observed. Simulations suggest the presence of significant hot and
the edge of the pouch, where current densities are lowered, are identified as points of
tivities has been reported. Distortion of electric field due to several factors such
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Modeling of Ohmic Heating of Foods 165
Tem
pera
ture
(oC
)
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
Time (s)
0 200 400 600 8000
20
40
60
80
100
120
Simulated L & R
Simulated C
Simulated E
L
C
R
E
M
B
FIGURE 6.14 tomato soup in the pouch. (From Jun, S. and Sastry, S. Reusable pouch development for long
neering, 80(4), 1199–1205, 2007. With permission.)
as heterogeneous food materials and irregular shapes of domain is one of key
interests to food engineers whose efforts is to predict the accurate thermal per-
formance of ohmic heaters. Sterilization of solid–liquid mixtures by ohmic heat-
ing requires the assurance that all parts of the food or biomaterial in question
are treated adequately to ensure inactivation of pathogenic spore formers. The
55534_C006.indd 16555534_C006.indd 165 10/22/08 10:04:44 AM10/22/08 10:04:44 AM
Comparison of predicted and measured transient temperature profiles of
term space mission: 3D ohmic model for verification of sterility efficacy. Journal of Food Engi-
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
166 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
is our lack of knowledge of (and inability to measure) temperature at the slow-
est-heating location within the entire system. Ohmic heating poses even greater
challenges in measurement than conventional heat exchange processes due to the
to predict cold-spot temperatures; indeed modeling is a prerequisite to success
case scenarios as being associated with a single solid piece (inclusion particle) of
substantially different electrical conductivity than its surroundings. Two poten-
tially hazardous situations were modeled, both involving an inclusion particle,
but one involving a static medium surrounding the solid; and the other involving
coding in a FORTRAN 90 program, and compared and evaluated for predictions
of particle cold-spot and average medium temperatures under conditions which
would likely lead to a worst case heating scenario as demonstrated in the experi-
mental part of this study.
able slightly underpredicting temperature) prediction of mixture cold-spot tempera-
tures than the static model when the cold-spot occurs within the particle; typically
occurring when the medium is more conductive than the solid (Figure 6.15). How-
solid is more conductive than the medium (Figure 6.16) [39].
Notably, the cold spot is within the solid when the medium is more conductive,
of the current. Under this condition, the cold zone is within the medium at shadow
zones immediately in front/back of the particle. When the particle is more conduc-
tive, the coldest zone is within the medium when the particle size is small; however,
at large particle sizes, the particle cold spot approaches (and, in case of the mixed
dition the static model is still conservative.
One of the most critical factors to be taken into consideration is likely to be
fat content. If a fat globule is present within a highly electrical conductive region,
where currents can bypass the globule, it may heat slower than its surroundings due
to its lack of electrical conductivity. Under such conditions, any pathogens poten-
tially present within the fat phase may receive less treatment than the rest of the
product. Heating of the fat phase may then depend on the rate at which energy is
transferred from the surroundings. Based on the foregoing discussion, a high heat
tends to moderate heating in such situations. If a fat-rich (low conductivity) phase
the process. Due to the complexity and great number of possible situations in food
55534_C006.indd 16655534_C006.indd 166 10/22/08 10:04:44 AM10/22/08 10:04:44 AM
fundamental problem in continuous flow sterilization of solid–liquid mixtures
ing equations for the mixed fluid and static models were solved iteratively using
Results indicate that the mixed fluid model provides a more conservative (prefer-
ever, the static fluid model provides more conservative prediction of the mixture
cold-spot temperatures when the cold-spot is within the fluid; typically when the
fluid model, eventually becomes lower than) the medium cold spot. Under such con-
faster than the surrounding fluid. In any case, care must be taken in establishing
presence of an electric field. This necessitates the use of mathematical modeling
in this process. The work done by Sastry and Salengke [37] has identified worst-
a mixed fluid, with a circuit theory analysis for the electric field [38]. The govern-
the Galerkin–Crank–Nicholson algorithm (Galerkin three-dimensional finite
element method in space; Crank–Nicholson finite difference scheme in time) by
except when the solid size becomes sufficiently large to intercept a large fraction
transfer coefficient may not necessarily relate to the worst case, since fluid motion
is aligned to significantly intercept the current, it is possible for such a zone to heat
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Modeling of Ohmic Heating of Foods 167
processing, it may be prudent to investigate all potentially likely scenarios in proc-
ess evaluation. The models compared in this work each have their respective merits,
enabling large-system, high solids content simulation and low computation cost in
Laplace model.
(a) Y
X
Z
67.87 80.81 93.75 106.68 119.62 132.56
Temperature (°C)
Y
X
Z
67.87 80.81 93.75 106.68 119.62 132.56
Temperature (°C)
(b)
FIGURE 6.15 Color mapping of modeled temperature distributions within an ohmic heater
after 150 s of ohmic heating, for a single solid cylindrical ‘inclusion’ particle 1/3 as conduc-
55534_C006.indd 16755534_C006.indd 167 10/22/08 10:04:45 AM10/22/08 10:04:45 AM
tive as the fluid; (a) well-mixed fluid (b) static fluid.
the case of the circuit model, and rigorous, fine-detail predictions in the case of the
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
168 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
(a) Y
X
Z
111.34 120.17 129.00 137.83 146.66 155.49
Temperature (°C)
111.34
Z
X
120.17 129.00 137.83 146.66 155.49
Temperature (°C)
(b) Y
FIGURE 6.16 Color mapping of modeled temperature distributions within an ohmic heater
after 150 s of ohmic heating, for a single solid cylindrical ‘inclusion’ particle twice as conduc-
55534_C006.indd 16855534_C006.indd 168 10/22/08 10:04:47 AM10/22/08 10:04:47 AM
tive as the fluid; (a) well-mixed fluid (b) static fluid.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Modeling of Ohmic Heating of Foods 169
6.6 CONCLUSION
Ohmic heating is one of the successful alternative food processing methods because
patterns of foods under ohmic heating are uniquely dependent upon their electrical
conductivities, which are also a function of temperature. Modeling of ohmic heating
provides a valuable insight in determining the relevant process parameters to prevent
any food components from being under-processed, which is required for food safety
purpose. These days, the power of CFD to model complex food processes is predomi-
nant and it seems that its adoption is inevitable and progressive and aimed for com-
and mass transfer, phase change, solid and liquid interactions and such. The case
studies provided in this chapter show how CFD models can work for the ohmic heat-
ing process. Although limited to a special process environment such as microgravity,
the developed CFD model with little convective heat transfer taken into consideration
could not be a hurdle for its application to complete ohmic heating processes.
The challenge of ohmic heating modeling exists in interactive visualization of a
continuous ohmic heating system, in which the transient orientation of all the parti-
to be incorporated.
NOMENCLATURE
p
k Thermal conductivity (W/m°C)
k0 Pre-exponential factor
m T Temperature (°C)
t Time (s)
S Internal energy source (W/m2)
V Voltage (V)
σ Electrical conductivity (S/cm)
σ0 Referencing electrical conductivity (S/cm)
ρ Density (kg/m3)
REFERENCES
1. Salengke, S. 2000. Electrothermal effects of ohmic heating on biomaterials: Tempera-
ture monitoring, heating of solid-liquid mixtures, and pretreatment effects on drying
rate and oil uptake. Ph.D. Dissertation, The Ohio State University.
of salt within vegetable tissue: Effects of salt concentration and temperature. Journal of Food Engineering, 82(3), 377–82.
3. Fryer, P. J., and Davies, L. J. 2001. Modeling electrical resistance (“ohmic”) heating of
foods. In Irudayaraj, J. (Ed.) Food Processing Operations Modeling. 1st ed. New York:
Marcel Dekker, 225–30.
55534_C006.indd 16955534_C006.indd 169 10/22/08 10:04:49 AM10/22/08 10:04:49 AM
prehensive numerical solutions. Not necessary for fluid motion, the CFD is maturing
it provides fast, energy efficient, and volumetric heating of food materials. Heating
into a powerful and pervasive tool to efficiently quantify the dynamic processes, heat
cles with different electrical and thermal properties in fluid to the electric field needs
C Specific heat (J/kg°C)
Temperature coefficient
2. Sarang, S., and Sastry, S. K. 2007. Diffusion and equilibrium distribution coefficients
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
170 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
4. Rahman, M. S. 1999. In Rahman, M. S. (Ed.) Handbook of Food Preservation. New
York: Marcel Dekker, 521–32.
5. Lima, M., and Sastry, S. K. 1999. The effect of ohmic heating frequency on hot-air dry-
ing rate and juice yield. Journal of Food Engineering, 41, 115–19.
6. Wang, W. C., and Sastry, S. K. 2000. Effects of thermal and electrothermal pretreat-
ments on hot air drying rate of vegetable tissue. Journal of Food Process Engineering,
23, 299–319.
7. Zhong, T., and Lima, M. 2003. The effect of ohmic heating on vacuum drying rate of
sweet potato tissue. Bioresource Technology, 87, 215–20.
transfer during ohmic heating of foods. Chemical Engineering Science, 45, 1547–59.
effective electrical resistance and ohmic heating rate of a liquid-particle mixture.
Journal of Food Process Engineering, 5(3), 213–27.
10. Sastry, S. K., and Palaniappan, S. 1992b. Mathematical modeling and experimental
studies on ohmic heating of liquid-particle mixtures in a static heater. Journal of Food Process Engineering, 5(4), 241–61.
11. Kim, H. J., Choi, Y. M., Yang, T. C. S., Taub, I. A., Tempest, P., Skudder, P., Tucker, G.,
and Parrott, D. L. 1996. Validation of ohmic heating for quality enhancement of food
products. Food Technology, 50(5), 253–55.
heating in static heater using MRI temperature mapping. Lebensmittel-Wissenschaft und-Technologie, 37, 49–58.
13. Samprovalaki, K., Bakalis, S., and Fryer, P. J. 2007. Ohmic heating: Models and meas-
urements. In Yanniotis, S., and Sunden, B. (Eds) Heat Transfer in Food Processing.
UK: WIT Press, 159–64.
14. Palaniappan, S., and Sastry, S. K. 1991. Electrical conductivity of selected solid foods
during ohmic heating. Journal of Food Process Engineering, 14, 221–36.
15. Icer, F., and Ilicali, C. 2005. Temperature dependent electrical conductivities of fruit
purees during ohmic heating. Food Research International, 38, 1135–42.
16. Castro, I., Teixeira, J. A., Salengke, S., Sastry, S. K., and Vicente, A. A. 2004. Ohmic
heating of strawberry products: Electrical conductivity measurements and ascorbic
acid degradation kinetics. Innovative Food Science and Engineering Technologies, 5,
27–36.
17. Mitchell, F. R. G., and de Alwis, A. A. P. 1989. Electrical conductivity meter for food
samples. Journal of Physics, E., 22, 554–56.
18. Castro, I., Teixeira, J. A., Salengke, S., Sastry, S. K., and Vicente, A. A. 2003. The
berry products. Journal of Food Process Engineering, 26, 17–29.
19. Saif, S. M. H., Lan, Y., Wang, S., and Garcia, S. 2004. Electrical resistivity of goat
meat. International Journal of Food Properties, 7(3), 463–71.
20. Kim, S. H., Kim, G. T., Park, J. Y., Cho, M. G., and Han, B. H. 1996. A study on the
ohmic heating of viscous food. Foods and Biotechnology, 5(4), 274–79.
21. Halden, K., de Alwis, A. A. P., and Fryer, P. J. 1990. Changes in the electrical con-
ductivity of foods during ohmic heating. International Journal of Food Science and Technology, 25(1), 9–25.
22. Tulsiyan, P., Sarang, S., and Sastry, S. K. 2007. Electrical conductivity of multicomponent
systems during ohmic heating. International Journal of Food Properties, 11(1),
233–41.
23. Shirsat, N., Lyng, J. G., Brunton, N. P., and McKenna, B. 2004. Ohmic processing:
Electrical conductivities of pork cuts. Meat Science, 67, 507–14.
55534_C006.indd 17055534_C006.indd 170 10/22/08 10:04:49 AM10/22/08 10:04:49 AM
9. Sastry, S. K., and Palaniappan, S. 1992a. Influence of particle orientation on the
8. de Alwis, A. A. P., and Fryer, P. J. 1990. A finite element analysis of heat generation and
12. Ye, X., Ruan, R., Chen, P., and Doona, C. 2004. Simulation and verification of ohmic
influence of field strength, sugar and solid content on electrical conductivity of straw-
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Modeling of Ohmic Heating of Foods 171
24. Sarang, S. 2008. Ohmic heating for thermal processing of low-acid foods containing
solid particulates. Ph.D. Thesis, The Ohio State University.
25. Perchonok, M., and Bourland, C. 2002. NASA food systems: Past, present, and future.
Nutrition, 18, 913–20.
26. Peterson, B. V., Hummerick, M., Roberts, M. S., Krumins, V., Kish, A. L., Garland,
J. L., Maxwell, S., and Mills, A. 2004. Characterization of microbial and chemical
composition of shuttle wet waste with permanent gas and volatile organic compound
analyses. Advances in Space Research, 34, 1470–76.
27. Jansen, A. N., Amine, K., Newman, A. E., Vissers, D. R., and Henriksen, G. L. 2002.
28. Amatore, C., Berthou, M., and Hebert, S. 1998. Fundamental principles of
electrochemical ohmic heating of solutions. Journal of Electoanalytical Chemistry, 457, 191–203.
29. Wu, H., Kolbe, E., Flugstad, B., Park, J. W., and Yongsawatdigul, J. 1998. Electrical
Science, 63(6), 1028–32.
30. Samaranayake, C. P. 2003. Electrochemical reactions during ohmic heating. Ph.D.
Dissertation, The Ohio State University.
31. Jun, S., and Sastry, S. 2005. Modeling and optimizing of pulsed ohmic heating of foods
32. Samaranayake, C. P., Sastry, S. K., and Zhang, Q. H. 2005. Pulsed ohmic heating —
a novel technique for minimization of electrochemical reactions during processing.
Journal of Food Science, 70(8), E460–65.
33. Rahman, R. 1995. Food properties handbook. Boca Raton, FL: CRC Press.
34. Singh, R. P., and Heldman, D. R. 2001. Introduction to food engineering. 3rd ed. San
Diego, CA: Academic Press.
35. Shames, P., Sun, P. C., and Fainman, Y. 1996. Modeling and optimization of electro-
optic phase modulator. SPIE Proceedings: Physics and Simulation of Optoelectronic Devices IV, 2693, 787–96.
36. Jun, S., and Sastry, S. 2007. Reusable pouch development for long term space mission:
80(4), 1199–205.
37. Sastry, S. K., and Salengke, S. 1998. Ohmic heating of solid–liquid mixtures: A com-
parison of mathematical models under worst-case heating conditions. Journal of Food Process Engineering, 21, 441–58.
38. Salengke, S., and Sastry, S. K. 2007. Models for ohmic heating of solid–liquid mixtures
under worst-case heating scenarios. Journal of Food Engineering, 83, 337–55.
39. Center for Food Safety and Applied Nutrition (CFSAN). 2000. Kinetics of Microbial
Inactivation for Alternative Food Processing Technologies: Ohmic and Inductive Heat-
ing, http://www.cfsan.fda.gov/~comm/ift-ohm.html. Accessed December, 2007.
55534_C006.indd 17155534_C006.indd 171 10/22/08 10:04:50 AM10/22/08 10:04:50 AM
Low cost, flexible batter packaging materials. JOM, 54(3), 29–32.
inside the flexible package. Journal of Food Process Engineering, 28, 417–36.
properties of fish mince during multi-frequency ohmic heating. Journal of Food
3D ohmic model for verification of sterility efficacy. Journal of Food Engineering,
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
173
7 Hydrostatic Pressure Processing of Foods
J. Antonio Torres and Gonzalo Velazquez
CONTENTS
7.1 Introduction ................................................................................................... 173
7.2 Hydrostatic Pressure Processing (HPP) of Foods ......................................... 174
7.2.1 Principles of High Pressure Processing ............................................ 175
7.2.1.1 Niche Opportunities for HPP Foods ................................... 176
7.2.1.1.1 Consumer Demand for Fresh Foods .................. 176
7.2.1.1.2 Pressure Processing Effect is Unique ................ 178
7.2.1.1.3 Product is a High Microbial Risk to
Producer ............................................................. 180
7.2.1.1.4 Product has a High Added Value and
Thermal Lability ............................................... 185
7.2.1.2 Mechanisms of Microbial Inactivation by Pressure ........... 185
7.2.1.2.1 Vegetative Bacteria ............................................ 185
7.2.1.2.2 Bacterial Spores ................................................. 188
7.3 Pressure Assisted Thermal Processing (PATP) of Foods ............................. 189
7.3.1 Reaction Kinetics Analysis ............................................................... 189
7.4 Low Hydrostatic Pressure (LHP) Disinfestation of
Dry Fruits and Vegetables .............................................................................202
7.5 Conclusions ...................................................................................................203
Nomenclature .........................................................................................................205
References ..............................................................................................................205
7.1 INTRODUCTION
New food processing technologies meeting consumer expectations for increased food
safety, extending shelf life and improving product quality are needed today. Consum-
ers are demanding fresh foods and products minimally affected by processing so as to
preserve desirable compositional and sensory properties. For example, in the United
States raw milk may be purchased directly from farms in 28 states, and in four states
it may be purchased in retail stores [1]. This consumer interest in untreated milk is
troublesome information for agencies monitoring food safety since its potential con-
tent of microbial pathogens poses a serious health risk to consumers. An analysis of
the incidence of pathogenic bacteria in raw milk from 70 farms showed that 4.9 and
3.4% were positive for Listeria monocytogenes and L. innocua, respectively [2,3].
55534_C007.indd 17355534_C007.indd 173 10/22/08 10:52:12 AM10/22/08 10:52:12 AM
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
174 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
Milk from 36 transport tankers tested for the presence of L. monocytogenes showed
a 2.8–11% contamination incidence [2].
High hydrostatic pressure processing (HPP), a relatively new technology to the
nutritional changes to foods [5–7]. On the other hand, the effectiveness of thermal
processing technologies explains why it remains as the prevailing method to achieve
microbial safety and the inactivation of enzymes and microorganisms responsible
for food spoilage. However, the high temperatures used in these processes cause sig-
losses. For example, high-temperature short-time (HTST) pasteurization treatments
(72°C for 15 s) impart a slight cooked, sulphurous note that has become acceptable
to milk consumers but its refrigerated shelf life is only approximately 20 days. Ultra
pasteurization (UP), a process similar to HTST pasteurization using more severe
ality
and causes more nutrient damage but yields milk with a refrigerated shelf life of
approximately 30 days [8]. Pressure treatments of 400 MPa for 15 min or 500 MPa
for 3 min at room temperature achieves microbiological reductions similar to thermal
pasteurization [9] but it is not used commercially because long pressure processing
ate temperature (55°C) extend the refrigerated shelf life of milk to over 45 days [10]
HTST treatments [11]. Finally, ultra high temperature (UHT) processing (135–150°C
for 3–5 s) yields milk that is stable at room temperature for 6 months; however, this
acceptance in important markets [14].
Future advances are expected from the synergistic effects of using high pressure
and high temperature combinations in the rapidly evolving pressure-assisted thermal
processing technology (PATP). PATP is not yet a commercial application and will
require more complex safety validation procedures than HPP, particularly for the case
the inactivation of bacterial spores and recent studies suggest that pressure can lower
the degradation rate of product quality caused by high temperature treatments. The
lowering by pressure of the rate of thermal degradation reactions could preserve qual-
inhibit formation reactions for potential toxicants [15].
This chapter reviews the current use of HPP technology for pasteurization and
other applications, and the promising future of PATP technology for the production
of shelf stable foods. Novel applications such as relatively low hydrostatic pressure
(LHP) disinfestation of dehydrated fruits and vegetables currently under develop-
ment are also presented.
7.2 HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE PROCESSING (HPP) OF FOODS
High pressure processing at refrigeration, ambient or moderate heating temperature
allows inactivation of pathogenic and spoilage microorganisms in foods with fewer
55534_C007.indd 17455534_C007.indd 174 10/22/08 10:52:15 AM10/22/08 10:52:15 AM
nificant chemical changes in foods. Particularly important are thermal degradation
times are not financially viable. HPP treatments (586 MPa for 3 and 5 min) at moder-
while retaining milk volatile profiles similar to those observed after conventional
of low-acid foods (pH under 4.5). PATP conditions are sufficiently severe to achieve
ity factors and constituents with important health benefits to consumers. It may also
food industry [4] inactivates microorganisms without causing significant flavour and
reactions leading to off-flavours, destruction of nutrients and other product quality
treatments (e.g. 1 s at 89ºC, 0.1 s at 96ºC or 0.01 s at 100ºC) lowers flavour qu
process induces strong ‘cooked’ off-flavour notes [12,13] thus limiting its consumer
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Hydrostatic Pressure Processing of Foods 175
changes in food quality as compared to conventional technologies [6,7,16]. Pressure
acts by disrupting mainly hydrogen bonds without affecting covalent bonds. There-
fore, high pressure processing (HPP) treatments at low (approximately 0–30°C) and
moderate (approximately 30–50°C) temperature cause minimum losses in quality
factors associated with small molecules such as vitamins, pigments and volatile
products make them often indistinguishable from untreated controls [19]. Five decimal
reductions in pathogens including Salmonella typhimurium, S. enteritidis, Listeria monocytogenes, Staphylococcus aureus and Vibrio parahemolyticus can be achieved
by HPP [20–25].
7.2.1 PRINCIPLES OF HIGH PRESSURE PROCESSING
Unlike thermal processing and other preservation technologies, HPP effects are uni-
form and nearly instantaneous throughout the food and thus independent of food
ings to full-scale production. The key HPP equipment technologies are the pressure
Oil at ∼20 MPa is fed on the high-pressure oil side of the main pump piston which
∼600 MPa (Figure 7.1). When the main piston reaches the end of its displacement,
the system is reversed and high-pressure oil is then fed to the other side of the main
limitation of pressure vessel construction from a single block limits them to ∼25 l for
operating pressures in excess of 400 MPa. Prestressing by wire-winding and other
technologies is used for safe and reliable commercial-size vessels operating at higher
pressures. Typically, the same technology is used for the yoke holding the top and
bottom seals (Figure 7.2). Wire winding increases equipment costs leading to the
MPa separated by a technology barrier at ∼400 MPa from higher cost operations
such as guacamole salsa production at ∼600 MPa (Figure 7.3). A second technol-
ogy barrier exists at ∼650 MPa and above this pressure level there are no vessels
available for commercial applications. However, the next generation of equipment
High pressure seal
Inlet
Main piston High pressure fluid piston
Outlet
High pressure fluidLow pressure oilHigh pressure oil
FIGURE 7.1 High pressure pump technology. (Adapted from Torres, J.A. and Velazquez, G.
Commercial opportunities and research challenges in the high pressure processing of foods.
Journal of Food Engineering 67, 95–112, 2005.)
55534_C007.indd 17555534_C007.indd 175 10/22/08 10:52:15 AM10/22/08 10:52:15 AM
geometry and equipment size. This has facilitated the scale-up of laboratory find-
vessels and the high hydrostatic pressure generating pumps or pressure intensifiers.
current definition of low cost operations such as oyster shucking requiring 200–400
flavours [4,17,18]. Research has confirmed that the sensory characteristics of HPP
has an area ratio of 30:1 with respect to the high-pressure fluid piston displacing
into the high pressure vessel a food-grade contact fluid, typically purified water at
pump piston and the high-pressure fluid exits on the other pump side. The casting
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
176 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
is expected to reach ∼700 MPa and operate at temperatures higher than 100°C to
inactivate bacterial spores [26]. The possibility exists also that equipment suppliers
may offer in the future large vessels for low pressure applications such as disinfesta-
tion (Figure 7.3).
7.2.1.1 Niche Opportunities for HPP Foods
HPP is an alternative processing technology that has reached consumers with a vari-
ety of new products. The successful introduction of a new technology demands the
HPP, an additional constraint is the large capital investment which is overcome by
operating HPP plants at full capacity. Therefore, the processing of seasonal com-
modities requires identifying a product mix achieving maximum utilization of the
equipment investment. The following sections provide examples of the many oppor-
tunities in which HPP has a clear competitive advantage.
7.2.1.1.1 Consumer Demand for Fresh FoodsThe classical example of satisfying a consumer demand for a fresh product is the
pressure processing of avocado. The treatment required is under 650 MPa for ∼1
consumer demand for products with acceptable shelf-life, convenient to use and free
from chemical additives. Refrigerated fresh-cut fruit salads that consumers demand
Monoblock
Wire wound
No pressure Pressure
Yoke
Vessel plug
Wire wound
vessel
Vessel plug
Concentric cylinders
FIGURE 7.2 High pressure vessel technologies. (Adapted from Torres, J.A. and Velazquez, G.
Commercial opportunities and research challenges in the high pressure processing of foods.
Journal of Food Engineering 67, 95–112, 2005.)
55534_C007.indd 17655534_C007.indd 176 10/22/08 10:52:17 AM10/22/08 10:52:17 AM
identification of specific competitive advantages over existing ones. In the case of
min. HPP avocado is now in national distribution because there was an unsatisfied
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Hyd
rostatic Pressu
re Processin
g of Fo
od
s 177
Moderate pressure High pressure Research
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800
kPsi
Atm
MPa
Kg/cm2
KBar
Low pressure
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
Pasteurization
Low coste.g., oysters
Technology limitTechnology step
High coste.g., avocado
Sterilization
Potential:Disinfestation
FIGURE 7.3 High pressure technology barriers. (Adapted from Torres, J.A. and Velazquez, G. Commercial opportunities and research challenges in
the high pressure processing of foods. Journal of Food Engineering 67, 95–112, 2005.)
55534_C007.indd 177
55534_C007.indd 177
10/22/08 10:52:18 AM
10/22/08 10:52:18 AM
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
178 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
for healthiness, convenience and labor-savings reasons are another example [27].
During cutting and packaging, these products may be contaminated with Salmonella,
Escherichia coli O157:H7 and other pathogens of concern. Early research focusing
limitations of laboratory units available at the time [28] and not current equipment
technology. Current vessels operate at higher pressure allowing processing times in
the 1–3 min range reducing processing costs [29–31].
In 1996, non-pasteurized apple juice was traced to an E. coli O15:H7 outbreak
affecting seven western USA states and British Columbia, Canada. Although this
outbreak affected only an estimated 60 people, public attention was high because
the cases included a 2-year-old girl who suffered permanent renal damage and a 16-
month-old infant who died from cardiac and respiratory arrest [32]. E. coli O15:H7
found in an unopened container was used as evidence to support new juice regula-
tions requiring a 5-log decimal reduction in pathogens coming primarily from animal
fecal contamination [33]. Inactivation of enzymes and spoilage microorganisms
in HPP-treated juice have been extensively studied [34,35]. No viable counts were
observed during storage of apple juice inoculated with a pathogenic cocktail includ-
ing O15:H7 treated at 545 MPa for 1 min under refrigeration temperature and kept 1
month at room temperature or 2 months under refrigeration [4]. CO2(g)-assisted HPP
inactivation of pectinmethylesterase (PME) in Valencia orange juice has been inves-
tigated [36]. Non-carbonated and carbonated juices subjected to conditions ranging
temperature has shown that CO2(g)-assisted HPP increases the rate but not the extent
of PME inactivation.
The demand for juices with no thermal treatment remains strong in important
markets and high pressure processors seek to satisfy it by products that meet the
new pasteurization requirement and that in the future could be labelled ‘fresh’ if
undistinguishable from fresh-squeezed juice. Color, vitamin C content, and anti-
oxidant levels of pressure-pasteurized apple and pulp-free orange juice show no
[19]. Triangular test sensory evaluations using 101 apple and 221 orange juice con-
sumers show that fresh-squeezed and HPP-treated juice are indistinguishable. These
studies show that pressure treated juices are safe and similar to fresh-squeezed sam-
ples [19,37–44].
7.2.1.1.2 Pressure Processing Effect is UniqueThe classical example of unique pressure effect is oyster shucking by HPP. In 2002,
California banned the sale of untreated Gulf of Mexico oysters harvested between
April and October costing local producers an estimated $20 million/year loss and
is a good example of the need for new processing technologies for raw products.
The process discovered in 1997 places live oysters under pressures of 240–350 MPa
for 3 min. These moderate pressure treatments denature the abductor muscle and
oysters can be opened without knife damage. Replacing the laborious and costly
100 years [45]. Most importantly, the HPP treatment eliminates a high safety risk
to production workers, extends refrigerated shelf-life to three weeks and reduces the
55534_C007.indd 17855534_C007.indd 178 10/22/08 10:52:18 AM10/22/08 10:52:18 AM
from 200 to 600 MPa pressure, 30–300 s dwell time and 15–50°C final processing
significant differences between pressure-treated and control samples (Figure 7.4)
hand-shucking is the most significant development in the oyster industry in the past
on long moderate-pressure processes, typically 5–15 min at ∼400 MPa, reflected the
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Hydrostatic Pressure Processing of Foods 179
V. cholerae, V. cholerae non-O:1, V. hollisae and V. mimicus [5].
Another example of unique pressure effect is the moderate hydrostatic pressure
(MHP) treatment proposed to improve the early shreddability of Cheddar cheese
[46–48]. MHP (345 MPa, 483 MPa for 3 and 7 min) applied to fresh Cheddar cheese
curd induces immediately a microstructure resembling that of ripened cheese. Scan-
ning electron microscopy (SEM) shows major changes in the microstructure of
Cheddar cheese immediately after HPP treatment (Figure 7.5). Transmission elec-
tron microscopy (TEM) shows similar microstructure changes (Figure 7.6) in Ched-
dar cheese treated at 275 MPa for 100 s [49]. Sensory evaluations of pressurized
Cheddar cheese [47,48] show that MHP treatments improves the visual and tactile
sensory properties of shredded Cheddar cheese (Figure 7.7). By reducing the pres-
ence of crumbles, increasing the mean shred particle length, improving its length
uniformity and enhancing surface smoothness, it is possible to obtain shreds from
unripened cheese with high visual acceptability and improved tactile handling. The
increase in these and other desirable physical properties suggest that when pressure is
applied, proteins are partially denatured and form a more continuous cheese matrix.
Cheese processors could use MHP to eliminate ripening as a preliminary step for
shredding and still obtain products with equal tactile and visual attributes to those
produced from Cheddar cheese ripened for about 30 days. The advantages would be
Apple juice
Ascorbic acid ORAC FRAP 0
2
4
6
Control HPP
FRAP ORAC
0
10
20
30
L a b
Orange juice
0
20
40
60
80
L a b
0
2
4
6
mM
Tro
lox e
quiv
./L
mM
Tro
lox e
quiv
./L
FIGURE 7.4 Characterization of pressure treated juices by colour, vitamin C, ORAC and
FRAP determinations. (Adapted from Torres, J.A. and Velazquez, G. Commercial oppor-
tunities and research challenges in the high pressure processing of foods. Journal of Food Engineering 67, 95–112, 2005.)
55534_C007.indd 17955534_C007.indd 179 10/22/08 10:52:19 AM10/22/08 10:52:19 AM
microbial risk to consumers by inactivating Vibrio parahemolyticus, V. vulnificus,
refrigerated storage savings of over $30/1000 kg cheese and a simplified handling of
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
180 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
cheese for shredding. MHP has been shown to be effective both in Cheddar cheese
manufactured by stirred and milled curd technology [47,48], an encouraging obser-
vation suggesting that pressure treatments could improve the early shreddability of
other natural cheeses of commercial interest. Shredded cheese is the most common
ingredient cheese sold through retail, food-processing and foodservice marketing
channels.
7.2.1.1.3 Product is a High Microbial Risk to ProducerThis is the case when best production practices do not yield pathogen-free products;
however, the product is on the market because of a strong consumer demand. For
example, seafood processors cannot guarantee absence of Listeria monocytogenes
dence [50]. Good manufacturing and handling practices for cold smoked salmon
yield at best <1 L. monocytogenes cfu/g which explains why products do not pass
the detection procedures used by regulatory agencies with a higher sensitivity of 0.04
cfu/g. No outbreak cases have been associated with cold-smoked salmon; however,
product examinations by regulatory agencies have led to frequent product recalls
losses. HPP could reduce this risk with a process and product formulation developed
to minimize protein damage and thus changes in product texture.
345 MPa/3 min
Control
(b) Stirred
Control
345 MPa/3 min
(a) Milled
10 µm
10 µm10 µm
10 µm
FIGURE 7.5 Scanning electron microscopy (SEM) analysis to visualize changes in the
microstructure of Cheddar cheese immediately after moderate pressure treatments. (Adapted
from Torres, J.A. and Velazquez, G. Commercial opportunities and research challenges in the
high pressure processing of foods. Journal of Food Engineering 67, 95–112, 2005.)
55534_C007.indd 18055534_C007.indd 180 10/22/08 10:52:20 AM10/22/08 10:52:20 AM
in cold-smoked products and they are aware that FDA surveys find this pathogen
with a 17% frequency. Even hot-smoked fish and shellfish processors are concerned
because the same surveys find them to contain L. monocytogenes with a 4% inci-
(Table 7.1). These recalls are extremely costly in terms of financial and reputation
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Hydrostatic Pressure Processing of Foods 181
during post-capture manipulation and processing, particularly during deboning (or
(a)
(b)
1 µm
10 µm
1 µm
(c)
FIGURE 7.6 Transmission electron microscopy (TEM) analysis to visualize changes in the
microstructure of Cheddar cheese immediately after moderate pressure treatments. (Adapted
from Torres, J.A. and Velazquez, G. Commercial opportunities and research challenges in the
high pressure processing of foods. Journal of Food Engineering 67, 95–112, 2005.)
55534_C007.indd 18155534_C007.indd 181 10/22/08 10:52:22 AM10/22/08 10:52:22 AM
A related example is the production of restructured fish products from under-
raw fish has the risk of food borne diseases associated with microbial contamination
utilized species such as arrowtooth flounder (Atheresthes stomias). Using minced
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
182 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
ing. HPP can reduce this microbial load and could be an alternative to induce gel
paste treated at 400–600 MPa for 5 min yields products with appropriate mechani-
cal and functional properties [51]. These high pressure conditions are appropriate to
inactivate parasites and most spoilage microorganisms.
Milled
345Mpa-3min 345Mpa-7min 483Mpa-3min 483Mpa-7minControl
VO = Visual oiliness
SS = Smooth surface
ML = Mean length
UL = Uniformity of length
PC = Presence of crumbles
TO = Tactile oiliness
A = Adhesiveness
0
2
4
6
8VO
SS
ML
ULPC
TO
A
Day 1
0
2
4
6
8VO
SS
ML
ULPC
TO
A
Day 27
0
2
4
6
8VO
SS
ML
ULPC
TO
A
Day 1
0
2
4
6
8VO
SS
ML
ULPC
TO
A
Day 27
Stirred
FIGURE 7.7 Visual and tactile sensory properties of shredded Cheddar cheese obtained
from control and pressure treated curd. (Adapted from Serrano, J. Efecto de altas presiones
en la microestructura de quesos, Aplicación en el rallado de queso Cheddar para uso comer-
cial. MSc dissertation, Oregon State University, Querétaro, Qro. México, 2003; Serrano, J.,
Velazquez, G., Lopetcharat, K., Ramirez, J.A., and Torres, J.A. Effect of moderate pressure
treatments on microstructure, texture, and sensory properties of stirred-curd Cheddar shreds.
Journal of Dairy Science 87, 3172–82, 2004. and Serrano, J., Velazquez, G., Lopetcharat, K.,
Ramirez, J.A., and Torres J.A. Moderately high hydrostatic pressure processing to reduce
production costs of shredded cheese: Microstructure, texture, and sensory properties of
shredded milled curd cheddar. Journal of Food Science 70(4), S286–93, 2005.)
55534_C007.indd 18255534_C007.indd 182 10/22/08 10:52:23 AM10/22/08 10:52:23 AM
filleting and mincing), protein solubilizing with salt, product forming and packag-
formation without heat to obtain products closer to raw fish. Arrowtooth flounder
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Hydrostatic Pressure Processing of Foods 183
depends on pressure level, holding time [51] and temperature [52]. Gels obtained
freeze-drying or thermal abuse show poor mechanical properties [53]. However,
mechanical properties of heat-induced gels (90°C for 30 min) and actually improved
the ones for the gels obtained by inducing their subsequent setting [54]. Pressure
treatments induced favorable changes in the mechanical properties of heat-induced
Pressure induces a protein denaturation/aggregation different from that resulting
from freezing, drying or heating where denaturation is immediately followed by irre-
versible aggregation affecting negatively the mechanical properties of gels. Differ-
ation of muscle proteins [55]. It appears that pressure induces a protein aggregation
dominated by side-to-side interactions of proteins with a low degree of denaturation
and not by aggregation of proteins with major changes in molecular conformation.
Pressure treatments break intermolecular bonds with reaction rate constant k1 induc-
ing changes in protein conformation favoring a protein aggregation reaction with
TABLE 7.1Examples of Smoked Salmon Recalls, 1999–2001
Date Product
04-Dec-01 Frozen smoked salmon
07-Mar-01 Bear Candy smoked salmon
26-Jul-00 Jensen’s Old Fashioned Smokehouse Inc. smoked king salmon
12-Apr-00 Chef Daniel Boulud Atlantic smoked salmon
12-Apr-00 Scandinavian Smoke House salmon
12-Apr-00 Chef Daniel Boulud smoked Atlantic salmon
27-Mar-00 Craigellachie smoked Scottish salmon
14-Mar-00 Grants traditional oak-smoked salmon
10-Mar-00 Royal Baltic Smoked Captain salmon
10-Mar-00 Imperial European-style smoked salmon
11-Jan-00
10-Jan-00 Imperial European-style smoked salmon
19-Sep-99 Blue Ribbon Smoked Fish Co. smoked salmon
18-Nov-99 Kendall Brook smoked Atlantic salmon
09-Nov-99 Tuv Taam sliced smoked Nova salmon
23-Dec-99 Royal Baltic smoked salmon
06-Apr-99 Perona Farms smoked salmon
01-Apr-99 Perona Farms smoked salmon
Source: http://www.foodsafetynetwork.ca/, adapted from [4]
55534_C007.indd 18355534_C007.indd 183 10/22/08 10:52:24 AM10/22/08 10:52:24 AM
Highland Crest finest smoked Scottish salmon
Denaturation/aggregation of myofibrillar proteins induced by high pressure
from myofibrillar proteins previously denatured/aggregated by freezing, dehydration,
pressure treating fish paste at 300 MPa for 30 min at 5°C did not deteriorate the
gels when compared with gels obtained by heating untreated fish paste [51].
ential scanning calorimetry (DSC) thermograms of fish paste subjected to 200 MPa
for 10 min at 7°C differ from those for a fish paste control indicating partial denatur-
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
184 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
reaction rate constant k2 (Figure 7.8). The reaction rate constants expected would be
k1< k2 and as a consequence, an almost immediate aggregation of these extensively
denatured proteins would take place. However, protein aggregation with reaction
rate constant k3 appear to occur preferentially by side-to-side interactions of proteins
with low degree of denaturation and the overall aggregation reaction can be charac-
terized by k3 >>(k1 + k2). Evidence of this type of aggregation has been reported in
tion improves the mechanical properties of heat-induced gels, a situation similar to
H
H
HPP
HH2O
Native protein
Denaturated protein
Preferred agregation:
side-to-side interaction
of near-native proteins
Crosslinking of denatured proteins
HPP k1
HPP
k2
HH2O
H2O
H2O
Protein structure showing intramolecular interactions
Denaturated protein structure with broken intramolecular interactions
Pressure induced crosslinking protein interactions
Pressure effect on the protein system
k3
FIGURE 7.8 Suggested mechanism for pressure-induced changes in proteins where k1, k2
and k3 are reaction constants such that k1 < k2 and k3 >>(k1 +k2). (Adapted from Uresti, R.M.,
Velazquez., G., Ramírez, J.A., Vázquez, M., and Torres, J.A. Effect of high pressure treatments
(Atheresthes stomias). Journal of the Science of Food and Agriculture 84(13), 1741–49, 2004.)
55534_C007.indd 18455534_C007.indd 184 10/22/08 10:52:24 AM10/22/08 10:52:24 AM
pressure-induced fish proteins gels [54]. Because of this, pressure-induced aggrega-
on mechanical and functional properties of restructured products from arrowtooth flounder
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Hydrostatic Pressure Processing of Foods 185
the favorable protein aggregation induced at low temperature by transglutaminase in
the so-called setting or suwari phenomenon. Setting induces protein aggregation only
brillar proteins aggregate immediately inhibiting the transglutaminase effect [56].
Sugars and polyols at concentrations below 8% are used to inhibit protein inter-
treated samples while sucrose and trehalose are unable to inhibit this aggregation in
and maltodextrin [57]. The mechanism involved in the protection by sugar and polyol
stabilizers against pressure damage on protein functionality has been associated with
inhibition of the side to side protein interactions as illustrated in Figure 7.9. Sugars
and polyols stabilize proteins by the mechanism of solute exclusion from the hydration
ratio of proteins. Solutes are excluded from the surface of the proteins and do not react
with them [57,58–60]. However, this hypothesis is not fully accepted yet. The possibil-
ity of interactions between sugars and proteins or lipids has been reported by using
nuclear magnetic resonance (NMR) and quantum chemical methodology [61].
7.2.1.1.4 Product has a High Added Value and Thermal LabilityBiologically active compounds are an important market as the consumer interest
in functional foods continues to expand. Sales of specialty supplements, functional
foods, nutraceuticals and natural personal care products are soaring creating a world-
wide opportunity. A major trend that ensures continuing growth in the demand for
to 46% in 2000. Concurrently, those who believe they need added nutrients increased
from 54% in 1994 to 70% in 2000 (Multi-Sponsor Surveys 2001, Princeton, NJ)
[4,123]. HPP can help meet the challenge of producing from natural sources and
without damaging biologically active compounds ingredients with low microbial
spoilage counts and free of pathogens.
7.2.1.2 Mechanisms of Microbial Inactivation by Pressure
7.2.1.2.1 Vegetative BacteriaMechanistic studies now emerging in the literature show that HPP inactivates micro-
organisms by interrupting cellular functions responsible for reproduction and sur-
vival (Figure 7.10). HPP can damage microbial membranes and thus affect transport
onstrating that leaks occur while cells are held under pressure [62]. Membrane damage
occurs later than cell death and this suggests that dye exclusion measurements assess-
ing this pressure effect can be used to characterize microbial pressure inactivation [63].
Knowledge of cell damage and repair mechanisms could lead to new HPP applica-
tions [64,65]. For example, lysis of starter bacteria induced by HPP treatments could
promote the release of intracellular proteases important in cheese ripening. Viability,
morphology, lysis and cell wall hydrolase activity measurements suggest that high
pressure can cause inactivation, physical damage, and lysis in Lactobacillus lactis [66].
55534_C007.indd 18555534_C007.indd 185 10/22/08 10:52:25 AM10/22/08 10:52:25 AM
for partially denatured myofibrillar proteins (mostly myosin). Fully denatured myofi-
actions. Sorbitol inhibits the aggregation of myofibrillar proteins of raw pressure-
higher stabilizing effect on the ATPase activity of fish myosin than lactitol, sucrose
these products is a diminishing confidence that our diet satisfies our nutritional needs.
In 1994, 70% of women believed their diet met their nutritional needs, a figure down
low-temperature, pressure-treated arrowtooth flounder mince [51]. Sorbitol shows a
phenomena involved in nutrient uptake and disposal of cell waste. Intracellular fluid
compounds have been found in the cell suspending fluid after pressure treatment dem-
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
186 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
Treatments at 300 MPa have shown by TEM intracellular and cell envelope damage of
the cheesemaking strains Lactococcus lactis subsp. cremoris MG1363 and SK11. Cell
whereas cells treated at >400 MPa had decreased cell wall hydrolase activity. How-
samples indicating that this pressure activates cell wall hydrolase activity or increases
cell wall accessibility to the enzyme.
HPP
Stabilizing agent
H2O
H OH2O
HPP
Native proteins
Pressure induced
side-to-side aggregation
Native proteins
Stabilized proteins against
side-to-side aggregation
H2O
HH2O
Protein structure showing intramolecular interactions
Stabilizing agent molecule
Pressure induced crosslinking protein interactions
Pressure effect on the protein system
FIGURE 7.9 against pressure induced aggregation. (Adapted from Uresti, R.M., Velazquez, G., Ramírez,
J.A., Vázquez, M., and Torres, J.A., Effect of high pressure treatments on mechanical and
mias). Journal of the Science of Food and Agriculture 84(13), 1741–49, 2004.)
55534_C007.indd 18655534_C007.indd 186 10/22/08 10:52:26 AM10/22/08 10:52:26 AM
Mechanism of stabilization of sugars and polyols on myofibrillar proteins
suspensions treated at 200 or 300 MPa did not differ significantly from the control,
ever, cells treated at 100 MPa released significantly more reducing sugar than all other
functional properties of restructured products from arrowtooth flounder (Atheresthes sto-
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Hydrostatic Pressure Processing of Foods 187
Increasing our knowledge of the behaviour of bacterial membrane proteins sub-
jected to pressure under different conditions (e.g. pH or aw) will lead to effective
membranes of untreated Salmonella typhimurium reveal three major and 12 minor
protein bands but only two major bands after pressure treatments [67]. One band is
more pressure resistant in acidic pH media suggesting a different protein conformation
at this condition. HPP treatments, 345 MPa for 5 min at 25°C, alter the cell walls of
Leuconostoc mesenteroides and make cell membranes permeable [68]. This damage
reduces the potential gradient across membranes, preventing cells from synthesizing
ATP, which activates the autolytic enzyme degradation of cell walls. Cells treated at
400 MPa for 10 min in pH 5.6 citrate buffer show no growth after 48 h of culture on
plate count agar. Cells can be examined by SEM, membrane integrity by propidium
even though membrane potential decreases from −86 to −5 mV [69,70]. Membrane
damage in S. typhimurium can also be measured by pH differential (pHin–pHout). Mor-
phological changes increasing with pressure correlate with a progressive decrease of
the pH differential, intracellular potassium, and ATP concentration [71,72].
Denaturation
Activeenzyme
Inactiveenzyme
Renaturation
Enzymes
Nutrients
Waste
Leakage
Membranes
(a)
(b)
Hydrostatic pressure effects on cellular functions. (Adapted from Torres, J.A.
and Velazquez, G. Commercial opportunities and research challenges in the high pressure
processing of foods. Journal of Food Engineering 67, 95–112, 2005.)
55534_C007.indd 18755534_C007.indd 187 10/22/08 10:52:27 AM10/22/08 10:52:27 AM
FIGURE 7.10
hurdle preservation technologies. For example, electrophoretic profiles of the outer
ies reveal no significant changes in cellular morphology while PI staining followed
iodide (PI) staining and changes in membrane potential by flow cytometry. SEM stud-
by flow cytometry shows a small population proportion with membrane integrity loss
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
188 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
The outer membrane (OM) providing a protective barrier to Gram-negative bac-
teria is susceptible to pressure-mediated permeabilization. The kinetics of OM and
cytoplasmic membrane permeabilization induced by pressure treatments can be deter-
only slightly even after pressure treatments resulting in a >6 log decrease in viable
observed prior to cell death. Reversible OM damage occurs rapidly and is in thermo-
dynamic equilibrium with pressure conditions while irreversible OM damage is time
dependent. Pressure (200 or 400 MPa) resistance of exponential-phase E. coli NCTC
8164 cells is highest for cells grown at 10°C and decreases with growth temperature
up to 45°C [74]. By contrast, pressure resistance of stationary-phase cells is lowest
in cells grown at 10°C and increases with growth temperature reaching a maximum
at 30–37°C before decreasing at 45°C. This pressure effect can be correlated to the
proportion of unsaturated fatty acids in the membrane lipids which decreases with
growth temperature in both exponential- and stationary-phase cells. In exponential-
sure resistance has been observed.
7.2.1.2.2 Bacterial SporesAlthough the application of 400–800 MPa inactivates pathogenic and spoilage bac-
teria [4,75–77], the inactivation of bacterial spores has been a major challenge to HPP
process developers as these spores are extremely resistant to pressure. Therefore,
current HPP products on the market rely on refrigeration, reduced water activity or
low pH to prevent bacterial spore outgrowth.
surized at 980 MPa for 40 min at room temperature [78]; however, combining tem-
peratures higher than 50°C with pressures above 400 MPa can be effective. For
example, treating Bacillus subtilis spores at 404 MPa and 70°C for 15 min can
spores of Clostridium sporogenes, considered a non-toxigenic equivalent to pro-
teolytic C. botulinum and an important food spoilage bacteria, to 400 MPa at 60°C
for 30 min at neutral pH yields only 1 DR [80]. The effect of 15 min hydrostatic
pressure treatments (550 and 650 MPa) at 55 and 75°C in citric acid buffer (4.75
the gene that encodes the C. perfringens enterotoxin (cpe) on the chromosome (C-
cpe), four isolates carrying the cpe gene on a plasmid (P-cpe), and two strains of
C. sporogenes was studied to develop an effective spore inactivation strategy [81].
Treatments at 650 MPa, 75°C and pH 6.5 were found to be moderately effective
against spores of P-cpe (approximately 3.7 DR) and C. sporogenes (approximately
2.1 DR) but not for C-cpe (approximately 1.0 DR) spores. Treatments at pH 4.75
were moderately effective against spores of P-cpe (approximately 3.2 DR) and C. sporogenes (approximately 2.5 DR) but not of C-cpe (approximately 1.2 DR) when
combined with 550 MPa at 75°C. However, when pressure was raised to 650 MPa
under the same conditions, high inactivation of P-cpe (approximately 5.1 DR) and
55534_C007.indd 18855534_C007.indd 188 10/22/08 10:52:28 AM10/22/08 10:52:28 AM
Spores of six Bacillus species showed no significant inactivation when pres-
achieved five decimal reductions (DRs) at neutral pH [79]. However, subjecting
and 6.5 pH) on spores of five isolates of Clostridium perfringens type A carrying
mined by staining pressure-treated cells with the fluorescent dyes propidium iodide
(PI) and 1-N-phenylnaphtylamine (NPN), respectively [73]. PI fluorescence increases
cell counts while increased NPN fluorescence, indicating OM permeabilization, is
phase cells, pressure resistance increased with greater membrane fluidity, whereas in
stationary-phase cells, no simple relationship between membrane fluidity and pres-
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Hydrostatic Pressure Processing of Foods 189
C. sporogenes (approximately 5.8 DR) spores, and moderate inactivation of C-cpe
(approximately 2.8 DR) spores were observed. These studies show the important
need for further advances in high-pressure treatment strategies to inactivate bacte-
modeling of spore germination appears promising.
Many models have been developed to predict the growth of C. perfringens in
meat products during the cooling stage [e.g. 82–84]. However, modeling of ger-
mination has not been fully studied. Models for B. cereus spore germination in
the presence of L-alanine based on the Weibull function have been proposed [85].
Germinants, that is, compounds that promote spore germination, were recently
in the presence of free amino acids (e.g. L-asparagine) but fast in the presence
of potassium chloride [81]. The Weibull function was used to model C-cpe spore
germination as affected by pH, germinant concentration, and spore germination
temperature [81]. An empirical predictive germination rate model for the germina-
tion of any C. perfringens type A food poisoning isolate as a function of spore ger-
mination temperature was also constructed. These advances in spore inactivation
will further enhance the opportunities to develop shelf-stable food products based
on PATP technology.
7.3 PRESSURE ASSISTED THERMAL PROCESSING (PATP) OF FOODS
The extent to which the severity of pressure-assisted thermal processing (PATP) con-
ditions is increased to enhance microbial inactivation and shelf life must be carefully
approached. Unfortunately very few reports have been published on PATP effects on
chemical changes in foods. A brief published summary reports that in a sugar-amino
derived compounds [86]. Another study reported that reported that although HPP
does not lower the consumer acceptability of orange juice it could change its volatile
milk [11]. Moreover, at the same temperature, a principal component analysis of the
tion different from that observed for UHT milk with sensory properties rejected by
consumers [14].
7.3.1 REACTION KINETICS ANALYSIS
The analysis of PATP effects can be investigated from a reaction kinetic analysis
point of view to illustrate the advantages of this technology. During a reaction, the
change in concentration (c) of a given compound with respect to time (t) can be
expressed as [88]:
d
d
nct
kc= (7.1)
55534_C007.indd 18955534_C007.indd 189 10/22/08 10:52:28 AM10/22/08 10:52:28 AM
rial spores more efficiently. A focus on a mechanistic understanding and process
identified for C-cpe spores. At 30–50°C, spores of C-cpe isolates germinate slowly
profile [87]. Milk subjected to HPP treatments equal or less severe than 586 MPa
and 60°C for up to 5 min had a volatile profile similar to that of HTST-pasteurized
volatile profile in milk under higher hydrostatic pressure was displaced in a direc-
acid model solution pressure influences the thermally induced formation of Maillard-
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
190 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
where k is the reaction rate constant at the experimental pressure and temperature
while n is the reaction order. Integrating Equation 7.1 yields the following linearized
kinetic expressions:
Zero order: c – c0 = kt (7.2)
First order: log(c) – log(c0) = kt (7.3)
Second order: 1 1
0c ckt− = (7.4)
The regression curve obtained by simple linear regression of the concentration com-
cient (R2) for one of the three kinetic models is then used to calculate the rate constant
k. Experimental conditions imply that the c0 value in these equations is a ‘pseudo-
initial concentration’. Multiple linear regression analysis is used to test the difference
between the linearized intercepts at the same temperature for each pressure level
tion c0 which is then reported as an average value for each temperature level. The
difference between this concentration and the one found in untreated samples repre-
sent the effect of time when the food has not yet reached the vessel temperature and
pressure including time for pressure come-up and come-down.
Calculated pseudo-initial concentration c0 values for raw milk samples subjected
to pressure (482, 586, 620, and 655 MPa), temperature (45, 55, 60, and 75°C before
compression) and time (1, 3, 5, and 10 min) treatments in a 2.2-l high-pressure ves-
sel (Engineered Pressure Systems Inc., Haverhill, MA) equipped with a temperature
controller and a high-pressure pump (Model P100-10FC, Hydro-Pac Inc., Fairview,
PA) were recently reported [15]. All milk samples were previously equilibrated to
25°C and processed immediately with vessel loading (1 min) and unloading times
(1.5 min) kept constant for all runs. The average pressure come up time was 40 s.
After treatment, samples were placed immediately in a saturated salt slurry and
ice bath before storage at −38°C until analysis by headspace solid-phase micro-
19 other volatiles were analyzed using a headspace solid-phase microextraction and
[90]. It should be noted that the volatile formation reported in Table 7.2 and Table
7.3 includes the effect of the temperature increase due to adiabatic heating during
sample compression [91]. In the 400–1000 MPa range, milk temperature increases
approximately 3°C for every 100 MPa [92]. In addition, even though milk is a well-
buffered food system, reaction rates may be affected by the temporary pH shift
an alignment of water molecules resulting in a more compact arrangement around
charged species [94–98]. This temporary pH shift cannot be measured experimen-
tally as pH probes are currently unavailable for measurements at high pressure lev-
els. The strategy of a pressure-independent buffer system used in studies of reaction
55534_C007.indd 19055534_C007.indd 190 10/22/08 10:52:29 AM10/22/08 10:52:29 AM
pared with time at constant pressure and temperature with the best correlation coeffi-
tested to confirm that all regression lines start at the same pseudo-initial concentra-
SPME/GC-PFPD) for eight volatile sulphur compounds [89]. Dimethyl sulfide and
induced by pressure [93]. As pressure increases, the columbic field of ions produces
extraction and gas chromatography with pulsed-flame photometric detection (HS-
gas chromatography with flame ionization detection (HS-SPME-GC/FID) technique
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Hydrostatic Pressure Processing of Foods 191
TABLE 7.2Effect of Hydrostatic Pressure and Temperature on the First-Order Reaction Rate Constant for the Formation of Various Straight-Chain Off-Flavour Aldehydes in Milk*
T† (°C) P‡ (MPa)
Hexanal Heptanal Octanal Nonanal Decanal
k R2 k R2 K R2 k R2 k R2
45 482 0.010a 0.87 0.006a 0.81 0.001a 0.92 0.003a 0.82 0.002a 0.85
586 0.046b 0.99 0.049b 0.94 0.038b 0.92 0.023b 0.92 0.004ab 0.80
620 0.084c 0.99 0.085c 0.99 0.035b 0.91 0.034c 0.93 0.008b 0.91
655 0.105d 0.99 0.127d 0.99 0.049c 0.86 0.045d 0.98 0.017c 0.91
c0§ 1.58 0.34 0.25 2.69 3.69
55 482 0.012a 0.89 0.011a 0.92 0.005a 0.80 0.007a 0.84 0.006a 0.84
586 0.049b 0.97 0.054b 0.96 0.043b 0.98 0.037b 0.93 0.009ab 0.95
620 0.091c 0.97 0.102c 0.98 0.062c 0.98 0.048c 0.98 0.013b 0.94
655 0.106d 0.97 0.130d 0.99 0.079d 0.90 0.065d 0.98 0.019c 0.97
c0 2.88 0.37 0.44 2.91 5.77
60 482 0.021a 0.91 0.022a 0.91 0.009a 0.81 0.010a 0.89 0.009a 0.83
586 0.064b 0.97 0.074b 0.98 0.065b 0.96 0.045b 0.96 0.012a 0.94
620 0.092c 0.98 0.114c 0.96 0.088c 0.99 0.056c 0.98 0.016b 0.87
655 0.108d 0.97 0.134d 0.99 0.098d 0.97 0.067d 0.97 0.023c 0.90
c0 4.63 0.56 0.77 4.22 5.88
75 482 0.029a 0.96 0.033a 0.93 0.019a 0.92 0.014a 0.96 0.016a 0.91
586 0.084b 0.99 0.088b 0.96 0.119c 0.96 0.057b 0.98 0.021b 0.92
620 0.099c 0.98 0.125c 0.98 0.107b 0.93 0.071c 0.99 0.025c 0.93
655 0.109d 0.97 0.138d 0.98 0.128d 0.95 0.082d 0.98 0.030d 0.90
c0 12.41 2.10 1.15 8.03 7.46
craw|| 1.51 0.26 0.24 2.54 3.42
c75°C/655 MPa/ 10 min# 144.5 36.9 18.3 49.2 16.1
a, b, c, d
pressure values at constant temperature.* k = Rate constant (min−1 2
† T = Temperature.‡ P = Pressure.§ c0 = Pseudo-initial concentration (μg/kg), i.e. concentration in raw milk plus changes due to sample
handling before and after pressure treatment.|| Concentration (μg/kg) measured in raw milk.# Maximum concentration (μg/kg) measured in milk samples treated at 75°C and 655 MPa for 10 min.
Source: Adapted from Vazquez-Landaverde, P.A., Qian, M.C., and Torres, J.A. Kinetic analysis of vola-
tile formation in milk subjected to pressure-assisted thermal treatments. Journal of Food Science 72(7),
E389–98, 2007.
55534_C007.indd 19155534_C007.indd 191 10/22/08 10:52:30 AM10/22/08 10:52:30 AM
Different letters mean significant difference (α = 0.05) of the rate constant for different hydrostatic
) with R = correlation coefficient.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
192 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
TABLE 7.3Effect of Hydrostatic Pressure and Temperature on the Zero-Order Rate Constants for the Formation of Various Off-Flavour Compounds in Milk*
T† (°C) P‡ (MPa)
2-Methylpropanal 2,3-Butanedione
k R2 k R2 k R2
45 482 0.016a 0.88 0.009a 0.83 0.112a 0.90
586 0.018a 0.86 0.010a 0.84 0.165b 0.94
620 0.017a 0.81 0.010a 0.85 0.205c 0.96
655 0.016a 0.91 0.013b 0.93 0.208c 0.97
c0§ 0.73 0.44 1.62
55 482 0.018a 0.85 0.009a 0.90 0.119a 0.90
586 0.023b 0.83 0.014a 0.94 0.227b 0.89
620 0.021b 0.91 0.022b 0.94 0.221b 0.85
655 0.022b 0.87 0.024b 0.86 0.242b 0.88
c0 0.54 0.37 8.57
60 482 0.019a 0.83 0.014a 0.94 0.140a 0.87
586 0.024b 0.83 0.020b 0.89 0.236b 0.94
620 0.023b 0.934 0.040c 0.92 0.275c 0.91
655 0.021a 0.93 0.053d 0.98 0.280c 0.94
c0 0.48 0.41 14.56
75 482 0.023a 0.82 0.029a 0.88 0.217a 0.84
586 0.030a 0.90 0.045b 0.97 0.314b 0.82
620 0.027a 0.92 0.055c 0.96 0.371c 0.80
655 0.030a 0.92 0.082d 0.99 0.394c 0.86
c0 0.38 0.55 16.65
craw|| 0.75 0.36 1.03
c75°C/655 MPa/ 10 min# 0.64 1.24 23.2
a, b, c, d
pressure values at constant temperature.* k = Rate constant (min−1 2
† T = Temperature.‡ P = Pressure.§ c0 = Pseudo-initial concentration (μg/kg), i.e. concentration in raw milk plus changes due to sample han-
dling before and after pressure treatment.|| Concentration (μg/kg) in raw milk.# Maximum concentration (μg/kg) in milk treated at 75°C and 655 MPa for 10 min.
Source: Adapted from Vazquez-Landaverde, P.A., Qian, M.C., and Torres, J.A. Kinetic analysis of volatile
formation in milk subjected to pressure-assisted thermal treatments. Journal of Food Science 72(7), E389–
98, 2007.
55534_C007.indd 19255534_C007.indd 192 10/22/08 10:52:31 AM10/22/08 10:52:31 AM
Hydrogen Sulfide
Different letters mean significant difference (α = 0.05) of the rate constant for different hydrostatic
) with R = correlation coefficient.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Hydrostatic Pressure Processing of Foods 193
kinetics in model systems or the inactivation of bacterial spores [81] cannot be used
in studies with milk.
All pseudo-initial concentration c0 values shown in Table 7.2 and Table 7.3 for
compounds following 1st and zero order kinetics, respectively, except those for 2-
above the amount present in raw milk as a result of the sample heating during the
handling steps for each HPP run. Values of c0 did not change with pressure (multiple
treatment applied, sample heating before and after each HPP run, sample loading,
vessel closing, and sample unloading steps were responsible for the increase in the
amount of volatiles above the amount present in raw milk.
Activation energies (Ea) for volatile formation in milk at constant high hydro-
static pressure can be calculated using the Arrhenius Equation 7.5 in its linearized
form (Equation 7.6). The slope of this curve (−Ea/R with R = universal gas constant,
8.314 × 10−3 kJ mol−1 K−1) and the intercept (ln k0 with k0 = pre-exponential rate con-
stant) are calculated as follows.
k k eE
RT=−
0
a
(7.5)
ln( ) ln( )k kERT
= −0a
(7.6)
A quantity derived from the pressure dependence of the rate constant k (Equation
partial molar volumes of the transition state and the sums of the partial volumes of
the reactants at the same temperature and pressure [99]. When pressure is applied,
ΔV* < 0 leads to an increase in reaction rate while ΔV* > 0 has the opposite effect.
The greater the magnitude of ΔV* (positive or negative) the higher the sensitivity of a
chemical reaction to pressure while reactions with ΔV* = 0 are pressure independent
[100]. Equation 7.7 can be integrated to obtain Equation 7.8 where lnA is the inte-
gration constant. Values for ΔV* as a function of temperature are then calculated by
linear regression of lnk versus pressure p.
ΔV RTk
p*
ln= −
⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟
∂∂
T
(7.7)
ln ln( )*
k AV pRT
= −Δ
(7.8)
The 1st-order kinetic constants observed for straight chain aldehydes in milk pro-2
a
Hexanal formation had the lowest Ea value decreasing from 35.2 to 0.9 kJ mol−1 at the
maximum pressure tested (Table 7.4). Compounds with formation reaction following
55534_C007.indd 19355534_C007.indd 193 10/22/08 10:52:32 AM10/22/08 10:52:32 AM
methylpropanal and 2,3-butanedione, increased significantly with test temperature
linear regression with 95% confidence) confirming that regardless of the pressure
7.7) is the partial activation volume (ΔV*), is defined as the difference between the
cessed under PATP fitted well (R > 0.9) the Arrhenius model with activation energy
(E ) values decreasing significantly with pressure (Table 7.4 and Table 7.5) [15].
zero order kinetic models (Table 7.3) showed also a good fit to the Arrhenius model
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
194 Fo
od
Processin
g Op
eration
s Mo
delin
g: Design
and
An
alysis
TABLE 7.4Effect of Hydrostatic Pressure on the Activation Energy for the Formation in Milk of Various Off-Flavour Compounds*
P† (MPa)
Straight Chain Aldehydes (First Order Reaction Kinetics) Other Compounds (Zero Order Reaction Kinetics)
Hexanal Heptanal Octanal Nonanal Decanal 2-Methyl-propanal 2,3-Butanedione
Ea R2 Ea R2 Ea R2 Ea R2 Ea R2 Ea R2 Ea R2 Ea R2
482 35.2 0.91 53.8 0.93 88.3 0.92 48.5 0.90 66.9 0.93 11.1 0.99 39.0 0.91 21.1 0.92
586 19.5 0.93 19.2 0.91 36.9 0.94 28.0 0.93 51.7 0.96 14.6 0.96 47.1 0.98 19.2 0.97
620 4.8 0.98 11.6 0.93 34.5 0.91 22.3 0.97 36.3 0.99 15.0 0.96 52.2 0.90 19.0 0.94
655 0.9 0.93 2.4 0.96 29.1 0.94 17.8 0.91 18.4 0.95 18.7 0.97 57.8 0.92 20.0 0.98
* Ea = Activation energy (kJ mol−1 2
† P = Pressure.
of Agricultural and Food Chemistry 54(24), 9184–92, 2006a.
55534_C007.indd 194
55534_C007.indd 194
10/22/08 10:52:33 AM
10/22/08 10:52:33 AM
Hydrogen Sulfide
) with R = correlation coefficient.
Source: Adapted from Vazquez-Landaverde, P.A., Torres, J.A., and Qian, M.C. Effect of high pressure-moderate temperature processing on the volatile profile of milk. Journal
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Hydrostatic Pressure Processing of Foods 195
(R2 > 0.9); however, Ea values were affected differently by pressure, increasing for
2-methylpropanal and 2,3-butanedione and remaining practically unchanged for
hydrogen sulphide regardless of the pressure level (Table 7.4 and Table 7.5). Pressure
increased the formation of straight-chain aldehydes, decreased that of 2-methylpro-
panal and 2,3 butanedione, and did not affect that for hydrogen sulphide (Table 7.4).
A remarkable observation was that the concentration of the other 18 volatiles ana-
lyzed in this study on PATP-milk did not increase during pressurization time (slope
P-value > 0.05, R2 < 0.60) for all pressure and temperature levels tested. Predicted
pseudo-initial concentration c0 values for some of these compounds increased with
treatment temperature (Table 7.6), but the concentration of these volatiles remained
stable during pressurization time, indicating that only the heating time at atmospheric
pressure before and after each HPP treatment was responsible for the increase in
these volatiles above the level found in raw milk.
The lack of contribution to the concentration of most milk volatiles by heating time
formation of these volatiles even though initial vessel temperature varied from 45 to
75°C, and compression to 482–655 MPa for 1–10 min further increased milk tempera-
ture due to adiabatic heating. Past research on the formation of these compounds had
shown a concentration increase with processing temperature [89,90,101–105]. This
suggested that the formation of these compounds was inhibited by pressure. Firm
evidence of the inhibition by pressure could have been obtained by PATP milk experi-
ments in the range 0.1–482 MPa. However, this range was outside the scope of the
reported work. The pressure range covered in this PATP-milk study, 482–655 MPa,
TABLE 7.5Relationship Between the Activation Energy and the Hydrostatic Pressure for the Formation of Various Off-Flavour Compounds in Milk*
Compound Relationship† R2
Hexanal Ea = −0.20x +134.84 0.96
Heptanal Ea = −0.29x +197.25 0.99
Octanal Ea = 0.002x2 − 2.65x +894.08 0.99
Nonanal Ea = −0.18x +135.16 0.99
Decanal Ea = −0.001x2 +1.86x − 394.38 0.99
2-Methylpropanal Ea = 0.03x − 8.28 0.90
2,3-Butanedione Ea = 0.10x − 12.44 0.96
* Ea = Activation energy (kJ mol−1).† x = Hydrostatic pressure (MPa).
Source: Adapted from Vazquez-Landaverde, P.A., Qian, M.C., and
Torres, J.A. Kinetic analysis of volatile formation in milk subjected
to pressure-assisted thermal treatments. Journal of Food Science
72(7), E389–98, 2007.
55534_C007.indd 19555534_C007.indd 195 10/22/08 10:52:34 AM10/22/08 10:52:34 AM
under pressure was a most interesting finding. High hydrostatic pressure inhibited the
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
196 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
was chosen to approach conditions achieving microbial inactivation including bacte-
rial spores [15].
reactions in PATP milk can be obtained by comparing the effect of thermal treat-
ments at conventional and PATP conditions.
Volatiles in milk subjected to conventional and PATP treatments are shown in
Table 7.7. The concentration of volatiles in milk subjected to 620 MPa for 5 min at 75°C
was compared to a heat treatment at atmospheric pressure that simulated the temperature
TABLE 7.6Effect of Temperature During Sample Loading (3.5 min) into the Pressure Vessel on the Average Pseudo-Initial Concentration* (c0) of Various Off-Flavour Compounds in Milk
Compound
Temperature (°C)Relationship Intercept (I)
vs. Temperature (T) R245 55 60 75
Ethyl acetate (μg/kg) 0.19a 0.21a 0.27b 0.29b I = 0.003T − 0.03 0.854
2-Methylbutanal (μg/kg) 0.14a 0.24b 0.24bc 0.28c I = 0.004T − 0.02 0.817
2-Pentanone (μg/kg) 0.14a 0.15a 0.15a 0.18b I = 0.001T − 0.07 0.925
3-Methyl-1-butanol (μg/kg) 0.09b 0.07a 0.07a 0.08ab NR NR
2-Hexanone (μg/kg) 0.07a 0.13b 0.15b 0.28c I = 0.007T–0.25 0.982
2-Furaldehyde (μg/kg) 0.29a 0.43b 0.44b 0.47b NR NR
2-Heptanone (μg/kg) 1.14a 1.44b 2.05c 4.01d I = 0.002T 2 − 0.22T +5.91 0.996
2-Octanone (μg/kg) 1.49c 1.26b 1.17b 0.97a I = −0.017T +2.22 0.975
2-Nonanone (μg/kg) 0.47a 0.48a 0.57ab 0.64b I = 0.006T–0.18 0.893
2-Decanone (μg/kg) 0.62ab 0.69b 0.58ab 0.55a NR NR
2-Undecanone (μg/kg) 0.30ab 0.52c 0.22a 0.38b NR NR
Methanethiol (μg/kg) 5.20a 5.21a 5.59a 7.76b I = 0.004T 2 − 0.40T +15.04 0.999
21.87c 19.16b 20.01bc 14.42a NR NR
3.97a 3.95a 3.91a 3.89a NR NR
24.84a 33.39b 22.08a 34.72b NR NR
30.83a 43.96b 36.82ab 122.83c I = 0.141T 2 − 14.05T +378.32 0.968
Dimethyl sulfoxide (mg/kg) 0.66ab 0.71b 0.57a 1.29c NR NR
Dimethyl sulfone (mg/kg) 0.87b 0.91b 0.79a 0.99c NR NR
a, b, c, d Different letter for each compound indicates statistical difference between the pseudo-initial con-
centration (Tukey HSD 95%).* c0 = Pseudo-initial concentration (μg/kg), i.e. concentration in raw milk plus changes due to sample
handling before and after pressure treatment.
NR = No relationship between intercept and temperature (R2 < 0.800).
Source: Adapted from Vazquez-Landaverde, P.A., Qian, M.C., and Torres, J.A. Kinetic analysis of vola-
tile formation in milk subjected to pressure-assisted thermal treatments. Journal of Food Science 72(7),
E389–98, 2007.
55534_C007.indd 19655534_C007.indd 196 10/22/08 10:52:35 AM10/22/08 10:52:35 AM
Carbon disulfide (ng/kg)
Dimethyl sulfide (μg/kg)
Dimethyl disulfide (ng/kg)
Dimethyl trisulfide (ng/kg)
Further confirmation of the inhibitory effects of pressure on several chemical
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Hyd
rostatic Pressu
re Processin
g of Fo
od
s 197
TABLE 7.7Comparison between the Effect of HPP and Heat Treatment at Atmospheric Pressure on the Formation of Off-Flavour Compounds in Milk*
Treatment Hexanal Heptanal Octanal 2-Heptanone 2-Octanone 2-Nonanone MeSH DMS DMDS
620 MPa, 75°C, 5 min† 44.7 7.33 7.02 4.01 0.97 0.64 7.7 3.89 0.03
Simulated heat
treatment‡ 16.9 2.6 5.1 5.2 4.8 8.6 24.8 8.44 0.06
* Concentration in μg/kg.† This study.‡ Heat treatment under atmospheric pressure, equivalent to the temperature values and times a high pressurized sample of milk treated at 620 MPa and 75°C for 5 min would
be subjected to, and is equal to 3.5 min at 75°C to account for sample handling before pressurization, and 5 min at 93.6°C to account for adiabatic heating.
Source: Adapted from Vazquez-Landaverde, P.A., Qian, M.C., and Torres, J.A. Kinetic analysis of volatile formation in milk subjected to pressure-assisted thermal treat-
ments. Journal of Food Science 72(7), E389–98, 2007.
55534_C007.indd 197
55534_C007.indd 197
10/22/08 10:52:36 AM
10/22/08 10:52:36 AM
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
198 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
and time during the HPP treatment, that is, 3.5 min at 75°C to account for sample
handling, plus 5 min at 93.6°C, a temperature chosen to account for milk adiabatic heat-
ing during pressurization of milk initially at 75°C. Straight-chain aldehydes were pres-
ent at higher concentrations in HPP-treated samples while methyl ketones and some
sulphur compounds were present at lower concentrations than in the heat-only samples.
treatment at atmospheric pressure as had been suggested by a principal component
analysis of experimental PATP and commercial HTST and UHT milk [11].
The inhibitory effect of pressure on the formation of several sulphur compounds
offers a promising improvement in milk processing technology. The increase in the
[106] because of their low sensory thresholds [107] and could affect the consumer
acceptance of milk processed with pressure-assisted thermal treatments. However,
consumer sensory studies on the impact of these aldehydes in PATP-treated milk
duced during conventional thermal treatments [11]. It has been reported that vola-
tile sulphur compounds are mainly responsible for the development of the cooked
powerful sulphur-containing aroma compound in heated milk [11] with a low sen-
sory threshold and an unpleasant rotten cabbage aroma [110]. Dimethyl sulphide is
also an important compound commonly present in milk at concentrations above its
sensory threshold [90] and has a sulphury aroma [107]. Hydrogen sulphide also has
cation techniques [11] indicated that hydrogen sulphide may not be as important to
the aroma of heated milk. Inhibition of methyl ketones formation by pressure is also
of importance since their concentration increase has been associated to the develop-
olds suggest that they could be less important than previously thought [107], some
researchers have indicated that methyl ketones could act in a synergistic manner to
The interpretation of the formation of volatiles in milk based on the analysis of
temperature and pressure effects on their kinetic constant (k) using the energy of
activation and activation volume models assume that the conversion of a reactant
into a volatile passes through an intermediate or active state. The activation energy
(Ea) needed to reach the activated state is always a positive value (Figure 7.11a),
of the activated state and the partial volumes of the reactants [99] can be negative,
positive or zero (Figure 7.11b). Therefore, reactions with Ea decreasing with pressure
will be consistent with an increased volatile formation in PATP-milk as compared to
conventionally treated milk (Figure 7.11c). Moreover, these reactions will have nega-
tive ΔV* values and thus k-values at constant temperature will increase with pressure
(Figure 7.11d). The opposite behaviour will be observed for reactions with Ea values
increasing with pressure (Figure 7.11c and Figure 7.11d), while no pressure effects on
Ea values (Figure 7.11c) will correspond to reactions with ΔV* = 0 (Figure 7.11d). For
reactions with ΔV*>>0, values for reaction kinetic constants at high pressure would
be so low that volatile formation would not be observed (Figure 7.11d). Table 7.8
55534_C007.indd 19855534_C007.indd 198 10/22/08 10:52:36 AM10/22/08 10:52:36 AM
These findings support previous conclusions that the effect of pressure-assisted ther-
mal treatments on the volatile profile of milk is different to that of an equivalent heat
are needed because the aroma profiles obtained are very different from those pro-
an unpleasant eggy, sulphury aroma, but a recent analysis using improved quantifi-
whereas ΔV* values defined as the difference between the partial molar volumes
concentration of saturated aldehydes is thought to cause the stale off-flavour in milk
flavour defect in heated milk [14,102,108,109]. Methanethiol is probably the most
ment of stale-heated flavour in UHT milk [111]. Although their high sensory thresh-
impart a perceptible flavour [112].
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Hyd
rostatic Pressu
re Processin
g of Fo
od
s 199
Pressure
ΔV = 0
Absolute temperature–1
ln k
ln k
Ea increases
650 MPa
Ea decreases650 MPa
0.1 and 650 MPa
No change in Ea
V*
Reagents
[Activated state]* w/ΔV*< 0
ΔV*
[Products]
[Activated state]* w/ΔV* > 0
Reaction pathway
E
[Products]
Reagents
[Activated state]*
Ea>0
Reaction pathway
ΔV*< 0
ΔV*> 0ΔV*> 0
482–655 MPa
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
Reaction w/ΔV*= 0
ΔV*
If ΔV*= 0
If ΔV*< 0
If ΔV*> 0
FIGURE 7.11 a
volume ΔV*. (c) Effect of temperature on the reaction kinetic constant as a function of ΔV*. (d) Effect of pressure on the reaction kinetic constant as a
function of ΔV*. (Adapted from Vazquez-Landaverde, P.A., Qian, M.C., and Torres, J.A. Kinetic analysis of volatile formation in milk subjected to pres-
sure-assisted thermal treatments. Journal of Food Science 72(7), E389–98, 2007.)
55534_C007.indd 199
55534_C007.indd 199
10/22/08 10:52:37 AM
10/22/08 10:52:37 AM
Analysis of pressure and temperature effects on reaction kinetics. (a) Definition of energy of activation E . (b) Definition of activation
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
200 Fo
od
Processin
g Op
eration
s Mo
delin
g: Design
and
An
alysis
TABLE 7.8Effect of Temperature on the Activation Volumes for the Formation of Various Off-Flavor Compounds in Milk*
T (°C)
Hexanal Heptanal Octanal Nonanal Decanal 2,3-Butanedione
ΔV* R2 ΔV* R2 ΔV* R2 ΔV* R2 ΔV* R2 ΔV* R2 ΔV* R2
45 −3.72 0.99 −4.78 0.99 −6.18 0.89 −4.29 0.97 −3.09 0.91 −3.51 0.87 −1.01 0.97
55 −3.60 0.98 −4.03 0.99 −4.52 0.96 −3.60 0.98 −1.74 0.92 −1.60 0.92 −1.15 0.90
60 −2.71 0.99 −3.01 0.99 −4.04 0.94 −3.16 0.96 −1.41 0.89 −2.13 0.87 −1.19 0.96
75 −2.31 0.96 −2.51 0.98 −3.32 0.88 −3.10 0.96 −1.01 0.96 −1.62 0.94 −1.04 0.99
∗ ΔV* = Activation volume (×10−5 m3 mol−1 2
Source: Adapted from Vazquez-Landaverde, P.A., Qian, M.C., and Torres, J.A. Kinetic analysis of volatile formation in milk subjected to pressure-assisted thermal treat-
ments. Journal of Food Science 72(7), E389–98, 2007.
55534_C007.indd 200
55534_C007.indd 200
10/22/08 10:52:38 AM
10/22/08 10:52:38 AM
Hydrogen Sulfide
) with R = correlation coefficient.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Hydrostatic Pressure Processing of Foods 201
shows the activation volume change ΔV* for volatile formation in HPP treated milk.
ΔV* values for straight-chain aldehydes in PATP milk are negative; indicating that an
increase in pressure would lead to an increase in reaction rate constants. This is con-
sistent with the observations of k values for straight-chain aldehydes increasing with
pressure (Table 7.2). In addition, ΔV* values for straight-chain aldehydes decrease
in absolute value with temperature, meaning that at higher temperatures, formation
of aldehydes is less sensitive to pressure changes. ΔV* values for hydrogen sulphide
remained fairly stable regardless of HPP temperature (Table 7.8), an observation also
consistent with the lack of pressure effect on its Ea value (Table 7.4). ΔV* values for
2,3-butanedione are negative and appear to be affected by temperature, but with an
unclear trend (Table 7.8). ΔV* values for 2-methylpropanal are not shown because 2
of methyl ketones and some sulphur compounds are observed under pressure. Since
these compounds are formed at atmospheric pressure, ΔV* values for their formation
reactions must be positive, and very large, because these reactions are completely
inhibited by pressure.
The increase, decrease or lack of change caused by pressure and temperature on
the formation of volatiles in PATP milk can be explained with no need to assume
alternative reaction pathways. This suggests that there are no reaction pathways for
the 27 volatiles measured with a small formation rate at low pressure that would
increase with pressure because of negative ΔV* values (Figure 7.12) [15]. Findings
in this study on PATP milk represent a dramatic improvement in the understanding
of the effect of temperature and pressure on reaction rates in foods and support the
need for further research on pressure-assisted thermal processes to develop products
Pressure
ln k
ΔV*< 0
482–655 MPa
Minimum rate for detectable formationwithin chosen experimental time
FIGURE 7.12 Hypothetical pathway for volatile formation at constant temperature and high
pressure with negligible rate at conventional pressure (e.g. 0.1 MPa). (Adapted from Vazquez-
Landaverde, P.A., Qian, M.C., and Torres, J.A. Kinetic analysis of volatile formation in milk
subjected to pressure-assisted thermal treatments. Journal of Food Science 72(7), E389–98,
2007.)
55534_C007.indd 20155534_C007.indd 201 10/22/08 10:52:38 AM10/22/08 10:52:38 AM
they did not fit the Arrhenius model (R < 0.648). No changes in the concentration
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
202 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
meeting current consumer demand for foods with minimal effects of processing.
in pressure treatments as differences in chemical changes between milk subjected
to conventional and pressure-assisted thermal treatments can be interpreted on the
basis of the kinetic analysis here presented and reactions already well-described
in the literature. This is very important to food processors that use high pressure
processing, as it will enhance the acceptance of pressure processing as a novel tech-
nology alternative for improved-quality foods. The likelihood that pressure-assisted
thermal processes produce new compounds of unknown safety appears to be low.
PATP is a promising alternative to preserve not only quality factors and desirable
formation of potential toxicants.
7.4 LOW HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE (LHP) DISINFESTATION OF DRY FRUITS AND VEGETABLES
Consumers have become increasingly concerned about the quality and safety of the
food reaching their table, including dry and fresh fruits and vegetables. Fumigation
of these products with ethylene bromide has been a standard disinfestation method
in the global trade of these products to meet quarantine restrictions issued to prevent
the introduction of pests [113,114]; however, the use of this chemical is becoming
more and more restricted because of its impact on the ozone layer [115,116]. In addi-
tion, chemical treatments are not well accepted by consumers because of potential
health risks of chemical residues in their diet. An effective alternative to chemical
disinfestation is irradiation but this technology is considered undesirable by some
consumers and disallowed by regulations in many countries [117]. Hot water dipping
used for quarantine treatments of tropical and subtropical fruits [118,119] has been
reported to have heat transfer limitations (fruit shape/size and maturity), increase
respiratory metabolism, induce skin damage and requires large use of freshwater of
good sanitary quality for fruit cooling. In these hydrothermal treatments long heat
application times are necessary to reach larvae that can penetrate deep into the fruit.
heat-conducting differences among fruits of different maturity, fruits containing lar-
vae far from fruit surfaces, failure to account for fruit temperature differences prior
to treatment, and failure to account for lot-size dependent times before the hydro-
thermal treatment tank can reach the required lethal temperature.
Pests of worldwide commercial importance include Anastrepha ludens a native
of Northeastern Mexico, particularly the states of Nuevo León and Tamaulipas, and
[121]. When detected in Florida and California, each infestation has required inten-
sive and massive eradication and detection procedures. Its larvae feed and develop
on many deciduous, subtropical, and tropical fruits and some vegetables. The Carib-
eggs under the skin of fruit just as they begin to ripen, often where some break in
55534_C007.indd 20255534_C007.indd 202 10/22/08 10:52:39 AM10/22/08 10:52:39 AM
Most significantly, alternative reaction formation mechanisms are not likely involved
constituents with important health benefits to consumers, but may inhibit also the
Reports of larvae survival to these hydrothermal treatments [120] appear to reflect
the Mediterranean fruit fly (Ceratitis capitata), one of the most destructive fruit pests
bean fruit fly (Anastrepha suspense), a near relative of the Mexican fruit fly (A. ludens) is one of several species of fruit flies indigenous to the West Indies and its
larvae attack tropical and subtropical fruits. As other harmful flies, females deposit
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Hydrostatic Pressure Processing of Foods 203
the fruit skin has already occurred. Infested fruit often drop and those staying on the
plant may have no outward signs of infestation [122].
Preliminary studies conducted at Oregon State University on coddling moth,
have shown that egg and larvae inactivation in dry fruits and vegetables is possible
with relatively low hydrostatic pressure (LHP) treatments. Disinfestation conditions
would be independent from fruit size and geometry because pressure transmission
to any location within the product is essentially instantaneous [4]. LHP treatments at
pressures as low as 125 MPa have been shown to inactivate the Mediterranean fruit
ing time and treatment temperature. Unfortunately, this is the only inactivation data
reported to assist in the design of LHP treatments. At present, the pressure inactiva-
tion conditions for the eggs of insect of commercial importance in California and the
cooperation with the California Kearney Agricultural Center. Preliminary observa-
encouraging.
7.5 CONCLUSIONS
reported over a century ago when a 5–6 log-cycle total count reduction was achieved
TABLE 7.9Inactivation of Mediterranean Fruit Fly (Ceratitis capitata) Eggs by Relative Low Hydrostatic Pressure (LHP) Treatments
Pressure (Pa)
Temperature (oC)
0 12.5 25 32.5 40
Time (mn)
5 10 20 5 10 20 5 10 20 5 10 20 5 10 20
0 - o o - - o - - o - - o - - o
5 - - - - - - - - - - - - o o o
15 - o - - - - - - - - - - o o o
30 - o - - - - - - - - - - o o o
50 - o - o o o o o o o o o u u u
75 - o - - - - o o o - - - - - -
100 u u u o o u o o o o o o u u u
125 - - - u u u u u u u u u - - -
150 - - - u u u u u u u u u u u u
o= eggs hatching; u= eggs inactivated; - = condition not tested.
Journal of Food Processing and Preservation 19, 161–64, 1995.
55534_C007.indd 20355534_C007.indd 203 10/22/08 10:52:40 AM10/22/08 10:52:40 AM
Pacific Northwest (Table 7.10) are being determined at Oregon State University in
tions of the quality of LHP-treated dry fruits, including raisins, figs and apricots are
The application of high hydrostatic pressure for the processing of foods was first
Source: Adapted from Butz, P, and Tauscher, B. Inactivation of fruit fly eggs by high pressure treatment.
and at least one peer-reviewed published report on the Mediterranean fruit fly [115],
fly. As shown in Table 7.9, inactivation was almost independent of pressure hold-
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
204 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
without using heat by treating milk at 670 MPa for 10 min. HPP technology is nowa-
days a well-established food technology with commercial success stories all over the
world [124, 125]. Unlike thermal processing and most other preservation technolo-
gies, HPP effects are uniform and nearly instantaneous throughout the food and thus
TABLE 7.10
Common Name Primary Crop(s) Status in Oregon*
Lepidopterans
Oriental fruit moth Grapholita molesta Stone fruit Limited distribution in
western Oregon
Peach twig borer Anarsia lineatella Stone fruit, almonds Statewide
Codling moth Cydia pomonella Pome fruit, walnuts Statewide
Navel orange worm Amyelois trasitella Almonds, pistachio,
walnuts
Not known to occur
Oblique banded leaf
roller
Choristoneura rosaceana
Pome fruit, pistachio Statewide
Coleopterans
Dried fruit beetle Carpophilus hemipterus
Figs, raisins Infests stored products
at least on NW Oregon
Ten-lined June beetle Polyphylla decemlineata
Almonds, walnuts Statewide
Hemipterans
San Jose scale Diaspidiotus perniciosus
Stone fruit, almonds Statewide
Citricola scale Coccis pseudomagnolarum
Figs, citrus Not known to occur
Green peach aphid Myzus persicae Stone fruit, pome fruit Statewide
Diptera
Bactorcerus oleae Olives Not known to occur
Rhagoletis complete Walnuts Statewide
Acari
European red mite Panonychus ulmi Almonds, stone &
pome fruit
Statewide
Almonds, stone &
pome fruit
Statewide
Two spotted spider mite Tetranychus urticae Almonds, stone &
pome fruit
Statewide
* Provided by Rick Westcott, Rich Worth, and Kathleen Johnson at the Oregon Dept. of Agriculture, July
10, 2007.
55534_C007.indd 20455534_C007.indd 204 10/22/08 10:52:41 AM10/22/08 10:52:41 AM
Infestation of Commercial Concern in California and the Pacific Northwest
Scientific Name
Pacific spider mite Tetranychus pacificus
Olive fruit fly
Walnut husk fly
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Hydrostatic Pressure Processing of Foods 205
independent of food and equipment geometry and size. This has facilitated the scale-
rapid commercialization of HPP processing technology.
The next generation of high hydrostatic pressure units will allow the combina-
tion of pressure and thermal treatments. It is interesting to note that it is again experi-
mental research on milk that has demonstrated the promising advantages of PATP
technology. Only thermal degradation reactions leading to the formation of alde-
hydes were accelerated by high pressure. The formation of most volatiles reported
inhibited by pressure. Most importantly, new reaction formation mechanisms were
not likely involved in volatile formation in PATP-milk and this will be particularly
important in the European market where novel technologies regulations could limit
the commercialization of PATP applications for the development of shelf-stable
foods. Also, the application of the Le Chatelier principle frequently used to explain
the high quality of pressure-treated foods, often with no supporting experimental
evidence, is not necessary to demonstrate that PATP promises to cause much less
chemical damage to foods than conventional thermal treatments. This will allow
meeting the current consumer demand for foods minimally affected by processing
so as to preserve desirable compositional and sensory properties while meeting also
a demand for enhanced food safety.
NOMENCLATURE
c Concentration, g L−1
t Time, min
k Reaction rate constant, units vary with reaction order
n Reaction order
c0 Pseudo-initial concentration
Ea Activation energy, kJ mol−1
R Universal gas constant, 8.314×10-3 kJ mol−1 K−1
k0 Pre-exponential rate constant
ΔV* Partial activation volume
A Integration constant
p Pressure, MPa
R2
REFERENCES
1. Anonymous. 2006a. Milk pasteurization. In Wikipedia, the free Encyclopaedia. Avail-
able from: http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Raw_milk. Accessed November 20, 2006.
2. WM Fedio, and H Jackson. 1990. Incidence of Listeria monocytogenes in raw bulk
milk in Alberta. Canadian Institute of Food Science and Technology Journal 23(4,5):
236–8.
3. MC Rea, TM Cogan, and S Tobin. 1992. Incidence of pathogenic bacteria in raw milk
in Ireland. Journal of Applied Bacteriology 73(4): 331–6.
4. JA Torres, and G Velazquez. 2005. Commercial opportunities and research challenges
in the high pressure processing of foods. Journal of Food Engineering 67: 95–112.
55534_C007.indd 20555534_C007.indd 205 10/22/08 10:52:41 AM10/22/08 10:52:41 AM
up of laboratory findings to full-scale production and is a key factor explaining the
Regression coefficient
to be factors of the consumer rejection of ‘cooked’ milk flavour were actually fully
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
206 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
5. DL Berlin, DS Herson, DT Hicks, and DG Hoover. 1999. Response of pathogenic
Vibrio species to high hydrostatic pressure. Applied Environmental Microbiology 65:
2776–80.
6. JC Cheftel. 1995. High pressure, microbial inactivation and food preservation. Comptes Rendus de l’Academie d’Agriculture de France 81(1): 13–38.
7. G Velazquez, K Gandhi, and JA Torres. 2002. High hydrostatic pressure: A review.
Biotam 12(2): 71–78.
(IDFA). Available from: http://www.idfa.org/facts/milk/pasteur.cfm. Accessed May
13, 2006.
9. B Rademacher, and HG Kessler. 1996. High pressure inactivation of microorganisms
and enzymes in milk and milk products. European high pressure research conference.
Leuven, Belgium.
10. G Tovar-Hernandez, HRV Peña, G Velazquez, JA Ramirez, and JA Torres. 2005. Effect
of combined thermal and high pressure processing on the microbial stability of milk
during refrigerated storage. In: IFT Annual Meeting. New Orleans, LA: Institute of
Food Technologists.
11. PA Vazquez-Landaverde, JA Torres, and MC Qian. 2006a. Effect of high pressure-
tural and Food Chemistry 54(24): 9184–92.
12. PM Colahan-Sederstrom, and DG Peterson. 2005. Inhibition of key aroma compound
generated during ultra-high temperature processing of bovine milk via epicatechin
addition. Journal of Agricultural and Food Chemistry 53(2): 398–402.
demic Press, Inc., 201–239.
14. JS Steely. 1994. Chemiluminiscence detection of sulfur compounds in cooked milk.
In: CJ Mussinan, ME Keelan, editors. Sulfur compounds in foods. American Chemical
Society, Chicago, IL, USA, 22–35.
15. PA Vazquez-Landaverde, MC Qian, and JA Torres. 2007. Kinetic analysis of volatile
formation in milk subjected to pressure-assisted thermal treatments. Journal of Food Science 72(7): E389–98.
16. D Knorr. 1993. Effects of high-hydrostatic-pressure processes on food safety and qual-
ity. Food Technology 47(6):156, 158–161.
17. G Velazquez, P Vázquez, M Vázquez, and JA Torres. 2005a. Aplicaciones del proc-
esado de alimentos por alta presión. Ciencia y Tecnología Alimentaria 4(5): 343–52.
18. G Velazquez, P Vázquez, M Vázquez, and JA Torres. 2005b. Avances en el procesado
de alimentos por alta presión. Ciencia y Tecnología Alimentaria 4(5): 353–67.
19. TH Shellhammer, GD Aleman, MR McDaniel, and JA Torres. 2003. A comparison of
the sensory and chemical properties of orange and apple juices treated with and without
high pressure. IFT Annual Meeting. Chicago, IL.
20. H An, H Calik, H He, R Adams, and MT Morrissey. 2000. Use of high hydrostatic pres-
21. BM Mackey, K Forestiere, NS Isaacs, R Stenning, and B Brooker. 1994. The effect of
high hydrostatic pressure on Salmonella Thompson and Listeria monocytogenes exam-
ined by electron microscopy. Letters Applied Microbiology 19: 429–32.
22. C Metrick, DG Hoover, and DF Farkas. 1989. Effects of high hydrostatic pressure on
heat-resistant and heat-sensitive strains of Salmonella. Journal of Food Science 54:
1547–49, 1564.
23. MF Patterson, M Quinn, R Simpson, and A Gilmour. 1995. Sensitivity of vegetative
pathogens to high hydrostatic pressure treatment in phosphate buffered saline and
foods. Journal of Food Protection 58: 524–29.
55534_C007.indd 20655534_C007.indd 206 10/22/08 10:52:42 AM10/22/08 10:52:42 AM
8. Anonymous. 2006b. Pasteurization: Definition and methods. Intl. Dairy Foods Assn.
moderate temperature processing on the volatile profile of milk. Journal of Agricul-
sure to control pathogens in raw oysters. Journal of Shellfish Research 19: 655–56.
13. WF Shipe. 1980. Analysis and control of milk flavor. In: Charalambous G, editor. The analysis and control of less desirable flavors in foods and beverages. New York: Aca-
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Hydrostatic Pressure Processing of Foods 207
24. MF Stewart, FF Jewett, CP Dunne, and DG Hoover. 1997. Effect of concurrent high
hydrostatic pressure, acidity and heat on the injury and destruction of Listeria monocy-togenes. Journal of Food Safety 17: 23–26.
25. MF Styles, DG Hoover, and DF Farkas. 1991. Response of Listeria monocytogenes
and Vibrio parahaemolyticus to high hydrostatic pressure. Journal of Food Science 56:
1404–7.
26. E Ting. 2003. Personal communication. Kent, WA: Avure Technologies, Inc.
27. S Pao, PD Petracek, and MA Ismail. 1997. Advances in preparing peeled fresh-cut
citrus. Food Technology International Europe 39–40, 42.
28. G Aleman, DF Farkas, JA Torres, E Wilhelmsen, and S McIntyre. 1994. Ultra-high
pressure pasteurization of fresh cut pineapple. Journal of Food Protection 57931–34.
29. N Rogers. 1999. High pressure processing. It’s time for action. Food Manufacture 74(5):
34–36.
30. Anonymous. 1999. Developments in high pressure processing. Food Reviews 26(7):
13–14.
31. Anonymous. 2000. Staying fresh under pressure. Food Quality 7(3): 50, 52.
32. Anonymous. 1996. Outbreak of Escherichia coli O157: H7 infections associated with
drinking unpasteurized commercial apple juice — British Columbia, California, Colorado
and Washington, October (1996). Morbidity Mortality Weekly Report 45(44): 975–980.
33. CE Morris. 2000. FDA regs spur non-thermal R&D. Food Engineering 72(7/8): 61–66,
68.
34. ME Parish. 1998. High pressure inactivation of Saccharomyces cerevisiae, endogenous
35. JK Goodner, RJ Braddock, and ME Parish. 1998. Inactivation of pectinesterase in
orange and grapefruit juices by high pressure. Journal of Agriculture & Food Chemis-try 46: 1997–2000.
36. TT Truong, JM Boff, DB Min, and TH Shellhammer. 2002. Effects of carbon dioxide
in high-pressure processing on pectinmethylesterase in single-strength orange juice.
Journal of Food Science 67: 3058–62.
37. J Bignon. 1996. Cold pasteurizers Hyperbar for the stabilization of fresh fruit juices.
Fruit Processing 6(2): 46–48.
38. G Donsi, G Ferrari, and M di Matteo. 1996. High pressure stabilization of orange juice:
Evaluation of the effects of process conditions. Italian Journal of Food Science 8(2):
99–106.
39. MP Cano, A Hernandez, and B de Ancos. 1997. High pressure and temperature effects
on enzyme inactivation in strawberry and orange products. Journal of Food Science 62:
85–88.
40. U Nienaber, and TH Shellhammer. 2001a. High-pressure processing of orange juice,
kinetics of pectinmethylesterase inactivation. Journal of Food Science 66: 328–31.
41. U Nienaber, and TH Shellhammer. 2001b. High-pressure processing of orange juice:
Combination treatments and a shelf life study. Journal of Food Science 66: 332–36.
42. G Post. 2000. Fresher under pressure. Non-damaging processes for fruit juices. Voed-ingsmiddelentechnologie 34(20): 35–38.
43. U Odebo. 2001. Fresher under pressure. A fully commercial ‘cold pasteurization’
method for fruit products. Fruit Processing 12(6): 220–21.
44. J Sellahewa. 2002. Shelf life extension of orange juice using high pressure processing.
Fruit Processing 12: 344–50.
45. M Morrissey. 2003. Interview published December 1 by FSNET, Director of Oregon’s
Seafood Laboratory, Astoria, OR.
46. J Serrano. 2003. Efecto de altas presiones en la microestructura de quesos, Aplicación
en el rallado de queso Cheddar para uso comercial. MSc dissertation, Querétaro, Qro.
México: Oregon State University.
55534_C007.indd 20755534_C007.indd 207 10/22/08 10:52:43 AM10/22/08 10:52:43 AM
microflora and pectinmethylesterase in orange juice. Journal of Food Safety 18: 57–65.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
208 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
47. J Serrano, G Velazquez, K Lopetcharat, JA Ramirez, and JA Torres. 2004. Effect of
moderate pressure treatments on microstructure, texture, and sensory properties of
stirred-curd Cheddar shreds. Journal of Dairy Science 87: 3172–82.
48. J Serrano, G Velazquez, K Lopetcharat, JA Ramirez, and JA Torres. 2005. Moderately
high hydrostatic pressure processing to reduce production costs of shredded cheese:
Microstructure, texture, and sensory properties of shredded milled curd cheddar. Jour-nal of Food Science 70(4): S286–93.
49. MA Torres-Mora, A Soeldner, EY Ting, ACO Hawes, GD Alemán, GS Bakski, WR
McManus, CL Hansen, and JA Torres. 1996. Early microstructure changes in Cheddar
cheese and effects of high pressure curd processing. IFT Annual Meeting, IFT Paper
no.6–2. New Orleans, LA.
50. ML Heinitz, and JM Johnson. 1998. The incidence of Listeria spp., Salmonella spp. and
51. RM Uresti, G Velazquez, JA Ramírez, M Vázquez, and JA Torres. 2004. Effect of high
pressure treatments on mechanical and functional properties of restructured products
Agriculture 84(13): 1741–49.
52. AJ Borderías, M Pérez-Mateos, and M Solas. 1997. Frozen storage of high-pressure
and heat-induced gels of blue whiting (Micromesistius poutassou) muscle: Rheological,
chemical and ultrastructure studies. Zeitschrift für Lebensmitteluntersuchung und -Forschung A 205: 335–42.
53. TC Lanier, and CM Lee. 1992. Surimi technology. New York: Marcel Dekker.
54. GM Gilleland, TC Lanier, and DD Hamann. 1997. Covalent bonding in pressure-
55. F Fernández-Martín, M Pérez-Mateos, and P Montero. 1998. Effect of pressure/Heat
combinations on blue whiting (Micromesistius poutassou) washed mince: Thermal and
mechanical properties. Journal of Agricultural and Food Chemistry 46: 3257–64.
56. JA Ramírez, R Rodríguez-Sosa, OG Morales, and M Vázquez. 2000. Surimi gels from
striped mullet (Mugil cephalus) employing microbial transglutaminase. Food Chemis-try 70: 443–49.
57. INA Ashie, TC Lanier, and GA MacDonald. 1999. Pressure-induced denaturation of
muscle proteins and its prevention by sugars and polyols. Journal of Food Science
64(5): 818–22.
58. T Arakawa, and SN Timashef. 1982a. Preferential interactions of proteins with salts in
concentrated solutions. Biochemistry 21(25): 6545–51.
59. T Arakawa, and SN Timashef. 1982b. Stabilization of protein structure by sugars. Bio-chemistry, Princeton, NJ 21(25): 6536–44.
60. JH Ahu, YR Kim, P Cornillon, J Yoon, SH Yoo, and KH Park. 2003. Cryoprotection
of protein by highly concentrated branched oligosaccharides. International Journal of Food Science and Technology 38: 553–63.
61. K Oku, H Watanabe, M Kubota, S Fukuda, M Kurimoto, Y Tsujisaka, M Komori,
Y Inoue, and M Sakurai. 2003. NMR and quantum chemical study on the OH∙π and
CH∙O interactions between trehalose and unsaturated fatty acids: Implication for the
mechanism antioxidant function of trehalose. Journal of American Chemical Society
125: 12739–48.
62. S Shimada, M Andou, N Naito, N Yamada, M Osumi, and R Hayashi. 1993. Effects
of hydrostatic pressure on the ultrastructure and leakage of internal substances in the
yeast. Saccharomyces cerevisiae. Applied Microbiology & Biotechnology 40: 123–31.
63. HM Ulmer, MG Gaenzle, and RF Vogel. 2000. Effects of high pressure on survival
and metabolic activity of Lactobacillus plantarum TW1.460. Applied Environmental Microbiology 66: 3966–73.
55534_C007.indd 20855534_C007.indd 208 10/22/08 10:52:43 AM10/22/08 10:52:43 AM
Clostridium botulinum in smoked fish and shellfish. Journal Food Protection 61: 318–23.
induced fish proteins gels. Journal of Food Science 62(4): 713–16.
from arrowtooth flounder (Atheresthes stomias). Journal of the Science of Food and
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Hydrostatic Pressure Processing of Foods 209
64. P Chilton, NS Isaacs, P Manas, and BM Mackey. 2001. Biosynthetic requirements for
the repair of membrane damage in pressure-treated Escherichia coli. International Journal of Food Microbiology 71: 101–4.
65. KJA Hauben, EY Wuytack, CCF Soontjens, and CW Michiels. 1996. High-pressure
transient sensitization of Escherichia coli to lysozyme and nisin by disruption of outer-
membrane permeability. Journal of Food Protection 59: 350–55.
66. AS Malone, TH Shellhammer, and PD Courtney. 2002. Effects of high pressure on
the viability, morphology, lysis and cell wall hydrolase activity of Lactococcus lactis
subsp. cremoris. Applied Environmental Microbiology 68: 4357–63.
67. M Ritz, M Freulet, N Orange, and M Federighi. 2000. Effects of high hydrostatic pres-
sure on membrane proteins of Salmonella typhimurium. International Journal of Food Microbiology 55: 115–19.
68. N Kalchayanand, C Frethem, P Dunne, A Sikes, and B Ray. 2002. Hydrostatic pres-
sure and bacteriocin-triggered cell wall lysis of Leuconostoc mesenteroides. Innovative Food Science & Emerging Technologies 3: 33–40.
69. M Ritz, JL Tholozan, M Federighi, and MF Pilet. 2001. Morphological and physiologi-
cal characterization of Listeria monocytogenes subjected to high hydrostatic pressure.
Applied Environmental Microbiology 67: 2240–47.
70. M Ritz, JL Tholozan, M Federighi, and MF Pilet. 2002. Physiological damages of
Listeria monocytogenes treated by high hydrostatic pressure. International Journal of Food Microbiology 79: 47–53.
71. JL Tholozan, M Ritz, F Jugiau, M Federighi, and JP Tissier. 2000. Physiological effects
of high hydrostatic pressure treatments on Listeria monocytogenes and Salmonella typhimurium. Journal of Applied Microbiology 88: 202–12.
72. PC Wouters, E Glaasker, and JPPM Smelt. 1998. Effects of high pressure on inactiva-
Environmental Microbiology 64: 509–14.
mediated outer membrane damage in Escherichia coli. Systematic Applied Microbio-logy 24: 477–85.
74. MA Casadei, P Manas, G Niven, E Needs, and BM Mackey. 2002. Role of membrane
Microbiology 68: 5965–72.
75. MF San Martin, GV Barbosa-Canovas, and BG Swanson. 2002. Food processing
by high hydrostatic pressure. Critical Reviews in Food Science and Nutrition 42(6):
627–45.
76. JPPM Smelt, JC Hellemons, PC Wouters, and SJC van Gerwen. 2002. Physiological
and mathematical aspects in setting criteria for decontamination of foods by physical
means. International Journal of Food Microbiology 78: 57–77.
77. F Moermann. 2005. High hydrostatic pressure inactivation of vegetative microorgan-
isms, aerobic and anaerobic spores in pork Marengo, a low acidic particulate food prod-
uct. Meat Science 69: 225–32.
78. A Nakayama, Y Yano, S Kobayashi, M Ishikawa, and K Sakai. 1996. Comparison of
pressure resistances of spores of six Bacillus strains with their heat resistance. Applied Environmental Microbiology 62: 3897–900.
79. CM Stewart, CP Dunne, A Sikes, and DG Hoover. 2000. Sensitivity of spores of Bacil-lus subtilis and Clostridium sporogenes PA 3679 to combinations of high hydrostatic
pressure and other processing parameters. Innovative Food Science & Emerging Tech-nologies 1(1): 49–56.
80. G Mills, R Earnshaw, and MF, Patterson.1998. Effects of high hydrostatic pressure on
Clostridium sporogenes spores. Letters Applied Microbiology 26: 227–30.
55534_C007.indd 20955534_C007.indd 209 10/22/08 10:52:44 AM10/22/08 10:52:44 AM
tion kinetics and events related to proton efflux in Lactobacillus plantarum. Applied
73. MG Gaenzle, and RF Vogel. 2001. On-line fluorescence determination of pressure
fluidity in pressure resistance of Escherichia coli NCTC 8164. Applied Environmental
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
210 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
81. DG Paredes-Sabja, M Gonzalez, MR Sarker, and JA Torres. 2007. Combined effects of
hydrostatic pressure, temperature and pH on the inactivation of spores of Clostridium perfringens Type A and Clostridium sporogenes in buffer solutions. Journal of Food Science 72: M202–M206.
82. VK Juneja, and HM Marks. 1999. Proteolytic Clostridium botulinum growth at 12–48 °C
simulating the cooling of cooked meat: Development of a predictive model. Food Microbiology 16: 583–92.
83. S Smith, and DW Schaffner. 2004. Evaluation of a Clostridium perfringens predictive
model, developed under isothermal conditions in broth, to predict growth in ground
beef during cooling. Applied Environmental Microbiology 70(5): 2728–33.
84. VK Juneja, L Huang, and HH Thippareddi. 2006. Predictive model for growth of
Clostridium perfringens in cooked cured pork. International Journal of Food Micro-biology 110(1): 85–92.
85. J Collado, A Fernandez, M Rodrigo, and A Martinez. 2006. Modelling the effect of a
heat shock and germinant concentration on spore germination of a wild strain of Bacil-lus cereus. International Journal of Food Microbiology 106(1): 85–89.
pressure on the formation of Maillard-derived key odorants and chromophores. Annals of the New York Academy of Sciences 1043: 893.
vative Food Science and Emerging Technologies 6(4): 372–88.
88. P Taoukis, and T Labuza. 1996. Summary: Integrative concepts. In: OR Fennema, edi-
tor. Food Chemistry. 3rd ed. New York: Marcel Dekker Inc., 1018–23.
volatile sulfur compounds in milk by solid-phase microextraction and gas chromatog-
90. PA Vazquez-Landaverde, G Velazquez, JA Torres, and MC Qian. 2005. Quantitative
determination of thermally derived volatile compounds in milk using solid-phase
microextraction and gas chromatography. Journal of Dairy Science 88: 3764–72.
91. AE Harvey, AP Peskin, and SA Klein.1996. NIST/ASME steam program. Physical and
Chemical Properties Div., Natl. Inst. of Standards and Technology, US. Dept. of Com-
merce, Boulder, CO.
92. E Ting, VM Balasubramaniam, and E Raghubeer. 2002. Determining thermal effects
in high-pressure processing. Food Technology 56(2): 31–56.
93. N Datta, and HC Deeth. 1999. High pressure processing of milk and dairy products.
Australian Journal of Dairy Technology 54: 41–48.
94. A Distche. 1972. Effects of pressure on the dissociation of weak acids. Symposia of the Society for Experimental Biology 26: 27–60.
95. BS El’yanov, and SD Hamann. 1975. Some quantitative relationships for ionization
reactions at high pressure. Australian Journal of Chemistry 28: 945–54.
96. DE Johnston, BA Austin, and RJ Murphy. 1992. Effects of high hydrostatic pressure on
milk. Milchwissenschaft 47: 760–63.
97. E Morild. 1981. The theory of pressure effect on enzymes. Advances in Protein Chem-istry 34: 93–165.
98. RC Neuman, W Kauzmann, and A Zipp. 1973. Pressure dependence of weak acid ioni-
zation in aqueous buffers. Journal of Physical Chemistry 77(22): 2687–91.
99. AD McNaught, and A Wilkinson. 1997. Compendium of chemical terminology: IUPAC recommendations. 2nd ed. Malden, MA: Blackwell Science.
100. D Mussa, H Ramaswamy. 1997. Ultra high pressure pasteurization of milk: Kinetics of
microbial destruction and changes in physico-chemical characteristics. Lebensmittel-Wissenschaft und -Technologie 30: 551–57.
55534_C007.indd 21055534_C007.indd 210 10/22/08 10:52:45 AM10/22/08 10:52:45 AM
87. IA Baxter, K Easton, K Schneebeli, and FB Whitfield. 2005. High pressure processing
89. PA Vazquez-Landaverde, JA Torres, and MC Qian. 2006b. Quantification of trace-
86. T Hofmann, F Deters, I Heberle, and P Schieberle. 2005. Influence of high hydrostatic
of Australian navel orange juices: Sensory analysis and volatile flavor profiling. Inno-
raphy-pulsed flame photometric detection. Journal of Dairy Science 89: 2919–27.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Hydrostatic Pressure Processing of Foods 211
101. MM Calvo, and L de la Hoz. 1992. Flavour of heated milks. A review. International Dairy Journal 2: 69–81.
102. KR Christensen, and GA Reineccius. 1992. Gas chromatographic analysis of volatile
sulfur compounds from heated milk using static headspace sampling. Journal of Dairy Science 75: 2098–104.
on the volatile compounds of milk. Journal of Agricultural and Food Chemistry 45:
3171–77.
104. RA Scanlan, R Lindsay, LM Libbey, and EA Day. 1968. Heat-induced volatile com-
pounds in milk. Journal of Dairy Science 51: 1001–7.
105. T Shibamoto, S Mihara, O Nishimura, Y Kamiya, A Aitoku, and J Hayashi. 1980. Flavor
volatiles formed by heated milk. In: G Charalambous, editor. The analysis and control of
106. S Rerkrai, IJ Jeon, and R Bassette. 1987. Effect of various direct ultra-high temperature
70: 2046–54.
107. M Rychlik, P Schieberle, and W Grosch. 1998. Compilation of odor thresholds, odor
qualities and retention indices of key food odorants. Garching, Germany: Deutsche
Forschungsanstalt fur Lebensmittelchemie and Institut fur Lebensmittelchemie der
Technischen Universitat Munchen.
108. N Datta, AJ Elliot, ML Perkins, and HC Deeth. 2002. Ultra-high-temperature (UHT)
treatment of milk: Comparison of direct and indirect modes of heating. Australian Journal of Dairy Technology 57(3): 211–27.
109. M Simon, and AP Hansen. 2001. Effect of various dairy packaging materials on the
Press.
111. G Contarini, and M Povolo. 2002. Volatile fraction of milk: Comparison between purge
and trap and solid phase microextraction techniques. Journal of Agricultural and Food Chemistry 50: 7350–55.
milk fat. Journal of Dairy Science 47: 1291–96.
113. RE Paull, and JW Armstrong. 1994. Insect pests and fresh horticultural products: Treatments and responses. Wallingfroth, UK: CAB International, United Press.
114. JL Sharp, and GI Hallman. 1994. Quarantine treatments for pests of food plants. Boul-
der, CO: Westview Press, Inc.
Journal of Food Processing and Preservation 19: 161–64
116. KC Shellie, MJ Firko, and RL Mangan. 1993. Phytotoxic response of ‘Dancy’ tangerine
the American Society of Horticultural Science 118(4): 481–85.
117. J Jaczynski, Y-C Chen, G Velazquez, and JA Torres. 2008. Procesamiento de productos
pesqueros con haz de electrones. In: I Guerrero-Legarreta, MR Rosmini, RE Arme-
neta-López, editors. Tecnología de productos de origen acuático, volumen. Tecnología de pescado y mariscos. LIMUSA, S.A. de C.V., México D.F., Mexico.
118. KK Jacobi, EA MacRae, and SE Hetherington. 2001. Postharvest heat disinfestation
treatments of mango fruit. Scienta Horticulturae 89(2001): 171–93.
119. KC Shellie, and RL Mangan.2002. Hot water immersion as a quarantine treatment for
120. DB Thomas, and KC Shellie. 2000. Heating rate and induced thermotolerance in Mexi-
Journal of Economic Entomology 93(4): 1373–79.
55534_C007.indd 21155534_C007.indd 211 10/22/08 10:52:45 AM10/22/08 10:52:45 AM
large mangoes: Artificial versus cage infestation. HortScience 37(3): 430–34.
103. G Contarini, M Povolo, R Leardi, and PM Toppino. 1997. Influence of heat treatment
less desirable flavors in foods and beverages. New York: Academic Press Inc., 260–63.
heat treatments on flavor of commercially prepared milks. Journal of Dairy Science
shelf life and flavor of ultrapasteurized milk. Journal of Dairy Science 84: 784–91.
110. G Fenaroli. 1995. Fenaroli’s handbook of flavor ingredients. 3rd ed. New York: CRC
112. JE Langler, and EA Day. 1964. Development and flavor properties of methyl ketones in
115. P Butz, and B Tauscher. 1995. Inactivation of fruit fly eggs by high pressure treatment.
to high-temperature, moist, forced-air treatment for fruit fly disinfestation. Journal of
can fruit fly (Diptera: Tephritidae) larvae, a quarantine pest of citrus and mangoes.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
212 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
121. WC Mitchell, and SH Saul. 1990. Current control methods for the Mediterranean fruit
mology 78: 923–30.
122. RV Dowell, and CJ Krass. 1992. Exotic pests pose growing problem for California.
California Agriculture 46(1): 6–8, 10–12.
123. AE Sloan. 2008. Mega markets and nasty niches. The next generation of nutraceutical
markets. Nutraceuticals World Consulted July 21, 2008 (http://www nutraceuticalsworld.
com/articles/2001/11/mega-markets-and-nasty-oniches-the-next-generations).
124. C Pérez Lamela, and JA Torres. 2008. Pressure-assisted thermal processing: 1. A prom-
Hi-Tech 19(3): 60–62.
125. C Pérez Lamela, and JA Torres. 2008. Pressure-assisted thermal processing: 2. Micro-
bial inactivation Kinetics and pressure and temperature effects on chemical changes.
AgroFOOD Industry Hi-Tech 19 (In Press).
55534_C007.indd 21255534_C007.indd 212 10/22/08 10:52:46 AM10/22/08 10:52:46 AM
fly, Ceratitis capitata, and their application in the USA. Review of Agricultural Ento-
ising future for high flavour quality and health-enhancing foods. AgroFOOD Industry
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
213
8 Pulsed Electric Field (PEF) Processing and Modeling
Si-Quan Li
CONTENTS
8.1 Introduction ................................................................................................... 213
8.2 Pulsed Electric Field (PEF) Processing Technology and Mechanisms
for Microbial Inactivation ............................................................................. 216
8.2.1 PEF Technology and Hardware Development................................... 216
8.2.1.1 Basics of PEF Technology .................................................. 216
8.2.1.1.1 Critical Components in a Typical PEF
System................................................................ 218
8.2.1.1.2 Critical Parameters Determining the
8.2.2 Mechanisms for PEF Inactivation of Microorganisms and
Enzymes ............................................................................................223
8.2.3 Modeling of PEF Inactivation of Microorganisms ............................227
8.2.4 Trends in PEF Research .................................................................... 229
8.2.4.1 Hardware Development has a Long Journey Ahead ........... 229
8.2.4.2 Application Studies of PEF Technology in the
Near Future ......................................................................... 229
8.2.4.2.1 Pasteurization of High Acid or
8.2.4.2.2 PEF Combined with Mild Heat for Shelf
Stable High Acid Food Products .......................230
8.2.4.2.3 Research and Applications in PEF Assisted
Food Processing ................................................230
8.3 Conclusions ...................................................................................................230
Nomenclature ......................................................................................................... 231
References .............................................................................................................. 231
8.1 INTRODUCTION
55534_C008.indd 21355534_C008.indd 213 10/22/08 10:12:16 AM10/22/08 10:12:16 AM
Efficacy of PEF Processing ............................... 221
Acidified Food ................................................... 229
Pulsed electric field (PEF) processing involves subjecting food products to certain
controllable pulsed electric fields to inactivate microorganisms and enzymes and to
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
214 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
PEF technology in food processing practices is improvement in product quality due
to the non-thermal characteristics of PEF. Due to the fact that only minimum amount
of heat is generated during PEF processing, food products pasteurized using PEF
compounds, such as vitamin C, vitamin B, and immunoglobulins. The non-thermal
characteristics of PEF processing also make it possible to avoid the generation of heat-
purchasing intent and higher willingness to pay more for PEF processed orange juice
than heat pasteurized orange juice, as demonstrated in an auction experiment [1]. Suc-
cessful commercial application of PEF technology in the food industry can be tracked
back to 2005 by Genesis, a juice processing company based in Oregon, USA [2].
at Oregan County Fair. As reported in the Salem Stateman Journal (August 18, 2005),
a co-owner of Genesis claimed that “I was told people were crying, though I did not
pulser) and Genesis were nominated for 2007 IFT Industrial Achievement Award to
recognize their contribution in introducing PEF technology into food industry prac-
tices. The PEF processed juices helped the company win their customers back and
In fact, the advantages of applying PEF technology in food processing practices have
attracted increasing attention since the 1960s, particularly after the mid-1990s when
demand for fresher and healthier food products with minimum processing dramati-
cally increased due to consumer’s increased awareness of the impact of diet on human
health. It has been believed that, along with increase in consumer awareness of the
role that diet plays in determining people’s health, PEF and other non-thermal food
processing technologies, such as high pressure processing will be the major trends in
food processing innovation. More and more food researchers and manufacturers will
be involved in the global effort to apply PEF in food processing practices to meet the
increasing demands of fresher and healthier food products by consumers.
PEF technology has been developed and evaluated by different walks of research-
ers since the 1960s. In 1960, a patent was issued to Doevenspeck [3] who creatively
tivation effects. In 1967, Sale and Hamilton [4,5] reported that the inactivation effects
of PEF on the selected microorganisms are highly positive and, as a result, stimulated
studies on inactivation of microorganisms by PEF, a novel non-thermal food pasteuriza-
inactivate Escherichia coli, Staphylococcus aureus, Micrococcus lysodeikticus, Sarcina lutea, Bacillus subtillus, B. cereus, B. megatherium, Clostridium welchii, Saccharo-
−1 were applied
as a series of direct current pulses from 2 to 20 μs to the suspensions of microorgan-
at 19.5 kV was 10°C. The contribution of thermal inactivation to the total inactivation
the two most important parameters responsible for the inactivation of microorganisms.
55534_C008.indd 21455534_C008.indd 214 10/22/08 10:12:17 AM10/22/08 10:12:17 AM
modify the properties of the food components. The number one benefit of applying
induced toxic compounds in food products. Consumers showed significantly higher
Genesis became the first company to introduce a PEF product in an emotional debut
see that myself”. Diversified Technologies, Inc. (DTI, the builder of the high voltage
applied uniform electric fields for inactivating microorganisms. Doevenspeck found that
the intensity of the electric fields applied onto the microbial cells have different inac-
tion. The authors reported that electric pulses of high voltage electric fields up to 25 kV
myces cerevisiae, and Candida utilis. Electrical fields up to 25 kV × cm
isms. Temperature increase during pulsed electric field treatment for ten pulses of 20 μs
observed was literally negligible. Electric field strength and the total treatment time are
technology are fresher in flavor, more nutritious and richer in heat-labile bioactive
attracted many new customers due to the significantly fresher flavor of the products.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
215
However, different cell structural properties, such as size of the cell, properties of the
tion effects by PEF. Generally cells with larger size, such as yeast and molds, are more
negative microorganisms are more sensitive to PEF treatment than Gram positive micro-
organisms. The authors argued that the inactivation is caused by the lysis of protoplasts,
and leakage of intracellular contents. Loss of β-galactosidase activity and plasmolyzing
ability in a permease-negative mutant of E. coli were observed during their experiments.
Dunn and Pearlman [6] successfully developed the required PEF apparatus and estab-
lished the protocol methodology for food PEF treatments.
In the 1990s, more researchers were attracted to studies on PEF by its potential
application as a non-thermal pasteurization alternate in food industry. Castro and his
co-workers [7] argued that PEF treated food retains ‘fresh’ physical, chemical, and
nutritional characteristics and possesses a satisfactory ambient shelf life. The intro-
duction of this new technology has the potential to provide consumers with micro-
biologically safe, minimally processed, nutritious, and fresh-like foods. The authors
suggested that high-intensity PEF is potentially the most important non-thermal
pasteurization/sterilization technology available to replace or complement thermal
Lactobacillus delbrueckii [9,10]. PEF treatment at 16 kV × cm−1 with 60 pulses at a
pulse duration ranging from 200 to 300 μs inactivates 4–5-log microbial population
ture was maintained below the lethal temperature. The results suggest that the micro-
bial inactivation effect of PEF treatment is not due to thermal effect. Stepwise PEF −1 with
pulse duration time of 2 μs was reported to be able to achieve a 9 log-cycle reduction
in microbial population [11]. Cell suspension of the samples were treated in a static
chamber and maintained at 7, 20, or 30°C and the maximum temperature change by
many other microbial inactivation experimental results have been reported [12–20].
microorganism growth stage and processing temperature on inactivation effects of
E. coli by PEF. The authors reported that at 3–40°C processing temperature, square-
wave showed higher inactivation effects on E. coli suspended in simulated milk
strength of 36 kV × cm−1. Logarithmic-phase cells were more sensitive than station-
ary and lag-phase cells. This result implies that when we treat food samples not only
effects but also the microorganisms themselves.
the introduction of the new generation of continuous, automatically controlled PEF
55534_C008.indd 21555534_C008.indd 215 10/22/08 10:12:18 AM10/22/08 10:12:18 AM
Pulsed Electric Field (PEF) Processing and Modeling
sensitive to the electric fields than their smaller peers like bacterial cells and virus. Gram
processes. Destruction of bacterial cells under high intensity electric fields is due
primarily to the field-induced rupture of cell membrane and not to ohmic heating
[8]. The premium effect of electric field strength on microbial inactivation was also
confirmed by applying PEF to cultures of E. coli, S. aureus, Bacillus subtillis, and
in model foods such as simulated milk ultrafiltrate [9]. The cell suspension tempera-
treatment on E. coli at electric field strength ranged from 35 to 75 kV × cm
each pulse, measured with a fiberoptic temperature probe, was only 0.3°C. Since then
ultrafiltrate (SMUF) than exponential decaying wave pulses at same electric field
Significant breakthrough in PEF hardware development was reported [21] with
cell membranes, growth phases of the microorganisms and influences from media in
which the cells grow are critical factors and show significant influences on the inactiva-
Pothakamury and co-workers [10] reported their studies about influences of
the PEF parameter should be counted as the influential factor for the inactivation
processing systems, OSU-4, using co-field flow chamber systems. The innovative
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
216 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
PEF system using H-bridge electronic pulse generating circuit and solid state high
speed switch devices allows researchers to treat samples continuously with accurate −1 with a treat-
ment time up to 400 μs. System adjustability in pulse duration time and delay time as
mercial scale PEF processing system were assembled at The Ohio State University,
Ohio, USA in 2001 and 2003, respectively. The up-scaled PEF processing facilities
cacy on food preservation and effects on food quality and functionalities at a level
close to food industrial practices [22,23]. The OSU-5 PEF system had a capacity of
200–500 L/h for food processing and up to 2000 L/h for waste water processing.
Increased consumer awareness of food impacts on public health has provoked
a dramatic increase in demands of functional foods and better understanding of the
functional components, particularly heat labile bioactive compounds such as vitamin
C, B and immunoglobulin G. In responding to this increased demand, studies on PEF
effects on heat labile bioactive compounds have been carried out. Compared to conven-
tional thermal pasteurization on single strength orange juice, PEF processing showed
soymilk product [25], while thermal process at the same pasteurization power caused
noglobulin G activity during a thermal process is because of the loss of the beta-sheet
secondary structure, which is needed for an IgG molecule to function normally, and
PEF does not cause any detectable change in IgG secondary structures [26]. Li and his
Although other non-thermal technologies, such as high pressure processing (HPP),
may also have some saving effects on IgG immunoactivity, PEF effects on IgG clearly
showed different mechanisms [27]. So far, PEF has been illustrated as most effective in
saving heat labile bioactive compounds and effective in microbial inactivation.
In this chapter, the development and current status of PEF technology will be
discussed and the mechanisms and modeling of the processing effects will also be
summarized. Hardware and software issues will be discussed to facilitate the under-
standing of this non-thermal technology. Potential applications in food industry and
chapter.
8.2 PULSED ELECTRIC FIELD (PEF) PROCESSING TECHNOLOGY AND MECHANISMS FOR MICROBIAL INACTIVATION
8.2.1 PEF TECHNOLOGY AND HARDWARE DEVELOPMENT
8.2.1.1 Basics of PEF Technology
PEF processing involves the application of pulses of high voltage (typically 20–80
kV × cm−1
55534_C008.indd 21655534_C008.indd 216 10/22/08 10:12:19 AM10/22/08 10:12:19 AM
temperature control. Electric field strength can be up to 50 kV × cm
evaluate the efficacy of PEF technology. Based on the design concepts employed in
OSU-4 systems and pilot scale PEF processing systems (OSU-5), world’s first com-
at The Ohio State University provided the necessary tools for evaluation of PEF effi-
significant saving on vitamin C content both right after and 6 months after processing
[24]. PEF caused no significant loss in bovine milk immunoglobulin G in an enriched
over 80% immunoglobulin G activity loss. Later studies confirmed that loss of immu-
co-workers proposed the shape factor concept to define the changes in IgG activity.
) to foods between two electrodes, in a finely controlled manner to inactivate
well as options in pulse polarity provides researchers with tremendous flexibility to
possible trends of this technology will be briefly discussed at the later part of this
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Pulsed Electric Field (PEF) Processing and Modeling 217
microorganisms and enzymes existing in food products, and/or to modify certain prop-
erties of selected food components. A typical continuous laboratory scale PEF system
is illustrated in Figure 8.1a and Figure 8.1b. PEF technology is an emerging technology
which may be used as a non-thermal alternate for conventional food pasteurization.
PEF treatment is conducted at ambient, sub-ambient or slightly above ambient tem-
perature for a very short time (typically between 30 and 200 μs). PEF processing can
be a batch process using static treatment chambers or a continuous practice with some
specially designed chamber systems (Figure 8.2). Today, pilot and commercial scale
PEF processing are continuous practices while laboratory investigation can be either a
batch or a continuous process, depending on the sample types and the purposes of the
test. Only a minimal amount of heat is generated during PEF processing, thus mini-
mizing the heat impairment on food quality [28]. Food products processed using PEF
technology may be fresher, more nutritious, with more heat sensitive physiologically
approaches [24,25,28].
PLC
Oscilloscope
Marked area A
Thermocouple
readers
Syringes
Step motors
Pulse
generator
Water bath
AA B C D
DCBA
(a)
(b)
FIGURE 8.1 OSU-4J PEF system (a) and schematic diagram of a typical lab scale OSU-4
PEF system (b).
55534_C008.indd 21755534_C008.indd 217 10/22/08 10:12:20 AM10/22/08 10:12:20 AM
bioactive components and better flavor compared to those processed by conventional
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
218 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
PEF has been under development since the 1960s but is now close to ready for
industrial practices in the food and water industry. This is due to recent develop-
ments in electronic technology and innovation in treatment chambers, such as the
mercial scale PEF food processing system was set up at The Ohio State University
in the early 21st century. Since 2005, PEF technology has found its position in fresh
juice processing companies, such as Genesis Company. PEF processed fruit and veg-
etable juices are preferred based on market research and consumer surveys as well as
realistic sales by the companies who apply PEF in their juice making practices.
8.2.1.1.1 Critical Components in a Typical PEF SystemIn a typical PEF processing system, the following subunits are critical to the overall
systematic functionality:
a. Power supplierPEF processing requires stable power supplies, particularly stable voltage supply. An
effective power supplier is always needed to provide primary power needs. However,
Chamber 1 Chamber 2 Chamber 3 Chamber 4
Gap distance
PEF zone
Sample Out
Sample In
GRD
HV
Cooling coils
Thermocouple
readers
T4
T3
T2
T1
FIGURE 8.2 pled with OSU-4 PEF system.
HV GNDGND
PEF Zones
FIGURE 8.3 ment zones.
55534_C008.indd 21855534_C008.indd 218 10/22/08 10:12:22 AM10/22/08 10:12:22 AM
safety and improving PEF efficacy. PEF technology is also seeking more applica-
tions in medicine, breeding and weed control industries. The world’s very first com-
Schematic diagram of a typical co-field flow treatment chamber system cou-
Modified co-field flow PEF chamber system with two compactly paired treat-
compactly paired co-field flow chamber system (Figure 8.3) ensuring operational
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Pulsed Electric Field (PEF) Processing and Modeling 219
on the biological targets, a set of capacitors are needed to ensure the output of electric
potential cross the paired electrodes is high enough to meet the needs of expected
b. Pulse generatorThe pulse generator includes a signal generator, pulse generating electric circuits
and solid phase high speed switching devices. A signal generator is the command-
ing device that controls the width of electric pulses, pulse replication rate, pulse
delay time and the polarity of the electric pulses. A signal generator is actually the
interface that allows operators to interfere to pulse generating process with designed
parameters. A very popular signal generator, also called a pulse generator or trig-
ger generator, is model 9310 trigger generator (Quantum Composer Inc., Bozeman,
Montana, USA), which provides lots of controlling options, internal or external, even
remote control. Although single shot mode can be used for kinetic studies using
static treatment chamber, continuous pulse mode is almost always used when PEF
A commonly used circuit is the so called H-bridge circuit (Figure 8.4) which
can produce square shaped electric pulses at high accuracy in pulse width. Currently
H-bridge circuit is widely used in PEF processing systems from lab scale to pilot and
commercial scale, such as in OSU PEF systems. The H-bridge circuit provides the
conveniences of accurate control and monitoring of pulse width, with the aids from
the solid phase high speed switching devices, such as IGBT and IGCT from Semi-
cron. IGCT devices have been successfully used in many OSU-4 PEF systems. Never-
theless, in order to build a high effective pulse generating system with high accuracy
in pulse width and intensity control, close attention is also needed to the quality of the
communication between the individual switching devices and the noise level at bus
area. Interruption of communication between the subunits and the switching devices
by the electromagnetic noise will cause the system malfunction, even crash due to
tems. Maintaining system temperature stable and close to room temperature is as
Rc
C1
U1
U3
U4U
2
Transformer
PEF chambers
V+
–
FIGURE 8.4 H-bridge electric circuits for generating square waveform pulses (Circuit dia-
gram of a laboratory-scale high voltage pulse generator (OSU-4A). Rc refers to the charging
resistor, V refers to a power supplier, and C1 refers to the capacitor. U1, U2, U3 and U4 refer to
switch 1, switch 2, switch 3 and switch 4, respectively).
55534_C008.indd 21955534_C008.indd 219 10/22/08 10:12:23 AM10/22/08 10:12:23 AM
due to the nature of high intensity of the electric fields needed for the expected effects
electric field strength.
is critical to ensure high efficiency and stable performance of pulse generating sys-
processing is in continuous flow mode.
over flow of system memory. Cooling of switching devices and the circuits connected
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
220 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
critical as the fundamental design of the system, because the switching devices will
teurization purposes. Currently both water cooling and forced air cooling are in use
in the PEF processing systems with built-in pulse generators. Interruption of com-
munication between subunits and temperature control issues are the most commonly
technical challenges encountered by users in practice.
c. Control and monitoring systemControl and monitoring subunit is critical to the overall function of the whole PEF
system. The subunit assigns each designed parameter to be carried out in an accurate
and timely manner. Both (Programmable Logistic Control) PLC and microprocessor
unit are used to accurately control the system to function normally and monitor the
performance in a timely manner. The key for a PEF control and monitoring system to
function normally is to ensure the accuracy of parameter measurement and smooth/
effective communication between the commanding system and executive units.
System noise and electromagnetic signal interruption must be minimized by all means.
One easily overlooked problem is to monitor the peak voltage as the mean to calculate
voltage at different locations, such as chamber inlet, paired electrodes, transformer
output, bus, capacitor discharge, etc., for their own convenience. However, the most
reliable location for measuring the peak output voltage is at the two paired electrodes.
The measurement error can be minimized by doing so since the system energy diffu-
sion and voltage drop from transformer to treatment chamber is avoided.
impact the normal function of the controlling and monitoring system. An effective
cooling system is needed to provide optimal temperature condition for the controlling
cooling are commonly used in many different versions of PEF equipment, depending
on the heat load generated during operation.
d. Fluid handling system
units, delivering units, receiving units and monitoring systems such as temperature
the delicately generated electric pulses meet with food products, and is the center
other subsystems serve the purpose of either generating delicately controlled electric
rate or making sure the food product passes through the treatment chamber at a uni-
the PEF treatment zone, ensuring the uniformity through every single portion of the
chamber volume.
application, and now are still in wide use for kinetic studies. The advantages of using
55534_C008.indd 22055534_C008.indd 220 10/22/08 10:12:24 AM10/22/08 10:12:24 AM
drop their efficiency and accuracy under an elevated temperature. It is particularly
important when the system is operated under higher electric field strength for pas-
the observed electric field strength. Different designers may choose to measure the
pulses at designed field strength, accurate pulse width and stable pulse replication
PEF treatment chambers were first designed in static mode used for laboratory
static chambers include the uniform distribution of electric fields in most cases, and
Attention is also needed to closely watch the temperature fluctuation which will
and monitoring system to sustain stable performance. Forced air cooling and fluid
A PEF fluid handling system includes PEF chamber system, pump(s), pressure control
monitors and flow meter (Figure 8.1b). PEF chamber system (Figure 8.2) is where
of a fluid handling system and the heart of the whole PEF processing system. All
form and stable flow mode. A well designed PEF chamber is the essence of uniform
distribution of the electric field strength and delicately controlled flow profiles in
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Pulsed Electric Field (PEF) Processing and Modeling 221
the more accurate control over pulse numbers and total PEF treatment time. Single
shot test types are also feasible using static treatment. However, with static chamber,
increasing sample temperature due to accumulated heat within the chamber is of
great concern when justifying the righteousness of a reported result, if the pulse
tices due to their limited production capacity.
potential industrial applications, such as liquid food pasteurization. There have been
many different designs in pursuit of a successful application in the food industry,
currently allows the food industry to operate PEF processing at a high production
capacity up to 2000 L⋅h−1. Further scale-up of production capacity has been on-going
since the early 2000s.
e. Aseptic packagingAseptic packaging system may not be needed in lab scale kinetic research, but is
necessary for many pilot and commercial practices. It allows the PEF processed food
products to be packaged in an aseptic mode avoiding/minimizing the post-process
PEF processing system. A Banco® aseptic packaging system, with in-line thermo-
forming of multilayer cups, adjustable in cup size, was hooked together with the
The assembly had been in successful operation for research purposes and for indus-
try plant tests.
8.2.1.1.2
on PEF inactivation effects against microorganisms. Primary parameters that deter-
trodes divided by their gap distance, L.
E V L= × –1 (8.1)
strength’ and widely accepted by different groups of researchers. However, readers
the whole treatment zone due to the nature of many different chamber designs. For
be close to ideally uniform across the whole chamber, although the distortion of
electric lines may happen at the edge of the cylinder and at the interface between
55534_C008.indd 22155534_C008.indd 221 10/22/08 10:12:25 AM10/22/08 10:12:25 AM
replication rate is too fast, a significant amount of pulses were applied during experi-
ments. Static chambers have also found themselves of difficult use in industrial prac-
ferent models of aseptic filling/packaging systems can be easily hooked up with a
world first commercial scale PEF processing system at The Ohio State University.
Critical Parameters Determining the Efficacy of PEF ProcessingTable 8.1 illustrates the primary and secondary factors that have significant impacts
mine PEF processing effects are electric field strength (E) and total (PEF) treatment
time (t). There are several different definitions regarding electric field strength, E.
The most commonly used one is so called ‘nominal average electric field strength’,
E, which is defined as the electric potential or voltage, V, cross the two paired elec-
The nominal average electric field strength is generally simplified as ‘electric field
should notice that, in many cases, electric field strength is not uniform throughout
instance, in the case of disc type static chamber design electric field strength could
However, on the other hand, continuous flow PEF chambers have found lots of
from early designs such as co-axis, co-field and co-flow types to the later co-field
flow design [29] to the recently improved compact co-field flow chamber module with
multiple chambers in a tightly packed chamber set. The co-field flow chamber system
recontamination. Thanks to its sanitary continuous flow characteristics, many dif-
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
222 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
happens at the central axis.
electric pulses. In the case multiple treatment chambers are used, total PEF treatment
time (t) during the whole process is used to anticipate the treatment effects. Total
PEF treatment time is determined by the geometry (inner diameter, d, and the gap
distance between the two paired electrodes, L) of the chamber, number of chambers
rr
food matrix. The total PEF treatment time can be calculated using Equation 8.2:
t = × × × × × ×0.25 fr2 –1rrπ τd L p n (8.2)
When monopolar pulses are used, pulse replication rate is the same as pulse fre-
quency, which is the reciprocal of toper time set in the trigger generator. However,
when bipolar pulses are used, prr is two times higher than pulse frequency, that is
p frr p2= × (8.3)
TABLE 8.1
Primary Parameters Secondary Factors
Processing temperature, T
Total PEF treatment time, t Medium pH
Ionic strength
Presence of antimicrobial agents
Pulse types: square waveform or exponential decaying waveform
Polarity of pulses: single or bipolar
Number of pulses per chamber
Pulse width, τ
Geometry characteristics of PEF chambers
Types of chambers: static or continuous
Electrode erosion status
Flow types: laminar or turbulent
Cooling application between chamber pairs
Accuracy of monitoring and controlling
Growth phase of microorganism
Species and strains of microorganisms
etc.
55534_C008.indd 22255534_C008.indd 222 10/22/08 10:12:26 AM10/22/08 10:12:26 AM
Some Important Factors Determining the Efficacy of a PEF Processing
Electric field strength, E
design, electric field strength can be significantly decreased along the radius in the
direction from edge to geometric central point. The minimal electric field strength
PEF treatment time is defined as the time when food is actually exposed to the
different phases within sample matrix. On the other hand, in the case of co-field flow
used (n), pulse width (τ), pulse replication rate (p ) and the volumetric flow rate (fr) of
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Pulsed Electric Field (PEF) Processing and Modeling 223
In general, the higher the E and t, the higher microbial and enzymatic inactivation
effects, provided the other conditions are same. It is also worth to notice that the
number of pulses per chamber, treatment temperature, chamber dimensions and
on the effects of a PEF treatment. Uniformity of PEF treatment has been one of the
biggest concerns about the application of PEF in commercial food processing. Size
or geometry of the PEF treatment chamber is another big concern in the case of PEF
system scale-up.
It is not surprising if one observes that PEF effects reported by one group are
different with that demonstrated by others due to the fact that there are so many other
factors than those well described in the report that may also affect the overall result.
cantly to the overall turned-out and requires that one pays close attention to.
Secondary factors (Table 8.1) are those that are relatively less determining com-
overall PEF effects. The importance of keeping close attention to the contribution of
secondary factors to overall PEF microbial inactivation effect, is never overstressed.
Processing temperature, medium pH, growth phase of targeted microorganisms,
availability of nutrients, presence of protecting or inhibiting components, types of
pulses (square waveform pulses—Figure 8.5a or exponential decaying waveform
pulses—Figure 8.5b), pulse number per chamber, pulse width, pulse polarity, elec-
trode erosion and geometry characteristics are commonly in the list of important
monitor the secondary factors can result in misleading conclusions.
8.2.2 MECHANISMS FOR PEF INACTIVATION OF MICROORGANISMS AND ENZYMES
The mechanisms involved in inactivation of microorganisms and enzymes have been
Although several different mechanisms have been proposed, the most well accepted
theory or mechanism is the electrical breakdown theory proposed by Zimmermann
[30]. The electrical breakdown theory, as illustrated in Figure 8.6, entails electric
is in its normal thickness. The transmembrane potential is the potential between
the electric charges distributed on the outer and inner surfaces of the membrane.
electric charges are induced on membrane surfaces along the direction of the applied
are distributed on the membrane surfaces. As a result, more compression force is
generated across the membrane due to the increased attraction between the positive
55534_C008.indd 22355534_C008.indd 223 10/22/08 10:12:27 AM10/22/08 10:12:27 AM
Other than primary parameters, there are also a group of factors contributing signifi-
pared with the primary factors, E and t, but may also show significant impact on
secondary factors and significantly affect the overall effect of PEF. Failure to closely
investigated by many researchers since PEF was first suggested for cell destruction.
deformable film with positive charges on the outer surface and negative charges on
the inner surface. When there is no external electric field applied, the cell membrane
When there is no external electric field, most microbial cells have a transmembrane
potential of approximately 10 mV. However, once an external electric field is applied,
electric field. The amount or density of induced electric charges on the surfaces is
proportional to the strength or intensity of the applied electric field. The stronger
the applied electric field, the higher the density of the induced electric charges that
pulse duration time are important parameters that may have significant influences
breakdown of cell membrane. The membrane itself is a dielectric, flexible and
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
224 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
force, the increased compression results in a thinner membrane than it used to be.
Nevertheless, although it gets much thinner, the membrane still functions normally
to such a point that the transmembrane potential reaches 1 V, at which cellular mem-
brane gets so thin that it can not hold its complete structure at the weakest textural
positions (such as ion channels, penetrating proteins, interface of different phases,
etc.), the membrane will start to form small pores or holes along the direction of the
dramatically increased due to reduction in membrane thickness and deformation in
when transmembrane potential exceeds a critical value of 1 V, membrane destruction
or irreversible membrane changes can be observed and the pores or holes grow bigger
–12000
–10000
–8000
–6000
–4000
–2000
0
2000
4000
6000
8000
10000
0 5 10 15 20
Time (µs)
(b)
(a)
Voltage (V)
–60
–40
–20
0
20
40
60
Current (A)
Voltage
Current
3.54 v–5.44 v
Ch2 period6.714 µs
Low signalamplitude
SampleTek Run: 50MS/s
1
Ch1 1 v 1 v M 1 µs Ext –440 mV 18 Jun 199909:48:59
2 *
Ch2
FIGURE 8.5 Two types of typical electric pulses: (a) square and (b) exponential decaying.
55534_C008.indd 22455534_C008.indd 224 10/22/08 10:12:27 AM10/22/08 10:12:27 AM
and the cell survives the electric stress well. Further increasing electric field strength
external electric field. At this point, membrane conductivity and permeability can be
membrane structure. Along with further increasing external electric field strength
and negative charges. Since the membrane is flexible and deformable to external
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Pulsed Electric Field (PEF) Processing and Modeling 225
and bigger. As a result, cytoplasma of the cell leak out via the induced pores, and thus
with cell suspension at 10 kV × cm−1
in microorganisms, the structural changes due to a transmembrane potential higher
than 1 V gives rise to irreversible loss of membrane function as the semi-permeable
barrier between the cell and its environment. Membrane damage is believed to be the
primary mechanism responding to the inactivation effects on cells by PEF. The cor-
relation between the effects of the pulse treatment on cell inactivity and membrane
damage, which was measured by little to no spheroblast formation (Table 8.2), sug-
gested that cell inactivation and membrane damage have a very high positive associa-
tion. This implies that membrane damage is a direct cause of cell death.
Other researchers [31–33] also suggested that when viable cells are subjected to
PEF, certain levels of transmembrane potential, depending on the cell size and the
tivation is approximately 1 V or higher, depending heavily on the different species
of microorganisms and their growth conditions. This is because different microor-
ganisms have different membrane composition and structure. Some cell membranes
membrane potential or slightly higher is the critical voltage, higher than which pores
will form inside the membrane and cause so called dielectric breakdown [30].
Cell shape is a very important factor determining the transmembrane potential
ucting
membrane, the induced potential is given by the equation:
V f r Em c= × × (8.4)
m
strength Ec, r refers to cell radius while f refers to form factor for spherical shape.
Zimmermann et al. [34] derived a mathematical equation to calculate the membrane
+++++++++
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
+
+
+
+
+
–
–
–
–
–
MediumCytoplasm
Cytoplasm
medium
Stages: a b c d
Big pores
allowing
cytoplasm
escape+++++++++
–––––––––
+++++++++
–––––––––
FIGURE 8.6 Illustration of cell membrane reversible and irreversible dielectric breakdown.
m
ical transmembrane potential, reversible breakdown; (d) large pores are formed, irreversible
dielectric breakdown. (Redrawn from U Zimmerman. 1986. Electric breakdown, electroper-
meabilization, and electrofusion. Review of Physiology, Biochemistry, and Pharmacology
105: 175–256.)
55534_C008.indd 22555534_C008.indd 225 10/22/08 10:12:28 AM10/22/08 10:12:28 AM
(a) Cell membrane with a potential V when there is no external electric field; (b) membrane
compression when cell is exposed to an external electric field; (c) small pore formation at crit-
resulting in death of the cells. Sale and Hamilton [5] first reported this phenomenon
electric field strength. The authors reported that
electric field strength, will be induced. The critical electric field strength for cell inac-
structure and not sensitive to electric field treatment. But for most cells, 1 V of trans-
induced under certain electric field. For spherical cells surrounded by non-cond
where V refers to the transmembrane potential induced by the external electric field
fluxes into
need higher transmembrane voltage to form pores since they may be less flexible in
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
226 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
potential Vm for nonspherical cells. The equation is based on the assumption that the
cell shape consists of a cylinder with two hemispheres at each end. In this case the
form factor f for rod-shaped microorganism is given by
f L= ×(1 0.33 )− d (8.5)
where L refers to the length of particle and d refers to the diameter of the cylinder.
So for rod-shaped cells the induced potential is given by:
V L d r Em1
c[ (1 0.33 ) ]= × × ×− − (8.6)
c
the cells.
So we know the critical voltage for cell inactivation is the induced transmembrane
to predict the inactivation effects after a given treatment time.
PEF inactivation effect on Lactobacillus brevis cells suspended in phosphate
buffer of pH 7.1 was consistent with the aforementioned theory [8]. The destruc-
tion of the cell membrane was primarily due to the pore formation and the increase
in the permeability of the membranes. When treated in the range of 24–80°C and
5–30 kV × cm−1, particularly when treated at 60°C and 25 kV × cm−1, an increase
in the chloride ion (Cl−) concentration was observed after PEF treatment. Most
importantly, the increase happened only in the case when L. brevis cells presented
in the test media and PEF was applied. The results suggest that the increased con-
centration of chloride ion is primarily due to the lysis of the cells, which leads to the
release of cellular matrix media—particularly those with small particle size—into
the test media.
TABLE 8.2Staphylococcus aureus Activity After PEF Treatment
Electric Field Strength (kV × cm−1) Survivors (%) Protoplasts Not Lysed (%)
0.00 100.0 100.0
9.25 100.0 100.0
14.25 35.0 43.0
19.50 0.9 16.0
24.00 0.3 3.0
27.50 0.6 1.5
on microorganisms, I. Killing of bacteria and yeast. Biochemistry and Biophysics Acta 148: 781–88.
55534_C008.indd 22655534_C008.indd 226 10/22/08 10:12:30 AM10/22/08 10:12:30 AM
Source: AJH Sale, and WA Hamilton. 1967. Effect of high electric fields
where E is external electric field strength applied, and r refers to the diameter of
potential, not the external electric field itself. However, if the processing targeted at
a same or similar shaped microorganism, external electric field strength can be used
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Pulsed Electric Field (PEF) Processing and Modeling 227
Another well-known theory is the electroporation mechanism which was pro-
posed by Vega-Mercado and co-workers [35] in 1996 (as illustrated in Figure 8.7).
The authors reported that the plasma membranes of cells exposed to external elec-
then swelling and eventually rupture of the cell membrane—as a result, the cell
died. This theory adds valuable information to better understand the lethal effect
of PEF against microorganisms. However, it was derived from the dielectric break-
down theory, which was proposed in 1986 by Zimmermann [30] and also focuses
on the formation of pores crossing cell membrane and leaching of function plasma
contents.
Readers have to be aware of the fact that, although lots of reports mention the
observation of pores formation across membranes when comparing the PEF treated
dead cells with their untreated peers, no direct evidence during PEF operation shows
that pores are actually induced and how the pores are formed by exposing microbial
mation of the pores is most likely to happen at the two polar areas of the cell along
8.2.3 MODELING OF PEF INACTIVATION OF MICROORGANISMS
Sensoy and co-workers [36] reported their kinetic studies about the inactivation
kV × cm−1
tested during the experiment. These authors raised an inactivation kinetic model to
describe the inactivation behaviors of the microbial cells upon the changes of PEF
properties. Four models were established for the calculation of survival fractions of
Pore initiation Water influx Membrane rupture
Water
Swelling Cell lysis Inactive cell
FIGURE 8.7 Electroporation mechanism proposed for PEF microbial inactivation. (From
Vega-Mercado, H., Pothakamury, U.R., Chang, F.J., Barbosa-Canovas, G.V., and Swanson,
B.G. Inactivation of Escherichia coli by combining pH, ionic strength and pulsed electric
55534_C008.indd 22755534_C008.indd 227 10/22/08 10:12:31 AM10/22/08 10:12:31 AM
Electric field
fields hurdles. Food Research International 29(2), 117–21, 1996. With permission.)
tric field became permeable to small molecules such as water. The elevated per-
cells to an external electric field. It is very challenging to pursue the direct evidence
during a PEF operation, primarily due to the high electric field strength and the for-
the electric field direction—if the pore formation process indeed happens.
of Salmonella dublin by PEF. The authors used an electric field strength of 15–40
sity pulsed electric field treatment system. The medium temperature of 10–50°C were
missibility of cellular membranes to small molecules caused the influx of water
and treatment time of 12–127 microseconds in a co-field flow high inten-
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
228 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
time (model 3 and 4).
Model 1. s E E K= − −( )× −e c c 1
(8.7)
–1), Ec is –1), kc is constant factor (kV × cm–1).
Model 2 is Peleg’s [37] model in the form of:
Model 2. s E E k= + −( )1 1/ { }
[ / ]e c e (8.8)
where
k t k kt
e e( ) = e01 (8.9)
E t E kt
c c0e( ) = − 2 (8.10)
–1), Ec –1), kc, ke0, Ec0, k1(μs–1), k2 (μs–1) are constant
factors.
Model 3. s t t k= e c( )/− t (8.11)
where s is survival fraction, t is total treatment time (μs), tc is critical treatment time
(μs), kt is a constant factor (μs).
Model 4 was suggested by Hulsheger and co-workers [32] as shown in the
following model
Model 4. s t tE E k= × − −( ) ′
{ }/
cc1
(8.12)
where s is the survival fraction, t is the total treatment time, tc is critical treatment –1), Ec is the critical electric
–1) for the targeted microorganisms, k′ is a constant factor
(kV × cm–1).
All these models were developed to explain the relationship between cell sur-
two critical PEF processing parameters. On the other hand, however, cell shape is
also a very important factor needs to be concerned when we think about microbial
inactivation by PEF technology.
The above-mentioned microbial inactivation models were also applied to practical
research activities in enzyme inactivation. Min, Jin and Zhang [22] reported that all
the four models can be used for prediction of inactivation of lipoxygenase in tomato
juice by PEF with reasonable accuracy. Similarly, Yang and his colleagues [38] applied
these mathematic models to describe the characteristics of pepsin inactivation by PEF
the mechanisms for microbial inactivation and those for enzyme inactivation, the
55534_C008.indd 22855534_C008.indd 228 10/22/08 10:12:33 AM10/22/08 10:12:33 AM
the treated cells based on the electric field strength (model 1 and 2) and total treatment
where s is survival fraction, E is applied electric field strength (kV × cm
critical electric field strength (kV × cm
where s is the survival fraction, E is the applied electric field strength (kV × cm
is critical electric field strength (kV × cm
time, E is the applied electric field strength (kV × cm
field strength (kV × cm
vival fraction or ratio and electric field strength or the treatment time, which are the
using a lab scale continuous system. Although significant differences exist between
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Pulsed Electric Field (PEF) Processing and Modeling 229
authors demonstrated that these mathematic models are useful tools for predictions
of enzymes PEF inactivation. However, the authors didn’t discuss the phenomena in
details and failed to infer it to a more general tool for broader application.
8.2.4 TRENDS IN PEF RESEARCH
8.2.4.1 Hardware Development has a Long Journey Ahead
It is always challenging, exciting and a must-do to continue further hardware devel-
opment to improve the production capacity and system reliability for PEF facili-
ties. It can be foreseen that scientists and engineers will strive to further modify
the designs of PEF systems, particularly the high voltage pulse generator (pulser),
chamber systems and monitoring and controlling subunits. Along with innovation
capacitors and more capable high speed switching devices will be available to allow
electric current in switching devices also sustains the desired performance of the
system and avoids the necessity for over-current shut-down, which can jeopardize
the smoothness of process and compromise the safety of end food products. The
reduced chance of system protective shut-down from higher tolerance to electric cur-
rent also greatly helps improve PEF processing reliability, which is still questionable
for most current PEF systems.
Another major hardware development effort will be in the area of improvement
of current PEF treatment chamber systems. Although there are numerous patents
more uniform treatment and more reliable system behavior. One of the major limita-
tions preventing PEF technology from industrial practice is the current small inner
diameter in treatment chambers, limited by the overall system electric current toler-
ance, particularly with products with large particles or high viscosity. Efforts will
also be invested to redesign current chamber geometry, although it will be extremely
and expected to be under better control by using electrically inert materials or with
innovative compensation technologies.
Monitoring of actual temperature inside a PEF treatment zone is very challeng-
sample temperature before and after PEF treatment zone with a distance for safety
ment in temperature monitoring is also needed for better understanding of PEF inac-
tivation of microorganisms and enzymes in food matrix.
8.2.4.2 Application Studies of PEF Technology in the Near Future
8.2.4.2.1
PEF will continue to focus on applications in high acid food processing. Fruit juices,
55534_C008.indd 22955534_C008.indd 229 10/22/08 10:12:34 AM10/22/08 10:12:34 AM
and new development in electronic and semiconductor technology, more efficient
engineers to design PEF systems for higher electric field strength with high toler-
and different designs in efforts for efficient and reliable treatment chamber systems,
it still remains as one of the most difficult challenges for higher production capacity,
difficult, for uniform electric field distribution. Electrode erosion will be investigated
ing due to the high intensity of applied electric fields. The current method measures
purpose and to avoid possible interruption from operating PEF. Significant improve-
Pasteurization of High Acid or Acidified FoodPEF first found its commercial application in juice processing. In the near future,
ance in electric current flowing through the treatment chambers. High tolerance of
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
230 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
and carbonated ones are suitable for PEF pasteurization. PEF can be combined
together with other treatments to use as part of an innovative hurdle technology to
applications in medical and other biological industries, such as enzyme manufactur-
8.2.4.2.2 PEF Combined with Mild Heat for Shelf Stable High Acid Food Products
PEF is not effective in inactivating bacterial spores. PEF alone is not able to pro-
cess for shelf stable food products, even for high acidic foods. However, when com-
bined with a mild heat treatment, PEF processing can successfully result in a model
salad dressing shelf stable at room temperature for over a year without growth of
requires dramatically higher temperature and much longer holding time to achieve
shelf stable samples. The same phenomenon was observed in freshly made ranch
salad dressing. The promising future of this combined process of PEF paired with
a mild heat treatment will attract more researchers and manufacturers to explore in
a broader scope of application for shelf stable high food products, because of the
8.2.4.2.3 Research and Applications in PEF Assisted Food ProcessingAnother big area in the near future would be PEF assisted food processing. Preliminary
rate of sugar from sugar beets, and juice yield rate from diced fruit. PEF treatment also
helps remove unwanted components from food materials. It was also reported that PEF
treatment also improved the texture of gluten in bread dough. The research provides
ening processing time, and to increase yield rate. The selective inactivation of PEF pro-
cessing to microorganisms and proteins provides tremendous opportunities to apply it
into many high value or value-added applications. It is reasonable to believe this will
be an intensively investigated area in the near future.
8.3 CONCLUSIONS
PEF technology is a non-thermal or minimal heat alternate for conventional pasteur-
willing to pay more than the conventionally made products. This means a bigger
market share for manufacturers who apply PEF technology in their practices. On
the other hand, with more heat-labile bioactive compounds such as vitamin C and
tion, particularly pumpable high acid foods, via a mechanism named cell membrane
dielectric breakdown. The proposed mathematic models, Hulsheger, Fermi and other
55534_C008.indd 23055534_C008.indd 230 10/22/08 10:12:35 AM10/22/08 10:12:35 AM
vegetable juices with acidification and high acid beverages including low alcoholic
improve food safety with enhanced quality attributes. PEF may also find successful
ing and purification.
microorganisms and no significant quality changes [23]. Using heat treatment alone
studies show that low intensity PEF treatment can significantly increase the production
solid foundation for one to consider the benefits of PEF pre-treatment to facilitate a
chemical process, to improve production efficacy, to reduce processing cost by short-
of the processed food products attracts more customers with significant numbers
IgG, the more health benefits consumers can get from consumption of such products.
More importantly, PEF is an effective and efficient technology for food pasteuriza-
advantages of significantly improved flavors.
ization to improve the quality attributes, including fresher flavor profile and more
heat-labile functional compounds, of processed food products. The fresher flavor
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Pulsed Electric Field (PEF) Processing and Modeling 231
tion of microbial pasteurization, even enzyme inactivation by PEF. However, PEF is
a complicated system consisting of many subsystems including power supplier, pulse
tem, and aseptic packaging system. To make things more complicated, while electric
are lots of secondary parameters, such as pH, ion strength, processing temperature,
to the overall microbial inactivation effect by PEF. There are still a long journey
ahead for PEF research and development, particularly in hardware development, to
improve the production capacity and system reliability, before this technology can be
widely commercialized in the food industry. The bright side of PEF also includes the
strong potential that it can be used for many other processing purposes such as PEF
assisted processing. Its bright future will stimulate the research activities in the area
and attract more and more capable researchers around the world.
NOMENCLATURE
E . −1
t Total PEF treatment time, μs3.s−1
prr Pulse replication rate, s−1
f Form factor, m2
Vm Transmembrane potential, volts
Ec . −1
kc Constant factor, kV.cm−1
ke0, Ec0 Constant factors, kV.cm−1
k1 Constant factor, μs−1
k2 Constant factor, μs−1
tc Critical treatment time, μs
kt Constant factor, μs
k′ Constant factor, kV × cm−1
REFERENCES
1. WS Chern, N Kaneko, G Babadogan Tarakcioglu, and QH Zhang. 2003. Consumer
acceptance of PEF-processed orange juice: Results from an auction experiment. IFT
Annual Meeting. Chicago, IL, July 12–16.
Inc., and Genesis Juice Corp. p 35. Program and Exhibit Directory. IFT 2007 Annual
Meeting and Food Expo. Chicago, USA. July 28–August 1.
3. H Doevenspeck. 1960. Verfahren und vorrichtung zur gewinnung der einzelnen phasen
nus dispersen systemen. German Patent 1,237,541.
Killing of bacteria and yeast. Biochemistry and Biophysics Acta 148: 781–88.
icroorganisms.
Biochemistry and Biophysics Acta 148: 37–43.
55534_C008.indd 23155534_C008.indd 231 10/22/08 10:12:35 AM10/22/08 10:12:35 AM
modified ones, can fit well with the experimental results and can be used for predic-
field strength and total PEF treatment time are the two critical parameters, there
growth phase and nutrient conditions of microbes, etc. contributing significantly
Nominal or average electric field strength, kVcm
critical electric field strength, kVcm
2. Anon. 2007. Food Technology Industrial Achievement Award: Diversified T echnologies
4. AJH Sale, and WA Hamilton. 1967. Effect of high electric fields on microorganisms, I.
5. AJH Sale, and WA Hamilton. 1967. Effectives of high electric fields on m
generator, chamber systems, fluid handling system, controlling and monitoring sys-
fr Volume flow rate, cm
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
232 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
6. JE Dunne, and JS Pearlman. 1987. Methods and apparatus of extending the shelf life of
7. AJ Castro, GV Barbosa-Canovas, and BG Swanson. 1993. Microbial inactivation of
8. S Jayaram, GSP Castle, and A Pargaritis. 1992. Kinetics of sterilization of Lactobacillus brevis cells by the application of high voltage pulses. Biotechnology and Bioengineer-ing 40: 1412–20.
9. UR Pothakamury, A Monsalve-Gonzalez, GV Barbosa-Canovas, and BG Swanson.
1995. Inactivation of Escherichia coli and Staphylococcus aureus by pulsed electric
10. UR Pothakamury, H Vega, QH Zhang, GV Barbosa-Canovas, and BG Swanson. 1996.
Effect of growth stages and processing temperature on the inactivation of E. coli by
11. Q Zhang, BL Qin, GV Barbosa-Canovas, and BG Swanson. 1994. Inactivation of
Journal of Food Processing and Preservation 19: 103–18.
12. Q Zhang, GV Barbosa-Canovas, and BG Swanson. 1994. Engineering aspects of pulsed
13. Q Zhang, A Monsalve-Gonzalez, B Qin, GV Barbosa-Canovas, and BG Swanson.
Inactivation of Sacchromyces cerevisiae by square wave and exponential-decay pulsed
14. Q Zhang, FJ Chang, GV Barbosa-Canovas, and BG Swanson. 1994. Inactivation of
Science and Technology (LWT) 27: 538–43.
15. Q Zhang, A Monsalve-Gonzalez, GB Barbosa-Canovas, and BG Swanson. 1994. Inac-
ture conditions. Transaction ASAE 37: 581–87.
16. GA Evrendilek, QH Zhang, and ER Richter. 1999. Inactivation of Escherichia coli
Food Protection 62(7): 793–96.
17. B Qin, UR Pothakamury, H Vega, O Martin, GV Barbosa-Cannovas, and BG Swanson.
49(12): 55–60.
18. LD Reina, ZT Jin, QH Zhang, and AE Yousef. 1998. Inactivation of Listeria monocy-
extension of microbial shelf life stability of enriched soymilk. Journal of Food Science
69(7): M169–74.
ld processing of a
highly carbonated beverage: Microbial, sensory and quality analyses. Journal of Food Science 69(8): M228–232.
21. X Qiu, S Li, and QH Zhang. 1999. Design and construction of a bench scale automatic
PEF units of OSU-4 series. IFT Annual Meeting. Chicago, IL. July.
of tomato juice. Journal of Agricultural and Food Chemistry 51(11): 3338–44.
23. SQ Li, QH Zhang, TZ Jin, EJ Turek, and MH Lau. 2005. Elimination of Lactobacillus
with mild heat and achievement of shelf stability at room temperature. Innovative Food Science and Emerging Technologies 6(2): 125–33.
24. HW Yeom, CB Streaker, QH Zhang, and DB Min. 2000. Effects of pulsed electric
of Agricultural and Food Chemistry 48(10): 4597–605.
55534_C008.indd 23255534_C008.indd 232 10/22/08 10:12:36 AM10/22/08 10:12:36 AM
foods by pulsed electric fields. Journal of Food Processing and Preservation 17: 47–73.
field technology. Food Research International 28(2): 167–71.
pulsed electric field. Journal of Food Protection 59(11): 1167–71.
E. coli for food pasteurization by high-intensity short-duration pulsed electric fields.
electric field pasteurization. Journal of Food Engineering 25: 268–81.
electric field. Journal of Food Processing Engineering 17: 469–78.
microorganisms in semisolid foods using high voltage pulsed electric fields. Food
tivation of E. coli and S. cerevisiae by pulsed electric fields under controlled tempera-
O157: H7 and Escherichia coli 8739 in apple juice by pulsed electric fields. Journal of
1995. Food pasteurization using high-intensity pulsed electric fields. Food Technology
togenes in milk by pulsed electric fields. Journal of Food Protection 61(9): 1203–6.
19. SQ Li, and QH Zhang. 2004. Inactivation of E. coli 8739 by pulsed electric fields and
20. GA Evrendilek, S Li, WR Dantzer, and QH Zhang. Pulsed electric fie
22. S Min, ZT Jin, and QH Zhang. 2003. Commercial scale pulsed electric field processing
plantarum in model ranch salad dressing by pilot scale pulsed electric fields combined
fields on the quality of orange juice and comparison with heat pasteurization. Journal
fluid food products. U.S. Pat. 4,695,472.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Pulsed Electric Field (PEF) Processing and Modeling 233
thermal processing on the stability of bovine Immunoglobulin G (IgG) in enriched
soymilk. Journal of Food Science 68(4): 1201–7.
ment on the secondary structure of Bovine Immunoglobulin G. Journal of Agricultural and Food Chemistry 53(3): 663–70.
27. SQ Li, QH Zhang, VM Balasubramaniam, YZ Lee, JA Bomser, SJ Schwartz, and CP
Dunne. 2006. Comparison of effects of high pressure processing and heat treatment
on immunoactivity of bovine milk immunoglobulin G in the enriched soymilk under
equivalent microbial inactivation levels. Journal of Agricultural and Food Chemistry
54(3): 739–46.
PEF. Palo Alto, CA. Electric Power Research Institute. CR-109742.
chambers for the preservation of liquid food products. U.S. Patent 5690,978.
30. U Zimmerman. 1986. Electric breakdown, electropermeabilization, and electrofusion.
Review of Physiology, Biochemistry, and Pharmacology 105: 175–256.
31. HP Schwan. 1977. Field interaction with biological matter. Annual New York Academic Sciences 303: 198–216.
32. H Hulsheger, J Potel, and EG Niemann. 1981. Killing of bacteria with electric pulses of
33. DS Liu, RD Astumian, and TY Tsong. 1990. Activation of Na+ and K+ pumping
istry 265(13): 7260–67.
34. Zimmermann U, Pilwat G, and Riemann F. 1974. Dielectric breakdown of cells mem-
branes. Biophysical Journal 14: 881–99.
35. H Vega-Mercado, UR Pothakamury, FJ Chang, GV Barbosa-Canovas, and BG Swan-
son. 1996. Inactivation of Escherichia coli by combining pH, ionic strength and pulsed
36. I Sensoy, QH Zhang, and SK Sastry. 1997. Inactivation kinetics of Salmonella Dublin
Journal of Sciences of Food and Agriculture 67: 93–99.
of enzymes in aqueous solution. Journal of Food Science 69(4): C241–48.
55534_C008.indd 23355534_C008.indd 233 10/22/08 10:12:37 AM10/22/08 10:12:37 AM
25. SQ Li, QH Zhang, YZ Lee, and TV Pham. 2003. Effects of pulsed electric fields and
26. SQ Li, JA. Bomser, and QH Zhang. 2005. Effects of pulsed electric fields or heat treat-
28. DW Quass. 1997. Pulsed electric field processing in food industry. A status report on
29. Y Yin, QH Zhang, and SK Sastry. 1997. High voltage pulsed electric field treatment
high electric field strength. Radiation and Environmental Biophysics 20: 53–65.
modes of (Na, K)-ATPase by an oscillating electric field. Journal of Biological Chem-
electric fields hurdles. Food Research International 29(2): 117–21.
by pulsed electric field. Journal of Food Processing Engineering 20: 367–81.
37. M Peleg. 1995. A model of microbial survival after exposure to pulsed electric fields.
38. R Yang, SQ Li, and QH Zhang. 2004. Effects of pulsed electric fields on the activities
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
235
9 Fouling Models for Heat Exchangers
Sundar Balsubramanian, Virendra M. Puri, and Soojin Jun
CONTENTS
9.1 Introduction ................................................................................................... 235
9.2 Fouling Mechanism ...................................................................................... 238
9.2.1 Hydrodynamic and Thermodynamic Models ................................... 239
9.2.1.1 One-Dimensional Models ................................................... 239
9.2.1.2 Two-Dimensional Models ................................................... 243
9.2.1.3 Three-Dimensional Models ................................................245
9.2.2 Dynamic Fouling Model Incorporating
Physio-Chemical Changes ................................................................. 247
9.2.2.1 One Phase Approach ........................................................... 247
9.2.2.2 Two Phase Approach ...........................................................248
9.2.2.3 Three and Four Phase Approaches .....................................250
9.2.3 Cleaning and Economic Models .......................................................254
9.3 Concluding Remarks ..................................................................................... 257
References .............................................................................................................. 258
9.1 INTRODUCTION
One of the most critical and widely used unit operations in the food processing
of heat utilization through heat recycling and better heat transfer. During heat treat-
ment the food products undergo structural and chemical changes. Owing to changes
occurring in the food product some of the constituents like proteins and minerals
ment surface. These deposits are generally referred to as foulants and this phenom-
enon of deposition of food constituents on the equipment surface is termed fouling.
It has been documented in the literature that deposition of fouling layers on the
surface of the food processing equipment results in:
1. Increase in electrical and thermal energy usages due to the decrease in heat
2. Increase in pressure drop across the heat exchanger unit thereby lowering
the overall system performance.
55534_C009.indd 23555534_C009.indd 235 10/22/08 10:13:54 AM10/22/08 10:13:54 AM
industry is thermal treatment. Heat exchangers offer an effective and efficient means
precipitate resulting in film-like deposits which adhere to the food processing equip-
transfer coefficient.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
236 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
3. Additional increase in the use of electrical and thermal energies and water
usage due to the increase in the frequency and duration of cleaning opera-
tions to remove foulants.
Economically, fouling is a burden to the food industry. In the USA, the total costs
of fouling have been estimated to be $7 billion [1]. This includes the costs incurred
due to cleaning of the equipment, loss of production, additional energy consump-
tion, and over-sizing of the heat exchanger unit. The impact of fouling is so severe
that it is estimated that the total fouling costs equates to about 0.25% of the gross
national product of a developed country such as the USA [2]. In the dairy industry
alone fouling accounts for about 80% of the total operating costs involved [3]. Spe-
or redundant equipment, additional downtime for maintenance and repair, loss of
production, cleaning equipment and waste of energy [4,5]. With such a high impact
on the total operating costs, there is a need to minimize or delay the process of foul-
ing of the equipment surface thus prolonging the operation of the equipment and
conserve energy. In dairy industries it is a common practice to shut down the plate
heat exchanger (PHE) operation at least once a day in order to clean the equipment
[6]. The frequent interruptions during processing due to fouling causes extended
plant operation while lowering the desired output. Cleaning the foulants is also a
time consuming and energy intensive process that consumes a substantial amount
of water and chemicals. A typical dairy processing plant handling 75,000 gallons of
milk per day could use up to 110 million gallons of water per year [7]. Rebello et al.
[8] estimates that water (23.9%) and cleaning agents (7.5%) were the top contributors
towards the cleaning costs incurred during removal of foulants. Once the cleaning
ner further adds to the cost of production. Hence, prolonging the operation of the
equipment down-time, thus translating into increased production.
The exact mechanisms and underlying chemical reactions that result in fouling
is still not well understood. However, it has been widely believed that the denatura-
tion of the protein β-lactoglobulin plays a critical role in the fouling process during
dairy processing. The temperature and pH of the product aid in the unfolding of
the protein chain. Once the protein chains unfold, they form aggregates and get
adsorbed on the walls of the contact surface. Subsequently, calcium and phosphate
ions precipitate and add to the layers of adsorbed protein aggregates. This results
in a solid layer spread over the food equipment surface resulting in fouling. The
food processing equipment surface also plays an important role in fouling. Visser
and Jeurnink [9] have listed some of the factors pertaining to the food processing
following conditions that relate to fouling in stainless steel surfaces:
1. Presence of an additional covering layer like chromium oxide that inhibits
corrosion and oxidation of the stainless steel.
during manufacture dictate the nature of the surface charge.
55534_C009.indd 23655534_C009.indd 236 10/22/08 10:13:55 AM10/22/08 10:13:55 AM
cifically, the costs incurred due to fouling includes increased cost due to oversized
heat exchanger unit by reducing the rate of fouling could be beneficial in reducing
2. Surface charge; the cleaning process and the industrial finishing conditions
process is completed, disposal of the effluents in an environmentally friendly man-
equipment surface that have an influence on the fouling process. They observed the
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Fouling Models for Heat Exchangers 237
3. Surface energy or in other words, the degree of hydrophobicity.
4. Micro structure of the surface like surface roughness.
5. Presence of residual proteins, microbes, and other contaminants which
were left behind during the earlier processing operations.
6. Type of steel used.
position, location of fouling, operating condition of the heat exchanger and the type
and characteristics of the heat exchanger. While processing milk, factors such as
pH, age of the milk, protein composition, calcium ions present, pre-chilling of milk
24 hours prior to thermal processing, whether the milk is reconstituted or not, and
fouling observed [3].
Two types of fouling deposits have been documented depending on the process
temperatures during dairy processing. At lower processing temperatures (between
75°C and 105°C) the foulants are predominantly proteins [9]. These deposits, i.e.
type A, are soft and bulky [10] containing about 50–60% protein (mostly β-lac-
toglobulin in milk), 30–50% minerals (like calcium and phosphate), and about 4–8%
fat [9]. The type B fouling occurs at temperatures above 100°C and has a hard,
granular structure. These deposits comprise mostly of minerals (about 70–80%),
followed by proteins (15–20%) and fat (4–8%). Table 9.1 summarizes the fouling
deposit characteristics obtained during type A and B fouling [11]. Thus, essentially
during fouling two processes take place: calcium phosphate deposition (mineral
fouling or crystallization fouling) and protein fouling (or chemical reaction fouling).
Both these processes follow different kinetics. Fouling deposits from a range of food
products, including milk [12,13], orange juice [14] and tomato juice [15], have been
studied. In particular, fouling during milk processing has been extensively studied
TABLE 9.1Characteristics of Type A and Type B Fouling Deposit Formed During Heating of MilkDeposit Content Type A Type B
Mineral content (%) 30–40 70–80
Protein content (%) 50–70 10–20
Fat content (%) 4–8 4–8
Temperature of occurrence (°C) 75–110 > 110
Color of deposit White/cream Grey/brown
Characteristics of the deposit Soft, curd like and voluminous Hard, brittle and granular
Type of protein and minerals present β-LG, calcium, phosphate β-casein, α-S1 casein, calcium,
phosphate
Source: From Prakash, S., Datta, N., and Deeth, H.C. Methods of detecting fouling caused by heating of
milk. Food Reviews International 21, 267–93, 2005. With permission.
55534_C009.indd 23755534_C009.indd 237 10/22/08 10:13:55 AM10/22/08 10:13:55 AM
Other factors that have an influence on the fouling process are the product com-
seasonal variations are some of the factors that have an influence on the extent of
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
238 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
owing to the importance of thermal processing in the dairy industry. There are vari-
ous factors that contribute to the fouling process during processing; similar to these
mentioned previously for milk. These include, the product composition, tempera-
ture, pH, surface geometry of the processing equipment, presence of air bubbles,
plate corrugation are some of the known critical factors that impact the fouling rate.
To develop fouling models in order to simulate and predict the fouling mechanism
useful in building reliable models that can shed light on the fouling occurring in
surface can be taken into account thus developing models that could closely analyze
model that can closely predict the fouling behaviour under various operating con-
processing conditions. Operating under the best processing conditions will ensure a
balance between safely processed foods and prolonged equipment operation (due to
less fouling). Therefore, this chapter reviews the work to date by various researchers
to develop an optimum fouling model for the fouling mechanisms that occur in heat
exchangers with particular emphasis on plate heat exchangers.
9.2 FOULING MECHANISM
ing mechanism that leads to the fouling formation on the equipment surface. There
are two main schools of thought regarding the fouling process. One thought is that
the fouling process is a bulk-controlled homogenous reaction process independent
of mass transfer or a surface reaction process [9]. The other line of thought is that
thermal boundary layer. The aggregated proteins formed then adhere to the equip-
ment surface and the deposition of the protein is proportional to the concentration
of the aggregated protein in the thermal boundary layer. Fouling models have been
derived based on these assumptions. Once the fouling takes place, the deposit layer
removal of the deposits [3].
There has been extensive research conducted on the fouling in milk process-
ing equipment. However, the exact mechanism of fouling is not fully understood.
It has been agreed upon that when milk is heated, the native protein β-Lg (β-Lac-
toglobulin) chain denatures and exposes the protein molecules containing reactive
sulphhydryl (-SH) groups. These reactive groups from the unfolded (or denatured)
protein react with similar or other milk proteins like casein and α-La (α-lactal-
bumin) to form aggregates. It is here that the fouling mechanism becomes debat-
layer and others believe that it is the aggregated proteins that are involved in form-
ing the fouling layer. Hence, researchers modeling the fouling mechanism follow
55534_C009.indd 23855534_C009.indd 238 10/22/08 10:13:56 AM10/22/08 10:13:56 AM
different food equipment surfaces. With the advent of improvements in the field of
In order to model the fouling process it is imperative to first understand the underly-
able by researchers. Some believe that the denatured proteins form the first fouling
and the mixing intensity which is dependent on both the fluid flow rate and the
accurately is a challenge owing to the various factors that influence the process.
However, a thorough understanding of the chemistry and fluid mechanics are very
computational fluid dynamics (CFD) the detailed geometry of the heat exchanger
the interactions between processing surface geometry and fluid flow. An optimum
ditions like temperature, residence time, and flow rate will help in optimizing the
mass transfer takes place between the bulk fluid containing the proteins and the
is subjected to hydrodynamic forces from the moving fluids resulting in possible
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Fouling Models for Heat Exchangers 239
different assumptions. There is literature dealing with modeling assuming that only
the aggregated proteins resulted in fouling [16] and others based on the assumption
that the aggregated proteins are not involved in the fouling process [17]. Yet another
group of researchers believe that the fouling process is due to both the denatured
and aggregated proteins [18,19]. Hence, there are various fouling models proposed
in literature pertaining to different starting assumptions. This results in the ambi-
guity of the actual fouling mechanism during thermal processing of food products.
There also have been attempts made to model the protein adsorption onto stainless
steel surfaces in conjunction with Langmuir-type adsorption isotherms. However,
this approach is disputed by some researchers who believe that the Langmuir-type
9.2.1 HYDRODYNAMIC AND THERMODYNAMIC MODELS
To completely understand the problem of fouling that occurs in heat exchangers, it is
essential to understand the relationship between fouling and the hydrodynamic and
are hence very keen in developing fouling models that can predict the performance
of heat exchangers. It has to be mentioned that most of the research activities related
to heat exchangers have been performed by engineers in auto, aerospace and chemi-
cal industries. Comparatively, fewer studies have been found in the food-processing
area. Hence, we have included some key studies in the non-food industry areas with
our current study on fouling modeling.
9.2.1.1 One-Dimensional Models
exchangers was experimentally and theoretically discussed by Rene et al. [21]. An
experimental model was developed by them that could predict the temperature pro-
This is of particular importance owing to the change in rheological and physical
properties of foods due to changes in temperature. Most studies have been limited
to numerical analysis or analytical formulation of the steady state behaviour in heat
exchangers including multi-stream or multi-channel heat exchangers. However, in
real life conditions heat exchanger systems always undergo transients resulting from
external load variations and regulations. Including the effect of transients in the pro-
The transient response of a multi-pass PHE was studied and a model based on
from shell-and-tube heat exchangers because of the phase lag at the entry and the
studies have been extended to include the phase lag effect in multi pass PHE units.
55534_C009.indd 23955534_C009.indd 239 10/22/08 10:13:56 AM10/22/08 10:13:56 AM
adsorption isotherms will not be an ideal fit for biopolymers [20].
files inside each channel of the PHE. The developed model defined the calorific fac-
posed models is expected to lead to significant enhancements in the food industry.
thermodynamic flow patterns occurring within the heat exchanger. Food engineers
The thermal processing of non-Newtonian food fluids in continuous plate heat
tor which was used to estimate the calorific temperatures of the cold and hot fluids.
the axial heat dispersion in the fluid was developed [22]. This model took into con-
sideration the deviation from ideal plug flow. The fluid flows in PHEs are different
successive channels. The phase lag increases with increase in number of flow chan-
nels because of decrease in fluid velocity in the port. In multi-pass PHE this delay
further increases due to fluid mixing. Studies have analyzed single-pass PHEs with
axial dispersion in fluid taking care of the phase lag effect at the port [23]. The
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
240 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
passes.
Certain assumptions need to be made prior to developing a one-dimensional
model for fouling in PHEs. The following assumptions have been made during the
developments of a one dimensional fouling model [22,24,25].
plate width.
ii. Heat transfer only takes place between channels and not between channels
and ports or through the seals and gaskets.
sure and temperature.
v. The loss of heat to the environment is negligible. Negligible radiation heat
losses are encountered.
of solid plate Figure 9.1, the energy balance over these control volumes taking into
tions related to the channel and plate [26]:
g CpTt
vTx
U Ti i ii
ii
i iρ ∂∂
∂∂c c
c cp+
⎛⎝⎜⎜⎜
⎞⎠⎟⎟⎟= −( ( 11 2) )+ −T Ti ip c (9.1)
Channel
i–1
Channel
iChannel
i+1
vi
Tci
Plate
iPlate
i–1T
pi
Fluid control
volume
x
Δx
FIGURE 9.1
55534_C009.indd 24055534_C009.indd 240 10/22/08 10:13:57 AM10/22/08 10:13:57 AM
The developed algorithms also took into consideration the mixing of fluids between
i. The flow rate and temperature profiles are uniform across the channel and
iii. The thermal and physical properties of the fluids are not dependent on pres-
iv. Each fluid is split equally between all related channels. In other words, the
same volume of fluid flows across each channel meant for that particular
fluid type.
vi. The flow cross-sectional area of each channel is the same.
vii. There is uniform flow distribution within each channel giving a ‘plug flow’
of fluid inside each channel.
Considering a small control volume of fluid inside the channel and a control volume
account the above mentioned assumptions gives rise to the following fluid flow equa-
One dimensional view of control volume of fluid inside the PHE channel.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Fouling Models for Heat Exchangers 241
δ ρ ∂∂p p p
pc c pi i i
ii i iCp
T
tU T T T
⎡
⎣⎢⎢
⎤
⎦⎥⎥= + −+( ( )1 2 ii ) (9.2)
cith channel formed
between plate i and i + 1; Tpi = temperature of ithci
th channel; Cppi
in ithci
thpi
th plate; gi = gap
between plates i and i + 1; δpi = thickness of ith plate; Ui = overall heat transfer coef-th
The above Equations (9.1) and (9.2) were derived based on the fundamental
energy conservation law and describe the energy transfer between a channel and its
Neighboring plates.
less numbers such as Nusselt number (Nu), Reynolds number (Re) and the Prandtl
number (Pr). The Re and Pr numbers are related to the Nu number by the following
Equation [27,28];
Nu 0.214 (Re 3.2)Pr0.662 0.4= − (9.3)
where the Re and Pr numbers can be derived from the following relationships;
Re , ,= = =ρ
μvD p
kgi
eePr
CD
μ2 (9.4)
e
lated using the relation,
Nue=
hDk
(9.5)
T
1 1 1
U h h k= + +
hot cold
p
p
δ (9.6)
where hhot cold = con-
p
vity of the plate.
Another dimensionless quantity of major importance during fouling modeling
is the Biot number. Due to the deposition of foulants on the heat exchanger surface,
the heat transfer rate changes. The rate of deposition of the foulants is related to the
concentration of the aggregated proteins present in the thermal boundary layer (CA* ).
The Biot number is used to express the rate of change of heat transfer due to fouling
55534_C009.indd 24155534_C009.indd 241 10/22/08 10:13:58 AM10/22/08 10:13:58 AM
plate; Cp = specific heat at con-
ficient in the i
The overall heat transfer coefficient (U) can be calculated using the dimension-
From the Nu number, the convective heat transfer coefficient (h) can be calcu-
he overall heat transfer coefficient (U) can now be calculated by;
where t = time; x = axial position; T = temperature of fluid in i
stant pressure of fluid in i = specific heat at constant pressure of fluid
plate; ρ = fluid density in i channel; ρ = fluid density in i
channel; v = average fluid velocity which can be positive or negative
depending upon the direction of flow.
where k = thermal conductivity of the fluid; h = convective heat transfer coefficient;
μ = viscosity of the fluid; and D = equivalent diameter.
= convective heat transfer coefficient of the hot fluid stream; hvective heat transfer coefficient of the cold fluid stream; and k = thermal conducti-
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
242 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
and is related to the rate of deposition of the aggregated proteins by the following
expression [26]:
∂∂
β ∗Bim A
tk C= (9.7)
e m A∗
centration of aggregated protein in the thermal boundary layer.
under fouling condition, Uf, are related by the Equation
UU
fBi
=+
0
1 (9.8)
e 0
are considered to be important in the design of heat exchangers by engineers. A foul-
ing model which is able to predict the fouling thickness, Biot number and bulk milk
temperature in relation to time and position within a triple tube heat exchanger has
been proposed and demonstrated to be effective [29]. This model could be extended
for other heat exchangers.
and to the terminal block. Thus, the equations for these two channels for a PHE
having N plates can be written as follows [30]:
g CpTt
vTx
U T T1 1 11 1
1 1 1ρ ∂∂
∂∂c
c cp c+
⎛⎝⎜⎜⎜
⎞⎠⎟⎟⎟= −( )) ( )+ −∞ ∞U T Tc1 (9.9)
g CpTt
vTx
U TN N cNN N
N Nρ ∂∂
∂∂
c cp+
⎛⎝⎜⎜⎜
⎞⎠⎟⎟⎟= −( ( )1 −− + −∞ ∞T U T TN Nc c) ( ) (9.10)
1 1 1
U h h k∞= + +
hot cold
b
b
δ (9.11)
where kb = thermal conductivity of the front and back terminal blocks of the PHE;
δb = thickness of the front and back terminal blocks of the PHE; and T∞ = ambient
temperature.
One of the useful measurements used for modeling of fouling which helps to
drop. The drawback of using one-dimensional hydrodynamic model for modeling
the performance of PHE during fouling is that this model cannot be used to estimate
vide an estimate of the milk temperature along the plate height. The estimated tem-
perature distributions of the product at various locations along the height of the plate
provided curvatures in the isotherms. The results obtained from this model fueled
interest in the development of two-dimensional and three-dimensional models for
55534_C009.indd 24255534_C009.indd 242 10/22/08 10:13:59 AM10/22/08 10:13:59 AM
wh re Bi = Biot number; β = constant; k = mass transfer coefficient; and C = con-
It can be shown that the Biot number and the overall heat transfer coefficient
wh re, U is the heat transfer coefficient under no fouling conditions. Biot numbers
characterize the geometrical changes in the corrugated plate profiles is the pressure
A quadratic temperature profile model has been developed [31] that could pro-
The first and last channel in a PHE transfers heat to one adjacent fluid channel
the pressure drop varying across the PHE because of over simplified flow streams.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Fouling Models for Heat Exchangers 243
studying the hydrodynamic performance of heat exchangers. Models have also been
developed to estimate the temperature in each channel in the PHE [28]. These empir-
ical models were based on the steady state simulation of PHEs. Simulation results
from these models show an average deviation of about 4.9% from actual experimen-
tal results when the outlet temperatures were compared.
9.2.1.2 Two-Dimensional Models
The equations obtained for one-dimensional models can be expanded to form
directions. In order to compute the two-dimensional models incorporating the veloc-
be solved. The assumptions made in the case of two-dimensional modeling are that
by Kays [32] include the continuity and momentum equations as given below:
Continuity equation: ∂∂
∂∂
ux
vy
+ = 0 (9.12)
x-momentum: ∂∂
∂∂
∂∂ ρ
∂∂
ϑ ∂∂
∂∂
ut
uux
vuy
Px
ux
uy
+ + = − + +⎡
⎣⎢⎢
1 2
2
2
2
⎤⎤
⎦⎥⎥ (9.13)
y-momentum: ∂∂
∂∂
∂∂ ρ
∂∂
ϑ ∂∂
∂∂
vt
uvx
vvy
Py
vx
vy
+ + = − + +⎡
⎣⎢⎢
1 2
2
2
2
⎤⎤
⎦⎥⎥ (9.14)
where ϑ = kinematic viscosity; ρ = density; P = pressure; t = time; u = velocity
component in the x direction; and v = velocity component in the y direction.
noted by Ozisik [33] which is essentially an extension of Equation 9.1 and Equation
9.2 are given as follows:
g CpTt
uTx
vTy
i i ii
ii
iiρ ∂
∂∂∂
∂∂c c
c c c+ +⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟= + −−U T T Ti i i i( )( )p p c1 2 (9.15)
δ ρ ∂∂p p p
pc c pi i i
ii i iCp
T
tU T T T
⎡
⎣⎢⎢
⎤
⎦⎥⎥= + −+( ( )1 2 ii ) (9.16)
involved than solving one-dimensional model equations. To simplify the proc-
the momentum equations. A vorticity-stream function approach applicable to
55534_C009.indd 24355534_C009.indd 243 10/22/08 10:14:00 AM10/22/08 10:14:00 AM
and plate, respectively, and have been defined previously.
two-dimensional models by considering the velocity vectors of the flow in x and y
ity and pressure distribution of the flow, the Navier–Stokes (N–S) equations have to
the plate surface is flat and smooth. The two-dimensional N–S flow equation given
The transient energy equation for a two dimensional incompressible flow as
where subscripts i, i + 1, i − 1, c and p refer to the plate i, plate i + 1, plate i − 1, fluid
The solving of the flow equations for the two-dimensional model is much more
ess of solving two-dimensional model flow equations, it is essential to transform
the flow equations into a simpler form by eliminating the pressure terms between
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
244 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
ity vector and streamline functions for a two-dimensional Cartesian coordinate
simpler form.
The vorticity vector is given by:
ω ∂∂
∂∂
= −vx
uy
(9.17)
and the streamline function (ψ) for the velocity vectors, u and v is given by:
∂ψ∂
∂ψ∂y
ux
v= = −, (9.18)
From Equation 9.17 and Equation 9.18, the vorticity vector can be transformed into
the following relationship
∂ ψ∂
∂ ψ∂
ω2
2
2
2x y+ = − (9.19)
From t
to the continuity equation (Equation 9.12). Transformation of the dependent vari-
ables from ‘u, v’ to ‘ω, ψ’ is applied to Equation 9.13 and Equation 9.14 to obtain a
relationship for the vorticity (ω) upon elimination of the pressure term. This trans-
formation leads to the following relationship:
∂ω∂
∂ω∂
∂ω∂
ϑ ∂ ω∂
∂ ω∂t
ux
vy x y
+ + = +⎡
⎣⎢⎢
⎤
⎦⎥⎥
2
2
2
2 (9.20)
One can obtain a differential equation for the pressure term from the momentum
equations. The pressure term can be shown to be a function of the velocity vectors
and the density by the following relation:
∂∂
∂∂
ρ ∂∂
∂∂
∂∂
∂∂
2
2
2
22
Px
Py
ux
vy
uy
vx
+ = −⎡
⎣⎢⎢
⎤
⎦⎥⎥ (9.21)
Reducing this equation by including the streamline function (ψ) the differential
equation for the pressure term can be given by:
∂∂
∂∂
ρ ∂∂
∂∂
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
22
Px
Py x y
+ =⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟⎛
⎝⎜ψ ψ⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟−
⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟
⎡
⎣
⎢⎢⎢
⎤
⎦
⎥⎥⎥
∂∂ ∂
2 2
ψx y
(9.22)
s
mined if the stream line function is known. Jun et al. [30] have noted that by using
the one-dimensional model for predicting the temperatures at various zones on the
55534_C009.indd 24455534_C009.indd 244 10/22/08 10:14:03 AM10/22/08 10:14:03 AM
two-dimensional modeling is usually used [33]. This approach defines the vortic-
he streamline function definition it is obvious that the relationship is identical
U ing finite-difference approximation and Gauss-Seidel iterative solver, the pres-
system and use these terms to transform the two-dimensional flow equations to a
sure distribution at various locations on a grid for the entire flow field can be deter-
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Fouling Models for Heat Exchangers 245
plate large prediction errors (up to 43.2%) were observed. With the use of the two-
dimensional model they observed good agreement of the predicted temperatures
with the experimental temperatures. The average percentage deviation between the
predicted and measured temperature values observed by them was about 6.2%. Since
etry the error observed during prediction could be due to the fact that the actual plate
two-dimensional model was superior in predicting the temperatures across the plate
surface when compared to the one-dimensional model, an interesting fact observed
by the authors [30] was that both the models performed identical while estimat-
tures at various locations on the plate surface fairly accurately the two-dimensional
model could be used as an effective tool to gain information on possible milk fouling
sites. The one dimensional model lacks this potential when compared with the two-
dimensional model. Hence, the two-dimensional model is better suited for studies on
fouling behavior and control than the one-dimensional model.
Regarding the pressure drop, there are various components which contribute
toward the drop in pressure observed in a heat exchanger. Drop in pressure due
are the major contributing components for the pressure drop observed in a heat
exchanger [34]. Out of these factors the pressure drop due to friction is the largest
contributor. This term can be calculated using the relation:
ΔPfm L
D=
4
2
2
ρ h
(9.23)
area; L = plate length; and Dh = hydraulic diameter, which is usually twice the plate
spacing.
The value for the friction factor for a Chevron plate which is the common type
of plate design used in plate heat exchangers in the food processing area can be
obtained from the correlations given by Shah and Focke [35]:
f x y= −Re (9.24)
The values for x and y can be obtained from the published literature [35].
9.2.1.3 Three-Dimensional Models
The use of three-dimensional models to study the fouling behavior in PHE was aided
with the advent of advanced computer software packages. Numerical simulations of
Patankar [37] called the Semi-Implicit Method for Pressure-Linked Equation Revised
(SIMPLER) algorithm was used to numerically solve the governing equations for
continuity, momentum and energy iteratively. The results of the study showed the
55534_C009.indd 24555534_C009.indd 245 10/22/08 10:14:05 AM10/22/08 10:14:05 AM
Chevron plates was first reported in the late 1990s [36]. An algorithm proposed by
the two-dimensional model was based on the assumption of a flat plate surface geom-
geometry was not flat and had a corrugated surface geometry. The plate corrugations
guide the fluid flow to distribute evenly across the whole plate area. Though the
ing the average energy balance of mass flow. By being able to predict the tempera-
to friction, changes in velocity, changes in direction of flow and changes in height
where ΔP = pressure drop; f = friction factor; m = mass flow rate per cross sectional
the turbulent, three-dimensional fluid and heat transfer flow between two parallel
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
246 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
only one channel to study the fouling behaviour will not give a true picture of the
actual fouling process that occurs in multi-channel and multi-pass PHE systems.
of milk between two corrugated plates was studied by Grijspeerdt et al. [38] using
CFD (Computational Fluid Dynamics). The three-dimensional calculations showed
culations. This clearly showed the limitations of two-dimensional calculations for
temperature regions. These regions of elevated temperatures are potential fouling
locations on the plate surface. Eliminating such occurrence is essential to minimiz-
models have immense potential in optimizing the design of plates for heat exchang-
ers. So far the CFD based studies on fouling behavior have been concentrated towards
cal and chemical aspects into three-dimensional model studies of fouling behavior
for various food products will go a long way in better understanding the process of
fouling, and thus, help in better design of control strategies to minimize fouling. For
this, the denaturation of β-LG and its relation to wall adhesion needs to be critically
examined and incorporated in the three-dimensional model. This is in fact not an
easy task and adds to the complexity of three-dimensional model calculations.
the continuity and momentum equations by extending the two-dimensional model
which was described in detail earlier.
∂∂
∂∂
∂∂
ux
vy
wz
+ + = 0 (9.25)
The equations for the momentum in the x, y and z directions are now described by
the following Equations:
x-momentum: ∂∂
∂∂
∂∂
∂∂
∂∂
∂∂
∂∂
ut
uux
vuy
wuz
Px
ux
u+ + + = − + +
1 2
2
2
ρϑ
yyu
z2
2
2+
⎡
⎣⎢⎢
⎤
⎦⎥⎥
∂∂
(9.26)
y-momentum: ∂∂
∂∂
∂∂
∂∂
∂∂
∂∂
∂∂
vt
uvx
vvy
wvz
Py
vx
v+ + + = − + +
1 2
2
2
ρϑ
yyv
z2
2
2+
⎡
⎣⎢⎢
⎤
⎦⎥⎥
∂∂
(9.27)
z-momentum: ∂∂
∂∂
∂∂
∂∂
∂∂
∂∂
∂∂
wt
uwx
vwy
wwz
Pz
wx
w+ + + = − + +
1 2
2
2
ρϑ
yyw
z2
2
2+
⎡
⎣⎢⎢
⎤
⎦⎥⎥
∂∂
(9.28)
wh
55534_C009.indd 24655534_C009.indd 246 10/22/08 10:14:06 AM10/22/08 10:14:06 AM
potential of using finite element analysis to have a better understanding of the foul-
designing new plate configurations that could reduce fouling. The three-dimensional
ing fouling and that could be done by better plate configuration design. Thus CFD
The continuity equation in this case is defined by
ing phenomenon occurring between a flow channel. However, the results from using
A detailed two-dimensional and three-dimensional study on the flow pattern
the virtual flow velocity fields which were not possible using two-dimensional cal-
calculations help to identify regions of turbulent backflows that could cause elevated
the thermodynamic and hydrodynamic aspects of fluid flow. Incorporating the physi-
The flow equations describing the three-dimensional model can be derived from
ere w is the velocity component of the flow in the z direction.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Fouling Models for Heat Exchangers 247
be written as [39]:
∂∂
∂∂
∂∂
∂∂ ρ
∂∂
∂∂
∂Tt
uTx
vTy
wTz
kC
Tx
Ty
+ + + = + +p
2
2
2
2
2TTz∂ 2
⎡
⎣⎢⎢
⎤
⎦⎥⎥ (9.29)
stituting the thermal diffusivity term α = k/ρCp. The thermal diffusivity is the ratio
of the thermal conductivity to the volumetric heat capacity of a substance. Hence, the
Equation can now be written as
∂∂
∂∂
∂∂
∂∂
∂∂
∂∂
∂∂
Tt
uTx
vTy
wTz
Tx
Ty
Tz
+ + + = + +α2
2
2
2
2
22
⎡
⎣⎢⎢
⎤
⎦⎥⎥ (9.30)
Using the above three-dimensional model and coupling it with a CFD software
package FLUENT (Fluent Inc., NH, USA), Jun and Puri [39] studied the fouling
behavior in a PHE system. The three-dimensional model incorporated the surface
This gives the three-dimensional model an advantage over the two-dimensional
model in which a detailed study of the fouling behavior on the PHE surface can be
carried out. Results from the three-dimensional study can be utilized for designing
with a two-dimensional model.
9.2.2 DYNAMIC FOULING MODEL INCORPORATING PHYSIO-CHEMICAL CHANGES
The dynamic fouling model was developed based on the fact that fouling is essen-
tially a transient process. In the beginning the heat exchanger starts clean and slowly
with change in time the foulants build-up in the equipment. With this in mind the
dynamic fouling model was approached under various phases of fouling. Some of
the models just took into account the protein denaturation occurring, while others
took into account the induction period also.
9.2.2.1 One Phase Approach
As discussed earlier, to obtain a comprehensive model that includes the hydrody-
namic and thermodynamic factors of fouling with the physical and chemical con-
tributing factors of fouling it is imperative to understand the protein denaturation
process. The dynamic fouling models study the denaturation of β-LG and its rela-
tionship to the fouling observed.
of 13 plates. They developed a model that can predict the amount of native β-LG at
the outlet of the PHE. The model was tested by simulating the amount of denatured
proteins which was determined based on the steady state conditions and the numeri-
denatured β-LG was then compared with the actual amount obtained from experi-
ments through measurements using immunodiffusion methods. From the developed
55534_C009.indd 24755534_C009.indd 247 10/22/08 10:14:07 AM10/22/08 10:14:07 AM
configuration of the PHE which was not possible with the two-dimensional model.
new surface configurations that can help in minimizing fouling. This is not possible
cal determination of temperature profile for each channel. The simulated quantity of
For a three-dimensional incompressible flow the transient energy equation can
where T is the temperature of the fluid. The above Equation can be simplified by sub-
Delplace et al. [40] studied the complex flow arrangements in a PHE consisting
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
248 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
model they could predict the native β-LG at the outlet of the PHE with an experi-
mental error of less than 10%.
The model for predicting the β-LG was given by
C tCkC t
( ) =+
0
01 (9.31)
For T ≤ 363.15 K, log k = 37.95 – 14.51 (103/T).
For T ≥ 363.15 K, log k = 5.98 – 2.86 (103/T).
where C is the β-LG concentration, C0 is the initial β-LG concentration, k is the sec-
ond order rate constant, t is the time, and T is the temperature. Similar models have
been developed to predict the amount of dry mass deposited based on the steady
of β-LG protein [6,40]. Some of these models were found to be suitable for online
applications.
9.2.2.2 Two Phase Approach
The two phase approach was based on the observation that there may be an induction
phase prior to the actual fouling phase. During the induction period the conditions
the fouling period begins resulting in increased pressure drop and decreased heat
ing period consists of a deposition and removal process. The difference between the
rates of deposition and removal of deposits constitutes a simple model that explains
the rate of build up of deposit on a surface.
d
dD R
mt
= −θ θ (9.32)
e D R
area for the deposition and removal periods. This simple model forms the basis of the
local fouling factor model. Fryer and Slater [41] have suggested a generalized equa-
tion for the fouling deposition process based on the above Equation 9.32:
dBi
de Bid r
fi
tk k
E
R T= −−⎡
⎣⎢⎢
⎤
⎦⎥⎥
1
(9.33)
where kd and kr are, respectively, the rate constants for the deposition and removal
expressed in s − 1. Tfi is the temperature (oC) at the interface of the fouling deposit and
priately to include various factors relevant to fouling such as chemical reaction,
relation result in linear (constant rate), falling rate or asymptotic fouling growth
55534_C009.indd 24855534_C009.indd 248 10/22/08 10:14:08 AM10/22/08 10:14:08 AM
state conditions, predicted temperature profiles and the amount of heat denaturation
of pressure and temperature do not change significantly. These later change when
transfer coefficients. Most models developed deal with the fouling period. The foul-
The general equation described above (Equation 9.32) can be modified appro-
wh re m is the mass deposited, θ and θ are the mass flow rates per unit surface
the process fluid.
mass transfer, fluid shear, and bond resistance. The models developed using this
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Fouling Models for Heat Exchangers 249
models (Figure 9.2). The falling rate and constant rate fouling phenomenon is mostly
observed in food processing applications [42]. Constant rate fouling leads to rapid
of calcium sulfate scale deposition on heat transfer surfaces a falling rate of fouling
locations of the heated surface which was determined numerically, the CaSO4 scale
formation rate was not uniform. The assumption made in this study was that there
was no removal of scaling occurring. However, models for CaSO4 fouling including
the removal term have been developed earlier [46]. This model took into account
the rate of particulate fouling, rate of crystallization and the rate of removal of the
deposits. The rates of crystallization and particulate fouling together constitute the
rate of deposition of CaSO4 on the heated surface. The particulate fouling term was
determined taking into account the physical mechanism for particle transport and
adherence. The crystallization term was estimated based upon the ionic diffusion
deposit properties. This model also took into account both linear and asymptotic
fouling conditions.́
In general, two phenomena occur during fouling; heterogeneous nucleation and
crystal growth. Heterogeneous nucleation refers to the nuclei formation on any for-
eign body, just as in the case of heat exchanger surface. The heterogeneous nuclea-
tion can be calculated using the term [44]:
H BNV
R T SN = −
⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟
’exp(ln )
16
3
2 3
3 3 2
π σm
i
(9.34)
where B′ is the pre-exponential factor, N is the Avagadro’s number, Vm is the molar
i
solid–liquid interface temperature, and S is the supersaturation. A low energy sur-
face (having high contact angle) will require higher supersaturation for nucleation to
cation techniques like those that use coatings to alter the surface roughness can help
Induction
period
Fouling
period
Linear fouling
Falling rate fouling
Asymptotic fouling
Time
Fouling
resistance
FIGURE 9.2 Fouling curves.
55534_C009.indd 24955534_C009.indd 249 10/22/08 10:14:09 AM10/22/08 10:14:09 AM
decrease in the heat transfer coefficient. This leads to rapid increase in pressure
volume, σ is the specific interfacial energy, R is the universal gas constant, T is the
occur than for a surface with high energy (having low contact angle). Surface modifi-
drop and blockage of the passage of fluid flow due to the foulants [43]. In the study
growth model was observed [44,45]. Owing to the non-uniform heat flux at various
and the removal term was estimated based upon the hydrodynamics of flow and
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
250 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
in delaying the nucleation occurrence by altering the surface energy [47]. The super-
saturation can be expressed as the ratio of the bulk concentration (cb) to the saturation
concentration (cs). The cs value is calculated from the solubility curve for the particular
the Ti value.
Once the nucleation occurs, the crystallization begins and the fouling layers
begin to form. There are various models that explain crystal growth. For example in
the absence of any removal term, the rate of deposit growth on a heat transfer surface
due to crystallization can be expressed as [48]:
d
d r
b s
r
mt k
c ck
=⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟+ − −
⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠β β β1
2
1
4( ) ⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟ +
⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟ −
⎧⎨⎪⎪
⎩⎪⎪
⎫⎬⎪⎪
⎭⎪⎪
⎡ 2βk
c cr
b s( )
⎣⎣
⎢⎢⎢⎢
⎤
⎦
⎥⎥⎥⎥ (9.35)
T r
from the Sherwood number,
Sh Sch= +
⎛⎝⎜⎜⎜
⎞⎠⎟⎟⎟0 023 1
60 8 0 33. Re . . dx
(9.36)
where Sc is the Schmidt number and dh is the hydraulic diameter at position x. The
Sherwood number is given by:
Shh=
βαd
where α is the thermal diffusivity of the ions.
9.2.2.3 Three and Four Phase Approaches
The above discussed models deal with bulk-controlled homogeneous reaction proc-
esses. In contrast, the three and four phase model deals with surface reaction proc-
ess. This model deals with the varying protein characteristics during denaturation;
native, unfolded, aggregated, and deposited [9]. Usually the three and four phase
approaches go hand-in-hand, because once the protein aggregates are formed, the
fourth phase, i.e. the attachment of the aggregated protein to the contact surface
occurs. A mathematical fouling model where both the surface and bulk reactions
are considered has been proposed in the 1990s [49]. The foundation of this model
was the consideration of the denaturation of β-LG protein as a series of consecutive
reaction kinetics involving unfolding and aggregation. The model can be stated as
follows:
N ↔ U → A (9.37)
The terms N, U and A stand for the native, unfolded and aggregated β-LG protein,
respectively. It can be seen that from the model there is some unfolded protein being
converted back into the native state.
55534_C009.indd 25055534_C009.indd 250 10/22/08 10:14:10 AM10/22/08 10:14:10 AM
salt followed by curve-fitting techniques to obtain a standard equation in relation to
he term k is the rate constant, and the mass transfer coefficient β can be obtained
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Fouling Models for Heat Exchangers 251
The rate of disappearance and formation of these protein phases are given by the
relation [18,19]:
− = −d
d
NU N
aN U
bCt
k C k C (9.38)
d
d
UU N
aN U
bA U
cCt
k C k C k C= − − (9.39)
d
d
AA U
cCt
k C= (9.40)
e
reaction. The orders of the reaction vary according to the assumptions made and
the process condition like temperature of denaturation, and also the product being
processed [19,50]. Hence, the values of the orders of the reaction (a, b, c) are not
always the same. For example; Chen et al. [19] considered the orders of the reaction
values of a, b, and c to be respectively, 1, 0, and 2.
If the β-LG protein denaturation process is modeled considering the entire proc-
ess to be irreversible, i.e. no unfolded protein is converted back into its native state,
then Equation 9.36 can be written as:
N → U → A (9.41)
This approach means that all of the native proteins get unfolded and immediately
get converted to its aggregated state. The rate of disappearance and formation of the
different protein states can then be written as:
− =d
d
NU N
aCt
k C (9.42)
d
d
UU N
aA U
cCt
k C k C= − (9.43)
d
d
AA U
cCt
k C= (9.44)
The main mechanism in the fouling process of skim milk is a reaction-controlled
adsorption of the unfolded β-LG protein [39]:
F k CR D U= 1 2. (9.45)
where FR is the fouling rate and D is the deposited β-LG protein. The rate constants
are denoted by kU, kN, kA and kD, and are dependent on the temperature, T as given
by the Arrhenius law:
k An n
E
RTn
=−
e (9.46)
55534_C009.indd 25155534_C009.indd 251 10/22/08 10:14:11 AM10/22/08 10:14:11 AM
wh re C is the protein concentration. The suffix a, b, c, pertain to the orders of the
to be a = 1, b = 1, and c = 2. Jun and Puri [39] have described a simplified model with
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
252 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
where An is the Arrhenius constant, and E is the activation energy for n = U, N, A,
and D and R is the universal gas constant.
Attempts have been made to use the developed models for protein denatur-
ation in conjunction with a process model and cost predictive model to optimize
the process of PHE operation in relation to the desired product quality and safety
[51,52]. It is interesting to note that Grijspeerdt et al. [53] mention that the aggregated
reacted with the milk constituents (M) to form aggregated milk constituents (D).
These aggregated milk constituents were later adsorbed to the heat exchanger wall
(D*) causing fouling. Their reaction scheme was as follows:
N → U (9.47)
2U → A (9.48)
U D DM+⎯→⎯ → ∗ (9.49)
It should be mentioned that the models studied by de Jong [10,51,52] mainly dealt
with the fouling caused by β-LG. Fouling can also be caused by the precipitation
of minerals. The mechanics and nature of mineral fouling is different from that of
protein fouling. The underlying mechanism of mineral fouling is more complex than
protein fouling and this could be the reason of why this phenomenon has been least
studied in detail. Other probable reasons for this phenomenon of fouling getting
lesser attention than protein fouling is that the mineral foulants being less volumi-
nous in occurrence than protein fouling could have a lesser impact on the pressure
layer is known to be proteinaceous in nature. In milk calcium phosphate is the major
mineral component which constitutes the mineral deposits in the fouling process.
Calcium phosphate fouling predominantly occurs at higher temperatures (tempera-
tures greater than 100oC) than protein fouling and the reason of this occurrence
is because calcium phosphate is less soluble at higher temperatures resulting in its
precipitation. The fouling caused by calcium phosphate involves the competition
between different types of reactions involving calcium phosphate, the contact sur-
actual mechanism of calcium phosphate fouling is complex to understand and has
not been fully understood, Visser and Jeurnink [9] have postulated a possible path-
way for the fouling mechanism. According to them, as a pre-cursor to the fouling
phate complex. This complex is transformed to amorphous calcium phosphate (ACP)
and is subsequently converted to hydroxyapatite (HAP) after going through another
phase change, which involves the formation of octa-calcium phosphate (OCP). The
phosphate fouling and is accompanied by an increase in solution turbidity, indicating
that this process might be taking place in the bulk liquid. Due to the formation of
insoluble calcium phosphate this process is generally accompanied by a decrease in
pH [56]. This explains the complex nature of the mineral fouling mechanism.
55534_C009.indd 25255534_C009.indd 252 10/22/08 10:14:12 AM10/22/08 10:14:12 AM
β-LG played a less significant role in the fouling process, while the unfolded β-LG
drop and thermal resistance encountered during the fouling process. Also, the first
phenomenon, the calcium and phosphate ions first form a colloidal calcium phos-
final product formed, namely HAP is the thermodynamically stable form of calcium
face, the solvent and any other solute present in the fluid system [54,55]. Though the
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Fouling Models for Heat Exchangers 253
The model proposed by Petermeier et al. [57] follows a slightly different pathway
than the model proposed by de Jong (Equations 9.46 through 9.48) [51,52]. Accord-
ing to their model the pathway for β-LG denaturation is given by:
− =d
d
NU N
Ct
k C (9.50)
d
d
UU N A U D U
Ct
k C k C k C= − −2 (9.51)
d
d
AA U
Ct
k C= 2 (9.52)
d
d
DD U
Ct
k C= (9.53)
The above pathway for protein denaturation and deposit formation indicates that
some of the unfolded β-LG protein gets lost due to the deposition process (Equa-
tion 9.50).
A more comprehensive model has been developed that takes into account the
assumption that for each protein present, mass transfer takes place between the bulk
and thermal boundary layer [58]. But it is the aggregated proteins that can adhere to
the wall in such a way that the amount of deposit is proportional to the concentra-
tion of aggregated protein in the thermal boundary layer. Figure 9.3 and Figure 9.4
this model is an extension of the models proposed by de Jong et al. [51]. The key
assumptions followed while developing this model are as follows:
are then transformed by a second order reaction to form aggregated proteins.
ii. For each protein present whether it is N, U, or A, mass transfer takes place
between the bulk and thermal boundary layer.
iii. Only the aggregated protein is deposited on the wall.
iv. The thickness of the deposit dictates the magnitude of the fouling resis-
tance to heat transfer.
A major difference between the models proposed by de Jong [51] and Toyoda and
Fryer [58] is that in the former case the main mechanism of fouling was believed to
be due to the reaction-controlled adsorption of unfolded β-LG; while in the latter
case the fouling deposit on the walls was assumed to be only due to the aggregated
proteins. Most of the models proposed have been validated with experimental data.
tions and relationships between minerals and denaturation of milk proteins. Such
a model will be more suitable for real world conditions. However, to date due to
the complexity of forming a model that can relate to all the fundamental reactions
55534_C009.indd 25355534_C009.indd 253 10/22/08 10:14:13 AM10/22/08 10:14:13 AM
Unfolded proteins are formed by a first order reaction from native proteins and
It would be beneficial to have a comprehensive model that can encompass the reac-
schematically represent the flow and reaction model dynamics proposed. Basically
i. Proteins react in both the bulk and thermal boundary layer in fluid milk.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
254 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
that give rise to fouling, it is not possible to point out which fouling model is more
suitable for real world conditions from the impressive array of proposed models.
Also, it is imperative to channel the collective knowledge and wealth of information
available from past research experiences to dwell upon a threshold value of mineral
amount that will accelerate the fouling process and how controlling the bulk tem-
perature can control this mineral precipitation.
9.2.3 CLEANING AND ECONOMIC MODELS
Cleaning of the fouled deposits has been a major concern for food processors as
Channel i
Plate
i–1
Plate
i
y
Δx
Height
Width
y
x
FIGURE 9.3
N* U*
UN A
A*
Reaction
Mass transfer
Adhesion
Thermal
boundary
layer
Wall
FIGURE 9.4 Protein reaction scheme for milk fouling. (From Georgiadis, M.C., and
Macchietto, S. Dynamic modelling and simulation of plate heat exchangers under milk
fouling. Chemical Engineering Science 55, 1605–19, 2000. With permission.)
55534_C009.indd 25455534_C009.indd 254 10/22/08 10:14:14 AM10/22/08 10:14:14 AM
Two-dimensional view of control volume of fluid inside the PHE channel.
Bulk fluid
it dictates the amount of resources and time spent, not to mention the influence
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Fouling Models for Heat Exchangers 255
on product quality and safety. Hence, it is natural that the cleaning process has
been studied in detail and various models been proposed. During fouling both
organic and mineral deposits are formed. The deposits formed depend on the prod-
uct processed and the processing conditions. Altering the composition of the liquid
observed. The aim of an appropriate cleaning model developed is to optimize the
cleaning agent and the other cleaning parameters. An important parameter that
needs to be studied to develop a cleaning model is the strength of adhesion of
the foulants with the food processing surface or in other terms the force required
to dislodge the foulants from the food processing surface. This parameter is not
known directly and needs to be determined by other methods. For instance it has
been shown that altering the surface energy of a surface alters the adhesive force
between the foulants and the surface. This is one of the key components in the
design of frictionless coating materials to reduce fouling. Some researchers have
focussed on the sticking probability [64,65] to ascertain the force required to
remove the deposits. Though the sticking probability helps in providing informa-
tion about the probability of a surface being fouled, it can also provide information
regarding the amount of force required to dislodge a particle from the surface. A
study conducted on the adhesive strength while baking tomato paste in an oven at
100oC and the baking time [15]. The study revealed that the adhesive strength of
the tomato starches increased with baking time, but the increase became less sig-
hydration time. It was found that the adhesive strength of tomato starch decreased
by a factor of three initially, and then became constant. The results of the study
show that a larger amount of the tomato foulants can be removed at the initial
chemical concentration. Similar studies on the removal of milk proteins revealed
that the deposits could not be removed completely with water alone. Chemical
proteins decreased with time. Also, the order of use of the acid and base chemicals
ies clearly show that the cleaning models need to be developed keeping in mind
the type of food product processed and the other cleaning parameters involved.
The foulants adhering to the food processing surface are attached by cohesive and
adhesive forces. Studies on the adhesive and cohesive forces will reveal the appro-
priate cleaning model or cleaning protocol to be developed. Various studies have
been conducted on the adhesive and cohesive forces encountered during fouling
to develop appropriate cleaning models [67,68]. The adhesive forces are related to
the foulant and surface interaction and the cohesive strength relate to the particle
and particle interaction. Deposits of tomato paste, bread dough and egg albumin
have less adhesive strengths than cohesive strengths causing them to be removed
in larger chunks from the attached surface. On the other hand, deposits like milk
proteins have more adhesive strengths than cohesive, resulting in their removal in
smaller chunks [67].
55534_C009.indd 25555534_C009.indd 255 10/22/08 10:14:15 AM10/22/08 10:14:15 AM
nificant after 3 h. The same study also focussed on the adhesive strength versus the
food material being processed has a significant influence in the fouling profiles
time involved with reference to the flow velocity, chemical concentration of the
stages of cleaning. This could be the time to decrease the flow rates and cleaning
concentration, flow rates of the cleaning solutions and temperature had a major
influence on the removal of the milk proteins. The force needed to remove the milk
during cleaning had an influence on the milk foulants removal [66]. These stud-
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
256 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
The minimum adhesive energy between the surface and the deposits can be
expressed in terms of the surface energy by the relationship [69]:
γ γ γsurfaceLW
foulantLW
fluidLW=
⎡
⎣⎢⎢
⎤
⎦⎥⎥
+⎡⎣⎢
1
2
⎤⎤⎦⎥ (9.54)
where γ γ γsurfaceLW
foulantLW
fluidLW, , are the Lifshitz van der Waals (LW) surface free energies
the surface free energy of the food contact surface can be reduced, this in turn will
reduce the adhesive forces between the surface and the foulant, thus making it easier
to remove the foulant attached to the surface.
A simple model for the removal of the calcium sulfhate deposits [46] is given by:
Wx
Sremovaldeposit
d
∝∇
(9.55)
where Wremoval = rate of removal of deposits; ∇ = shear stress in N/m2; Sd = strength
of deposit and xdeposit = deposit thickness (m).
The rate of removal of the deposit is time-dependent as the thickness of the
deposit formed and the strength of the deposit vary over time. This relationship does
not take into consideration the cleaning chemicals. A relationship has been proposed
for the adhesive strength per unit area, σadhesive and the deposit thickness [70]. This
relationship indicates that σadhesive increases with deposit thickness.
σ ω ψadhesive s v depositx= + (9.56)
where ωs = work needed to overcome surface bonds; and ψv = force required per unit
volume to overcome the deposit–deposit bonds.
This simple model however, is suited for low surface energies (about 28 mNm–1).
At higher surface energies this model is not as effective indicating that at higher sur-
face energies a different method of breakdown of the deposits could be possible.
A model incorporating the concentration of the chemicals for cleaning was pro-
posed as early as 1957 [71,72]. It is prudent to develop models incorporating the
concentration of the chemicals and the force required to remove the deposits. Such
models that involve the mechanical and chemical aspects of cleaning will be more
comprehensive in studying the cleaning process. The modeling of cleaning process
in heat exchangers is still in its infancy stage. But a lot of emphasis is laid upon the
CIP modeling in recent years. CIP is an energy intensive process. For example the
CIP process accounts for 9.5% of primary energy demand (energy consumption) in
the Dutch dairy industry and accounts for 0.14–0.30 MJ/cycle of thermal energy
requirement for milk pasteurization [73]. To add to this high energy requirement
the incidence of fouling causes an increase of about 8% in energy consumption and
about 21% increase in the total energy consumption related to the operation and
cleaning of milk pasteurization units [74].
With the advent of various food-grade frictionless coatings and emphasis on
energy conservation in the food industry models optimizing the cleaning process
is essential. Attempts have been made to model the optimum cleaning schedules for
55534_C009.indd 25655534_C009.indd 256 10/22/08 10:14:15 AM10/22/08 10:14:15 AM
of the surface, foulants, and the fluid, respectively. This relationship indicates that if
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Fouling Models for Heat Exchangers 257
plate heat exchangers [75,76] and also the cost economies involved during cleaning
[77,78] in the petroleum industry. An accurate model predicting the correct direc-
tional change (CDC) values of more than 92% has been developed using neural net-
works for the petroleum industry [79]. CDC is a measure of the prediction capability
of a model to predict the correct direction of change in a variable. Using this model
it would be able to schedule optimum cleaning schedules. Using similar models in
the food industry it would be possible to develop cleaning strategies that will result
in optimum plate heat exchanger performance; saving costs and minimizing energy
usage. Attempts have been made to use neural networks to model the optimum clean-
ing schedule in heat exchangers for the dairy industry by monitoring the overall heat
transfer, deposit thickness and the critical time (time when cleaning is required). This
model worked irrespective of the type of milk (for either goat or cow milk) used since
network model updated the error continuously [80]. The results from the study show
that fouling was highest at low pH and high temperature. Using such models will
revolutionize the food industry and cut costs. A cost model has been proposed to
optimize the performance of a Stirling engine which encounters fouling in the heat
exchangers [81]. Taking into account the various costs encountered due to fouling the
proposed model for the total costs of fouling can be summarized as follows:
CT T
C C Cf
f c
p c u=+
+ +1
( ) (9.57)
where Cf = total costs due to fouling; Cp = costs due to changes in engine perform-
ance; Cc = costs due to cleaning; Cu = costs due to unavailability of the engine;
Tf = time for fouling to develop; and Tc = time required for cleaning.
The optimum time for fouling to develop was derived by the following rela-
tionship after taking into consideration the power requirements, and the engine
performance:
T TC C
a e b eTf c
u c
fu e
c= +++
−2 2( )
. . (9.58)
where efu = energy price for the fuel used as input for the Stirling engine; and
ee = average price of purchased and sold electricity. This value is weighted by the
change in purchased and sold energy due to fouling at the fouling period Tf.
Since, the value of ee depends on the fouling period, Tf, and Tf in turn depends
on the value ee , Equation 9.58 becomes an optimization problem where the values
of ee and Tf are determined by iteration. Georgiadis et al. [82] have modeled in detail
the cost economics involved during fouling in a dairy plant. Their comprehensive
model was derived after solving a set of integral, partial differential and algebraic
equations. The results of their model indicate that the cost factor due to interruption
of the dairy operation due to fouling (because of cleaning) is predominant, but the
sis of energy conservation and reports on the impact of fouling on energy loss any
modeling efforts in the future needs to address the issue of energy loss and their
resulting cost economics to optimize dairy operation.
55534_C009.indd 25755534_C009.indd 257 10/22/08 10:14:16 AM10/22/08 10:14:16 AM
increase in energy consumption due to fouling is not significant. With high empha-
it measured the heat flux directly from the plate heat exchanger unit and the neural
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
258 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
9.3 CONCLUDING REMARKS
The impact of fouling in the food processing industry is an issue of major concern.
With recent efforts towards energy conservation and energy utilization, controlling
savings. There has been a dearth in comprehensive models that can explain the foul-
ing mechanism in detail. This is because fouling occurs due to various processing
and physico-chemical changes. Development of a comprehensive model starts with
studying the existing models that have been attempted to integrate them. Under-
standing the fouling phenomena will help in optimizing the process conditions, and
timely scheduling of cleaning operations that will cut down costs, and increase per-
advent of frictionless coatings and new surfaces, the issue of controlling fouling has
gained momentum. Though the study of fouling in the food processing industry is
motive, aerospace, chemical, petroleum, and marine industries, where the issue of
fouling has been addressed for a long time.
REFERENCES
1. HM Muller-Steinhagen. 2000. Handbook of Heat Exchanger Fouling: Mitigation and Cleaning Technologies. Essen, Rugby: Publico Publications, Institution of Chemical
Engineers.
2. HM Muller-Steinhagen, MR Malayeri, and AP Watkinson. 2005. Fouling of heat
exchangers—new approaches to solve an old problem. Heat Transfer Engineering 26:
1–4.
3. B Bansal, and XD Chen. 2006. A critical review of milk fouling in heat exchangers.
Comprehensive Reviews in Food Science and Food Safety 5: 27–33.
4. BA Garett, P Ridges, and NJ Noyes. 1985. Fouling of Heat Exchangers: Characteristics, Cost, Prevention, Control, and Removal. 1st ed. NJ: Prentice Hall.
5. PJ Williams, and PA Anderson. 2006. Operational cost savings in dairy plant water
usage. International Journal of Dairy Technology 59: 147–54.
6. PJ Fryer, PT Robbins, C Green, PJR Schreier, AM Pritchard, APM Hasting, DG Royston,
and JF Richardson. 1996. A statistical model for fouling of a plate heat exchanger by
whey protein solution at UHT conditions. Transactions of the Institute of Chemical Engineers 74: 189–99.
7. KD Rausch, and GM Powell. 1997. Dairy processing methods to reduce water use and
liquid waste load. Department of Agricultural and Biological Engineering Report # MF-
2071, Cooperative Extension Service, Kansas State University, Manhattan, Kansas.
8. WJ Rebello, SL Richlen, and F Childs. 1988. The cost of heat exchanger fouling in the
US industries. Report no. EGG-M-39187. Department of Energy, Washington DC.
9. J Visser, and ThJM Jeurnink. 1997. Fouling of heat exchangers in the dairy industry.
Experimental Thermal and Fluid Science 14: 407–24.
10. P de Jong. 1997. Impact and control of fouling in milk processing. Trends in Food Science and Technology 8: 401–5.
11. S Prakash, N Datta, and HC Deeth. 2005. Methods of detecting fouling caused by heat-
ing of milk. Food Reviews International 21: 267–93.
12. PK Nema, and AK Datta. 2006. Comparative study of heat induced fouling of various
neering 2: 1–11.
55534_C009.indd 25855534_C009.indd 258 10/22/08 10:14:17 AM10/22/08 10:14:17 AM
formance efficiency. There is a long way to go to address this issue, and with the
fouling will be beneficial to food processors, which is likely to result in substantial
in its infancy, it would be prudent to borrow the findings from sectors such as auto-
types of milk flowing over a heated metal surface. International Journal of Food Engi-
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Fouling Models for Heat Exchangers 259
13. G Rysstad, and J Kolstad. 2006. Extended shelf life milk—advances in technology.
International Journal of Dairy Technology 59: 85–96.
14. HC Kim, CC Tadini, and RK Singh. 1999. Heat transfer in a plate heat exchanger
during pasteurization of orange juice. Journal of Food Engineering 42: 79–84.
15. PJ Fryer, and PT Robbins. 2005. Heat transfer in food processing: Ensuring product
quality and safety. Applied Thermal Engineering 25: 2499–510.
16. I Toyoda, PJR Schreier, and PJ Fryer. 1994. A computational model for reaction fouling
from whey protein solutions. Fouling and cleaning in food processing. Jesus College,
Cambridge, England, March 23–25, 222–29.
17. AJ van Asselt, MMM Vissers, F Smit, and P de Jong. 2005. In-line control of fouling.
Proceedings of Heat Exchanger Fouling and Cleaning—Challenges and Oppor-
tunities. Kloster Irsee, Germany, June 5–10: New York: Engineering Conferences
International.
18. B Bansal, XD Chen, and SXQ Lin. 2005. Skim milk fouling during ohmic heating.
Proceedings of Heat Exchanger Fouling and Cleaning—Challenges and Opportunities.
Kloster Irsee, Germany, June 5–10: New York: Engineering Conferences International.
19. XD Chen, ZD Chen, SK Nguang, and S Anema. 1998. Exploring the reaction kinetics
of whey protein denaturation/aggregation by assuming the denaturation step is revers-
ible. Biochemical Engineering Journal 2: 63–69.
20. JC Kim, and DB Lund. 1998. Kinetics of β-lactoglobulin adsorption unto stainless
steel surfaces. Biotechnology Progress 14: 951–58.
21. F Rene, JC Leuliet, and M Lalande. 1991. Heat transfer to Newtonian and non-New-
Transactions of the Institute of Chemical Engineers 69: 115–26.
22. SK Das, and K Murugesan. 2000. Transient response of multipass plate heat exchang-
Transfer 43: 4327–45.
23. SK Das, and W Roetzel. 1995. Dynamic analysis of plate heat exchangers with disper-
24. MC Georgiadis, and S Macchietto. 2000. Dynamic modelling and simulation of plate
heat exchangers under milk fouling. Chemical Engineering Science 55: 1605–19.
thermal performance of a plate heat exchanger. Chemical Engineering and Processing
41: 49–58.
26. MC Georgiadis, GE Rotstein, and S Macchietto. 1998. Modelling and simulation of
complex plate heat exchanger arrangements under milk fouling. Computers and Chem-ical Engineering 22: S331–38.
27. F Delplace, JC Leuliet, and JP Tissier. 1994. Fouling experiments of plate heat exchang-
ers by whey proteins solutions. Transactions of the Institution of Chemical Engineers, Part C 72: 163–69.
28. CP Ribeiro, and MH Cano Andrade. 2002. An algorithm for steady-state simulation of
plate heat exchangers. Journal of Food Engineering 53: 59–66.
29. PK Sahoo, IA Ansari, and AK Datta. 2005. Milk fouling simulation in helical triple
tube heat exchanger. Journal of Food Engineering 69: 235–44.
30. S Jun, VM Puri, and RF Roberts. 2004. A dynamic 2D model for thermal performance
of plate heat exchangers. Transactions of the American Society for Agricultural Engi-neers 47: 213–22.
31. J Yoon, and DB Lund. 1994. Comparison of two operating methods of a plate heat
during milk fouling. Journal of Food Process Engineering 17: 243–62.
32. WM Kays. 1966. Convective Heat and Mass Transfer. 1st ed. New York:
McGraw-Hill.
55534_C009.indd 25955534_C009.indd 259 10/22/08 10:14:18 AM10/22/08 10:14:18 AM
tonian flood fluids in plate heat exchangers: Experimental and numerical approaches.
ers with axial thermal dispersion in fluid. International Journal of Heat and Mass
sion in both fluids. International Journal of Heat and Mass Transfer 38: 1127–40.
25. BP Rao, PK Kumar, and SK Das. 2002. Effect of flow distribution to the channels on the
exchanger under constant heat flux condition and their effect on the temperature profile
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
260 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
33. MN Ozisik. 1994. Finite Difference Methods in Heat Transfer. Ann Arbor, MI: CRC
Press.
34. M Picon-Nunez, G Martinez-Rodriguez, and JL Lopez-Robles. 2006. Alternative
design approach for multipass and multi-stream plate heat exchangers for use in heat
recovery systems. Heat Transfer Engineering 27: 12–21.
35. RK Shah, and WW Focke. 1988. Plate heat exchangers and their design theory. Heat Transfer Equipment Design. New York: Hemisphere Publishing Corporation, 227–54.
Taiwan, Nov 29–Dec 2, A-8-1–A-8-12.
37. SV Patankar. 1981. A calculation procedure for two-dimensional elliptic problem.
Numerical Heat Transfer 4: 409–26.
dynamics to model the hydrodynamics of plate heat exchangers for milk fouling. Jour-nal of Food Engineering 57: 237–42.
39. S Jun, and VM Puri. 2005. 3D milk fouling model of plate heat exchangers using com-
40. F Delplace, and JC Leuliet. 1995. Modelling fouling of a plate heat exchanger with dif-
Chemical Engineers Part C 73: 112–20.
41. PJ Fryer, and NHK Slater. 1985. A direct simulation procedure for chemical reaction
fouling in heat exchangers. Chemical Engineering Journal 31: 97–107.
42. SD Changani, MT Belmar-Beiny, and PJ Fryer. 1997. Engineering and chemical factors
associated with fouling and cleaning in milk processing. Experimental Thermal and Fluid Science 14: 392–406.
43. SS Ramachandra, S Wiehe, MM Hyland, XD Chen, and B Bansal. 2005. A preliminary
study of the effect of surface coating on the initial deposition mechanisms of dairy
fouling. Proceedings of the 6th International Conference of Heat Exchanger Fouling
and Cleaning—Challenges and Opportunities. Kloster Irsee, Germany, 88–96.
44. MG Mwaba, CCM Rindt, MAG Vorstman, and AA Van Steenhoven. 2006. Experi-
mental investigation of CaSO4
27: 42–54.
45. MG Mwaba, CCM Rindt, AA Van Steenhoven, and MAG Vorstman. 2006. Validated
numerical analysis of CaSO4 fouling. Heat Transfer Engineering 27: 50–62.
46. R Sheikhholeslami. 2000. Calcium sulphate fouling—precipitation or particulate: A
proposed composite model. Heat Transfer Engineering 21: 24–33.
47. B Na, and RL Webb. 2003. A fundamental understanding of factors affecting frost
nucleation. International Journal of Heat and Mass Transfer 46: 3797–808.
48. M Bohnet. 1985. Fouling of heat transfer surfaces. Chemical Engineering Technology
10: 113–25.
49. P de Jong, S Bouman, and HJLJ Van Der Linden. 1992. Fouling of heat treatment
equipment in relation to the denaturation of β-lactoglobulin. Journal of the Society of Dairy Technology 45: 3–8.
50. F Dannenberg, and HG Kessler. 1988. Reaction kinetics of the denaturation of whey
proteins in milk. Journal of Food Science 53: 258–63.
51. P de Jong, and HJLJ Van Der Linden. 1992. Design and operation of reactors in the
dairy industry. Chemical Engineering Science 47: 3761–68.
52. P de Jong, MC Giffel, H Straatsma, and MMM Vissers. 2002. Reduction of fouling and
contamination by predictive kinetic models. International Dairy Journal 12: 285–92.
55534_C009.indd 26055534_C009.indd 260 10/22/08 10:14:19 AM10/22/08 10:14:19 AM
Taipei. Proceedings of the Asia-Pacific Conference on the Built Environment, Taipei,
36. JY Jang, FY Su, and CN Lin. 1999. 3-D numerical analysis of heat transfer and fluid
flow in a plate heat exchanger. Asia-Pacific Conference on the Built Environment,
38. K Grijspeerdt, B Hazarika, and D Vucinic. 2003. Application of computational fluid
putational fluid dynamics. International Journal of Dairy Technology 58: 214–24.
ferent flow arrangements by whey protein solutions. Transactions of the Institution of
crystallization on a flat plate. Heat Transfer Engineering
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Fouling Models for Heat Exchangers 261
53. K Grijspeerdt, L Mortier, J De Block, and R Van Renterghem. 2004. Applications of
modelling to optimize ultra high temperature milk heat exchangers with respect to
fouling. Food Control 15: 117–30.
54. R Rosmaninho, and LF Melo. 2006. Calcium phosphate deposition from simulated
nal 16: 81–87.
55. R Rosmaninho, G Rizzo, H Muller-Steinhagen, and LF Melo. 2005. Anti-fouling stain-
less steel based surfaces for milk heating processes. Proceedings of the 6th International
Conference on Heat Exchanger Fouling and Cleaning—Challenges and Opportunities.
Kloster Irsee, Germany, 97–102.
56. K Ghashghaei. 2003. Effect of cow phenotype and milk protein structure on biofouling
rates in heat exchangers. MS Thesis, California Polytechnic State University, San Luis
Obispo, CA, USA.
57. H Petermeier, R Benning, A Delgado, U Kulozik, J Hinrichs, and T Becker. 2002.
Hybrid model of the fouling process in tubular heat exchangers for the diary industry.
Journal of Food Engineering 55: 9–17.
58. I Toyoda, and PJ Fryer. 1997. A computational model for reaction and mass trans-
fer in fouling from whey protein solutions. In: Fouling Mitigation of Industrial Heat Exchange Equipment. New York: Begell House, 589–600.
properties and characteristics on fouling in plate heat exchangers. Heat Transfer Engi-neering 26: 3–17.
60. Q Zhao, and Y Liu. 2005. Electroless Ni-Cu-P-PTFE composite coatings and their
anticorrosion properties. Surface and Coatings Technology 200: 2510–14.
61. Q Zhao, Y Liu, H Muller-Steinhagen, and G Liu. 2002. Graded Ni-P-PTFE coatings
and their potential applications. Surface and Coatings Technology 155: 279–284.
62. Q Zhao, Y Liu, C Wang, S Wang, and H Muller-Steinhagen. 2005. Effect of surface
free energy on the adhesion of biofouling and crystalline fouling. Chemical Engineer-ing Science 60: 4858–65.
and small amount of PTFE to minimize bacterial adhesion. Journal of Food Engineer-ing 72: 266–72.
64. S Grandgeorge, C Jallut, and B Thonon. 1998. Particulate fouling of corrugated plate
heat exchangers. Global kinetic and equilibrium studies. Chemical Engineering Sci-ence 53: 3051–71.
faces: Effects of hydrodynamic and physicochemical conditions on particle attachment
66. KR Morison, and S Larsen. 2005. Spinning disc measurement of two-stage cleaning
of heat transfer fouling deposits of milk. Journal of Food Process Engineering 28:
539–551.
adhesive effects in the cleaning of food fouling deposits. Innovative Food Science and Emerging Technologies 7: 263–69.
68. P Saikhwan, T Geddert, W Augustin, S Scholl, WR Paterson, and DI Wilson. 2006.
Effect of surface treatment on cleaning of a model food soil. Surface and Coatings Technology 201: 943–51.
69. Q Zhao, S Wang, and H Muller-Steinhagen. 2004. Tailored surface free energy of mem-
brane diffusers to minimize microbial adhesion. Applied Surface Science 230: 371–78.
70. PJ Fryer, GK Christian, and W Liu. 2006. How hygiene happens: Physics and chemis-
try of cleaning. International Journal of Dairy Technology 59: 76–84.
55534_C009.indd 26155534_C009.indd 261 10/22/08 10:14:20 AM10/22/08 10:14:20 AM
milk ultrafiltrate on different stainless steel-based surfaces. International Dairy Jour-
63. Q Zhao, and Y Liu. 2006. Modification of stainless steel surfaces by electroless Ni-P
efficiency. Chemical Engineering Science 58: 3105–13.
67. W Liu, PJ Fryer, Z Zhang, Q Zhao, and Y Liu. 2006. Identification of cohesive and
59. HU Zettler, M Weib, Q Zhao, and H Muller-Steinhagen. 2005. Influence of surface
65. SG Yiantsios, and AJ Karabelas. 2003. Deposition of micron-sized particles on flat sur-
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
262 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
71. WG Jennings, AA McKillop, and JR Luick. 1957. Circulation cleaning. Journal of Dairy Science 40: 1471–79.
72. CS Grant, GE Webb, and YW Jeon. 1996. Calcium phosphate decontamination of
stainless steel surfaces. American Institute of Chemical Engineers 42: 861–75.
74. C Sandu, and RK Singh. 1991. Energy increase in operation and cleaning due to heat
exchanger fouling in milk pasteurization. Food Technology 45: 84–91.
75. M Markowski, and K Urbaniec. 2005. Optimal cleaning schedule for heat exchangers
in a heat exchanger network. Applied Thermal Engineering 25: 1019–31.
76. S Sanye, and B Niroomand. 2007. Simulation of heat exchanger network (HEN) and
planning the optimum cleaning schedule. Energy Conversion and Management 48:
1450–1461.
77. JUR Khan, and SM Zubair. 2004. A risk-based performance analysis of plate-and-
frame heat exchangers subject to fouling: Economics of heat exchanger cleaning. Heat Transfer Engineering 25: 87–100.
78. SM Zubair, and BA Qureshi. 2006. A probabilistic fouling and cost model for plate-
and-frame heat exchangers. International Journal of Energy Research 30: 1–17.
79. VR Radhakrishnan, M Ramasamy, H Zabiri, V Do Thanh, NM Tahir, H Mukthar, MR
Hamdi, and N Ramli. 2007. Heat exchanger fouling model and preventive maintenance
scheduling tool. Applied Thermal Engineering 27: 2791–2802.
80. C Riverol, and V Napolitano. 2005. Estimation of fouling in a plate heat exchanger
through the application of neural networks. Journal of Chemical Technology and Bio-technology 80: 594–600.
81. M Kuosa, J Kaikko, and L Koskelainen. 2007. The impact of heat exchanger fouling
on the optimum operation and maintenance of the Stirling engine. Applied Thermal Engineering 27: 1671–76.
82. MC Georgiadis, GE Rotstein, and S Macchietto. 1998. Optimal design and operation
of heat exchangers under milk fouling. American Institute of Chemical Engineers 44:
2099–111.
55534_C009.indd 26255534_C009.indd 262 10/22/08 10:14:20 AM10/22/08 10:14:20 AM
and energy efficiency in the European dairy industry. Energy 31: 1984–2004.
73. CA Ramirez, M Patel, and K Blok. 2006. From fluid milk to milk powder: Energy use
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
263
10 Ozone Treatment of Food Materials
Kasiviswanathan Muthukumarappan, Colm P. O’Donnell, and Patrick J. Cullen
CONTENTS
10.1 Introduction ................................................................................................. 263
10.2 What is Ozone? ...........................................................................................264
10.2.1 Production of Ozone ......................................................................266
10.2.1.1 Electrical (Corona) Discharge Method ..........................266
10.2.1.2 Electrochemical (Cold Plasma) Method ........................ 267
10.2.1.3 Ultraviolet (UV) Method ............................................... 267
10.3 Modeling Ozone in Food Materials ............................................................268
10.3.1 Modeling Ozone Diffusion in Liquid Food ...................................268
10.3.2 Analyzing the Ozone Bubbles in the Column ............................... 270
10.4 Microbial Inactivation of Food Materials ................................................... 270
10.4.1 Application of Ozone in Solid Food Materials ............................. 270
10.4.2 Application of Ozone in Liquid Food Materials ........................... 273
10.4.3 Effects of Ozone on Product Quality ............................................ 273
10.5 Safety Requirements ................................................................................... 275
10.6 Disinfection of Food Processing Equipment and Environment.................. 275
10.7 Limitations of Using Ozone ........................................................................ 276
References .............................................................................................................. 276
10.1 INTRODUCTION
Foodborne illness remains the greatest of all food safety threats, with rapidly increasing
population density throughout the world accompanied by the evolution of new micro-
biological strains including Listeria monocytogenes and virulent strains of Escherchia coli. Consumer preference for minimally processed foods free of chemical preserva-
and the passage of new legislation such as the Food Quality Protection Act in the US
have created demand for novel food processing and preservation systems. Bacterial
pathogens in food cause an estimated 80 million cases of human illness, 325,000 cases
of hospitalization and up to 5,000 deaths annually in the US alone, coupled with sig-
the yearly cost of foodborne diseases in the US is $7–8 billion [2].
55534_C010.indd 26355534_C010.indd 263 10/22/08 10:17:24 AM10/22/08 10:17:24 AM
tives, recent outbreaks of foodborne pathogens, identification of new food pathogens,
nificant economic losses [1]. The Center for Disease Control and Prevention estimates
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
264 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
Concerns over food contamination span the spectrum of foodstuffs from liquid to
solids. Solid foods such as muscle origin exposed to microbial contamination during
slaughter and handling are responsible for causing microbial spoilage and foodborne
illness. Hence, the need for better control of foodborne pathogens has been para-
mount in recent years. It has become obvious that current systems of food produc-
tion contain inadequate bacterial interventions (kill or reduction steps). Today, the
only bacterial interventions for meat and poultry are antibacterial rinses during the
styles more and more households partially rely on ready-to-eat (RTE) or so called
fast foods. In the last decade, food companies in the US have introduced processed
meat products that do not require extensive preparations. Ground meat products con-
stitute a major share of this category of food products. With this change in cooking
food safety is becoming a major concern for such products. These products are at
times given little or no thermal treatments before consumption. Newly emerging
microbiological strains such as L. monocytogenes, virulent strains of E. coli, and
assorted viruses and their involvement in causing human illnesses has prompted a
need to improve the microbiological status of RTE meat products. In the US recent
regulations by the FDA governing fruit juice pasteurization has led to a search for
novel nonthermal processes that could ensure product safety and maintain desired
sensory characteristics. Conversly a lack of such regulation in the European Union
has raised concerns over possible pathogenic outbreaks due to recent trends towards
unpasteurized fruit juice consumption.
From the bacterial group, E. coli O157:H7 and L. monocytogenes are emerg-
ing pathogens whereas long-time recognized, Salmonella is still on the number one
position in terms of bacterial agents causing foodborne illness. Table 10.1 provides
estimates of the annual foodborne illness, hospitalization, and deaths for some of the
most common foodborne pathogens in the US. Methods for inactivating these patho-
gens in food would reduce the likelihood of future foodborne disease outbreaks.
There are several processing methods available for inactivation of microorganisms
safety in solid and liquid food and mathematical modeling in liquid food are empha-
sized in this chapter.
10.2 WHAT IS OZONE?
The passage of new legislation such as the Food Quality Protection Act in the US
has created renewed demand for novel food processing and preservation systems.
Also, the accumulation of toxic chemicals in our environment has increased the
focus on the safe use of sanitizers, bleaching agents, pesticides and other chemicals
in industrial processing [3]. Hence, there is a demand for safe and judicious usage
of these chemicals and preservatives in food processing. Ozone is generally recog-
nized as safe status (GRAS) in the US for use in treatment of bottled water and as a
sanitizer for process trains in bottled water plants [4]. In June 1997, ozone received
the GRAS status as a disinfectant for foods by an independent panel of experts,
55534_C010.indd 26455534_C010.indd 264 10/22/08 10:17:26 AM10/22/08 10:17:26 AM
slaughter process, and the final cooking stage. However, with rapidly changing life-
habits, the RTE foods may not be attaining sufficiently high temperatures and hence,
in foods namely thermal, high pressure, pulsed electric field, oscillating magnetic
field, irradiation, and ozonation. Ozonation treatment of food materials for microbial
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Ozone Treatment of Food Materials 265
sponsored by the Electric Power Research Institute. In 2001, the Food and Drug
Administration (FDA) allowed the use of ozone as a direct-contact food-sanitizing
agent [5]. This action eventually cleared the way for the use of ozone in the $430
billion food processing industry [5,6]. The use of ozone in the processing of foods
has recently come to the forefront as a result of the FDA approval to use ozone as an
antimicrobial agent for food treatment, storage and processing. The approval serves
to provide the basis for extended use of ozone in food and agricultural industries
with applications ranging from produce washing, recycling of poultry wash water to
seafood sterilization. Ozone has recently gained the attention of food and agricul-
tural industries though it has been used effectively as a primary disinfectant for the
treatment of municipal and bottled drinking waters for 100 years at scales from a
few gallons per minute to millions of gallons per day. Currently, there are more than
3,000 ozone-based water treatment installations all over the world and more than
300 potable water treatment plants in the US [7].
Ozone is a naturally occurring substance found in our atmosphere and it can
also be produced synthetically. The characteristic fresh, clean smell of air follow-
ing a thunderstorm represents freshly generated ozone in nature. Ozone is a form
of oxygen that contains three atoms (O3) compared to the standard two (O2) in a
molecule of oxygen. Structurally, the three atoms of oxygen are in the form of an
isoscales triangle with an angle of 116.8 degree between the two O–O bonds. The
distance between the bond oxygen atoms is 1.27 Å. The name ‘ozone’ is derived from
the Greek word ‘Ozein’ which means ‘to smell’. Ozone as a gas is blue; both liquid
(−111.9°C at 1 atm) and solid ozone (−192.7°C) are an opaque blue-black color [8].
TABLE 10.1Estimated Annual Food Borne Illnesses, Hospitalization, and Deaths Due to Selected Pathogens, US, 2005
Disease/Agent Illness Hospitalization Deaths
BacterialCampylobacter spp. 1,963,141 10,539 99
Clostridium perfringens 248,520 41 7
Escherichia coli O157:H7 62,458 1,843 52
Listeria monocytogenes 2,493 2,298 499
Salmonella, nontyphoidal 1,341,873 15,608 553
Staphylococcus 185,060 1,753 2
Vibrio cholerae, toxigenic 49 17 0
47 43 18
ParasiticToxoplasma gondii 112,500 2,500 375
and RV Tauxe. 2005. Food-related illness and death in the United States. Emerging Infec-tious Diseases 11 (5): 607–25.
55534_C010.indd 26555534_C010.indd 265 10/22/08 10:17:27 AM10/22/08 10:17:27 AM
Vibrio vulnificus
Source: PS Mead, L Slutsker, V Dietz, LF McCaig, JS Bresee, C Shapiro, PM Griffin,
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
266 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
It is a relatively unstable gas at normal temperatures and pressures, is partially sol-
uble in water, has a characteristic pungent odor, and is the strongest disinfectant
currently available for contact with foods [9–11]. The relatively high ( + 2.075 V)
electrochemical potential (E0, V) indicates that ozone is a very favorable oxidizing
agent (Equation 10.1). The various physical properties of ozone are summarized in
Table 10.2
O (g) 2H 2e O (g) H O{E 2.075V}3 2 20+ + + =+ − ⇔ (10.1)
10.2.1 PRODUCTION OF OZONE
Ozone is generated by the exposure of air or another gas containing normal oxy-
gen to a high-energy source. High-energy sources such as a high voltage electri-
cal discharge or ultraviolet radiation convert molecules of oxygen to molecules of
ozone. Ozone must be manufactured on site for immediate use since it is unstable
and quickly decomposes to normal oxygen. The half-life of ozone in distilled water
at 20°C is about 20–30 min [12]. Ozone production is predominantly achieved by
one of three methods: Electrical discharge methods, electrochemical methods, and
ultraviolet (UV) radiation methods. Electrical discharge methods, which are the
consume large amounts of electricity. The other two methods (electrochemical and
UV) are less cost effective.
10.2.1.1 Electrical (Corona) Discharge Method
In this method, adequately dried air or O2 is passed between two high-voltage elec-
trodes separated by a dielectric material, which is usually glass. Air or concentrated
O2 passing through an ozonator must be free from particulate matter and dried to
a dew point of at least −60°C to properly protect the corona discharge device. The
ozone/gas mixture discharged from the ozonator normally contains from 1 to 3%
ozone when using dry air, and 3–6% ozone when using high purity oxygen as the
feed gas [10,11].
TABLE 10.2Physical Properties of Ozone
Physical Properties Value
Boiling point, °C −111.9
Density, kg/m3 2.14
Heat of formation, kJ/mole 144.7
Melting point, °C −192.7
Molecular weight, g/mole 47.9982
Oxidation strength, V 2.075
Solubility in water, ppm (at 20°C) 3
1.658
55534_C010.indd 26655534_C010.indd 266 10/22/08 10:17:28 AM10/22/08 10:17:28 AM
most widely used commercial methods, have relatively low efficiencies (2–10%) and
Specific gravity
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Ozone Treatment of Food Materials 267
electrodes. When a voltage is supplied to the electrodes, a corona discharge forms
between the two electrodes, and the O2 in the discharge gap is converted to ozone
(Figure 10.1). A corona discharge is a physical phenomenon characterized by a
low-current electrical discharge across a gas-containing gap at a voltage gradient,
which exceeds a certain critical value [13]. First, oxygen molecules (O2) are split into
oxygen atoms (O), and then the individual oxygen atoms combine with remaining
oxygen molecules to form ozone (O3).
Considerable electrical energy (5000 V) is required for the ozone producing
verted to heat that, if not rapidly removed, causes the O3 to decompose into oxygen
atoms and molecules, particularly above 35°C. In order to prevent this decomposi-
tion, ozone generators utilizing the corona discharge method, must be equipped with
a means of cooling the electrodes. The temperature of the gas inside the discharge
chamber must be maintained at a temperature between the temperature necessary
for formation of O3 to occur and the temperature at which spontaneous decomposi-
tion of O3 occurs [14]. The cooling is usually accomplished by circulating a coolant
such as water or air over one surface of the electrodes so that the heat given off by
the discharge is absorbed by the coolant.
10.2.1.2 Electrochemical (Cold Plasma) Method
Usually, in the electrochemical method of ozone production, an electrical current
is applied between an anode and cathode in electrolytic solution containing water
and a solution of highly electronegative anions. A mixture of oxygen and ozone
is produced at the anode. The advantages associated with this method are use of
low-voltage DC current, no feed gas preparation, reduced equipment size, possible
generation of ozone at high concentration, and generation in water.
10.2.1.3 Ultraviolet (UV) Method
In the ultraviolet method of O3 generation, the ozone is formed when O2 is exposed
to UV light of 140–190 mm wavelength, which splits the oxygen molecules into
H
He
Electrode (high tension)
Electrode (low tension)
Dielectric
O2
Discharge gap O3
FIGURE 10.1 Ozone generation by corona discharge method.
55534_C010.indd 26755534_C010.indd 267 10/22/08 10:17:28 AM10/22/08 10:17:28 AM
electrical discharge field to be formed. In excess of 80% of the applied energy is con-
The electrodes are typically either concentric metallic tubes or flat, plate-like
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
268 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
oxygen atoms, which then combine with other oxygen molecules to form O3 [10,11].
The method has been reviewed thoroughly by Langlais, Reckhow and Brink [15].
However, due to poor yields, this method has limited uses.
10.3 MODELING OZONE IN FOOD MATERIALS
10.3.1 MODELING OZONE DIFFUSION IN LIQUID FOOD
for determination of the log reduction and bromate formation in any ozone applica-
tion in liquid such as water treatment, microbial inactivation in fruit juices, etc. For
improvement of operational management of ozonation by model control, the model
and water/fruit juice quality parameters. For this purpose an ozone model can be
developed with gas transfer, slow decay and rapid decay, on the basis of some type
the column.
Assuming a liquid and gas transport without dispersion, neglecting decay of
ozone in the gas phase and using the relations of equilibrium, transfer and decay, the
equations for ozone concentration in liquid and the ozone concentration in gas in a
bubble column (Figure 10.2) are given by:
∂∂
∂∂
αc
tu
c
xk RQ
uu d
k c c k c= − + ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ − − −Lg b
D g O
63
( ) kk cr
∂∂
∂∂ α
αc
tu
c
xk
dk c cg
gg L
b
D g= − + ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ −6
( )
where c = concentration of ozone in liquid (g/m3); t = time (s); x = height of the
bubble column (m); u = velocity of liquid through a reactor (m/s); kL = transfer coef-
g w g
through reactor (m/s); db = bubble diameter (m); α = pressure and temperature cor-
rection factor α = (Pg/P0)·(T0 /Tg); P0, Pg = standard and actual pressure (Pa); T0 ,
g D
ing on nature of gas and temperature; cg = concentration of ozone in gas under stan-
dard pressure and temperature (g/Nm3); kO3
(s−1r
−1).
hand side is for transport of ozone, the second term is for transfer of ozone from the
gas phase to the water phase and vice versa, the third term is for slow decay and the
fourth term is for rapid decay of ozone. The equation for the gas phase consists of
both transport and transfer of ozone.
From experience it is known that direct consumption of ozone is larger when
a model system is considered such as the UV254 absorbance of humic substances
is higher and that during the ozonation process a strong degradation of UV254
55534_C010.indd 26855534_C010.indd 268 10/22/08 10:17:29 AM10/22/08 10:17:29 AM
Predicting the ozone profile in a bubble column and contact chambers is important
must be able to predict the ozone profile for changes in different control parameters
T = standard and actual temperature (K); k = distribution coefficient (−), depend-
= first order constant for slow decay
); and k = first order constant for rapid decay (s
In the equation for the ozone concentration in liquid, the first term on the right
of quality change such as UV254 nm absorbance in the influent and the effluent of
ficient (m/s); RQ = gas to liquid flow ratio (Q /Q ) (−); u = velocity of gas phase
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Ozone Treatment of Food Materials 269
occurs [15]. Therefore one can describe the rapid decay as function of the degrada-
tion of UV254, resulting in the following Equation:
k ckY
rUV
sUV UV= ⋅ −( )
∂
∂∂
∂( ) ( )UV UV
rt
ux
k Y c= − − ⋅ ⋅
where kUV
between UV254 and ozone consumption (l/(mg·m)); UV = UV254 in water (m−1);
and UVs = stable UV254 after completion of the ozonation process (m−1).
It can be assumed that not all UV254 is degraded, but, after ozonation, a stable
UV254 exists. This stable UV254 is incorporated in the equation. As the ozonation
progresses, the rate of ozone decay is shifted from rapid and slow to just slow decay
[16]. An expression given by Hughmark [17] could be used for the gas transfer coef-
L L
density of the bubbles in the column varying from a kL-value for a single bubble to
FIGURE 10.2 Schematic of ozone analysis in a bubble column.
ug
db
h
55534_C010.indd 26955534_C010.indd 269 10/22/08 10:17:30 AM10/22/08 10:17:30 AM
= decay coefficient of UV254 (l/(mg·s)); Y = yield factor, gives the relation
ficient, k -value. This expression gives a range for the k -value depending on the
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
270 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
a kL-value for a swarm of bubbles. The partial differential equations of the ozone
model can be numerically integrated where variations in time and space are fol-
lowed. For solving the equations the number of Complete Stirred Tank Reactors
(CSTRs) can be determined based on standard tracer experiments.
10.3.2 ANALYZING THE OZONE BUBBLES IN THE COLUMN
As with any pasteurization technology employed by the food industry it is essential
to identify, monitor and control critical operational parameters. Given the recent
uptake in the direct ozonation of liquid foods it is paramount to understand how
value in terms of product control and development. Hepworth [18] has developed a
novel application of computer vision for measuring bubble size distributions. The
technique incorporates a computer controlled charge coupled device camera to cap-
ture and save bubble images. The technique is also designed to be simple to use and
relatively portable. The technique allows for the measurement of both bubble diam-
eter and velocity. Data from the experiments have been analyzed to predict rates
of bubble nucleation, growth, and motion for a variety of experimental conditions.
Such understanding would facilitate optimization of control parameters including;
10.4 MICROBIAL INACTIVATION OF FOOD MATERIALS
When a cell becomes stressed by viral, bacterial or fungal attack, its energy level is
the third atom of oxygen which is electrophilic, i.e. ozone has a small free radical
electrical charge in the third atoms of oxygen which seeks to balance itself electrically
with other material with a corresponding unbalanced charge. Diseased cells, viruses,
harmful bacteria and other pathogens carry such a charge and so attract ozone and its
by-products. Normal healthy cells cannot react with ozone or its by-products, as they
possess a balanced electrical charge and a strong enzyme system.
Because of its very high oxidation reduction potential, ozone acts as an oxidant
of the constituent elements of cell walls before penetrating inside microorganisms
and oxidizing certain essential components e.g. unsaturated lipids, enzymes, pro-
teins, nucleic acids, etc. When a large part of the membrane barrier is destroyed
causing leakage of cell contents, the bacterial or protozoan cells lyse (unbind) result-
ing in gradual or immediate destruction of the cell. Most pathogenic and foodborne
microbes are susceptible to this oxidizing effect.
10.4.1 APPLICATION OF OZONE IN SOLID FOOD MATERIALS
Ozone is one of the most potent sanitizers known and is effective against a wide
spectrum of microorganisms at relatively low concentrations [12]. Sensitivity of
microorganisms to ozone depends largely on the medium, the method of appli-
cation, and the species. Susceptibility varies with the physiological state of the
culture, pH of the medium, temperature, humidity and presence of additives, such
55534_C010.indd 27055534_C010.indd 270 10/22/08 10:17:31 AM10/22/08 10:17:31 AM
size distributions for the ozone processing of liquid foods would be of significant
ozone behaves when introduced to fluids. Experimentally determined ozone bubble
diffuser characteristics, ozone flowrates, static mixing, etc.
reduced by the outflow of electrons, and becomes electropositive. Ozone possesses
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Ozone Treatment of Food Materials 271
as, acids, surfactants, and sugars [19]. The antimicrobial spectrum and sanitary
applications of ozone in food industry are summarized in Table 10.3.
poultry carcasses. The microbial counts of ozone treated carcasses stored at 4°C
Gorman, Sofos, Morgan, Schmidt and Smith [21] evaluated the effect of various
sanitizing agents (5% hydrogen peroxide, 0.5% ozone, 12% trisodium phosphate,
2% acetic acid, and 0.3% commercial sanitizer), and water (16–74°C) spray- washing
interventions for their ability to reduce bacterial contamination of beef samples in a
model spray-washing cabinet. Hydrogen peroxide and ozonated water were found to
be more effective than the other sanitizing agents. In another study, the effect of dif-
ferent treatments (74°C hot-water washing, 5% hydrogen peroxide, and 0.5% ozone)
in reducing bacterial populations on beef carcasses was studied and the researchers
have found that water at 74°C caused higher bacterial reduction than those achieved
by the other sanitizing agents [22]. Ozone and hydrogen peroxide treatments had
minor effects and were equivalent to conventional washing in reducing bacterial
populations on beef. Silva da, Gibbs and Kirby [23] investigated the bacterial activity
TABLE 10.3Antimicrobial Spectrum and Sanitary Applications of Ozone in Food Industry
Sanitation Dosage Susceptible Microorganisms
Animal >100 ppm HVJ/TME/Reo type 3/murine hepatitis virus
Black berries 0.3 ppm Botrytis cinerea
Cabbage 7–13 mg/m3 Shelf life extension
Carrot 5–15 mg/m3 Shelf life extension
60 μl/L Botrytis cinerea/Scerotinia sclerotiorum
Dairy 5 ppm
Fish 0.27 mg/L P. putida/B. thermospacta/L. plantarum/Shewanella putrefaciens/Enterobacter sp.
0.111 mg/L Enterococcus seriolicida
0.064 mg/L Pasteurella piscicida/Vibrio anguillarum
Media 3–18 ppm E. coli O157:H7
Peppercorn 6.7 mg/L 3–6 log reduction of microbial load
Potatoes 20–25 mg/m3 Shelf life extension
Poultry 0.2–0.4 ppm Salmonella sp./Enterobacteriaceae
Shrimp 1.4 ml/L E. coli/Salmonella typhimurium
Water 0.35 mg/L A. hydrophila/B. subtilis/E. coli/V. cholerae/P. aeruginosa/L. monocytogenes/Salm. typhi/Staph. aureus/Y. enterocolitica
Source: K Muthukumarappan, F Halaweish, and AS Naidu. 2000. Ozone. In: AS Naidu, ed. Natural food anti-microbial systems. Boca Raton, FL: CRC Press, 783–800.
55534_C010.indd 27155534_C010.indd 271 10/22/08 10:17:32 AM10/22/08 10:17:32 AM
Sheldon and Brown [20] investigated the efficacy of ozone as a disinfectant for
were significantly lower than carcasses chilled under non-ozonated conditions.
of gaseous ozone on five species of fish bacteria and reported that ozone in relatively
Alcaligens faecalus/P. fluorescens
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
272 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
low concentration (< 0.27 × 10 −3 g/l) was an effective bactericide of vegetative cells.
Kaothien, Jhala, Henning, Julson and Muthukumarappan [24] evaluated the effec-
tiveness of ozone in controlling Listeria monocytogenes in cured ham. There was a
centration in range of 0.5−1.0 ppm, with exposure time of 1–15 min at an exposure
temperature of 20°C.
Within the food industry, ozone has been used routinely for washing and storage
of fruits and vegetables [25,26]. Ozone can be used during the washing of produce
before it is packaged and shipped to supermarkets, grocery stores and restaurants.
With a 99.9% kill rate, it’s far more effective than current sanitizing methods, such
as commercial fruit and vegetable washes. Also, processors who chill fruits or veg-
etables after harvest using water held at approximately 1°C can ozonate the water to
prevent product contamination. Cooling fruits and vegetables helps slow product res-
piration, and preserve freshness and quality. Fruit and vegetable processing systems
that incorporate ozone-generating technology will be able to produce cleaner food
while using substantially less water. It will destroy bacteria that can cause premature
spoilage of fruits and vegetables while also ensuring a safer product for consumers
without any toxic residues. The ozone dissipates within minutes following the wash-
ing process. Ozone can also be injected or dissolved in process waters of all kinds to
reduce microbial contamination.
Recent investigations involving the use of ozone for dried foods have shown
that gaseous ozone reduced Bacillus spp. and Micrococcus counts in cereal grains,
peas, beans and whole spices were reduced by up to 3 log units, depending on ozone
concentration, temperature and relative humidity conditions [27,28]. Zhao and Cran-
ston [29] used gaseous ozone as a disinfectant in reducing microbial populations in
ground black pepper, observing a 3–6 log reduction depending on the moisture con-
tent with samples ozonized at 6.7 ppm for 6 h. Furthermore, ozonated water has been
applied to fresh-cut vegetables for sanitation purposes reducing microbial popula-
tions and extending the shelf-life [30,31]. Treatment of apples with ozone resulted in
lower weight loss and spoilage. An increase in the shelf-life of apples and oranges by
ozone has been attributed to the oxidation of ethylene. Fungal deterioration of black-
berries and grapes was decreased by ozonation processing [32]. Ozonated water was
found to reduce bacterial content in shredded lettuce, blackberries, grapes, black
pepper, shrimp, beef, broccoli, carrots, tomatoes and milk [19,29,33–35].
to sterilize bacon, beef, bananas, eggs, mushrooms, cheese and fruit [42,43], to pre-
serve lettuce [19], strawberries [44], green peppers [45] and sprouts [46]. Reduction
in mold and bacterial counts could be achieved without any detrimental change in
chemical composition and sensory quality [47]. Microbial studies typically show
pathogenic species most commonly associated with fruit and vegetable products.
Bubbling of ozone in stored apples inoculated with E. coli O157:H7 was found
to be more effective than dipping apples in ozonated water. Bubbling and dipping
55534_C010.indd 27255534_C010.indd 272 10/22/08 10:17:33 AM10/22/08 10:17:33 AM
significant (p > 0.05) reduction (about 90%) in bacterial population, with ozone con-
Ozone has been used in several studies to decontaminate freshly caught fish [36],
poultry products [20,37], meat and milk products [38,39], to purify and artificially
2 log reduction of total counts and significant reduction of spoilage and potentially
provide chilling, fluming, rinsing or washing of meat, poultry, seafood, and eggs to
age wine and spirits [40], to reduce aflatoxin in peanut and cottonseed meals [41],
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Ozone Treatment of Food Materials 273
resulted in 3.7 log and 2.6 log reductions in counts of E. coli, respectively [48]. About
1.3–3.8 log reduction was reported for inactivation of E. coli at ozone concentration
of 0.3–1.0 ppm (O3 demand-free water) at pH of 5.9 and 1.3 to ∼7 log reduction for
Leuconostoc mesenteroides at similar treatment conditions, whereas 0.2–1.8 ppm of
ozone concentration yielded 0.7 to ∼7 log reduction in L. monocytogenes [49].
10.4.2 APPLICATION OF OZONE IN LIQUID FOOD MATERIALS
Most contemporary applications of ozone include treatment of drinking water [50]
and municipal wastewater [7,51]. Effectiveness of ozone against microorganisms
depends not only on the amount applied, but also on the residual ozone in the medium
and various environmental factors such as medium pH, temperature, humidity, addi-
tives (surfactants, sugars, etc.), and the amount of organic matter surrounding the
that can be detected in the medium after application to the target medium. Both the
instability of ozone under certain conditions and the presence of ozone-consuming
materials affect the level of residual ozone present in the medium. Therefore, it is
important, to distinguish between the concentration of applied ozone and residual
ozone necessary for effective disinfection. It is advisable to monitor ozone avail-
targeted microorganisms are suspended and treated in pure water or simple buffers
how ozone will react in the presence of organic matter [54]. Food components are
reported to interfere with bactericidal properties of ozone against microbes [55].
In apple cider, Dock [56] determined that the mandatory 5-log reduction could be
achieved without harming essential quality attributes. Inactivation of E. coli O157:H7 and Salmonella in apple cider and orange juice treated with ozone in combina-
tion with antimicrobials such as dimethyl dicarbonate (DMDC; 250 or 500 ppm)
or hydrogen peroxide (300 or 600 ppm) was evaluated by Williams, Summer and
in a 5-log colony-forming units (CFU)/mL reduction of either pathogen. However,
in their second study they found that all combinations of antimicrobials plus ozone
treatments, followed by refrigerated storage, caused greater than a 5-log CFU/mL
reduction, except ozone/DMDC (250 ppm) treatment in orange juice. They have con-
cluded that the ozone treatment in combination with DMDC or hydrogen peroxide
followed by refrigerated storage may provide an alternative to thermal pasteurization
to meet the 5-log reduction standard in cider and orange juice. Recently a number
of commercial fruit juice processors in US began employing this ozone process for
pasteurization resulting in industry guidelines being issued by the FDA [58].
10.4.3 EFFECTS OF OZONE ON PRODUCT QUALITY
Applying ozone at doses that are large enough for effective decontamination may
change the sensory qualities of food and food products. The effect of ozone treat-
ment on quality and physiology of various kinds of food products have been evalu-
55534_C010.indd 27355534_C010.indd 273 10/22/08 10:17:34 AM10/22/08 10:17:34 AM
cells [19,52]. It is difficult to predict ozone behavior under such conditions and in
the presence of specific compounds. Residual ozone is the concentration of ozone
ability during treatment [53]. Efficacy of ozone is demonstrated more readily when
(with low ozone demand) than in complex food systems where it is difficult to predict
Golden [57]. In their first study they found no combination of treatments resulted
ated by various researchers. Ozone is not universally beneficial and in some cases
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
274 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
may promote oxidative spoilage in foods [59]. Surface oxidation, discoloration or
development of undesirable odors may occur in substrates such as meat, from exces-
sive use of ozone [12,60].
disinfecting wastewater. Dock [56] reported no detrimental change in quality attributes
of apple cider when it was treated with ozone. However, much research still needs to
be conducted before it can effectively be applied to fruit juice. No change in chemical
composition and sensory quality of onion was reported by Song, Fan, Hilderbrand
total sugar content of celery and strawberries [62] during storage periods. Ozone is
expected to cause the loss of antioxidant constituents, because of its strong oxidizing
phenolic content of fresh-cut iceberg lettuce [31]. Contradictory reports are found in
the literature regarding ascorbic acid, with decomposition of ascorbic acid in broc-
ascorbic acid contents for treated and non-treated celery samples. Moreover, increases
in ascorbic acid levels in spinach [64], pumpkin leaves [65] and strawberries [66] were
reported in response to ozone exposure.
Slight decreases in vitamin C contents were reported in lettuce [31]. Ozone treat-
ments were reported to have minor effects on anthocyanin contents in strawberries
[66] and blackberries [34]. The most notable effect of ozone on sensory quality of
fruits was the loss of aroma. Ozone enriched cold storage of strawberries resulted in
reversible losses of fruit aroma [66,67]. This behavior is probably due to oxidation of
vegetative and spore forms, ozone is unlikely to be used directly in foods containing
high-ozone-demand materials, such as meat products [68]. Applying ozone at doses
that are large enough for effective decontamination may change the sensory quali-
ties of these products. Due to increased concern about the safety of fruit, vegetable
and juice products, the FDA has mandated that these must undergo a 5 log reduction
in pathogens. The effect of ozone treatment on apple cider quality and consumer
acceptability was studied over 21 days. Ozone-treated cider had greater sedimenta-
tion, lower sucrose content and a decrease in soluble solids by day 21 [69].
Recently researchers in Spain evaluated the effects of continuous and intermit-
tent applications of ozone gas treatments, applied during cold storage to maintain
postharvest quality during subsequent shelf life, on the bioactive phenolic composi-
tion of ‘Autumn Seedless’ table grapes after long-term storage and simulated retail
display conditions [70]. They found that the sensory quality was preserved with
both ozone treatments. Although ozone treatment did not completely inhibit fungal
time. Continuous 0.1 μL L−1 O3 application also preserved the total amount of
tent sampled at harvest. Total phenolics increased after the retail period in ozone
treated berries. Therefore the improved techniques tested for retaining the quality
of ‘Autumn Seedless’ table grapes during long-term storage seem to maintain or
even enhance the antioxidant compound content.
55534_C010.indd 27455534_C010.indd 274 10/22/08 10:17:35 AM10/22/08 10:17:35 AM
and Forney [47]. Ozonated water treatment resulted in no significant difference in
activity. However, ozone washing treatment was reported to have no effect on the final
Conversely Zhang, Lu, Yu and Gao [62] reported no significant difference between
the volatile compounds. In spite of its efficacy against microorganisms both in the
Richardson [61] reported that ozone helps to control odor, flavor and color while
coli florets reported after ozone treatment by Lewis, Zhuang, Payne and Barth [63].
development, its application increased the total flavan-3-ol content at any sampling
hydroxycinnamates, while both treatments assayed maintained the flavonol con-
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Ozone Treatment of Food Materials 275
10.5 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
Ozone is a toxic gas and can cause severe illness, and even death if inhaled in high
quantity. It is one of the high active oxidants with strong toxicity to animals and
plants. Toxicity symptoms such as sharp irritation to the nose and throat could result
instantly at 0.1 ppm dose. Loss of vision could arise from 0.1 to 0.5 ppm after expo-
sure for 3–6 h. Ozone toxicity of 1–2 ppm could cause distinct irritation on the upper
part of throat, headache, pain in the chest, cough and drying of the throat. Higher
levels of ozone (5–10 ppm) could cause increase in pulse, and edema of lungs. Ozone
level of 50 ppm or more is potentially fatal [11]. The ozone exposure levels as recom-
mended by the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) of the US
are shown in Table 10.4
10.6 DISINFECTION OF FOOD PROCESSING EQUIPMENT AND ENVIRONMENT
Within the food industry much attention is given to the cleaning and sanitizing
operations of food-processing equipment both in preventing contamination of
products and in maintaining the functionality of equipment [71]. Since ozone is
a strong oxidant, it can be used for the disinfection of processing equipment and
10
units when tested in wineries for barrel cleaning, tank sanitation, and clean-in-
place processes [72].
Water containing low concentrations of ozone can be sprayed onto processing
that may be present. Ozone has been shown to be more effective than chlorine, the
most commonly used disinfectant, in killing bacteria, fungi and viruses, and it does
this at one tenth of the concentration. Ozone can react up to 3000 times faster than
chlorine with organic materials and does not leave any residual toxic by-products.
Currently, ozone is the most likely alternative to chlorine in food applications.
TABLE 10.4Approved Levels of Ozone Application
Exposure Ozone Level, ppm
Detectable odor 0.01–0.05
OSHA 8 h limit 0.1
OSHA 1.5 min limit 0.3
Lethal in few minutes >1700
Source: K Muthukumarappan, JL Julson, and AK Mahapatra.
2002. Ozone applications in food processing. In: SK Nanda,
ed. Souvenir 2002 – Proceedings of College of Agricultural Engineering Technology alumni meeting, Bhubaneswar, India,
published by CAET Alumni Association: 32–35.
55534_C010.indd 27555534_C010.indd 275 10/22/08 10:17:36 AM10/22/08 10:17:36 AM
environments. It has been reported that ozone decreased surface flora by 3 log
equipment, walls or floors to both remove and kill bacteria or other organic matter
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
276 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
10.7 LIMITATIONS OF USING OZONE
As discussed earlier applying ozone at doses that are large enough for effective
decontamination may result in changes in the sensory or nutritional qualities of some
food products including; surface oxidation, discoloration and the development of
undesirable odors. Additionally, microorganisms embedded in product surfaces are
more resistant to ozone than those readily exposed to the sanitizer. Hence, suitable
application methods have to be used to assure direct contact of ozone with target
microorganisms. The rapid reaction and degradation of ozone diminish the residuals
of this sanitizer during processing. The lack of residuals may limit the processor’s
Also, there are existing restrictions relating to human exposure to ozone, which
must be addressed. Plant operators seeking to employ ozone will be faced with system
design and process operation challenges. However, ozone monitors and destructors
may be employed to overcome such challenges. The initial cost of ozone generators
may be of concern to small-scale food processors but as the technology improves the
cost of the generators are coming down.
REFERENCES
Tauxe. 2005. Food-related illness and death in the United States. Emerging Infectious Diseases 11 (5): 607–25.
2. P West, J Kim, TS Huang, M Carter, JS Weese, and CI Wei. 2001. Bactericidal activity
of electrolyzed oxidizing water against E. coli, L. monocytogenes and S. enteritidis
inoculated on beef and chicken. Presented at the IFT Annual Meeting. New Orleans,
LA.
3. JL Julson, K Muthukumarappan, and D Henning. 2001. Effectiveness of ozone for con-
trolling L. monocytogenes in ready to eat cured ham. Report NPPC Project #99–221.
Brookings, SD: South Dakota State University.
4. FDA. 1995. Beverages: Bottled Water; Final Rule, Food and Drug Admin., Fed. Reg.
60: 57075–130.
5. BC Hampson. 2001. Emerging technology — Ozone. Presented at the IFT Annual
Meeting, New Orleans, LA.
6. EJ Johannsen, K Muthukumarappan, JL Julson, and JD Stout. 1999. Application of
ozone technology in beef processing. Presented at the North Dakota-South Dakota 2nd
Biennial Joint EPSCoR Conf. on Stimulating Competitive Research, Fargo, ND.
7. RG Rice, P Overbeck, and KA Larson. 2000. Costs of ozone in small drinking water
systems. In: Proc. small drinking water and wastewater systems. NSF Int., Ann Arbor,
MI, 27–31.
8. B Hunter. 1995. Ozone applications: An in depth discussion. Health Freedom News
14 (2): 5–7.
9. AK Mahapatra, K Muthukumarappan, and JL Julson. 2005. Applications of ozone,
bacteriocins and irradiation in food processing: A review. Critical Reviews in Food Science and Nutrition 45 (6): 447–61.
10. K Muthukumarappan, JL Julson, and AK Mahapatra. 2002. Ozone applications in food
processing. In: SK Nanda, ed. Souvenir 2002 — Proceedings of College of Agricultural Engineering Technology alumni meeting, Bhubaneswar, India, published by CAET
Alumni Association: 32–35.
55534_C010.indd 27655534_C010.indd 276 10/22/08 10:17:36 AM10/22/08 10:17:36 AM
ability for in-line testing of efficacy.
1. PS Mead, L Slutsker, V Dietz, LF McCaig, JS Bresee, C Shapiro, PM Griffin, and RV
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Ozone Treatment of Food Materials 277
11. K Muthukumarappan, F Halaweish, and AS Naidu. 2000. Ozone. In: AS Naidu, ed.
Natural food anti-microbial systems. Boca Raton, FL: CRC Press, 783–800.
12. MA Khadre, AE Yousef, and JG Kim. 2001. Microbial aspects of ozone applications in
food: A review. Journal of Food Science 66 (9): 1242–52.
13. PA Taylor, TO Futrell, NM Dunn, Jr., P Michael, CR DuBois, and JD Capehart. 1996.
Ozone Generation System US Patent # 5 547 644.
14. AD Miller, WR Grow, LA Dees, MR Mitchell, and TJ Manning. 2002. A history of
patented methods of ozone production from 1897 to 1997. Lab Physical Environ. Sci.,
Dept. Chem., Valdosta State Univ., Valdosta, GA. (http://www.valdosta.edu/~tmanning/
research/ozone/) Accessed July 22, 2008.
15. B Langlais, DA Reckhow, and DR Brink. 1991. Ozone in water treatment: Application and engineering. MI: Lewis Publishers. 225–47.
16. H Zhou, DW Smith, and SJ Stanley. 1994. Modeling of dissolved ozone concentration
17. GA Hughmark. 1967. Holdup and mass transfer in bubble columns. Industrial Engi-neering Chemical Process Design and Development 6 (2): 218–20.
18. NJ Hepworth, JRM Hammond, and J Varley. 2004. Novel application of computer
vision to determine bubble size distributions in beer. Journal of Food Engineering 61:
119–24.
19. GJ Kim, AE Yousef, and S Dave. 1999. Application of ozone for enhancing safety and
quality of foods: A review. Journal of Food Protection 62 (9): 1071–87.
casses and chill water. Journal of Food Science 51 (2): 305–9.
21. BM Gorman, JN Sofos, JB Morgan, GR Schmidt, and GC Smith. 1995. Evaluation
of hand-trimming, various sanitizing agents, and hot water spray-washing as decon-
tamination interventions for beef brisket adipose tissue. Journal of Food Protection 58:
899–907.
22. JO Reagan, GR Acuff, DR Bueye, MJ Buyck, JS Dickson, CL Kastner, JL Marsden, et
al. 1996. Trimming and washing of beef carcasses as a method of improving the micro-
biological quality of meat. Journal of Food Protection 59: 751–56
23. MV Silva da, PA Gibbs, and RM Kirby. 1998. Sensorial and microbial effects of gase-
ous ozone on fresh scad (Trachurus trachurus). Journal of Applied Microbiology 84:
802–10.
24. P Kaothien, R Jhala, D Henning, JL Julson, K Muthukumarappan, and RI Dave. 2001.
Effectiveness of ozone for controlling L. monocytogenes in cured ham. Presented at the
IFT Annual Meeting, New Orleans, LA.
25. BC Hampson, J Montevalco, and DW Williams. 1996. Regulation of ozone as a food
sanitizing agent: Application of ozonation in sanitizing vegetable process wash waters.
Presented at the IFT Annual Meeting, Book of Abstracts. Chicago, IL, 140–42.
26. X Liangji. 1999. Use of ozone to improve the safety of fresh fruits and vegetables. Food Technology 53: 58–61.
27. S Naitoh, Y Okada, and T Sakai. 1987. Studies on utilization of ozone in food preserva-
tion: III. Microbicidal properties of ozone on cereal grains, cereal grain powders, peas,
beans and whole spices. Journal of Japanese Society of Food Science and Technology
34: 788–93.
28. S Naitoh, Y Okada, and T Sakai. 1988. Studies on utilization of ozone in food preserva-
ing storage. Journal of Japanese Society of Food Science and Technology 35: 69–77.
29. J Zhao, and PM Cranston. 1995. Microbial decontamination of black pepper by ozone
and effects of treatment on volatile oil constituents of the spice. Journal of the Science of Food and Agriculture 68: 11–18.
55534_C010.indd 27755534_C010.indd 277 10/22/08 10:17:37 AM10/22/08 10:17:37 AM
profiles in bubble columns. Journal of Environmental Engineering 120 (4): 821–40.
20. BW Sheldon, and AL Brown. 1986. Efficacy of ozone as a disinfectant for poultry car-
tion: V. Changes microflora of ozone treated cereals, grains, peas, beans and spices dur-
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
278 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
30. D Beltra´n, MV Selma, JA Tudela, and MI Gil. 2005. Effect of different sanitizers on
phere or vacuum packaging. Postharvest Biology and Technology 37: 37–46.
31. D Beltrán, MV Selma, A Marín, and MI Gil. 2005. Ozonated water extends the shelf
life of fresh-cut lettuce. Journal of Agricultural and Food Chemistry 53: 5654–63.
32. LR Beuchat. 1992. Surface disinfection of raw produce. Dairy Food Environmental Sanitation 12: 6–9.
33. JS Chen, MO Balaban, CI Wei, MR Marshall, and WY Hsu. 1992. Inactivation of
polyphenol oxidase by high pressure CO2. Journal of Agricultural and Food Chemis-try 40: 2345–49.
34. MM Barth, C Zhou, J Mercier, and FA Payne. 1995. Ozone storage effects on antocyanin
content and fungal growth in blackberries. Journal of Food Science 60 (6): 1286–88.
35. P Sarig, T Zahavi, Y Zutkhi, S Yannai, N Lisher, and R Ben-Arie. 1996. Ozone for con-
trol and post-harvest decay of table grapes caused by Rhizopus stolonifer. Physiology Molecular Plant Pathology 48: 403–15.
36. L Goche, and B Cox. 1999. Ozone treatment of fresh H&G Alaska salmon. Report to
Alaska Science and Technology Foundation and Alaska Department of Environmental
37. SA Dave. 1999. Effect of ozone against Salmonella enteritidis in aqueous suspensions
and on poultry meat. M.Sc. Thesis, Ohio State Univ. Columbus Ohio, Columbus, OH,
USA, 26–68.
38. A Dondo, C Nachman, L Doglione, A Rosso, and A Genetti. 1992. Foods: Their
preservation by combined use of refrigeration and ozone. Ingegneria Alimentare-Le Conserve Animali 8: 16–25.
39. BM Gorman, SL Kuchevar, LW Sofos, JB Morgan, GR Schmidt, and GC Smith. 1997.
Changes on beef adipose tissue following decontamination with chemical solutions or
water 351C or 741C. Journal of Muscle Foods 8: 185–97.
40. DG Hill, and RG Rice. 1982. Historical background properties and applications. In: RG
Rice, and A Netzer, eds. Handbook of ozone technology and applications. Ann Arbor,
MI: Ann Arbor Science, 1: 1–37.
els in cotton seed and peanut meals by ozonization. Journal of American Oil Chemical Society 45 (2): 93–97.
42. G Kaess, and JF Weidemann. 1968. Ozone treatment of chilled beef. Effect of low con-
centrations of ozone on microbial spoilage and surface color of beef. Journal of Food Technology 3: 325–34.
43. R Gammon, and A Karelak. 1973. Gaseous sterilization of foods. American Institute of Chemical Engineering Symposium Series 69 (132): 91–102.
44. Lyons-Magnus. 1999. Ozone Use Survey Data. Ozone Treatment of Fresh Strawberries.
Data submitted to EPRI Agriculture and Food Alliance, September 28, Lyons-Magnus.
Fresno, CA.
45. Y Han, JD Floros, RH Linton, SS Nielsen, and PE Nelson. 2002. Response surface
modeling for the inactivation of E. coli O157: H7 on green peppers by ozone gas treat-
ment. Journal of Food Science 67 (3): 3188–93.
46. N Singha, RK Singh, and AK Bhuniab. 2003. Sequential disinfection of E. coli O157:
H7 inoculated alfa alfa seeds before and during sprouting using aqueous chloride
dioxide, ozonated water and thyme essential oil. LWT Food Science and Technology
36 (2): 235–43.
47. J Song, L Fan, PD Hildebrand, and CF Forney. 2000. Biological effects of corona dis-
charge on onions in a commercial storage facility. Horticulture Technology 10 (3):
608–12.
55534_C010.indd 27855534_C010.indd 278 10/22/08 10:17:38 AM10/22/08 10:17:38 AM
microbial and sensory quality of fresh-cut potato strips stored under modified atmos-
Conservation, November, Seattle, Washington Surefish.
41. CI Dwankanath, ET Rayner, GE Mann, and FG Dollar. 1968. Reduction of aflatoxin lev-
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Ozone Treatment of Food Materials 279
apples. Journal of Food Science 66: 1380–84.
49. JG Kim, and AE Yousef. 2000. Inactivation kinetics of foodborne spoilage and patho-
genic bacteria by ozone. Journal of Food Science 65 (3): 521–28.
50. EA Bryant, GP Fulton, and GL Budd. 1992. Disinfection alternatives for safe drinking water. NY: Van Nostrand Reinhold.
51. EL Stover, and RW Jarnis. 1981. Obtaining high level wastewater disinfection with
ozone. Journal of Water Pollution Control Federation 53: 1637–47.
against various food related micro-organisms. Applied and Environmental Microbiol-ogy 61: 3471–75.
53. A Pascual, I Llorca, and A Canut. 2007. Use of ozone in food industries for reduc-
ing the environmental impact of cleaning and disinfection activities. Trends in Food Science and Technology 18: S29–35.
54. M Cho, H Chung, and J Yoon. 2003. Disinfection of water containing natural organic
matter by using ozone-initiated radical reactions. Applied and Environmental Microbi-ology 69: 2284–91.
55. ZB Guzel-Seydim, AK Grene, and AC Seydim. 2004. Use of ozone in food industry.
Lebensmittel Wissenschaft und Technologie 37: 453–60.
56. LL Dock. 1995. Development of thermal and non-thermal preservation methods for
producing microbially safe apple cider. Thesis, Purdue University, West Lafayette, IN.
57. RC Williams, SS Sumner, and DA Golden. 2005. Inactivation of Escherichia coli O157:H7 and Salmonella in apple cider and orange juice treated with combinations of
ozone, dimethyl dicarbonate, and hydrogen peroxide. Journal of Food Science 70 (4):
M197–201.
58. FDA. 2004. Guidance for Industry: Recommendations to Processors of Apple Juice
or Cider on the Use of Ozone for Pathogen Reduction Purposes. http://www.cfsan.fda.
gov/~dms/juicgu13.html. Accessed July 22, 2008.
59. RG Rice, JW Farguhar, and LJ Bollyky. 1982. Review of the applications of ozone
for increasing storage times of perishable foods. Ozone Science and Engineering 4:
147–63.
frozen boot and during thawing. Indian aliment. Agriculture 89: 585–89.
61. SD Richardson. 1994. Drinking water disinfection by-products. In: RA Meyers, ed.
The encyclopedia of environmental analysis and remediation. NY: John Wiley & Sons.
Vol. 3: 1398–1421.
62. L Zhang, Z Lu, Z Yu, and X Gao. 2005. Preservation fresh-cut celery by treatment of
ozonated water. Food Control 16: 279–83.
63. L Lewis, H Zhuang, FA Payne, and MM Barth. 1996. Beta-carotene content and
aging. In 1996 IFT Annual Meeting Book of Abstracts. Chicago: Institute of Food
Technologists.
64. MWF Luwe, U Takahama, and U Heber. 1993. Role of ascorbate in detoxifying ozone in
the apoplast of spinach (Spinacia oleracea L.) leaves. Plant Physiology 101: 969–76.
65. A Ranieri, G D’Urso, C Nali, G Lorenzini, and GF Soldatini. 1996. Ozone stimulates
apoplastic antioxidant systems in pumpkin leaves. Physiologia Plantarum 97: 381–87.
66. AG Perez, C Sanz, JJ Rios, R Olias, JM Olias. 1999. Effects of ozone treatment on
postharvest strawberry quality. Journal of Agricultural and Food Chemistry 47:
1652–56.
67. A Nadas, M Olmo, and JM Garcia. 2003. Growth of Botrytis cinerea and strawberry
quality in ozone-enriched atmospheres. Journal of Food Science 68 (5): 1798–802.
55534_C010.indd 27955534_C010.indd 279 10/22/08 10:17:39 AM10/22/08 10:17:39 AM
48. M Achen, and AE Yousef. 2001. Efficacy of ozone against Escherichia coli O157:H7 on
52. L Restaino, E Frampton, J Hemphill, and P Palnikar. 1995. Efficacy of ozonated water
60. J Fournaud, and R Lauret. 1972. Influence of ozone on the surface microbial flora of
color assessment in ozone-treated broccoli florets during modified atmosphere pack-
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
280 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
68. JG Kim, AE Yousef, and MA Khadre. 2001. Microbiological aspects of ozone applica-
tions in food: A review. Journal of Food Science 66 (9): 2035–52.
69. LH Choi, and SS Nielsen. 2005. The effects of thermal and nonthermal processing
methods on apple cider quality and consumer acceptability. Journal of Food Quality
28: 13–29.
70. F Artes-Hernandez, E Aguayo, F Artes, and FA Tomas-Barberan. 2007. Enriched ozone
atmosphere enhances bioactive phenolics in seedless table grapes after prolonged shelf
life. Journal of the Science of Food and Agriculture 87: 824–31.
71. H Urano, and S Fukuzaki. 2001. Facilitation of alumina surfaces fouled with heat-
treated bovine serum albumin by ozone treatment. Journal of Food Protection 64 (1):
108–12.
72. BC Hampson. 2000. Use of ozone for winery and environmental sanitation. Practical Winery and Vineyard (Jan/Feb): 27–30.
55534_C010.indd 28055534_C010.indd 280 10/22/08 10:17:39 AM10/22/08 10:17:39 AM
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
281
11 UV Pasteurization of Food Materials
Kathiravan Krishnamurthy, Joseph Irudayaraj, Ali Demirci, and Wade Yang
CONTENTS
11.1 Introduction ................................................................................................. 281
11.2 UV and Pulsed UV Light Processing .........................................................282
11.2.1 Interaction of Light and Matter .....................................................282
11.2.2 Pulsed UV Light ............................................................................284
11.2.3 UV Light and Pulsed UV Light Inactivation Mechanisms ...........285
11.2.4 Selected Inactivation Studies by UV Light and
Pulsed UV Light ............................................................................289
11.2.5 Inactivation Modeling ................................................................... 291
11.2.6 Other Applications of UV Light and Pulsed UV Light ................ 293
11.2.7 Effect of UV Light on Food Components and Quality ................. 293
11.2.8 Economics of UV Light Disinfection System ............................... 295
11.2.9 Challenges in the Application of UV Light and Pulsed UV
Light and Future Research Needs ................................................. 295
11.3 Conclusions ................................................................................................. 298
References ..............................................................................................................299
11.1 INTRODUCTION
Consumption of food contaminated with pathogenic microorganisms cause illnesses
and deaths resulting in several billion dollars losses. Because of rigorous governmen-
tal regulations and potential risk of costly recalls, the food industry has been forced
to ensure that their food products are free from pathogenic microorganisms. Further-
more, increased consumer awareness about minimally processed foods and industries’
thirst to reduce the total cost of food processing, propels researchers to investigate the
material while preserving the quality. Owing to the increased consumer demand for
wholesome and fresh-like products, application of novel food processing technologies
UV light have been investigated. UV light and pulsed UV light are two such methods,
which are already approved by the Food and Drug Administration (FDA), for reduction
of pathogens in different food products [1]. Pulsed UV light encompasses energy from
55534_C011.indd 28155534_C011.indd 281 10/22/08 10:18:48 AM10/22/08 10:18:48 AM
efficacy of alternative food processing technologies to effectively pasteurize the food
such as pulsed electric field, high pressure processing, ultraviolet (UV) light, pulsed
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
282 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
Ultraviolet, visible and infrared light regions. However, majority of the energy comes
from the UV region. Therefore in this chapter, pasteurization by both UV light and
pulsed UV light will be presented.
UV light has been used as a bactericidal agent from 1928 [2]. UV light is divided
into the following four regions according to their wavelength: vacuum UV (100–
200 nm), UV-C (200–280 nm), UV-B (280–315 nm), and UV-A (315–400 nm) [3].
UV light disinfection is rather one of the widely studied applications. In addition to
inactivating the microorganisms in food, UV light can also increase the Vitamin D
content of the food. UV light had been used for enriching the vitamin D content of
milk a few decades ago.
Pulsed UV light is an emerging technology, wherein the energy is multiplied
several folds by storing the energy in a capacitor and releasing it as a short duration
production of a broadband spectrum ranging from UV to infrared. For the same total
energy, pulsed UV light is four to six times more effective than the conventional UV
light in terms of pathogen inactivation, as suggested by several researchers [28].
Though the total energy is the same, instantaneous energy of pulsed UV light is
several thousand times higher than the conventional UV light due to the very short
pulse duration (in terms of few nanoseconds to microseconds). Pulsed UV light has
been proven to be very effective in inactivating various microorganisms present in
different food products.
11.2 UV AND PULSED UV LIGHT PROCESSING
11.2.1 INTERACTION OF LIGHT AND MATTER
Light consists of discrete fundamental packets of energy known as photons, which
contains energy based on the wavelength of light (Equation 11.1).
E hhc
= =υλ
(11.1)
where, E is the energy of photon, h is the Planck’s constant (6.626 × 10−34 J s), υ the
frequency of light, c is the speed of light in vacuum, and λ is the wavelength of light.
The typical quantum energy of photons is given for the region of pulsed UV light
in Table 11.1. The photons in the UV region have higher energy than visible light
followed by infrared region (Table 11.1). Therefore, photons in the UV region may
account for the predominant inactivation of pathogens. The temperature increase
due to the infrared region is much higher than visible and UV light regions and thus
temperature build-up in pulsed UV light processing can be attributed to the contri-
bution from infrared region.
A major limiting factor for both UV light and pulsed UV light is poor penetration
capacity. This limits the application of these technologies to i) surface sterilization,
ii) clear liquid foods, and iii) thin layers of food materials, to be effective. When
light of initial intensity (I0) falls on a food surface, only a portion of the light is actu-
55534_C011.indd 28255534_C011.indd 282 10/22/08 10:18:55 AM10/22/08 10:18:55 AM
intermittent pulses in a lamp filled with inert gases such as xenon. This leads to the
ally absorbed by the food material, whereas the rest of the energy is reflected back,
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
UV Pasteurization of Food Materials 283
transmitted, and/or scattered. Intensity of the light decays as it penetrates through
the food material, along a distance of x beneath the food surface as follows [5]
I TI e x= −0 (11.2)
light at a distance x from the surface, I0 is the initial intensity of the light, and x is
the distance below the food surface. During absorption, some amount of light is dis-
sipated as heat and transferred to the inner layers through conduction [5], whereas
the rest can be absorbed by food molecules and microorganisms which may in turn
cause some chemical/physical changes. As the intensity of UV light exponentially
decays within the food material, it is more effective for surface sterilization and
sterilization of highly transparent liquids such as water. However, pulsed UV light,
owing to its high energy and wavelength make-up, can have increased penetration
capacity.
Less transparent foods have to be treated in a thin layer to overcome the penetra-
tion limitation. Futhermore, good mixing can aid in uniform exposure. UV light is
absorbed and penetrates into the microorganism depending upon the chemical com-
position, size of the microorganism, wavelength of interest, and medium of introduc-
tion etc. (Table 11.2). For instance, increase in the size of the microorganism results
in decreased transmission at lower UV wavelengths (Table 11.2). As indicated earlier
(Table 11.1), photons from UV range have high energy. Table 11.3 lists the chemical
bond energy of some common chemical bonds, which corresponds to the energy of
break most of these chemical bonds. Hence, UV light can cause cleavage in organic
TABLE 11.1Characteristics of UV, Visible, and Infrared Regions of Electromagnetic Spectrum
RegionWavelength
(nm)Frequency
(Hz)Photon Energy
(eV)Molar Photon
Energy (kJ/mol)
Vacuum UV 100–200 3.00 × 1016–3.00 × 1015 124–12.4 11975–1197
UV-C 200–280 3.00 × 1015–1.07 × 1015 12.40–4.43 1197–427
UV-B 280–315 1.07 × 1015–9.52 × 1014 4.43–3.94 427–380
UV-A 315–400 9.52 × 1014–7.49 × 1014 3.94–3.10 380–299
Visible light 400–700 7.49 × 1014–4.28 × 1014 3.10–1.77 299–171
Near infrared 700–1400 4.28 × 1014–2.14 × 1014 1.77–0.89 171–85.5
Mid infrared 1400–3000 2.14 × 1014–9.99 × 1013 0.89–0.41 85.5–39.9
Far infrared 3000–10000 9.99 × 1013–3.00 × 1013 0.41–0.12 39.9–12.0
Source: K Krishnamurthy. 2006. Decontamination of milk and water by pulsed UV light and infrared heat-
ing. PhD dissertation, Pennsylvania State University, University Park, PA.
55534_C011.indd 28355534_C011.indd 283 10/22/08 10:18:56 AM10/22/08 10:18:56 AM
where T is the transparency coefficient of the food material, I is the intensity of the
photons in the UV range. Therefore, it is clear that UV light has sufficient energy to
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
284 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
compounds. Furthermore, as UV light has the energy in the magnitude of covalent
bond energy, it mainly breaks the covalent bonds of the target material [4].
As the energy of photons in UV light range is high, they can even cause ioniza-
tion of molecules whereas visible light and infrared causes vibration and rotation of
molecules, respectively. When the molecules absorb the energy, they are elevated
to an excited state. These excited molecules can (i) relax back to the ground state
by releasing the energy as heat; (ii) relax back to the ground state by releasing the
energy as photons, or (iii) can induce some chemical changes [4]. Because of these
mechanisms, pulsed UV light can cause chemical changes and changes due to tem-
perature build-up in the microorganism to varying degrees.
11.2.2 PULSED UV LIGHT
Pulsed UV light is also referred as pulsed light, high intensity light, UV light, broad-
spectrum white light, pulsed white light, and near infrared light [8]. For pulsed UV
light generation, the electrical energy is stored in a capacitor over a short period of
time (few milliseconds) and released as very short period pulses (several nanosec-
krypton), causing ionization of gas and the production of a broad spectrum of light
in the wavelength region of UV to near infrared. Typically the pulse rate is 1–20
pulses per second and the pulse width is 300 ns to 1 ms. Pulsed UV light has very
high energy as evident by the fact that the intensity of pulsed light is 20,000 times
more than that of sunlight [9]. Though the total energy of pulsed UV light can be
comparable to that of continuous UV light, the instantaneous energy is multiplied
several thousand times due to its short pulse width. Due to its increased energy,
pulsed UV light treatment is more effective than continuous UV light treatment for
rapid inactivation of microorganisms [9].
Pulsed light is a broad spectrum radiation from UV light to infrared radiation,
with a typical wavelength range of 100–1100 nm. In a typical pulsed UV light
system, the majority of the energy is produced from the UV light portion. For
instance, a commercial Steripulse-XL® pulsed UV light system produces approxi-
mately 54, 26, and 20% energy from UV, visible, and infrared regions, respectively
[10]. Furthermore, the UV portion of the pulsed UV light has higher energy level
than visible light and infrared region (Table 11.1). Due to its high energy level, UV
TABLE 11.2Percent Transmission to the Center of Selected Cells and Viruses
Biological Sample Diameter (μm)
Percent Transmission at Selected Wavelengths (%)
200 nm 250 nm 300 nm 350 nm
Virus (herpes simplex) 0.15 66 80 100 100
Bacteria 1 33 78 98 100
Yeast 5 1.6 69 97 100
Source: TP Coolhill. 2003. Action spectroscopy: Ultraviolet radiation. In: WM Horspool and F Lenci, eds.
CRC Handbook of Organic Photochemistry and Photobiology. pp. 113.3 Boca Ration: CRC Press.
55534_C011.indd 28455534_C011.indd 284 10/22/08 10:19:00 AM10/22/08 10:19:00 AM
onds to microseconds) and transferred through a lamp filled with inert gas (xenon or
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
UV Pasteurization of Food Materials 285
light can ionize the molecules, whereas visible light results in vibration of mol-
ecules and infrared in rotation of molecules.
Previous research shows that pulsed UV light is four to six times more effective
than the continuous UV light [11,28]. Pulsed UV light is gaining attention in recent
sterilization with no toxic by-products [1]. It can be effectively used to inactivate
pathogens on the surface of food or packaging materials. Furthermore, it can also
be used for in-package sterilization if a packaging material can allow UV light to
penetrate [12].
11.2.3 UV LIGHT AND PULSED UV LIGHT INACTIVATION MECHANISMS
UV light exhibits germicidal properties from 100 to 280 nm (UV-C region). The
inactivation occurring between 254 and 264 nm (Figure 11.1). As a typical conven-
tional mercury UV lamp produces UV light at 254 nm, this wavelength is often used
TABLE 11.3Strength of Common Bonds in Biomolecules
Chemical Bond Type WavelengthBond Dissociation Energy (kJ/mole)
N≡N 129 930
C≡C 147 816
C=O 168 712
C=N 195 615
C=C 196 611
P=O 238 502
O–H 259 461
H–H 275 435
P–O 286 419
C–H 289 414
N–H 308 389
C–O 340 352
C–C 344 348
S–H 353 339
C–N 408 293
C–S 460 260
N–O 539 222
S–S 559 214
Source: DL Nelson, and MM Cox. 2001. Lehninger Principles of Biochemistry. pp. 11 New York: Worth Publishers.
55534_C011.indd 28555534_C011.indd 285 10/22/08 10:19:01 AM10/22/08 10:19:01 AM
years because it can provide sufficient antimicrobial inactivation and commercial
inactivation efficiency of UV light follows a bell shaped curve with the maximum
for comparison of the disinfection efficiencies of conventional UV lamps.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
286 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
As only the absorbed UV light energy induces photophysical, photochemical,
and/or photothermal effects necessary for inactivation of pathogenic microorganisms,
it is crucial to have a proper lamp design to enhance the absorption of energy from
the germicidal range. Among the constituents of the microorganisms, DNA base
pairs readily absorb UV light because of their aromatic ring structure. In general,
pyrimidines (thymine (DNA), cytosine (DNA and RNA) and uracil (RNA)) are
strong absorbers of photons in the UV range, leading to changes in the chemical
structure, resulting in bacterial inactivation [13].
The main inactivation mechanism for UV light is the formation of thymine dimers
in bacterial DNA. Upon formation of the dimers, bacterial DNA cannot be unzipped
for replication and thus cannot reproduce [14,15]. Though cyclobutyl pyrimidine dimer
formation is the main inactivation mechanism, there are other photoproducts formed
during UV light processing including pyrimidine pyrimidinone-[6-4]- photoproduct,
Dewar pyrimidinone, adenine–thymine heterodimer, cytosine photohydrate, thym-
ine photohydrates, single strand break, and DNA-protein crosslink (Table 11.4).
Approximately 77 and 78% of the photoproducts produced by UV-C and UV-B
radiation, respectively are cyclobutyl pyrimidine dimers (Table 11.4). Pyrimidine
pyrimidinone-[6-4]- photoproduct is the next major photoproduct, as they contribute
to approximately 20 and 10% of the total photoproducts formed by UV-C and UV-B,
respectively (Table 11.4). Formation of these photoproducts depends on the wavelength,
DNA sequence, and protein–DNA interactions [16]. The major photochemical changes
that occur in DNA upon UV light exposure includes: DNA chain breakage, cross-link-
ing of strands, hydration of pyrimidines, and formation of dimers between adjacent
residues in the polynucleotide chain [17]. Aromatic amino acids such as phenylalanine
and tryptophane also absorb UV light effectively [18] and thus denature these amino
acids present in the microorganisms.
FIGURE 11.1 Light in Water and Wastewater Sanitation. Boca Raton: W.H. Freeman Publishers.)
% act.
100
80
60
40
20
220 260 300 nm
Rela
tive
bacte
ricid
al effect
254
55534_C011.indd 28655534_C011.indd 286 10/22/08 10:19:01 AM10/22/08 10:19:01 AM
Germicidal efficiency of UV light. (From WJ Masschelein. 2002. Ultraviolet
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
UV Pasteurization of Food Materials 287
Though UV light can damage the microorganisms, some of them can repair
themselves by photo-reactivation or dark repair. As the name indicates, photo-
reactivation requires the presence of light, while dark repair is a light-independent
process [19]. Photo-reactivation occurs in the wavelength range of 330–480 nm
because of the activation of DNA photolyase. DNA photolyases splits the thym-
ine dimers which the were formed due to UV light exposure [20] and thus the
microorganism can start replicating again. The photo-reactivated microorganisms
are much more resistant to UV light and thus require higher dose for inactivation
[21–23]. As can be seen from Table 11.5, cells require more energy for inactivation
after being treated once and reactivated. Therefore, higher levels of UV doses are
needed for complete inactivation of pathogenic microorganisms by damaging the
cells beyond repair by photo-reactivation and dark repair.
In addition to the germicidal UV-C portion of the UV light, UV-A (315–400
nm) damages the membrane by the production of active oxygen species and H2O2
[24]. However, UV-A has very little impact on microbial cells unless exogenous
photosensitizers are used with the UV treatment and absorbed by the bacterial
cell [25].
Due to structural differences, spores respond differently to UV light. Riesenman
and Nicholson reported that the resistance in Bacillus subtilis spores was induced by
the thick protein coat [26]. Furthermore, the DNA of a bacterial spore has a different
conformation than the DNA of the vegetative cell. Unlike vegetative cells, Bacillus spores did not produce any detectable amount of thymine containing dimers [27].
The predominant photoproduct produced in spores is 5-thyminyl-5,6 dihydrothym-
ine adduct (also called as “spore photo-product”).
As pulsed UV light has energy from UV, visible, and infrared regions, energy
from all the three regions contribute towards the inactivation. However, inactiva-
tion is expected to be predominately caused by the UV light portion of the broad
TABLE 11.4Photoproducts Produced in DNA because of Absorption of UV Light
Photoproduct
Percentage of Total Photoproducts
UV-C UV-B
Cyclobutyl pyrimidine dimer 77 78
Pyrimidine pyrimidinone[6–4]-photoproduct 20 10
Dewar pyrimidinone 0.8 10
Adenine–thymine heterodimer 0.2 –
Cytosine photohydrate −2.0 −2.0
Thymine photohydrates n/a n/a
Single strand break <0.1 <0.1
DNA-protein cross link <0.1 <0.1
Source: DL Mitchell. 2003. DNA damage and repair. In: WM Horspool, F Lenci, eds. CRC Handbook of Organic Photochemistry and Photobiology. pp. 140.4 Boca Raton: CRC Press.
55534_C011.indd 28755534_C011.indd 287 10/22/08 10:19:02 AM10/22/08 10:19:02 AM
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
288 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
spectrum. Krishnamurthy examined the pulsed UV light treated cells with transmis-
sion electron microscopy and Fourier transform spectroscopy [4]. The author reported
that pulsed UV light induced cell wall breakage, cytoplasm leakage, damage in the
cellular membrane structure, and leakage of the cellular content in Staphylococcus aureus. The temperature increase during the treatment was negligible (increase of
2–3°C) as the cells were treated for only 5 sec with a Xenon-Steripulse-XL® unit.
Therefore, pulsed UV light might have some shocking effect on the cell wall/cyto-
plasmic membrane of bacteria [4] as the effect from the temperature increase was
negligible and photochemical transformation does not lead to physical damage to
the cells. The author proposed that the constant disturbance caused to the bacteria
by exposing it to a repeated cycle of short duration high intensity pulses resulted
in damages to cell wall and cytoplasmic membrane. It is also hypothesized that
pulsed UV light exposure can lead to thermal stress on bacterial cell especially at 2
ria is induced by the differences in the heating and cooling rates of bacteria and the
surrounding matrix [28]. Bacteria can also be overheated due to the differences in
the absorption characteristics of the bacteria and the surrounding medium. Due to
overheating, bacteria become a local vaporization center and may generate a small
Fukunaga, Isobe, Arihara, and Itoh investigated the mechanisms of damage induced
in yeast cells by pulsed light and continuous UV light [29]. The authors reported
that the DNA damage induced by continuous UV light was slightly higher than that
TABLE 11.5UV Light Exposure (at 254 nm) Required for 4-log10 Reduction of Pathogens in Drinking Water
MicroorganismExposure Required without
Reactivation (J/cm2)Exposure Required with
Reactivation (J/cm2)
Citrobacter freundii 80 250
Enterobacter cloacae 100 330
Enterocolitica faecium 170 200
Escherichia coli ATCC 11229 100 280
Escherichia coli ATCC 23958 50 200
Klebsiella pneumoniae 110 310
Mycobacerium smegmatis 200 270
Pseudomonas aeruginosa 110 190
Salmonella typhi 140 190
Salmonella typhimurium 130 250
Serratia marcescens 130 300
Vibrio cholerae wild isolate 50 210
Yersinia enterocolitica 100 320
Source: Hoyer. 1998. Testing performance and monitoring of UV systems for drinking water disinfec-
tion. Water Supply. 16: 424–29.
55534_C011.indd 28855534_C011.indd 288 10/22/08 10:19:03 AM10/22/08 10:19:03 AM
higher flux densities (0.5 J/cm ), leading to cell rupture. Localized heating of bacte-
steam flow causing membrane destruction [29]. Takeshita, Shibato, Sameshima,
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
UV Pasteurization of Food Materials 289
of pulsed light. Protein elution because of pulsed UV light was also higher than
that resulting from continuous UV light, suggesting possible leakage of the cellular
contents. Wekhof suggested that the inactivation mechanism of pulsed UV light
includes both the germicidal action of UV-C light and rupture of microorganism
because of thermal stress caused by other UV components [30].
Therefore, the inactivation mechanism of pulsed UV light [4] can be catego-
rized into:
a. Photo-chemical effect: Thymine dimer formation and other photo-
chemical changes in DNA.
b. Photo-thermal effect: Damage caused to the bacterial cell because
of the differences in the heating rates of bacteria and the surrounding
media resulting in localized heating of bacterial cell.
c. Photo-physical effect: Structural damage to bacterial cells caused due
to the disturbances of intermittent high energy pulses.
11.2.4 SELECTED INACTIVATION STUDIES BY UV LIGHT AND PULSED UV LIGHT
Inactivation of microorganisms by UV light had been extensively studied for several dec-
ades, especially for water disinfection. Chang, Ossoff, Lobe, Dorfman, Dumais, Qualls,
S. typhi, Shigella sonnei, Streptococcus fecalis, and S. aureus. The bacterial cells were
resuspended in sterile buffer water and the aggregated groups of bacteria were removed
UV light [31]. E. coli, S. aureus, S. sonnei, and S. tyhi exhibited similar resistance to the
UV light and a 3 log10 reduction was obtained with approximately 7 × 10−3 J/cm2 energy.
However, the resistance exhibited by S. fecalis was higher and required a 1.4-times
higher dose than the above-mentioned microorganisms to obtain a 3 log10 reduction
of inactivation. Stermer, Lasater-Smith, and Brasington also investigated the effect of
UV light on inactivation of bacteria on lamb meat. A 3 log10 reduction of the naturally
cus spp.) was obtained with approximately 4 × 10−3 J/cm2 energy [32].
UV light was also used for inhibition of pathogens on the surface of fresh produce
[33]. The surfaces of red delicious apples, leaf lettuce, and tomatoes were inoculated
with Salmonella spp. or E. coli O157:H7 and treated with UV-C light at a wavelength
of 253.7 nm with different doses ranging from 1.5 to 24 × 10−3 W/cm2. A 3.3 log10
CFU/apple reduction was obtained for E. coli O157:H7 at 24 × 10−3 W/cm2, whereas,
a 2.19 log10 CFU/tomato reduction was obtained for E. coli O157:H7 at 24 × 10−3
W/cm2. Similarly, lettuce inoculated with Salmonella spp. and E. coli O157:H7
resulted in 2.65 and 2.79 log10
of orange juice was treated with UV light at 214.2 W/m2 in order to increase the
shelf life twice [34]. UV light was also successfully used for inactivation of Listeria monocytogenes in goat’s milk. More than 5 log reduction was obtained when the
milk received cumulative energy dose of 15.8 ± 1.6 mJ/cm2 [35]. Wright, Sumner,
Hackney, Pierson, and Zoecklein used UV light for reducing E. coli O157:H7 popu-
lation. Average UV doses of 10.288, 14.713, and 61.005 μW-s/cm2 resulted in average
reductions of 3.1, 3.0, and 5.4 log10 CFU/ml, respectively [36].
55534_C011.indd 28955534_C011.indd 289 10/22/08 10:19:04 AM10/22/08 10:19:04 AM
and Johnson investigated the efficacy of UV light on inactivation of Escherichia coli,
using a 1.0-μm nucleopore polycarbonate membrane and the filtrate was treated with
CFU/lettuce reductions, respectively [33]. A thin film
occurring microfloras of lamb (mostly Pseudomonas, Micrococcus, and Staphylococ-
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
290 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
Due to the differences in the energy and the wavelength range, pulsed UV light
may behave differently than conventional UV light. Therefore, the effectiveness of
a continuous UV light source and a pulsed UV light source for the decontamina-
tion of the surfaces were compared. An almost identical level of inactivation of B. subtillis with 4 × 10−3 J/cm2 of pulsed UV light source and 8 × 10−3 J/cm2 continu-
ous UV light source was reported [11]. For pulsed UV light, the distance from the
lamp source, treatment time, and sample depth are the main factors determining
lamp, lesser volume, and longer treatment times result in increased inactivation.
Sonenshein reported that three pulses (1 sec) of pulsed UV light resulted in more
than 6.5 log10 CFU/ml reduction of Bacillus subtilis spores when the samples were
directly placed at the lamp axis and at the midpoint of the lamp [37]. Complete
inactivation of S. aureus in phosphate buffer was obtained with a 5 sec pulsed UV
light treatment. The reduction corresponds to 7.50 log10 CFU/ml. In case of agar
seeded S. aureus cells, a 5 sec treatment resulted in complete inactivation, yielding
a reduction of approximately 7.50 log10 CFU/ml. The authors also noted that the
temperature increase during this treatment was negligible [38].
for up to 180 sec for various distances from the light source and sample volumes.
The reduction obtained varied from 0.16 to 8.55 log10 CFU/ml, demonstrating the
ability of pulsed UV light to inactivate S. aureus in opaque food product. Complete
inactivation was obtained at (i) 8 cm sample distance from quartz window, 30 ml
sample volume, and 180 sec time combination; and (ii) 10.5 cm sample distance
from quartz window, 12 ml sample volume, and 180 sec treatment time combination
in milk. Milk was treated at 5, 8, or 11 cm distance from UV light strobe at 20,
10 reductions varied from 0.55 to 7.26 log10 CFU/ml. Complete inac-
tivation was obtained in two cases: (i) 8 cm sample distance from quartz window,
30 ml sample volume, and 180 sec treatment time combination; and (ii) 10.5 cm
sample distance from quartz window, 12 ml sample volume, and 180 sec treatment
time combination. Following further enrichment, growth was not observed in most
of the cases [39].
Alfalfa seeds inoculated with E. coli O157:H7 were subjected to pulsed UV light
[40]. The authors obtained reductions of 0.07–4.89 log10 CFU/g at different conditions
(treatment time, distance from the lamp source, and thickness of seed layer). Seeds
treated at different distances from the UV lamp had germination rate over 81% for
up to 60 sec treatment relative to a germination rate of 86% for untreated seeds. This
clearly indicates that pulsed UV light treatment did not reduce the seed viability. The
that about 1 log reduction of E. coli O157:H7 or L. monocytogenes can be achieved
within 60 sec at 8 cm distance from the lamp. This study indicates the potential of
pulsed UV light technology for surface decontamination of muscle foods.
55534_C011.indd 29055534_C011.indd 290 10/22/08 10:19:04 AM10/22/08 10:19:04 AM
the efficacy of the treatment. Therefore, several researchers have studied the effect
of these factors. Though it is product specific, in general shorter distance from the
Milk, artificially inoculated with S. aureus cells were pulsed UV light treated
efficiency. Log
efficacy of pulsed UV light for inactivation of E. coli O157:H7 and Listeria monocy-togenes Scott A on salmon fillets was also investigated [41]. The authors demonstrated
[4]. A continuous flow-through system was developed for inactivation of S. aureus
30, or 40 ml/min flow rate and treated up to three times by recirculation of milk
to determine the effect of number of passes, distance, and flow rate on inactivation
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
UV Pasteurization of Food Materials 291
Pulsed UV light can also be used for effective inactivation of spores. A 3-min
pulsed UV light treatment of honey inoculated with Clostridium sporogenes spores
resulted in approximately 89.4% reduction [42]. The authors attributed the low reduc-
tion to poor penetration capacity of pulsed UV light as the honey is really opaque
and viscous. They have also suggested that the heat build-up during pulsed UV
light treatment did not provide any synergistic effect on the inactivation of C. spo-rogenes. Pulsed UV light was also used for inactivation of Aspergillus niger spores
in corn meal [43]. The authors validated the following parameters: processing time
(20–100 sec), voltage input (2000–3800 V), and distance from UV lamp (3–13 cm).
The energy output ranged from 1.8 to 5.7 J/cm2 per pulse at 1.8 cm below the lamp
surface when the voltage was varied from 2000 to 3800 V. The optimal treatment
condition (treatment time: 50 sec, sample distance: 8 cm from the UV lamp, and
input voltage: 3800 V) resulted in a 3.12 log10 reduction of A. niger spores.
11.2.5 INACTIVATION MODELING
a shoulder and/or a tail [47]. Shoulder effect can be attributed to delayed response of a
microorganism to UV light due to injury [44,47]. Photo-reactivation, dark repair, resist-
be attributed to shielding of external particles, clumping of bacteria, and resistant micro-
N N k I t= −0
* *exp ( ) (11.3)
where N = concentration of viable microorganisms after UV light treatment (CFU/ml);
N0 = concentration of viable microorganisms before UV light treatment (CFU/ml); 2
(J/cm2); and t = treatment time (sec). Equation 11.3 can also be represented as [44]:
N N kD
D
D= =−−
⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟
0 10 10exp( ) (11.4)
210 = UV dose
required to achieve 90% reduction in microbial population.
Therefore,
logNN
DD
0
10
⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟= (11.5)
The D10 value of a microorganism evaluates the extent of the resistance to UV light.
Higher D10 values indicate that the microorganism is very resistant to UV light and
requires more energy for inactivation.
From Equation 11.4,
NN
kD
0
= −exp( ) (11.6)
55534_C011.indd 29155534_C011.indd 291 10/22/08 10:19:05 AM10/22/08 10:19:05 AM
can be represented by first-order kinetics [44–46], resulting in a sigmoidal curve with
organisms. The first order inactivation equation [46] can be represented as follows:
k = first order inactivation coefficient (cm /J); I = intensity of UV light energy applied
The dose–response curves for dispersed or free-floating microorganisms by UV light
ance of bacteria are some of the factors influencing the shoulder effect. Tailing effect can
where D = I*t = UV dose delivered or fluence rate (J/cm ); and D
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
292 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
Therefore,
log *ln( ) .
NN
kDk0 1
10 2 303
⎛⎝⎜⎜⎜
⎞⎠⎟⎟⎟= =
⎛⎝⎜⎜⎜
⎞⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟* D (11.7)
where log(N0 / N) is the log10 reduction of microbial population and (K / 2.303) is the
10 reduction versus available UV
dosage.
When the microorganism exhibits a shoulder effect, Equation 11.6 can be modi-
N N kD d= − − −0 1 1( ( exp )( ) (11.8)
where d is the intercept of the exponential phase of the dose–response curve with the
effect as follows:
N N NkD k D= +− −0e ep
p( ) ( ) (11.9)
where N0 is the concentration of dispersed microorganisms present; Np is the concen-
tration of particles containing microorganisms; and kp is the inactivation constant for
microorganisms associated with particles [44].
Inactivation models developed for UV light can also be utilized for pulsed UV
light modeling as majority of the energy comes from UV light (typically over 50%
pulsed UV light inactivation modeling. However, due to the contribution of visible
tion in the model. Therefore, researchers have used other models such as the Weibull
equation for describing the inactivation kinetics of pulsed UV light treatment. Bialka,
Demirci, and Puri successfully used the Weibull equation (Equation 11.10) to esti-
mate the microbial inactivation as a function of treatment time, depth of the sample,
and dose during pulsed UV light treatment [48]. The authors obtained R2 values of
0.91, 0.92, 0.98, and 0.96 for estimation of the reduction in the population of E. coli O157:H7 on raspberry, Salmonella on raspberry, E. coli O157:H7 on strawberry,
and Salmonella on strawberry, respectively. The corresponding root mean square
error values were 0.23, 0.06, 0.06, and 0.02, respectively, indicating that the Weibull
model was able to estimate the reduction in the microbial population due to pulsed
UV light.
log.
10
0
1
2 303
NN
t⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟
= −⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟α
β
(11.10)
where N = number of microorganisms after dose D (CFU/g); N0 = initial number of
microorganisms (CFU/g); t = treatment time (sec or min); α = characteristic time (sec
or min); and β = shape parameter (unitless).
55534_C011.indd 29255534_C011.indd 292 10/22/08 10:19:06 AM10/22/08 10:19:06 AM
slope of the fitted straight line for the plot of log
fied as
y-axis [44]. Similarly, Equation 11.6 can be modified to take into account the tailing
of the total energy). Therefore, the first order kinetics (Equation 11.4) can be used for
light and infrared heating, first order kinetics may not be able to explain all the varia-
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
UV Pasteurization of Food Materials 293
The β parameter describes the concavity of the survival curves. A value of β < 1
indicates upward concavity and β > 1 indicates downward concavity.
D value can be estimated by the Weibull model as follows [48]:
D = α( . )2 30 (11.11)
where α = characteristic time (sec or min); and β = shape parameter (unitless).
11.2.6 OTHER APPLICATIONS OF UV LIGHT AND PULSED UV LIGHT
In the wavelength region of 280–310 nm, ergosterol (provitamin) changes into natural
vitamin D3 and hence enriches the food product with vitamin D. UV light exposure
was used as the primary method for vitamin D enrichment in milk several decades
back until vitamin D production became cheaper. UV light enrichment of other prod-
ucts can also be achieved by UV light exposure. Jasinghe and Perera successfully
2
abalone mushrooms were treated with UV-A (315–400 nm), UV-B (290–315 nm),
and UV-C (190–290 nm) for a period of up to 1 h on each side of the mushrooms. The
vitamin D2 content ranged from 22.9 ± 2.7 to 184.0 ± 5.7 μg/g of dry matter, for vari-
ous mushroom and UV light combinations. The authors noted that even treatment of
5 g of shitake mushrooms for 15 min with UV-A or UV-B can provide more than the
recommended allowance of vitamin D for adults (10 μg/day). UV light can also inac-
tivate toxins. Yousef and Marth reported that reductions of 3.6–100% of alfatoxin M1
was achieved in milk with 2–60 min UV light treatment [50].
Pulsed UV light was also used for inactivation of allergens in soybean and
peanuts. Chung, Yang, and Krishnamurthy reported that the allergenicity of the
liquid peanut butter was upto reduced seven folds after pulsed UV light treatment
[51]. They indicated that pulsed UV light treatment effectively inactivated two major
peanut allergens Ara h 1 and Ara h 3. Further optimization of the treatment may
result in potential development of hypoallergenic peanut-based products or bever-
ages such as a smoothie where liquid peanut butter with reduced allergenicity may
be blended with fruit juices. This also opens another avenue for inactivation of other
food allergens.
11.2.7 EFFECT OF UV LIGHT ON FOOD COMPONENTS AND QUALITY
Though, UV light is effective in reducing the microbial population, high dose usage
may result in deterioration of food quality. For instance, depolymerization of starch
can occur under UV light in the presence of air, and sensibilizers (metal oxides, par-
ticularly ZnO) [52]. UV light forms lipid radicals, superoxide radicals, and hydrogen
peroxide [53]. Peroxides produced during UV light exposure may affect the fat soluble
vitamins and colored compounds and may lead to nutritional quality loses and/or dis-
coloration. Super oxide radials can further induce carbohydrate cross-linking, protein
cross-linking, protein fragmentation, peroxidation of unsaturated fatty acids, and loss
OH- and H+ radicals, which in turn interacts with other food components. Further-
more, UV radiation may also denature proteins, enzymes, and amino acids (especially
55534_C011.indd 29355534_C011.indd 293 10/22/08 10:19:07 AM10/22/08 10:19:07 AM
fortified edible mushrooms with vitamin D [49]. The Shitake, oyster, button and
of membrane fluidity function. Water molecules absorb UV photons and produces
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
294 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
amino acids with aromatic compounds) in food material, leading to changes in the
composition. Therefore, UV light treatment can not only change the chemistry of the
food components, but also leads to product quality deterioration when it is applied at
high doses.
treatment, oxygen radicals are formed. These oxygen radicals lead to the forma-
products. UV light can also degrade vitamins, especially vitamins A, B2, and C, by
photo-degradation. Fat soluble vitamins and colored compounds can also be affected
of methionine from methanol which leads to a burnt protein-like, burnt feathers-like,
oration of food materials. Cuvelier and Berset reported that 3 h exposure to UV light
resulted in the fading of paprika gel [55].
Pulsed UV light is also expected to induce some quality changes, when applied in
high doses. Prolonged treatment with pulsed UV light leads to temperature build-up
in color due to non-enzymatic browning, etc. The effect of UV light and pulsed
UV light on sensory quality of different food materials had been studied by several
the sensory attributes, while severe treatments lead to objectionable changes.
cider [56]. A consumer panel sensory evaluation with 40 panelists suggested that
untreated, pasteurized, and UV light treated apple ciders stored for 4 days. Further-
more, the pasteurized apple cider received less acceptable rating for color, cloudi-
ness, and overall product preference than control and UV light treated samples. This
clearly indicates that the quality changes are minimal in UV light treated apple cider
at optimum conditions when compared to thermal pasteurized cider. Consumer pan-
ness than pasteurized cider [56].
A semi-trained panel of four to six people evaluated the quality of minimally
processed white cabbage and iceberg lettuce by pulsed UV light [57]. Off-odors,
which panelists described as “plastic” were present for the pulsed light treated white
cabbage just above the acceptable limit and thus limiting the shelf life of white cab-
bage to a maximum of 7 days. However, the off-odor faded away after a couple of
hours in storage. Therefore, the off-odor can be assumed to disappear before con-
sumption by the consumers. On the other hand, it is interesting to note that pulsed
UV light treated iceberg lettuce received better scores than the control samples
for off-odor, taste, and leaf edge browning, clearly indicating that pulsed UV light
treatment can help in preserving the lettuce quality. Rice reported that the in-pack-
age UV light treatment of white bread slices with the PureBright® system resulted
in bread slices with a fresh like appearance for more than 2 weeks, although, the
55534_C011.indd 29455534_C011.indd 294 10/22/08 10:19:08 AM10/22/08 10:19:08 AM
researchers. In general, moderate treatments did not induce significant changes in
Choi and Nielsen investigated the efficacy of UV light for pasteurization of apple
there was no significant difference (p < 0.05) in the sensory scores for the odor,
elists significantly preferred UV light treated apple cider over thermally pasteurized
UV light may also cause flavor and color changes in food [54]. During UV light
tion of ozone, especially between 185 and 195 nm, causing off-flavors in the food
by the peroxides produced during extended UV light treatment. Light-induced flavor
is caused due to the activation of riboflavin, which is responsible for the conversion
or medicinal-like flavor. Prolonged treatment with UV light can also result in discol-
and thus induce temperature related quality changes such as cooked flavor, change
color, cloudiness, sweetness, acidity, overall flavor, and overall product ratings for
apple cider for color, cloudiness, sweetness, acidity, overall flavor, and overall like-
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
UV Pasteurization of Food Materials 295
control slices were dried out and had mold growth [58]. The author also suggested
that the quality of tomatoes treated with pulsed light was acceptable up to 30 days
when stored at refrigerated temperature.
In general, UV light treatment and pulsed UV light treatment of food may not
cause any adverse effect, if applied in moderate amounts. Undesirable changes
in food may occur when food is treated with UV light for an extended period of
time. Foods may need to be treated for shorter less time to achieve the desired
decontamination level, and hence there will not be any adverse change in food
light equipments can also ensure that decontamination is achieved in a short
time.
11.2.8 ECONOMICS OF UV LIGHT DISINFECTION SYSTEM
The cost of UV light disinfection systems and pulsed UV light systems is competi-
tive with other available disinfection technologies. Choi and Nielsen suggested that
it will be cost-effective for the apple cider industry to utilize UV light pasteurization,
because UV light pasteurizers cost about $15,000 [56,59]. It has been reported that
the annual power consumption and lamp replacement costs based on a minimum
dosage of 30,000 MW.s/cm2 for multilamp and single lamp continuous UV light
disinfection sources were $2465 and $3060 for an 8000 h run time [2]. The process-
ing cost for 4 log10 reduction of E. coli in primary waste water by UV light, electron
beam, and gamma irradiation were 0.4 ¢/m3, 1.25 ¢/m3, and 25 ¢/m3, respectively
[60]. This clearly indicates that the UV light treatment is cost-effective for inactiva-
tion of pathogenic microorganisms [4].
Dunn, Bushnell, Ott, and Clark estimated that a 4-J/cm2 pulsed UV light treat-
ment with the PureBright® system will cost 0.1 ¢/ft2 of the treated area, where the
estimated cost includes conservative estimates for electricity, maintenance, and
equipment amortization [61]. Lander also estimated the cost of treatment with the
PureBright® system as 0.1 ¢/ft2, where the estimated cost includes the electricity,
maintenance, and investment in a hooded high intensity lamp and power unit [62].
11.2.9 CHALLENGES IN THE APPLICATION OF UV LIGHT AND PULSED UV LIGHT AND FUTURE RESEARCH NEEDS
One of the major limitations of UV light is the poor penetration capacity. For
instance, UV light can penetrate only up to several millimeters of food material
depending upon the optical properties of the food materials [4]. The penetration
and milk were 0.02–0.1, 10, 10–20, and 300, respectively. This clearly indicates that
type of the food material determines the applicability of UV light for disinfection of
the product. Therefore, UV may be used for disinfection of pathogens in only selec-
tive food products.
55534_C011.indd 29555534_C011.indd 295 10/22/08 10:19:09 AM10/22/08 10:19:09 AM
quality. Further modification and optimization of the UV light and pulsed UV
capacity of UV light decreases as the absorption coefficient increases [21], while
the absorption coefficient of food increases as the color and turbidity of the liquid
increases. The coefficient of absorption for various liquid foods is given in Table 11.6
[63]. For instance, the coefficient of absorption of drinking water, white wine, beer,
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
296 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
UV light can easily penetrate through transparent liquids such as water. How-
ever, foods such as milk have limited penetration due to its opacity. The effective
penetration depth for milk at various wavelengths is given in Table 11.7. It is evident
from the table that the longer wavelength results in increased penetration depth. Due
to its limited penetration capacity, it is essential to apply UV light to a thin layer
of milk. Oppenlander [65] suggested some of the possible arrangements of the UV
TABLE 11.6
Products at 254 nm
Liquid Food Product −1)
Distilled water 0.007–0.01
Drinking water 0.02–0.1
Clear syrup 2–5
White wine 10
Red wine 30
Beer 10–20
Dark syrup 20–50
Milk 300
Source: G Shama. 2000. Ultraviolet light. In: RK Robinson, CA Batt and
PD Patel, eds. Encyclopedia of Food Microbiology. pp. 2212 San Diego:
Academic Press.
TABLE 11.7Wavelength Dependent Effective Penetration Depth of Milk
Wavelength (nm)Effective Penetration
Depth (mm)
250 0.036
275 0.038
300 0.041
400 0.050
500 0.058
600 0.065
700 0.073
800 0.080
Source: H Burton. 1951. Ultraviolet irradiation of milk. Dairy Science Abstracts 13(3): 229–44.
55534_C011.indd 29655534_C011.indd 296 10/22/08 10:19:09 AM10/22/08 10:19:09 AM
Coefficient of Absorption of Various Liquid Food
Coefficient of Absorption (cm
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
UV Pasteurization of Food Materials 297
light lamp in a photo-reactor, which can be utilized to enhance the effectiveness of
be essential for effective penetration in milk and other opaque food products, as a
thickness of opaque food products would be crucial for the commercial success of
this technology. The designs proposed by Oppenlander [65] can be extended to other
liquid foods and water disinfection. Addition of some absorption enhancing agents
such as edible colorants can also increase the penetration capacity [5]. Though the
penetration capacity of pulsed UV light is expected to be better than UV light, it
build-up during prolonged treatments. This can also reduce the treatment time and
enhance the quality of the food product. For opaque food materials, photocatalyzers
can also be added during pulsed UV light to enhance the effectiveness.
It will be essential to monitor the actual energy absorbed by the food sample at
different depth levels for both UV light and pulsed UV light treatments, for effective
model development and process validation. This can be challenging for pulsed UV
light as it emits polychromatic radiation ranging from UV to infrared heating. The
contribution of the temperature increase on inactivation of pathogens during pulsed
FIGURE 11.2
Germany: Wiley-VCH.)
RV Q Q R RV
Q
R
RV
Flow of
medium
Flow of
medium
Flow of
medium
Flow of
medium
A B C D
Falling filmflat bed
CFBRTubular flow-through
L L L LL
55534_C011.indd 29755534_C011.indd 297 10/22/08 10:19:10 AM10/22/08 10:19:10 AM
absorption by target material (Figure 11.2). A falling film photo-reactor design might
thin film of food material can be maintained. Other designs which may reduce the
will be essential to treat the food product as a thin film in order to avoid temperature
tube. (From T Oppenlander. 2003. Photochemical Purification of Water and Air. Weinheim,
Arrangements of lamps for flow-through systems. Cross sectional and top-
view of arrangements. A, continuous flow annular photoreactor with coaxial lamp position;
B, external lamp position with reflector (R); C, perpendicular lamp position; D, contact-free
photoreactor types (including falling film, flat bed); L, lamp, RV, reactor vessel; Q, quartz
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
298 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
of pulsed UV light.
One of the drawbacks of pulsed UV light technology is the temperature build-
up during prolonged treatments, as it can lead to quality deterioration in tem-
perature sensitive products. Therefore, the infrared region of the spectrum needs
also minimize the quality deterioration due to temperature increase. Provision of
UV light also emits radiation from 330 to 480 nm, which is responsible for photo-
reactivation (a mechanism to repair the DNA damage caused by UV light). In
spectrum.
A report submitted by Institute of Food Technologists (IFT) to the FDA identi-
1. Effects of individual parameters, such as suspended and dissolved solids
concentration.
4. Development of validation methods to ensure microbiological effectiveness.
5. Development and evaluation of kinetic models
6. Studies to optimize critical process factors.
Similarly, the National Advisory Committee on Microbiological Criteria for Foods
(NACMF) indicated the following future research needs for pulsed light [66]:
and parasites exposed to pulsed light.
activation.
4. Optimization critical process factors and development of protocols to moni-
tor critical factors.
5. Suitability of the technology for solid foods and non-clear liquids.
6. Differences between pulsed light technology and UV (255.4 nm) light treat-
ment, especially with respect to mechanism of inactivation.
11.3 CONCLUSIONS
In general, UV light and pulsed UV light can be potentially used for pasteurization
of several food materials. These technologies are also cost-effective. Furthermore,
quality deterioration during UV light and pulsed UV light processing is minimal
when applied in moderate doses. However, harsh treatments may lead to undesirable
changes in the food quality. Further optimization of these disinfection methods can
open an avenue to a myriad food products. As an emerging technology, pulsed UV
light is still in its primitive stage and thus extensive research has to be done before
the technology can be effectively used on an industrial scale. As penetration capacity
55534_C011.indd 29855534_C011.indd 298 10/22/08 10:19:12 AM10/22/08 10:19:12 AM
UV light must also be clearly identified in order to shed more light on the efficacy
to be filtered out for treatment of temperature sensitive food products. This will
a heat sink may be beneficial in avoiding excessive temperature build-up. Pulsed
order to avoid, photo-reactivation, it may be beneficial to filter out this wavelength
fied the following research needs for UV light [47]:
2. Identification of the pathogens most resistant to UV light.
3. Identification of surrogate microorganisms for pathogens.
1. Data on pulsed light effectiveness for specific commodities.
2. Comparison of resistance of specific pathogens, including bacteria, viruses,
3. Identification of critical process factors and their effect on microbial
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
UV Pasteurization of Food Materials 299
is the limiting factor for both pulsed UV light and UV light, food products have to
inactivation mechanisms of pulsed UV light can help us understand the process bet-
ter and may lead to a better and effective equipment design.
REFERENCES
1. FDA. 2000. Kinetics of Microbial Inactivation for Alternative Food Processing Tech-nologies – Pulsed Light Technology. Rockville, MD: Food and Drug Administration.
Available at: http://vm.cfsan.fda.gov/~comm/ift-puls.html. Accessed July 29, 2008.
2. Anonymous. 1989. Back to basics: The use of ultraviolet light for microbial control.
Ultrapure water 4:62–68.
3. M Perchonok. 2003. Advanced food technology workshop report: Vol. 1. Houston,
TX: National Aeronautics and Spacistration. Available at: http://hefdjsc.nasa.gov/pubs/
More/AdvFoodTechReportVol1.pdf. Accessed July 29, 2008.
4. K Krishnamurthy. 2006. Decontamination of milk and water by pulsed UV light and
infrared heating. PhD dissertation, Pennsylvania State University, University Park,
PA.
5. L Palmieri, D Cacace, and G DallAglio. 1999. Non-thermal methods of food pres-
ervation based on electromagnetic energy. Food TechnoloBiotechnology 37(2):
145–49.
6. TP Coolhill. 1995. Action spectroscopy: Ultravi. In: WM Horspool and F Lenci, eds. CRC Handbook of Organic Photochemistry and Photobiology. pp. 113.3, Boca Raton:
CRC Press.
7. DL Nelson, and MM Cox. 2001. Lehninger Principles of Biochemistry. New York:
Worth Publishers.
8. S Green, N Baskaran, and BG Swanson. 2003. High-intensity light. In: P Zeuthen, LB
Sorensen, eds. Food Preservation Techniques. pp. 284–302, Boca Raton: CRC Press.
9. J Dunn, T Ott, and W Clark. 1995. Pulsed light treatment of food and packaging. Food Technology 49: 95–98.
10. Xenon. 2003. Sterilization and Decontamination Using High Energy Light. Woburn:
Xenon Corporation.
11. KF McDonald, RD Curry, TE Clevenger, K Unklesbay, A Eisenstrack, J Golden, and
RD Morgan. 2000. A comparison of pulsed and continuous ultraviolet light sources
for the decontamination of surfaces. IEEE Transaction and Plasma Science 28:
1581–87.
12. P Butz, and B Tauscher. 2002. Emerging technologies: chemical aspects. Food Research International 35: 279–84.
13. WJ Masschelein. 2002. Ultraviolet Light in Water and Wastewater Sanitation. Boca
Raton: Lewis Publishers.
14. HL Bank, J John, MK Schmehl, and RJ Dratch. 1990. Bactericidal effectiveness of
modulated UV light. Applied and Environmental Microbiology 56: 3888–89.
15. MJ Jay. 2000. Modern Food Microbiology. Gaithersburg: Aspen Publishers.
16. DL Mitchell. 1995. DNA damage and repair. In: WM Horspool, P Song, eds. CRC Handbook of Organic Photochemistry and Photobiology. pp. 1326–1331, Boca Raton:
CRC Press.
17. RB Setlow, and JK Setlow. 1962. Evidence that ultraviolet-induced thymine dimers in
DNA cause biological damage. Proceedings of National Academy of Sciences 48(7):
1250–57.
18. Y. Henis. 1987. Survival and dormancy of bacteria. In: Y Henis, ed. Survival and Dor-mancy of Microorganisms. pp. 1–108, New York: John Wiley and Sons.
55534_C011.indd 29955534_C011.indd 299 10/22/08 10:19:12 AM10/22/08 10:19:12 AM
be treated as a thin film, especially for opaque foods. Further investigation on the
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
300 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
19. ER Blatchley, and MM Peel. 2001. Disinfection by ultraviolet irradiation. In: SS Block,
ed. Disinfection, Sterilization and Preservation. Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams &
Wilkins, 823–51.
20. GC Walker. 1984. Mutagenesis and inducible responses to deoxyribonucleic acid
damage in Escherichia coli. Microbiology Reviews 48: 60–93.
21. JA Guerrero-Beltran, and GV Barbosa-Canovas. 2004. Review: Advantages and limi-
tations on processing foods by UV light. Food Science and Technology International 10(3): 137–47.
22. Hoyer. 1998. Testing performance and monitoring of UV systems for drinking water
disinfection. Water Supply 16: 424–29.
23. SK Sastry, AK Datta, and RW Worobo. 2000. Ultraviolet light. Journal of Food Sci-ence 65(12): 90–92.
24. GF Kramer, and BN Ames. 1987. Oxidative mechanisms of toxicity of low-intensity
near-UV light in Salmonella typhimurium. Journal of Bacteriology 169: 2259–66.
25. R Mitchell. 1978. Water Pollution Microbiology. Vol. 2. New York: John Wiley and Sons.
26. PJ Riesenman, and WL Nicholson. 2000. Role of the spore coat layers in Bacillus
radiation. Applied and Environmental Microbiology 66: 620–26.
27. B Setlow, and P Setlow. 1987. Thymine-containing dimers as well as spore photoprod-
ucts are found in ultraviolet-irradiated Bacillus subtilis spores that lack small acid-
soluble proteins. Proceedings of National Academy of Sciences 84: 421–23.
tion of food powders. Journal of Food Protection 67(4): 787–92.
29. K Takeshita, J Shibato, T Sameshima, S Fukunaga, S Isobe, K Arihara, and M Itoh.
2003. Damage of yeast cells induced by pulsed light irradiation. International Journal of Food Microbiology 85: 151–58.
ence and Technology 54: 264–76.
31. JCH Chang, SF Ossoff, DC Lobe, MH Dorfman, CM Dumais, RG Qualls, and JD
Johnson. 1985. UV inactivation of pathogenic and indicator microorganisms. Applied Environmental Microbiology 49: 1361–65.
32. RA Stermer, M Lasater-Smith, and CF Brasington. 1987. Ultraviolet radiation – an
effective bactericide for fresh meat. Journal of Food Protection 50(2): 108–11.
33. BR Yaun, SS Sumner, JD Eifert, and JE Marcy. 2004. Inhibition of pathogens on fresh
produce by Ultraviolet energy. International Journal of Food Microbiology 90: 1–8.
34. MM Farid, XC Chen, and Z Dost. 2001. Ultraviolet light sterilization of orange juice.
In: GV Barbosa-Canovas, JM Aguilera, eds. Proceedings of Eighth International Con-gress on Engineering and Food. Lancaster: Technomic, 1567–72.
35. KE Matak, JJ Churney, RW Worobo, SS Sumner, E Hovingh, CR Hackney, and MD
goat’s milk. Journal of Food Protection 68(10): 2212–16.
of ultraviolet light for reducing Escherichia coli O157:H7 in unpasteurized apple cider.
Journal of Food Protection 63(5): 563–67.
37. AL Sonenshein. 2003. Killing of Bacillus spores by high-intensity Ultraviolet light.
In: Sterilization and Decontamination Using High Energy Light. Woburn: Xenon
Corporation.
38. K Krishnamurthy, A Demirci, and J Irudayaraj. 2004. Inactivation of Staphylococcus aureus by pulsed UV light treatment. Journal of Food Protection 67: 1027–30.
39. K Krishnamurthy, A Demirci, 2007. J Irudayaraj. Inactivation of Staphylococcus
Food Science 72(7): M233–39.
55534_C011.indd 30055534_C011.indd 300 10/22/08 10:19:13 AM10/22/08 10:19:13 AM
subtilis spore resistance to hydrogen peroxide, artificial UV-C, UV-B, and solar UV
28. F Fine, and P Gervais. 2004. Efficiency of pulsed UV light for microbial decontamina-
Pierson. 2005. Efficacy of UV light for the reduction of Listeria monocytogenes in
36. JR Wright, SS Sumner, CR Hackney, MD Pierson, and BW Zoecklein. 2000. Efficacy
30. A Wekhof. 2000. Disinfection with flash lamps. PDA Journal of Pharmaceutical Sci-
aureus in milk using a flow-through pulsed UV light treatment system. Journal of
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
UV Pasteurization of Food Materials 301
40. RR Sharma, and A Demirci. 2003. Inactivation of Escherichia coli O157:H7 on inocu-
lated alfalfa seeds with pulsed ultraviolet light and response surface modeling. Journal of Food Science 68: 1448–53.
41. NP Ozer, and A Demirci. 2005. Inactivation of Escherichia coli O157:H7 and Listeria
national Journal Food Science and Technology 40: 1–7.
42. SL Hillegas, and A Demirci. 2003. Inactivation of Clostridium sporogenes in clover
honey by pulsed UV light treatment. Agricultural Engineering International: the
V. 7.
43. S Jun, J Irudayaraj, A Demirci, and D Geiser. 2003. Pulsed UV light treatment of corn
meal for inactivation of Aspergillus Niger spores. International Journal Food Science and Technology 38: 883–88.
44. EPA. 2003. UV disinfection guidance manual. EPA document no. 815-D-03-007.
Washington, DC: Environmental Protection Agency.
45. H Liu, Y Du, X Wang, and L Sun. 2004. Chitosan kills bacteria through cell membrane
damage. International Journal of Food Microbiology 95: 147–55.
46. BF Severin, MT Suidan, BE Rittmann, and RS Engelbrecht. 1984. Inactivation kinet-
164–69.
47. CFSAN-FDA. 2000. Ultraviolet light. In: Kinetics of Microbial Inactivation for Alternative Food Processing Technologies. Atlanta, GA: Center for Food Safety and
Applied Nutrition – Food and Drug Administration. Available at: http://www.cfsan.fda.
gov/~comm/ift-uv.html. Accessed July 28, 2008.
48. KL Bialka, A Demirci, and VM Puri. 2008. Modeling the inactivation of Escherichia coli O157:H7 and Salmonella enterica on raspberries and strawberries resulting from
exposure to ozone or pulsed UV light. Journal of Food Engineering 85: 444–49.
49. VJ Jasinghe, and CO Perera. 2006. Ultraviolet irradiation: The generator of Vitamin D
in edible mushrooms. Food Chemistry 95: 638–43.
1 in milk by ultraviolet
energy. Journal of Food Protection 48: 697–98.
51. S Chung, W Yang, and K Krishnamurthy. 2008. Effects of pulsed UV-light on
peanut allergeus in extracts and liquid peanut butter. Journal of Food Science. 73(5):
C400–C404.
Chemical and Functional Properties of Food Saccharides. New York: CRC Press,
123–130.
53. A Kolakowska. 2003. Lipid oxidation in food systems. In: ZE Sikorski, A Kolakowska,
eds. Chemical and Functional Properties of Food Lipids. New York: CRC press,
133–68.
54. T Ohlsson, and N Bengtsson. 2002. Minimal processing of foods with non-thermal
methods. In: Ohlsson, T. and N. Bengtsson, eds. Minimal Processing Technologies in the Food Industry. New York: CRC Press, 34–57.
55. M Cuvelier, and C Berset. 2005. Phenolic compounds and plant extracts protect paprika
against UV-induced discoloration. International Journal Food Science and Technol-ogy 40: 67–73.
56. LH Choi, and SS Nielsen. 2005. The effects of thermal and non-thermal processing
methods on apple cider quality and consumer acceptability. Journal of Food Quality 28: 13–29.
57. VM Gomez-Lopez, F Devileghere, V Bonduelle, and J Debevere. 2005. Intense light
pulses decontamination of minimally processed vegetables and their shelf-life. Inter-national Journal of Food Microbiology 103(1): 79–89.
55534_C011.indd 30155534_C011.indd 301 10/22/08 10:19:14 AM10/22/08 10:19:14 AM
monocytogenes inoculated on raw salmon fillets by pulsed UV light treatment. Inter-
CIGR Journal of Scientific Research and Development. Manuscript FP 03-009. Vol.
52. P Tomasik. 2004. Chemical modifications of polysaccharides. In: P Tomasik, ed.
ics in a flow-through UV reactor. Journal of Water Pollution Control Federation 56:
50. AE Yousef, and EH Marth. 1985. Degradation of aflatoxin M
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
302 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
58. J Rice. 1994. Sterilizing with light and electrical impulses: Technological alternative to
hydrogen peroxide, heat, and irradiation. Food Processing 7: 66.
59. KT Higgins. 2001. Fresh today, safe next week. Food Engineering 73(44–46): 48–49.
60. F Taghipour. 2004. Ultraviolet and ionizing radiation for microorganism inactivation.
Water Research 38: 3940–48.
61. J Dunn, A Bushnell, T Ott, and W Clark. 1997. Pulsed white light food processing.
Cereal Food World 42: 510–515.
62. D Lander. 1996. Microbial kill with pulsed light and electricity – fruitful possibilities.
Fruit Processing 6(2): 50–51.
63. G Shama. 1999. Ultraviolet light. In: RK Robinson, C Batt and P Patel, eds. Encyclo-pedia of Food Microbiology. pp. 2212, San Diego: Academic Press.
64. H Burton. 1951. Ultraviolet irradiation of milk. Dairy Science Abstracts 13(3):
229–44.
Germany: Wiley-VCH.
66. NACMCF. 2006. (National Advisory Committee on Microbiological Criteria for
methods of pasteurization. Journal of Food Protection Supplement 69: 1190–216.
55534_C011.indd 30255534_C011.indd 302 10/22/08 10:19:15 AM10/22/08 10:19:15 AM
65. T Oppenlander. 2003. Photochemical Purification of Water and Air. Weinheim,
Foods). Requisite scientific parameters fro establishing the equivalence of alternative
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
303
12 Stochastic Finite Element Analysis of Thermal Food Processes
Bart M. Nicolaï, Nico Scheerlinck, Pieter Verboven, and Josse De Baerdemaeker
CONTENTS
12.1 Introduction .................................................................................................303
12.2 Numerical Computation of Conduction Heat Transfer ...............................305
12.3 Description of Uncertainty .........................................................................306
12.3.1 Random Variables .........................................................................306
12.3.2 Random Processes .........................................................................308
12.3.3 Random Fields and Random Waves .............................................. 311
12.4 The Monte Carlo Method ............................................................................ 313
12.4.1 Description .................................................................................... 313
12.4.2 Generation of Random Variables and Processes ........................... 314
12.5 The Variance Propagation Algorithm ......................................................... 316
12.5.1 Lumped Heat Capacitance Heat Conduction Problems ................ 316
12.5.2 Heat Conduction Problems ............................................................ 319
12.5.3 Algorithm for Random Variable Parameters................................. 325
12.5.4 Derivatives of C, K and F with Respect to Random Parameters ... 327
12.6 Numerical Solution of Lyapunov and Sylvester Differential Equations ..... 328
12.6.1 Algebraic Lyapunov and Sylvester Equations ............................... 328
12.6.2 Convergence and Stability Analysis .............................................. 330
12.7 Application to Thermal Sterilization Processes ......................................... 336
12.8 Conclusions ................................................................................................. 336
Acknowledgments .................................................................................................. 337
Nomenclature ......................................................................................................... 337
References .............................................................................................................. 338
12.1 INTRODUCTION
For the design of thermal food process operations the temperature in the thermal
center of the food during the process must be known. Whereas traditionally this tem-
perature course is measured using thermocouples, there is a growing interest towards
the use of mathematical models to predict the food temperature during the thermal
treatment [1−4]. The advantages of such an approach include the computation of
55534_C012.indd 30355534_C012.indd 303 10/22/08 12:02:52 PM10/22/08 12:02:52 PM
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
304 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
heat penetration curves corresponding to arbitrary process conditions and container
shapes (e.g., glass jars [2]), the ability to predict overshoot [5], rapid on-line evaluation
of unscheduled process deviations [6], and optimization of thermal processes [7,8].
In the case of conduction heated foods, the heat transfer process is described
through the Fourier equation. As for complicated geometries and time-dependent
boundary conditions usually no analytical solutions are available for the Fourier
equation, and a numerical solution becomes mandatory. Several methods, includ-
by numerous investigators to the numerical solution of the Fourier equation. While
now widely available, they require that the product and process parameters are accu-
rately known. However, in reality these parameters may vary quite extensively, due
to biological variability or unpredictably changing conditions such as the ambient
temperature. Consequently, the temperatures inside the product are stochastic quan-
tities, which must be characterized by statistical means.
Nicolaï et al. [9] reviewed the sources of uncertainty in thermal sterilization
diffusivity, is typically 3–15%, although values as high as 26% have been observed
[10]. Meffert [11] concluded that the possible maximum error in the experimental
determination of the thermal conductivity can be as high as 30–50% at the 95% con-
and non-vacuum-packed potato slabs to establish a temperature increase from 20ºC to
75ºC with an oven setpoint of 80ºC at different positions in commercial steamers and
for different oven types. They found substantial differences in heating time between
packs of the same shelf. According to these authors, the observed heating time vari-
ations were due to the intermittent inputs of the steam used to maintain temperatures
below 100ºC. The standard deviation of the temperature of a well- controlled retort
is typically 1ºC [13]. In a more recent publication [14] it was reported that the retort
temperature variability is normally less than ±0.5ºC. Ramaswamy et al. observed
that the maximum difference between different positions during the holding phase
was between 2.6 and 3.5ºC [15]. The average of the standard deviations of the retort
temperatures at each time was 1.3ºC. From experiments inside a pilot scale water
cascading retort it was found [16] that the average of the standard deviations of the
temperatures at different positions was equal to 0.7ºC during the entire cook-period.
The overall standard deviation during the cook period was 0.9ºC, and the maxi-
mum temperature difference between positions 1 min after the coming-up period
was equal to 3.2ºC. Little information is available on the variability of the surface
25% for his Monte Carlo analyses.
As the thermal inactivation of micro-organisms is highly dependent on the
temperature, it is very well possible to end up in a situation where some foods of the
same batch are microbiologically safe, while others are not. The uncertainty involved
in thermal food process design has therefore been addressed by several authors
[13,17–21] by means of Monte Carlo analyses. Using this method a large number
samples of the random parameters are generated by the computer and for every set the
thermal problem is solved. In the end statistical parameters such as the mean value
and the variance of the temperature at the thermal center can be calculated using
55534_C012.indd 30455534_C012.indd 304 10/22/08 12:02:53 PM10/22/08 12:02:53 PM
ing finite differences [1,3,4], and finite elements [2] have been applied successfully
commercial codes (mostly based on the finite element or finite volume method) are
processes. The coefficient of variation (CV) of the f-value, and, hence, the thermal
fidence level. Sheard and Rodger [12] compared the time required for vacuum-packed
heat transfer coefficient in thermal food processes. Martens [13] used a CV of 10 and
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Stochastic Finite Element Analysis of Thermal Food Processess 305
statistical inference. The drawback of the Monte Carlo method is the large amount
of computer time, particularly when the thermal problem is to be solved numerically.
Alternative algorithms have therefore been suggested to calculate the propagation of
described. The main features of the Monte Carlo and variance propagation algo-
rithms will be illustrated by a numerical example.
12.2 NUMERICAL COMPUTATION OF CONDUCTION HEAT TRANSFER
Transient linear heat transfer in solid foods subjected to convection boundary condi-
tions is governed by the Fourier equation
k T Q cTt
∇ ρ ∂∂
2 + = (12.1)
kn
T h T T∂∂
Γ= −( )∞ on (12.2)
T = T0 at t = t0 (12.3)
where T is the temperature (ºC), k the thermal conductivity (W/mºC), ρc the volu-
metric heat capacity (J/m3 ºC), T∞ the (known) process temperature (ºC), n the out-2
surface, Q the heat generation (W/m3), and t the time (s).
For many realistic heat conduction problems no analytical solutions of Equation
12.1 subjected to Equation 12.2 and Equation 12.3 are known. In this case numerical
is subdivided in elements of variable size and shape which are interconnected in a
nod of nodal points. In every element j the unknown temperature is
approximated by a low order interpolating polynomial
u j jTj t t( ) ( )= φφ u (12.4)
where uj(t) is the approximate temperature in element j, u j(t) is the vector contain-
ing the nodal temperatures in element j, and φφ j is the vector of shape functions
corresponding to element j. The application of a suitable spatial discretization tech-
nique such as the Galerkin weighted residual method to Equation 12.1 subjected to
Equation 12.2 and Equation 12.3 results in the following differential system [26]:
C u Ku fddt
+ = (12.5)
55534_C012.indd 30555534_C012.indd 305 10/22/08 12:02:54 PM10/22/08 12:02:54 PM
In this chapter the use of stochastic finite element methods to calculate statisti-
cal characteristics of the temperature field inside conduction heated foods will be
ward normal to the surface, h the convection coefficient (W/m ºC), Γ the boundary
discretization techniques such as the finite difference or finite element method can
be used to obtain an approximate solution. The finite element method in particular is
the Fourier equation. In the framework of the finite element method the continuum
finite number n
parameter fluctuations in space and/or time [22–25].
a very flexible and accurate method for solving partial differential equations such as
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
306 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
u(t = 0) = u0 (12.6)
with u = [ ]u u u1 2 � nnod
I the overall nodal temperature vector, C the capacitance
matrix and K the conductance matrix, both nnod × nnod matrices, and f a nnod × 1
tions of each element (the ‘element matrices’) C j, K j and f j
C j j j= ∫ ρc dV
V j
φφ φφT
(12.7)
K B Bj j j
V
j j
S
k dV h dST
j
T
j
= +∫ ∫ φ φ (12.8)
f j j
S
j
V
hT dS Q dVj j
= +∫ ∫∞φ φ (12.9)
with
Bz
jj
=∂∂φφ
,
where Sj and Vj are the boundary surface and volume of element j, respectively and
z is the position vector. The element matrices are then incorporated in the global
matrices. The matrices K and C are sparse and this property can be exploited advan-
tageously for reducing the CPU time required for the solution of Equation 12.5.
food processing applications such as sterilization of baby food jars [2], cooling of
broccoli stalks [27] and tomatoes [28].
12.3 DESCRIPTION OF UNCERTAINTY
known. However, in reality this is certainly not always the case. In the stochastic
ess parameters is explicitly incorporated in the calculations. It is therefore required
that an appropriate mathematical description of the random parameters is available.
In this section the random variable model, along with its multidimensional exten-
description of these concepts, the reader is referred to the literature [29].
12.3.1 RANDOM VARIABLES
The most simple uncertainty model is that of a random variable. A random variable
X is a real-numbered variable whose value is associated with a random experiment.
55534_C012.indd 30655534_C012.indd 306 10/22/08 12:02:55 PM10/22/08 12:02:55 PM
vector. The system (Equation 12.5) can be solved by finite differences in the time
domain. For the construction of the global finite element matrices C, K and f, it is
most convenient from the programming point of view to first assemble the contribu-
The finite element method has been successfully used in a number of thermal
In the finite element method it is assumed that all parameters are deterministic and
finite element method, knowledge about the uncertainty of the material and proc-
sions such as random process, field and wave, will be introduced. For a more precise
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Stochastic Finite Element Analysis of Thermal Food Processess 307
For example, the heat capacity of a potato is a random variable which can vary
between different potatoes. A random variable X can be characterized by its prob-
ability density function f(x) and statistical moments such as the mean value X and
the variance σ2, if existent and known.
X X� ε ( ) (12.10)
� xf x dx( )
−
∫∞
∞
(12.11)
σ ε2 2� ( )X X− (12.12)
� ( ) ( )x X f x dx−−∞
∫ 2
∞
(12.13)
with ε the expectation operator.
Sometimes an experiment will yield values for two or more physical parameters.
Assume, for example, that both the thermal conductivity as well as the volumetric
heat capacity of a material are measured simultaneously. In this case the outcome
of the experiment is called a bivariate (two) or multivariate (more than two) random
variable. The random variables X1 and X2 can then be stacked conveniently in a ran-
and covariance matrix V of the random vector as
X X� ε( ) (12.14)
V X X X X� ε ( )( )− −⎡⎣⎢
⎤⎦⎥
T (12.15)
The i-th diagonal entry of V is the variance σXi2 of random variable Xi; the (i, j)-th
entry of V is the covariance σX Xi j, of random variables Xi and Xj.
As expected, the probability density function f (X1, X2) of a bivariate random
variable is a function of two variables. The bivariate Gaussian density function is
f X XR
RX X
X X X
( )( )
exp(
1 2
1
2
1
2 1
1 2,,=
− −−
2 1/2
1 2
−
πσ σ11 2
2
,X X
X X2
1 1
1)
−⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠
⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟
⎡
⎣
⎢⎢⎢⎢
⎧
⎨⎪⎪⎪⎪
⎩⎪ σ⎪⎪⎪⎪
−⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠
⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟−⎛
⎝−2
1
RX X X X
X XX X
1 2
2
1 1 2 2, σ σ
⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠
⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟+
−⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠
⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟
⎤
⎦
⎥⎥⎥⎥
⎫
⎬
2
2 2
2
X X
Xσ
⎪⎪⎪⎪⎪
⎭⎪⎪⎪⎪
(12.16)
R is ca
55534_C012.indd 30755534_C012.indd 307 10/22/08 12:02:56 PM10/22/08 12:02:56 PM
dom vector X. Similar to the univariate case we can then define the mean value X
often used to describe bivariate random variables. It is defined as
lled the correlation coefficient, and −1 ≤ R ≤ 1.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
308 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
12.3.2 RANDOM PROCESSES
If a parameter changes in an unpredictable way as a function of the time co-ordinate,
it can be described conveniently by means of a random process. The mean X and
covariance V of a stationary process X with probability density function f(x,t) are
X X= ε( ) (12.17)
� x f x t dx( ),−∞
∫∞
(12.18)
V X t X X t X( ) {[ ( ) ][ ( ) )]}τ ε τ= − + − (12.19)
The covariance function describes how much the current value of the random func-
mean of the process does not change in time and its covariance function is only a
function of the separation time τ. The correlation function R is found by normaliza-
tion of the covariance function:
R (τ) = V (τ)/σ2 (12.20)
A Gaussian stationary white noise process W with covariance
VW W W W, ,= ,( ) ( )τ σ δ τ2 (12.21)
tions. Sample values of W are uncorrelated no matter how close together in time they
which change more smoothly as a function of time. An autoregressive random proc-
ddt
X t addt
X t a X t W tm
m
m
m m( ) ( ) ( ) ( )+ + + =−
−1
1
1� (12.22)
where a1, a2,…, am are constants, m ≥ 1, and W(t) is a stationary Gaussian white
noise process with W a Xm=1 m, and their high frequency content decreases with increas-
ing order m. The (Gaussian) random variable initial condition corresponding to the
ε[ ( )]X t X0 = (12.23)
ε σ[ ( ) ]X t X02 2− = (12.24)
55534_C012.indd 30855534_C012.indd 308 10/22/08 12:02:58 PM10/22/08 12:02:58 PM
defined by
tion will affect its future values. By definition of a stationary random process, the
are. However, white noise does not exist in reality as it has an infinite energy content
ess of order m is defined by the following stochastic differential equation
the coefficients a ,…,a
stochastic differential Equation 12.22 is defined as
where δ is the Dirac delta, can be used to describe very rapid unpredictable fluctua-
and variance. Autoregressive processes provide a tool to incorporate fluctuations
. The time scale of the fluctuations is dependent on
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Stochastic Finite Element Analysis of Thermal Food Processess 309
Note that a random variable parameter X can be modeled as a trivial case of an
AR(1) process:
ddt
X = 0 (12.25)
AR(m) processes are a special case of the class of physically realizable stochastic
processes which comprise most of the random processes seen in practice [30].
In order to describe the smoothness of a random process by means of a sin-
θ τ τ=−∞
+∞
∫ R d( )�
It gives an indication of the time beyond which a future value of a random process
will not be affected anymore by its current value. In Table 12.1 the variance, the
processes. For the latter, the characteristic polynomial
ξ ξm mma a+ + + =−
11 0� (12.26)
has two real or two complex conjugate roots, resulting in non-oscillating or oscil-
lating correlation functions, respectively. In Figure 12.1 some correlation functions
tion are compared. If θ → 0 then the process approximates a white noise process.
On the other hand, if θ → +∞ then the values of the realization at arbitrary points
TABLE 12.1Autocovariance Function and Scale of Fluctuation of AR(1) and AR(2) Processes
AR(1) V
a
x x xa
, ( )
/
τ σ
θ
τ=
=
−2
1
1
2
e
AR(2) real
roots
Vx x x, ( ) [( )]τ σ ξ ξ ξ ξ
ξ
ξ τ ξ τ= −( ) − −22 1 2 1
11 2e e
with 1 aand the roots of2ξ
ξ ξ
θ
21 2
1 2
0
2
+ + =
=
a a
a a/
AR(2) complex
roots
V e pap
px x x
a
, ( ) cos( ) sin( )τ σ τ ττ
= +⎡
⎣⎢⎢
⎤
⎦
−2
1
2 11
2⎥⎥⎥
⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠
⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟
− =with p a1= ( /a a a12 1 2
1 24 2) // θ
55534_C012.indd 30955534_C012.indd 309 10/22/08 12:02:59 PM10/22/08 12:02:59 PM
defined as
gle measure, Vanmarcke [29] introduced the concept scale of fluctuation, which is
autocovariance function and the scale of fluctuation are given for AR(1) and AR(2)
and corresponding realizations of an AR(2)-process with different scales of fluctua-
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
310 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
FIGURE 12.1 Correlation functions (a) and corresponding realizations (b) of a AR(2)-
–1000 –500 0 500
(a)
1000
Rx,
x( t)
t (s)Δ
Δ
0 200
= 100 sθ
θ
θ
= 10 s
= 1 s
400 600 800 1000
Time (s)
x (t
)
(b)
55534_C012.indd 31055534_C012.indd 310 10/22/08 12:03:00 PM10/22/08 12:03:00 PM
process with different scales of fluctuation.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Stochastic Finite Element Analysis of Thermal Food Processess 311
are completely correlated. In this case the random process concept is far too sophis-
ticated to describe the physical quantity since all the meaningful probabilistic fea-
tures of the quantity can be captured by a simple random variable model.
The correlation functions and corresponding realizations of different types of
measure of how frequent the process wiggles around the mean-axis, irrespective of
the order of the process.
It is convenient to write the autoregressive process (Equation 12.22) in the fol-
lowing state space form [31]:
ddt
t t W tX AX B( ) ( ) ( )= + (12.27)
where
X =/
//
− −
− −
⎡
⎣
⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢
X
dX dt
d X dt
d X dt
m m
m m
�2 2
1 1
⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢
⎤
⎦
⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥
=
⎡
⎣
⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢
B
0
0
0
1
�
⎤⎤
⎦
⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥
=
− − −−
⎡
⎣
⎢⎢⎢⎢
A
0 1 0
0 0 1
1 1
�
� � �
�
�a a am m
⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢
⎤
⎦
⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥
The vector X is called the state vector, the matrix A the companion matrix and the
vector B is an auxiliary vector.
12.3.3 RANDOM FIELDS AND RANDOM WAVES
Often a physical quantity varies randomly as a function of the time and/or space
coordinates. Examples include the temperature in an oven, the thermophysical prop-
erties of heterogeneous materials such as foods, hydraulic properties of soils, elastic
venient mathematical framework to describe such phenomena [29].
of random waves. The random wave model is a straightforward extension of the
is referred to the literature [29].
55534_C012.indd 31155534_C012.indd 311 10/22/08 12:03:01 PM10/22/08 12:03:01 PM
properties of construction materials, etc. The random field concept provides a con-
random field model combined with the random process model. A full account of
random fields and random waves is beyond the scope of this chapter, and the reader
random processes are shown in Figure 12.2. Clearly the scale of fluctuation is a
A parameter which fluctuates both in space and time can be described by means
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
312 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
FIGURE 12.2 Correlation functions (a) and corresponding realizations (b) of several types
–1000 –500
(a)
0 500 1000
Rx,
x( t)
t (s)Δ
Δ
(b)
AR(2) complex roots
AR(2) real roots
AR(1)
0 200 400 600 800 1000
Time (s)
x (t
)
55534_C012.indd 31255534_C012.indd 312 10/22/08 12:03:02 PM10/22/08 12:03:02 PM
of autoregressive processes with the same scale of fluctuation.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Stochastic Finite Element Analysis of Thermal Food Processess 313
12.4 THE MONTE CARLO METHOD
12.4.1 DESCRIPTION
The Monte Carlo method was introduced by John von Neumann and Ulam during
rial which arose in the development of the atomic bomb [32]. The code name of the
project was Monte Carlo, from where the method inherits its name.
generated by means of a random generator. For every parameter set the heat conduc-
tion problem is solved by analytical or numerical means, and the solution is stored
for future use. This process is repeated a large number of times n, and in the end
the statistical characteristics are be estimated. For the mean and the variance of the
solution T at arbitrary space-time co-ordinates, the following non-biased estimation
formulas can be applied
Tn
Tj
nj� =
=∑1
1
(12.28)
2
1
1
1ˆ ( )σ =
−−
=∑n
T Tj
nj 2 (12.29)
where Tj is the solution in the j-th Monte Carlo run and the symbol “ˆ” means “esti-
mate of”.
If T is a linear function of the random parameters (e.g. ambient temperature) and
if the latter are normally distributed, then T is also normally distributed. In this case
T� and 2σ̂ are given by [33]
T tn
T T tn
i� �− ≤ ≤ +0.975 0.975
ˆ ˆσ σ (12.30)
χ σ
σχ0 025
2 2
2
0 9752
1 1
. .
−≤ ≤
−n nˆ
(12.31)
where the t and χ2 are student t and χ2 distributed and are to be evaluated with n–1
degrees of freedom. For n ≤ 30 they are tabulated in all textbooks on introductory
statistics; for n ≥ 30 it can be shown [33] that 2 2 1χ2 − −n is normally distributed
with zero mean and unit variance. The Student’s t distribution then approximates a
normal distribution.
The formulas in Equation 12.30 and Equation 12.31 are only valid if the tem-
perature T is linearly dependent on the random parameter(s). Even if this is not so,
parameters is not too large.
55534_C012.indd 31355534_C012.indd 313 10/22/08 12:03:02 PM10/22/08 12:03:02 PM
World War II for studying random neutron diffusion problems in fissionable mate-
In the Monte Carlo finite element method, samples of the random parameters are
the confidence intervals for
e.g., in the case of random thermal conductivity, these formulas can be used as a first
order approximation of the real confidence intervals if the variability of the random
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
314 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
For n = 100 and 1000, Equation 12.31 becomes
0 74 1 28 1002
2. < < . =ˆ
σσ
for n (12.32)
0 91 1 09 10002
2. < < . =ˆ
σσ
for n (12.33)
wide. It can therefore be concluded that the large number of repetitive simulations
necessary to obtain an acceptable level of accuracy is a major drawback of the
to generate the parameter samples can outweigh by far the actual CPU time required
the random samples is therefore imperative, as it may considerably reduce the total
CPU time.
A further drawback of the Monte Carlo method is the fact that the stochastic
(joint) probability density functions.
12.4.2 GENERATION OF RANDOM VARIABLES AND PROCESSES
Uniformly distributed random numbers are now most commonly generated by means
of a congruential generator. In this method, a discrete random number xi+1 is derived
from a previous one, xi, based on a fundamental congruence relationship
xi+1 = (axi + c)mod m, i = 0, 1, … (12.34)
where the multiplier a, the increment c and the modulus m are nonnegative integers.
3 is equal to 2. The recursion is started with a starting value x0, the seed. It has
been shown statistically that the xi are uniformly distributed on the interval (0,m).
Uniformly distributed random numbers on the unit interval (0,1) can be obtained by
dividing the xi by m. Obviously, after at most m recursions, the random sequence will
repeat itself. Conditions on a, c and m can be found such that the period after which
the sequence will repeat itself is maximal [32]. The following values give random
numbers of reasonable quality [34]: m = 233 280, c = 49 297, and a = 9 301, and do
It is emphasized here that the implementation of a good random number gen-
erator is by no means a trivial task. Inappropriate constants a, m and c can lead to
numbers which are highly correlated. It is therefore suggested to use random number
generators which are provided with standard mathematical packages such as Nag
(The Numerical Algorithms Group, Oxford, UK) or IMSL (USA). The generators
which are included in compilers must be used with special care—for example, those
55534_C012.indd 31455534_C012.indd 314 10/22/08 12:03:03 PM10/22/08 12:03:03 PM
This means that, even for n = 1000, the relative confidence band is almost 20%
Monte Carlo method, particularly when in each run a finite element problem must
be solved. If the random parameters are of the random field type, the time required
to solve the finite element problem. A careful choice of the algorithms to generate
parameter set must be completely specified in the probabilistic sense, including
The modulo (‘mod’) is defined as the remainder of the integer division, e.g., 5 mod
not cause integer overflow on most systems.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Stochastic Finite Element Analysis of Thermal Food Processess 315
implemented in some commercial C compilers generate random numbers of very
poor quality. For a discussion, see Press et al. [34].
Random variates with non-uniform probability density function f(x) can be
obtained from uniformly distributed random numbers on (0,1) by several methods,
including the transformation method and the acceptance–rejectance method. For
example, consider the following transformation due to [35]
Z1 = (−21n U1)1/2 cos 2π U2 (12.35)
Z2 = (−21n U1)1/2 sin 2π U2 (12.36)
It can be shown that if U1 and U2 are two uniformly random numbers in (0,1), then Z1
and Z2 are two uncorrelated standard (μ = 0, σ2 = 1) Gaussian random numbers. The
histogram in Figure 12.3 was produced from 1000 Gaussian numbers according to
Equation 12.35, Equation 12.36 and Equation 12.34 with the above given numerical
values of a, c and m.
Algorithms for other probability density functions are described elsewhere [32].
Samples (or realizations) of an AR(m) random process can be generated recur-
sively by time discretization of the corresponding differential equation. For example,
for an AR(1) process we have that
ddt
X a X W+ =1 (12.37)
By applying an implicit Euler discretization we obtain the following time series:
(1 + a1Δt)X(t + Δt) = X(t) + ΔtZ (t + Δt) (12.38)
or
X(t + Δt) = (1 + a1Δt)−1 (X(t) + ΔtZ (t + Δt)) (12.39)
FIGURE 12.3 Histogram of a measurement experiment of a random variable U. The full
line is the limiting probability density function.
–3.6 –2.8 –2.0
0.000
0.025
0.050
0.075
0.100
0.125
0.150
0.175
f(u)
–1.2 –0.4 0.4 1.2 2.0 2.8
U
55534_C012.indd 31555534_C012.indd 315 10/22/08 12:03:04 PM10/22/08 12:03:04 PM
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
316 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
with Z discrete time white noise (a sequence of Gaussian random numbers). It can be
shown [36] that the variance σZ2 of Z is equal σ ΔZ t2 / . The algorithm is bootstrapped
ance of the generated sample will be smaller than the target variance. Methods to gen-
erate samples of AR(m) processes of arbitrary order are compared by Nicolaï [37].
12.5 THE VARIANCE PROPAGATION ALGORITHM
The major drawback of the Monte Carlo method is the considerable amount of CPU
time required to obtain accurate estimates of the stochastic characteristics of the
Carlo method. For a full account of the algorithm, the reader is referred to Melsa
and Sage [36].
12.5.1 LUMPED HEAT CAPACITANCE HEAT CONDUCTION PROBLEMS
In order to explain the variance propagation algorithm, we will consider the fol-
lowing simple lumped capacitance heat transfer problem [38]. Consider a sphere of
radius r0 with thermal capacity c and density ρ. The sphere is initially at a uniform
temperature T0. At time t = 0 the sphere is immersed in a water bath at temperature
T∞. The temperature of the sphere will approach T∞ with a rate which depends on
capacitance method it is assumed that, because of the high thermal conductivity of
the solid medium, the temperature inside the solid is uniform at any instant during
the transient heat transfer process. This hypothesis holds if the Biot number, Bi, sat-
Bi = < .hLk
0 1 (12.40)
where L is the characteristic length of the solid which in the case of a sphere is usu-
0
leads to the following differential equation:
ρcddt
Th
rT T= −
3
0
( )∞ (12.41)
After integration the following formula for the temperature course is found
T T T Th
crt= + − −
⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟∞ ∞( )exp0
0
3
ρ (12.42)
For simplicity we will assume that T∞ is an AR(1) random process described by
means of the following differential equation:
ddt
T a T W∞ ∞+ =1 (12.43)
55534_C012.indd 31655534_C012.indd 316 10/22/08 12:03:05 PM10/22/08 12:03:05 PM
with a random value x of the process as specified in Equation 12.23 and Equation
12.24. A sufficiently small time step should be selected because otherwise the vari-
temperature field. The variance propagation algorithm is an alternative to the Monte
the surface heat transfer coefficient h at the solid–liquid interface. In the lumped
isfies the following constraint
ally defined as L = 3r [38]. It is easy to show that applying an overall energy balance
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Stochastic Finite Element Analysis of Thermal Food Processess 317
with W a white noise process with mean W a T= ∞1 . We can combine Equation
12.43 and Equation 12.41 into the following global system:
ddt
W W tx g x h= + −( ) ( )( ) (12.44)
with
x =⎡
⎣⎢⎢
⎤
⎦⎥⎥
T
T∞
(12.45)
g =−
−
⎡
⎣
⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢
⎤
⎦
⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥
3 3
0
1
hcr
Th
crT
W a T
ρ ρ∞
∞
0
⎥⎥
(12.46)
h =⎡
⎣⎢⎢
⎤
⎦⎥⎥
0
1 (12.47)
the covariance matrix of the solution of Equation 12.44 are given by
ddt
x g x= [ ] (12.48)
ddt
T
WTV V V h hx x x x x x, , ,= +
⎛⎝⎜⎜⎜
⎞⎠⎟⎟⎟ +
∂∂
∂∂
σgx
gx
2 (12.49)
with
∂∂
∂∂
gx
g xx
�x t
t tt
( )
[ ( ) ]
( )
,
Equation 12.48 and Equation 12.49 are called the variance propagation algorithm.
Equation 12.49 is a matrix differential equation of the Lyapunov type.
If we combine Equation 12.44 through Equation 12.52 we obtain the following
system:
ddt
Th
crT T= −
3
0ρ ∞( ) (12.50)
ddt
T∞ = 0 (12.51)
ddt
hcr
hcr
a
Vx x, =−
−
⎡
⎣
⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢
⎤
⎦
⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥
3 3
0
0 0
1
ρ ρ⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥
⎡
⎣
⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢
+−
−V Vx x x x, ,
30
3
0
0
1
hcr
hcr
a
ρ
ρ⎢⎢⎢
⎤
⎦
⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥
+⎡
⎣⎢⎢
⎤
⎦⎥⎥
0 0
0 2σW
(12.52)
55534_C012.indd 31755534_C012.indd 317 10/22/08 12:03:06 PM10/22/08 12:03:06 PM
It can be shown [36] that first order approximate expressions for the mean vector and
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
318 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
with
Vx xT T T
T T T
, =⎡
⎣
⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢
⎤
⎦
⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥
σ σσ σ
2
2
,
,
∞
∞ ∞
(12.53)
and σT T, ∞ the covariance of T and T∞. The initial conditions are given by
T t T( )= =0 0 (12.54)
T t T∞ ∞( )= =0 (12.55)
Vx xT
T
t, ( )= =⎡
⎣
⎢⎢⎢
⎤
⎦
⎥⎥⎥
00
0
0
2
2
σ
σ ∞
(12.56)
Equation 12.50 expresses that the mean solution can be found by solving the orig-
inal differential equation for the mean value of the random parameter. Equation
expected since an autoregressive process is stationary).
Equation 12.52 can be elaborated further to yield
ddt
hcr
hcrT T T Tσ
ρ ρσ2
0
2
0
6 6= − +σ , ∞
(12.57)
ddt
hcr
hcr
aT T Tσρ
σρ, ∞ ∞
= − +⎛
⎝
⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠
⎟3 3
0
2
0
1
⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟σT T, ∞
(12.58)
ddt
aT T Wσ σ σ∞ ∞
21
2 22= − + (12.59)
As T∞ is stationary, σT∞
2 not a function of time so that Equation 12.59 reduces to
σ σT W a∞
2 212= / (12.60)
The solution of Equation 12.58 can readily be found through direct integration
σ ρρ
σρT T
h crh cr a
hcr
a2 0
0 1
2
0
1
3
31
3=
// +
− − +⎛
⎝
⎜
∞exp
⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠
⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟
⎡
⎣⎢⎢⎢
⎤
⎦⎥⎥⎥
⎧⎨⎪⎪⎪
⎩⎪⎪⎪
⎫⎬t⎪⎪⎪⎪
⎭⎪⎪⎪
(12.61)
After substitution of Equation 12.61 in Equation 12.57 and subsequent integration
we can derive the following expression for σT2
55534_C012.indd 31855534_C012.indd 318 10/22/08 12:03:07 PM10/22/08 12:03:07 PM
12.51 confirms that the mean value of the random parameter is constant (which we
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Stochastic Finite Element Analysis of Thermal Food Processess 319
σ ρρ
σ ρρT T
h crh cr a
h crh cr a
2 0
0 1
2 0
0 1
3
3
3
3=
// +
+/
/ −∞σσ
ρ
ρ
Th
crt
h c r
∞
2
0
2 2 202
6
18
3
exp
(
−⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟
−/
hh cr a h cr ah
craT/ + / −
− +⎛
⎝
⎜
ρ ρσ
ρ0 1 0 1
2
0
13
3
)( )exp
∞
⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠
⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟
⎡
⎣⎢⎢⎢
⎤
⎦⎥⎥⎥
t (12.62)
In the special case of a random variable, we can simplify the above expression by
putting a1 = 0, so that we have
σ σ σρ
σT T T Th
crt2 2 2
0
262= + −
⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟−
∞ ∞ ∞exp exxp −
⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟
⎡
⎣⎢⎢⎢
⎤
⎦⎥⎥⎥
3
0
hcr
tρ
(12.63)
A sample of the random process ambient temperature and the corresponding tem-
perature course in the sphere are shown in Figure 12.4. The parameter values were
as follows: ρ = 1000 kg/m3, c = 4180 J/kg°C, r0 = 0.01 m, T0 = 20°C, h = 10 W/m2°C,
T ∞ = 80°C, σT∞ = 5°C, and θ = 600 s.
thermal inertia of the sphere. There was a very good agreement between the mean
temperature of the sphere calculated by means of the Monte Carlo and the variance
propagation algorithm (not shown). In Figure 12.5 the time course of the variance of
the temperature of the sphere is shown. The results obtained by means of the vari-
ance propagation algorithm and the Monte Carlo method with 1000 or 5000 runs
were comparable. However, the variances obtained by means of the Monte Carlo
method with 100 runs are scattered.
the sphere are shown in Figure 12.6.
12.5.2 HEAT CONDUCTION PROBLEMS
For the extension of the variance propagation to conduction limited problems we will
start from the spatially discretized system (Equation 12.5). We will further assume
that T∞, h and Q are autoregressive processes of order mT∞, mh, and mQ, respectively,
dt
t td
W tx A x BT T T T T∞ ∞ ∞ ∞ ∞= +( ) ( ) ( ) (12.64)
ddt
t th h hx A x Bh ht W( ) ( ) ( )= + (12.65)
ddt
t t tQ Q Q Qx A x B( ) ( ) ( )= + WQ (12.66)
55534_C012.indd 31955534_C012.indd 319 10/22/08 12:03:08 PM10/22/08 12:03:08 PM
A Crank–Nicolson finite difference scheme in the time domain was used to
The mean value and 95% confidence interval for the temperature prediction in
as defined by the following state space equations
solve Equation 12.41. The high frequency fluctuations are smoothed because of the
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
320 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
with WT∞, Wh, WQ white noise processes of, in general, different covariance. As the
thermophysical properties k and ρc usually do not change as a function of time, they are
modeled as random variables by means of the following trivial differential equations
ddt
kddt
c= =ρ 0 (12.67)
FIGURE 12.5 Temperature variance in sphere subjected to random process ambient tem-
perature. —: variance propagation; ∗: Monte Carlo (nMC=1000); +: Monte Carlo (nMC=100);
O: Monte Carlo (nMC=5000).
6
5
4
3
2
Var
iance
of
tem
per
ature
(°C
2)
1
0
–10 20 40 60 80 100 120
Time (min)
FIGURE 12.4 Realization of AR(1) ambient temperature and corresponding temperature
in sphere.
90
80
70
60
50
Tem
per
ature
(°C
)
40
30
200 20 40 60
Time (min)80 100 120
55534_C012.indd 32055534_C012.indd 320 10/22/08 12:03:10 PM10/22/08 12:03:10 PM
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Stochastic Finite Element Analysis of Thermal Food Processess 321
with appropriate initial conditions. Obviously, T0 is modeled as a random variable
as well.
heat conduction in the form of Equation 12.44. It is easy to see that this can be
accomplished through the following choice of x, g and h
x
u
x
x
x=
∞T
h
q
k
cρ
⎡
⎣
⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢
⎤
⎦
⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥
(12.68)
g
Ku f
A B
A B
A B=
− +
∞
C−
∞ ∞ ∞+
+
+
1( )
T Tx W
x W
x W
T T
h h h h
Q Q Q Q
000
⎡
⎣
⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢
⎤
⎦
⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥
(12.69)
FIGURE 12.6 in sphere subjected to random process ambient temperature.
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
200 20 40 60 80 100 120
Time (min)
Tem
per
ature
(°C
)
55534_C012.indd 32155534_C012.indd 321 10/22/08 12:03:11 PM10/22/08 12:03:11 PM
Mean value (−) and 95% confidence interval (∗) for temperature prediction
As with the lumped capacitance problem, a first step is to write the stochastic
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
322 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
h
0 0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0=
⎡
⎣
⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢
⎤
⎦
⎥⎥⎥⎥
∞B
B
B
T
h
Q
0 0 0
0 0 0
⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥
(12.70)
w =−−−
⎡
⎣
⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢
⎤
⎦
⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥
∞W
W
W W
T T
h h
Q Q
W
W
∞
(12.71)
with 0 null vectors of appropriate dimension, and
V W Ww,w
,
,( ) [ ( ) ( )] ( )τ ε τ δ τ
σ
σ� t t
W T
W hT + =
∞
2
2
0 0
0 0
0 00 2σW Q,
⎡
⎣
⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢
⎤
⎦
⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥
(12.72)
After substitution of Equation 12.68 through Equation 12.71 in Equation 12.48 and
Equation 12.49 and subsequent rearrangement, the following system is obtained
ddt
u C Ku f= − +−1( ) (12.73)
ddt k c
V C KVK
uVC u
Vu,u1
u,u u, u,= − − −− ∂∂
∂∂ρ ρk
T d
dtcc
T
TT
T
⎡
⎣
⎢⎢⎢
+ + −⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟∞
∂∂
∂∂
∂∂∞
fV
f Kuu, h h ⎟⎟ +
+ − − −
Vf
V
KVK
uVC
u, u,
u,u u,
hT
QT
kT
∂∂
∂∂
∂∂ρ
Q
k cc
T h h
cd
dt
uV
fV
f Ku
u,
u,
ρ
∂∂
∂∂
∂∂∞
T
TT
⎡
⎣
⎢⎢⎢
+ + −⎛
⎝∞
⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟ +
⎤
⎦⎥⎥
−Vf
V Cu, u,h QT T
T
T
Q∂∂
(12.74)
ddt TT TTV C V Vu,x u,x xK
T∞ ∞ ∞ ∞∞
= − +⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟−1 ∂
∂f
,⎟⎟⎟⎟+ V Au T
T,xT∞ ∞
(12.75)
ddt h hh h
V C KVK
u Vu,x u,x=⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟
−1 − + −∂∂
∂∂
fhh u hh h, ,x x
⎡
⎣⎢⎢⎢
⎤
⎦⎥⎥⎥+ V AT
(12.76)
55534_C012.indd 32255534_C012.indd 322 10/22/08 12:03:12 PM10/22/08 12:03:12 PM
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Stochastic Finite Element Analysis of Thermal Food Processess 323
ddt QQ Q QQV C KV V Vu,x u x x= − +
⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟+−1
, ,
∂∂
fuu A,xQ Q
T (12.77)
ddt kk kV C KV
Kuu, uk = − −
⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟
−1 2, σ ∂
∂ (12.78)
ddt
V KVC
uu, c u, cρ ρ∂∂ρ
= − −⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟−C 1 2σρc c
ddt ⎟⎟⎟
(12.79)
where the notation C−T denotes the transpose of the inverse of C . C, K and f are
assembled using the mean values of ρc, k, T∞, h, and Q. The initial condition for
Equation 12.73 is given by
u u( 0) 0t = = (12.80)
Vu u I, = σT0
2 (12.81)
where I is an nnod × nnod unity matrix. Further, since the initial temperature is uncor-
related with k, ρc, h, T∞, and Q, the other initial conditions are equal to null matri-
ces of appropriate dimension. Equation 12.73 through Equation 12.81 constitute the
variance propagation algorithm for stochastic heat conduction problems.
Observe that the above algorithm can be extended to take into account nonlin-
ear heat conduction with temperature dependent thermal properties since Equation
12.48 and Equation 12.49 are applicable to general nonlinear systems. The corre-
sponding algorithm has a similar overall structure as the above algorithm and has
been described in detail by Nicolaï [37]. As it is essentially based on a linearization
tion problems only. The applicability of this algorithm for heat conduction problems
with phase changes is currently being investigated by the authors. A more extended
variance propagation algorithm for heat conduction problems with random process
and random wave parameters was described recently [25].
Equation 12.74 is of the general form
ddt
t t t tV AV V A B( ) ( ) ( ) ( )= + +T
with V, A, and B square matrices of equal dimension, and is called a Lyapunov
matrix differential equation. Equation 12.75 through Equation 12.77 are of the
general form
ddt
t t t tV AV V B C( ) ( ) ( ) ( )= + + (12.82)
55534_C012.indd 32355534_C012.indd 323 10/22/08 12:03:13 PM10/22/08 12:03:13 PM
of the finite element formulation of the (nonlinear) heat conduction equation, it can
however be expected to be sufficiently accurate for smooth nonlinear heat conduc-
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
324 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
with A, B square matrices, and V and C matrices which are in general not square.
Equation 12.82 is called a Sylvester matrix differential equation. Equation 12.78 and
Equation 12.79 are of the form
C V KV hddt
t t( ) ( ) ( )+ =t
wi− −
nod.
This structure is similar to that of Equation 12.73, and further on it will be outlined
that this fact can be exploited advantageously.
The matrices V Vx x xT T∞ ∞,x , ,h h, and Vx xQ Q, in Equation 12.75 through Equation 12.77
can be computed by straightforward application of the variance propagation algo-
rithm to the Equation 12.64 through Equation 12.66, respectively, which yields for
example for T∞
ddt T T T T T T T T
TT TV A V V A Bx x x x x ,x∞ ∞ ∞ ∞ ∞ ∞ ∞ ∞ ∞ ∞, ,= + + σ22 BT
T∞ (12.83)
It can be proven that AR(m) processes driven by stationary white noise are stationary
[36]. This implies that the mean and the covariance of the AR(m) process does not
change in time. Consequently, the time derivatives in the left hand sides of Equation
12.83 vanish and the following algebraic matrix Lyapunov equation is obtained
A V V A B BT T T T T T
TT T T
T
∞ ∞ ∞ ∞ ∞ ∞ ∞ ∞ ∞x x x ,x, + + =σ2 0 (12.84)
Similarly,
A V Vh hT
T hT
h h h Tx ,x x ,x h+ + =∞ ∞
A B B 0σ2 (12.85)
A V VQ QT
T QT
Q Q Q Tx ,x x ,x+ + =∞ ∞
A B B 0Qσ2 (12.86)
The above equations can now be combined conveniently in the algorithm outlined
in Table 12.2.
Step 2 is calculated in advance, as well as the partial derivatives of K, C and f with respect to the random parameters (see later). The other steps are merged into
a time stepping scheme in which the mean temperature vector and all covariance
matrices are updated each time step. The linear differential systems Equation 12.73,
Equation 12.77 through Equation 12.79 can be solved using a similar time stepping
ference algorithm the following recursive relationship can be used
C
K uC
uΔ
ΔΔ Δt
ttt t t t+
⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟
+ − = +f (12.87)
55534_C012.indd 32455534_C012.indd 324 10/22/08 12:03:14 PM10/22/08 12:03:14 PM
th C and Κ the finite element matrices, and V and h vectors of dimension n
algorithm as in the case of a deterministic problem. For an implicit Euler finite dif-
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Stochastic Finite Element Analysis of Thermal Food Processess 325
Observe that the matrix C / +Δt K is to be triangularized only once.
12.5.3 ALGORITHM FOR RANDOM VARIABLE PARAMETERS
If all parameters are random variables, the mean value and the covariance matrix
derived by Nicolaï and Baerdemaeker [22]. The variance propagation algorithm
is then equivalent with the perturbation algorithm. Without loss of generality, this
equivalence will be proven below for the simple case of a random variable ini-
tial condition and thermal conductivity. This fact can be exploited advantageously,
as the perturbation algorithm involves only the solution of vector differential
equations.
Proof
variable parameters starts with a system of differential equations which describe the
sensitivity of the nodal temperature vector with respect to the random parameters.
For the case of a random variable initial condition and thermal conductivity, the
following system is obtained [22]
C K fddt
u u+ = (12.88)
Cddt k k k
∂∂
∂∂
∂∂
uK
u K⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟+ = − (12.89)
Cddt T T
∂∂
∂∂
uK
u
0 0
0⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟
+ = (12.90)
subject to the initial conditions
∂∂
∂∂
u
u
k
T
=
=
0
11 10
[ ]� T
TABLE 12.2Variance Propagation Algorithm
Step 1 Compute u from Equation 12.73 with initial condition (Equation 12.80)
Step 2 Solve the Lyapunov matrix Equation 12.84 through Equation 12.86
Step 3 Compute V V Vu x u x u x u u, , , ,, , ,T h Q V k∞V and ,ρc
from Equation 12.75 through Equation 12.79
Step 4 Compute Vu,u (t) by solving the Lyapunov matrix differential Equation 12.74
55534_C012.indd 32555534_C012.indd 325 10/22/08 12:03:15 PM10/22/08 12:03:15 PM
can be calculated by means of the first order perturbation algorithm which was
The first order perturbation algorithm for heat conduction problems with random
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
326 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
The covariance matrix is then calculated from
Vu u u u
uu, =⎛⎝⎜⎜⎜
⎞⎠⎟⎟⎟ +
⎛
⎝⎜⎜
∂∂
∂∂
σ ∂∂
∂∂k k T
T
k2
0 0T ⎜⎜⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟
T
σT0
2 (12.91)
Differentiation of Equation 12.91 with respect to time yields
ddt
ddt k k
kVu u
u u, =⎛⎝⎜⎜⎜
⎞⎠⎟⎟⎟⎛⎝⎜⎜⎜
⎞⎠⎟⎟⎟
∂∂
∂∂
σT
22 +⎛⎝⎜⎜⎜
⎞⎠⎟⎟⎟
⎛⎝⎜⎜⎜
⎞⎠⎟⎟⎟ +
∂∂
∂∂
σ ∂u uk
ddt k
ddt
T
k2 uu u
u
∂∂∂
∂∂
T0
⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟
+
T
T
T
T0
2
0
0σ
⎛⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟
⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟
ddt T
T
T∂∂
σu
0
20
(12.92)
Further, Equation 12.89 and Equation 12.90 can be rearranged as
ddt k k k
∂∂
∂∂
∂∂
∂uC K
uC K
uC
⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟= − − −− − −1 1 1 KK
u∂k
(12.93)
ddt T T
∂∂
∂∂
uC K
u
0
1
0
⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟
= − − (12.94)
Substitution of Equation 12.93 and Equation 12.94 in Equation 12.92 results in
ddt k k k
Vu K
uu
u u,1= − +⎛⎝⎜⎜⎜
⎞⎠⎟⎟⎟⎛⎝⎜⎜⎜
−C K∂∂
∂∂
∂∂
⎞⎞⎠⎟⎟⎟ − +
⎛⎝⎜⎜⎜
⎞⎠⎟⎟⎟
−
T
k kk k k
σ ∂∂
∂∂
∂∂
σ2 u u KuK C−T 2
CC K− ⎛
⎝⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟ −
⎛1 ∂
∂∂∂
σ ∂∂
∂∂
u u u uT T T T
T
T0 0
2
0 00 ⎝⎝
⎜⎜⎜⎞
⎠⎟⎟⎟⎟
−T
TKT TC σ0
2 (12.95)
u( )k,T0 around u
u uu u
≅ + +∂∂
Δ ∂∂
Δk
TkT0
0 (12.96)
55534_C012.indd 32655534_C012.indd 326 10/22/08 12:03:16 PM10/22/08 12:03:16 PM
The perturbation algorithm is based on the following first order Taylor expansion of
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Stochastic Finite Element Analysis of Thermal Food Processess 327
where
Δ = −
Δ = −
k k k
T T T0 0 0
From Equation 12.96 it follows that
V u u
uu k kk k
k, [( )( )]= − − =ε ∂∂
σ2 (12.97)
V u uu
u,T TTT0 00 0
0
2= − − =ε[( )( )] ∂∂
σT (12.98)
After substitution of Equation 12.91, Equation 12.97 and Equation 12.98 in Equation
12.95 the following Equation is obtained
ddt k
kTV C V
KuV Vu,u u,u u,= − +
⎛⎝⎜⎜⎜
⎞⎠⎟⎟⎟−−1 K K
∂∂ u, uu
KV C+
⎛⎝⎜⎜⎜
⎞⎠⎟⎟⎟
−∂∂k
Tu u,k
TT (12.99)
Further, right multiplication of Equation 12.93 by σk2 and using Equation 12.97
gives
ddt k
k k kV C V CK
u, u= − −− −1 1 2K ,
∂∂
σu (12.100)
Equation 12.99 and Equation 12.100 are equivalent to Equation 12.74 and Equation
12.5.4 DERIVATIVES OF C, K AND F WITH RESPECT TO RANDOM PARAMETERS
The derivatives of C, K and f with respect to the random parameters can be com-
puted by differentiation of the element matrices and subsequent incorporation in the
global derivative matrices. The following expressions are easily derived from Equa-
tion 12.7 through Equation 12.9.
55534_C012.indd 32755534_C012.indd 327 10/22/08 12:03:17 PM10/22/08 12:03:17 PM
12.78 for the given stochastic specifications. This concludes the proof.
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
328 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
∂∂
=
∂∂
=
∂∂
=
∫
∫
CC
jj j
V
jj j
V
jj j
T
j
T
j
dV
kdV
h
ρφφ φφ
φφ φφ
KB B
K TT
j
j
j
dS
hT dS
Th dS
Q
S
jj
S
jj
S
j
∫
∫
∫
∂∂
=
∂∂
=
∂∂
=
f
f
f
∞
∞
φφ
φφ
φφφφ j
V
dVj
∫
12.6 NUMERICAL SOLUTION OF LYAPUNOV AND SYLVESTER DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS
12.6.1 ALGEBRAIC LYAPUNOV AND SYLVESTER EQUATIONS
The variance propagation algorithm requires the numerical solution of Sylvester
matrix differential equations of the form
d
dtt t t t t tV( ) A( )V( ) V( )B( ) C( )= + + (12.101)
where A, B and C are real matrices of dimensions r × r, s × s, and r × s, respectively,
so that V is of dimension r × s. If B = AT and r × s, the Sylvester differential Equation
12.101 reduces to a Lyapunov equation.
As with vector differential equations, implicit as well as explicit methods can
explicit algorithm is obtained by substitution of the differential operator in Equation
V(t + Δt) = [I + ΔtA(t)]V(t) + ΔtV(t) B(t) + ΔtC(t) (12.102)
The algorithm involves matrix multiplication and addition and is particularly simple
to implement. However, as in the case of ordinary differential equations, it will be
shown later that the algorithm is only conditionally stable provided that a suitable
time step has been chosen.
55534_C012.indd 32855534_C012.indd 328 10/22/08 12:03:18 PM10/22/08 12:03:18 PM
be applied for the numerical solution of matrix differential equations. A first order
12.101 by a first order forward difference operator:
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Stochastic Finite Element Analysis of Thermal Food Processess 329
An unconditionally stable implicit algorithm is obtained by substitution of the dif-
1
2
1
2I A V( ) V( ) I− +
⎡
⎣⎢⎢
⎤
⎦⎥⎥
+ + + −Δ Δ Δ Δt t t t t t t t( ) ΔtBB( )
V( ) C( )
t t
t t t t
+⎡
⎣⎢⎢
⎤
⎦⎥⎥
= + +
Δ
Δ Δ (12.103)
where the equality V V V= +12
12
is used. Equation 12.103 can be written as
DX + XE = F (12.104)
with
D I A( )
E I B( )
= − +⎡
⎣⎢⎢
⎤
⎦⎥⎥
= − +⎡
⎣⎢⎢
⎤
1
2
1
2
Δ Δ
Δ Δ
t t t
t t t⎦⎦⎥⎥
= + +
= +
F V( ) C ( )
X V( )
t t t t
t t
Δ Δ
Δ
An equation of the form Equation 12.104 is called an algebraic Sylvester equation
and is solved as follows [39].
First, D is reduced to lower real Schur form D′ by an orthogonal similarity trans-
formation U:
′ = =
′′ ′
′ ′ ′
D U DU
D
D D
D D
T
r r
1 1
2 1 2 2
1 2
0 0
0
,
, ,
, ,
�
�
� � �
� DDr r,
⎡
⎣
⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢
⎤
⎦
⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥
where the diagonal submatrices ′Di i, are of order at most two and UUT = I.
Similarly, E is reduced to upper real Schur form E′ by an orthogonal similarity
transformation U′:
′ = ′ ′ =
′ ′ ′′ ′
E E
E E E
E EU UT
s
s
1,1 1,1 1,
2,2 2,
�
�
� � �
0
0 0 �� ′
⎡
⎣
⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢
⎤
⎦
⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥Es s,
55534_C012.indd 32955534_C012.indd 329 10/22/08 12:03:18 PM10/22/08 12:03:18 PM
ferential operator in Equation 12.101 by a first order backward difference operator:
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
330 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
where again ′Ei i, is of order at most two. Substitution of D and E in Equation 12.104
by UD′UT and, respectively, premultiplication by UT and postmultiplication by U′ yields the following system:
D′X′ + X′E′ = F′ (12.105)
with
F′ = UT FU′ (12.106)
X′ = UT XU′ (12.107)
The advantage of the transformation of Equation 12.104 to Equation 12.105, is that
the latter equation can be written as a system of mutual uncoupled algebraic matrix
equations of order at most two. These are equivalent to an ordinary algebraic system
of at most four equations which can be solved using appropriate techniques (e.g.,
variants of the method of Gauss). The solution must then of course be backtrans-
formed using Equation 12.107.
Other algorithms of the Runge Kutta and BDF type of order 1–6 for the solution
of Lyapunov equations are described by Scheerlinck et al. [40].
12.6.2 CONVERGENCE AND STABILITY ANALYSIS
A convergence and stability analysis of the explicit and implicit Euler methods for
the solution of Lyapunov matrix differential equations is now presented for a sto-
chastic heat conduction problem with random variable initial temperature and ran-
dom process ambient temperature. Although this is a very simple case, it allows the
investigation of some interesting features of the algorithms. A more comprehensive
stability and convergence analysis for stochastic heat conduction problems with ran-
dom process ambient and initial temperature is described elsewhere [41].
From Equation 12.74 it follows that the variance propagation algorithm for linear
lowing Lyapunov equation:
ddt
V AV V A( ) ( ) ( )t t t= + T (12.108)
V(t) = V0 at t = 0 (12.109)
with
A = −C K−1
A and V are square matrices of dimension nnod × nnod. Note that A is constant if
subject to the initial condition (Equation 12.109), can be solved numerically using
the explicit or implicit Euler method as outlined above. These methods are subcases
of the more general class of linear multistep methods which are among the most
55534_C012.indd 33055534_C012.indd 330 10/22/08 12:03:19 PM10/22/08 12:03:19 PM
heat conduction problems with random field initial temperature is given by the fol-
the surface heat transfer coefficient does not change over time. Equation 12.108,
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Stochastic Finite Element Analysis of Thermal Food Processess 331
popular methods for the solution of differential equations. The convergence and
stability theory of linear multistep methods is well established for scalar and vec-
tor differential equations [42,43] and can readily be extended to matrix differential
equations.
For future use a general expression for the exact solution of Equation 12.108 is
now derived. Assume that A has nnod distinct eigenvalues. A can than be written as
A = H Λ H−1 (12.110)
where H is the matrix of eigenvectors and Λ the diagonal matrix of eigenvalues. Note
that if there are eigenvalues with multiplicity larger than one, A can no longer be
diagonalized. The analysis can then be based on the Jordan canonical form, but this
is not elaborated further here. Substitution of Equation 12.110 in Equation 12.108,
premultiplication with H−1, and postmultiplication with H−T yields the following
matrix differential equation
d
dtW W WA= +Λ (12.111)
where
W H VH� − −1 T (12.112)
Since Equation 12.111 is completely uncoupled, it can be derived that its solution is
given by
Wi, j = ci, j exp [(λi + λj)t] (12.113)
where the ci, j are the integration constants which can be determined by imposing the
initial condition
W0 = H−1V0H−1,
with λi, λj the eigenvalues of A, i, j = 1, … , nnod
The general multistep matrix method is now introduced. For this purpose,
assume the following matrix differential equation:
d
dtt tV F V( ) ( , )=
with an appropriate initial value. A general linear multistep matrix method of order
α βl
l
k
n l l
l
k
n lt t=
+
=
+∑ ∑′ = ′0 0
V F( ) ( )Δ t (12.114)
55534_C012.indd 33155534_C012.indd 331 10/22/08 12:03:20 PM10/22/08 12:03:20 PM
k is defined as
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
332 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
where tn + l = (n + l)Δ t; V’(tn + l ) is the approximation of V(tn + l ); F’(tn + l ) = F(tn + l, V’tn + l );
l l
1 1
initial sequence V’(tj), j = 0, k − 1 must be provided for the algorithm to start.
Application of Equation 12.114 to the Lyapunov Equation 12.108 gives
α βl l
l
k
n l n l n lt t t=
+ + +∑ ′ = ′ + ′⎡⎣⎢
0
V AV V A( ) ( ) ( )Δ t T ⎤⎤⎦⎥
=∑
l 0
κ
(12.115)
An obvious property to be met by the general linear matrix method is that, in the
limit Δt → 0, the approximate solution V’(tn), n = 1,…, N = tf/Δt, converges to the
f f
same time n → ∞. This can be stated more precisely as follows:
be convergent if
tntfixed
lim ( ) ( )Δ →
′0V Vt tn n= (12.116)
holds for all n and for all starting values V′(tl) for which
lim ( ) (t ), 0, –1Δt→
= =0
′V Vt kl l l (12.117)
The conditions for convergence of the linear matrix multistep method are summa-
rized in the following theorem.
it is consistent
α αl
l
k
l
l
k
l
l
k
l= == = =
∑ ∑ ∑0
0 0 0
; β (12.118)
and zero-stable, which means that no root ξi of the characteristic polynomial
α ξll
k
il
=∑ =
0
0 (12.119)
is larger than one in modulus, and every root with modulus 1 is simple
Proof Let V′i be the i-th column of V′. Equation 12.115 can be rearranged as
α Δl
l
k
n l l
l
k
n lt t=
+
=
+∑ ∑′ = ′0 0
V A* *( ) ( )β t (12.120)
55534_C012.indd 33255534_C012.indd 332 10/22/08 12:03:21 PM10/22/08 12:03:21 PM
and α and β are the coefficients of the method. For both the explicit and the implicit
Euler method k = 1. The values of the coefficients α and β are given in Table 12.3. An
exact solution V(t), t ∈[0,t ]. The time final t is hereby kept constant, so that at the
Definition 1 The linear multistep method defined by Equation 12.115 is said to
Theorem 1 The method defined by Equation 12.115 is convergent if and only if
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Stochastic Finite Element Analysis of Thermal Food Processess 333
where
′ =
′
′
⎡
⎣
⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢
⎤
⎦
⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥
V
V
V
*
nnod
1
� (12.121)
′ =
′+ ′
′ + ′
=∑A
AV V A
AV V A
*
1 11
i ii
n
n i n i
,
nod
nod nod,
�
ii
n
=∑
⎡
⎣
⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢
⎤
⎦
⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥
1
nod
(12.122)
Equation 12.120 is a linear multistep vector algorithm. From Lambert [43], it follows
that under the conditions in Equation 12.118 and Equation 12.119
t
n n
n
tt t
fixed
* *lim ( ) ( )Δ →
′ =0V V (12.123)
for all tn, n = 1,2,…, provided that the initial sequence is chosen such that
lim ( ) ( )Δt
l lt t l … k→
∗ ∗= ′ , = , , −0
0 1V V (12.124)
Equation 12.123 and Equation 12.124 are obviously equivalent to Equation 12.116
and Equation 12.117 so that the theorem is proven.
Where Theorem 143 deals with the behavior of the approximate solution V′ if
local errors are accumulating in an adverse fashion. This is the subject of the linear
stability theory [43]. Before proceeding further, the following lemma is proven.
Lemma 1 The eigenvalues of A = − −C K1 are real and negative
Ax x x= − =−C K1 λ
Left multiplication of both sides by xTC yields
−x x xT Kx = TC λ
x (real or imaginary) and thus also if x is an eigenvector
x xT K > 0 (12.125)
55534_C012.indd 33355534_C012.indd 333 10/22/08 12:03:22 PM10/22/08 12:03:22 PM
Δt tends to zero, it is also interesting to investigate whether for a fixed time step the
Proof Let λ and x be an eigenvalue–eigenvector pair of A. Then, by definition,
Since K and C are both positive definite, the following relations hold for any vector
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
334 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
x xTC > 0 (12.126)
and both expressions are real scalars. As a consequence, λ must be real and negative.
By repeating the above derivation for each eigenvalue–eigenvector pair of A, the
proof is completed.
Using Lemma 1 it follows from Equation 12.112 and Equation 12.113 that, for
t → ∞, all solutions V(t) of Equation 12.108 satisfy
||V(t)|| → 0
be absolutely stable if, for a given Δt, the approximate solution V′(tn) of Equation
||V ′(tn)|| → 0 (12.127)
if n → ∞
The conditions for absolute stability of the linear multistep matrix method (Equation
12.115) are given by the following theorem
Theorem 2 Let A have nnod distinct eigenvalues. The linear multistep method (12.115) is absolutely stable if and only if the roots of the polynomial
l
k
l l i jlt p
=∑ − +
0
[ ( )]α β λ λΔ
are less then one in modulus for all i and j.
Proof Since A has by assumption nnod distinct eigenvalues λi, i = 1,…, nnod, the
eigendecomposition (Equation 12.110) exists. After premultiplication of by H−1 and
postmultiplication by H–T, the following equation is obtained from Equation 12.115
l
k
ll n lt t
=
⎛
⎝
⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠
⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟+∑ − Λ ′
02
α βΔ W ( )) ( )+ ′ − Λ+
⎛
⎝
⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠
⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟W t tn l
ll
α β2
Δ⎡⎡
⎣
⎢⎢⎢⎢⎢
⎤
⎦
⎥⎥⎥⎥⎥= 0 (12.128)
′ ′W H� − −1VV H T (12.129)
Equation 12.128 represents an uncoupled set of nnod × nnod equations:
l
kl
l i i j nt W t=
⎛
⎝
⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠
⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟ , +∑ − ′0
2
α β λΔ ( lll
l j i j n lt W t) (+ − ′⎛
⎝
⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜⎜
⎞
⎠
⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟⎟ , +α β λ2
Δ )))⎡
⎣⎢⎢
⎤
⎦⎥⎥= 0
55534_C012.indd 33455534_C012.indd 334 10/22/08 12:03:23 PM10/22/08 12:03:23 PM
The following stability definition is now stated.
Definition 2 The linear multistep matrix method (Equation 12.115) is said to
12.108 satisfies
with W′ defined by
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Stochastic Finite Element Analysis of Thermal Food Processess 335
or
l
k
l l i j i j n lt W t i j=
+∑ − + ′⎡⎣⎢
⎤⎦⎥ = =
0
0α β λ λΔ ( ) ( ), , , 11, ,… nnod (12.130)
By Equation 12.129, ||V′|| → 0 as n → ∞, if and only if || W′|| → 0 as n → ∞, and
i,j n
12.130 satisfy
|W′i,j (tn)| → 0 if n → ∞, i,j = 1,nnod (12.131)
The solutions of each of the difference equations in Equation 12.130 are given by
i j n
l
k
i j l i j ln
W t c p,
=
, , , ,′ =∑( )
1
(12.132)
where ci,j,l i,j,l, l = 1,…, k are the roots of the
polynomial
l
k
l l i jlt p
=∑ − +
0
[ ( )]α β λ λΔ (12.133)
pi,j,l satisfy
|pi,j,l | < 1
for all i, j and l. This concludes the proof.
Both the implicit and explicit Euler methods are of order k=1, so that the single
root of Equation 12.133 is equal to
pt
ti j
i j
= −− +− +
α β λ λα β λ λ
0 0
1 1
ΔΔ
( )
( )
Substitution of α1 and β1 with the values given in Table 12.3 results in the following
conditions:
Explicit: |1 + Δt(λi + λj)| < 1 (12.134)
Implicit:− +
<1
11
Δt i j( )λ λ (12.135)
for all i and j. Using Lemma 1, the following conclusions regarding the stability of
the implicit and explicit Euler method can be drawn. From Equation 12.135 it follows
55534_C012.indd 33555534_C012.indd 335 10/22/08 12:03:25 PM10/22/08 12:03:25 PM
hence Equation 12.127 is satisfied if and only if all solutions W′ (t ) of Equation
are arbitrary coefficients, and p
Clearly, Equation 12.131 and consequently Equation 12.127 are satisfied if the roots
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
336 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
the eigenvalues are negative and real. On the other hand, the explicit Euler method
will only be stable if and only if the following condition is met:
−2 < Δt(λi + λj) < 0
since the eigenvalues are negative and real. In this case Δt cannot be chosen freely.
12.7 APPLICATION TO THERMAL STERILIZATION PROCESSES
In order to illustrate the above algorithms, we will now analyze a typical thermal
food process with a random variable ambient temperature. The problem consists of a
0
content tomato concentrate with k = 0.542 W/m°C, ρc = 3.89106 J/m3°C. The follow-
ing process conditions were applied: T0 = 65°C, h = 100 W/m2°C. The ambient tem-
perature is now described by means of an AR(1) process with T T∞= =∞
125 1o oC C, σ
and a1 = 0.00277 s–1
region [0,r0] × [0,L/2] is subdivided in 100 axisymmetric linear quadrilateral ele-
ments. The time step is set equal to 36 s.
The Monte Carlo and variance propagation algorithms were programmed on top
In Figure 12.7 the temperature variance at three different positions in the center-
plane of the can are shown as calculated by means of the Monte Carlo method with
100 and 1000 runs, and the variance propagation algorithm. The agreement between
the Monte Carlo method with 1000 runs and the variance propagation algorithm is
good, but the Monte Carlo method with 100 runs is not very accurate. For the mean
shown). The relative CPU time (total CPU time divided by CPU time for determin-
istic simulation) was equal to 74, 242 and 2426, for the variance propagation, Monte
Carlo with 100 runs and Monte Carlo with 1000 runs, respectively.
12.8 CONCLUSIONS
In this chapter some algorithms for stochastic heat transfer analysis are outlined. In
the Monte Carlo method a large number of process samples is obtained by solving
TABLE 12.3
for the Explicit and Implicit Euler Method
Explicit Implicit
α0 −1 −1
α11 1
β01 0
β10 1
55534_C012.indd 33655534_C012.indd 336 10/22/08 12:03:25 PM10/22/08 12:03:25 PM
Coefficients of the Linear Multistep Method
that the stability conditions for the implicit Euler method will always be satisfied as
cylindrical container (radius r =3.41 cm, height L= 10.02 cm) filled with 30% solids
. An implicit Euler finite difference method in the time domain
was used to integrate the differential systems. For the finite element analysis the
of the existing finite element code DOT [44].
value an excellent agreement between the different method was observed (figure not
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Stochastic Finite Element Analysis of Thermal Food Processess 337
forward statistical analysis of the simulation results yields the mean values and vari-
ances of the temperature. The variance propagation algorithm is based on stochastic
systems theory and was originally developed for systems of ordinary differential
equations. The formalism is here applied to the spatially discretized heat conduc-
tion equation to yield a system of matrix differential equations which can be solved
numerically.
The Monte Carlo method in general requires a large amount of computer time
to obtain results with an acceptable accuracy. Also, it requires a complete stochastic
only the mean values of the parameters and their covariance matrices must be known.
However, the latter algorithm can provide only limited statistical information such
as the mean value and the variance, whereas the Monte Carlo method can also be
applied to derive other statistical characteristics such as the probability density func-
tion. Also, as the variance propagation algorithm are essentially based on a lineariza-
tion of the governing equations around their mean solution, they are only applicable
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
The European Communities (FAIR project FAIR–CT96-1192) and the Flemish Min-
NOMENCLATURE
i
c Heat capacity
C Finite element capacity matrix
ε Mean value operator
f Probability density function
f Finite element thermal load vector
g Vector valued function
FIGURE 12.7 Temperature variance as a function of time in a heated A1-can with random
process ambient temperature at three different positions. −: Variance propagation algorithm;
∗: Monte Carlo with 100 runs; +: Monte Carlo with 1000 runs.
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0.0
0 900 1800 2700 3600
Time (s)
r = 0.0 cm
r = 1.71 cm
r = 3.41 cm
Tem
per
ature
var
iance
(°C
2)
55534_C012.indd 33755534_C012.indd 337 10/22/08 12:03:26 PM10/22/08 12:03:26 PM
the heat transfer model for artificially generated random parameter samples. Straight-
specification of the random parameters, while for the variance propagation algorithm
if the variability is relatively small (coefficient of variation smaller than 0.2).
ister of Science and Technology are gratefully acknowledged for financial support.
a Coefficient of autoregressive process or wave
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
338 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
h 2
h Vector valued function
k Thermal conductivity (W/m°C)
K Finite element stiffness matrix
L Half-height of can
n Outward normal
nnod Number of nodes
nMC Number of Monte Carlo runs
0 Zero matrix
r0 Radius (m)
S Surface
t Time (s)
T Temperature (°C)
T0 Initial temperature (°C)
T∞ Retort temperature (°C)
u Nodal temperature vector
V Covariance function, volume
V Covariance matrix
W White noise process
X Random vector
Y Auxiliary random process/wave
z Position vector
Z Discrete time white noise process
Δt Time step
Γ Convection surface
ρ Density (kg/m3)
σ Standard deviation
τ Separation time
REFERENCES
1. A.A. Teixeira, J.R. Dixon, J.W. Zahradnik, and G.E. Zinsmeister. 1969. Computer opti-
mization of nutrient retention in thermal processing of conduction-heated foods. Food Technology, 23(6): 137–40. Cited by Teixeira et al. (1989).
processing of foods. Journal of Food Science, 48: 1086–93.
3. A.K. Datta and A.A. Teixeira. 1987. Numerical modeling of natural convection heating
in canned liquid foods. Transactions of the ASAE, 30(5): 1542–51.
4. A.K. Datta and A.A. Teixeira. 1988. Numerically predicted transient temperature and
Food Science, 53(1): 191–95.
5. D. Naveh. 1982. Analysis of transient conduction heat transfer in the thermal process-
USA, September.
6. A.K. Datta, A.A. Teixeira, and J.E. Manson. 1986. Computer-based control logic of
on-line correction of process deviations. Journal of Food Science, 51: 480–83.
7. J.R. Banga, J.M. Perez-Martin, J.M. Gallardo, and J.J. Casares. 1991. Optimization of
the thermal processing of conduction-heated canned foods: Study of several objective
functions. Journal of Food Engineering, 14: 25–51.
55534_C012.indd 33855534_C012.indd 338 10/22/08 12:03:27 PM10/22/08 12:03:27 PM
Surface heat transfer coefficient (W/m °C)
velocity profiles during natural convection heating of canned liquid foods. Journal of
ing of foods using the finite element method. PhD thesis, University of Minnesota,
2. D. Naveh, I.J. Kopelman, and I.J. Pflug. 1983. The finite element method in thermal
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
Stochastic Finite Element Analysis of Thermal Food Processess 339
8. C. Silva, M. Hendrickx, F. Oliveira, and P. Tobback. 1992. Critical evaluation of com-
monly used objective functions to optimize overall quality and nutrient retention of
heat-preserved foods. Journal of Food Engineering, 17: 241–58.
9. B.M. Nicolaï, N. Scheerlinck, P. Verboven, and J. De Baerdemaeker. 2000. Stochastic
actions of the ASAE. 43: 131–138.
10. H. Patino and J.R. Heil. 1985. A statistical approach to error analysis in thermal process
calculations. Journal of Food Science, 50: 1110–14.
11. H.F. Meffert. 1983. Story, aims, results and future of thermophysical properties work
within COST-90. In R. Jowitt, F. Escher, B. Hallstrom, H. Meffert, W. Spiess, and G. Vos,
editors, Physical Properties of Foods, 229–67. London: Applied Science Publishers.
12. M. Sheard and C. Rodger. 1993. Optimum heat treatments for “sous vide” cook-chill
products. In T. Martens and M. Schellekens, editors, Proceedings of the First European “Sous Vide” Cooking Symposium, 118–26. Leuven, Belgium, August. ALMA Univer-
siteitsrestaurants v.z.w. Lecture Notes for the CISM Course on Stochastic Methods in
Structural Mechanics.
sis, Agricultural Engineering Department, Katholieke Universiteit Leuven, Belgium,
March.
14. T. Ohlsson. 1994. Progress in pasteurization and sterilization. In T. Yano, R. Matsuno,
and K. Nakamura, editors, Developments in Food Engineering, 18–23. London: Glas-
gow, Weinheim. Blackie Academic & Professional. Proceedings of the 6th Interna-
tional Congress on Engineering and Food, Chiba, Japan, May 1993.
15. H. Ramaswamy, S. Campbell, and C. Passey. 1991. Temperature distribution in a stand-
ard 1-basket water-cascade retort. Canadian Institute of Food Science and Technology Journal, 24: 19–26.
Thermal Processes in Terms of Food Safety. PhD thesis, Katholieke Universiteit Leu-
ven, Leuven, Belgium, October.
intervals for calculated lethality and mass-average retention of conduction-heating,
canned foods. Journal of Food Science, 42(4): 1002–7.
18. M.K. Lenz and D.B. Lund. 1978. The lethality-Fourier number method. Heating rate
tainers. Journal of Food Process Engineering, 2: 227–71.
19. D.B. Lund. 1978. Statistical analysis of thermal process calculations. Food Technology,
32(3): 76–78.
20. K. Hayakawa, P. De Massaguer, and R. Trout. 1988. Statistical variability of thermal
process lethality in conduction heating food – computerized simulation. Journal of Food Science, 53(6): 1887–93.
21. J. Wang, R.R. Wolfe, and K. Hayakawa. 1991. Thermal process lethality variability in
conduction-heated foods. Journal of Food Science, 56: 1424–28.
22. B.M. Nicolaï and J. De Baerdemaeker. 1997. Finite element perturbation analysis of
nal of Numerical Methods for Heat and Fluid Flow, 7(5): 525–44.
23. B.M. Nicolaï and J. De Baerdemaeker. 1992. Simulation of heat transfer in foods with sto-
chastic initial and boundary conditions. Transactions of the IChemE Part C, 70: 78–82.
24. B.M. Nicolaï and J. De Baerdemaeker. 1999. A variance propagation algorithm for the
computation of heat conduction under stochastic conditions. International Journal for Heat and Mass Transfer, 42: 1513–20.
25. B.M. Nicolaï, P. Verboven, N. Scheerlinck, and J. De Baerdemaeker. 1999. Numerical
thermal food processes. Journal of Food Engineering, 38: 259–78.
55534_C012.indd 33955534_C012.indd 339 10/22/08 12:03:28 PM10/22/08 12:03:28 PM
perturbation analysis of thermal food processes. with random field parameters. Trans-
16. A. Van Loey. 1996. Enzymic Time Temperature Integrators for the Quantification of
17. M.K. Lenz and D.B. Lund. 1977. The lethality-Fourier number method: Confidence
variations and lethality confidence intervals for forced-convection heated foods in con-
nonlinear heat conduction problems with random field parameters. International Jour-
13. T. Martens. 1980. Mathematical model of heat processing in flat containers. PhD the-
analysis of the propagation of random parameter fluctuations in time and space during
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC
340 Food Processing Operations Modeling: Design and Analysis
26. L. Segerlind. 1984. Applied Finite Element Analysis. 2nd ed. New York: John Wiley
and Sons.
27. H. Jiang, D.R. Thompson, and R.V. Morey. 1987. Finite element model of temperature
distribution in broccoli stalks during forced-air precooling. Transactions of the ASAE,
30(5): 1473–77.
in fresh tomatoes during cooling. Transactions of the ASAE, 34(3): 972–76.
29. E. Vanmarcke. 1983. Random Fields — Analysis and Synthesis. Cambridge, MA: The
MIT Press.
30. R.M. Gray and L.D. 1986. Davisson. Random Processes — A Mathematical Approach for Engineers. Prentice-Hall Information and System Sciences Series. Englewood
Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall.
31. W.L. Brogan. 1985. Modern Control Theory. 2nd ed. Englewood Cliffs, USA: Prentice-
Hall, Inc.
32. R.Y. Rubinstein. 1981. Simulation and the Monte Carlo Method. New York, Chichester,
Brisbane: John Wiley and Sons.
33. M.R. Spiegel. 1980. Theory and Problems of Probability and Statistics. Schaum’s Out-
line Series. New York, St. Louis, San Francisco: McGraw-Hill.
34. W.H. Press, S.A. Teukolsky, W.T. Vetterling, and B.P. Flannery. 1995. Numerical Reci-pes in C. 2nd ed. Cambridge, New York, Melbourne: Cambridge University Press.
35. G.E. Box and M.E. Muller. 1958. A note on the generation of random numbers. Annals of Mathematical Statistics, 29: 610–11.
36. J.L. Melsa and A.P. Sage. 1973. An Introduction to Probability and Stochastic Proc-esses. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall.
37. B.M. Nicolaï. 1994. Modeling and Uncertainty Propagation Analysis of Thermal Food Processes. PhD thesis, K.U. Leuven, Leuven, Belgium.
38. F.P. Incropera and D. De Witt. 1990. Fundamentals of Heat and Mass Transfer. 3th ed.
New York, Chichester, Brisbane: John Wiley and Sons.
39. R.H. Bartels and G.W. 1972. Steward. Solution of the matrix equation AX + XB = C.
Communications of the ACM, 15(9): 820–26.
40. N. Scheerlinck, P. Verboven, J. De Baerdemaeker, and B.M. Nicolaï. 1998. A variance
propagation algorithm for stochastic heat and mass transfer problems in food proc-
esses. St. Joseph, MI, USA. ASAE. ASAE paper no. 983176. Presented at the 1998
ASAE Annual International Meeting, Orlando, USA, 12–16 June.
41. N. Scheerlinck, P. Verboven, J. De Baerdemaeker, and B.M. Nicolaï. 1998. Numeri-
ment conductive heat transfer problems. St. Joseph, MI, USA. ASAE. ASAE paper no.
983163. Presented at the 1998 ASAE Annual International Meeting, Orlando, USA,
12–16 July.
42. K.E. Atkinson. 1989. An Introduction to Numerical Analysis. 2nd ed. New York,
Chichester, Brisbane: John Wiley and Sons.
43. J.D. Lambert. 1991. Numerical Methods for Ordinary Differential Systems. New York,
Brisbane: John Wiley and Sons, Chichester.
44. R.M. Polivka and E.L. Wilson. 1976. Finite element analysis of nonlinear heat transfer
problems - DOT user’s manual. Technical Report UC SESM 76-2, Berkeley, USA.
55534_C012.indd 34055534_C012.indd 340 10/22/08 12:03:29 PM10/22/08 12:03:29 PM
28. J.C. Pan and S.R. Bhowmik. 1991. The finite element analysis of transient heat transfer
cal solution of Lyapunov differential equations which appear in stochastic finite ele-
© 2009 by Taylor & Francis Group, LLC